Bizhub Pro 1050 Field Service

SERVICE MANUAL Field Service

2004.10
Ver. 1.0
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS


Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to
the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while ser-
vicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-
quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electri-
cal aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such
modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the
reasoning behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
2. POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In
that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or
power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection AC230V
to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current,
and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity,
and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
AC208V 240V
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropri-
ate for the product's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inade-
quate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result
in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug
according to the following order:
• Black or Brown: L (line)
• White or Light Blue: N (neutral)
• Green/Yellow: PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results
in fire or electric shock.
S-3
3. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety stan-
dards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electri-
cal equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE
must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
?V
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as
the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power kw
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or
electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact quali-
fied electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater
than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer elec-
tric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product,
make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture prop-
erly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord or cord set (with plug and connector on each end) specified by
KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can
flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may
result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Place
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that
may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not using product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays,
dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful
to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
S-6
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to
a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following
the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break
and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs
from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still
powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the product Powered
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation
check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
S-7
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into
the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a

laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the
write unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether
the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumable
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken
not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact
with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-9
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent rem-
nants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-10
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined
within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user
operation.
S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
For metric area:
This product employs a Class

3B Laser Diode that emits an
invisible laser beam. The cover
should not be opened when
the power is turned on.
This area generates high votage. Be

careful not to touch here when the
power is turned on to avoid getting an
electric shock.
1050sa001e
S-12
For inch area:

invisible laser beam. The cover
should not be opened when
the power is turned on.
This area generates high votage. Be

careful not to touch here when the
power is turned on to avoid getting an
electric shock.
1050sa050e
S-13

invisible laser beam. The
cover should not be opened
when the power is turned on.
1050sa002e
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also, when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and
cannot be seen clearly, replace it with a new caution label.
S-14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 CONTENTS
CONTENTS
I Outline
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
II Maintenance
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii
Composition of the service manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
III Adjustment/Setting
Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xii
I OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
IV Troubleshooting
2.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2.6 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Life value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.2 Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.3 Maintenance item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1.3.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1.3.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
V Appendix
1.3.3 PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
1.3.4 FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
1.3.5 LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
1.3.6 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
1.4 Replacement parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
1.4.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
1.4.2 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
1.5 Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
1.5.1 External section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
1.5.2 Photo conductor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
1.5.3 Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
1.5.4 Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
1.5.5 Cleaning/toner recycle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
i
CONTENTS bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
1.5.6 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

1.5.7 Vertical conveyance section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
1.5.8 ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
I Outline
1.5.9 Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138

1.5.10 Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
2. SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
2.1 Service material list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
2.2 Jig list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
2.3 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
2.4 Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
2.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
II Maintenance
2.4.2 Operating environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183

2.4.3 Major functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
2.4.4 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
2.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188
2.4.6 Mail sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
3. FIRMWARE VERSION UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
3.1 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
3.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190

3.1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
3.1.3 Installation of the ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
3.1.4 Usage of the ISWTrns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
3.1.5 Error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206
3.1.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
3.2 Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
3.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
3.2.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
IV Troubleshooting
3.2.3 Major functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211

3.2.4 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
3.2.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218
3.2.6 Notes for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219
3.2.7 Internet ISW using the touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220
3.2.8 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-222
4. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224
4.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224
4.1.1 Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-224
4.1.2 CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226
V Appendix
4.1.3 Writing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227

4.1.4 Developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-228
4.1.5 Transfer/separation charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229
4.1.6 Main body (write position adjusting shaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232
4.2 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-233
4.3 Disassembling/reassembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234
4.3.1 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-234
4.3.2 Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-244
4.3.3 Writing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
4.3.4 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-255
4.3.5 Registration section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-273
4.3.6 ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275
4.3.7 HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278
ii
4.4 Commercially available parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280

4.4.1 Status indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280
4.4.2 Coin vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287
I Outline
4.5 PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
4.5.1 PCS corresponding parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
4.5.2 PCS corresponding parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
4.5.3 Procedure for reinstallation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-290
4.5.4 Periodic maintenance of the PCS corresponding parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-298
4.6 CMS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300
4.6.1 CMS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300
4.6.2 CMS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300
II Maintenance
III ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3. UTILITY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1 List of utility modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4. SERVICE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4.1.1 Start and exit service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4.2 List of service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
4.3 Machine adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
4.3.1 Tray adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
4.3.2 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4.3.3 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
4.3.4 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
IV Troubleshooting
4.3.5 Warp adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4.3.6 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4.3.7 ADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
4.3.8 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
4.4 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
4.4.1 High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
4.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
4.4.3 Drum peculiarity manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
4.4.4 User paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
4.4.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
V Appendix
4.5 Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

4.5.1 PM count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
4.5.2 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
4.5.3 Copy count of part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
4.6 Machine condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
4.6.1 I/O check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
4.7 List output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
4.7.1 List output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
4.8 Test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
4.8.1 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
4.8.2 Test pattern density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
4.8.3 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
4.9 System setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
iii
4.9.1 Software DIPSW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97

4.9.2 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
4.9.3 Serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
I Outline
4.9.4 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115

4.10 ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
4.11 CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
4.11.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
4.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system . . . . . 3-119
4.11.4 Detailed setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
4.11.5 Software DIPSW setting for CS Remote Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
II Maintenance
4.11.6 Mail address setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128

4.11.7 Modem First Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
4.11.8 Receiving the initial connection mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
4.11.9 Setup confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
4.11.10 Maintenance call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
4.11.11 Center call from manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
4.11.12 Confirm communication log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
4.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133

4.11.14 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
4.11.15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
4.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
4.13 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
4.13.1 Staple Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
4.13.2 Multi folder (hole-punch) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
4.13.3 Multi folder (Fold) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
4.13.4 Multi folder (PI) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
IV Troubleshooting
4.13.5 Stacker adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145

4.13.6 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
4.14 Machine manager setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
4.14.1 Manager authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
4.14.2 Machine manager password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
4.15 CE Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
4.15.1 CE authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
4.15.2 CE password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
4.16 IP HDD format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
5. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
V Appendix
5.1 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150

5.1.1 Tray centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
5.1.2 Separation pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151
5.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
5.1.4 Pick-up roller height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
5.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
5.1.6 Paper lift plate skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
5.2 ADU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller nip pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
6. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
6.1 Before using the adjustment for POD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
6.2 The front and back registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
6.2.1 The front and back registration (printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
iv
6.2.2 The front and back registration (scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165

6.2.3 The front and back registration (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
6.2.4 The front and back registration by user (by paper brand) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
I Outline
6.2.5 The front and back registration by user (for fine adjustments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
6.3 Image density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
6.3.1 Darken image density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
6.3.2 Lighten image density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
6.5 Overlay printing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
6.6 User setting of each paper brand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179
II Maintenance
IV TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 Jam code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
2.1 Malfunction code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
V APPENDIX
1. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
1.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
1.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
1.5 LS-501/502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
1.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
2.1 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
IV Troubleshooting
2.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
2.2.1 Connector in the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
2.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
2.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
2.5 LS-501/502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
2.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 V Appendix
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
3.1 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
3.2 DF-603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
3.3 PF-701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
3.4 FD-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
3.5 LS-501/502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
3.6 FS-503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
4.1 Main body 1/4
4.2 Main body 2/4
4.3 Main body 3/4
4.4 Main body 4/4
4.5 DF-603
v
4.6 PF-701
4.7 FD-501
4.8 LS-501/502
I Outline
4.9 FS-503
5. PAPER SETTING
5.1 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand
(U.S.A. paper)
5.2 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand
(European paper)
5.3 Conversion table of paper weight
II Maintenance
IV Troubleshooting
V Appendix
vi
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 Introduction
Introduction
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of
their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with
a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show to the left of the revised section.
A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
Note:
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2004/10 1.0 — Issue of the first edition

Service manual
Date Revision mark Descriptions of revision
Ver.
vii
Introduction bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
<Theory of Operation section>

I. OUTLINE: System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, and paper
path
II. COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system,
and explanation of the control system
This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the
object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and
the timing of operation of each part.
<Field service section>

I. OUTLINE: System configuration, and product specifications
II. MAINTENANCE: Service schedule *, maintenance steps,
list of service tools and directions for use *,
firmware version up method *,
and removal/reinstallation methods of major parts
III. ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Utility mode *, service mode *, security *, mechanical adjustment and POD
corresponding adjustment
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING *: List of jam codes, their causes, operation when a jam occurs and its release
method, and list of error codes, their causes, operation when a warning is
issued and estimated abnormal parts.
V. APPENDIX *: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing chart, overall layout
drawing
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's premise), a rough outline of
the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and
supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of the main body.
viii
Notation of the service manual
1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta bizhub PRO 1050: Main body
(3) PS-502 PostScript3 Option: PS3 Option
(4) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trade-
mark of each company.
3. Electrical parts and signals

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description

IN
PS
Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V Power to drive the solenoid
Solenoid SD DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the clutch
Clutch CL DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
ix
Introduction bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0

_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
x

DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial commu-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
nication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
xi
Measures to take in case of an accident bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
Measures to take in case of an accident
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures."
xii
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration
[4]
[3] [9]
[5]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[7]
1050to1001e
1 -1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
[1] Main body [6] Large capacity stacker (LS-501)

[2] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-701) [7] Large capacity stacker (LS-502)
I Outline
[3] Double sided original auto feeder (DF-603) [8] Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for
*1 the image controller
[4] Flat stapling finisher (FS-503) [9] Post Script Kit (PS-502)
[5] Punch and multi folding finisher (FD-501)
*1 In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided.
B. Finisher coupling formation
NOTE
• The finisher can be connected. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected to
Inch Metric
1 Main body + PF-701 LS-502 — —
2 Main body + PF-701 FD-501 FS-503 — External (FD-501)
3 Main body + PF-701 FS-503 — —
4 Main body + PF-701 LS-501 LS-501 FS-503 Inlet: (1st tandem LS-501)
Inlet: (2nd tandem LS-501)
5 Main body + PF-701 LS-501 LS-502 Inlet: (LS-501)
6 Main body + PF-701 LS-501 FS-503 Inlet: (LS-501)
NOTE
• Any coupling formation other than the above is unavailable.
1 -2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type
I Outline
Type: Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method
Original stand: Fixed
Original alignment: Left rear standard
Photosensitive material: OPC
Sensitizing method: Laser writing
Paper feed trays: Two trays (1,500 sheets x 2, 20lb, 80 gsm)
PF-701 (2,000 x 3, 80 gsm) *1
*1 The PF-701 is optional.
2.2 Functions
Original: Sheet, book, solid object
Maximum original size: A3, or 11 x 17
Copy size:
Tray /1, /2: Inch: 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, B4,
A4, B5, B5R, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide
paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
Metric:A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x
11, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to
324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper
ADU: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 5.5
x 8.5, 8.5 x 11R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper
(up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Magnification:
Fixed magnification: Inch: x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772,
x 0.647, x 0.500
Metric:x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154, x 0.866, x 0.816,
x 0.707, x 0.500
Special magnification setting: 3 types
Zoom magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Vertical magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Horizontal magnification: x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)
Warm-up time: Less than 6 min. (at temperature of 20°C, at rated voltage)
First copy out time: Less than 3.0 sec.
Continuous copy speed: 105 copies/min. (for A4/8.5 x 11)
Continuous copy count: Up to 9,999 sheets
Copy density selection: AE/AES, manual (9 steps), user density (2 steps)
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Write: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Memory: 256 MB (DRAM) + 10 GB (HDD1)
Interface section: RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C): Main body right side
Serial port (USB Type B), Parallel port: Mounted on the Image process-
ing board (IPB)
1 -3
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
No. of originals to be stored: More than 10,000 sheets

Under the following conditions:
Original: FAX#4CHART/A4
I Outline
Density: Manual 5
Mode: Text/photo
2.3 Type of paper

Plain paper *2: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, high-quality paper
Special paper *3: OHP film, label paper, *4
coated paper, 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 recycled paper,
50 g/m2 to 60 g/m2, 16lb, high-quality paper (thin),
91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2, 25lb to 72lb, high-quality paper (thick) *5
*2 Standard specified paper:
Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2),
Metric: Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2),
*3 Special paper/recommended paper:
Thick paper: Inch: HM-Cover65lb (176 g/m2), XeroxDigitalLasr65lb (176 g/m2),
DomterCdor65lb, COUGARCOVER65lb (176 g/m2)
Metric: RDEREY200 (200 g/m2), RDEREY160 (160 g/m2), NEUCOLOR-
COPY (200 g/m2), XeroxColotech (200 g/m2), Xerox3R91798
(160 g/m2)
Thin paper: Inch: Domter16lb (Doqupach16lb)
Metric: Clair Mail (60 g/m2)
Label paper: Inch: AVERY 5160
Metric: AVERY DSP24
Coated paper: Inch: KROMEKOTE PLUSLASER HIGH GROSS 183 g/m2 (Smart
Paper Company),
Futural Laser 105 g/m2 (Stora Enso Paper Company)
Metric: —
*4 Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time.
*5 245 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper is available only for the middle stage tray of the PF-701.
2.4 Maintenance
Maintenance: Once every 750,000 prints
Machine service life: 40,000,000 prints or 7 years (whichever earlier)
1 -4
2.5 Machine data

Power source: Inch: AC208V to 240V ± 10%, 60Hz
I Outline
Metric: AC230V ± 10%, 50Hz
Power consumption: Inch: Less than 3600W (full option)
Metric: Less than 3450W (full option)
Weight: 1050: Approx. 330 kg (with DF provided) / 1050P: Approx. 310 kg
Dimensions:
1050: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P: W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
1050 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503: W 2902 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm
1050P + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502: W 3292 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm
(with no operation board included in each case)
2.6 Operating environment

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH
NOTE
• The information herein May be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1 -5
I Outline
Blank page
1 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 PERIODIC CHECK
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
1.1 Life value
A. Life value of materials
Item No. of prints Driving time Definition of driving time

Drum 1,000,000 220h The time during which the drum is being driven.
II Maintenance
Idling time* is included in this time period.
Developer 1,000,000 220h The time during which the developing roller is being
driven.
Idling time* is included in this time period.
B. Life value
The life value is a value for the number of prints or a value for the drive time, whichever is earlier.
The relationship between the driving time mentioned above and the actual number of prints has certain condi-
tions. It is decided according to the amount of copy time and also idling time*. Accordingly, the number of prints
can vary substantially for the same amount of rotation time.
* Idling time: Time period during which the drum or developing roller is rotating with no image created.
Reference: Relationship between the number of prints and the drive time
220 hours drive at A4 continuous output of 11 sheets per job is equivalent to 1,000,000 prints.
2 -1
PERIODIC CHECK bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
1.2 Schedule
Guarantee period (7 years or 40,000,000 prints)
Service item x 10,000 prints No. of

xxxxxx executions
0
75
100
150
200
225
250
300
350
375
400
450
500
525
550
600
650
675
700
750
800
825
850
900
950
975
1000
3800
3825
3850
3900
3950
3975
Maintenance 1 z z z z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z z 53 times
Main body
Every 750,000 prints

Maintenance 2 z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z 39 times
Every 1,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
Maintenance 3 z z z z z xxxzxxx z 26 times

Maintenance 4 z z z z xxxzxxx z 17 times
Maintenance 5 z z z xxxzxxx 13 times
Maintenance 6 z z xxxzxxx 8 times
Maintenance 7 z xxxzxxx 6 times
Maintenance 9 xxxzxxx 2 times
Maintenance 1 z z z z z z z z z z z z xxxzxxx z z z 53 times
DF

PF

FD

LS

FS

Maintenance 2 z z z xxxzxxx 13 times
2 -2
1.3 Maintenance item
Caution:
• For cleaning of the tools used, be sure to use a vacuum cleaner appropriate for cleaning toner.
NOTE
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, see "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "1.5 Maintenance procedure."
II Maintenance
1.3.1 Main body
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 750,000 prints)
No. Unit Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials

classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Tools used
1 Preparations Image check z
2 Photo conductor Cleaning of the photo z Vacuum cleaner
section conductor section
3 Cleaning/ Toner seal board z Cleaning pad
recycle section Cleaning blade 2 z Setting powder
Blade set mode
(in service mode)
Cleaning of the inside of z Vacuum cleaner
the cleaning unit
Cleaning of the inside of z
the recycle pipe
4 Charger Cleaning of the back z Cleaning pad/drum
plate cleaner/cotton
swab/blower brush
Charger control plate 1 z
Charger wire 2 z
Charger wire vibration 2 z
proof rubber
Charger cleaning unit 2 z
C-clip 2 z
5 Developing Cleaning of the devel- z Vacuum cleaner
section oping suction section
Replacing of the suction 1 z
filter
Cleaning of the devel- z Vacuum cleaner
oping section
Reinstallation to the
photo conductor sec-
tion
6 Writing Cleaning of the dust- z Cleaning pad
section proof glass
2 -3

7 ADU Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
Cleaning of the pre- z Drum cleaner/
transfer roller cleaning pad
Cleaning of the loop z
roller
Cleaning of the ADU z
exit roller
II Maintenance

conveyance roller /2
reverse roller
reverse/exit roller
acceleration roller
Cleaning of the paper z
exit roller /1
Cleaning of the paper z
exit roller /2
Cleaning of the fusing z
exit roller
Cleaning of the convey- z
ance section
8 Registration Cleaning of the paper dust z Vacuum cleaner/
section removing brush for the blower brush
registration roller /Lw
Cleaning of the paper dust z
removing brush for the
registration roller /Up
Cleaning of the registra- z Blower brush
tion sensor section
Cleaning of each sensor z
9 Transfer/sep- Cleaning of the back z Cleaning pad/drum
aration plate cleaner/cotton
charger Cleaning of the transfer z swab/blower brush
assist sheet assembly
Discharge wire 3 z
Transfer presser rubber 3 z
2 -4

9 Transfer/sep- Transfer cleaning 1 z
aration assembly
charger Separation cleaning 1 z
assembly /1
Separation cleaning 1 z
assembly /2
C-clip 3 z
II Maintenance
10 Fusing Cleaning of the fusing z Roller cleaner/
section claw /Up cleaning pad/drum
Cleaning of the fusing z cleaner
claw /Lw
Cleaning web 1 z
Fixing cleaning web
counter reset
(in service mode)
11 Paper feed Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
12 Vertical Cleaning of the paper z Vacuum cleaner/
conveyance dust removing brush blower brush
section Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
13 Paper exit Removal of the paper
section exit section
Cleaning of the paper z Blower brush
exit sensor
Cleaning of the main z Drum cleaner/
body paper exit roller cleaning pad
14 Scanner Cleaning of the original z Blower brush/drum
section glass cleaner/cleaning
Cleaning of the slit glass z pad
15 Toner supply Cleaning of the toner z Vacuum cleaner/
section bottle insertion opening blower brush
16 Main body Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
machine internal cleaning pad
17 Final check Check of the image and z
the paper through (with
various types of adjust-
ments included)
PM counter reset z
(in service mode)
2 -5
B. Maintenance 2 (Every 1,000,000 prints)

1 Preparations Image check z
2 Photo conductor Replacing of the drum 1 z Replace it once for
section • Sensitive drum every 1,000,000
counter reset (in ser- prints or 220 h. of
vice mode) driving time, which-
ever is earlier.
II Maintenance
Cleaning of the photo z Drum cleaner/clean-

conductor section ing pad/Vacuum
cleaner
Replacing of the drum claw 3 z
3 Cleaning/ Cleaning of the clean- z Cleaning pad/
recycle section ing unit blower brush/Vac-
uum cleaner
4 Developing Cleaning of the devel- z Cleaning pad/Vac-
section oping section uum cleaner
Developer z Replace it once for
• Developer counter every 1,000,000
reset (in service prints or 200 h. of
mode) driving time, which-
ever is earlier.
5 Main body Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
6 Final check Check of the image z
and the paper through
(with various types of
adjustments included)
C. Maintenance 3 (Every 1,500,000 prints)

1 Toner supply Agitator plate assembly z Cleaning pad
section
2 Cleaning/ Cleaning of the clean- z Vacuum cleaner/
recycle section ing unit Cleaning pad
Toner guide brush 1 z
assembly
Scattering prevention 1 z
felt
Seal plate /Fr 1 z
Seal plate /Rr 1 z
2 -6

3 Transfer/ Replacing of the trans- 1 z
separation fer assist sheet assem-
charger bly
4 Fusing Fusing roller /Up 1 z
section Heat insulating sleeve 2 z
Fusing bearing /Up 2 z
Fusing roller assembly 1 z
II Maintenance
/Lw
Fusing claw /Lw 2 z
Fusing claw /Up 6 z
Fusing cleaning sheet 1 z
assembly
Cleaning of the fusing z Cleaning pad/blower
heating roller brush
D. Maintenance 4 (Every 2,250,000 prints)

1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 2 Actual replacement
z
section cycle: 500,000
Paper feed roller 2 Actual replacement
z
cycle: 500,000
Separation roller 2 Actual replacement
z
cycle: 500,000
2 -7
E. Maintenance 5 (Every 3,000,000 prints)

1 Photo conductor Replacing of the drum 1 z
section temperature sensor
2 Cleaning/ Reinstallation to the 1 z
recycle section photo conductor sec-
tion
Reinstallation of the 1 z
II Maintenance
photo conductor sec-

tion
3 Registration Registration motor z Plus guard No. 2
section shaft gear
4 Fusing Fusing heater lamp /1 1 z
section
Fusing heater lamp /2 1 z
Fusing heater lamp /3 1 z
Fusing heating roller 1 z
Heating roller bearing 2 z
Heat insulating sleeve / 2 z
Lw
Thermistor /2 1 z
Thermistor /4 1 z
5 Toner supply Toner supply sleeve /1 1 z
section Toner supply sleeve /2 1 z
F. Maintenance 6 (Every 4,500,000 prints)

1 Vertical Pre-registration clutch / 1 z Actual replacement
conveyance 1 cycle: 3,000,000
section Pre-registration clutch / 1 z Actual replacement
2 cycle: 3,000,000
Vertical conveyance 1 z Actual replacement
clutch cycle: 3,000,000
Paper dust guide brush z Actual replacement
assembly cycle: 3,000,000
2 Main body Ozone filter /A 2 z
Ozone filter /K 1 z
Conveyance suction fil- 1 z
ter
Developing suction filter 1 z
Cleaning of the cover/ z Drum cleaner/
2 -8
G. Maintenance 7 (Every 6,000,000 prints)

1 Charger Charger unit 1 z
2 Developing Developing suction 1 z
section assembly
Developing unit 1 z
3 ADU Cleaning of the ADU z Blower brush
paper reverse sensor /1
II Maintenance
paper reverse sensor /2
Paper exit roller /1 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Paper exit roller /2 1 z Actual replacement
assembly cycle: 6,000,000
ADU acceleration roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
ADU reverse/exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
ADU reverse roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
ADU conveyance roller / 1 z Actual replacement
1 cycle: 6,000,000
2 cycle: 6,000,000
3 cycle: 6,000,000
4 cycle: 6,000,000
ADU exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Fusing exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
4 Registration Registration roller /Up 1 z
section
Registration bearing 2 z
5 Transfer/ Transfer/separation 1 z
separation charger unit
charger TSL 1 z
Reinstallation to the
ADU
6 Fusing Fusing gear 1 z
section Web motor 1 z
Fusing actuator 1 z
2 -9

7 Paper exit Cleaning of the paper z Blower brush
section exit sensor
Main body paper exit 1 z
roller
H. Maintenance 8 (Every 10,000,000 prints)

II Maintenance

1 ADU Reverse gate 7 z Actual replacement
cycle: 10,000,000
2 Vertical Conveyance roller /1 1 z Actual replacement
conveyance cycle: 6,000,000
section Conveyance roller /2 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Conveyance roller /3 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Pre-registration roller /1 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Pre-registration roller /2 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Conveyance exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Pre-registration bearing 4 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
3 Toner supply Pump unit /Rt 1 z
section Pump unit /Lt 1 z
I. Maintenance 9 (Every 15,000,000 prints)

1 Paper feed Paper feed clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement
section cycle: 3,000,000
Paper feed clutch /2 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 3,000,000
Separation clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 3,000,000
cycle: 3,000,000
2 -10
1.3.2 DF

1 Preparations Original through check z
Cover z
2 Paper feed Pick-up roller z Drum cleaner/
section cleaning pad
Paper feed roller z Drum cleaner/
II Maintenance
cleaning pad
Paper feed assist roller z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad
Cleaning pad z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad
Registration roller z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad
Pre-handling rubber z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad
Original count sensor z Blower brush
Original size sensor /Lt z Blower brush
Original size sensor /Rt z Blower brush
3 Conveyance Original registration z Blower brush
section sensor /Lt
Original registration z Blower brush
sensor /Rt
4 Read Original conveyance z Blower brush
section sensor
Original skew sensor / z Blower brush
Rr
Original skew sensor /Fr z Blower brush
5 Paper exit Mirror on the driven z Blower brush
section roller assembly
Original reverse sensor z Blower brush
Reverse jam sensor z Blower brush
Original reverse/exit z Blower brush
sensor
6 Final check Paper through check z
Cleaning of the cover z Drum cleaner/
cleaning pad
2 -11

1 Paper feed Separation roller 1 z Actual replacement

II Maintenance

1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 1 z Actual replacement
Paper feed roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 800,000
Paper feed assist roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 800,000
Torque limiter 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 800,000
1.3.3 PF

1 Preparations Paper through check z
2 Tray section Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
3 Conveyance Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
cleaning pad

1 Tray section Pick-up roller 3 z Actual replacement
cycle: 500,000
Paper feed roller 3 z Actual replacement
cycle: 500,000
Separation roller 3 z Actual replacement
cycle: 500,000
2 -12

1 Conveyance Pre-registration clutch / 1 z Actual replacement
section 1 cycle: 3,000,000
Pre-registration clutch / 1 z Actual replacement
2 cycle: 3,000,000
Pre-registration clutch / 1 z Actual replacement
3 cycle: 3,000,000
II Maintenance
Intermediate clutch /Up 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 3,000,000
Intermediate clutch /Lw 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 3,000,000
D. Maintenance 4 (Every 10,000,000 prints)

2 Conveyance Pre-registration roller 3 z Actual replacement
Bearing 6 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
Conveyance roller 4 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
PFU paper exit roller 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 6,000,000
cleaning pad
2 -13
E. Maintenance 5 (Every 15,000,000 prints)

1 Tray section Paper feed clutch /1 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 3,000,000
cycle: 3,000,000
cycle: 3,000,000
II Maintenance

cycle: 3,000,000
cycle: 3,000,000
cycle: 3,000,000
Forced separation 1 z Actual replacement
clutch cycle: 3,000,000
1.3.4 FD
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 2,250,000 prints)

2 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 z Actual replacement
cycle: 100,000
Separation rubber 2 z Actual replacement
cycle: 100,000
Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
3 Tray up/down Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
4 Punch Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
5 Conveyance Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
cleaning pad
2 -14

2 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 z Actual replacement
cycle: 200,000
3 Tray up/down Tray up down motor 1 z Actual replacement
II Maintenance
cleaning pad

2 Punch Punch motor 1 z Actual replacement
3 Conveyance Roller solenoid /1 1 z Actual replacement
Roller solenoid /2 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 5,000,000
cycle: 5,000,000
cycle: 5,000,000
cleaning pad
2 -15
1.3.5 LS
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 15,000,000 prints)

2 Conveyance Paper press solenoid /3 1 z Actual replacement
Paper press solenoid /1 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 5,000,000
II Maintenance
Paper press solenoid /2 1 z Actual replacement

cycle: 5,000,000
Rear stopper solenoid 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 5,000,000
Stacker tray up down 1 z Actual replacement
motor cycle: 5,000,000
Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
cleaning pad
2 -16
1.3.6 FS

2 Main tray Paper exit roller /A 8 z
section
3 Stacker Cleaning of each sensor z Blower brush
section
II Maintenance
4 Conveyance Cleaning of the paper z Vacuum cleaner/
section dust removing brush blower brush
cleaning pad

1 Stapler Stapler unit /Fr 1 z Actual replacement
Stapler unit /Rr 1 z Actual replacement
cycle: 500,000

1 Stacker Intermediate roller 1 z
section release solenoid
2 -17
1.4 Replacement parts list

NOTE
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, see "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "1.5 Maintenance procedure."
• The parts count No. given in the table below represents the number of the fixed parts number in
the service mode.
1.4.1 Main body
No. Classification Part name Qt. Actual Parts count

II Maintenance
replacement cycle No.

1 Main body Ozone filter /A 2 4,500,000 32
2 Ozone filter /K 1 4,500,000 32
3 Conveyance suction filter 1 4,500,000 33
4 Developing suction filter 1 4,500,000 33
5 Photo conductor section Drum temperature sensor 1 3,000,000 22
6 Drum 1 * 1,000,000
7 Drum claw 3 1,000,000 9
8 Charger Charger unit 1 6,000,000 34
9 Charger control plate 1 750,000 4
10 Charger wire 2 750,000 3
11 Charger rubber vibration isolator 2 750,000
12 Charger cleaning unit 2 750,000 5
13 C-clip 2 750,000
14 Developing section Developing unit 1 6,000,000 36
15 Developing suction assembly 1 6,000,000 37
16 Suction filter 1 750,000 6
17 Developer 1 * 1,000,000
18 Agitator plate assembly 1 1,500,000
19 Toner supply section Toner supply sleeve /1 1 3,000,000 23
20 Toner supply sleeve /2 1 3,000,000 24
21 Pump unit /Lt 1 10,000,000 52
22 Pump unit /Rt 1 10,000,000 51
23 Cleaning/recycle section Cleaning blade 2 750,000 2
24 Toner seal board 1 3,000,000 25
25 Toner guide brush assembly 1 1,500,000 12
26 Scattering prevention felt 1 1,500,000
27 Seal plate /Fr 1 1,500,000 14
28 Seal plate /Rr 1 1,500,000 13
29 Guide plate assembly 1 3,000,000 26
2 -18

30 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 500,000 53,57
31 Paper feed roller 2 500,000 54,58
32 Separation roller 2 500,000 54,58
33 Paper feed clutch /1 1 3,000,000 55
35 Separation clutch /1 1 3,000,000 56
II Maintenance
37 Vertical conveyance sec- Conveyance roller /1 1 6,000,000 82
38 tion Conveyance roller /2 1 6,000,000 83
39 Conveyance roller /3 1 6,000,000 83
40 Pre-registration roller /1 1 6,000,000 84
41 Pre-registration roller /2 1 6,000,000 85
42 Conveyance exit roller 1 6,000,000 77
43 Paper dust guide brush assembly 1 3,000,000 76
44 Pre-registration bearing 4 6,000,000
45 Pre-registration clutch /1 1 3,000,000 79
47 Vertical conveyance clutch 1 3,000,000 80
48 Transfer/separation Transfer/separation charger unit 1 6,000,000 38
49 charger Discharge wire 3 750,000 7
50 Transfer presser rubber 3 750,000
51 Transfer cleaning assembly 1 750,000 8
52 Separation cleaning assembly /1 1 750,000 8
53 Separation cleaning assembly /2 1 750,000 8
54 C-clip 3 750,000
55 Transfer assist sheet assembly 1 1,500,000 10, 11
56 TSL 1 6,000,000 39
57 Registration section Registration roller /Up 1 6,000,000 40
58 Registration bearing 2 6,000,000 40
59 ADU section Paper exit roller /1 1 6,000,000 44
60 Paper exit roller /2 assembly 1 6,000,000 44
61 ADU accelerate roller 1 6,000,000 41
62 Reverse/exit roller 1 6,000,000 42
63 ADU reverse roller 1 6,000,000 43
64 ADU conveyance roller /1 1 6,000,000 45
68 ADU exit roller 1 6,000,000 45
69 Fusing exit roller 4 6,000,000 46
70 Reverse gate 7 10,000,000
2 -19

71 Fusing section Cleaning web 1 750,000 1
72 Fusing heater lamp /1 1 3,000,000
75 Fusing roller /Up 1 1,500,000 15
76 Heat insulating sleeve 2 1,500,000 19
77 Fusing bearing /Up 2 1,500,000 20
II Maintenance
78 Heating roller bearing 2 3,000,000 28

79 Fusing gear 1 6,000,000 48
80 Fusing roller /Lw assembly 1 1,500,000 16
81 Fusing heating roller 1 3,000,000 31
82 Heat insulating sleeve /Lw 2 3,000,000 27
83 Fusing claw /Up 6 1,500,000 17
84 Fusing claw /Lw 2 1,500,000 18
85 Thermistor /2 1 3,000,000 29
86 Thermistor /4 1 3,000,000 30
87 Fusing actuator 1 6,000,000 50
88 Web motor 1 6,000,000 49
89 Fusing cleaning sheet assembly 1 1,500,000 21
90 Paper exit section Main body paper exit roller 1 6,000,000 47
*
The actual replacement cycle of the drum and developer is 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours of use, whichever is
earlier.
2 -20
1.4.2 Option
No. Classification Part name Qt. Actual replacement Parts count No.
cycle
1 DF Pick-up roller 1 800,000 141
2 Paper feed roller 1 800,000 142
3 Paper feed auxiliary roller 1 800,000 144
4 Separation roller 1 400,000 143
5 Torque limiter 1 800,000 145
6 PF Pick-up roller 3 500,000 61,66,71
II Maintenance
7 Paper feed roller 3 500,000 62,67,72
8 Separation roller 3 500,000 62,67,72
15 Forced separation clutch /2 1 3,000,000 70
19 Intermediate clutch /Up 1 3,000,000 93
20 Intermediate clutch /Lw 1 3,000,000 94
21 Pre-registration roller 3 6,000,000 86,87,88
22 Bearing 6 6,000,000
23 Conveyance roller 4 6,000,000 86,88
24 PFU paper exit roller 1 6,000,000 89
25 FD Pick-up rubber 6 200,000 114,117
26 Paper feed rubber 2 100,000 116,119
27 Separation rubber 2 100,000 115,118
28 Roller solenoid /1 1 5,000,000 121
29 Roller solenoid /2 1 5,000,000 121
30 Roller solenoid /3 1 5,000,000 122
31 Roller solenoid /4 1 5,000,000 122
32 Punch motor 1 5,000,000 120
33 Tray up down motor 1 5,000,000 123
34 LS Stacker tray up down motor 1 5,000,000 128, 133
35 Paper press solenoid /1 1 5,000,000 124, 129
36 Rear stopper solenoid 1 5,000,000 127, 132
2 -21
No. Classification Part name Qt. Actual replacement Parts count No.
cycle
39 FS Intermediate roller release solenoid 1 5,000,000 113
40 Stapler unit /Fr 1 500,000 111
41 Stapler unit /Rr 1 500,000 112
42 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 8 750,000
II Maintenance
2 -22
1.5 Maintenance procedure
Caution:
• When replacing periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
from the power outlet.
1.5.1 External section

A. Replacing the ozone filters /A, /K and the conveyance suction filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Ozone filter /A: Every 4,500,000 prints
II Maintenance
• Ozone filter /K: Every 4,500,000 prints
• Conveyance suction filter: Every 4,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the exhaust
[1] cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2053c
2. Remove 2 ozone filters /A [1] and the ozone filter

[1]
/K [2], and the conveyance suction filter [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[2] steps in reverse.
[3]
1050fs2054c
2 -23
B. Replacing the developing suction filter

• Developing suction filter: Every 4,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover
[2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2] 1050fs2055c
2. Remove the developing suction filter [1].

[1] 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
1050fs2056c
2 -24
1.5.2 Photo conductor section

A. Removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section
NOTE
• When the drum section has been removed, be sure to store it in a dark place with the drum cover
provided.
• When removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section, be careful not to rotate the drum in any
direction other than the specified direction. Rotating it in the opposite direction to the rotational
direction while printing may cause damage to the cleaning blade.
• When removing/reinstalling the photo conductor section, be absolutely sure not to touch the drum
II Maintenance
claw.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
[1]
2. Bring down lever A of the ADU. (See "1.5.8
ADU.")
3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the photo con-
ductor section cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2089c
4. Remove screw [1].

[3] [2]
5. Loosen screw [2] and pull out the intermediate
toner hopper [3].
[1]
1050fs2090c
2 -25
6. Release the lock [1] and open the intermediate

[2]
toner hopper [2].
[1]
II Maintenance
1050fs2091c
7. Remove the 2 screws [1].

[1] 8. Remove the screw [2], pull the knob [3] toward
you and lock the toner recycle pipe [4] while rais-
ing it up in the arrow-marked direction.
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2092c
9. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the coupling

[5]
[2].
10. Hold the sections marked with [3] and [4] and
pull out the photo conductor section [5].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• For reinstallation of the coupling, see "B.
Cleaning/reinstallation of the coupling" in the
next section.
[3] [1] [2] [4] 1050fs2093c
2 -26
B. Cleaning/reinstallation of the coupling
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct this operation when removing the photo conductor section.
(1) Procedure
1. Clean the periphery of the coupling with drum
[1]
cleaner.
2. Insert the coupling so that the protrusions [2] of
the coupling [1] get into the depressed portions
II Maintenance
[2] [4] of the drum [3].
NOTE
• An detent [5] is provided on the inside of the
coupling [1]. So be sure to set it into the key
groove [7] of the drum shaft [6].
[4]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[5] fs503fs2094c
2 -27
3. While attaching a plus driver lightly to the cou-

pling [1], rotate the coupling [1] clockwise until its
meshing surface fits the external surface of the
bearing [2].
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
1050fs2420c
4. Tighten the coupling [2] with the screw [1].
[2]
[1] 1050fs2095c
2 -28
C. Replacing the charger unit
NOTE
• When removing the charger unit, be careful not to touch the mesh portion of the charger control
plate with bear hands.
• When cleaning the charger control plate, blow off dirt with the blower brush.

• Charger unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
1. Pull the photo conductor section out of the main
body. (See "1.5.2 A. Removing/reinstalling the
[3]
photo conductor section.")
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the
wiring harness of the charger from the harness
clamps [2] at the 3 places.
[2]
3. Hold the portions marked with [3] and [4] and
remove the charger unit [5].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[5]
[4]
1050fs2096c
2 -29
D. Replacing the charger control plate

• Charger control plate: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charger unit. (See "1.5.2 C. Replac-
ing the charger unit.")
2. Slide the lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction
[2] to release the lock [3] and remove the charger
[4] control plate [4].
II Maintenance
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid loosening or removing the
screw [5] that fastens the lever.

steps in reverse.
[3]
[4] [5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs2104c
2 -30
E. Replacing the charger wire/charger vibration proof rubber

• Charger wire: Every 750,000 prints
• Charger vibration proof rubber: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [5]
2. Remove the charger control plate. (See "1.5.2 D.
Replacing the charger control plate.")
II Maintenance
3. Remove the spark arrester plates /Fr [1] and /Rr
[2].
4. Remove the springs [3], one each, and then
remove the charger wires [4] and the charger
vibration proof rubber [5], one each.
NOTE
[6] • When reinstalling the charger wire, be sure to
[5] [4] insert each of the wires into the cut [6] of the
charger vibration proof rubber.
• Be sure to reinstall the charger wires so that
the hook [7] of each spring turns to the inside.

steps in reverse.
[7] [1]
[4] [3] [7] 1050fs2105c
2 -31
F. Replacing the charger cleaning unit/C-clip

• Charger cleaning unit: Every 750,000 prints
• C-clip: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[4]
2. Remove the charger control plate. (See "1.5.2 D.
Replacing the charger control plate.")
[3]
II Maintenance
3. Remove the charger wire. (See "1.5.2 E. Replac-

[2] ing the charger wire/charger vibration isolation
rubber.")
4. Remove the C-clip [3], one each, from the shaft
[2] of the charger cleaning unit [1].
5. Reverse the charger unit [4] and remove the 2
charger cleaning units.
[4] 6. Remove the collar [5] from the shaft of each of
[1] the charger cleaning units.
7. When the charger back plate is stained, clean it
[6] with drum cleaner and a cleaning pad.
NOTE
• Be careful that the collar inserted into the
shaft of the charger cleaning unit does not
drop off.
• Be sure to reinstall the charger cleaning unit
so that the marking "F" [6] turns in the same
[1] direction as shown in the drawing.

[5] 1050fs2106c
2 -32
G. Replacing the drum temperature sensor

• Drum temperature sensor: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section. (See "1.5.2
A. Removing/reinstalling the photo conductor
[2]
section.")
II Maintenance
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and then remove the
wiring harness from the wiring harness clamp.
NOTE
• Take note of the direction of the connector to
[3] be removed.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor sup-

port stay assembly [3].
[1]
[2] [1] 1050fs2097c
2 -33
5. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3]
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the drum
temperature sensor [3].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1] [2] 1050fs2098c
2 -34
H. Replacing the drum/cleaning of the photo conductor section
NOTE
• Be careful not to touch or damage the drum and the cleaning blade with bare hands.
• When storing the drum, be sure to store it in dark place with the drum cover attached.
• When reinstalling the drum, the cleaning blade and the toner guide brush, be sure to apply setting
powder all around the drum and the cleaning blade regardless of these parts being new or used
ones.
• When the drum is applied with setting powder, be sure to conduct the following operations before
installing the photo conductor section to the main body:
II Maintenance
1) With the charger and the developing section removed, rotate the drum one full turn (to prevent
splashing of setting powder to the charger and prevent the image from getting blurred).
2) When installing a new drum, be sure to reset the photo conductor counter in the service mode.
If not reset, image fogging and toner splash may result. (See chapter III "4.5.1 A. Count reset" in
the Field Service for the main body.)

• Drum: 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
[1]
section.")
3. Remove the sensor support stay assembly. (See
"1.5.2 G. Replacing the drum temperature sen-
sor.")
4. Remove the developing unit. (See "1.5.3 Devel-
oping section.")
5. Remove the cleaning section. (See "1.5.5 Clean-
ing/toner recycle section.")
6. Remove the drum [1].
1050fs2099c
2 -35
7. Clean toner adhered around the drum installation

section [1] and the developing suction duct [2].
8. Clean the maximum density sensor [3] and the
gamma sensor [4] on the toner control sensor
board (TCSB) with a cleaning pad.
[3] [4]
II Maintenance
[1] [2] 1050fs2100c
9. Clean toner in the recycle pipe [1] and on the

toner receiving plate [2] with a vacuum cleaner.
NOTE
• When cleaning toner with a vacuum cleaner,
be sure to turn the shutter section [3] in the
arrow-marked direction.
• When cleaning the recycle pipe, be sure to tap
the pipe softly to let toner that adheres to the
inner wall drop off, and then rotate the gear
[4] to discharge the toner.
[4] [1] [2] [3] 1050fs2400c

steps in reverse.
2 -36
I. Replacing the drum claw
NOTE
• When reinstalling the drum claw, take note of the direction and position of the claw.

• Drum claw: Every 1,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
II Maintenance
section.")
2. Remove the cleaning unit. (See "1.5.5 Cleaning/
toner recycle section.")
3. Remove the drum. (See "1.5.2 H. Replacing of
the drum/cleaning of the photo conductor sec-
tion.")
spring [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the drum
claw unit [4].
[1] [3] [2] 1050fs2101c
2 -37
NOTE
[3] • When reinstalling the drum claw unit [1], be
sure to set the projection [2] of the drum claw
unit to the guide hole [4] of the photo conduc-
tor section [3].
[4]
II Maintenance
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2102c
2 -38
6. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2] in the
[3]
arrow-marked direction and remove the 3 drum
claws [3].
7. Remove the springs [4], one each, from each of
the dram claws.
[2]
NOTE
• When reinstalling the drum claws, be sure to
clean the shaft with drum cleaner and a
cleaning pad. Reinstalling the separation
II Maintenance
claws with toner adhered causes the opera-
tion to slow down.
• When reinstalling the drum claws, be sure to
insert the C-clip between the ribs [5].
[3]
• After reinstalling the dram claws, check to
see if they move smoothly.

[1]
steps in reverse.
[5] 1050fs2103c
2 -39
1.5.3 Developing section

A. Replacing the suction filter
• Suction filter: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
body. (See "1.5.2 Photo conductor section.")
2. Open the cover of the developing suction assem-
bly [1].
[1]
II Maintenance
3. Remove the suction filter [2].

4. Clean the outside and the inside of the develop-
ing suction assembly with the cleaner.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the suction filter, be sure to
expand the filter opening before installation.
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the cover
1050fs2107c
of the developing suction assembly has been
closed thoroughly.

steps in reverse.
B. Replacing the developing suction assembly

• Developing suction assembly: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the
developing suction assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2108c
2 -40
C. Cleaning of the developing unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the developing suction assembly. (See
"1.5.3 B. Replacing the developing suction
assembly.")
3. Remove the developing unit. (See "1.5.3 D.
Replacing the developing unit.")
4. Remove the developing unit cover /2. (See "1.5.3
II Maintenance
E. Replacing the developer.")
5. Clean up the developer regulation blade [1], the
[3] underside of the developing roller [2] and both
[3] [2] 1050fs2401c
sides of the developer roller [3] with a vacuum
cleaner.
NOTE
• Be careful not vacuum too much developer
necessarily. Cleaning should be restricted
only to stained sections.
• Be careful not to bend the lower sheet.
6. Clean up the rear side of the developing unit

[1]
cover /2 [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
7. Clean up the suction duct [2] of the developing
unit cover /2 with a vacuum cleaner.
steps in reverse.
[2]
1050fs2402c
2 -41
D. Replacing the developing unit

• Developing unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
assembly.")
II Maintenance
3. Release the developing pressure lever [2] while

holding down the right side [1] of the developing
unit.
NOTE
• When releasing the developing pressure lever,
[2] [1] 1050fs2109c
be careful not to touch the front panel and the
rear panel of the photo conductor section.
4. Hold the sections [1] and [2] with both hands and
remove the developing unit [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2110c
2 -42
NOTE
• When reinstalling the developer unit, make
sure that the developing unit stopper roller [1]
is in contact with the developing unit stopper
plate [2]. (DS secured)
• When the developing unit stopper roller is too
[2] easily rotated, remove it once and then rein-
stall it.
II Maintenance
[1] [1]
1050fs2116c

[2]
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the developer unit, be care-
ful that the front panel of the photo conductor
section does not come into contact with the
developing roller [1].
[1] 1050fs2111c
• Be absolutely sure not to rotate the develop-
ing gear [2] clockwise.
2 -43
E. Replacing the developer
NOTE
• When replacing the developer, be careful that
dirt does not get into it.
[2] • When rotating the developing roller [1], be
sure to use a flat blade driver to turn the
developing gear [2] counterclockwise.
• Be absolutely sure not to rotate the develop-
ing gear [2] clockwise.
II Maintenance
• When putting in new developer, be sure to

reset the developer counter in the service
[1] mode. If not reset, image fogging and toner
1050fs2112c
splash may result. (See chapter III "4.5.1 A.
Count reset" in the Field Service for the main
body.)

• Developer: 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
[4] body. (See "1.5.2 Photo conductor section.")
[2]
assembly.")
[3] 3. Remove the developing unit. (See "1.5.3 D.
Cleaning of the developing unit.")
[1] 4. Release 2 hooks [1] and remove the developing
1050fs2113c
unit cover /1 [2].
5. Release 2 hooks [3] and remove the developing
unit cover /2 [4].
2 -44
6. With the developing unit [1] tilted to about 45°

[4] [2]
[2], rotate the developing gear [3] counterclock-
wise with a flat blade screwdriver to discharge
[1] the developer [4] in the developing unit thor-
oughly.
7. Use cleaner to clean the developer adhered to
the developing roller.
NOTE
• Any used developer remaining in the develop-
II Maintenance
ing roller may cause gray background to the
image.
[3] 1050fs2114c
8. Pour new developer [1] evenly from above the

[3]
mixing screw [2].
9. Rotate the developing gear [5] counterclockwise
[4]
so that the developer gets fully into the develop-
ing unit [4].
10. Repeat the steps 7 and 8 to pour the developer
completely.
[1] 11. Rotate the developing gear counterclockwise
[5] and check the height of developer across the
entire developing roller [6].
[2] [6] 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
1050fs2115c
steps in reverse.
2 -45
1.5.4 Toner supply section

A. Replacing/cleaning of the toner bottle
(1) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door [1] and pull out the
[3]
toner supply cover /A assembly [2].
2. Remove the toner bottle [3].
[1]
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2004c
3. Clean around the toner bottle insertion opening

[1]
[1] with a blower brush and a vacuum cleaner.
steps in reverse.
1050fs2005c
2 -46
B. Replacing the agitator plate assembly

• Agitator plate assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
[2]
2. Bring down the lever A of the ADU. (See "1.5.8
A. Pulling out/reinstallation of the ADU.")
3. Remove the cover on the photo conductor sec-
tion and pull out the intermediate toner hopper to
II Maintenance
open it. (See "1.5.2 A. Removing/reinstalling the
photo conductor section.")
4. Close up the connection opening [1] of the inter-
mediate toner hopper with a cleaning pad [2].
5. Attach the toner recovery bag [4] beneath the
shutter section [3] connected to the developing
unit.
NOTE
• For the toner recovery bag, use a paper bag
made by folding a sheet of paper, or a vinyl
[3] [4] [1] 1050fs2783c
bag. Be sure to fix it at an appropriate place
so that toner does not spill over. And also,
make sure that the bag does not come down
by the toner's own weight.
• The intermediate toner hopper contains toner
about half as much as the volumetric capacity
of the hopper. Be sure to set up a bag that
accommodates of the entire toner amount.
6. Enter 54-00 in "I/O check mode" in the service

[3] [2]
mode and press the start button.
7. Insert the connecting shutter [1] fully deep and
open it to discharge toner in the hopper. (This
takes about 5 minutes.)
NOTE
• While discharging, be sure to rotate the gear
[2] several times in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [3] once in a while so that toner that is
above the agitator plate assembly is dis-
charged.
• When rotating the gear [2] and no more toner
is discharged, it is considered that almost all
toner has been recovered.
• Be sure to avoid sucking toner in the interme-
[1] 1050fs2784c
diate toner hopper with a vacuum cleaner.
Using a cleaner may cause damage electro-
statically to the toner remaining sensor /1
(PS31).
2 -47
8. Press the stop button.

[2] [1]
9. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the inter-
mediate toner hopper cover assembly [2] in the
arrow-marked direction [3].
NOTE
• The intermediate toner hopper cover assem-
bly [5] will also be adhered with toner. Be
careful that it does not scatter.
II Maintenance
[3] 1050fs2802c
10. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction

[1] [2]
until 2 screws [3] that hold the agitator plate
assembly [2] turns up.
NOTE
• At this time, the sheet of the agitator plate
assembly jumps up. Be sure to cover about
half of it with paper so that toner does not
scatter.
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the agita-

tor plate assembly [2].
NOTE
[5] [3] [4] 1050fs2785c
• Be sure not to rotate the gear [1] after remov-
ing the agitator plate assembly. Rotating it
may cause a phase lag with the agitator plate
/2 [5], thus making it impossible to detect the
remaining amount of toner properly.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The recovered toner may get mixed with
impurities. Be sure to dispose of it, do not put
it back in the intermediate toner hopper.
2 -48
C. Replacing the toner supply sleeves /1 and /2

• Toner supply sleeve /1: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Toner supply sleeve /2: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover. (See "4.3.1 Cover.")
[1] 2. Open the front doors /Rt [1] and /Lt [2] and the
toner supply door [3].
3. Remove the toner bottle [4]. (See "1.5.4 A.
II Maintenance
[2] Replacing/cleaning of the toner bottle.")
4. Remove the toner supply door. (See "4.3.1 F.
Removing/reinstalling the toner supply door.")
5. Replace the toner supply cover /A assembly [5].
[4]
[3]
[5] 1050fs2006c
6. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the toner

[1] [2] [1]
supply protective assembly [2].
7. Pull out the toner supply cover /A assembly [3]
until the lock is released.
NOTE
• If the toner supply cover /A assembly [3] is
set, the lock section [5] remains in contact
when the toner supply lock assembly [4] is
removed. Be sure to pull out the toner supply
cover /A assembly [3].
8. Remove 2 screws [6].

10. Pull out tray /2.
11. Remove the toner supply lock assembly [4].
[7] [5] [3] [4] [6] 1050fs2007c
2 -49
12. Remove 2 connectors [1] and the wiring harness

from the wiring harness clamp.
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2008c
13. Release 2 hose clamps [1] and remove 2 hoses

[2] [5]
[3] from the toner feed case [2].
NOTE
• Keep each of the released hose clamps [1]
near the connecting opening of each hose [3].
• When the hose [3] is removed from the toner
feed case [2], toner may spill out of each
hose. Be careful that the inside of the main
body does not get stained with toner.
• The hose connecting section of the toner feed
case [2] and the hose [3] are provided with the
[3] toner supply installation label [4] that indi-
cates the respective points to which a con-
[1] [3] nection is made. When installing each hose,
be sure to make a connection between the
points having the corresponding toner supply
installation label [4].
[2] 14. Release the cable clamp [5] and pull out the hose
[3] to the outside of the main body.
NOTE
• The hose [3] may be damaged when the toner
supply unit [6] is being removed. Be sure to
[4] [4] 1050fs2009c
pull it out to the outside of the main body.
2 -50
15. Remove the screws [1] and [2], and pull out and
[2] [1]
remove the toner supply unit [3].
II Maintenance
[3] 1050fs2010c
NOTE
[1]
• When reinstalling the toner supply unit [1], be
sure to insert 2 guide pins [2] on the rear side
[4] and 2 guide pins [3] on the front side into the
respective guide holes [4] of the main body
frame.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2] 1050fs2011c
2 -51

supply protective plate [2].
[2]
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
1050fs2012c
17. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cover

/Up [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2404c
2 -52
NOTE
• When reinstalling the cover /Up [2], set the
[6]
[8] projection [5] of the cover /Lw [4] to the posi-
tioning hole [3] of the cover /Up [2] and then
insert the projection [6] of the cover /Up [2]
into the slit [8] of the drive board [7].
[7]
[2]
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
1050fs2013c
2 -53
18. Remove the toner supply sleeves /1 [1].

19. Push the coupling in the arrow-marked direction
[2] and remove the toner supply sleeve /2 [3].
[3]
[1]
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2014c
NOTE
[1] [2]
• Be sure to reinstall the toner supply sleeves /1
[1] and /2 [2] in the direction as shown in the
drawing.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of disassembly/assembly of
the toner supply unit, be sure to select the
code 54-09 (rotation of the toner pump motor
(M28) and the air pump motor (M29)) in the I/O
check mode of the service mode and then
press the start button.
When toner drops off into the mixing section
due to the vibration of the disassembly/
assembly, this may cause the codes SC23-14
and SC23-17. (See chapter III "4.6.1 G.
Removing toner from the toner mixing sec-
tion" in the Field Service for the main body.)
[1] [2] 1050fs2015c
2 -54
D. Replacing the pump units /Lt and /Rt

• Pump unit /Lt: Every 10,000,000 prints
• Pump unit /Rt: Every 10,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover and the upper covers /
Rr1 and /Rr2. (See "4.3.1 Cover.")
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the exte-
rior mounting plate [2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[1] 1050fs2016c
2 -55
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

[2] [1] [3] [5]
[4] from the pump unit /Rt [3].
NOTE
• When the hose [4] is removed from the pump
unit /Rt [3], the toner may spill out of each
II Maintenance
body does not get stained with the toner.

• The hose connecting section of the pump unit
/Rt [3] and the hose [4] are provided with the
toner supply installation label [5] that indi-
[5] nection is made. When installing each hose,
[5] [4] 1050fs2017c

[3] [1] [2]
[4] from the pump unit /Lt [3].
NOTE
• When the hose [4] is removed from the pump
unit /Lt [3], the toner may spill out of each
body does not get stained with the toner.
• The hose connecting section of the pump unit
/Lt [3] and the hose [4] are provided with the
toner supply installation label [5] that indi-
nection is made. When installing each hose,
[5] [4] [5] 1050fs2405c
2 -56
7. Remove the screws [1], two each, and remove

the pump unit /Lt [2] and the pump unit /Rt [3].
[3]
[2] NOTE
[1]
• When reinstalling each pump unit, be sure to
[1] insert the toner supply spacer [4] between the
attaching surfaces.

steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[4] [4] 1050fs2018c
2 -57
1.5.5 Cleaning/toner recycle section

A. Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid touching the edge of the cleaning blade with bare hands.
• Before reinstalling the cleaning section, be sure to clean the cleaning section with a blower brush
and a cleaning pad.
• When reinstalling the cleaning section, be sure to apply setting powder to the entire periphery of
the drum and the cleaning blade regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When the drum is applied with setting powder, be sure conduct the following operations before
II Maintenance
installing the photo conductor section to the main body:

1) To obtain an accurate toner density, clean setting powder splashed onto the gamma sensor
and the maximum density sensor on the toner control sensor board (TCSB) with a cleaning pad
soaked in drum cleaner.
2) With the charger unit and the developing unit removed, rotate the drum one full turn (for splash
prevention of setting powder to the charger and prevention against the image getting blurred).
(1) Procedure
1. Rotate the drum one full turn by hand.
NOTE
• Be sure to rotate the drum one full turn to pre-
[7]
vent the toner on the guide brush inside the
cleaning section from falling down.

3. Release the 2 levers [1] that holding the cleaning
[1]
section.
4. Remove the connector [2], remove the wiring
harness from the clamp [3] and then remove the
cleaning section [4].
[4]
NOTE
• When removing the cleaning section, be sure
[3] to move it along the ribs [5] of the photo con-
[2] ductor section with the opposite side of the
drum contacting section slanted to about 15°.
When reinstalling it, be sure to set the refer-
ence pin [6] of the photo conductor section to
the notch [7] of the cleaning section.

[6] 1050fs2117c
2 -58
B. Replacing the cleaning blade
NOTE
• When replacing the cleaning blades, be sure to replace 2 blades at the same time.

• Cleaning blade: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
2. Remove the cleaning section. (See "1.5.5 A.
[1] Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section.")
cleaning blade /2 [2].
4. Reinstall a new cleaning blade /2.
[2] 1050fs2119c
2 -59
5. With the blade release arm [1] raised in the

arrow-marked direction [2], rotate the blade
replacement lever [3] in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [4] to turn the cleaning blade /2.
[2]
NOTE
• Be sure to keep the blade release arm raised
[1] up, do not let go of it.
II Maintenance
[3]
[4]
1050fs2120c
2 -60
6. Bring down the blade release arm [1] in the

arrow-marked direction [2].
NOTE
[1]
• Be sure to keep hold of the blade replacement
lever being rotated, do not let go of it.
[2]
7. Release the hand that is holding the blade

replacement lever.
II Maintenance
[3]
1050fs2121c

cleaning blade /1 [2].
9. Install a new cleaning blade /1.
[1] 10. Remove toner adhered to the lower [3] and
upper [4] blade sides of the cleaning section with
a cleaning pad.
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2503c
2 -61
11. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal

[2]
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After replacing the cleaning blades /1 and /2,
be sure to check to see if the blade replace-
ment lever [1] has been pulled.
• After replacing the cleaning blades /1 and /2,
be sure to conduct the blade set mode in the
service mode to prevent the blade from curl-
II Maintenance
ing up. (See "4.4.2 A Blade setting mode" in

Field Service for the main body chapter III.)
• Be sure to avoid using the blade set mode
[1] fs503fs2153c
other than when replacing the cleaning blade.
Otherwise, the cleaning blade count of the
fixed parts count is reset so that the blade is
not replaced automatically at the correct tim-
ing.
2 -62
C. Cleaning/replacing the toner seal board
NOTE
(1) Periodic cleaning cycle

• Toner seal board: Every 750,000 prints

• Toner seal board: Every 3,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(3) Procedure
[4] [6] [5]
Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section.")
3. Remove the screws [1] and [2], and then remove
the toner seal board [3].
[3] 4. Clean the sheet section [4] of the toner seal
board with a blower brush and a cleaning pad.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner seal board, be
sure to first of all install the screw [1].
• When both sides [5] of the sheet section of
the toner seal board get inside of the toner
guide brush [6], an overflow toner may result.
On such an occasion, a correction should be
[2]
[1] [3] made so that the warp of the sheet section
1050fs2122c
becomes parallel to the toner guide brush or
it turns a little to this side (less than 1 mm).

steps in reverse.
2 -63
D. Replacing the toner guide brush/scattering prevention felt/seal plate
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner guide brush, apply setting powder uniformly with the toner guide brush
removed.
• Be absolutely sure to avoid touching the brush section of the toner guide brush with bare hands.
Also, be careful that the brush section does not come in direct contact with other objects.

• Toner guide brush: Every 1,500,000 prints
II Maintenance
• Scattering prevention felt: Every 1,500,000 prints

• Seal plate /Fr: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Seal plate /Rr: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section.")
3. Remove the toner seal board. (See "1.5.5 C.
Cleaning/replacing the toner seal board.")
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the seal
plate /Fr [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the seal
plate /Rr [4].
[1]
[4]
[3]
1050fs2118c
2 -64
6. Move the toner guide brush [1] in the order of the

arrow-marks [2] and [3] and remove it.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner guide brush, be
sure to set the pin [6] of the toner guide brush
to the coupling slit [5] of the cleaning section
[6] [4].
7. After removal of the toner guide brush, clean up
II Maintenance
[2] [1] the installation section of the seal plates /Fr and /
Rr by a vacuum cleaner.
[4] [3]
[5] 1050fs2123c
2 -65
8. Remove the C-clip [3], the bearing [4], the scat-

[2]
tering prevention felt [5], the bearing fixing mem-
ber [6] and the toner prevention collar [7] in this
order from the shaft [2] of the toner guide brush
[3] [1].
NOTE
[1]
• Be careful that the toner prevention collar
does not get lost.
II Maintenance

[5] [6] steps in reverse.
[4]
[7]
1050fs2124c
2 -66
E. Replacing the toner guide plate assembly

• Toner guide plate assembly: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] body. (See "1.5.2 Photo conductor section.")
[5] [1] Removing/reinstalling the cleaning section.")
II Maintenance
Cleaning/replacing the toner seal board.")
4. Remove the seal plate. (See "1.5.5 D. Replacing
the toner guide brush/scattering prevention felt/
[4]
seal plate.")
5. Remove the E-rings [1], one each, and then
remove 2 cleaning mounting lever collars [2].
[3] [2] [1] 1050fs2125c
6. Remove the screws [3] (B tight M3 x 8) and [4]
(TPM3 x 6) and then remove the drive reinforcing
plate [5].
NOTE
• When installing the drive reinforcing plate, be
careful not to confuse the screw [3] with the
screw [4].
• When installing the drive reinforcing plate, be
sure to tighten the screw [3] and the screw [4]
in this order after fastening each of the clean-
ing mounting lever collar with the E-ring.
7. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the bear-

ing [2].
[1] [2] fs503fs2129c
2 -67
8. Remove the C-clip [1] and push in the toner

[4] [3]
guide shaft [2] up to the edge of the gear [3] to
remove it.
NOTE
• Be sure to push in the toner guide shaft up to
the edge of the gear when removing the gear.
Otherwise, the gear does not come off.
• Be careful not to pull out the gear section [4].
When it is pulled out, the bearing and the
II Maintenance
scattering prevention felt may come off. When

they comes off, be sure to replace the scatter-
ing prevention felt with a new one.
[2] [1] 1050fs2424c
9. Remove the spacer [1].
[1] 1050fs2425c
10. Pull out and remove the toner guide shaft [1] in
[1]
the arrow-marked direction.
1050fs2426c
2 -68
NOTE
[1]
• When reinstalling the toner guide shaft, be
sure to insert it while holding it down from the
outside so that the bearing [1] does not come
off.
• When the bearing comes off while inserting
the toner guide shaft, be sure to replace the
scattering prevention felt with a new one.
II Maintenance
1050fs2427c
2 -69

[1]
guide plate assembly [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner guide plate
assembly, be sure to hit it against the lower
side before fixing it.
12. Clean up the exterior of the cleaning unit with a

cleaning pad and a blower brush.
II Maintenance

steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 1050fs2130c
2 -70
F. Cleaning when removing the cleaning unit (when conducting maintenance work)
NOTE
• When removing the cleaning unit, be sure to clean thoroughly both the inside and the inner wall of
the cleaning unit and the recycle pipe with as little toner left as possible. When cleaning is insuffi-
cient, toner may spill over the conveyance section.
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the photo conductor section from the
main body. (See "1.5.2 Photo conductor sec-
tion.")
II Maintenance
Removal/reinstallation of the cleaning section.")
Cleaning/reinstallation of the toner seal board.")
4. Remove the toner guide brush/seal plates Fr and
Rr. (See "1.5.5 D. Replacing the toner guide
brush/splash prevention sheet/seal plate.")
5. Tap the casing [1] section softly to let the recy-
cled toner adhering to the inner wall drop off.
[1] 1050fs2431c
6. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction

to discharge toner to the outside.
7. Repeat the steps 5 and 6 until there is no toner
discharged. And finally, clean the inside with a
vacuum cleaner.
[1] 1050fs2432c
8. Tap the recycle pipe softly to let the recycled toner

adhering to the inner wall drop off into the pipe.
9. Rotate the gear [1] of the recycle screw counter-
clockwise and open the shutter section [2] to dis-
charge toner.
10. Repeat the steps 8 and 9 until there is no toner
discharged.
11. Clean the cleaning unit mounting place (photo
conductor section) with a vacuum cleaner.
NOTE
• When cleaning it with a vacuum cleaner, be
[1] [2] 1050fs2433c
careful that the vacuum cleaner does not
come into contact with drum.

steps in reverse.
2 -71
1.5.6 Paper feed section

A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly
NOTE
• The pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly are CMS corresponding parts.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• The method for replacing the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly is the same for
II Maintenance
tray /1 and tray /2. The explanation here is given for tray /1.
• After completion of the installation, rotate the pick-up roller in the direction of the paper feed
(counterclockwise as seen from the front) to check to see if the paper feed roller, the belt and the
coupling section rotate smoothly. The rotation of the pick-up roller is restricted only to the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as seen from the front) and be absolutely sure not to turn
it clockwise.
• Be sure to take note that the direction of the pick-up roller is different for the main body and the
PF.
1. When the power switch is off, open the toner

supply door.
2. Raise up the tray lock lever [1] lightly and pull out
the tray [2].
[2]
[1]
1050fs2700c
2 -72
3. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the arrow-marked

[2] [3]
direction (counterclockwise as seen from the
front) and place the coupling [2] in the longitudi-
nal direction.
[1]
NOTE
• The rotation of the pick-up roller [1] is
restricted only to the arrow-marked direction
(counterclockwise). It does not rotate in the
reverse direction (counterclockwise). So, be
II Maintenance
sure not to turn it in this direction forcibly.
1050fs2701c
4. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].

[2] 6. Slide the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
NOTE
• When installing the bearing /Fr [1], /Rr [2],
insert it in the notch [5] of the metal frame
while pressing down a little the metal frame
[1]
[3] of the pick-up roller assembly to make
level the flat portion [4] of the bearing /Rr [2].
And then insert the bearing /Fr [1] in the same
manner as with the bearing /Rr.
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2702c
2 -73
7. Hold the pick-up roller assembly [1] by hand and

lift the paper feed roller [3] up to tilt while rotating
it around the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller, and
[7] then remove it from the notch [4] of the bearing
and the coupling [5].
NOTE
• When removing the pick-up roller [1], be care-
ful not to damage the sensor [7] with the
metal frame [6].
II Maintenance
[5] [3]
[6]
[4]
[2] [1] 1050fs2703c
2 -74
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm

[1] of the paper feed guide plate and then remove
[3] the pick-up roller assembly [3].
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2704c
9. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the

[2]
entrance guide plate [2].
[1] 1050fs2705c
2 -75

[2]
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, fasten it with the screws
while pressing down the separation roller
assembly [2].
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2706c
11. After pulling out the front side of the separation

roller assembly [1], remove the coupling [2] in the
rear from the joint [3].
[3]
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to engage the
coupling pin [2] with the joint [3] before instal-
lation.
[2]

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, hold the
[1]
pick-up roller lightly and rotate it in the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as
seen from the front) to check to see if the
paper feed roller, the belt and the coupling
section rotate smoothly. (The rotation of the
pick-up roller is restricted only to the direc-
tion of the paper feed (counterclockwise as
1050fs2707c
seen from the front) and be absolutely sure
not to turn it clockwise.)
2 -76
B. Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller

• Pick-up roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
• Paper feed roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, a one-way mechanism is provided on the inside of the collar of the paper feed roller with
no mechanism provided for the separation roller. Be careful not to confuse one with the other.
II Maintenance
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly.
2. Remove the C-clip [1], remove the coupling bear-
ing [2] and then remove the mounting bracket [3].
[2]
[1] [3] 1050fs2708
3. Pull out the shaft [3] from the collar [1] and
remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, take note of the direction
of the pick-up roller. Be sure to insert the col-
lar [1] from the side provided with the groove
[4].
[3] [1] [2]
[4]
1050fs2709c
2 -77
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the collar [2]
[2] [3]
and the paper feed roller [3].
NOTE
of the paper feed roller. Be sure to insert the
collar [2] from the side provided with the
groove [4].

II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[4] [3]
[2]
1050fs2710c
2 -78
C. Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the separation roller and the paper feed roller.
However, a one-way mechanism is provided on the inside of the collar of the paper feed roller with
no mechanism provided for the separation roller. Be careful not to confuse one with the other.
II Maintenance
1. Remove the separation roller assembly.
[1] 2. Remove the C-clip [1], slide the shaft and remove
the separation roller [3] together with the shaft
[2].
[3]
[2] 1050fs2711c
3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separa-
[1] [4] [5] [3] [2]
tion roller [4] from the shaft [1] in the arrow-
marked direction and remove them.
NOTE
of the separation roller. Be sure to insert it
into the shaft [2] from the side provided with
the groove [5].
• The outward appearance is identical for the
collar [6] of the separation roller and the col-
[6] [7] lar [7] of the paper feed roller. However, the
one-way mechanism is provided on the inside
of the collar [7] of the paper feed roller with
[8] no mechanism provided for the collar [6] of
the separation roller. Be careful not to con-
fuse one with the other.

steps in reverse.
1050fs2712c
2 -79
D. Removing/reinstalling the tray
Caution:
• The tray is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with two people.
NOTE
• The procedure for removing/reinstalling the trays /1 to /2 is identical. The explanation here is made
of the tray /1.
• When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other
II Maintenance
than those specified may cause damage to the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door.
2. Lightly raise up lightly the tray lock lever [1] and
pull out the tray [2].
[2]
3. When paper remains in the tray, take it all out.
[1]
1050fs2715c
2 -80
4. Remove the stopper screws [2], one each, pro-

[2] [1]
vided at either side of the rail [1] and pull the tray
further out.
II Maintenance
[2]
1050fs2716c
2 -81
5. Remove the screws [1], one each, provided at

[1] [2] [4] [3]
either side of he rail, hold the tray [2] at the spec-
ified positions [3] and raise it up to remove it.
NOTE
• When raising up the tray, be sure to hold it at
the specified positions [3] and raise it up with
two persons.
• Be absolutely sure to avoid holding it at posi-
tions [4] that can be easily deformed. This
II Maintenance
may affect the paper tray, thus resulting in a

[3] [1] jam.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check to see if
the knobs [5] provided at the 4 places on the
rail are securely in the notches [6] of the tray.

steps in reverse.
[5] [6] 1050fs2717c
2 -82
E. Replacing the paper feed clutch/separation clutch

• Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual
replacement cycle)
• Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual
replacement cycle)
1. Remove the rail stopper screw of the tray and

[1] [2] pull out the tray.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the clutch
II Maintenance
cover [2].
1050fs2713c
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the 2

[4] [7]
wire binding bands [2].
4. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the paper
[3] feed clutch [4] and the separation clutch [5].
NOTE
[6]
[5] • When reinstalling it, be sure to engage the
[6] stopper [6] of the clutch with the stopper sec-
tion [7].
[7]

steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] 1050fs2714c
2 -83
1.5.7 Vertical conveyance section

A. Removing/reinstalling the vertical conveyance unit
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover.
[2] [1] [3] 2. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
guide holder [2].
NOTE
• The roller may get stained with paper dust
that has gathered in the paper dust guide
II Maintenance
[4] holder [2]. Be sure to remove it when remov-

[4] ing the vertical conveyance unit.

4. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the verti-
[5] [6] cal conveyance unit [5].
NOTE
• When placing the vertical conveyance unit, be
sure to place it with the jam open/close door
side down. Placing it with the roller side down
1050fs2732c
may cause damage to the gear [6]. When
placing it with the roller side down, be sure to
remove 2 gears [6].

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• Pulling out the main body tray with the verti-
cal conveyance unit removed may damage
the guide roller that brings down forcibly the
pick-up roller of the main body tray. Be abso-
lutely sure not to pull out the main body tray
with the vertical conveyance unit removed.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to move the verti-
cal conveyance unit [5] to the rear side and
tighten it up with the screws [4].
2 -84
B. Replacing the pre-registration clutch/vertical conveyance clutch

• Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3): Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual
replacement cycle)
• Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2): Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual replace-
ment cycle)
(2) Procedure
[2] 2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See "1.5.7
II Maintenance
A. Removing/reinstalling the vertical conveyance
unit.")
3. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 gears
[2].
NOTE
[1] • When reinstalling it, take note of the direction
1050fs2733c
of the gears.
4. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the 3

[4] [5] [3] [6] wire binding bands [2].
5. Remove 3 C-clips [3] and then remove the pre-
registration clutch /1 (CL1) [4], the vertical con-
veyance clutch (CL2) [5], and the pre-registration
clutch /2 (CL3) [6].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, set the stopper [7] of the
[8] [7] [1] [2] clutch to the screw [8].

steps in reverse.
1050fs2734c
2 -85
C. Replacing the pre-registration roller /1, /2, the registration bearing and the conveyance rollers /2
and /3
• Pre-registration roller /1 and /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 6,000,000 prints for actual replace-
ment cycle)
• Pre-registration bearing /1 and /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 6,000,000 prints for actual
replacement cycle)
• Conveyance roller /2: Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 6,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
[4] [2] [6] 2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See "1.5.7
[4]
[5] unit.")
3. Remove the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1)
and /2 (CL3) and the vertical conveyance clutch
(CL2). (See "1.5.7 B. Replacing the pre-registra-
[3] tion clutch/vertical conveyance clutch.")
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and the connector
[2], and remove the wire binding bands [3] at the
5 places.
[7] [3] [1]
5. Remove 4 screws [4] (one each at either side of
each roller) and then remove the roller covers /1
[8] [5] and /2 [6].
NOTE
[9] • Be careful that no damage is caused to the
sensor.
• When removing the roller covers /1 [5] and /2
[6], be sure to pull up the upper side.
• When reinstalling the roller covers /1 [5] and /
2 [6], be sure to set the grooves at both sides
1050fs2735c
to the projection [8] and then press it lightly in
the direction of the paper through slit [9].
2 -86
6. Remove the E-rings [1], one each provided at the

[4]
4 places, the bearings [2], one each, the pre-reg-
istration roller /1 [3] and the pre-registration roller
/2 [4].
NOTE
[3] • When removing and reinstalling the pre-regis-
tration rollers /1 [3] and /2 [4], be careful that
they are not damaged by the corners of the
guide plate.
II Maintenance
[1] • When reinstalling the bearing [2], be sure to
raise the conveyance guide plate so that it is
in the jam release condition.
[2]
1050fs2736c

[2] [2].
[1] 1050fs2738c
2 -87
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1], 2 belt stoppers [2], the belt

[5]
[3], 2 pulleys [4] and 2 pins [5].
[4]
II Maintenance
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2739c
9. Remove the E-rings [1], one each provided at 4

[5] [4]
places, and then remove the plastic washers [2],
one each, the bearing [3], one each, the vertical
conveyance roller /2 [4] and the vertical convey-
ance roller /3 [5].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, check to
see if each roller rotates smoothly.
[3]
[1]
[2]
1050fs2740c
2 -88
D. Replacing the conveyance roller /1

(2) Procedure
2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See "1.5.7
unit.")
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear
II Maintenance
[1] [2] and the pin [3].
NOTE
• When installing the E-ring [1], be careful not
to damage the teeth of the gear [2].
[2] [3]
1050fs2741c
2 -89
4. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 plastic

[4]
washers [2], 2 bearing [3] and the conveyance
roller /1 [4].
NOTE
• When removing and reinstalling the convey-
ance roller /1 [4], be careful that it does not
get damaged by the corners of the guide
plate.
[1] • When reinstalling the bearing [3], be sure to
II Maintenance
raise the conveyance guide plate so that it

gets into the jam release condition.
[3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
NOTE
• After completion of the installation, check to
see if the roller rotates smoothly.
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2742c
2 -90
E. Replacing the conveyance exit roller

• Conveyance exit roller: Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 6,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (See "1.5.7
unit.")
[1] 3. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cover
II Maintenance
[1] [2].
1050fs2743c

[2] and the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2744c
2 -91
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear

cover [2] and the bearing [3].
[2] NOTE
[1]
• When installing the bearing [3], be sure to
install it from the inside to the gear cover [2].
[3]
1050fs2745c
II Maintenance

NOTE
• The gear removed at the step 4 is different
[3]
from the one removed at the step 6. Be care-
ful not to confuse one with the other.
[2]
[2] [1]
1050fs2746c
2 -92

[2] [3]
II Maintenance
[1]
1050fs2747c
8. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 wire

[1] [2] [4] [3]
binding bands [2].
9. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the sen-
sor mounting plate [4].
[3]
1050fs2748c
2 -93
10. Remove 2 E-rings [1], 2 washers [2] and 2 bear-

[3] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]
ings [3], and take out the conveyance exit roller
[4].
NOTE
• When taking out the conveyance exit roller
[4], the bearing [6] of the paper dust guide
brush assembly [5] is displaced. When rein-
stalling it, be sure to get it back to the original
place.
II Maintenance

steps in reverse.
[4] [5]
[6]
[6] 1050fs2749c
2 -94
F. Replacing the paper dust guide brush assembly

• Paper dust guide brush assembly: Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual replace-
ment cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
[1]
guide holder [2].
II Maintenance
[2]
1050fs2750c
[2] [3]
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the holder [2]
from the shaft [3] of the paper dust guide brush.
[1]
1050fs2751c
2 -95
3. Remove the shaft [1] of the paper dust guide

[1] [2]
brush assembly from the coupling [2] and then
remove the paper dust guide brush assembly
and the bearing [4].
[3]
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[4] 1050fs2752c
G. Cleaning of the paper dust guide holder

(1) Procedure
1. Pull the knob [1] and remove the paper dust
[1]
guide holder [2].
2. Clean the paper dust guide holder [2] with the air
brush.
steps in reverse.
1050fs2753c
2 -96
1.5.8 ADU
A. Pulling out/reinstallation of the ADU
Caution:
• Be absolutely sure to avoid forcibly turning ON the interlock switches /1 (MS1) and /2 (MS2) with
the ADU pulled out. Otherwise, a high voltage may unexpectedly develop.
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Rt [1] and the front door /Lt
II Maintenance
[2] [1] [2].
2. While pressing the lock release lever [3] with a
driver in the arrow-marked direction, pull out the
ADU and bring the lever [4] down to pull out the
ADU section [5].
3. When reinstalling it, push in the ADU and bring
up the lever that pulls out the ADU section.
[5] [4]
[3]
1050fs2001c
2 -97
B. Cleaning of the paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Lw
• Paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Lw: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU from the main body. (See "1.5.8
[3] A. Pulling out/reinstallation of the ADU.")
2. After sliding once the paper dust removing lever
[1] in the arrow-marked direction [2], pull out and
remove the paper dust removing brush [3] for the
II Maintenance
registration roller /Lw.

[2] (The picture shows the lever that has been pulled
out a little.)
NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper dust removing
brush for the registration roller /Lw, be sure to
[1] insert it fully until it hits against the back.
1050fs2131c
When the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Lw is not inserted fully, this
may block the light path of detection of the
registration sensor (PS40), thus resulting in a
jam.
3. Clean the cleaning section [2] of the paper dust

[1]
removing brush [1] for the registration roller /Lw
with the blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[2] fs503fs2132c
2 -98
C. Cleaning of the paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Up
• Paper dust removing brush for the registration roller /Up: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] A. Pulling out/reinstallation of the ADU.")
2. Push out the projections [1], two each, and
release the lock to remove 2 paper dust remov-
ing brushes /1 [2] and /2 [3] for the registration
[3]
II Maintenance
roller /Up.
[1] 1050fs2133c
3. Clean each of 2 cleaning sections [2] of the

[1]
paper dust removing brush [1] for the registration
roller /Up.
steps in reverse.
[2] fs503fs2134c
2 -99
D. Cleaning of the registration sensor

• Registration sensor: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of the
sensor mounting piece [2].
II Maintenance
fs503fs2135c
3. Turn over the sensor mounting piece [1] and

[2]
clean the registration sensor (PS40) [2] with the
blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[1] fs503fs2136c
2 -100
E. Replacing the transfer/separation charger unit

• Transfer/separation charger unit: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the ADU from the main body. (See "1.5.8
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the con-
nector cover [2].
[2]
II Maintenance
1050fs2019c
[3] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].
NOTE
• When the transfer/separation charger unit is a
PCS corresponding part (See "4.5 PCS corre-
sponding parts."), remove also the connector
[2].
4. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the transfer/

separation unit [4].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2020c
2 -101
F. Removing/reinstalling the ADU cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the lever
[6] [2] that pulls out the ADU section.
3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and remove the ADU cover /
[4]
Lt [5].
Rt [7].
II Maintenance

[5]
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2023c
2 -102
G. Removing/reinstalling the registration section

(1) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the ADU cover. (See "1.5.8 F. Remov-
ing/reinstalling the ADU cover.")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi
feed sensor cover [2] while removing the wire
harness from the cord clamp.
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2138c
4. Remove 5 connectors [1].
[1]
[1]
[1] 1050fs2139c
2 -103
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the regis-

tration section [2].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[2]
[1] 1050fs2140c
2 -104
H. Replacing the discharge wire/transfer presser rubber

• Discharge wire: Every 750,000 prints
• Transfer presser rubber: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [1]
2. Remove the transfer/separation charger unit.
(See "1.5.8 E. Replacing the transfer/separation
II Maintenance
[5] charger unit.")
3. Release the locks [1] at the 6 places and remove
[4] the plunging prevention plates /1 [2] and /2 [3].
[1] 4. Remove the spark arrester plates /Fr [4] and /Rr
[5].
[1] [3] 1050fs2146c
2 -105
5. Remove the springs [1], one each, 3 discharge

[1]
wires [2] and 3 transfer presser rubbers [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the discharge wire, be sure
to insert each wire into the notch [4] of each
of the transfer presser rubbers.
• Reinstall the discharge wire so that the hook
[5] of each spring turns to the inside.
II Maintenance

[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2147c
2 -106
I. Replacing the transfer cleaning assembly/separation cleaning assemblies /1 and /2 and C-clips
• Transfer cleaning assembly: Every 750,000 prints
• Separation cleaning assembly /1: Every 750,000 prints
• Separation cleaning assembly /2: Every 750,000 prints
• C-clip: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
charger unit.")
[1]
3. Remove the discharge wire. (See "1.5.8 H.
[3] Replacing the discharge wire/transfer presser
rubber.")
4. Remove 3 C-clips [2] from the shaft [1] of each of
the cleaning assemblies.
5. Turn over the transfer/separation charger unit [3]
and remove the transfer cleaning assembly [4]
and the separation cleaning assemblies /1 [5]
[4] and /2 [6].
steps in reverse.
[5]
[6] 1050fs2148c
2 -107
J. Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly

• Transfer assist sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
charger unit.")
II Maintenance
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the trans-

fer assist sheet assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2149c
2 -108
NOTE
[2]
• When reinstalling the transfer assist sheet
assembly [1], make sure that the projections
[2] at both ends get into the spring [3].
• When cramping it with a screw, be sure to put
the spacer [5] in the stepped section of the
screw [4]. At this time, take note that the
spacer does not get caught by the stepped
section of the screw.
After completion of installation, be sure to
II Maintenance
check to see if the transfer assist sheet
assembly [1] moves smoothly in the arrow-
[1] [3] marked direction.

steps in reverse.
[5]
[4] 1050fs2406c
2 -109
K. Replacing the TSL

• TSL: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
charger unit.")
II Maintenance

4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the trans-
fer exposure cover [2].
5. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
TSL [4].
[4] [2]
[1] [3] 1050fs2141c
2 -110
L. Replacing the registration roller /Up and the registration bearing

• Registration roller /Up: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Registration bearing: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Lw. (See "1.5.8 B. Cleaning of
II Maintenance
the paper dust removing brush for the registra-
tion roller /Lw.")
3. Remove the paper dust removing brush for the
registration roller /Up. (See "1.5.8 C. Cleaning of
[3] [4] the paper dust removing brush for the registra-
tion roller /Up.")
4. Remove the registration section. (See "1.5.8 G.
Removing/reinstalling the registration section.")
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob
[2].
6. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the gear
[4].
[1]
[2] 1050fs2150c
2 -111
7. Remove 2 springs [1].
[1]
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2151c
2 -112
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the regis-

tration bearing [2].
[2]
[1] [4] and the pin [5].
10. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the regis-
tration bearing [7].
11. Open the pre-transfer jam handler [8] and move
and remove the registration roller /Up [9] in the
arrow-marked directions [10] and [11] in this
order.
II Maintenance
[8] [9] 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[11] [10]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5] 1050fs2152c
2 -113
M. Replacing the ADU exit roller, ADU conveyance rollers /2, /3 and /4
• ADU exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• ADU conveyance roller /2: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1]
II Maintenance

3. Remove the registration section. (See "1.5.8 G.
Removing/reinstalling the registration section.")
tration cooling fan (FM17) [3].
[3] [2] 1050fs2154c
6. Disconnect all the connectors [2] (8 pcs.) that are

[4] [3] [1] [4]
connected to the ADU drive board /2 [1]and
intermediate connector [3].
7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stay
[5] while removing the wiring harness from the
wiring harness clamp.
[2] [5] 1050fs2155c
2 -114
8. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the loop

[1]
motor assembly [2].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2156c

[2] [1]
tration motor assembly [2].
[1] 1050fs2157c
2 -115
10. Remove 3 connectors [1], the 2 connector [2],

the 1 connector [3] and the 1 connector [4].
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
[3]
[4]
1050fs2158c
2 -116

[2] while removing the wiring harness from the
wiring harness clamp.
12. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the ADU
lock solenoid assembly [4].
[1]
II Maintenance
[1]
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
1050fs2159c
2 -117
14. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the bear-
ing [5].
15. Pull out the ADU exit roller [6] and remove it.
NOTE
[6]
• The roller is provided with one E-ring. Be sure
to remove also this E-ring when replacing the
roller.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3] [6] 1050fs2160c
2 -118
16. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the

[9] [8]
spacer [2].
17. Remove the belt [3] and then remove the pulley
ing [7].
19. Pull out the ADU conveyance roller /4 [8] and
remove it.
20. Following the steps 17 to 20, remove the ADU
conveyance roller /3 [9].
II Maintenance
NOTE
• Each roller is provided with one E-ring. Be
sure to remove also this E-ring when replac-
ing the roller.
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[7] [5] 1050fs2161c
2 -119
21. Remove the E-ring [1].

22. Remove 2 screws [2] and pull out and remove
the ADU conveyance roller /2 [4].
[4]
[4]
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
[3] 1050fs2162c
2 -120
23. Remove 5 E-ring [2], the gear [3], the pin [4] and
[7]
the bearing [5] and [6] from the ADU conveyance
roller /2 [1].
NOTE
[2]
• When reinstalling the bearing [6], be sure that
[6] the flange [7] turns outside.

steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[5] [2] 1050fs2195c
2 -121
N. Replacing the ADU conveyance roller /1 /ADU reverse roller/Reverse/exit roller/ADU acceleration
roller/paper exit rollers /1 and /2 assembly
• ADU reverse roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Reverse/exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• ADU acceleration roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Paper exit roller /1: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Paper exit roller /2 assembly: Every 6,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the fusing section. (See "1.5.9 Fusing
section.")
[3] 3. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
4. Remove the connector [2].
[2] 5. Remove the connectors [4] and [5], 16 pcs in all,
that are connected to the ADU drive board /1
(ADUDB1) [3].
[4] [5] [8] NOTE

• It is not necessary to remove the connector
[7] of the ADU cooling fan /1 (RM15) [6].
• It is possible to remove the connector [8] on
the wiring harness side instead of removing
the connector [5].
[4]
[6] [4] [7] [4] [4] [4] 1050fs2189c
2 -122

[1] [3] [4] [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the stay, be sure to set the
projection [4] of the ADU to the positioning
hole [3].
II Maintenance
[2]
[1] 1050fs2190c
2 -123

acceleration motor assembly [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the ADU acceleration motor
assembly, be sure to set the projection [4] of
the ADU to the positioning hole [3].
II Maintenance
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3] [4] [1] 1050fs2191c
2 -124
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the thick

paper assist solenoid assembly [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thick paper assist sole-
noid assembly, be sure to set the projection
[4] of the ADU to the positioning hole [3].
II Maintenance
[3] [4] [2]
[1]
[3] [4] 1050fs2192c
9. Loosen 3 screws [1] and release the tension of

[4]
the belt [4] while sliding the ADU reverse motor
[5] assembly [2] in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[6] NOTE
• When setting the belt, the tension is automat-
[7] ically adjusted by the spring [5]. Be sure to
[8] tighten up the screw [1] after the belt has
been set.

[3] [6] [2] reverse motor assembly [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the ADU reverse motor
assembly, be sure to set the projection [8] of
the ADU to the positioning hole [7].
[1]
[7] [8] 1050fs2193c
2 -125
11. Remove 2 screws [2] and pull out the ADU con-
veyance roller /1 [3].
II Maintenance
[2]
[3]
[1] 1050fs2194c
2 -126
12. Remove 5 E-ring [2], the gear [3], the pin [4] and
[7]
the bearing [5] and [6] from the ADU conveyance
roller /1 [1].
NOTE
[2]
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[5] [2] 1050fs2195c
2 -127
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the belt

[1] [5]
[4] while sliding the pulley [2] of the reverse/exit
motor (M13) in the arrow-marked direction [3].
NOTE
• When setting the belt, the tension is automat-
ically adjusted by the spring [5]. Be sure to
tighten up the screw [1] after the belt has
been set.
II Maintenance
[4] [3] [2] 1050fs2196c
14. Remove the pierce ring [1], the spacer [2], the
pulley [3] and the pin [4].
15. Remove 2 screws [5] and pull out the ADU
reverse roller [6].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4] 1050fs2197c
2 -128
16. Remove 2 pierce rings [2] and the bearing [3]

[4]
from the ADU reverse roller [1].
[3]
NOTE
the flange [4] turns outside.
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
1050fs2198c
17. Following the steps 14 to 16, remove the

reverse/exit roller [1] and the ADU acceleration
roller [2].
[2] [1] 1050fs2199c
2 -129
18. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the

spacer [2].
19. Remove the belt [3] and then remove the pulley
20. Remove 2 screws [6] and pull out the paper exit
roller /2 assembly [7].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[5] 1050fs2200c
2 -130
21. Following the steps 21, 22 and 23, pull out the
paper exit roller /1 [1].
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2202c
22. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and the bearing [3] from the
[4]
paper exit roller /1 [1].
[3]
NOTE

steps in reverse.
[1]
[2] 1050fs2203c
2 -131
O. Replacing the reverse gate

• Reverse gate: Every 10,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the reverse sec-
tion cover [2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
1050fs2204c

[2] [5] [7] [5] [6]
4. Remove the spring [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and release the fixing of
the actuator [4].
reverse/exit solenoid assembly [6].
NOTE
• Reinstall the reverse/exit solenoid assembly
so that it comes to the same graduation [7] as
that used for removal.
[1] [4] [3] 1503fs2205c
2 -132

remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] [2] 8. Open the reverse door [3] and remove the
reverse gate assembly [4] while sliding it in the
arrow-marked directions [5] and [6] in this order.
[6] [5]
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2206c
9. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then

[2]
remove 7 reverse gates [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2207c
2 -133
P. Replacing the fusing exit roller

• Fusing exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt, and pull out the
[1]
ADU from the main body. (See "1.5.8 A. Pulling
out/reinstallation of the ADU.")
2. Loosen 3 screws [1] and remove the reverse sec-
tion cover [2].
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2786c
2 -134

[2]
4. Remove 2 stepped screws [2] and then remove
the paper reverse/exit section [3].
NOTE
• When attaching the stepped screw [2], make
sure that it gets in securely up to the step of
the screw.
II Maintenance
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs2787c

[2] [5] [7] [5] [6]
the actuator [4].
reverse/exit solenoid assembly [6].
NOTE
• Reinstall the reverse/exit solenoid assembly
so that it comes to the same graduation [7] as
that used for removal.
[1] [4] [3] 1503fs2205c
2 -135

ing.
II Maintenance
[1] 1050fs2792c
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and 2 screws [2], and slide
[2] [3]
the bearing [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] 1050fs2788c
11. Pull out and remove gently the shaft [1] of the
fusing exit roller so that it does not touch the
guide plate.
[1]
1050fs2789c
2 -136

[2]
13. Remove 4 E-rings [2] and slide 4 pins [3] in the
direction in which they can be removed. And
then pull out 4 fusing exit rollers [4] in the oppo-
site direction to remove them.
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[4]
[1] [3] 1050fs2790c
2 -137
1.5.9 Fusing section

A. Replacing the cleaning web
Caution:
• Immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), the fusing
section is very hot and you may get burnt. Be sure to start operations when the temperature cools
down sufficiently.

• Cleaning web: Every 750,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the web
cover [2].
[1]
1050fs2163c
3. Release the couplings [1] provided at the 2

places in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the used cleaning web [2].
[2]
[1]
1050fs2164c
2 -138
4. Set the shaft [2] on the unused side of the new

[2] cleaning web [1] to the driven couplings /Rr [3]
and /Fr [4].
[3]
[6]
NOTE
• Be sure to set each detent [5] on the driven
couplings to the notch [6] of the shaft on the
[5]
unused side. When the web is installed in the
wrong direction, it does not coincide with the
notch.
II Maintenance
5. Hold either side [8] of the shaft [7] on the take-up
side of the new cleaning web with both hands,
and take up the new cleaning web until the blue
[7] line [9] disappears.
[1] NOTE
• The performance of the new cleaning web is
guaranteed from the position in which the
blue line disappears. Be sure to take up the
cleaning web up to this position.
[8]
[9]
[4]
[6]
[2] [5]
1050fs2165c
2 -139
6. Set the shaft [2] on the take-up side of the new

[4]
cleaning web [1] to the take-up couplings /Rr [3]
and /Fr [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to set each detent [5] on the driven
coupling to the notch [6] of the shaft on the
unused side.
7. The reinstallation hereafter should be made fol-

II Maintenance
lowing the removal steps in reverse.

[1] [2] [6] [5]
NOTE
• When the cleaning web is replaced, be sure to
reset the counter of the fusing cleaning web
in the service mode. (See chapter III "4.5.3 B.
Fixed parts count list" in the Field Service for
the main body.)
[3] [5] [6] [2] 1050fs2166c
2 -140
B. Removing/reinstalling the fusing section
Caution:
• Immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), the fusing
section is very hot and you may get burnt. Be sure to start operations when the temperature cools
down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
II Maintenance
[3] 2. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
[1] 3. Open the fusing paper exit section [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fusing
cover [4].
[4]
[2] 1050fs2002c
2 -141

assist plate [2].
the fusing section [4].
NOTE
• When fixing the fusing section [4], be sure to
tighten up the screw [3] while pressing it
toward the rear side.
II Maintenance
[2] [4] [7] [1] 7. Close the fusing paper exit section [5].
8. Slide the fusing section [4] diagonally to the front
side and hold it up with both hand to remove it.
NOTE
[5]
• When holding up the fusing section, be sure
to hold it at the jam release knob [6] and the
handle [7].
• When reinstalling it, be sure to slide it with the
fusing section set to the reversal section side.
[6]

steps in reverse.
[3] 1050fs2003c
2 -142
C. Opening/closing of the web section

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the fusing section. (See "1.5.9 B.
Removing/reinstalling the fusing section.")
3. Open the fusing paper exit section [1].
4. Insert the driver [4] into the hole [3] of the shaft
[1], and rotate the shaft to release pressure.
II Maintenance
NOTE
• When the web is closed and fixed, be sure to
[5] [6] rotate the shaft to apply pressure.
• Opening the web section disrupts the stabil-
ity. Be careful it does not fall down.
[4] 5. Remove 4 screws [6] and open the web section

[5].
steps in reverse.
[1] [2] [3]
[6] 1050fs2167c
2 -143
D. Replacing the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid touching the lamp section of the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2 with bare hands.
When touched, be sure to clean it with the roller cleaner.

• Fusing heater lamp /1: Every 3,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1]
3. Open the web section [1]. (See "1.5.9 C. Open-
ing/closing of the web section.")
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the 2 wir-
[4] ing harness clamps [2].
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [4] of the fusing
heater lamp /1 [3].
NOTE
• Be sure to fit in the fusing heater lamps /1 and
/2 with the manufacturer's mark in this side.
• When reinstalling the fusing heater lamp /1,
be sure to insert it securely while taking note
of the position in which the faston terminal is
installed.
6. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the wir-

[3] ing harness clamp [6].
[5] NOTE
• When reinstalling the wiring harness clamp,
[6] be sure to install it in the correct position.
When it is installed in a wrong position, the
fusing cover cannot be attached.
[4] 1050fs2168c
2 -144
7. Remove 2 faston terminals [2] of the fusing

[1]
heater lamp /2 [1].
NOTE
be sure to insert it securely while taking note
of the position in which the faston terminal is
installed.
8. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the lamp
II Maintenance
fixing plate /Fr [4].
9. Pull out and remove each of the fusing heater
lamps in the arrow-marked direction [5].
NOTE
[2] [6] • When reinstalling each of the fusing heater
lamps, check to see if either end of each lamp
is set in the fitting holes of the lamp fixing
plates /Fr [4] and /Rr [6].
• After each of the fusing heater lamps is
[5] installed, check to see if it is in touch with the
inner face of the fusing roller /Up [7].

steps in reverse.
[7] [3]
[4] [5] [2] 1050fs2407c
2 -145
E. Replacing the fusing roller /Up, the heat insulating sleeve, the bearing and the fusing gear
• Fusing roller /Up: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Heat insulating sleeve: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Bearing: Every 1,500,000 prints
• Fusing gear: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance

4. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 and /2. (See
"1.5.9. D. Replacing the fusing heater lamps /1
and /2.")
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up [1].
[1] 1050fs2169c
6. Remove the C-ring [2], the fusing gear [3], the

[7]
gear [4] (part not replaced), the heat insulating
sleeve [5] and the bearing [6] from the fusing
roller /Up [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeve
and the bearing, make sure that the flange [7]
turns outside.
7. Remove the C-ring [8], the heat insulating sleeve

[2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [6] [9] and the bearing [10] from the fusing roller /Up
[1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeve
and the bearing, make sure that the flange
[11] turns outside.
[10]
steps in reverse.
[9]
[8]
1050fs2170c
2 -146
F. Replacing the fusing roller /Lw assembly

• Fusing roller /Lw assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3]
II Maintenance
NOTE
• When removing the fusing roller /Lw assem-
bly with the web section open, the web sec-
tion may become unstable. So, be sure to
remove the cleaning web in advance. (See
"1.5.9 A. Replacing the cleaning web.")
[1]

[2] and /2.")
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up. (See "1.5.9 E.
Replacing the fusing roller /Up, the heat insulat-
ing sleeve, the bearing and the fusing gear.")
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the jam
1050fs2171c
release knob [2].
7. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assembly [3].
2 -147
NOTE
• Before the roller is pressured, fix the pressure
spring end [1] in front and rear at 2 to 4 mm
[3] from the pressure plate end [2].
When this operation is not made, insufficient
fusing may result when printing a thick paper.
Standard: [3] 2 mm to 4 mm

II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2919c
2 -148
G. Replacing the fusing cleaning sheet assembly

• Fusing cleaning sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
and /2.")
5. Remove the fusing roller /Up. (See "1.5.9 E.
[2] [1] Replacing the fusing roller /Up, the heat insulat-
ing sleeve, the bearing and the fusing gear.")
6. Remove the fusing roller /Lw assembly. (See
"1.5.9 F. Replacing the fusing roller /Lw assem-
bly.")
cleaning unit [2].
[1] 1050fs2172c
2 -149

[1]
cleaning sheet assembly [2].
9. Remove the paper dust that has gathered in [3]
of the fusing cleaning unit.
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[2] [3] 1050fs2408c
2 -150
H. Removing/reinstalling the fusing heating roller assembly

(1) Procedure
[5]
3. Remove the spring [1] (long one) and [2] (short
one).
[1]
NOTE
II Maintenance
• The springs [1] and [2] are different in size and
length. When installing them, take note of the
positions in which they are installed.

ground terminal [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the thick
paper conveyance assist plate [6].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thick paper conveyance
assist plate [6], be sure to install the springs
[5] [6] [1] and [2] and the ground terminal [4] and
then push the thick paper conveyance assist
plate in the direction of the paper exit. The
plate must move smoothly.
[4] [3] [2] 1050fs2173c
2 -151
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing

plate [2].
NOTE
[1] • When reinstalling the fixing plate, be sure to
set the positioning hole [3] and the position-
ing slot [4] to 2 projections [5] of the fusing
section.
[2] [3] [5]

II Maintenance
[1]
[4] [5] 1050fs2174c
2 -152

8. Remove the screw [2] and open the fusing heat-
ing roller assembly [3].
[2]
II Maintenance
[3]
[1]
[1]
1050fs2175c
2 -153
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing heating roller
assembly [1], be sure to set the guide hole [3]
of the fusing heating roller assembly to the
[1] guide pin [2] of the fusing section.

steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[2]
[3] 1050fs2176c
2 -154
I. Replacing the fusing heater lamp /3
NOTE
• Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the fusing heater lamp /3 with bare hands. When
touched, be sure to clean it with the roller cleaner.

(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
[1] 2. Remove the fusing section. (See "1.5.9 B.
[2] 3. Open the fusing heating roller assembly. (See
"1.5.9 H. Removing/reinstalling the fusing heat-
ing roller assembly.")
4. Cut off the wire binding band [1] and remove the
[8] connector [2].
5. Cut off the wire binding band [3].
[7] [9]
[10] NOTE
• When attaching a new wiring band, be sure to
use a heat-resistant one.

ing harness clamp [5].
7. Remove the faston terminal [6].
NOTE
• Be sure to fit in the fusing heater lamp /3 with
the manufacturer's mark in this side.
• When reinstalling the faston terminal, be sure
[6] to insert it securely.
[3]
8. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the fixing

[5] plate /Rr [8].
[4] NOTE
• When reinstalling the fixing plate /Rr, be sure
to set the positioning hole [9] to the projection
[10] of the fusing heating roller assembly.
[12] [13][14] [11] 1050fs2177c
9. Remove the screw [11] and then remove the fix-

ing plate /Fr [12].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fixing plate /Fr, be sure
to set the positioning hole [13] to the projec-
tion [14] of the fusing heating roller assembly.
2 -155
10. Pull out the fusing heater lamp /3 [1] from the
front side [3] of the fusing heating roller assembly
[2] and remove it.
[2]
NOTE
be sure to take note of the direction.
• After completion of the installation of the fus-
ing heater lamp /3, check to see if it is in
[1]
touch with the inner face of the fusing heating
II Maintenance
[3] roller.
1050fs2801c
steps in reverse.
2 -156
J. Replacing the fusing heating roller, the heat insulation sleeve /Lw and the bearing
• Fusing heating roller: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Heat insulating sleeve /Lw: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Bearing: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5] [2] [4]
II Maintenance
3. Open the fusing heating roller assembly. (See
4. Remove the fusing heater lamp /3. (See "1.5.9 I.
Replacing the fusing heater lamp /3.")
5. Remove the fusing cleaning sheet assembly.
(See "1.5.9 G. Replacing the fusing cleaning
sheet assembly.")
6. Remove the C-rings [1], one each, and then
remove the bearings [2], one each, to remove the
[3] [1]
fusing heating roller [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the bearing, be sure to take
note of the direction of the flange [4].
7. Remove the heat insulating sleeves /Lw [5], one

each, from the fusing heating roller.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the heat insulating sleeves /
Lw, make sure that each of the flanges turn to
the fusing heating roller side.

steps in reverse.
[1] [4] [2] [5] 1050fs2178c
2 -157
K. Replacing the fusing claw /Lw

• Fusing claw /Lw: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
3. Open the fusing paper exit section. (See "1.5.9
II Maintenance
C. Opening/closing of the web section.")

4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove 2 fusing
claw /Lw assemblies [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw assem-
bly, be sure to set the positioning hole [3] to
the projection [4] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] 1050fs2179c
5. Remove the spring [2] from each of the fusing

[3] [2] [4] [1]
claw /Lw assembly [1] and then remove the fus-
ing claw /Lw [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw, be sure
to take note of the position [4] to which the
spring is hooked.

steps in reverse.
[4] 1050fs2180c
2 -158
L. Replacing the fusing claw /Up

• Fusing claw /Up: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
4. Remove the springs [1], one each, and then
remove 6 fusing claws /Up [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1050fs2181c
2 -159
M. Replacing the fusing actuator

• Fusing actuator: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance

4. Remove the fusing sensor cover [1].
[1] 1050fs2182c
2 -160
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fus-

[10] [6]
ing sensor cover plate [2].
[7] NOTE
[8] • When reinstalling the fusing sensor cover
plate, be sure to set the positioning hole [3] to
[5] the projection [4] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.
6. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the fus-
II Maintenance
ing claw /Lw assembly [6].
[1] [2] [9] NOTE

• When reinstalling the fusing claw /Lw assem-
bly, be sure to set the positioning hole [7] to
the projection [8] of the fusing paper exit sec-
tion.

actuator assembly [10].
[3][4] 1050fs2183c
2 -161
8. Pull out the shaft fixing member [1], release the

spring [2] and remove the fusing actuator [4] from
the fusing actuator assembly [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing actuator, be sure
to take note of the position [5] to which the
spring is hooked.
• When reinstalling the shaft fixing member, be
sure to take note of its direction.
[1] [5] [3]
II Maintenance

steps in reverse.
[4] [2] [5] 1050fs2184c
2 -162
N. Replacing the thermistor /2
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the thermistor /2, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with
the fusing roller /Up.

• Thermistor /2: Every 3,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt, and pull out the
ADU from the main body. (See "1.5.8 A. Pulling
out/reinstallation of the ADU.")
3. Open the fusing paper exit section [1].
4. Insert the driver [4] into the hole [3] of the shaft [2]
and rotate the shaft [2] clockwise to release pres-
sure.
NOTE
• Not releasing pressure may cause damage to
[1] [2] [3]
the fusing heater lamp. Be sure to release it.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to rotate the shaft
[2] counterclockwise to apply pressure.

6. Remove 4 screws [6] and 2 stepped screws [7],
and then remove the web unit [8].
NOTE
• When attaching the stepped screw [7], make
sure that it gets in securely up to the step of
the screw.
• Be sure to remove the web section with it
closed. If the web is removed with it open, the
web section becomes unstable and you may
get injured.
[2] 1050fs2185c
2 -163
7. Cut off the wiring band [1].

[4]
NOTE
• When attaching a new wiring band, be sure to
8. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ther-

mistor /2 assembly [3].
NOTE
II Maintenance
• When reinstalling the thermistor /2 assembly,

[3] [2] check surely to see if it is in touch with the
fusing roller /Up [4].
9. Remove the connector [5] of the thermistor /2.
NOTE
• There are 4 connectors for the thermistor pro-
vided at the same place and it is difficult to
identify a corresponding connector in
advance. Therefore, the connector to be
[5]
removed can be identified by following the
wiring harness of the thermistor /2.
[1] 1050fs2186c
[1]
mistor /2 [2].
steps in reverse.
[2] 1050fs2409c
2 -164
O. Replacing the thermistor /4
Caution:
• After completion of the installation of the thermistor /4, check to ensure it is in touch with the fus-
ing heating roller.

• Thermistor /4: Every 3,000,000 prints
II Maintenance
(2) Procedure
[8] [5] [9] ing roller assembly.")
4. Cut off 2 wiring bands [1].
mistor /4 assembly [5].
NOTE
be sure to set the attaching hole [6] to the
projection [7] of the fusing heating roller
assembly.
check to see if it is in touch with the fusing
[1]
heating roller [8].
[3] [2] [6][7] [4] 1050fs2187c
7. Remove the connector [9] of the thermistor /4

assembly.
NOTE
2 -165
8. Cut off the wiring band [1].

mistor /4 [3].
NOTE
[2]
• When attaching the wiring band, be sure to

steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[3]
[1] 1050fs2410c
2 -166
P. Replacing the web motor

• Web motor: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3]
II Maintenance
5. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the web
motor unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [5]
1050fs2188c
2 -167

[1]
7. Loosen the screw [2] and pull out the web motor
[3] in the arrow-marked direction.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the web motor, be sure to
align the D-cut face of the web motor shaft
with the direction of the screw [2].

II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2] 1050fs2411c
2 -168
Q. Removing/reinstalling the thermistor /1
NOTE
• Be sure to make the position adjustments when the roller has cooled down.
• When reinstalling the thermistor /1, adjust it with the temperature sensor positioning jig /A before
fixing it. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermistor /1, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing roller /Up.
(1) Procedure for removal
II Maintenance
[3] 2. Remove the fusing section. (See "1.5.9 B.
3. Remove the web section. (See "1.5.9 N. Replac-
ing the thermistor /2.")
[2] 4. Cut off the wiring band [1].
NOTE
• When attaching a wiring band, be sure to use
a heat-resistant one.

mistor /1 [3].
NOTE
• For the method for installing the thermistor /
1, see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
NOTE
[4]
[1]
1050fs2208c
2 -169
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

1. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig /A
[3] between the thermistor /1 [1] and the fusing
[3] roller /Up [2].
2. Adjust the position of the thermistor /1 so that it
become flush with the temperature sensor posi-
tioning jig /A, and then fix it with the screw [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to adjust the distance a [5] between
II Maintenance
the thermistor /1 and the fusing roller /Up so

that it becomes equal to the thickness of the
[1] temperature sensor positioning jig /A.
[4] Specified value: a = 0.75 ± 0.1 mm
• Make sure that the thermistor /1 is parallel to
the roller.
[5] 3. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [4].

4. For the parts to be reinstalled hereafter, reinstall
them following the removal steps in reverse.
[2] 1050fs2209c
2 -170
R. Removing/reinstalling the thermistor /3
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thermistor /3, adjust it with the temperature sensor positioning jig /A before
fixing it. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermistor /3, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing heating roller.
II Maintenance
[6]
[3] Removing/reinstalling the fusing section.")
[1] 4. Cut off 2 wiring bands [1].
NOTE
[2]
• When attaching a wire binding band, be sure
to use a heat-resistant one.
5. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2 wir-

6. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the ther-
mistor /3 [5].
NOTE
• For the method for installing the thermistor /
3, see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
[4]
NOTE
[5] • There are 4 connectors for the thermistor pro-
1050fs2210c
2 -171

1. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig /B
[3] between the thermistor /3 [1] and the fusing
heating roller [2].
2. Adjust the position of the thermistor /3 so that it
become flush with the temperature sensor posi-
tioning jig /B, and then fix it with 2 screws [4].
NOTE
II Maintenance
the thermistor /3 and the fusing heating roller

so that it becomes equal to the thickness of
[4] the temperature sensor positioning jig /A.
[1]
Specified value: a = 0.7 ± 0.1 mm
• Make sure that the thermistor /3 is parallel to
[3] the roller.
3. Apply Screw-lock to 2 screws [4].

[5] 4. For the parts to be reinstalled hereafter, reinstall
[2] 1050fs2211c
2 -172
S. Removing/reinstalling the thermostat /1
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thermostat /1, adjust it with the thermostat positioning jig /A before fixing it.
Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermostat /1, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing roller /Up.
II Maintenance
[1]
3. Remove the web section. (See "1.5.9 N. Replac-
ing the thermistor /2.")
[2] 4. Remove 2 faston terminals [1].
mostat /1 [3].
NOTE
[3] • For method for reinstalling the thermostat /1,
see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
1050fs2212c
2 -173

1. Install 2 faston terminals [2] to the thermostat /1
[1].
[3]
2. Insert the thermostat positioning jig /A [4]
between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fusing
roller /Up [3].
3. Adjust the position of the thermostat /1 so that it
become flush with the thermostat positioning jig /
A, and then fix it with the screw [5].
II Maintenance
NOTE
[2]
the thermostat /1 and the fusing roller /Up so
[5]
that it becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat positioning jig /A.
[4]
4. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [5].

[1]
[6]
1050fs2213c
2 -174
T. Removing/reinstalling the thermostat /2
NOTE
• When reinstalling the thermostat /2, adjust it with the thermostat positioning jig /B before fixing it.
Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• After completion of the reinstallation of the thermostat /2, be sure to check the wiring harness to
see if it is in touch with the fusing heating roller.
II Maintenance
[1]
[3] "1.5.9 H. Removing/reinstalling the fusing heat-
4. Remove 2 faston terminals [1].
[2] mostat /2 [3].
NOTE
• For method for reinstalling the thermostat /2,
see "(2) Procedure for reinstallation."
1050fs2214c
2 -175

1. Install 2 faston terminals [2] to the thermostat /2
[2]
[1].
2. Insert the thermostat positioning jig /B [4]
[1] between the thermostat /2 [1] and the fusing
heating roller [3].
3. Adjust the position of the thermostat /2 so that it
become flush with the thermostat positioning jig /
B, and then fix it with the screw [5].
[5]
II Maintenance
NOTE
the thermostat /2 and the fusing heating roller
so that it becomes equal to the thickness of
the thermostat positioning jig /B.
4. Apply Screw-lock to the screw [5].

[3]
[4]
[6]
1050fs2215c
2 -176
1.5.10 Paper exit section

A. Removing/reinstalling the paper exit section
(1) Procedure
[1] 3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper
exit section [3].
[2]
[2] NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper exit section, be
II Maintenance
sure to hook the retention hole [4] to the pro-
jection [5] of the frame and then set the posi-
[4][5] [3] [6][7] tioning hole [6] to the positioning pin [7] of the
1050fs2216c
frame.

steps in reverse.
B. Cleaning of the paper exit sensor

• Paper exit sensor: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the paper exit section. (See "1.5.10 A.
Removing/reinstalling the paper exit section.")
3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS3) [1] with the
blower brush.
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2217c
2 -177
C. Replacing the main body paper exit roller

• Main body paper exit roller: Every 6,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[7] 2. Remove the paper exit section. (See "1.5.10 A.
Removing/reinstalling the paper exit section.")
[6] 3. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear
II Maintenance
[8] 4. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the bear-
ing [5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the bear-
ing [7].
6. Move the main body paper exit roller [8] in the
[10]
arrow-marked directions [9] and [10] in this order,
and remove it.
steps in reverse.
[9] [5]
[1]
[4]
[2] [3] 1050fs2218c
2 -178
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 SERVICE
2. SERVICE
2.1 Service material list
Material No. Name Shape Remark
000V-16-0 Drum cleaner 200 ml
000V-17-0 Roller cleaner 200 ml
II Maintenance
00GR00020 Plus guard No. 2 25 g
000V-19-0 Setting powder 25 g
000V-18-0 Cleaning pad 10 pcs/1 pack
2 -179
SERVICE bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2.2 Jig list

Name Shape Quantity Remark
Temperature sensor 1
positioning jig /A (for
fusing roller /Up)
Temperature sensor 1
positioning jig /B (for
fusing heating roller)
II Maintenance
Thermostat position- 1
ing jig /A (for fusing
roller /Up)
Thermostat position- 1
ing jig /B (for fusing
heating roller)
Optics unit position- 2

ing jig
Door switch jig 1
Test chart 1
Drum cover 1
Blower brush 1
Tester 1
Positioning shaft 2 pc/set
2 -180
Name Shape Quantity Remark

Adjustment chart 1
White chart 1
II Maintenance
2 -181
2.3 Materials
A. Item
Parts name Useful life Type name

Toner bottle 80,000 prints TN010
Drum 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours DR010
Developer 1,000,000 prints or 220 hours DV010
B. Maintenance work set

II Maintenance
Parts name Unit Quantity

Charger wire Charger 2
Charger vibration isolation rubber 2
Charger control plate 1
Charger cleaning unit 2
C-clip 2
Cleaning blade Cleaning section 2
Cleaning web Fusing section 1
Suction filter Developing section 1
Discharge wire Transfer/separation charger 3
Transfer cleaning assembly 1
Separation cleaning assembly /1 1
Separation cleaning assembly /2 1
Transfer presser rubber 3
C-clip 3
2 -182
2.4 Mail remote notification system

2.4.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by a
copier using the Internet mail (E-mail).
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users.
Sending a mail filled-in with a simple keyword to the copier allows you to receive by mail all sorts of print infor-
mation of the copier.
2.4.2 Operating environments

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The
II Maintenance
operation of the functions is available while in jams, SC and a low power mode. A mail sent to the copier that is
not operating does not get lost, but it is handled when the copier is activated again.
(1) The copier has a server that can receive a mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(2) The copier has a mail server that can send a mail using SMTP protocol.
(3) In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the copier.
When the main power switch (SW1) is turned off.
When the power switch (SW2) is turned off.
While the copier is in auto shut-off.
When the security enhanced mode is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
In this manual, the network interface card installed in the main body is called the main body NIC.
2.4.3 Major functions

Sending a mail with a simple keyword allows you to use the following functions.
(1) The list print information of the copier you want to obtain can be received by mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
Mode memory list
User setting list
Font pattern list
Management list
Adjustment list
Parameter list
Use management list
Counter list
Pixel ratio list
Remote diagnostic report
Audit log report
(2) The counter list can be checked by cell phone.

(3) A password used for certification of a mail can be change.
(4) Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by mail.
To make use of the above functions, it is necessary to send a mail with a simple keyword (com-
mand).
For particulars of the command, See "2.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification
system."
2 -183
2.4.4 Initialization
To make use of "Mail remote notification system", it is necessary to register the network parameter on the copier
main body and the account on the mail server.
A. Setting from the touch panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the touch panel to connect the copier to the network. When already set,
proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser".
(1) Procedure
Step Operating instructions

II Maintenance
1 Select [Utility/counter] on the operation board.

2 Select "06 Machine Manager Setting."
3 Select "04 Network Setting."
4 Select "01 Machine NIC Setting."
5 Enter "IP address," "Subnet mask," and "Gateway Address."
6 Restart the copier.
NOTE
• The IP address of the copier is normally assigned by the system administrator. For particulars,
contact the system administrator.
B. Setting from the Web Utilities

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web Utilities. To use the Web Utilities, make preparations of a PC
that can be connected to the network.
NOTE
• No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an
E-mail address.
()<>;:“[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections fol-
lowing the error massage. When no correction is made, a down load error of the program may
result.
• The Web layout is subject to change without notice.
2 -184
(1) Procedure

1 Start the Web browser.
• When a proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessible. For particu-
lars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator
is recommended. However, no setting should be made from two or more browsers simulta-
neously.
2 Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered from "A. Setting from the operating
panel."
II Maintenance
• "Main page" is displayed when an access is made to the Web Utilities of the copier main body.
3 Click "Extension for maintenance" on "Main page."

4 Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (cannot be changed)

Password: CE Enter the password. (Default: "92729272")
2 -185

5 Click "E-Mail Initial Setting" to display the screen for setting.
II Maintenance
NOTE
• To make use of "Mail remote notification system," it is necessary to enter a machine
administrator Email address, a mail to be sent and (SMTP) server. For setting of an
address, contact the machine administrator.
Set item Details

Enable E-mail When using the mail remote notification system, select "Use." Default is "Not
notification use."
Time difference The time at which a mail was send out is calculated based on this value. For
time difference setting, enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the
range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to +1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When
no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is set. (Ex.: In the case of Japan, enter +
900.)
Sending mail Set the IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server
SMTP port Set the port No. of the SMTP server. For default, 25 is set.
number
Sending mail For SMTP default, 5-minute is set.
(SMTP) server
time out
Interval between The copier check the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
fetching mails (An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) Taking
into consideration the load on the network, this is usually set at the interval of
10 minutes.
Receiving mail Set the IP address of the incoming mail server.
server
Kind of mail Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For default, [POP3] is selected.
spool
Pop3 (IMAP) When 110 is used for POP3 and 143 is used for IMAP, select "Use the default
port number value." When any value other than the default, select "Setting" and enter a
port number to be used in the text box.
2 -186
Set item Details

User name on Enter an account name assigned to the copier by the incoming mail server.
the server
Password Enter a password to the account name above.
E-mail address Enter the mail address of the copier its own. This is normally "mail account
of this copy name@incoming mail server name."
machine
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent from the
II Maintenance
copier. No entry cause no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the
copier. The copier uses this password for security purpose.
Also Notice to • Not transfer: Default
the Administra- • Transfer an unright mail: When a mail received by the copier is not con-
tor form to the above password, or when the mail size is exceeding the spec-
ified size (10k bytes), a selection is made if the mail is communicated.
• Transfer all transmission mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote
notification system."
Administrator When "Transfer an unright mail" or "Transfer all transmission mails" is
E-mail address selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay A selection is made if the difference (time required) between the time when a
time in replay mail was sent to the copier and the time when the copier handled the mail is
mail indicated in the mail. For default, "Not indicate" is selected.
Enable POP After authentication is made by the mail receiving server, a selection is made
(IMAP) before to decide whether to send out the mail or not. For default, "Send" is selected.
SMTP
6 After completion of entry, click the [Apply] key.

7 Conduct the mail sending/receiving test.
• Click "Sending and Receiving test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collec-
tively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly received.
When a test failed, re-check the set items following the error message.
• Click "Sending and Receiving test" to show the results of the sending and receiving test.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail
address for the copier" set in Step 2.
Receiving A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from
test "E-mail address of the copier" set in Step 2.
2 -187
2.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the copier and the details of options, see the table below.
Command Option Description Minimum

input
GETLOG [List option name] Send back by mail the list print information specified G
in [List print name].
ModeMemory Send back [Mode memory list] by mail. M
UserSetting end back by [User setting list] mail. U
FontPattern Send back [Font pattern list] by mail. F
II Maintenance
Management Send back [Management list] by mail. Ma

Adjustment Sent back [Adjustment list] by mail. A
Parameter Send back [Parameter list] by mail. P
UserManagement Send back [User management list] by mail. UseM
Counter Send back [Counter list] by mail. C
PixelRatio Send back [Pixel ratio list] by mail. Pi
CommunicationLog CommunicationLog Send back [Communication log Co
list] by mail.
AuditLog Send back [Audit log report] by mail. Au
ALL Send back all of the above list prints in mail. AL
Not specified [Counter list] is edited so that it can be shown by cell
phone. And this is sent back by mail.
CHPASS [OldPasswd][New- Change a password to be used for certification of a C
Passwd] mail.
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating H
instructions of the commands above.
2 -188
2.4.6 Mail sending

A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input listed
on the preceding page.
A. Notes
• When sending a mail to the copier, take note of the following.
(1) Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail
using browser.
(2) Use the mail software in the text mode.
(3) For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended
II Maintenance
as the maximum number of characters displayed in a line.
(4) There are one or more spaces or TAB's required between a command and an option that are
written in the mail. (However, a line feed is not allowed.)
(5) Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in alphanumeric characters (ASCII char-
acters). When any other characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent
back.
(6) Start a command written in the mail from the line head with not space.
When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the line is ignored.
(7) The maximum number of commands available in a mail is ten. Commands exceeding ten are
ignored.
(8) Avoid attaching a file to a mail that is sent to the copier.
(9) A signature on a mail that is sent to the copier may be handled as a command with an error
message sent back.
(10) When the power is shut off while the copier is sending a mail or when the copier main body is
printing the list print, the same mail may be sent back twice.
(11) The copier can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time.
When more than 5 mails have been received by the mail server, the copier receives the
remaining mails from the mail server next time.
2 -189
FIRMWARE VERSION UP bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
3. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
3.1 ISW
3.1.1 Outline
A. ISW (In-System Writer)
• This is an operation in which a control program stored in the flush ROM that is built in each control board in
the copier is rewritten with the board built in the copier main body. Conducting the ISW allows the version up
of control program without changing the board and the installation of the up to date program when replacing
the board. As a tool to conduct the ISW, (ISWTrns (PC software)) can be used for rewriting with the personal
computer (PC) connected to the copier. This tool can rewrite directly a control program in the flush ROM built
II Maintenance
in the copier main body.
B. ISWTrns
• This is a software for Windows to rewrite the copier flush ROM and is used for the rewrite of programs (data
transfer) with the copier main body and the personal computer connected with a parallel cable or the USB
cable.
NOTE
• When this machine uses the USB to conduct the ISW, it is necessary to install the USB driver of the
ISWTrns. For procedure for installation, see "3.1.4 A. Installation of the USB driver."
• When using the USB, be sure to turn on the radio button of the USB on the ISWTrns [Setting (S)] -
[Communications setting (C)], and then press the OK button.
2 -190
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 FIRMWARE VERSION UP
3.1.2 Specifications
A. ISWTrns (PC software)
(1) ISWTrns disk composition
• Setup disk: 2
• Rewritable disk: Varies for each copier
(2) Operating environment of the software

• OS: Windows95/98/98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP
• CPU: Pentium 75 MHz or above
• Memory: 16 MB or more for abroad/ 32 MB or more for domestic
• Free space in hard disk: 100 MB or more
II Maintenance
• Others: PC provided with parallel (printer) or USB interface
(3) Idling time

• Varies according to each PC
(4) Parts required to conduct the ISW

• Personal computer (PC): 1
• IBM-compatible PC/AT: Provided with D-sub25 pin parallel interface
• ISWTrns setup program
• Parallel cable or USB cable: 1
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board, Printer control board, RADF control
board, FD control board, LS control board, IC control board
Method for rewriting program 1. Local ISW from the PC
2. Web Utilities directional type ISW by using the Internet
3. Operation panel directional type ISW by using the Internet
Protocol FTP, HTTP
Network connection Use of the NIC of the copier main body
Rewritable program Image control 11 to 14 collectively, I1- I4
Printer control C1 to C2 collectively, C1, C2
DF F
FD, FS, LS H1, N1, S1-1/S1-2
Controller P1
Conditions Main body power turned on and program server provided
NOTE
• To execute the ISW, check surely to see if the power source of the main body has been turned on
in advance.
• For rewritable programs, it is not possible to rewrite plural programs at a time.
• When using the Internet ISW, it is required for it to be connected to the network environment by
using the main body NIC. As a network environment, programs must be down-loadable from the
program server on the Internet by using a ftp or http protocol.
2 -191
3.1.3 Installation of the ISWTrns

Install the ISWTrns program to the PC.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation Remarks

1 Start the PC.
2 Copy the setup disk to the PC and double click the When there remains the ISWTrns.exe of
[Setup.exe] icon to start the install program. the old version, uninstall the old version
first, and then install the new version.
3 "ISWTrns setup screen"
II Maintenance
Following the instructions on the screen, check the 1. For default, "C:\Program Files\KONI-
folder to which an installation is made, and then click CAMINOLTA\ISWTrns" is set as a folder to
[Next]. which an installation is made.
2. When changing the folder to which an
installation is made, click [Reference] and
specify one as you please.
4 "Program confirmation screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, check the 1. For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder
folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored and to which an installation is made.
then click [Next]. 2. When changing the folder to which an
installation is made, enter an folder name
directly, or select one from the existing
folder displayed.
5 "Information dialog screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, click [OK].
6 "Setup completion screen"
Following the instructions on the screen, click [Com-
pleted].
7 The installation of the ISWTrns program is automati-
cally completed.
2 -192
3.1.4 Usage of the ISWTrns

A. Installation of the USB driver (Windows2000/XP)
When a connection is made between the PC and the copier main body with a USB cable, the installation of the
USB driver is automatically started by the plug-and-play. However, this May result in the installation of the Win-
dows USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) and be sure to set the USB driver following the steps given below.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 From the screen below, select "Install from the list or the specified location," and then click [Next].
II Maintenance
2 In the "Select the retrieve and install option screen," select "Select a driver for installation with no
retrieval," and then click [Next].
3 Select the UBS driver in the driver selection screen and click "Next" to start installation.
Driver name: Konica Minolta bizhub 1050/P USB Driver (ISW)
4 When the [Completed] in the "Hardware update wizard completed screen" is displayed, click
[Completed] to exit the installation.
5 Check the "Device manager screen" to see if the USB driver has been correctly installed.
Driver name: Konica Minolta bizhub 1050/P USB Driver (ISW)
2 -193
B. Setting of the communication method

(1) Setting up of the parallel port
When sending the parallel port data by using the ISWTrns program, it is necessary to release the ECP mode set-
ting of the PC parallel port. The ISWTrns does not correspond to the data transmission through the parallel port.
Accordingly, sending data in the ECP mode may result in an error while in transmission. Therefore, when using
the ISWTrns with the PC set in the ECP, it is necessary to release the ECP mode.
1) ECP port release procedure

The following procedure shows the release of the ECP mode.

II Maintenance
1 Start the PC.

2 Open "System" in "Control panel," select the 1. The LPT1 port is "ECP printer port (LPT1)," this is
"Device manager" tab and search LPT1 in an ECP port.
"Port (COM/LPT)." 2. The LPT1 port is "Printer port (LPT1)," this is a
normal parallel port.
3 When the printer port is set to the ECP port, The change of the BIOS varies depending on the
change the BIOS setting of the PC to release PC. For release of the ECP mode, contact the sys-
the ECP port. tem administrator.
4 Conduct a transmission test to check the When a correct transmission is once made on the
operations. copier, transmission is available for all types of
machines.
2 -194
(2) Preparations for transmission on the copier

1) Checking of the ROM version
Before rewriting the ROM data, be sure to check the ROM version of the current control program by following
the procedure given below.
Step Operation
1 Enter the service mode.
2 Press the [08 ROM version] key in "Service mode menu screen."
3 Press the [01 ROM version] key in the sub-menu displayed on the right side of the screen.
4 "ROM version screen"
Press the [08 ROM version] key and check the version information.
II Maintenance
2) Standby for the ISW transfer
Open the service mode of the copier and get into the standby of the ISW transmission.

1 Enter the service mode.
2 Press the [10 ISW] key in "Service mode menu
screen."
3 Press the [01 ISW] key in the sub menu dis-
played on the right side of the screen.
4 [Service mode menu]
Example: Image control: collective The ISW standby status is a status in which the
[Start] key is shown in the display section.
2 -195
C. Firmware copy
(1) Creation of the folder
Start the ISWTrns program the installation of which has been completed, and set a folder into which a trans-
ferred file (rewritten data) is stored.
1) Procedure

1 Start the PC.
2 Select "ISWTrns" from the start menu or double
click the "ISWTrns" icon on the desktop to start
II Maintenance
up the "ISWTrns program."

3 "ISWTrns dialog screen"
This screen is displayed only when the
ISWTrns is started for the first time.
Click [OK] key to set a folder into which a trans-

ferred file (rewritten data) is stored.
4 "Option screen"
1. A folder (C:\Program Files\KonicaMi-
nolta\ISWTrns)into which the ISWTrns pro-
gram has been installed as a stored folder
(data folder) for default is set.
2. When changing a stored folder, click
[Browse] and specify any one as you please,
or make an entry directly in the editor box in
full path.
3. When the [Make Folder] key is clicked, a
hierarchical folder is created using the stored
Set a folder into which a transferred file (rewritten folder set above as a route.
data) is stored and then click [Make Folder] key.
5 "Option screen"
Click [OK] key. This operation stores the data folder created
in the step 4 into the INI file of the ISWTrns
program.
6 "ISWTrns screen"
The main screen of the ISWTrns program is displayed.
2 -196
(2) Data copy

Using the ISWTrns program, copy data (rewritten data) which is sent to the PC.
1) Procedure

1 Start the PC.
2 Select "ISWTrns" from the start menu or double
click the "ISWTrns" icon on the desk top to start
up the "ISWTrns program."
3 Click the "Option" menu.
II Maintenance
4 "Option screen"
Click [Data Copy] key.

5 "File copy screen"
Click [Browse] key.

6 Select the folder into which a file to be trans- 1. A folder selected is displayed in the upper dis-
ferred (data to be rewritten) is stored as a file play section of the file from which a copy was
from which the copy is made. made.
2. In the lower display section of a file from which
a copy was made, the transferred files (rewritten
data) stored in the elected folder are displayed.
7 Select a transferred file (rewritten data) you 1. A number of transferred files (rewritten data)
want to copy from the lower display section of a can be selected.
file from which a copy was made. 2. When copying all of the transferred files (rewrit-
ten data) that are displayed, skip this step and
proceed to the step 8.
2 -197

8 Copy the transferred file (rewritten data) 1. When copying all of the transferred files (rewritten
selected by clicking [Copy] key into the data) that are displayed in the lower display section of
folder created at the setup of the the file from which a copy was made, click [Copy all] key
ISWTrns. instead of [Copy] key.
2. In the upper display section of the file into which a
copy has been made, a folder name created at the
setup of the ISWTrns is displayed.
3. In the list shown in the lower display section of the file
into which a copy has been made, files the copy of
II Maintenance
which has been successfully completed are listed in full

path. In the copy error file list, files the copy of which
have been failed are listed. As the causes of failure, fol-
lowing are considered.
A. There exists a file of the same name and "O/W" is not
checked.
B. A folder into which a file is stored is not found.
C. An overwrite is made on an overwrite-prohibited file.
4. When changing a transferred file (rewritten data) that
is currently stored into a new data, click the overwrite
check box to make a check mark.
9 After completion of copy, click [Refresh]
key.
10 Click [Return] to get back to "option
screen."
11 "Option screen"
Click [OK] key.
2 -198
D. Firmware
(1) Firmware data flow
The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
PC Image processing Overall control board Printer control board

board RADF control board
FNS control board
FD control board
LS control board
IC board
II Maintenance
When conducting the ISW in the entire system, be sure to conduct it in the order shown below.
Step Type of programs

1 *1 FD (H1), FS (N1), LS (S1-2, S1-1)*2
2 DF (F), IC (P1), Printer control board (C1 to C2 collectively, C1, C2)
3 Image control (I1 to I4 collectively, I1, I2, I3, I4)
*1 Be sure to conduct the low end first out of those set in the sequence 1.
Ex.) When the composition is made up of "LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set) + FS-503"
FS-503 (N1) → LS-501 (S1-2) → LS-501 (S1-1)
*2 When the LS is the coupling of 2 sets, the 1st set (main body side) is S1-1 and the 2nd set is S1-2.
NOTE
• When the overall control board is replaced, be sure to conduct first of all the ISW of the image con-
trol program. When the image control program is not contained in the overall control board, other
programs cannot be written.
• Programs are not stored in the image processing board. So, when the board is replaced, the ISW
is not required.
[When the main power switch (SW1) is required to be turned OFF/ON in the middle of the ISW]
When the system configuration is as shown below, the SW1 is required to be turned OFF/ON in the middle of
the ISW.
• Case 1: Main body + IC + DF-603 + LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set) + FS-503
ISW sequence: FS-503 → LS-501 (2nd set) → SW1 OFF/ON → LS-501 (1st set) → DF-603 → IC → Main
body
• Case 2: Main body + IC + DF-603 + LS-501 (1st set) + LS-501 (2nd set)
ISW sequence: LS-501 (1st set) → SW1 OFF/ON → LS-501 (2nd set) → DF-603 → IC → Main body
However, when the LS-501 (2nd set) is conducted first, the SW1 is not required to be turned OFF/ON.
2 -199
(2) Types of the transfer mode

There are 2 types of the ISW transfer mode on the machine side as shown below.
1) When writing a new program (when replacing a board or when failed in writing a program)
Displayed normally when starting up Method for ISW transmission

Overall control board Power save LED flashing Power ON mode
No display on operation board
Others Error code display Service mode
When there is an abnormality found with the image processing program of the image processing board, or an
II Maintenance
error is found with date displayed on the operation panel, a startup is normally unavailable. In the condition like
this, when the power switch is turned on, the system gets into the ISW standby status.
And when an abnormality occurs while in rewriting the image processing program and the contents of the mem-
ory is damaged, the power save LED is flashing when the power is turned on again, and the system gets into
the ISW standby status.
When the image processing program is in the normal condition and there is an abnormality found with other pro-
grams, an SC error is normally display on the touch panel while in the startup.
2) When in the version up of the program
Displayed normally when starting up Method for ISW transmission

Overall control board Normal Service mode
Others Normal Service mode
(3) Use of each transmission mode

• Power ON mode
This mode is used when there is no program installed in the overall control board (OACB) of the copier main
body, or when an error code is displayed.
When the image control program of the OACB is not installed, the OACB can be written with the power
switch ON.
• Service mode
This mode is used when the image control program of the OACB has been already installed.
2 -200
E. Connection to the main body

(1) When using the parallel cables
Preparations are made of the following when a connection is made.
• PC into which transferred files (rewritten data) have been copied.
• Parallel cables
1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Turn OFF the power of the copier.
2 Turn OFF the power of the PC.
II Maintenance
3 Remove 5 screws and then remove the upper right cover.
4 Connect the IEEE1284 port and the PC with the cable.
5 Connect the parallel cables of the PC to the ISW connectors of the copier.
NOTE
• When exiting the ISW, be sure to clean each mirror of the scanner.
2 -201
(2) When using the USB cables

Preparations are made of the following when a connection is made.
• PC into which transferred files (rewritten data) have been copied.
• UBS cables
1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Turn OFF the power of the copier.
2 Turn OFF the power of the PC.
3 Remove 5 screws and then remove the upper right cover.
II Maintenance
4 Connect the USB port and the PC with the cables.
5 Connect the USB cables of the PC to the ISW connectors.
NOTE
• When exiting the ISW, be sure to clean each mirror of the scanner.
2 -202
F. Rewriting of firmware
(1) Relationship between the ISW and the display on the operation board
When the ISWTrns program starts up, the main screen of the ISWTrns is displayed. In the main screen, the
selection of transferred files (rewritten data), the display of information, the confirmation of a transferred file
(rewritten data) and the transmission of the transferred file (rewritten data) are conducted. For detailed informa-
tion of the functions, see the following.
[9] [10] [1]

[2]
[3]
II Maintenance
[4]
[8] [5]
[6]
[7]
[1] Version selection frame

• When transferred files of plural versions are stored in a folder, a selection is made if the version is transferred.
[2] Version stored folder edit box
• When the condition selection frame of [10] is decided, according to the data folder set in the option screen
and the INI file information, a folder name in full path is displayed. When a transferred file is in a folder other
than a data folder, a change can be made by using the [Browse] button of [4] or rewriting directly the folder
name. A transferred file that meets the INI file conditions displayed here in the folder is displayed in the list box
of [3].
[3] Version file selection list box
• Files to be displayed that exist in the folder selected in [2] above are displayed. The files to be displayed are
described with the wild card name in the ISWTrns.INI file. Accordingly, when there are plural version files in the
same file, plural versions are to be displayed in this list box. The list displayed here is sorted in the order of
names, and when the list is displayed, an item displayed last is selected. Changing an item of selection
decides the version of a transferred file that is transmitted.
[4] Browse key
• This key is used when the transfer folder is in a folder other than the default data folder. Display the folder
selection screen to select the folder of [2].
[5] Transferred file information display list
• Display a list of files that are actually transferred when the version file is selected at [3]. The number of files
actually transferred is described in the checksum file attached to the transferred file (rewritten data). When all
of the transferred files are not stored in the folder of [2], or when unnecessary files are included in the folder,
an error message "No transferred files found or a file with an illegal name found in the folder. Make sure of it"
is displayed. When [File check] key of [6] is pressed, the checksum of all the files displayed is calculated. The
value obtained is compared with the checksum value stored in the checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the
transferred files (rewritten data) and the result is displayed.
[6] File check key
• When this button is pressed with the transferred files displayed in "Transferred file information display list" of
[5], the file checksum (checksum of the entire files) of each transferred file displayed is calculated and the
result is shown by the side of each transferred file. And the result of the checksum calculation and the check-
sum file attached to the transferred file (rewritten data) are compared and the result of comparison is dis-
played in the format shown below.
2 -203
"OK": Accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": A corresponding checksum not found
[7] File Send key
• The transmission of the transferred files is started.
[8] Send file information frame
• A list of files actually transferred is displayed based on the information selected in the frames [1] and [10], and
pressing the [File Check] key displays the checksum of files and the consistency of the checksum (OK, NG,
??).
[9] File detailed information list
• When the version file of [3] is selected, the detailed information of a file are displayed.
II Maintenance
[10] Condition selection frame

• The condition of the transferred file (rewritten data) is checked. When all the 4 types of combo boxes are
selected, the folder of [2] is set based on the information set in the INI file. The contents of the combo box
selected is stored in the ISWTrns.INI file by "Transmission," and initialized and displayed when being started
next time.
(2) Rewrite procedure

Ex.: When the image control program is written collectively.
Step Operations
1 Copy the data to the PC. (For the procedure, see "C. Firmware copy.")
2 Start the ISWTrns program.
3 Select the machine type, the destination and the board types.
• Machine type: bizhub 1050, Destination: KBJ, Board type: 11 to 14 collectively
4 The data to be used is displayed in the version file selection box and the transmitted file information
frame.
5 Press the [File Check] key to check if the data to be used has any problem.
2 -204
Step Operations
6 Place the copier main body in the standby for the ISW transfer. (For the procedure, see "2) Standby
for the ISW transfer.")
II Maintenance
7 Press the [Start] key on the copier main body side first, and then press the [File Send] key of the
ISWTrns.
8 The following window is displayed on the PC while in the data transfer.
9 When the data transfer is completed, the following window is displayed.

[PC side]
[Copier side]
10 When transmitting other data, press the [Yes] key.

When exiting the rewrite, press the [No] key.
When pressing the [No] key, the copier main body is automatically rebooted.
11 Check the ROM version information in the service mode to see if the rewrite operation is completed
normally.
It is not completed normally, repeat the procedure from the step 2.
2 -205
3.1.5 Error list

Detection function
• When the copier main body detects an abnormal condition after turning on the power, the copier does not
display it on the main body touch panel, but inform you of it by lighting or flashing the LED (with the ISW
placed in the standby condition). For the LED display, see the table given below.
No. Transaction Power save LED

1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flush memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby status) Flashing in orange
4 ISW processing (data being received from the PC and flush memory being Flashing in green
II Maintenance
written)
5 When an abnormality is detected while in data transmission Flashing alternately in
red and green
6 When an error is detected while in writing flush memory Flashing in red
7 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting OFF
(1) ISWTrns error list

The ISWTrns displays messages when an error is shown or the transaction is completed. The table below
shows the contents of the message and the status of the ISWTrns.
Message Status of the ISWTrns

The opening of the file the checksum of which is The opening of the checksum file failed. The file is in use
to be taken is not available. or damaged.
The opening of the file the checksum of which is The reading of the checksum file failed. The memory is
to be taken cannot be read. insufficient or the OS is in trouble.
The file cannot be opened. The opening of the transferred file failed. The file is in use
or damaged.
The LPT port cannot be opened The opening of the LPT port failed.
Communication port setting acquisition error The access to GetCommState failed.
Communication port setting error The access to GetCommState failed.
The transferred file cannot be opened. The opening of the transferred file is unavailable. The file
is in use or damage.
The Term Test file cannot be transmitted. The transmission of the communication test block failed.
1. The copier side is not in the receiving condition.
2. The cable is disconnected.
3. The transferred file is wrong.
Transmission of the file failed. The transmission of the transferred file failed. Communi-
cation troubles such as a disconnected cable.
The transmission to the LPT port failed. The output to the LPT port failed. Communication trou-
bles such as a disconnected cable.
The folder name is illegal. The name of the input folder is illegal. Be sure that the
input be started with the drive name such as "C:\"
The generation of the thread failed. The generation of the thread failed.
The transferred file is not found. A file that copies a file is not selected or does not exist in
the folder.
2 -206
Message Status of the ISWTrns

Some files cannot be copied. 1. When the folder into which files are stored is not
found.
2. When a file is copied into the folder in which a file of
the same name is contained with "Overwrite check box"
not checked.
3. When overwriting is made on an overwrite prohibited
file.
4. The file is used by another application. OS trouble.
The transferred file is not found, or a file with an The number of divisions of the transferred file written in
II Maintenance
illegal name is found in the folder. Make sure of the checksum file does not correspond with the number
it. of files that actually exist.
1. When a file with an illegal name is in the data folder, or
a file name that seems to be illegal is displayed in the
folder list.
2. The number of divided files is insufficient. Check the
insufficient number of files in the folder list and copy
them again.
3. When the checksum file is damaged, copy it again to
the folder.
2 -207
(2) Main body error list

The table below shows error codes.
Error code Description Program applicable

0x02 The internal work space cannot be secured. P
0x04 The DIMM space cannot be secured.
0x05 The DIMM space cannot be opened.
0x06 Data transmission to the DIMM failed.
0x21 The DIMM space on the controller side cannot be secured.
0x41 The format of the input data is abnormal. Common
II Maintenance
0x42 The type name of input data is abnormal.

0x43 The board name of input data is abnormal.
0x64 Rewritten address error F
0x81 Input device such as input time out is abnormal. Common
0xC1 The erasing of the flush ROM failed. I
0xC2 The writing of the flush ROM failed.
0xC3 The ROM checksum is abnormal.
0xC4 Output device such as output time out is abnormal. Common
0xE1 Program SUM check error. F
Controller I/F writing error. P
Erasure error. C/ H/ N/ S/
0xE2 Writing error. C/ H/ N/ S/
Controller I/F verify error. P
0xE3 Blanc check error. F
Communication error. C/ H/ N/ S/
NOTE
• When rewriting the IC firmware, the execution of the ISW is inhibited if the initialization of the IC is
not completed.
• When any one of the errors shown above occurs, an error code is not displayed, but the message
"Now initializing Controller" is shown in the touch panel section.
2 -208
3.1.6 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns program.
Condition Cause Measure taken

1 The ISWTrns does The ISWTrns file is damaged Set it up again.
not start up. The setup disk itself is damaged. Check the setup disk and set it up
again.
2 The screen is dis- The Japanese DLL[RCJP.DLL] is Set it up again.
played in English. damaged.
The INI file is set incorrectly. (The INI Check the ISWTrns.INI file.
file in English version is used.)
II Maintenance
3 When an item in the The transferred file is not stored in Check to see if the relevant file is stored
combo box is the relevant folder. in the folder displayed in the "Folder"
selected, the trans- text box of "Select version." When a
ferred file is not dis- folder into which a file is stored is not
played. found, use the "File copy" function.
The data folder in the option screen Check the setting of the data folder.
is set incorrectly. When a folder into which a file is stored
is not found, use the "File copy" func-
tion.
The file name is illegal (or has been The file name must be used with no
changed.) change made. When the file name is
changed, the display or selection of the
file becomes unavailable. When the file
name is changed, return it to former
state.
The folder name is illegal (or has When the folder name created by the
been changed.) "Create folder" button in the option
screen has been changed, it cannot be
found. Return it to former state and
check it again.
4 "NG" is displayed The transferred file is damaged. Copy the file and check it again. When
while in the file check. "NG" still recurs, contact the supplier of
the file.
5 "??" is displayed When the transferred file was cop- Copy the checksum file to the same file
while in the file check. ied to the PC, the copying of the as the one for the transferred file at the
checksum file (*.SUM) was forgot- same time. (If you use the "Copy a file"
ten. function, a copy is made automatically.)
6 The transfer of the file
failed.
An error "The file can- The file is being used by anther pro- Exit another program. The error still
not be opened" is gram or system. recurs, reboot Windows.
displayed.
An error "Term Test The connection of the cable is loos- Check the cable to see if it is connected
file cannot be sent" is ened. securely or if there is any problem found
displayed. with the cable itself.
The main body is not in the receiv- Check the main body to see if it is in the
ing condition. receiving condition.
2 -209
Condition Cause Measure taken

6 An error "The transmis- The connection of the cable is Check the cable to see if it is con-
sion to the LPT port loosened. nected securely or if there is any prob-
failed" is displayed. lem found with the cable itself.
Wrong data has been sent. Check the file information screen to see
if the receiving mode on the copier side
(type of receiving board) corresponds
with the transferred file.
If the file is sent for the first time, con-
II Maintenance
tact the file supplier.

The length of the cable is out Use a cable the length of which is less
of specifications. than 2 m.
The parallel port of the PC is See the PC manual to release the ECP
set to the ECP mode. mode.
There is a compatibility prob- Conduct a test with a PC with an actual
lem between the parallel port performance of transmission, and
of the PC and the port on the check to see if there is a compatibility
copier main body side. problem found.
2 -210
3.2 Internet ISW

3.2.1 Outline
"Internet ISW" is a system in which instructions are given to the ISW by using browser so that the copier auto-
matically obtain the program from the program server. Using the Web functions allows you to conduct the ISW
at the user's premise without taking the programs with you.
3.2.2 Operating environment

To make use of the Internet ISW functions, the following conditions must be met.
• The copier must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of programs
II Maintenance
from the Internet by using ftp or http protocol.
• In the following 4 cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the copier.
• The main power switch (SW1) is off.
• The power switch (SW2) if off.
• The copier is in the auto shut-off.
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
NOTE
• It operates while in the jam, SC and lower power mode.
3.2.3 Major functions

"Internet ISW" allows you to use the following functions.
• Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Programs can be rewritten by accessing the Web Utilities of the copier main body on the Web browser of the
PC. However, this requires a Web terminal that is connected to the copier through the network.
• Internet ISW using the operation panel

Programs can be rewritten by using the touch panel of the copier. However, this requires a Web terminal that
is connected to the copier through the network.
2 -211
3.2.4 Initialization
To make use of the Internet ISW, it is necessary to set in advance the network parameter, program server
address and the fire wall address of the copier.
A. Setting from the operation panel

To introduce the copier main body into the network, set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(1) Procedure

II Maintenance
1 Press the [Utility/counter] button on the operation panel.

2 Select "06 Machine Manager Setting."
3 Select "04 Network Setting."
4 Select "01 Machine NIC Setting."
5 Enter "IP address," "Subnet mask," and "Gateway Address."
NOTE
• The IP address of the copier is normally assigned by the system administrator. For particulars,
contact the system administrator.
2 -212
B. Setting from the Web Utilities

Enter the setting of the program server from the Web browser. At this time, in order to use the Web browser,
make preparations of the PC that can be introduced into the network.
NOTE
• No "space" is allowed in all set items.
• When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error
message. Correcting no input error may result in the download error of the program.
• The Web layout is subject to change without notice.
II Maintenance
(1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessed.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator is recommended. However, be sure to avoid setting from two or more browsers at a
time.
2 Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "A. Setting from the oper-
ation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
3 Click [Extension for maintenance] in "Main page."

4 Enter the user name and the CE password in the "Extension for maintenance" and then press
[OK].
User name: ce (cannot be changed)

Password: CE Enter the password. (Default: "92729272")
2 -213
Step Operations
5 Click [Internet ISW] in "Extension for maintenance."
II Maintenance
6 Click [Initial Setting].
2 -214
Step Operations
7 Set the proxy server.
When using no proxy server (fire wall), proceed to the step 9.
II Maintenance
Enable Proxy Select the following:
When using no proxy: "Connect to the program server."
When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
When using http proxy: "Use http proxy."
Proxy Server When selecting "Use ftp proxy" in "Use of proxy," then select a proxy server
Type type from among the below.
Type 1: "User user@host name"
Type 2: "OPEN host name"
Type 3: "FW host name => FW password => SITE host name"
Type 4: "FW host name => FW password => User user@host name"
NOTE
• For types 2, 3 and 4, no guarantee is made.
• For authentication of proxy server, see "3.2.7 Authentication of
the proxy server in the Internet ISW."
Proxy Server IP When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy server.
Address
Port Number When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that uses the proxy
server.
User name on When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server" above set the
the Proxy Server account of the proxy server.
Password for the When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server" above set the
Proxy Server password of the proxy server.
8 After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Next]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message shown in
red and then re-set the item.
2 -215
Step Operations
9 Set the program server. (Proxy is used.)
II Maintenance
Program server address Set the address of the server into which the program to be
down loaded is stored. Select the protocol to be used from
the pull-down menu left and enter the address after that in
the text box on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path
from the home directory.
User name on the Program Enter the account name of the program server.
Server
Password for the Program Enter the password of the program server.
Server
Receiving time out Set the receiving time out of the program. When the time is
out, the down load of the program forcibly comes to an end,
and the system returns to the normal mode without conduct-
ing the ISW.
10 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Completed]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message
shown in red and then re-set the item.
11 Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Select the protocol that receives the program.

Program Server IP Address Set the IP address of the server into which the program to
be down loaded is stored.
Target directory In the case of http, set the path after the host domain. In
the case of ftp, set the relative path from the home direc-
tory.
User name on the Program Enter the account name of the program server.
Server
Password for the Program Enter the password of the program server.
Server
Receiving time out Set the receiving time out of the program. When the time is
out, the down load of the program forcibly comes to an
end, and the system returns to the normal mode without
conducting the ISW.
2 -216
Step Operations
12 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Complete]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message
shown in red and then re-set the item.
13 Conduct the Download test.
• In the down load test, "test.dat" is down loaded from the program server set in the initialization
to check the settings. When the down load test failed, re-check the set items following the error
message.
• When the down load test is successfully completed, the communication speed and the
II Maintenance
expected down load time are displayed as shown below. Refer to the "Receiving time out" set-
ting.
• When the down load test failed, the response error code from the server is display as shown
below. Since there may be a setting error, re-check the initialization.
2 -217
3.2.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Using the Web Utilities of the copier allows the customer engineer, by just making a click from the browser, to
download the programs from the program server automatically for rewriting.
(1) Procedure
Step Operations
1 Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
The ROM version of the board is displayed beside each of the board names.
II Maintenance
2 Select one of the ISW-intended boards in the item "ISW," and check its check box. When specify-
ing the file name to be down loaded, enter it in the "File name" text box column. When specifying
no file name, obtain the following from the specified program server address.
3 After completion of entry, click the [ISW] key.

If there is an input error, click [Back] following the message displayed in red and then enter the item
again.
2 -218
Step Operations
4 Checking of the ISW conditions.
From the screen shown below, you can check the current processing condition to see if there is any
error.
• "ISW in communication"
• "ISW in rewriting"
• "Completed successfully": Be sure to avoid pressing the "Read again" key of the browser to
reboot after successful completion.
• "Aborted due to a communication error."
II Maintenance
• "Aborted due to a communication time error."
• "Aborted due to a writing error."
5 When the ISW is completed successfully, the copier restarts automatically to complete the ISW.
NOTE
• Clicking the [Check progress] key allows you to abort the ISW only while in program-
ming.
6 After restart of the copier main body, check the ROM version in "Internet ISW main screen" to see if
it is being updated successfully.
3.2.6 Notes for use

(1) Notice to the administrator
When conducting Internet ISW, be sure to notify the administrator of it and get approval from him in advance.
And conduct this operation when the copier is not used. When the copier is in use (with jobs accompanied),
Internet ISW does not operate.
(2) When the power supply is cut off while writing the image control program in the overall control
board (OACB).
When the main power switch (SW1) turns off due to a power failure, the copier does not start up.
If the main power switch is turned off due to the failure of power supply and Internet ISW is abnormally termi-
nated, be sure to go to the copier that has been conducting the Internet ISW and use the ISWTrns to reperform
the rewriting of the program.
(3) Failure while in low power mode

When ISW failed due to the down load of the program or the data check error, get it back in the normal mode.
2 -219
3.2.7 Internet ISW using the touch panel

When the customer engineer uses the Internet ISW from the touch panel, with no PC brought with, the copier
can download programs from the program server to rewrite them automatically.
(1) Procedure
Ex.: When the image control program is rewritten collectively.
Step Operations
1 Display "ISW rewrite screen."
II Maintenance
2 Press [Internet ISW] key provided below the screen.
3 Press [Collective] key of <Image processing system>.
2 -220
Step Operations
4 Pressing the [Start] key starts the download of the latest program for rewriting.
In a case in which the download of an old version programs is required, press the [File Name Input]
key and enter the file name by hand for execution.
II Maintenance
5 When ISW is completed normally, the copier is rebooted and exits ISW automatically.
6 After the copier main body is rebooted, check the [ROM version screen] to see if the ROM version
has been updated normally.
2 -221
3.2.8 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW

A. Proxy server
Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the
proxy of a client who receives an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
B. Authentication of the proxy server

There are 4 types of authentication methods for the proxy server.
The Internet ISW is corresponding to these 4 types.
C. Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list

II Maintenance
(1) Type 1: User user name@host name

When accessing the outside through the proxy, authentication to the proxy server is not required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server, or when the entry of the user name and password of the
proxy server is not required, this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description

USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
name program server address
PASS Password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
(2) Type 2: OPEN host name

This is almost the same as the type 1, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 1 authentication, this set-
ting is used.
Command

OPEN Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(3) Type 3: FW user name => FW password => SITE host name
This is a type that requires the authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing the outside.
The information of the server you want to access and the user name and password of the proxy server (F/W) are
required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server and when the user name and the password of the proxy
server are required, this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
2 -222
Command

USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
SITE Host name ftp expanded Transmit the user name of the program server
function, defined
for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
II Maintenance
(4) Type 4: FW user name => FW password => USER user name@host name
This is almost the same as the type 3, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 3 authentication, this set-
ting is used.
Command

USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
name program server address
D. Remarks
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type 1 authentication is used.
For most of the proxy servers, the type 1 authentication is used.
When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known, you are recommended to make settings in type
1 authentication as a temporary measure.
2 -223
OTHERS bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
4. OTHERS
4.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
4.1.1 Scanner section
A. Read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr
(1) Positions from which the screws are not allowed to be removed
• Attaching screws, one each, of the read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
1050fs2073c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Read position adjusting plate /Rr
[2] Read position adjusting plate /Fr
(2) Reason of prohibition

The read position adjusting plates /Fr and /Rr hold in place the slit glass that becomes the read position while in
the DF scan. The displacement of the slit glass may cause the image read by the DF to be deformed. Accord-
ingly, this position of installation is not allowed to be changed.
2 -224
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 OTHERS
B. Mirror unit/exposure unit

(1) Position not allowed to be adjusted
• Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
1050fs2219c
[1] Mirror unit [2] Exposure unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original to be read
in the sub scan direction. Therefore, the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit must not
be arbitrarily adjusted. However, when the exposure unit and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts
must be reinstalled using the optics unit positioning jig.
2 -225
4.1.2 CCD unit

• 9 screws used to assemble the CCD unit
• 4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly
[4] [3] [1]

II Maintenance
[2]
[2]
[5] [1] [1] [5] 1050fs2504c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Lens reference plate assembly
[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [5] Attaching screw of the CCD unit (allowed to
[3] CCD unit be removed when replacing the CCD unit)

The accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is not guaranteed.
Accordingly, screws that lead up to the disassembly of the CCD unit are not allowed to be removed.
The lens reference plate assembly acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. Removing this
assembly may cause the displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit. So, be sure not to remove the attach-
ing screws of the lens reference plate assembly.
2 -226
4.1.3 Writing section

• 11 attaching screws of the writing section cover
[1]
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[1] 1050fs2220c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Writing section cover

The inside of the writing section becomes the laser light path. Opening the cover allows dust and dirt to get
inside, which may block the laser light path. Therefore, the screws of the writing section cover are not allowed to
be removed.
2 -227
4.1.4 Developing unit

• 2 fixing screws of the developer regulation blade
• 1 fixing screw of the magnet angle adjusting knob
[5] [1]
II Maintenance
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs2221c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Developing roller

[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [5] Developer regulation blade
[3] Magnet angle adjusting knob

The developer regulation blade and the magnet angle adjusting knob both decide the heights of the developer in
the developing roller. They have been adjusted to an appropriate value in advance. Accordingly these fixing
screws are not allowed to be removed.
2 -228
4.1.5 Transfer/separation charger unit

A. Transfer guide plate/transfer assist home sensor assembly
• 5 attaching screws of the transfer guide plate
• 2 attaching screws of the transfer assist home sensor assembly
[4] [1]
II Maintenance
[3]
[2] 1050fs2222c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Transfer assist home sensor assembly
[2] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Transfer guide plate

The transfer guide plate decides the approach angle of paper against the transfer position and the displacement
of the installation position may result in poor transfer. Accordingly, the attaching screws of the transfer guide
plate are not allowed to be removed.
The transfer assist home sensor (PS37) detects the starting point to drive the transfer assist sheet assembly and
the displacement of this position may result in poor transfer or damage to the drum. Accordingly, the attaching
screws of the transfer assist home sensor assembly are not allowed to be removed.
2 -229
B. Transfer assist sheet assembly

• 2 attaching screws of the actuator
[1]
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2223e
[1] Actuator [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The accuracy of the transfer assist sheet assembly is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is
not guaranteed. Accordingly, screws that lead up to the disassembly of the transfer assist sheet assembly are
not allowed to be removed.
2 -230
C. Separation support member

• Separation support member, 2 pcs
II Maintenance
[1]
[1] 1050fs2225c
[1] Separation support member

The separation support members decide the distance from the transfer wire and the separation wire to paper,
and removing them changes the attaching height of the wire, thus resulting in the reduced performance of the
transfer and the separation. Accordingly, the separation support members are not allowed to be removed.
2 -231
4.1.6 Main body (write position adjusting shaft)

• 2 attaching screws of the write position adjusting shaft fixing plate
II Maintenance
[1]
[3] [2]
1050fs2224c
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [3] Write position adjusting shaft
[2] Write position adjusting shaft fixing plate

The write position adjusting shaft is the reference angle of the installation of the write section to the drum.
Removing it may undermine the parallelism of the drum with the write section, thus causing the image to be
deformed. Therefore, be sure not to remove the attaching screw of the fixing plate of the write position adjusting
shaft.
2 -232
4.2 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled

NOTE
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are consid-
ered necessary to replace (other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for
the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see "1.5 Maintenance procedure."
No Section Parts name Page referred to

1 Cover Front door Rt 2-235
II Maintenance
2 Front door Lt 2-236
3 Toner supply door 2-238
4 Rear cover 2-234
5 Right cover 2-234
6 Left cover 2-235
7 Upper cover /Rr1 2-239
8 Upper cover /Rr2 2-239
9 Upper cover /Rt 2-240
10 Upper cover /Lt 2-241
11 Upper cover /Fr 2-241
12 Original glass 2-240
13 Scanner section CCD unit 2-244
14 Exposure lamp 2-246
15 Exposure unit 2-248
16 Scanner wire 2-250
17 Writing section Writing section 2-253
18 Paper feed section Lift wire 2-268
19 Paper feed assist fan 2-261
20 Paper lift motor 2-268
21 Registration section Multi feed detection board /1
2-273
22 Multi feed detection board /2
23 ADU ADU 2-275
24 HDD Hard disk /1 2-278
25 Hard disk /2 2-279
2 -233
4.3 Disassembling/reassembling procedure
Caution:
• When disassembling/reassembling the parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
4.3.1 Cover
A. Removing/reinstalling the rear cover
(1) Procedure
II Maintenance
1. Remove 9 screws [1] and then remove the rear

[2] [1]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1] 1050fs2057c
B. Removing/reinstalling the right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the right
[2]
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
1050fs2058c
2 -234
C. Removing/reinstalling the left cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the left
cover [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
1050fs2059c
D. Removing/reinstalling the front door /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Rt [1].
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and bring down the shaft
[3].
3. Remove the front door /Rt [1].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs2060c
2 -235
E. Removing/reinstalling the front door /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Lt [1].
2. Loosen 2 screws [2], bring down the shaft [3]
and remove the front door /Lt [1].
II Maintenance
[1]
[3]
[2]
1050fs2061c
2 -236
NOTE
• When reinstalling the front door /Lt [1], be
[3] sure to insert the projection [4] of the hinge
[3] into the hole [2] provided in the lower sec-
tion of the front door /Lt.

[4]
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2] 1050fs2062c
2 -237
F. Removing/reinstalling the toner supply door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the toner supply door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the hinge
[3] together with the toner supply door [1].
[3] NOTE
• When reinstalling the toner supply door [1], be
sure to insert the projection [6] of the hinge
[2] [5] into the hole [4] provided in the lower sec-
II Maintenance
tion of the toner supply door.

[1]
steps in reverse.
[6]
[4]
[5]
1050fs2063c
2 -238
G. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr1
NOTE
• The same removal and reinstallation procedure is applicable when the DF-603 is provided.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper
cover /Rrl [2].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1]
1050fs2064c
H. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr2
NOTE
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screw caps [1].
[3]
cover /Rr2 [3].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
1050fs2065c
2 -239
I. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt
NOTE
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[3]
[2] cover /Rt [3].
[2]
II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[1]
1050fs2066c
J. Removing/reinstalling the original glass
NOTE
• When reinstalling the original glass, be sure that the shading correction plate (white) is on the
upper side of the glass.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt. (See "4.3.1 I.
[3] [6]
Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the origi-
[4]
[5] nal stopper plate /Lt [2].
nal stopper plate /Rr [4].
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the origi-
[2] nal stopper plate /Rt [6].
5. Remove the original glass [7].
steps in reverse.
[7] 1050fs2067c
2 -240
K. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Lt
NOTE
(1) Procedure
[1]
nal stopper plate /Lt [2].
[4]
[2] cover /Lt [4].
II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[3]
1050fs2068c
L. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Fr
NOTE
a. Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the original glass. (See "4.3.1 J. Remov-
ing/reinstalling the original glass.)
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt. (See "4.3.1 K.
Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Lt.)
4. Remove the original glass guide /Fr [1].
1050fs2069c
2 -241
5. Remove the front door /Rt. (See "4.3.1 D.

Removing/reinstalling the front door /Rt.)
6. Remove the front door /Lt. (See "4.3.1 E.
Removing/reinstalling the front door /Lt.)
7. Remove 4 screws [2] provided on the bottom of
the upper cover /Fr [1].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2070c
2 -242

[1] [2]
cover /Fr [2].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
1050fs2071c
2 -243
4.3.2 Scanner section

A. Removing/reinstalling the CCD unit
NOTE
• After completion of reinstallation of the CCD unit, be sure to conduct the image adjustments in of
the service mode. (See chapter III "Adjustment/setting.")
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt. (See "4.3.1 I. Removing/
[1]
reinstalling the upper cover /Rt.")
II Maintenance

3. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the lens
light blocking cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1] 1050fs2074c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cable

cover [2].
[2]
[1] 1050fs2075c
5. Remove the ribbon cable [2] from the CCD board

[2]
(CCDB) [1].
[1] 1050fs2076c
2 -244
NOTE
[2]
• When removing the ribbon cable [1], bring
down the lock lever [3] of the connector [2] in
the direction as shown in the drawing to
release the lock and pullout the ribbon cable.
II Maintenance
[3] [1] 1050fs2077c
• When reinstalling the ribbon cable [1], make

[3]
sure that the lock lever [2] is released. And
insert the ribbon cable fully into the connector
[3] while taking care that the conductor side
of the ribbon cable comes to the under side of
the lock lever.
[1]
[2] 1050fs2078c
And then return the lock lever [1] to its origi-

nal position and lock the ribbon cable [2].
[1] [2] 1050fs2079c
2 -245

[4]
7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the CCD
unit [4].
steps in reverse.
[3]
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
1050fs2080c
B. Removing/reinstalling the exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt.")
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt. (See "4.3.1 K
4. Remove the original glass guide /Fr [1].
5. Remove the original glass guide /Rr [2].
1050fs2081c
2 -246
6. Move the exposure unit [1] to the notch [2] of the

main body frame.
[9] 7. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the cable
clamp [4].
[8] 8. Remove the connector [5].
remove the lamp presser plates /Fr [7] and /Rr
[8].
[6] 10. Remove 2 screws [9] and then remove the expo-
sure lamp [10].
II Maintenance
[2]
steps in reverse.
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[4] [7]
1050fs2082c
2 -247
C. Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit

[5] [6]
[3] ing/reinstalling the original glass.)
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt. (See "4.3.1 K
[8] 4. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (See "4.3.1 L
Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Fr.)
II Maintenance
5. Move the exposure unit [1] to the notch position

[7] [2] of the main body frame.
6. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the cord
[4] presser member [4].
[2]
[1] ground terminal [6].
9. Remove 4 screws [8] and then remove the expo-
sure unit [1].
[2]
[8]
1050fs2083c
2 -248

1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] toward the V-mirror
positioning hole [2].
2. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-
mirror positioning hole [2] and fix the V-mirror unit
[1].
[3]
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig
[3] from the front side and pass it through the
II Maintenance
V-mirror unit [1].
[1] [7] [2]
• Be care full not to confuse the V-mirror posi-
tioning hole [2] with the unused hole [4].
3. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [6] into the

[5] exposure unit positioning hole [5].
4. Press the exposure unit [7] against the optics unit
[6] positioning unit [2].
5. Reinstall the exposure unit with 4 screws.
[4]
6. Remove 2 optics unit positioning jigs.
[3]
7. For the parts to be installed hereafter, reinstall
[3]
1050fs2084c
2 -249
D. Stretching of the scanner wire
NOTE
• Be sure to wind the wire closely without overlapping each other.
• When re-stretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When re-stretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the
service mode. (See chapter III "Adjustment/setting.")
(1) Procedure
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
1050fs2226c
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt. (See "4.3.1 I. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt.")
2. Remove the original glass. (See "4.3.1 J. Removing/reinstalling the original glass.")
3. Remove the upper cover /Lt. (See "4.3.1 K. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Lt.")
4. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (See "4.3.1 L. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Fr.")
5. Move the exposure unit (See "4.3.2 C. Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit.")
6. Move the V-mirror unit [1] toward the V-mirror positioning hole [2].
7. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-mirror positioning hole [2] and fix the V-mirror unit [1].
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] from the front side and pass it through the V-
mirror unit [1].
• Be care full not to confuse the V-mirror positioning hole [2] with the unused hole [4].
2 -250
[6] [7] [6]

[3] [3]
[5] [12]
[5]
[2] [13] [9]
[22]
II Maintenance
[15] [13]
[14]
[17]
[22]
[4]
[8] [11] [1]

[21]
[16] [8]
[18]
[10] [4]
[20]
[15] [7]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[11]
1050fs2227c
8. Drop the metal ball [3] in between the scanner wire /Fr [1] and /Rr [2] into the installation hole of the drive
pulley [4]. And with this hole as a starting point, wind the wire 4 turns [5] outwards and 5 turns [6] inwards.
NOTE
• Be sure to wind the scanner wire with the metal ball [7] at the end outwards and the scanner wire
with the wire terminal [8] at the end inwards.
• For both scanner wires, be sure to pull out the one wound outwards in the paper feed direction [9]
from above the drive pulley and the one wound inwards in the paper exit direction [10] from above
the drive pulley.
9. For each scanner wire that has been wound round the drive pulley, fasten it to the respective wire stoppers
through the wire stopper /Fr [11] or /Rr [12] pulley /1 [13] and via the outside of the pulley [15] of the V-mir-
ror unit [14].
NOTE
• Each wire stopper is provided with 2 grooves. Fix the metal ball [7] in the groove on the outside for
the wire stopper /Fr [11], and fix it in the groove on the inside for the wire stopper /Rr [12].
2 -251
10. For each scanner wire that has been wound round the drive pulley, after reversing it by the pulley /2 [16],
pass it through the inside of the pulley [15] of the V-mirror unit [14] and pulley /3 [17] and hook the wire ter-
minal [8] to the spring fixing plate [18].
11. Paste the wire restriction sheet [19] to the wire

[11][12] [19]
stoppers /Fr [11] and /Rr [12]. (The sheet is com-
mon to both the front and rear stoppers.)
NOTE
• Be sure to paste it so that the wire restriction
II Maintenance
sheet comes in contact with the wire.
1050fs2421c
12. Fasten tentatively each of the spring fixing plates with the screw [20].
13. Loosen once the screw [20], attach the spring [21] between 2 spring fixing plate [18] and then fix each
spring fixing plate with the screw [20].
NOTE
• After attaching each of the scanner wires, check the respective exposure unit mounting brackets
[22] if they turn to the inside.
14. For the parts to be installed hereafter, reinstall them following the removal steps in reverse.
2 -252
4.3.3 Writing section
Cautions:
• Be absolutely sure not to turn on the writing section with it displaced from its regular position.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the writing section cover. If laser beams get in your eyes, you
may suffer loss of sight.
• After turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), be absolutely sure not to
remove the writing section for about 2 minutes.
II Maintenance
A. Removing/reinstalling the writing section
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover. (See "4.3.1 B. Remov-
ing/reinstalling the right cover.")
2. Remove 8 screws [1] and then remove the writ-
ing section cover [2].
[4]
[3] NOTE
• When reinstalling the writing section cover
[2], hold it by inserting the notch holes [3] at
either side into the hooks [4] of the main body
frame.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3] [4]
1050fs2085c
2 -253

[1]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and pull out the writing sec-
tion [3] for removal.
steps in reverse.
[3]
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2086c
2 -254

A. Removing/reinstalling the lift wire
NOTE
• The same procedure for removing/reinstalling the lift wire is used for both the trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (See "1.5.6 D. Removing/rein-
stalling the tray.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2] with
II Maintenance
washer.
[3] 3. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
tray front cover [4].
[1] [4] [1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2754c
2 -255

[6] [4] [2]
6. Remove the screw [3].
7. Remove the bearing [5], the bearing [6] and the
torque restriction gear [7] together with the gear
mounting plate [4].
[3]
NOTE
[5] • When removing the gear mounting plate [4],
take note that the gear comes off freely.
II Maintenance
[1] • When reinstalling it, make sure that the step

[7] [8] of each shaft gets in the gear mounting
[2] plate [4] securely.
• Be sure to reinstall the bearing (large) [5] from
the outside of the gear cover [4] and the bear-
ing (small) [6] from the inside.
[4]
[8]
1050fs2755c
2 -256

II Maintenance
[4] [1] [2]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2756c
10. Slide the pulley [1] and remove the wire end [2]
[2]
from the shaft hole [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, lift up the paper lift plate
a little to give slack to the lift wire you want to
insert. Then insert the wire ends [2] into the
shaft hole [3] one at a time and fix it with the
pulley [1].
[3] [1] 1050fs2757c
2 -257

[5] [4] [3] [1] [2] 2 places and then remove the wire covers [2],
one each.
12. Remove the lift wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from
the pulley [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the lift
wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] are contained in the
wire cover [2] and they are not crossing each
II Maintenance
other.
[4] [5]
1050fs2758c
13. Pull out from up to down the lift wires /Fr1 and /
[2] [1]
Fr2 [2] from the arm [1] of the paper lift plate.
NOTE
• Be sure to pull out the lift wire gently and take
care that the lift wire does not get damaged
by the edges of the metal frame.
1050fs2759c
2 -258

[3] [5] ground [2].
[4].
16. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the con-
nector mounting plate [6].
II Maintenance
[4] [2] [1] [6]
1050fs2760c

[2] [3]
18. Slide the pulley [2] and remove the wire end [3]
from the hole [4].
[4]
[1] 1050fs2761c
2 -259

[1] [2] [3] [5] [4]
2 places and then remove the wire covers [2],
one each.
20. Remove the lift wires /Rr1 [4] and /Rr2 [5] from
the pulley [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the lift
wires /Rr1 [4] and /Rr2 [5] are contained in the
wire cover [2] and they are not crossing each
II Maintenance
other.
[5] [4] 1050fs2762c
21. Pull out from up to down the lift wires /Rr1 and /
[2] [1]
Rr2 [2] from the arm [1] of the paper lift plate.
NOTE
• Be sure to pull out the lift wire gently and take
care that the lift wire does not get damaged
by the edges of the metal frame.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The lift wire /Fr is grey in color and /Rr black
in color.
• Make sure that the lift wires do not cross
each other.
• After completion of installation, check the
paper lift plate to ensure it is level.
1050fs2763c
2 -260
B. Removing/reinstalling the paper feed assist fan
NOTE
• The same removal and reinstallation procedures of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Rr1
(FM21) and /Fr2 (FM22), /Fr2 (FM23) are used for trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
2. Push in the release lever [1] and insert the screw
II Maintenance
[2] into the hole [3] to fasten the release lever [1]
with it contained.
3. Remove the tray front cover and lift wire. (See
"4.3.4 A. Removing/reinstalling the lift wire.")
[2] [1]
[3]
1050fs2422c
2 -261
4. Loosen the screws [1], one each provided at the

[4] [5] [3] 4 places and slide the bracket [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
5. Hold down the paper stopper [3] and pull out the
lift plate cover [4] upward to remove it.
NOTE
• When removing the lift plate cover [4], raise
up the pick-up roller [5] in the arrow-marked
direction to move it out of the way.
II Maintenance
• When reinstalling the bracket [2], push it

lightly in the opposite direction of removal
and fix it with screws.
[1]
[2]
1050fs2764c
2 -262
6. Rotate the gear of the drive section by hand and

raise the paper lift plate [1] upward. Move the
coupling gear [2] in the arrow-marked direction
and then fix the lift plate.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2] 1050fs2765c
7. Remove the connectors [1], one each, and the

wire binding bands [2], one each.
NOTE
• To make it clear, the picture shows the condi-
tion in which the lift plate is removed.
[1] [2] [1]

1050fs2767c
2 -263
8. Remove the screw [1], the screw [2], the screw

[1] [3]
[3] and the screws [4], 3 each.
9. Remove the paper guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to fasten the
paper guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] with the
screws [2] and the screws [3], 3 each. Then
tentatively tighten the screws [1] and the
screws [4], 3 each and tighten them up fully
II Maintenance
after placing the paper guides /Fr and /Rr in a

[5] [6] horizontal position.
To check the verticality of the paper guides,
move the guide plate up and down with copy
paper placed on the lift plate and check the
clearance of the paper guide.
[4]
[2] 1050fs2768c
2 -264
10. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, of the paper

[1]
guide /Rr and then remove the paper guide cover
[2].
[2]
II Maintenance
1050fs2769c
11. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove

[2] [1]
the paper stopper mounting plate [2].
12. Remove 6 screws [3], the screw (with a washer
and a spring washer) [4], 3 screws [5] and the fan
[3] motor mounting plate [6].
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4] 1050fs2770c
2 -265

[3]
14. Remove 2 screws (nuts) and the paper feed
assist fans /Rr1 (FM21) and /Rr2 (FM23) [3].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
1050fs2771c
15. Remove the screws [1], 2 each of the paper

[1] guide /Fr and then remove the paper guide cover
[2].
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the lever
[2] cover [4].
[3]
[4]
1050fs2772c
2 -266
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper

[1] stopper mounting plate [2].
[3] [2] 18. Remove 6 screws [3], the screw (with a washer
and a spring washer) [4] and 3 screws [5], and
then remove the fan motor mounting plate [6].
[6]
II Maintenance
[3]
[5]
[4]
1050fs2773c
19. Cut off the connector [1] and the wire binding
band [2].
20. Remove 2 screws [3] and the paper feed assist
fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22) [4].
[3] [4] NOTE

• When reinstalling it, be sure to replace the
wire binding band with a new one.

steps in reverse.
[2]
NOTE
• After completion of reinstallation, be sure to
[1]
conduct the paper size detection adjust-
ments. (See chapter III "4.3.1 Tray adjust-
1050fs2774c
ment.")
2 -267
C. Removing/reinstalling the paper lift motor
NOTE
• The same removal and reinstallation procedures are employed for the paper lift motors /1 (M25)
and /2 (M26) of the trays /1 and /2.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 screws [2] with
II Maintenance
washer.
[3] 3. Remove the connector [3] and then remove the
tray front cover [4].
[1] [4] [1]
[2]
[2]
1050fs2775c
2 -268

[1]
[2] and the stopper [3].
II Maintenance
[2] [3] 1050fs2776c
2 -269

[2]
[4] 8. Remove the bearing [5], the bearing [6] and the
torque restriction gear [7] together with the gear
[6]
[3] mounting plate [4].
[5]
[1] NOTE
• When removing the gear mounting plate [4],
[7]
take note that the gear comes off freely.
II Maintenance
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the step

[8] of each shaft gets in the gear mounting
plate [4] securely.
[2] • Be sure to reinstall the bearing (large) [5] from
the outside of the gear cover [4] and the bear-
ing (small) [6] from the inside.
[4]
[8]
1050fs2777c
2 -270

II Maintenance
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2778c
[1]
1050fs2779c
2 -271
11. Remove the connector [1] and the wire binding

[3] [1] [2]
band [2], and then remove the paper lift motors /
1 (M25) and /2 (M26) [3].
NOTE
• For ease of the removal and reinstallation
operations, press the release lever [4] so that
the coupling gear [5] can raise.

II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[4] [5] 1050fs2780c
2 -272
4.3.5 Registration section

A. Removing/reinstalling the multi feed detection board
NOTE
• The multi feed detection boards /1 and /2 were adjusted as a unit during the production process.
Be sure to replace it as a unit when replacing one.
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /1 and /2, be sure to conduct the sensitivity adjust-
ments of the multi feed sensor. (See chapter III "4.6.1 I/O check mode.")
(1) Procedure
II Maintenance
1. Remove the registration section. (See "1.5.8
ADU.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the remove the multi
feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2].
[2] [1]
1050fs2228c
2 -273
3. Turn over the registration section and remove the

connector [1].
feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [3].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2229c
2 -274
4.3.6 ADU
A. Removing/reinstalling the ADU
NOTE
• The ADU is very heavy. So when removing and/or reinstalling it, be sure to conduct the operation
with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU main body. (See "1.5.8 ADU.")
2. Remove the fusing section. (See "1.5.9 Fusing
II Maintenance
section.")
[1] 3. Remove the transfer/separation section. (See
"1.5.8 ADU.")
4. Remove the registration section. (See "1.5.8
ADU.")
5. Open the paper reverse/exit section [1].
nector cover [3].
7. When reinstalling the connector cover, be sure to
set the positioning hole [4] to the projection [5] of
the ADU.
[4] [5]
[2] [3]
1050fs2142c
2 -275

II Maintenance
[1]
[1] 1050fs2143c
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cable arm

[2].
[2]
[1]
1050fs2144c
2 -276
10. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and release the

ADU from the guide rails /Lt [3] and /Rt [4].
[6]
11. Hold the stay [5] and the paper reverse/exit sec-
tion [6] with 2 people and remove the ADU.
NOTE
• Be sure place the ADU in a horizontal place.
• Placing the ADU from the front side diagonally
may deform the open/close door /A [7]. Be
absolutely sure to avoid this.
II Maintenance
[4] [1]
steps in reverse.
[7]
[2]
[5]
[1] [3] 1050fs2145c
2 -277
4.3.7 HDD
A. Removing/reinstalling the hard disk /1
(1) Procedure
[4] [1] Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rt.")
3. Raise the cover [2] and remove 2 connectors [4]
connected to the image processing board (IPB)
[1] [3].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[1] [3] 1050fs2230c

[5]
5. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the hard
disk mounting bracket [3].
[1]
disk /1 (HDD1) [5].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2]
[3]
[2] [4] 1050fs2231c
2 -278
B. Removing/reinstalling the hard disk /2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover (See "4.3.1 A. Removing/
reinstalling the rear cover.")
disk mounting bracket [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and the remove the hard
disk /2 (HDD2) [5].
II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[4]
1050fs2232c
2 -279
4.4 Commercially available parts

4.4.1 Status indicator light
A. Connecting connector
(1) Connector position
II Maintenance
[1]
1050fs2233c
[1] CN160
2 -280
(2) Connector specifications
Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
1 PAT1 Light ON signal L signal output when the Open collector
printing available
2 PAT2 L signal output while in the
scanning or printing operation
3 PAT3 L signal output when an
abnormal stop occurs due to
jams, error codes, no paper,
160
or no toner
II Maintenance
4 PAT4 L signal output when the
toner supply message is dis-
played
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V,
500 mA
6 P.GND Power ground — —
2 -281
B. Procedure for reinstallation

(1) Preparation in advance
• Be sure set the wiring harness pin assignment on the status indicator light to the pin assignment of CN160 on
the main body side so that the CN can be connected.
(2) Procedure on the main body side

1. Remove the rear cover (See "4.3.1 A. Removing/
[2] [1]
reinstalling the rear cover") and the upper cover /
Rt (See "4.3.1 I. Removing/reinstalling the upper
cover /Rt.")
II Maintenance

adjusting knob [2]. Remove 2 screws [3] and
then remove the arm cover /1 [4].
[3]
[4] 1050fs2412c
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the arm

[1]
cover /2 [2].
[2] 1050fs2413c
2 -282
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the arm

[1]
cover /3 [2].
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2423c
5. Remove the IC board unit. (See IC unit Field Ser-

[1]
vice "II 3.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the IC unit.")
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the exte-
rior mounting plate /A [2].
[2] 1050fs2414c
7. Peel off the label [2] of the arm cover /3 [1].

[1] [2]
1050fs2415c
2 -283
8. With the bolt section [1] of the status indicator

[2] [3] [1]
light provided with the nut [2] and washer [3],
pass the wiring harness of the status indicator
light through the arm cover /3 [4], the washer [5]
and the nut [6] and tighten up the nut [6].
II Maintenance
[4] [5] [6]
1050fs2416c
2 -284
9. Pass the wiring harness [1] of the status indicator

[1] [2]
light through the operation unit support member
[2] and install the arm cover /3 [4] with 3 screws
[3].
10. Reinstall the arm cover /1, the arm cover /2 and
the adjusting knob following the removal steps in
reverse.
II Maintenance
[3]
[4] 1050fs2417c
2 -285
11. Connect the connector [1] of the status indicator

[2] [1]
light to the connector [2] on the main body for
wiring.
NOTE
• When wiring, be sure that the wiring harness
does not come in contact with the drive sec-
tion.
12. Reinstall the upper cover /Rt and the rear cover
II Maintenance
following the removal steps in reverse.
1050fs2418c
2 -286
4.4.2 Coin vendor

A. Connecting connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
[2]
1050fs2234c
[1] AC drive board (ACDB) [3] CN37 (Serial)

[2] CN36 (Parallel) [4] Printer control board (PRCB)
2 -287
4.5 PCS corresponding parts

4.5.1 PCS corresponding parts
"PCS" stands for "proactive customization support," and three types of items are set so that the demands
expected in the POD market and Product printing market can be met. Providing these parts allows customiza-
tion adequate to the user's type of usage.
4.5.2 PCS corresponding parts list

A. Transfer assist sheet
(1) Purpose
For the transfer assist sheet, A3 and A4 sizes (metric)/11 inches size (inch) are provided as standard equipment.
II Maintenance
When paper sizes other than the standard sizes are used more frequently, the transfer assist sheet can be
changed to these sizes.
(2) Characteristics
8 types of the transfer assist sheets are provided according to the paper sizes. However, when changing to
sizes other than those provided as standard equipment, it is necessary to add a new relay wiring harness and
size detection connector.
It is possible to use a number of the transfer/separation assist sheets. On that occasion, however, after adding
the relay wiring harness mentioned above, it is necessary to purchase a transfer assist sheet that has been
incorporated into the transfer/separation charger unit. This transfer/separation charger unit must be provide with
a size detection connector.
NOTE
• When using plural sizes jointly, the transfer/separation unit of standard equipment (A3 and A4/
metric, 11 inches) requires the size detection connector.
• Since no individual counter is equipped, when the unit is replaced for each size, the management
of the counter is unavailable.
(3) Counter management of the transfer/separation unit in the PCS correspondence

The copy count (fixed parts count) by parts that need to be replaced is equipped with a counter for each size.
When making the transfer/separation charger unit PCS corresponding, be sure to conduct the counter manage-
ment with this counter. However, this counter counts any relevant size regardless of the size of the transfer assist
sheet installed to the main body. So, to manage the counter correctly, the user must replace the transfer/separa-
tion charger unit with an appropriate one.
• Reference:
Double sided print job on the following condition
Transfer size: 8.5 inches
Weight: 91 g/m2 or less
No. of prints: 10
Size of the transfer assist sheet: A4R, A5
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced on this condition is as shown below. On this occasion, even if
the transfer assist sheet size is A4R or A5, the transfer size is "8.5 inches" and the count is up at 8.5 inches
No. 107 8.5 inches. double sided paper through count 10 counts
No. 108 A4R, A5 double sided paper through count 0 count
2 -288
Unit Type Wire color of the Remarks

size detection
connector
Transfer/separation Used exclusively for A3, A4 Brown Default size for metric area
charger unit Used exclusively for 11 inches Red Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Orange
Used exclusively for B4, B5 Yellow
Used exclusively for 8.5 inches Pink
Used exclusively for A4R, A5 Blue
II Maintenance
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 inches Purple
Used exclusively for B5R Gray
Transfer assist Used exclusively for A3, A4 — Default size for metric area
sheet assembly Used exclusively for 11 inches Default size for inch area
Used exclusively for 8K, 16K
Used exclusively for B4, B5
Used exclusively for 8.5 inches
Used exclusively for A4R, A5
Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 inches
Used exclusively for B5R
B. Cleaning brush
(1) Purpose
The cleaning brush is mainly used while in variable printing using coated paper. For coated paper while in off-set printing, ink
gets dry slowly. Therefore, to prevent the transfer of ink onto the backside of the paper, powder is normally sprinkled. The
cleaning brush is used to prevent the occurrence of a no feed condition due to this powder.
However, to maintain the specified performance, the cleaning brush needs to be cleaned every 2,000 sheets of
paper through while in variable printing.
This part is effective against a no feed condition caused by dusty paper.
(2) Characteristics
The cleaning brush can be equipped to both the main body paper feed tray and the PF and used in common
between the main body and the PF to clean the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller.
However, the rollers get worn earlier, thus resulting in reduced effective life of the rollers.
A single brush is packaged together with the main body. It can be purchased as a service part when required.
C. Paper feed assist plate

(1) Purpose
The paper feed assist plate is used to adjust the pick-up pressure on paper by changing the load on the pick-up
roller. Adjustments can be made according to the type of paper to increase the paper feed performance.
Improve a non feed condition that is apt to occur when feeding paper, such as a thick paper, that is hard to con-
vey.
(2) Characteristics
The paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g and the pick-up roller can be equipped with up to 4 plates.
Increasing or decreasing the number of plates allows you to adjust the pick-up pressure corresponding to the
type of paper.
4 plates only are packaged together with the main body and they can be purchased as service parts when
required.
2 -289
4.5.3 Procedure for reinstallation

A. Transfer assist sheet
(1) Preparation
When changing from the standard size to any other size, it is necessary to purchase the following parts.
• PCS corresponding (other than the standard size) transfer /separation charger unit (assembled with the trans-
fer assist sheet) *
• Size detection connector
• Relay wiring harness
• Wire binding band
* Other than the transfer/separation charger unit assembled with each size of the transfer assist sheet, it is
II Maintenance
possible to purchase the transfer assist sheet assembly.
(2) Addition of the size detection connector

1. Pull out the ADU. (See "1.5.8 ADU.")
[1]
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the con-
nector cover [2].
[2]
1050fs2019c
2 -290

[2]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] and remove the transfer/
separation charger unit [3].
II Maintenance
[3]
[1] [2] 1050fs2021c
2 -291
5. Turn over the transfer/separation charger unit [1]

and tighten the wiring harness of the existing
connector [2] and the wiring harness of the size
detection connector [3] with the wiring band [4].
NOTE
• Be sure to install the wiring harness of the
size detection connector [3] so that the rear
end section [5] does not protrude from the
inner end [7] of the connector bracket plate
II Maintenance
[6] [1] [6]. If it is protruding, the wiring harness may

be broken.
• For the size detection connector, it is neces-
sary to install the one corresponding to the
size to be used. This can be identified by the
[5]
wire color of the size detection connector.
[7] (See "4.5.2 A. Transfer assist sheet.")
[4]
[2] [3]
1050fs2022c
(3) Addition of the relay wiring harness

A [2].
2. Open the open/close guide /1 [3].
[6] 3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and remove the ADU cover /
Lt [5].
[4]
Rt [7].
[5]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2]
1050fs2023c
2 -292
5. Connect the connector [2] of the relay wiring har-

[4]
ness [1] to the CN599 of the ADU drive board /1
[3].
6. Pull around the relay wiring harness [1] as shown
in the drawing and hold it with the relay wiring
clamps [4] provided at the 12 placed.
II Maintenance
[4] [1]
[3]
[1]
[2] [4] 1050fs2024c
7. Reinstall the transfer/separation charger unit [1].

[1] [3]
8. Connect the size detection connector [4] to the
connector [3] of the relay wiring harness [2].
9. Reinstall the ADU covers /Rt and /Lt and the
lever A.
10. Put the ADU back to the inside of the main body.
11. Change the software DIPSW settings in the ser-
vice mode to the following.
• DIPSW26-0: On (1)
• DIPSW26-1: On (1)
NOTE
• When the above software DIPSW is changed,
the size detection connector is required by
[4] [2] 1050fs2025c
the transfer/separation charger of standard
size. When the size detection connector is not
installed, the transfer assist sheet does not
operate.
2 -293
B. Cleaning brush
(1) Checking of the contents of the package
The package contains the following as a set.
• [1] Brush body: 1 pc
• [2] Positioning screw: 2 pcs
• [3] Screw: 2 pcs (TP3 x 6)
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs2718c
2 -294
(2) Procedure
The direction of installation is the same for the main body and the PF. The explanation here is given for the main
body.
1. Pull out the tray.

[1]
2. Set 2 positioning screws [1] to the pick-up roller
assembly bracket [2].
II Maintenance
[2] 1050fs2719c
3. Remove the pick-up roller assembly and then

[2] [1]
remove the mounting bracket. (See "1.5.6 B.
Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller.")
Attach 2 screws [2] to the mounting bracket [1].
1050fs2428c
2 -295
4. Put the pick-up roller assembly [1] back to its

[1]
original position.
II Maintenance
1050fs2430c
5. Hold the knob [2] with the brush face of the

[1] [2] [3]
brush body [1] down and set it to the positions of
the screws [3] and the screws [4] to install it to
the bracket [5] of the pick-up roller assembly.
NOTE
• Be sure to support the bracket [5] of the pick-
up roller assembly from beneath so that
unnecessary force is not applied onto the
roller, and press in the knob [2].
Be sure to pull the knob when removing the
brush main body.
[5] [4] 1050fs2429c
2 -296
C. Paper feed assist plate

(1) Checking of the contents of the package
The package contains the following as a set.
• [1] Paper feed assist plate: 4 pcs.
• [2] Screw: 2 pcs (TP3 x 8)
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
1050fs2722c
(2) Procedure
For the main body, see chapter III "5.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment."
For the PF, see chapter III "1.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure" in the Field Service for the PF-701.
2 -297
4.5.4 Periodic maintenance of the PCS corresponding parts

A. Maintenance Item

1 Transfer/ (1) Removal of trans-
separation fer/separation unit
charger unit
(2) Replacing of trans- 1 z
fer assist sheet
assembly
II Maintenance
2 Tray (1) Cleaning of clean- z Cleaning pad/

ing brush blower brush
B. Periodically replaced parts list
No. Classification Parts name Quan- Actual replacement

tity cycle
1 Transfer assist sheet Exclusively used for A3 and A4 1 1,500,000
2 assembly * 1 Exclusively used for 11 inches 1 1,500,000
3 Exclusively used for 8K and 16K 1 1,500,000
4 Exclusively used for B4 and B5 1 1,500,000
5 Exclusively used for 8.5 inches 1 1,500,000
6 Exclusively used for A4R and A5 1 1,500,000
7 Exclusively used for 8, 8.125 and 8.25 inches 1 1,500,000
8 Exclusively used for B5R 1 1,500,000
9 Transfer/separation Exclusively used for A4 1 6,000,000
10 charger unit Exclusively used for 11 inches 1 6,000,000
11 Exclusively used for 8K and 16K 1 6,000,000
12 Exclusively used for B4 and B5 1 6,000,000
13 Exclusively used for 8.5 inches 1 6,000,000
14 Exclusively used for A4R and A5 1 6,000,000
15 Exclusively used for 8, 8.125 and 8.25 inches 1 6,000,000
16 Exclusively used for B5R 1 6,000,000
* 1 For the PCS corresponding transfer assist assembly, the counter management is not available. The numer-
ical values given here are reference.
2 -298
C. Maintenance procedure
Caution:
• When replacing the periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
(1) Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly

1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer assist sheet assembly: Every 1,500,000 prints
II Maintenance
2) Procedure
See "1.5.8 J. Replacing the transfer assist sheet assembly."
(2) Cleaning the cleaning brush

1) Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Cleaning brush : The user conducts the cleaning of the brush as necessary.
As a rough standard, the cleaning cycle is once for every 1,500 to 2,000 which is the
paper capacity of the tray.
NOTE
• The cleaning brush is not periodically replaced parts.
2 -299
4.6 CMS corresponding parts

4.6.1 CMS corresponding parts
"CMS" stands for "customer maintenance support," and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts
by himself.
For CMS corresponding parts, 5 types of parts are set. However, some parts provided as an assembly of parts
larger than those replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement opera-
tion.
4.6.2 CMS corresponding parts

II Maintenance
A. Pick-up roller unit

(1) Purpose
To return to normal operation in a short time when the paper feedability goes down due to deterioration of the
pick-up roller.
(2) Replacement cycle

• Pick-up roller unit (Main body) : Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (DF-603) : Every 4,500,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 800,000 prints)
• Pick-up roller unit (PF-701) : Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
(3) Replacement procedure

1) Pick-up roller unit (Main body)
See "1.5.6 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly."
NOTE
• The steps 1 to 8 are applicable.
2) Pick-up roller unit (DF-603)

See DF-603 Service Manual (Field service)
Chapter II "1.1.1 A. Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/paper feed assist roller."
NOTE
3) Pick-up roller unit (PF-701)

See PF-701 Service Manual (Field service)
Chapter II "1.1.1 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller unit/separation roller unit."
NOTE
2 -300
B. Separation roller unit

(1) Purpose
To return to the normal operation in a short time when the paper feedability goes down due to deterioration of
the separation roller.

• Separation roller unit (Main body) : Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
• Separation roller unit (DF-603) : Every 2,250,000* prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 400,000 prints)
• Separation roller unit (PF-701) : Every 2,250,000 prints (Periodically replaced cycle: 500,000 prints)
* For the torque limiter and the separation roller that are the component parts of the separation roller unit (DF-
603), the periodically replaced cycle is different. So, the cycle of the separation roller that is the shorter of
II Maintenance
the two is employed.

1) Separation roller unit (Main body)
See "1.5.6 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assembly/separation roller assembly."
NOTE
2) Separation roller unit (DF-603)

See DF-603 Service Manual (Field service)
Chapter II "1.1.1 B. Replacing the separation/torque limiter."
NOTE
3) Separation roller unit (PF-701)

See PF-701 Service Manual (Field service)
Chapter II "1.1.1 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller unit/separation roller unit."
NOTE
C. Transfer/separation charger unit

(1) Purpose
To return to normal operation in a short time when the transfer or separation performance goes down due to
deterioration of the transfer/separation charger unit.

• Transfer/separation charger unit : 6,000,000 prints

See "1.5.8 E. Replacing the transfer/separation charger unit."
2 -301
II Maintenance
Blank page
2 -302
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION
III ADJUSTMENT B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-

vice
Due attention should be paid to the following when
/SETTING repairing the machine.
1. Be sure to unplug the power cord from the
1. HOW TO USE THE power outlet. Also, when operating the machine
with the power supplied, be careful of the scan
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING
of the exposure unit and be sure not to get
SECTION
caught by the gear.
1.1 Composition 2. The fusing section may be very hot. Be careful
not to get burnt when handling it.
This part "ADJUSTMENT/SETTING" describes items 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
to be adjusted and the method of adjustment that is careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
required by this machine, it also gives detailed expla- to the unit.
nations. 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare
A. Checking before starting work hands.
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to
check first the following:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in
accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot
of electricity connected to the same power sup-
ply? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as eleva-
tor and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the
machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct
sunlight, air ventilation, etc.
• Levelness of the location on which the
machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original
itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones
at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning
blade, etc)
10. Is toner filled?
3 -1
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in a circle by the
priority if there is any.
After PM Implementation
Adjustment items Replacement parts/Others
Developer
Drum
Machine adjustment Magnification adjustment Regist line speed adjustment
Printer drum clock adjustment (Side1)
Printer horizontal adjustment (Side1)
Scanner drum clock adjustment
ADF drum clock adjustment
Printer drum clock adjustment (Side2)
Printer horizontal clock adjustment (Side2)
Timing adjustment Printer restart timing adjustment (Side1)
Scanner restart timing adjustment
ADF restart timing adjustment
ADF regist loop adjustment
Centering adjustment Printer centering adjustment

ADF Centering adjustment
Warp adjustment Scanner (Glass) warp (Main)
Scanner (Glass) warp (Deputy)
Scanner (ADF) warp (Main)
Scanner (ADF) warp (Deputy)
ADF adjustment ADF density adjustment
ADF original size adjustment
ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment
ADF incline offset adjustment
ADF centering sensor adjustment
Process High voltage adjustment High voltage auto adjustment
adjustment Drum peculiarity adjustment Blade setting mode
Auto drum potential adjustment f e
Auto maximum density adjustment g f
Auto dot diameter adjustment h g
LD offset adjustment i h
Auto gamma adjustment (1dot) j i
Cartridge set mode k j
Counter Count PM cycle setting counter reset {
Developer setting counter reset c
Sensitive drum setting counter reset e
Copy count of special parts Fixing cleaning web
ISW ISW mode
Finisher adjustment Stacker adjustment Paper width adjustment
Paper length adjustment
IP HDD format IP HDD format
Others Setting powder application c
Dust-proof glass cleaning (Write unit) d d
Mirror unit positioning (require the jigs)
Blade auto replacement spring charge
Fusing lamp's installation direction (Maker's mark in front)
Thermistor positioning (require the jig)
Thermostat positioning (require the jig)
Parameter board (PB) replacement
EEPROM replacement
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the parameter board
(PB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service
manager of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the PB is also damaged.
• The parameter board (PB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when
replacing the PB, perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correc-
tion (Drum, developer, cleaning blade, cleaning web). For details, contact the service manager of the autho-
rized distributor.
3 -2
•
Cleaning blade
d
c
e
Toner guide brush
c
Cleaning web
c
Slit glass
c
Scanner wire · mirror
c
h
g
f
e
d
unit
CCD unit
k
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
Write unit
k
j
i
h
g
f
d
e
c
Registration roller
f
e
d
c
Multi feed detection board

/1, /2 (MFDB /1, /2)
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
{
sidered that the EEPROM is also damaged.

{
Thermistor /1 (TH1)
{
Thermistor /3 (TH3)
{
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
{
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
{
High voltage unit /1, /2
c
(HV1, /2)
Overall control board
d
c
(OACB)
Printer control board
{
(PRCB)
Operation board /1
{
(OB1)
RADF control board
c
e
k
d
f
l
j
g
i
h
(RADFCB)
LS control board (LSCB)
e
d
c
FD control board (FDCB)
c
FNS control board
c
(FNSCB)
Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all adjustments for the FD or FS if it is con-
When replacing a board due to the FD control board (FDCB) or the FNS control board (FNSCB) being dam-
aged, the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that was installed on the damaged control board should be used
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION
3 -3
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
3. UTILITY MODE
3.1 List of utility modes
NOTE
• For details on the utility mode, refer to "User's guide."
01 System Setting 01 Language Setting

02 Buzzer Setting 01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume Setting
02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting
03 1 SHOT Indication Time
04 Default Screen Setting
05 Auto Reset Setting
06 Key Response Time
07 Change User Password
02 Function 01 Feed Tray Setting 01 Feed Tray Auto Selection
Setting 02 ATS Permit
03 Auto Paper Type

02 Each Function Setting
03 Density Setting 01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode
02 User Density Setting
03 Photo Mode Density Selection
04 Image Density Selection
04 Preset Zoom
03 Copy Setting 01 Reset Setting 01 Initial Setting
02 Reset Function Setting
03 Initial by Key Counter Insert
02 Each Function Setting
04 Scanner Set- 01 Default Address Setting
ting 02 Each Function Setting
05 Touch Screen Adjustment
06 Machine 01 System Setting 01 Power Save Setting
Manager Setting 02 Time and Date Setting
03 Weekly Timer 01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Setting 02 Time Setting
03 Timer Action On/Off Setting
04 Lunch Hour Off Setting
05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt
04 Management List Print
05 Operation Prohibit Setting
06 Expert 01 Original Scan Area Setting
Adjustment 02 ADF Frame Erasure Setting
03 Non Image Area Erase Setting
07 Size Setting
02 Manager/Machine Register 01 Machine Manager Register
3 -4
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT / SETTING SECTION
06 Machine 03 User Auth./Volume 01 Authentication Method 02 Authentication Setting

Manager Setting Track 02 Section Management Setting
02 Volume Track
03 User Authentication Set
04 Non register/Output Set
04 Network Setting 01 Machine NIC Setting
02 Controller NIC 01 TCP/IP
Setting 02 NetWare
03 IPP
04 FTP
05 SNMP
06 SMB
07 AppleTalk
08 E-Mail 01 E-Mail Send Setting
02 E-Mail Receive Setting
03 Title Setting
04 Sentence Setting
09 HDD
10 Alert Mail
11 CSRC 01 CSRC Send Setting
02 CSRC Receive Setting
03 CSRC Communication Test
12 IS OpenAPI
12 PSWC
13 Network Setting Clear
05 Copy/Printer Setting 01 Job Offset Operating
02 Continuation print(Print)
03 Page No. pos.(Booklet)
04 Fixing Prerotation Set
05 Image Auto Rotation
06 Interruption Suspend
07 Copy Reserve Operation
08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)
09 Continuation Print (Copy)
10 Original Glass SDF
11 SDF Auto Setting
06 System Connection 01 User Call
07 Security Setting 01 Machine Manager Password
02 HDD Management 01 Folder Box List/Delete
Setting 02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period Setting
03 Change HDD Lock Password
03 Security Strengthen Mode
08 Scanner Address 01 Send Address Edit/Delete
Register
3 -5
SERVICE MODE bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
4. SERVICE MODE
4.1 Setting method
This machine is provided with a service mode for var-
ious adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set in this
mode is stored in the parameter board (PB).
4.1.1 Start and exit service mode

You can access the service mode while the power is
both turned ON and OFF. In either way, the started
service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
A. Starting and exiting service mode while the

power is ON
1. Be sure that the ordinary copy screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the Utility/Counter button.
3. "Utility Menu screen"

On the Operation panel, press the following but-
tons.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been set, you must
enter the password to enter the service mode.
4. "Service mode menu screen"
The service mode appears.
5. Press the key for an item you want to configure.
The setting screen for each item appears.
6. Press the [Exit] key to go back to the "Utility
Menu" screen.
7. The new settings become effective.
B. Starting and exiting service mode while the

power is OFF
1. While pressing the Utility/Counter button, turn
ON the power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, you must
enter the password to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
3. Press the key for an item you want to configure.
The setting screen for each item appears.
4. Turn OFF the SW2.
5. After the reboot, the new settings become effec-
tive.
3 -6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 SERVICE MODE
4.2 List of service mode
01 Machine Adjustment 01 Tray Adjustment

02 Magnification 01 Regist Line Speed Adjustment
Adjustment 02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>
03 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>
04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>
05 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>
06 Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment
07 ADF Drum Clock Adjustment
03 Timing Adjustment 01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>
02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>
03 Printer Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Printer Pre-regist Adjustment
05 Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
06 Transfer Assistance Timing Adjustment
07 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment
08 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment
09 ADF Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Centering Adjust- 01 Printer Centering Adjustment
ment 02 Scanner Centering Adjustment
03 ADF Centering Adjustment
05 Warp Adjustment
06 NonImage Area Erase Check
07 ADF Adjustment 01 ADF Density Adjustment
02 ADF Original Size Adjustment
03 ADF Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
04 ADF Incline Offset Adjustment
05 ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment
08 Recall Standard Data Recall standard data: Machine adjustment
02 Process Adjustment 01 High Voltage 01 High Voltage Auto Adjustment
Adjustment 02 HV Adjustment (Charge)
03 HV Adjustment (Transfer)
04 HV Adjustment (Separation AC)
05 HV Adjustment (Separation DC)
06 HV Adjustment (Charging grid voltage)
07 HV Adjustment (Bias of development DC)
08 Transfer Guide Confirm
02 Drum Peculiarity Adj. 01 Blade Setting Mode
02 Auto Drum Potential Adjustment
03 Auto Maximum Density Adjustment
04 Auto Dot Diameter Adjustment
05 LD Offset Adjustment
3 -7
02 Process Adjustment 02 Drum Peculiarity 06 Auto Gamma Adjustment (1dot)

Adjustment 07 LD1 Bias Adjustment
08 LD2 Bias Adjustment
09 Cartridge Set Mode
03 Drum Peculiarity Manual
04 User Paper Setting
05 Recall Standard Data
03 Counter 01 PM Count
02 Data Collection 01 Total count of each paper size
02 Copy count of each paper size
03 Print count of each paper size
04 Large size count
05 ADF Count
06 Pixel ratio of each section
07 Pixel ratio ranking list
08 JAM data of time series
09 JAM Count
10 Count of each copy mode
11 SC data of time series
12 SC Count
13 JAM count of each section
14 SC count of each section
03 Parts Counter 01 Count of special parts
02 Count of each parts
04 Machine Condition 01 I/O Check mode
05 List Output 01 List Output
06 Test Mode 01 Test Pattern Output Mode
02 Test Pattern Density
03 Running Test Mode
07 System Setting 01 Software SW Setting
02 Telephone Number Setting
03 M/C Serial Number Setting
04 Setting Date Input
08 ROM Version 01 ROM Version
09 CS Remote Care 01 CS Remote Care 01 E-Mail
02 Modem
10 ISW 01 ISW
11 Finisher Adjustment 01 Stapler Position Adj. 01 Stapling Center Position Adjustment
02 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Multi Folder (Punch) 01 Paper Width Adjustment
Adj. 02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
3 -8
11 Finisher Adjustment 03 Multi Folder (Fold) 01 Folding Position Adjustment

Adj. 02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment
03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment
04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment
05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment
06 Gate Position Adjustment
07 Fold Regist Loop Adjustment
04 Multi Folder (PI) Adj.
05 Stacker Adjustment 01 Paper Width Adjustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
06 Saddle Stitcher Adj.
07 Recall Standard Data
12 Machine Manager Setting 01 Manager Authentication
02 Machine Manager Password
13 CE Setting 01 CE Authentication Setting
02 CE Password Setting
14 IP HDD Format 01 IP HDD Format
3 -9
4.3 Machine adjustment 5. Pull out the selected tray and widen the paper
guide [1] to the max. width. Narrow the paper
4.3.1 Tray adjustment guide [1] slowly to fill a gap [3] between the lift
Adjust the paper size from tray /1 to tray /5. plate cover [2] and the paper guide [1] until it
This adjustment is needed when a paper size is not reaches the scale "250"[4]. (The scale inside
detected properly. the paper guide is 250 mm)
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [1]
1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
Press the [01 Tray Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
4. "Tray adjustment screen"
Tray adjustment includes the following items.
Press the [Next] key or the [Back], and select

(1) of the tray you adjust.
[Tray 1 (1)] [4]
[Tray 1 (2)]
[Tray 2 (1)]
250mm
[Tray 2 (2)]
[Tray 3 (1)]
[Tray 3 (2)]
[Tray 4 (1)]
[Tray 4 (2)]
[Tray 5 (1)]
[Tray 5 (2)]
[1] 1050fs3021c
NOTE
• Be sure to select (1) of the tray you adjust. 6. Set the tray.
7. Press the [Start] key on the screen.
The current position of the selected tray is read
in. When the adjustment is done, the message
"Complete" appears.
8. Press the [Next] key and select (2) of the trays
you want to adjust.
NOTE
• Be sure to select (2) of the trays you want
to adjust.
9. Pull out the tray and widen the paper guide to
the max. width. Narrow the paper guide slowly
to fill a gap between the lift plate cover and the
paper guide until it reaches the scale "A3·A4".
(The scale inside the paper guide is 297 mm)
10. Set the tray.
3 -10
11. Press the [Start] key on the screen. 4.3.2 Magnification adjustment
The current position of the selected tray is read Adjust various kinds of image magnification.
in. When the adjustment is done, the message
"Complete" appears. A. Regist line speed adjustment
Change the line speed of the registration roller to
12. To adjust other trays, repeat steps 4 to 11.
match the line speed of the drum.
NOTE
• This adjustment changes the line speed of
the registration roller only. Unless properly
adjusted, it may cause a transfer jitter at a
position 145 mm from the paper trailing edge.
• Usually, do not use this adjustment in the
field. Use this only when replacing the regis-
tration roller and when a transfer jitter occurs
at a position 145 mm from the paper trailing
edge.
(1) Procedure

screen.
Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on
the sub menu.
4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Regist Line Speed Adjustment]
key.
5. "Regist Line Speed Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the [Inside Pattern] is displayed
"16", and press the [COPY] key.
6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
put the test pattern (No.16).
NOTE
• Select [72-91g] for the basic weight setting.
3 -11
7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan 15. Check the transfer jitter around 145 mm from
direction with a scale. the paper trailing edge, and find an output with
• Standard value: ± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) the least transfer jitter (Density of half-tone is
even with surrounding area).
Within 102.8 0 mm
-0.5 16. Press the [SERVICE] key.
0 Through the numeric keys, enter the adjusted
102.8 -0.5
step number of the output paper you selected
in step 15, and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-40 (short) to +55 (long)
1 step = 0.05%
1050fs3001c
8. When the value is not within the standard value,

press the [SERVICE] key.

Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key.
1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained.
11. "Regist Line Speed Adjustment"
Press the [Inside Pattern] key and enter 9 with
the numeric key. Press the [Set] key.
Press the [Inside Pattern] key again and press
the [COPY] key.
NOTE
• The density of "Test pattern density set-
ting" is reflected. So, be sure to check the
set value of "Test pattern density setting"
to ensure it is "255."
12. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
13. Press the [SERVICE] key to return to the [Regist
Line Speed Adjustment] screen.
14. Repeat steps 11 to 13 to output test patterns
for two steps before and after the value you
entered in step 10.
e.g.: When the adjusted value is "-1"
Output 5 test patterns for -3, -2, -1, 0, 1.
3 -12
B. Printer drum clock adjustment (Side 1) C. Printer drum clock adjustment (Side 2)
Adjust the magnification of the sub scan direction on Adjust the magnification of the sub scan direction on
only side 1 of the printer system. only side 2 of the printer system.
This adjustment changes the line speed of the drum This adjustment changes the line speed of the drum
and the registration roller on side 1 evenly. and the registration roller on side 2 evenly.
(1) Procedure (1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. 1. Enter the service mode.

2. "Service mode menu screen" 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen. screen.
Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on Press the [02 Magnification Adjustment] key on
the sub menu. the sub menu.
4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen" 4. "Magnification adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment Press the [03 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment
<SIDE1>] key. <SIDE2>] key.
5. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> 5. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
screen" Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out- 6. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130 g/m2 or 35 lb
put the test pattern (No.16). Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan put the test pattern (No.16).
direction with a scale. 7. Measure the magnification of the sub scan
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) direction with a scale.
Within 205.7 ± 1 mm • Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 205.7 ± 1 mm
205.7 1
205.7 1
1050fs3002c
1050fs3003c
press the [SERVICE] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
9. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> press the [SERVICE] key.
screen" 9. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key. and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-10 (short) to +10 (long) • Setting range:-10 (short) to 0 (long)
1 step = 0.05% 1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained. can be obtained.
3 -13
D. Printer horizontal adjustment (Side 1) E. Printer horizontal adjustment (Side 2)

Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction on Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction on
only side 1 of the printer system. only side 2 of the printer system.
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification
in image processing prior to the laser exposure. in image processing prior to the laser exposure.

screen. screen.
Press the [04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment Press the [05 Printer Horizontal Adjustment
<SIDE1>] key. <SIDE2>] key.
5. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> 5. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"

screen" Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but-
7. Measure the magnification of the main scan ton to output the test pattern (No.16).
direction with a scale. 7. Measure the magnification of the main scan
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) direction with a scale.
Within 190 ± 1 mm • Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 190 ± 1 mm
190
190
1050fs3004c
1050fs3005c
press the [SERVICE] key. 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
9. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> press the [SERVICE] key.
screen" 9. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> screen"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
and press the [Set] key. and press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-10 (short) to +10 (long) • Setting range:-5 (short) to 0 (long)
1 step = 0.1% 1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
can be obtained. can be obtained.
3 -14
F. Scanner drum clock adjustment G. ADF drum clock adjustment

Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction of Adjust the magnification of the main scan direction of
the scanner system. the scanner system.
This adjustment changes the scanning speed of the This adjustment changes the scanning speed of the
exposure unit. ADF.

screen. screen.
Press the [06 Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment] Press the [07 ADF Drum Clock Adjustment]
key. key.
5. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) drum clock adj. screen" 5. "Scanner (ADF) drum clock adj. screen"
Press the [COPY] key. Press the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test magnification you adjust. Press the [COPY] key.
chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but- The magnification changes as follows:
ton. 100% → 75% → 200% → 400%
7. Measure the magnification of the main scan 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "adjust-
direction with a scale. ment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start button.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size) 7. Measure the drum clock magnification with a
Within 200 ± 1 mm scale.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (When in life-size)
Within 190 ± 1 mm
200
1050fs3006c

190 1050fs3007c
9. "Scanner (Org. Glass) drum clock adj. screen" 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys press the [SERVICE] key.
and press the [Set] key. 9. "Scanner (ADF) drum clock adj. screen"
• Setting range:-40 (short) to +40 (long) Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
1 step = 0.05% and press the [Set] key.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value • Setting range:-40 (short) to +40 (long)
can be obtained. 1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
3 -15
4.3.3 Timing adjustment 9. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>

Adjust various image timing. screen"
A. Printer restart timing adjustment (Side 1) and press the [Set] key.
Adjust the image leading edge timing on only side 1. • Setting range:-30 (short) to +30 (long)
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim- 1 step = 0.1 mm
ing.
can be obtained.
NOTE
• Be sure the printer drum clock adjustment
(Side 1) has been adjusted. B. Printer restart timing adjustment (Side 2)
Adjust the image leading edge timing on only side 2.
(1) Procedure This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-
ing.
2. "Service mode menu screen" NOTE
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. • Be sure the printer drum clock adjustment
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the (Side 2) has been adjusted.
screen.
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the (1) Procedure
sub menu.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
Press the [01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment 2. "Service mode menu screen"
<SIDE1>] key. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
5. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1> 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen" screen.
Tray can be adjusted as a whole and by each Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
(tray /1 to /5). Press the [Next] or the [Back] key sub menu.
to select the item you adjust, and press the 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
[COPY] key. Press the [02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- <SIDE2>] key.
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). 5. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale. screen"
• Standard value:20 ± 0.5 mm Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
20
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start
button to output the test pattern (No.16).
1050fs3008c

3 -16
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale. 5. "Printer regist loop adj. screen"
• Standard value:20 ± 0.5 mm Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
20 The item changes as follows:
Side 1 → Side 2 → Side 1 thick → Side 2 thick
NOTE
• The adjustment values for "Side 1" and
"Side 2" are reflected on the paper weight
50 to 161 g/m2.
• The adjustment values for "Side 1 thick"
1050fs3009c
and "Side 2 thick" are reflected in 162 to
300 g/m2.
6. Set the copy according to the item that has
been adjusted and press the Start button to
9. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2> output a test pattern (No. 16).
screen"
7. When the trouble is not solved, press the [SER-
VICE] key.
8. "Printer regist loop adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
• Setting range:-10 (small) to +10 (large)
can be obtained.
1 step = 1 ms
9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate
C. Printer regist loop adjustment value is obtained.
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller
section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper
D. Printer pre-regist adjustment
jamming in the registration section.
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration
roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or
(1) Procedure
paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
2. "Service mode menu screen" (1) Procedure
screen.
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
sub menu.
screen.
Press the [03 Printer Regist Loop Adjustment]
sub menu.
key.
Press the [04 Printer Pre-regist Adjustment]
key.
5. "Printer pre-regist adj. screen"
Tray can be adjusted by each (tray /1 to /5).
3 -17
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- F. Scanner restart timing adjustment
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). Adjust image leading edge timing of original scanning
from the original glass.
7. When the trouble is not solved, press the [SER-
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading
VICE] key.
while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.
8. "Printer pre-regist adj. screen"
(1) Procedure
• Setting range:-10 (small) to +10 (large) 1. Enter the service mode.
1 step = 1ms 2. "Service mode menu screen"
9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
value is obtained. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
E. Printer lead edge timing adjustment
sub menu.
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(1) Procedure Press the [07 Scanner Restart Timing Adjust-
ment] key.
1. Enter the service mode. 5. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) restart timing adj.
2. "Service mode menu screen" screen"
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Press the [COPY] key.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test
screen. chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but-
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the ton.
sub menu. 7. Check the leading edge timing.
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" • Standard value:within 3 mm
Press the [05 Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjust- 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
ment] key. press the [SERVICE] key.
5. "Printer lead edge timing adjustment screen" 9. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) restart timing adj.
Press the [COPY] key. screen"
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). and press the [Set] key.
7. Check the printer lead edge timing. • Setting range:-40 (image, fast) to
• Standard value:within 3 mm +40 (image, slow)
8. When the value is not within the standard value, 1 step = 0.1 mm
press the [SERVICE] key. 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
9. "Printer lead edge timing adjustment screen" can be obtained.
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
3 -18
G. ADF restart timing adjustment H. ADF regist loop adjustment

Adjust image leading edge timing of original scanning Adjust the original loop amount in the ADF registra-
from the ADF. tion roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle,
In this adjustment, the starting position for reading or original jamming in the registration section.
while in the ADF scanning mode is adjusted.
(1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
2. "Service mode menu screen" Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
screen. Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the
Press the [03 Timing Adjustment] key on the sub menu.
sub menu. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [09 ADF Regist Loop Adjustment]
Press the [08 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment key.
key. 5. "ADF regist loop adj. screen"
5. "ADF restart timing adj. screen" Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the side of original you adjust, and press the
side of original you adjust, and press the [COPY] key.
[COPY] key. The side of original changes as follows:
The side of original changes as follows: SIDE1 → SIDE2
SIDE1 → SIDE2
NOTE
NOTE • SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2
• SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2 represents the back side.
represents the back side. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "adjust- "adjustment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start
ment chart" on the ADF. Press the Start button. button.
7. Check the image leading edge timing. 7. When the ADF regist loop amount is not appro-
• Standard value: within 3 mm priate, press the [SERVICE] key.
8. When the value is not within the standard value, 8. "ADF regist loop adj. screen"
press the [SERVICE] key. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
9. "ADF restart timing adj. screen" and press the [Set] key.
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys • Setting range:-10 (small) to +10 (large)
and press the [Set] key. 1 step = 0.1 mm
• Setting range:-50 (image, fast) to 9. Repeat the steps 5 to 8 until an appropriate
+50 (image, slow) value is obtained.
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
3 -19
4.3.4 Centering adjustment B. Scanner centering adjustment

Adjust the mis-centering of images in the main scan Adjust the mis-centering of images when scanning
direction. from the original glass.
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-
ing. NOTE
• Be sure the printer centering has been
A. Printer centering adjustment adjusted.
Adjust the mis-centering of images on the printer.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• Be sure the printer horizontal adjustment
(Side 1) and the printer horizontal adjustment 2. "Service mode menu screen"
(Side 2) have been adjusted. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
(1) Procedure screen.
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the
1. Enter the service mode. sub menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Press the [02 Scanner Centering Adjustment]
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the key and press the [COPY] key.
screen. 5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and set the "test
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the chart" on the original glass. Press the Start but-
sub menu. ton.
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen" 6. Fold the outputted paper in half in the paper
Press the [01 Printer Centering Adjustment] key feed direction and check the amount of center-
and press the [COPY] key. ing error.
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start but- • Standard value: within ± 2 mm
ton to output the test pattern (No.16). 7. When the value is not within the standard value,
6. Fold the outputted paper in half in the paper press the [SERVICE] key.
feed direction and check the amount of center- 8. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) centering Adj. screen"
ing error. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys
• Standard value: within ± 2 mm and press the [Set] key.
7. When the value is not within the standard value, • Setting range:-30 (image in front) to
press the [SERVICE] key. +30 (image in back)
8. "Printer centering adjustment screen" 1 step = 0.1 mm
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys 9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value
and press the [Set] key. can be obtained.
• Setting range:-64 (image in front) to
+63 (image in back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
can be obtained.
3 -20
C. ADF Centering adjustment NOTE

Adjust the mis-centering of images when scanning • SIDE 1 represents the front side and SIDE 2
from the ADF. represents the back side.
• "Small" represents paper which is smaller
NOTE than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
• Be sure the printer centering has been However, this excludes A4 or 8.5 x 11 which
adjusted. is automatically adjusted by the centering
sensor.
(1) Procedure • "Large" represents paper which is larger
than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
However, this excludes A3 or 11 x 17 which
is automatically adjusted by the centering
sensor.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • When adjusting ADF centering sensor
screen.
adjustment (SIDE1:8.5 x 11) and (SIDE1:11 x
Press the [04 Centering Adjustment] key on the
17), change the centering sensor /Fr posi-
sub menu.
tion to "LT" side. Then, turn OFF/ON the
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen" power switch, and follow the procedure of
Press the [03 ADF Centering Adjustment] key this adjustment. (See chapter III "1.5 Cen-
and press the [COPY] key. tering sensor switchover adjustment" in
5. "ADF centering adjustment screen" the Theory of Operation for DF-603)
Press the [Next] or the [Back] key to select the 6. Select paper according to the adjusted item.
item you adjust, and press the [COPY] key. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF and
The item switches as follows: press the Start button.
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE1:Small)
7. Fold the outputted paper in half in the paper
↓
feed direction and check the amount of center-
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE2:Small)
ing error.
↓
• Standard value:within ± 2 mm
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE1:Large)
↓
ADF Centering Adjustment (SIDE2:Large)
9. [ADF centering adjustment screen]
↓
ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment (SIDE1:A4)
or (SIDE1:8.5 x 11)*1
• Setting range:-30 (image in front) to
↓
+30 (image in back)
ADF Centering Sensor Adjustment (SIDE1:A3)
1 step = 0.1 mm
or (SIDE1:11 x 17)*1
*1 When the power switch is ON, the ADF's can be obtained.
centering correction sensor /Fr position is
automatically detected and displayed.
3 -21
4.3.5 Warp adjustment 4.3.6 Non-image area erase check

Adjust the image distortion in scanning. When installing the copier or moving its installation
location, check to see if the non-image area erase
(1) Procedure function of the copy application functions works sat-
isfactorily. This also automatically adjusts sensitivity to
collectly detect the non-image area.
Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key. Preparation:
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • Open fully the DF.
screen. • There should not be anything on the original glass.
Press the [05 Warp Adjustment] key on the sub • Clean the original glass.
menu.
4. "Warp adjustment menu screen" A. Procedure
The item switches as follows: 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Scanner (Orig. Glass) warp adj. (Main) Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
↓ 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Scanner (Orig.Glass)warp adj. (Deputy) screen.

↓ Press the [06 Non Image Area Erase Check]
Scanner (ADF) warp adj. (Main) key on the sub menu.
↓ 4. "Non image area erase check screen"
Scanner (ADF) warp adj. (Deputy) Press the [Start] key.
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Set the "test chart" 5. Make sure the following message appears.
at the position (original glass or ADF) according
to the adjusted item, and press the Start but- NORMAL adjustment selected.
ton. The machine is set to appropriate parame-
6. Measure the image distortion with a scale. ters for Non-image area erase.
• Standard value:± 0.5% or less (difference in the
diagonals of 200 mm square If any other message appears, refer to "B. Error
must be 1.4 mm or less) message and Handling", and perform the non-
7. When the value is not within the standard value, image area erase check again.
8. "Warp adjustment menu screen"
• Setting range:-50 (counterclockwise) to
+50 (clockwise)
1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
3 -22
B. Error message and Handling 4.3.7 ADF adjustment

If an error is detected while performing the "Non A. ADF density adjustment
Image Area Erase Check" mode, the following error Since the slit glass of the scanning section is coated
message will be displayed. with electrical conductive material, The way it refracts
light from the exposure lamp is different from that of
(1) Error message 1 the original glass. Thus, perform this adjustment
when replacing the slit glass.
Adjust for Moderate Brightness.
The Non-image area erase function may not Preparation:
operate correctly with dark (density) origi- • Clean the slit glass.
nals. • Make sure the white chart is not dirty. (Partial dirt
can be ignored)
Handling 1
When the non-image area erase function is not used (1) Procedure
very frequently, or when copy originals that have a
dark background are not copied very frequently in
non-image area erase, the copier can be used in the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
current installation location. However, when copy Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
originals that have a dark background are frequently 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
copied, install the copier in a location where less screen.
external light gets in (darker) than the present loca- Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
tion, and check the non-image area erase check menu.
mode again. 4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 ADF Density Adjustment] key.
(2) Error message 2 5. "ADF density adjustment screen"
Set the "white chart" on the ADF.
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
In many case, the non-image area erase NOTE
function will not operate correctly. • Set the "white chart" in the A4-direction.
6. Press the [Start] key.
Handling 2
The white chart is scanned, and density is
When the non-image area erase function is not
automatically adjusted.
used very frequently, the copier can be used in
7. When an error message appears, turn OFF/ON
the current installation location. However, if the
the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
non-image area erase function is frequently
Repeat steps 1 to 6 until it is completed prop-
used, install the copier in a location where less
erly.
external light gets in (darker) than the present
location, and check the non-image area erase
check mode again. At this time, when there is a
B. ADF original size adjustment
bright light source such as a fluorescent light
Conduct this adjustment when the ADF original size is
installed directly above the copier, reconsider the
not properly detected.
installation location, or take some measures to
shield the light source and check the mode
(1) Procedure
again.
3 -23
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 5. "ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment screen"
screen. Press the [Start] key.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub The ADF sensor sensitivity is automatically
menu. adjusted, and the message of completion
4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen" appears.
Press the [02 ADF Original Size Adjustment] 6. Press the [COPY] key to check to see if there is
key. any malfunction.
5. "ADF original size adj. (A4 or 8.5 x 11) 1/2 7. When malfunction is found, press the [SER-
screen" VICE] key to repeat steps 5 and 6.
Set A4 paper (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
paper (for inch machine) on the ADF and press
D. ADF incline offset adjustment
the [Start] key.
Adjust image skew in the ADF scanning mode.
6. Confirm the message of completion, press the
This adjustment is reflected on the skew adjustment
[Next] key.
control in ADF scanning mode.
7. "ADF original size adj. (A5R or 5.5 x 8.5R) 2/2
screen" (1) Procedure
Set A5R paper (for metric machine) or 5.5 x
8.5R paper (for inch machine) on the ADF and 1. Enter the service mode.
press the [Start] key. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
8. Confirm the message of completion, press the Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
[COPY] key. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
9. Make sure the ADF original size is properly screen.
detected. Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
4. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
C. ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment
Press the [04 ADF Incline Offset Adjustment]
Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM
key.
display does not disappear despite no paper JAM)
5. "ADF Incline offset adjustment screen"
occurs in the reflective type sensors.
Press the [COPY] key.
Preparation: 6. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF and

• Clean each of the ADF reflective sensors. press the Start button.
7. Measure the image skew with a scale.
(1) Procedure • Standard value:within ± 0.5%
Difference between a and b is 2.1mm or less
screen.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
Press the [03 ADF Sensor Sensitivity Adjust-
ment] key.
a
1050fs3026c

3 -24
9. "ADF Incline Offset Adjustment screen" 6. Remove one screw [1] to remove the sensor
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys cover [2].
• Setting range:-60 (counterclockwise) to
+60 (clockwise)
1 step = 0.05%
can be obtained.
E. ADF centering sensor adjustment

Adjust sensitivity of the centering sensor /Fr.
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct adjustment for both A4
[1] [2]
and 8.5 x 11.
(1) Procedure
screen.
Press the [07 ADF Adjustment] key on the sub
menu.
Press the [05 ADF Centering Sensor Adjust-
ment] key.
5. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. screen"
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select "ADF
1050fs3022c
Centering Sensor Adj. (A4)".
7. Remove one screw [1] to place the sensor
mounting plate [2] to the "A4" side [3] impress,
the two locating projections [4] to their places.
[2] [3]
[4] [1] [4] 1050fs3023c
3 -25
8. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. (A4) screen" 4.3.8 Recall standard data
Press the [Start] key. Sensitivity of the sensor is Reset the adjustment values of the machine adjust-
adjusted, and message of completion is dis- ment to the factory initial data or the installation initial
played. data.
9. Press the [Next] key to select "ADF Centering

A. Procedure
Sensor Adj. (8.5 x 11)."
10. Remove one screw [1] to place the sensor 1. Enter the service mode.
mounting plate [2] to the "LT" side [3] impress, 2. "Service mode menu screen"
the two locating projections [4] to their places. Press the [01 Machine Adjustment] key.
[3] [2] screen.
Press the [08 Recall Standard Data] on the sub
menu.
4. "Recall standard data (Machine adjustment)
screen"
Press the [Factory Initial Data] or the [Installa-
tion Initial Data] key.
NOTE
• Selecting [Factory initial data] recalls the
factory initial data.
[4] [1] 1050fs3024c • Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls
11. "ADF Centering Sensor Adj. (8.5 x 11) screen" the adjustment values stored when code
Press the [Start] key. Sensitivity of the sensor is "91" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
adjusted, and message of completion is dis- • When selecting [Data at shipment] or [Data
played. at installation], the data returns with no dis-
play changed on the screen.
12. Replace the sensor plate to the position of orig-
inal size (A4 or 8.5 x 11) that the customer
mainly uses.
3 -26
4.4 Process adjustment G. HV adjustment (Bias of development DC)

Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
Make various adjustments around the process.
H. Transfer guide confirm
4.4.1 High voltage adjustment Do not use this adjustment in the field.
Adjust various high voltage values.
A. High voltage auto adjustment

Current values and voltage values of a transfer, sepa-
ration (AC), separation (DC), developing bias are
automatically adjusted respectively.
Preparation:
• The photo conductor section must be set.
(1) Procedure
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
screen.
Press the [01 High Voltage Adjustment] key on
the sub menu.
4. "High voltage adjustment mode menu screen"
Press the [01 High Voltage Auto Adjustment]
key.
5. "HV adjustment (Auto adjustment) screen"
Press the [Start] key.
NOTE
• When an error message appears during the
adjustment, check to see if the error unit is
properly installed and cleaned. Conduct the
adjustment again.
B. HV adjustment (Charge)
C. HV adjustment (Transfer)
D. HV adjustment (Separation AC)

E. HV adjustment (Separation DC)

F. HV adjustment (Charging grid voltage)

3 -27
4.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu

Make various adjustments related to image creation screen"
to the drum. Press the [02 Auto Drum Potential Adjustment]
key.
A. Blade setting mode
5. "Auto drum potential adjustment screen"
Perform this adjustment when changing the cleaning
Press the [Start] key. After the automatic
blade. In this mode, apply toner to the cleaning blade
adjustment, the message of completion
and drum, to prevents damages to them.
appears.
NOTE NOTE
• Perform this only when changing the cleaning • When the following error messages appear,
blade. Otherwise, the cleaning blade special check to see if the drum potential sensor
parts counter is reset, thus making it impos- (DPS) is properly installed and cleaned. Con-
sible to implement the auto blade change in duct the adjustment again.
the right timing. 1) Error 1
• Apply setting powder to the cleaning blade In the 0V check of the DPS, voltage over
and drum. 100V is detected 5 times or more.
2) Error 2
(1) Procedure The drum potential after laser exposure is

detected to be over 350V, and it is deter-
mined that control patch detect signal is
2. "Service mode menu screen" not outputted.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. 3) Error 3
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Drum potential has been corrected 10 or
screen. more times, but it does not converge.
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
sub menu. C. Auto maximum density adjustment
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu Automatically adjust maximum density of images.
screen"
Press the [01 Blade Setting Mode] key. (1) Procedure
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
Press the [Start] key. With toner applied, the
drum is cleaned with the cleaning blade. The
message of completion appears.
screen.
B. Auto drum potential adjustment Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
Measure the charging potential of drum, and adjust sub menu.
automatically the developing bias value, charging 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
voltage and grid voltage. screen"
Press the [03 Auto Maximum Density Adjust-
(1) Procedure ment] key.
5. "Auto maximum density adjustment screen"
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. NOTE
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the • When the following error messages appear,
screen. check to see if the toner control sensor board
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the (TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
sub menu. Conduct the adjustment again.
3 -28
1) Error 1 E. LD offset adjustment

The maximum density sensor (on the Equally adjust two laser intensity.
TCSB) dirt correction has been corrected
10 or more times, but it does not con- (1) Procedure
verge.
2) Error 2
The auto maximum density adjustment is 2. "Service mode menu screen"
not completed, when the developing roller Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
rotation speed reaches the specified 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
value. screen.
3) Error 3 Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the
No signal is outputted from the maximum sub menu.
density sensor. Control patch detect sig- 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
nal is not outputted. screen"
Press the [05 LD Offset Adjustment] key.
D. Auto dot diameter adjustment 5. "LD offset adjustment screen"
Automatically adjust the diameter of laser beam. Press the LD1 offset line speed [490 mm] key,
and press the [COPY] key.
(1) Procedure
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start
1. Enter the service mode. button to output a test pattern.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 7. Adjust laser intensity of LD1 and LD2.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. Standard value: Compare image patterns cre-
ated by the LD1 and LD2. Confirm that density
is uniform (± 1 gap is OK) as per the following
screen.
figure, and the highlighted patterns start
between the two reference lines.
sub menu.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
screen"
Press the [04 Auto Dot Diameter Adjustment]
key. [1]
5. "Auto dot diameter adjustment screen"
NOTE
• When the following error messages appear,
check to see if the toner control sensor board
(TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The gamma sensor (on the TCSB) dirt cor-
rection has been corrected 10 or more LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
times, but it does not converge.

1050fs3010c
2) Error 2
The auto dot diameter adjustment com- [1] Reference lines
pleted with an abnormal value.
3 -29
9. "LD Offset Adjustment screen"

Press the [490mm] key for the laser you want G. LD1 bias adjustment
to adjust (LD1 offset or LD2 offset). Enter a Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
numeric value through the numeric keys and
press the [Set] key and then the [COPY] key. H. LD2 bias adjustment
• Setting range:-128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
10. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start

I. Cartridge set mode
button to output a test pattern.
Conduct this adjustment when black spots (toner)
appear on the print-out after removing/inserting the
press the [SERVICE] key to repeat steps 5 to
photo conductor section.
10 until the standard value can be obtained.
12. Adjust the line speed 425 mm and 290 mm (1) Procedure
likewise as well.
F. Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot)
Automatically adjust image gradation (gamma).
screen.
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. sub menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. screen"
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [09 Cartridge Set Mode] key.
screen. 5. "Cartridge set mode screen"
Press the [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] key on the Press the [Start] key. The development unit and
sub menu. the drum rotate for 3 minutes to charge low-
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu charge toner.
screen" 6. After the rotation stops, press the [COPY] key.
Press the [06 Auto Gamma Adjustment (1dot)] 7. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start
key. button to output 10 blank papers, thus cleaning
5. "Auto gamma adjustment (1dot) screen" the drum.
Press the [Start] key. 8. When the black spot does not disappear, press
the [SERVICE] key to repeat steps 5 to 7.
NOTE
• When the following error messages appear,
check to see if the toner control sensor board
(TCSB) is properly installed and cleaned.
Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The gamma sensor (on the TCSB) dirt cor-
rection has been corrected 10 or more
times, but it does not converge.
2) Error 2
No signal is outputted from the gamma
sensor. Control patch detect signal is not
outputted.
3) Error 3
Regression error during the gamma curve
calculation.
3 -30
4.4.3 Drum peculiarity manual 4.4.5 Recall standard data

Do not conduct this adjustment in the field. Reset the adjustment values of the process adjust-
ment to the factory initial data or the installation initial
4.4.4 User paper setting data.
Use this adjustment when the transfer and separation
functions do not work satisfactorily with the standard A. Procedure
adjustments because of using special papers, etc.
This setting is applied when you select [User] as the
paper type. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
By default, the following data are inputted. Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key.
• For Japan: 62 to 71 g/m2 Normal paper 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
• For inch area: 72 to 91 g/m2 Normal paper screen.
• For metric area: 72 to 91 g/m2 Normal paper Press the [05 Recall Standard Data] key on the
sub menu.
NOTE 4. "Recall standard data (Process adjustment)
• Input data according to instructions of KMBT screen"
field support section. Press the [Factory initial data] or the [Installation
initial data] key.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• Selecting [Factory initial data] recalls the
2. "Service mode menu screen" factory initial data.
Press the [02 Process Adjustment] key. • Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the the adjustment values stored when code
screen. "91" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
Press the [04 User Paper Setting] key on the • When selecting [Data at shipment] or [Data
sub menu. at installation], the data returns with no dis-
4. "User Paper Setting screen" play changed on the screen.
Press the [Next] and [Back] key to select an
item you adjust.
5. Input data for the selected item, and press the
[Set] key.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure other items.
3 -31
4.5 Counter Also, the “Drum/Deve” icon on the user

screen does not disappear.
Confirm and configure settings of various counters.
(1) Procedure
4.5.1 PM count
Configure the reset and cycle of the PM count, devel-
oper count and drum count. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [03 Counter] key.
NOTE 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the screen.
• The PM count is different in the count con- Press the [01 PM Count] key on the sub menu.
dition depending on the setting of DIPSW8- 4. "PM count/cycle screen"
6. Press the key for an item you reset, and press
When set to "0": 1 count for a single side of the [Count Reset] key.
each large paper exit, and 5. "Reset confirm screen"
2 counts for a double side. Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
When set to "1": 2 counts for a single side The counter is reset, and the start date is auto-
of each large paper exit matically inputted.
(the definition of large size Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
paper is set by DIPSW10-3 return to the "PM count/cycle screen."

and 4), and 4 counts for a
6. "PM count/cycle screen"
double side. For those
Pressing the [OK] key validates resetting.
other than the large size,
Pressing the [Cancel] key invalidates the count
the count is same as when
reset.
set to "0."
• The developer count and the sensitive drum
count are made at all times 1 count for a sin-
gle side and 2 counts for a double side for a
small size paper, 2 counts for a single count
and 4 counts for a double count for a large
size paper.
A. Counter reset
Reset the PM count, developer count and drum
count.
NOTE
• Be sure to reset the PM count after imple-
menting a periodic check (every 750,000
prints).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message
and icon do not disappear.
• Be sure to reset the developer count after
replacing a developer. Otherwise, gray back-
ground image and toner scatter may occur.
Also, the “Drum/Deve” icon on the user
screen does not disappear.
• Be sure to reset the sensitive drum count
after replacing a drum. Otherwise, image gray
background and toner scatter may occur.
3 -32
B. PM cycle 4.5.2 Data collection

Configure settings of the PM cycle, developer cycle It is possible to confirm various data held in the
and drum cycle. machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail
NOTE remote notification system.
• The PM cycle, developer cycle and drum
cycle are already inputted in the initial set- A. Confirmation method
tings. Usually, do not change these settings. (1) Procedure

(1) Procedure
1. Enter the service mode. Press the [03 Counter] key.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Press the [03 Counter] key. screen.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [02 Data Collection] key on the sub
screen. menu.
Press the [01 PM Count] key on the sub menu. 4. "Data collection menu screen"
4. "PM count/cycle screen" Data collection include the followings:
Press the key for an item you configure. [01 Total count of each paper size]
5. Enter the first three digits of the cycle value [02 Copy count of each paper size]
through the numeric keys [03 Print count of each paper size]
6. "PM count/cycle screen" [04 Large size count]
Pressing the [OK] key returns you to the "Ser- [05 ADF count]
vice mode menu screen." [06 Pixel ratio of each section]
Press the [Cancel] key to invalidate the [07 Pixel ratio ranking list]
changed settings. [08 JAM data of time series]
[09 JAM count]
[10 Count of each copy mode]
[11 SC data of time series]
[12 SC count]
[13 JAM count of each section]
[14 SC count of each section]
NOTE
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 08 to 14 can be
confirmed.
5. Press the data collection item key you want to
confirm.
3 -33
6. "Individual data confirmation screen"

Press the [Next] or [Previous] key to scroll the
screen.
NOTE
• The [Count Reset] key is shown in the indi-
vidual data confirmation screen of the [13
JAM count of each section] and the [14 SC
count of each section].
When pressing the [Count Reset] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is
shown, and when pressing the [Yes] key,
the section data is reset. Pressing the [No]
key returns to "Individual data confirmation
screen" with the interval data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM imple-
mentation to confirm the jam or SC occur-
rence count after it was visited last time.
3 -34
B. Details of the data collection

(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and print count of each paper size
Confirm the number of print of each paper size.
NOTE
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
• All size of paper not included in the below table are counted as special. However, wide paper and
R-direction paper are counted as the same size.
Example: A4W and A4R are counted as A4.
• 8K is counted as B4, and 16K is counted as B5.
NO. CSRC parameter For Remark

(B1, B6, B8) Japan Inch Metric
1 00 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used
2 01 A3 11 x 17 A3
3 02 B4 8.5 x 14 B4 (8K)
4 03 A4 8.5 x 11 A4
5 04 B5 5.5 x 8.5 B5 (16K)
6 05 A5 — A5
7 06 B6 — F4
8 07 8.5 x 14 — —
9 08 8.5 x 11 A4 —
10 09 Special Special Special
11 0A PostCard — —
(2) Data collection No. 04: Large size count

Confirm the number of print of the large size paper.
NOTE
• Definition of the large size can be changed by DIPSW10-3, 4 (A3, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 for default).
NO. CSRC command Item Remark

(Parameter)
1 BH (00) Large size printer count
2 BI (00) Large size copy count
3 F6 (01) Large size scan count
3 -35
(3) Data collection No. 05: ADF count

Confirm the number of originals fed in each ADF mode.
NOTE
• No.1, 2 are not counted as No.3 to 8.
NO. CSRC parameter Item Remark

(F0)
1 00 N of originals fed in ADF mode Simplex mode
2 01 N of originals fed in RADF mode Duplex mode
3 02 N of 1 sided SDF original fed Single Feed mode
4 03 N of 2 sided SDF original fed Single Feed mode
5 04 N of 1 sided mixed original fed Mixed Original mode
6 05 N of 2 sided mixed original fed Mixed Original mode
7 06 N of 1 sided Z-folded original fed Z-Fold mode
8 07 N of 2 sided Z-folded original fed Z-Fold mode
3 -36
(4) Data collection No. 06: Pixel ratio of each section

It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of 5,000 print sheets (At max. 30 data. Older data are deleted
first).
NOTE
• This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is
different from the print ratio when actually printed.
NO. CSRC parameter Item Average pixel Remark

(V0) ratio (%)
1 00 Total count Displaying up to
2 01 Print count 1 the first place of a Newest data
3 02 Print count 2 decimal point
4 03 Print count 3
5 04 Print count 4
6 05 Print count 5
7 06 Print count 6
8 07 Print count 7
9 08 Print count 8
10 09 Print count 9
11 0A Print count 10
12 0B Print count 11
13 0C Print count 12
14 0D Print count 13
15 0E Print count 14
16 0F Print count 15
17 10 Print count 16
27 1A Print count 26
28 1B Print count 27
29 1C Print count 28
30 1D Print count 29
31 1E Print count 30 Oldest data
3 -37
(5) Data collection No. 7: Pixel ratio ranking list

Confirm data for the top 15 jobs with higher pixel ratio ranks.
To exclude faulty operations (skyshot) by a user, display only data for continuous 5 or more print-outs.
NOTE
• This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is
different from the print ratio when actually printed.
NO. CSRC parameter Pixel ratio Print Paper Size Mode Date Remark
(V1) (%) Quantity
1 00 Displaying Displaying Copier or
2 01 up to the first the number Printer
3 02 place of a of papers
decimal
4 03
point
5 04
6 05
7 06
8 07
9 08
10 09
11 0A
12 0B
13 0C
14 0D
15 0E
(6) Data collection No. 08: JAM data of time series

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time
of occurrence, tray, paper size and magnification.
3 -38
(7) Data collection No. 9, 13: JAM count, JAM NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
count of each section parameter the operation panel when
Confirm the JAM occurrence count for each JAM (J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
code (except idling JAM).
35 22 J21-01 Sensitive drum
36 23 J31-01 Registration
NOTE
• Maximum count: 999,999 37 24 J31-02
38 25 J32-01 Fixing/exit
NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section 39 26 J32-02
parameter the operation panel when 40 27 J32-03
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
41 28 J32-04
1 00 J11-01 Tray /1
42 29 J32-05
2 01 J11-02
43 2A J32-06
3 02 J11-03
44 2B J92-01 ADU
4 03 J11-04
45 2C J92-02
5 04 J12-01 Tray /2
46 2D J93-01
6 05 J12-02
47 2E J94-01
7 06 J12-03
48 2F J19-01 Paper feed con-
8 07 J12-04 veyance
9 08 J13-01 Tray /3 49 30 J19-02 PF
10 09 J13-02 50 31 J51-01 Main body
11 0A J13-03 51 32 J61-01 DF
12 0B J13-04 52 33 J61-02
13 0C J14-01 Tray /4 53 34 J62-01
14 0D J14-02 54 35 J62-02
15 0E J14-03 55 36 J62-03
16 0F J15-01 Tray /5 56 37 J62-04
17 10 J15-02 57 38 J62-05
18 11 J15-03 58 39 J62-06
19 12 J15-04 59 3A J62-07
20 13 J17-01 Paper feed 60 3B J62-08
21 14 J17-02 conveyance 61 3C J62-09
22 15 J17-03 62 3D J62-10
23 16 J17-04 63 3E J63-01
24 17 J17-05 64 3F J63-02
25 18 J17-06 65 40 J63-03
26 19 J17-12 66 41 J63-04
27 1A J18-01 Tray /3 67 42 J63-05
28 1B J18-02 68 43 J63-06
29 1C J18-03 Tray /4 69 44 J63-07
30 1D J18-04 Tray /5 70 45 J63-08
31 1E J18-05 71 46 J63-09
32 1F J18-06 Tray /3 72 47 J63-10
33 20 J18-07 Tray /4 73 48 J63-11
34 21 J18-08 Tray /5
3 -39
NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section
parameter the operation panel when parameter the operation panel when
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 (J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
74 49 J72-01 FD 115 72 J72-66 Not used
75 4A J72-02 116 73 J72-67
76 4B J72-03 117 74 J72-68
77 4C J72-04 118 75 J72-69
78 4D J72-05 119 76 J72-70
79 4E J72-06 120 77 J72-71
80 4F J72-09 121 78 J72-72
81 50 J72-10 122 79 J72-73
82 51 J72-11 123 7A J72-74
83 52 J72-12 124 7B J72-75
84 53 J72-13 125 7C J72-76
85 54 J72-14 126 7D J72-77
86 55 J72-16 FS 127 7E J72-78
87 56 J72-17 128 7F J72-79

88 57 J72-18 129 80 J72-80
89 58 J72-19 130 81 J72-81
90 59 J72-20 131 82 J72-82
91 5A J72-21 132 83 J72-83
92 5B J72-22 133 84 J72-84
93 5C J72-23 134 85 J72-85
94 5D J72-28 135 86 J72-86
95 5E J72-30 136 87 J72-87
96 5F J72-39 137 88 J72-88
97 60 J72-40 FD 138 89 J72-89
98 61 J72-41 139 8A J72-90
99 62 J72-42 140 8B J72-99
100 63 J72-43 141 8C J74-01 LS
101 64 J72-44 142 8D J74-02
102 65 J72-45 143 8E J74-03
103 66 J72-46 144 8F J74-04
104 67 J72-47 145 90 J74-05
105 68 J72-48 146 91 J74-06
106 69 J72-49 147 92 J74-07
107 6A J72-50 148 93 J74-08
108 6B J72-58 149 94 J74-09
109 6C J72-59 150 95 J74-10
110 6D J72-61 Not used 151 96 J74-11
111 6E J72-62 152 97 J74-12
112 6F J72-63 153 98 J74-19
113 70 J72-64 154 99 J74-31
114 71 J72-65 155 9A J74-32
3 -40
NO. CSRC Jam code is shown on Section

parameter the operation panel when
(J0) DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
156 9B J74-33 LS
157 9C J74-34
158 9D J74-35
159 9E J74-36
160 9F J74-37
161 A0 J74-38
162 A1 J74-39
163 A2 J74-40
164 A3 J74-41
165 A4 J74-42
166 A5 J74-49
3 -41
(8) Data collection No. 10: Count of each copy mode

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
NOTE
NO. CSRC parameter Item Count conditions

(F1)
1 00 1-1 mode
2 01 1-2 mode
3 02 2-1 mode
4 03 2-2 mode
5 04 ADF 1-1 mode
6 05 ADF 1-2 mode
7 06 Mixed original mode
8 07 SDF mode
9 08 Z-folded original mode
10 09 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Reg.)

11 0A LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
12 0B LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
13 0C LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
14 0D Text & Photo
15 0E Text
16 0F Photo
17 10 Low contrast
18 11 Custom size
19 12 1 oblique staple (Upper left)
20 13 1 oblique staple (Upper right)
21 14 2 parallel staples (Left binding)
22 15 2 parallel staples (Upper binding)
23 16 Right & Left binding
24 17 2 parallel staples (Right binding)
25 18 Upper binding
26 19 Tab original
27 1A Folding & Stapling
28 1B Stacker1 5000 sheets full alarm
29 1C Group
30 1D Offset group
31 1E Collated
32 1F Offset collated
33 20 Face down
34 21 Face up
35 22 1 to N
36 23 N to 1
3 -42

(F1)
37 24 Stacker 2 5000 sheets full alarm
38 25 Cover sheet
39 26 Trimmer
40 27 Real size copy
41 28 Preset magnification E4
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 Preset Zoom 1
50 31 Preset Zoom 2
51 32 Preset Zoom 3
52 33 ZOOM
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal ZOOM
54 35 Maximum ZOOM
55 36 Minimum ZOOM
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 Auto density
59 3A Preset density level 1
60 3B Preset density level 2
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Auto image rotation cancellation
63 3E Sheet insertion
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet copy
67 42 OHP interleave copy
68 43 OHP interleave blank
69 44 Image insert
70 45 Book copy
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Neg-/Positive reverse
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B Standard size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
3 -43

(F1)
79 4E Image centering
80 4F All-image area
81 50 Image shift
82 51 Reduction shift
83 52 Overlay
84 53 Watermark
85 54 Stamp
86 55 Date/Time
87 56 Page
88 57 Numbering
89 58 Set quantity 1
90 59 Set quantity 2-5
91 5A Set quantity 6-10
92 5B Set quantity 11 or more
93 5C Time while power remote 1 is On Accumulation of time during which the overall
control board/image processing board is pow-
ered (main power switch is ON). (in minutes)
94 5D Time while power remote 2 is On Time during which the main relay is ON. (in minutes)
95 5E Time while power remote 3 is On Time during which the power control signal
(REM3) is ON. (in minutes)
96 5F Time while power remote 4 is On Time during which the power control signal
(REM4) is ON. (in minutes)
97 60 Time during Low Power mode Time in the LOW POWER mode. (in minutes)
98 61 Time during warm up time Time for warm-up, except print ready time.
(in minutes)
99 62 Time during which the front door is Time during which the front door is open.
open (in seconds)
100 63 Ope.time in 1side straight exit Time from the start of print and the end of
101 64 Ope.time in 1side reverse exit print. (in seconds)
102 65 Operation time in 2side print (Down time due to jam omitted)
103 66 Operation time in ADF mode Time during which ADF operates. (in seconds)
104 67 Morning correction count Counts 1 per image stabilization control (fix-
ing temperature is 50°C or lower)
105 68 Time during APS sensor On Time during which the APS sensor is ON.
(in seconds)
106 69 —
107 6A —
108 6B N of folding & stapling used jobs
109 6C N of ADF special error 5 occurred Number of ADF double feed detection
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred Number of ADF no feed detection
111 6E N of ADF special error 1 occurred Number of wrong detection of original size
112 6F N of ADF special error 2 occurred Number of wrong detection of next original
information
3 -44

(F1)
113 70 N of ADF special error 3 occurred Number of error in size for which mixed
size mode is not allowed
114 71 N of scanner scanned Counts 1 for pressing Start button in the
platen mode
115 72 N of electrode cleaned
116 73 N of memory overflow Sum of No.124, 125, 126 plus HDD mem-
ory shortage
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred
119 76 N of AGC retry
120 77 Multi letter tray full alarm
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error
122 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error
124 7B Compression memory overflow Scanner compression/print compression
memory shortage
125 7C Page memory overflow (scan) Shortage in memory for receiving print data
126 7D Page memory overflow (print) Decompression page memory shortage
127 7E Staple Finisher main tray alarm
128 7F Staple Finisher staple alarm
129 80 Saddle Stitcher trash full alarm
130 81 N of ADF special error 4 occurred Ready timeout error
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync.with Copying)
132 83 Store for HDD (Store Scan → HDD)
133 84 Store for PC (Store Scan → PC)
134 85 Store for PC (Store HDD → PC)
135 86 Recall from HDD (Recall HDD)
136 87 Recall from PC (PC/JobEditer)
137 88 Saddle Stitcher staple alarm
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W or 11 x 17W)
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W or 8.5 x 11W)
140 8B Wide paper count (A4RWor8.5 x 11RW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5Wor5.5 x 8.5W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Hole-Punch
144 8F Z-Folding
145 90 Multi Folder trash full alarm
146 91 Mixplex (Simplex)
147 92 Mixplex (Duplex)
148 93 Right/Left binding originals
149 94 Upper binding originals
150 95 Inside print multi letter
3 -45

(F1)
151 96 Outside print multi letter
152 97 Inside print letter fold-in
153 98 Outside print letter fold-in
154 99 Inside print letter fold-out
155 9A Outside print letter fold-out
156 9B Inside print double parallel
157 9C Outside print double parallel
158 9D Inside print gate
159 9E Outside print gate
160 9F Multi Center
161 A0 Inside print folding
162 A1 Outside print folding
163 A2 Main tray output
164 A3 Stacker 1 tray output
165 A4 Stacker 2 tray output

166 A5 Stacker auto setting output
167 A6 Stacker pile setting permit
168 A7 Folding & Stapling tray output
169 A8 Three-Folding tray output
170 A9 Folding sub tray output
171 AA Stacker 1 sub tray output
172 AB Stacker 2 sub tray output
173 AC Folding & Stapling sub tray output
174 AD Stapling sub tray output
175 AE Main tray output Job number
176 AF Stacker 1 tray output Job number
177 B0 Stacker 2 tray output Job number
178 B1 Folding & Stapling output Job No.
179 B2 Three Folding tray output Job No.
180 B3 Folding sub tray Job number
181 B4 Stacker 1 sub tray Job number
182 B5 Stacker 2 sub tray Job number
183 B6 Fold & Staple sub tray Job number
184 B7 Stapling sub tray Job number
185 B8 Multi center Job number
186 B9 Inside print folding Job number
187 BA Outside print folding Job number
(9) Data collection No. 11: SC data of time series

With respect to the latest 20 SC, confirm SC code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence and
machine condition (00: Idling, 01: Scanner operating, 02: Printer operating, 03: Scanner and printer operating).
3 -46
(10) Data collection No. 12, 14: SC count, SC NO. CSRC SC code Section
count of each section parameter
Confirm the number of SC occurrence of each SC (E0/E1)
code.
28 1B SC21-04 Transfer/separation
29 1C SC21-05 cleaning motor
NOTE
30 1D SC21-06 abnormality
• When the service mode DIPSW3-1 is 1 31 1E SC21-07 Transfer assist motor
(Latched), SC34, 35, 36, 23-14 and 23-17 are 32 1F SC21-08 abnormality
not counted. 33 20 SC23-01 Toner bottle motor
abnormality
NO. CSRC SC code Section
34 21 SC23-02 Developing motor
parameter
abnormality
(E0/E1)
35 22 SC23-03 Blade motor abnor-
1 00 SC13-01 Paper feed motor
36 23 SC23-04 mality
abnormality
37 24 SC23-05
2 01 SC13-02 Paper feed motor
38 25 SC23-06
abnormality (PF)
39 26 SC23-07
3 02 SC13-03 Vertical conveyance
motor abnormality 40 27 SC23-08
(PF) 41 28 SC23-09
4 03 SC13-05 Exit conveyance motor 42 29 SC23-10 Drum motor abnormality
abnormality (PF) 43 2A SC23-11 Toner supply abnor-
5 04 SC18-11 Tray /1 abnormality 44 2B SC23-12 mality
6 05 SC18-12 45 2C SC23-13
7 06 SC18-13 46 2D SC23-14
8 07 SC18-10 47 2E SC23-15
9 08 SC18-21 Tray /2 abnormality 48 2F SC23-17
10 09 SC18-22 49 30 SC23-20
11 0A SC18-23 50 31 SC23-21
12 0B SC18-20 51 32 SC23-22
13 0C SC18-31 Tray /3 abnormality 52 33 SC23-24
14 0D SC18-32 53 34 SC23-25
15 0E SC18-33 54 35 SC23-26
16 0F SC18-30 55 36 SC24-01 Drum temperature
17 10 SC18-41 Tray /4 abnormality 56 37 SC24-02 sensor abnormality
18 11 SC18-42 57 38 SC28-01 High voltage abnor-
19 12 SC18-43 58 39 SC28-02 mality
20 13 SC18-40 59 3A SC28-03
21 14 SC18-51 Tray /5 abnormality 60 3B SC28-04
22 15 SC18-52 61 3C SC29-01 Process abnormality
23 16 SC18-53 62 3D SC29-02
24 17 SC18-50 63 3E SC29-03
25 18 SC21-01 Charger cleaning 64 3F SC29-04
26 19 SC21-02 motor abnormality 65 40 SC29-05
27 1A SC21-03 66 41 SC29-06
3 -47
NO. CSRC SC code Section NO. CSRC SC code Section

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
67 42 SC29-07 Process abnormality 108 6B SC32-33 Fan abnormality
68 43 SC29-08 109 6C SC32-34
69 44 SC29-09 110 6D SC32-35
70 45 SC29-10 111 6E SC32-36
71 46 SC29-11 112 6F SC32-37
72 47 SC29-12 High voltage abnor- 113 70 SC32-38
73 48 SC29-13 mality 114 71 SC32-39
74 49 SC29-14 115 72 SC32-40
75 4A SC29-15 116 73 SC32-41
76 4B SC29-16 117 74 SC32-42
77 4C SC32-01 Fan abnormality 118 75 SC32-43
78 4D SC32-02 119 76 SC32-44
79 4E SC32-03 120 77 SC32-45
80 4F SC32-04 121 78 SC32-46

81 50 SC32-05 122 79 SC32-47
82 51 SC32-06 123 7A SC32-48
83 52 SC32-07 124 7B SC32-49
84 53 SC32-09 125 7C SC32-50
85 54 SC32-10 126 7D SC32-51
86 55 SC32-11 127 7E SC32-52
87 56 SC32-12 128 7F SC32-53
88 57 SC32-13 129 80 SC32-54
89 58 SC32-14 130 81 SC32-55
90 59 SC32-15 131 82 SC33-01 ADU drive board
91 5A SC32-16 132 83 SC33-02 abnormality
92 5B SC32-17 133 84 SC33-04 Printer control board
93 5C SC32-18 134 85 SC33-05 abnormality
94 5D SC32-19 135 86 SC33-06
95 5E SC32-20 136 87 SC34-01 Fusing abnormality
96 5F SC32-21 137 88 SC34-02
97 60 SC32-22 138 89 SC34-03
98 61 SC32-23 139 8A SC34-04
99 62 SC32-24 140 8B SC35-01
100 63 SC32-25 141 8C SC35-02
101 64 SC32-26 142 8D SC36-01
102 65 SC32-27 143 8E SC36-02
103 66 SC32-28 144 8F SC36-03
104 67 SC32-29 145 90 SC36-04
105 68 SC32-30 146 91 SC36-05
106 69 SC32-31 147 92 SC36-06
107 6A SC32-32
3 -48

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
148 93 SC41-01 Scanner abnormality 189 BC SC46-36 Image processing
149 94 SC41-02 190 BD SC46-40 abnormality
150 95 SC41-03 191 BE SC46-41
151 96 SC41-10 Write abnormality 192 BF SC46-42
152 97 SC41-11 193 C0 SC46-43
153 98 SC42-01 Fan abnormality 194 C1 SC46-50
154 99 SC42-02 195 C2 SC46-51
155 9A SC42-03 196 C3 SC46-61
156 9B SC42-04 197 C4 SC46-62
157 9C SC42-05 198 C5 SC46-63
158 9D SC42-06 199 C6 SC46-64
159 9E SC42-07 200 C7 SC46-66
160 9F SC42-08 201 C8 SC46-80
161 A0 SC42-09 202 C9 SC46-81
162 A1 SC42-10 203 CA SC46-82
163 A2 SC42-16 204 CB SC46-83
164 A3 SC42-17 205 CC SC46-90
165 A4 SC42-18 206 CD SC46-91
166 A5 SC42-19 207 CE SC46-99
167 A6 SC46-01 Image processing 208 CF SC49-01
168 A7 SC46-02 abnormality 209 D0 SC49-03
169 A8 SC46-03 210 D1 SC49-04
170 A9 SC46-05 211 D2 SC49-05
171 AA SC46-06 212 D3 SC49-06
172 AB SC46-08 213 D4 SC50-01
173 AC SC46-12 214 D5 SC50-02
174 AD SC46-13 215 D6 SC50-03
175 AE SC46-14 216 D7 SC50-04
176 AF SC46-15 217 D8 SC50-05
177 B0 SC46-16 218 D9 SC50-10
178 B1 SC46-17 219 DA SC50-11
179 B2 SC46-19 220 DB SC52-01 Fan abnormality
180 B3 SC46-21 221 DC SC52-02
181 B4 SC46-23 222 DD SC52-03
182 B5 SC46-24 223 DE SC52-04
183 B6 SC46-25 224 DF SC52-05
184 B7 SC46-26 225 E0 SC52-06
185 B8 SC46-27 226 E1 SC52-07
186 B9 SC46-31 227 E2 SC52-08
187 BA SC46-32 228 E3 SC52-09
188 BB SC46-35 229 E4 SC52-10
3 -49

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
230 E5 SC52-11 Fan abnormality 268 0B SC70-01 Communication
231 E6 SC52-12 269 0C SC70-02 abnormality
232 E7 SC53-01 Fusing motor abnormality 270 0D SC76-01 LS abnormality
233 E8 SC53-02 Total count abnormality 271 0E SC76-02
234 E9 SC53-03 272 0F SC76-03
235 EA SC53-04 Key counter abnormality 273 10 SC76-04
236 EB SC53-05 274 11 SC76-05
237 EC SC53-06 Power source abnor- 275 12 SC76-06
238 ED SC53-07 mality 276 13 SC76-07
239 EE SC53-08 277 14 SC76-08
240 EF SC53-11 Paper feed abnormality 278 15 SC76-09
241 F0 SC53-12 279 16 SC76-10
242 F1 SC53-13 280 17 SC76-11
243 F2 SC53-14 281 18 SC76-31

244 F3 SC53-15 PF paper feed abnor- 282 19 SC76-32
245 F4 SC53-16 mality 283 1A SC76-33
246 F5 SC53-17 Printer control board 284 1B SC76-34
abnormality 285 1C SC76-35
247 F6 SC53-18 Erase lamp abnormality 286 1D SC76-36
248 F7 SC53-19 Conveyance motor 287 1E SC76-37
abnormality 288 1F SC76-38
249 F8 SC53-20 ADU reverse paper 289 20 SC76-39
exit motor abnormality
290 21 SC76-40
250 F9 SC60-01 DF abnormality
291 22 SC76-41
251 FA SC60-02
292 23 SC77-01 FS abnormality
252 FB SC60-03
293 24 SC77-02
253 FC SC60-11
294 25 SC77-03
254 FD SC67-01
295 26 SC77-04
255 FE SC67-02
296 27 SC77-05
256 FF SC67-03
297 28 SC77-06
257 00 SC67-04
298 29 SC77-07
258 01 SC67-05
299 2A SC77-08
259 02 SC67-06
300 2B SC77-11
260 03 SC67-07
301 2C SC77-12
261 04 SC67-08
302 2D SC77-15
262 05 SC67-09
303 2E SC77-21
263 06 SC67-10
304 2F SC77-22
264 07 SC67-11
305 30 SC77-25
265 08 SC67-12
306 31 SC77-28
266 09 SC67-13
267 0A SC67-14
3 -50

parameter parameter
(E0/E1) (E0/E1)
307 32 SC77-30 FD abnormality 348 5B SC77-82 Not used
308 33 SC77-31 349 5C SC77-83
309 34 SC77-32 350 5D SC77-84
310 35 SC77-33 351 5E SC77-85
311 36 SC77-34 352 5F SC77-86
312 37 SC77-35 353 60 SC77-87
313 38 SC77-36 354 61 SC77-88
314 39 SC77-37 355 62 SC77-89
315 3A SC77-38 356 63 SC77-90
316 3B SC77-39 357 64 SC77-95
317 3C SC77-40 358 65 SC77-96
318 3D SC77-41 359 66 SC77-97
319 3E SC77-42 360 67 SC77-98
320 3F SC77-43 361 68 SC77-99
321 40 SC77-44 362 69 SC80-01 Communication
322 41 SC77-48 363 6A SC80-02 abnormality
323 42 SC77-49 364 6B SC80-03
324 43 SC77-58 365 6C SC80-1* ISW abnormality
325 44 SC77-59 366 6D SC80-30
326 45 SC77-60 Not used 367 6E SC80-31
327 46 SC77-61 368 6F SC80-32
328 47 SC77-62 369 70 SC80-40
329 48 SC77-63 370 71 SC80-41
330 49 SC77-64 371 72 SC80-42
331 4A SC77-65 372 73 SC80-43
332 4B SC77-66 373 74 SC80-44
333 4C SC77-67 374 75 SC80-45
334 4D SC77-68 375 76 SC90-01 ADU abnormality
335 4E SC77-69 376 77 SC90-02
336 4F SC77-70 377 78 SC90-03 Communication
337 50 SC77-71 378 79 SC90-04 abnormality
338 51 SC77-72 379 7A SC93-01 ADU drive board
339 52 SC77-73 abnormality
340 53 SC77-74 380 7B SC93-05 Power source abnor-
341 54 SC77-75 mality
342 55 SC77-76 381 7C SC93-06 ADU drive board

382 7D SC93-07 abnormality
343 56 SC77-77
344 57 SC77-78 383 7E SC93-08 PF drive board abnor-
mality
345 58 SC77-79
384 7F SC95-01 Fan abnormality
346 59 SC77-80
385 80 SC49-07 IC abnormality
347 5A SC77-81
3 -51
NO. CSRC SC code Section

parameter
(E0/E1)
386 81 SC49-08 IC abnormality
387 82 SC49-09
388 83 SC49-10
3 -52
4.5.3 Copy count of part

A. Copy count of special parts
When a part is replaced, reset the counter of the part
that has been replaced to manage the service history.
(1) Procedure

screen.
Press the [03 Parts Counter] key on the sub
menu.
4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
Press the [01 Count of special parts] key.
5. "Count of special parts screen"
screen.
Press the [S] or [T] key to select an item you
want to reset.
6. Press the [Count Reset] key.
7. "Reset confirm screen"
Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
return to the "Count of special parts screen."
3 -53
B. Count of special parts list
NOTE
• Be sure to reset the fixing cleaning web counter (No.001) after replacing the cleaning web. Other-
wise, fuser cleaning trouble may occur.
• Be sure to perform the blade set mode of the service mode after replacing the cleaning blade. This
automatically resets the cleaning blade counter (No.002). Otherwise, the auto blade replacement
cannot be implemented.
NO CSRC Parts name Parts No. Count conditions

parameter
(Z1)
001 00 Fixing cleaning web 56UA5351 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
002 01 Cleaning blade 56UA5601 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
003 02 Charging wire 56UA2509
004 03 Charging grid 56UA2508
005 04 Charg cleaning unit 55VA-255
006 05 Develop suction filter 56UA3108

007 06 Trans./sep. wire 56UA2613
008 07 Trans./sep. CL unit 56GA-276/
56GA-277/
56GA-278
009 08 Drum Separation claws 55VA2919 2 counts for each A3, 11x17, 8K paper exit in
the single side mode, 4 counts for double.
Except these, 1 count for the single and 2
counts for the double.
010 09 Trans Assist PET1 56UA-281 For the paper type which is 297 mm width or
more and 91 g/m2 or less, 0 count for each
paper exit in the single side mode, and 1 count
for the double side mode.
011 0A Trans Assist PET2 56UE-281 For the paper type which is between 279 and
297 mm width and 91 g/m2 or less, 0 count for
each paper exit in the single side mode, and 1
count for the double side mode.
012 0B Cleaner fur brush 56UA-574 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
013 0C Cleaner side seal R 56UA-558 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
014 0D Cleaner side seal F 56UA-559
015 0E Fix. roller (U) 56UA5304
016 0F Fix. roller Unit (L) 56UA-528
017 10 Fixing claws upper 55VA5321
018 11 Fixing claws lower 25AA5329
019 12 Heat sleeve (Upper) 45405339
020 13 Upper roller bearing 45407504
021 14 Fixing CL sheet 56UA-547
022 15 Temperature sensor 56GA-209
023 16 Toner supply sleeve /1 55VA-334
3 -54

parameter
(Z1)
024 17 Toner supply sleeve /2 55VA-335 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
025 18 Cleaner toner tray 56UA-568 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
026 19 Fur brush scraper 56UA-561
027 1A Heat sleeve (Heated) 26AA5315
028 1B Heat roller bearing 56UA7507
029 1C Upper roller sensor 55VA8804
030 1D Heat roller sensor 55VA8806
031 1E Fixing sub roller 56UA5307
032 1F Ozone filter 56UA1121
56UA1128
033 20 Ozone suction filter 56UA1122
56UA1129
034 21 Charging corona 56UA-250
035 22 PCL 56UA-257
036 23 Developing unit 56UA-300
037 24 Develop suction box 56UA-325
038 25 Trans/Sep unit 56UA-270
039 26 TSL 55VA8308
040 27 Regis. feed count 56UA7602
56UA4606
041 28 ADU accelerator roller 56UA4740 1 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
side mode, 0 count for each 1side straight
mode, 1 count in the double side mode.
042 29 Reversal output roller 56UA4741 2 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
043 2A ADU reversal roller 56UA4741 2 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
044 2B Output convey roller 56UA4742 1 count for each reverse exit paper in the single
56UA4743 side mode, 0 count for each 1side straight
045 2C ADU convey roller 56UA4744 0 count for each paper exit in the single side
56UA4683 mode, 1 counts in the double side mode.
046 2D Fixing exit roller 56UA4595 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
(N = 4) mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
047 2E Output roller 56UA4557
048 2F Fixing gear /2 56UA7783
049 30 Web Motor 56GA8017
050 31 Fixing output actuator 56UA5383
051 32 Toner pump /1 56UA-780
052 33 Toner pump /2 56UA-790
3 -55

parameter
(Z1)
053 34 Tray 1 feed roller 55VA-464 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1.
054 35 Tray 1 conv/rev roller 55VA-463
055 36 Tray 1 feed clutch 56AA8201
056 37 Tray 1 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
turned ON by paper from tray /1.
059 3A Tray 2 feed clutch 56AA8201
060 3B Tray 2 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
turned ON by paper from tray /2.
061 3C Tray 3 feed roller 55VA-484 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
062 3D Tray 3 conv/rev roller 55VA-483
063 3E Tray 3 feed clutch 56AA8201
064 3F Tray 3 handle clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit when the clutch is
065 40 Tray 3 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /3.
070 45 Tray 4 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /4.
075 4A Tray 5 reverse clutch 56AA8201 turned ON by paper from tray /5.
076 4B Paper fur brush 55VA-574 1 count for each paper exit.
077 4C V-convey exit roller 56UA4412
078 4D Paper powder scraper 56UA4419
079 4E V-convey clutch top 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1 and /2.
080 4F V-convey clutch mid. 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
081 50 V-convey clutch low 56AA8201
082 51 V-convey roller /1 56UA4413 1 count for each paper exit.
083 52 V-convey roller 2/3 56UA4414 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
56UA4464
084 53 Tray 1 pre-reg. roller 56UA4411 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1 and /2.
085 54 Tray 2 pre-reg. roller 56UA4411 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
086 55 PFU V-convey roller /T 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
15BA4508
087 56 PFU V-convey roller /M 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /4.
088 57 PFU V-convey roller /L 15BA4507 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
15BA4508
3 -56

parameter
(Z1)
089 58 PFU output roller 15BA5011 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3, /4 and
/5.
090 59 PFU V-convey clutch /T 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
091 5A PFU V-convey clutch /M 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /4.
092 5B PFU V-convey clutch /L 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
093 5C PFU Mid-conv clutch /T 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
094 5D PFU Mid-conv clutch /L 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from tray /5.
095 5E Exposure On time 56UA8301 Accumulation of time lamp is on. 1 count per
second.
096 5F Fixing cleaning roller 56UA5353 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
097 60 Web prevention part 56UA-544 mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
098 61 Main Switch 55GA8601 1 count each time the main power switch turns
OFF the power.
099 62 Door Switch 40AA8501 1 count each time the front door is opened
100 63 Tray 1 feed count 56UA-400 1 count for each paper exit from tray /1.
101 64 Tray 2 feed count 56UA-400 1 count for each paper exit from tray /2.
102 65 Tray 3 feed count 15BA-300 1 count for each paper exit from tray /3.
105 68 8k,16k Duplex count For the paper type which is between 270 mm
and 279 mm width and 91 g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, and 1 count for the double side mode.
106 69 B4, B5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 257 mm
107 6A 8.5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 215 mm
108 6B A4R, A5 Duplex count For the paper type which is between 210 mm
109 6C 8, 8.125, 8.25 Dup.count For the paper type which is between 203 mm
110 6D B5R Duplex count For the paper type which is between 182 mm
3 -57

parameter
(Z1)
111 6E FS Staple/Front 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at front or the 2-staple mode.
112 6F FS Staple/Back 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at rear or the 2-staple mode.
113 70 FS solenoid /A 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode and the sort mode.
114 71 FD feed roller /A Top 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Up.
115 72 FD reverse rubber /Top 13QN-443
116 73 FD feed roller /B Top 50BA-575
117 74 FD feed roller /A Low 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Lw.
118 75 FD reverse rubber /Low 13QN-443
119 76 FD feed roller /B Low 50BA-575
120 77 FD punch motor assy 15AG-573 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
121 78 FD solenoid /A (release 1) 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or fold-
ing mode (all size).
122 79 FD solenoid /A (release 2) 56QA8251 • 1 count for each paper exit in the folding
mode (all size)
• 1 count for each paper exit in the punch
mode (paper length 220 mm or larger).
123 7A FD motor assy 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
124 7B LS1 solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
125 7C LS1 solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 sort mode (all size).
126 7D LS1 solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 or more).
127 7E LS1 solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode.
128 7F LS1 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
129 80 LS2 solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
130 81 LS2 solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 sort mode (all size).
131 82 LS2 solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 or more).
132 83 LS2 solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode.
133 84 LS2 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
134 85 SD Staple/Right 15AN4230 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
135 86 SD Staple/Left 15AN4230 mode.
136 87 SD trimmer edge 15ANK002 1 count for each paper exit in the trimming
137 88 SD trimmer receiver 15ANK003 mode.
3 -58

parameter
(Z1)
138 89 SD convey solenoid 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding sec-
139 8A SD solenoid 13QE8251 tion.
140 8B SDFNS solenoid /2 12QR8252 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
141 8C ADF pick up roller 13GA4604 Original feed count in all modes.
142 8D ADF feed roller 15AS4605
143 8E ADF retard roller 13GA4606
144 8F ADF sub pick roller 13GA4601
145 90 ADF torque limiter 13GA-135
146 91 ADF SDF solenoid 13GA8252 Total original feed count in the single feed
mode.
147 92 ADF LSB solenoid 13GA8251 • 1 count for each set of the large size original
single side mode.
• 1 count for each sheet of the large size orig-
inal double side mode. *1
148 93 ADF press/release SD 13GA8251 1 count for each sheet of the large size original
double side mode. *1
149 94 ADF SSB solenoid 13GA8251 1 count for each sheet of the small size original
double side mode.
*1 The large size original represents all originals in the mixed original mode; A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K, 16KR, 11
x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R, 8 x 13, 8.25 x 13, 8.125 x 13 and 8.5 x 13.
3 -59
C. Copy count of each part (2) Resetting of each part counter

This is used when you want to control the service his- 1) Procedure
tory of each part not registered as a special part.
Confirm and reset part name, part number, limit value
setting and print count. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Up to 30 data from No.01 to No.30 can be set. Press the [03 Counter] key.
1 count is taken for each passage of paper, regard- 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
less of the paper size. screen.
(1) Setting of each part and confirmation of the menu.
copy count 4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
1) Procedure Press the [02 Count of each parts] key.
5. "Copy count of each part screen"
screen.
Press the [S] or [T] key to select an item you
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the want to reset.
screen.
6. Press the [Count Reset] key.

7. "Reset confirm screen"
menu.
Press the [Yes] key to reset the counter.
4. "Copy count of part menu screen"
Press the [No] key not to reset the counter. You
Press the [02 Count of each parts] key.
return to the "Copy count of each part screen."
5. "Copy count of each part screen"
screen. NOTE
Press the [S] or [T] key to select a data num- • When the copy count is in excess of a limit
ber. value, an asterisk "*" is shown to the right of
6. Select either the [Name Setting], [P/N Setting] the limit value.
or [Limit Setting] key.
7. Press one of the key you want to set or
change, and enter it with the alphanumeric
keys.
• [Name Setting] : Enter a part name (8 digits)
• [P/N Setting] : Enter a part number (9 dig-
its)
• [Limit Setting] : Enter a limit value (8 digits)
8. Press the [OK] key to update data.
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the update.
3 -60
D. Relationship between each data number 4.6 Machine condition

and CSRC parameter
4.6.1 I/O check mode
NO. NAME P/N COUNT LIMIT
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/
01 Z4:00 Z3:00 G0:00 H0:00 output check function) to check and adjust the vari-
02 Z4:01 Z3:01 G0:01 H0:01 ous signals and loads.
03 Z4:02 Z3:02 G0:02 H0:02
04 Z4:03 Z3:03 G0:03 H0:03 A. I/O check screen
05 Z4:04 Z3:04 G0:04 H0:04

06 Z4:05 Z3:05 G0:05 H0:05
07 Z4:06 Z3:06 G0:06 H0:06
08 Z4:07 Z3:07 G0:07 H0:07
09 Z4:08 Z3:08 G0:08 H0:08
10 Z4:09 Z3:09 G0:09 H0:09
11 Z4:0A Z3:0A G0:0A H0:0A
12 Z4:0B Z3:0B G0:0B H0:0B
13 Z4:0C Z3:0C G0:0C H0:0C
14 Z4:0D Z3:0D G0:0D H0:0D
15 Z4:0E Z3:0E G0:0E H0:0E
[1] [2] [3] [4]
16 Z4:0F Z3:0F G0:0F H0:0F
17 Z4:10 Z3:10 G0:10 H0:10 [1] I/O check code
18 Z4:11 Z3:11 G0:11 H0:11 [2] Multi code
[3] Input check
19 Z4:12 Z3:12 G0:12 H0:12
[4] Output check
20 Z4:13 Z3:13 G0:13 H0:13
21 Z4:14 Z3:14 G0:14 H0:14
B. Input check method
22 Z4:15 Z3:15 G0:15 H0:15 (1) Procedure
23 Z4:16 Z3:16 G0:16 H0:16
24 Z4:17 Z3:17 G0:17 H0:17
25 Z4:18 Z3:18 G0:18 H0:18
Press the [04 Machine Condition] key.
26 Z4:19 Z3:19 G0:19 H0:19
27 Z4:1A Z3:1A G0:1A H0:1A
screen.
28 Z4:1B Z3:1B G0:1B H0:1B Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key on the sub
29 Z4:1C Z3:1C G0:1C H0:1C menu.
30 Z4:1D Z3:1D G0:1D H0:1D 4. "I/O check mode screen"
Enter the input check code with the numeric
keys.
5. To use the multi mode, press the Access but-
ton.
6. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
7. Input check result will appear in the message
display area.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other signal
input check.
3 -61
C. Output check method (1) Procedure

(1) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2.
1. Enter the service mode. (See chapter II "Maintenance 4.3.5 Registration
2. "Service mode menu screen" section")
Press the [04 Machine Condition] key. 2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the feed detection board /1, /2, and rotate the
screen. rotary switch [2] on the ADU drive board /1
Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key on the sub (ADUDB1) as shown in the table below.
menu.
4. "I/O check mode screen" [1]
Enter the output check code with the numeric
keys.
5. To use the multi mode, press the Access but-
ton.
6. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
7. Press the Start button to perform the output
check.
8. Press the STOP button to stop it.

9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 to perform the other load
or signal output check.
[2]
D. Adjustment when replacing the multi feed
detection board (main body)
When the multi feed detection board of the main
body is replaced, conduct this adjustment. And also
adjust it when multi feed is not detected properly due
to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated
paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
However, multi feed detection control is not applica-
ble to paper weight more than 210 g/m2 and coated
paper of 50 to 61 g/m2.
NOTE
1050fs3056c
• The multi feed detection board /1 and /2 are
adjusted in the manufacturing process as a Stamp letter Rotary switch
pair of upper and lower. Be sure to replace
A 0
them as a pair.
B 1
• Adjustment error may occur because of the
temperature of the sensor surface. Make the C 2
adjustment at a temperature close to that in D 3
which the copier is actually used (20 to 30°C). E 4
(In case you brought a new part from out- F 5
doors, make the adjustment after the temper-
ature of the sensor surface and the room 3. Select the input check code "56-00" of the I/O
temperature become the same) check mode in the service mode.
3 -62
4. Insert one sheet of the paper (P/N 65AA-9910) 8. Insert one sheet of paper that customer mainly
between the multi feed detection board /1 and use (paper weight 62 to 209 g/m2), and confirm
/2 (200 to 300 g/m2 paper can also be used). that "L" appears on the input check display.
Be sure the paper does not trail down. "L": no multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
"H": multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
NOTE
• If the paper trails down, the angle of paper NOTE
insertion is different from that of paper pas- • When "H" is once detected, the guide plate
sage, thus making it impossible to make an to which the multi feed detection board /2
accurate adjustment. is installed must be opened and closed.
5. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following Otherwise, a return to "L" is not available.
positions of the ADUDB1. 9. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all),
+terminal: test pin No. TP60 (white) [1] that customer mainly use and confirm that "H"
- terminal: test pin No. TP57 (green) [2] appears on the input check display.
Range: DC 20 V 10. In case of detection error, return to step 4 to
conduct the adjustment again. In step 6, set
power voltage to the value 1.0 V lower than the
previous adjustment.
11. Repeat the steps 8 to 10 until detection error is
resolved.
12. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the
parts you removed.
E. Cleaning blade transportation lock

This separates the cleaning blade from the drum,
thus preventing any damage on the cleaning blade
while moving the machine or during a long-term stor-
[1] [2] 1050fs3057c
age.
Use this when packing the machine while moving an
installation location.
NOTE
• Because the ADU is powered, do not drop
NOTE
any metal material on the board, or do not
• While conducting this mode, the blade is
connect the tester pin to an irrelevant ter-
automatically replaced. In case the first
minal.
cleaning blade was used before packing, be
It may cause the board to short circuit and
sure to perform a spring charge for the auto
be damaged.
blade replacement as you reinstall the
6. In the multi feed detection board /2 volume, set machine.
power voltage to the standard value.
• Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.2 V (1) Procedure
7. Pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
1. Check whether the currently used cleaning
blade is the first one or the second one.
2. Enter the I/O check mode.
3. Enter "17" with the numeric keys. Confirm that
"17-00" is displayed in the message display
area.
3 -63
4. Open the front door /Rt. 6. The toner pump motor (M28) and the air pump
motor (M29) start rotating. Press the STOP but-
NOTE ton to stop them after abut 1 minute.
• If the front door /Rt is not open, the blade
motor (M22) does not rotate.
H. Adjustment when replacing the multi feed
5. Press the Start button.
detection board (PI)
6. The blade motor (M22) starts rotating, and the Adjust when replacing the multi feed detection board
cleaning blade moves from the drum to the of the PI section. Also, perform this adjustment when
transportation lock position. multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper
with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
F. Scanner transportation lock properly.
Move the scanner mirror to the transportation lock
position, thus making it easy to fix the mirror with NOTE
screws. • The multi feed detection board /1 and /2 are
Use this when packing the machine while moving an adjusted in the manufacturing process as a
installation location. pair of upper and lower. Be sure to replace
them as a pair.
(1) Procedure • Adjustment error may occur because of the

temperature of the sensor surface. Make the
1. Enter the I/O check mode. adjustment at a temperature close to that in
2. Enter "36" with the numeric keys. Confirm that which the copier is actually used (20 to 30°C).
"36-00" is displayed in the message display (In case you brought a new part from out-
area. doors, make the adjustment after the temper-
3. Press the Start button. ature of the sensor surface and the room
temperature become the same)
4. The scanner motor (M27) starts rotating, and
the mirror moves to the left.
(1) Procedure
5. Fix the mirror with the lock screws of the scan-
ner mirror you removed when unpacking the 1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2.
machine. (See chapter III "2.3.4 Replacing the multi feed
detection" in Field Service for FD-501)
G. Removing toner in the toner mixing section

After moving the installation location of the machine,
remove toner which may have dropped into the mix-
ing section of the toner supply section.
(1) Procedure

area.
3. Press the Access button.
area.
3 -64
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi 4. Open the FD upper door and front door to turn
feed detection board /1, /2, and rotate the the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert one sheet of
rotary switch [2] on the PI drive board (PIDB) as paper [2] (P/N 65AA-9910) between the multi
per following table. feed detection board /1 and /2 [3] (200 to 300
g/m2 paper can also be used).
NOTE
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper
hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the
paper is between the multi feed detection
board /1 and /2.
[2]
[1]
[2] fd501fs3005c [3]
[1] [4] fd501fs3006c
Stamp letter Rotary switch

A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
NOTE
• The rotary switch 5 is not used.
3. Select the output check code "70-82" of the I/
O check mode in the service mode.
3 -65
5. Press the Start button to activate the output 12. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the
check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to parts you removed.
the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin No. TP51 (GAIN) [1]
I. FD/FS adjustment data EEPROM storage
- terminal: test pin No. TP11 (SGND) [2]
(Installation initial data)
Range: DC 20 V
Backup adjustment data of the FD and FS which are
adjusted in the field are stored in the non-volatile
VR2 memory (EEPROM) of the FD control board (FDCB)
and the FNCB (FNS control board). When necessary,
it can be recalled with installation initial data of Recall
standard data (Finisher adjustment data) in the ser-
vice mode.
NOTE
• Only one type of data can be backed up.
When backed up again, data will be overwrit-
ten.
• When the main body is connected to both the

FS and FD, data is backed up to both
EEPROMs. If you want to back up data to one
LED1 option only, connect only that option to the
[1] [2] fd501fs3007c
main body.
NOTE (1) Procedure

• Because the FD is powered, do not drop
any metal material on the board, or do not
connect the tester pin to an irrelevant ter- 2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "90-
minal. 00" is displayed in the message display area.
It may cause the board to short circuit and 3. Press the Start button.
be damaged. 4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. And
6. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to when completed, "FIN" is displayed and the
the standard value. current finisher adjustment data is backed up in
Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.2 V the EEPROM.
7. Pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
8. Insert one sheet of paper that customer mainly
J. Main body adjustment data parameter
use (paper weight 50 to 300 g/m2), and confirm
board storage (Installation initial data)
that the PIDB's LED (LED1) can be turned on.
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted
LED on: no multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
in the field are backed up to the parameter board
LED off: multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
(PB). When necessary, it can be recalled with installa-
9. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all),
tion data of Recall standard data (Machine adjust-
that customer mainly use, and to see if the LED
ment data, Process adjustment data) in the service
is turned off.
mode.
10. In case of detection error, return to step 4 to
conduct the adjustment again. In step 6, set NOTE
power voltage to the value 1.0 V lower than the • Only one type of data can be backed up.
previous adjustment. When backed up again, data will be overwrit-
11. Repeat steps 7 to 10 until detection error is ten.
resolved.
3 -66
(1) Procedure • Replace the HDD1 in case performing the

HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery do not
prevent the malfunction code.
2. Enter "91" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "91-
00" is displayed in the message display area.
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. And
when completed, "FIN" is displayed and the
current machine adjustment data and the pro-
cess adjustment data are backed up in the PB.
K. Hard disk check

Perform this operation if you want to check the
copier's hard disk /1 (HDD1) total capacity, the
remaining capacity, and the malfunction code (SC46-
40 to SC46-43) related to the hard disk.
(1) Procedure
area.
3. Press the Access button.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric
keys.
Check that "99-{{" ({{ represent multi code
number) appear in the message display area.
01: HDD1 total capacity check
02: HDD1 remaining capacity check
03: HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery
• HDD1 total capacity check: The total capacity
is displayed
• HDD1 remaining capacity check: Remaining
capacity is displayed
• HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded - "OK" appears
The operation failed - "NG" appears
Press the Start button to perform the HDD1
bad sectors check and recovery again when
"NG" appears.
NOTE
• The operation can not be cancelled during the
HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery (the STOP
button or the [Return] key are disabled).
3 -67
L. I/O check list

(1) Input check list
Classifica- Symbol Code Multi Name Display and signal source

tion code H L
Analog PS31 01 01 Toner remaining sensor /1 No toner Toner
signal
PS32 02 Toner remaining sensor /2
TH5 02 00 Drum temperature sensor 0 to 255
TH1 03 00 Thermistor /1
TH3 04 00 Thermistor /3
TCSB 05 00 Humidity sensor signal
06 00 Max. density sensor monitor signal
07 00 Max. density sensor output signal
08 00 Gamma sensor output signal
DPSB 09 00 Drum potential sensor output signal

TCSB 10 00 Drum jam sensor output signal Paper No paper
Paper PS8 11 01 Paper empty sensor /1 (Tray /1)
feed PS14 02 Paper empty sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS73 03 Paper empty sensor /1 (Tray /3)
VR1 12 01 Remaining paper VR /1 (Tray /1) 0 (FULL) to 4 (EMPTY)
VR2 02 Remaining paper VR /2 (Tray /2)
PS4 13 01 Paper size sensor /Fr1 (Tray /1) ON OFF
PS5 02 Paper size sensor /Rr1 (Tray /1)
PS10 03 Paper size sensor /Fr2 (Tray /2)
VR2 14 01 Paper size VR /1 (Tray /1) 0 to 255
VR4 02 Paper size VR /2 (Tray /2)
3 -68

tion code H L
Paper — 15 01 Paper size signal (Tray /1) 0: 11 x 17, 1: A3, 2: B4,
feed — 02 Paper size signal (Tray /2) 3: 8.5 x 14, 4: A4R,
5: 8.5 x 11R, 6: B5R,
7: 8.5 x 11, 8: 5.5 x 8.5R,
9: A4, 10: A5R, 11: B5,
12: A5, 13: B6R,
14: 5.5 x 8.5, 15: B6,
16: Special,
17: 8.125 x 13.2,
18: 8 x 13, 19: 8.25 x 13,
20: 8.5 x 13
PS6 16 01 Upper limit sensor /1 (Tray /1) Upper limit Not at upper
PS12 02 Upper limit sensor /2 (Tray /2) limit
PS71 03 Upper limit sensor /1 (Tray /3)
— 17 01 Tray /1 set signal Set Not set
— 02 Tray /2 set signal
PS9 18 01 Handle release sensor /1 (Tray /1) ON OFF
PS15 02 Handle release sensor /2 (Tray /2)
Paper feed, PS7 20 01 Paper feed sensor /1 (Tray /1) Paper No paper
conveyance PS13 02 Paper feed sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS72 03 Paper feed sensor /1 (Tray /3)
PS17 21 01 Pre-registration sensor /1 (Tray /1)
PS18 02 Pre-registration sensor /2 (Tray /2)
PS19 22 01 Vertical conveyance sensor /1
PS21 02 Vertical conveyance sensor /3
PS90 03 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PF)
PS96 04 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PF)
PS20 05 Vertical conveyance sensor /2
PS91 06 Intermediate sensor /Up
PS97 07 Intermediate sensor /Lw
3 -69

tion code H L
Paper feed, PS41 23 01 Paper leading edge sensor Paper No paper
conveyance PS16 02 Loop sensor
PS40 03 Registration sensor
PS92 04 Loop sensor /1 (Tray /3)
PS99 07 PFU exit sensor
PS22 24 01 Fusing exit sensor
PS3 02 Paper exit sensor
PS48 03 Reverse sensor /1
PS47 04 Reverse sensor /2
PS23 05 Fusing jam sensor
PS50 06 ADU reverse paper exit sensor
SW4 25 01 Door switch /1 Open Close
PS2 02 Door open/close sensor /2

PS1 03 Door open/close sensor /1
MS1/2 04 Interlock switch /1, /2
PS317 05 APS timing sensor
SW5 06 Door switch /2
— 07 Fusing section set detection signal Set Not set
— 08 Sensitive drum section set detection signal
PS70 09 Door open/close sensor (PF) Open Close
SW11 10 Vertical conveyance door switch /Up (PF) ON OFF
SW12 11 Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw (PF)
SW10 12 Door switch (PF) Open Close
SW13 13 Horizontal conveyance door switch (PF) ON OFF
Scanner PS51 30 01 Scanner home sensor Home Other than
position home position
PS52 31 01 APS sensor /1 No original Original
PS53 02 APS sensor /2
PS317 08 APS timing sensor Open Close
Peculiar CNT2 52 00 Key counter Connected Unconnected
functions PS37 53 00 Transfer assist home sensor Home Other than
PS26 54 01 Charger cleaning home sensor position home position
PS27 02 Charger cleaning limit sensor Limit Other than
position limit position
PS38 03 Transfer/separation home sensor Home Other than
PS39 04 Transfer/separation limit sensor Limit Other than
position limit position
PS24 55 01 Blade sensor /1 ON OFF
PS25 02 Blade sensor /2
3 -70

tion code H L
Peculiar MFDB1/2 56 00 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 Multi feed Other than
functions multi feed
DF PS303 60 1 Original size sensor /Lt Paper No paper
PS302 2 Original size sensor /Rt
PS306 3 Original registration sensor /Lt
PS308 4 Original conveyance sensor
PS309 5 Original reverse sensor
PS307 6 Original exit sensor /Lt
PS313 7 Original reverse exit sensor
PS314 8 Original exit sensor /Rt
PS305 9 Original empty sensor
PS301 10 RADF open/close sensor Open Close
MS301 11 Cover open/close sensor
PS318 12 Original registration sensor /Rt Paper No paper
PS304 13 Reverse jam sensor
PS311 14 Original skew sensor /Fr
PS310 15 Original count sensor
PS312 16 Original skew sensor /Rr
MFS1 17 Multi feed sensor /1
— 18 —
— 19 —
FD PS1 70 01 FD entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS4 02 PI exit sensor Paper No paper
PS5 03 Punch conveyance sensor No paper Paper
PS7 04 Main tray folding paper full sensor Full Other than full
PS8 05 2 holes punch home sensor Other than Home
PS9 06 3 holes/4 holes home sensor home position position
PS10 07 Alignment plate home sensor Home Other than
PS11 08 Punch registration home sensor position home position
PS12 09 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Not set
PS23 10 Intermediate conveyance sensor Paper No paper
PS16 11 Sub tray paper exit sensor
PS17 12 Sub tray paper full sensor Other than full Full
PS18 13 Main tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS20 14 Main tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS22 15 Main tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS23 16 Main tray empty sensor Not empty Empty
PS26 17 Punch scraps full sensor Other than full Full
— 18 — — —
— 19 —
3 -71

tion code H L
FD — 70 20 — — —
DCPS 21 24 V output Normal Abnormal
PS2 22 Folding exit sensor Paper No paper
CN90 23 Main tray connection recognition (CN90 Unconnected Connected
connection)
PS51 24 1st folding conveyance sensor No paper Paper
PS52 25 Folding entrance sensor
PS53 26 2nd folding conveyance sensor
PS54 27 3rd folding conveyance sensor
PS55 28 1st folding cam home sensor Pressure Non-pressure
PS56 29 2nd folding cam home sensor
PS57 30 3rd folding cam home sensor
PS58 31 S size conveyance sensor Paper No paper
PS6 32 Punch registration sensor
FDOB 33 Staple selection switch OFF ON

FDOB 34 Punch selection switch
FDOB 35 Folding selection switch
FDOB 36 Start/Stop switch
FDOB 37 Multi feed function select switch
PS46 39 Sub tray paper full sensor Full Other than full
PS31 40 PI conveyance sensor /Up Paper No paper
PS37 41 PI conveyance sensor /Lw
PS32 42 PI upper limit sensor /Up Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS33 43 PI paper empty sensor /Up Not empty Empty
PS34 44 PI lift plate home sensor /Up Home Other than
PS35 45 L size sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS36 46 S size sensor /Up
— 47 — — —
PS38 48 PI upper limit sensor /Lw Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS39 49 PI paper empty sensor /Lw Not empty Empty
PS40 50 PI lift plate home sensor /Lw Home Other than
PS41 51 L size sensor /Lw No paper Paper
PS42 52 S size sensor /Lw
PS43 53 PI cover open/close sensor Close Open
PS44 54 PI paper set sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS45 55 PI paper set sensor /Lw
— 56 — — —
— 57 —
3 -72

tion code H L
FD — 70 58 — — —
— 59 —
— 60 —
PS47 61 PI max paper size sensor /Up No paper Paper
PS48 62 PI max paper size sensor /Lw
FS PS35 72 01 Rear stopper home sensor Home Other than
PS33 02 Intermediate roller home sensor Other than Home
home position position
PS32 03 Stack assist home sensor Home Other than
PS14 04 Stapler rotation home sensor Other than Home
PS11 05 Stapler movement home sensor Home Other than
PS34 06 Staple scraps box set sensor Scraps box No scraps
box
PS30 07 Sub tray paper full sensor Other than Paper full
paper full
PS1 08 Sub tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS5 09 Stacker entrance sensor
PS4 10 FNS entrance sensor No paper Paper
PS15 11 Counter reset sensor Reset Other than
reset
PS12 12 Paper exit opening sensor Other than Home
PS10 13 Main tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper
PS3 14 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS7 15 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than Upper limit
upper limit
PS2 16 Tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
— 17 — — —
— 18 —
— 19 —
— 20 —
PS47 21 Staple ready sensor /Fr Other than Ready
ready
PS43 22 Cartridge set sensor /Fr No cartridge Cartridge
PS45 23 Staple empty sensor /Fr No staple Staple
PS41 24 Stapler home sensor /Fr Other than Home
3 -73

tion code H L
FS PS46 72 25 Staple ready sensor /Rr Other than Ready
ready
PS42 26 Cartridge set sensor /Rr No cartridge Cartridge
PS44 27 Staple empty sensor /Rr No staple Staple
PS40 28 Stapler home sensor /Rr Other than Home
— 29 — — —
PS20 30 Stacker empty sensor No paper Paper
PS9 31 Paper exit arm home sensor Home Other than
MS1 32 Door switch Open Close
PS31 33 Alignment home sensor /Fr Home Other than
PS8 34 Alignment home sensor /Rr position home position
LS PS4 73 01 Entrance sensor Paper No paper
tandem PS11 02 Sub tray paper exit sensor

(1st) PS7 03 Conveyance sensor /1
PS16 04 Conveyance sensor /2 (LS-501 only)
PS18 06 Tandem exit sensor (LS-501 only)
PS3 07 Stacker tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS6 08 Paper empty sensor Full Other than full
PS13 09 2,000 sheets stacked sensor ON OFF
— 10 — — —
PS9 12 Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
PS1 13 Stacker tray set sensor Set Not set
RS1 14 Hand cart reset switch
PS15 15 Stacker tray arm release sensor ON OFF
TOB 16 Paper exit switch
RS2 18 JAM door switch
PS8 19 Sub tray door sensor
MS2 20 Stacker tray upper limit switch Upper limit Other than
upper limit
MS3 21 Stacker tray lower limit switch Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS12 22 Alignment home sensor Home Other than
PS11 23 Shift unit home sensor position home position
PS5 24 Grip conveyance home sensor
3 -74

tion code H L
LS PS4 74 01 Entrance sensor Paper No paper
tandem PS11 02 Sub tray paper exit sensor
(2nd) PS7 03 Conveyance sensor /1
PS18 06 Tandem exit sensor (LS-501 only)
PS3 07 Stacker tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than
upper limit
PS6 08 Paper empty sensor Full Other than full
— 10 — — —
PS9 12 Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
PS1 13 Stacker tray set sensor Set Not set
RS1 14 Hand cart reset switch
PS15 15 Stacker tray arm release sensor ON OFF
TOB 16 Paper exit switch
MS4 18 JAM door switch
PS8 19 Sub tray door sensor
MS2 20 Stacker tray upper limit switch Upper limit Other than
upper limit
MS3 21 Stacker tray lower limit switch Lower limit Other than
lower limit
PS12 22 Alignment home sensor Home Other than
PS11 23 Shift unit home sensor position home position
PS5 24 Grip conveyance home sensor
ADU PS35 80 01 ADU conveyance sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS43 02 ADU exit sensor
PS49 03 ADU accelerate sensor
PS42 04 ADU deceleration sensor
PS44 05 ADU handle release sensor Release Set
PS46 06 ADU reverse sensor /1 Paper No paper
PS45 07 ADU reverse sensor /2
PS36 08 ADU conveyance sensor /2
3 -75
(2) Output check list
NOTE
• Do not output codes which are not described in the output check list.
Classifi- Symbol Code Multi Name Remark

cation code
Analog L1,FM19 00 00 Exposure lamp + Scanner cooling fan
signal M6 01 00 Toner bottle motor
— 02 00 —
03 00 —
04 00 —
05 00 —
06 00 —
07 00 —
08 00 —
09 00 —
Data — 15 01 Data collection count clear
clear 02 Mode memory clear
98 CS Remote Care memory initialization Used in the CS Remote
Care mode
— M22 17 00 Cleaning blade packing lock move Used in re-packing
Paper — 18 01 —
feed CL11 02 Forced separation clutch (Tray /4)
— 03 —
CL5 19 01 Separation clutch /1 (Tray /1)
CL7 02 Separation clutch /2 (Tray /2)
M4, 06 Paper feed motor + Separation clutch /1
CL5 (Tray /1)
CL7 (Tray /2)
CL7 (Tray /3)
CL10 (Tray /4)
CL13 (Tray /5)
SD3 20 01 Pick-up solenoid /1 (Tray /1)
SD4 02 Pick-up solenoid /2 (Tray /2)
3 -76

cation code
Paper CL4 21 01 Paper feed clutch /1 (Tray /1)
feed CL6 02 Paper feed clutch /2 (Tray /2)
CL6 03 Paper feed clutch /1 (Tray /3)
CL1 22 01 Vertical conveyance clutch /1
CL3 02 Vertical conveyance clutch /3
CL1 03 Pre-registration clutch /1 (Tray /3)
CL2 06 Vertical conveyance clutch /2
CL2 07 Intermediate clutch /Up (PF)
CL5 08 Intermediate clutch /Lw (PF)
M8 09 Vertical conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
10 Vertical conveyance motor (425 mm/s)
M4, 13 Paper feed motor + Vertical conveyance
CL1 clutch /1
CL3 clutch /3
M40, 15 Paper feed motor + Pre-registration
CL1 clutch /1 (PF)
CL3 clutch /2 (PF)
CL4 clutch /3 (PF)
CL2 clutch /2
M40, 19 Paper feed motor + Intermediate clutch /
CL2 Up (PF)
M40, 20 Paper feed motor + Intermediate clutch /
CL5 Lw (PF)
M25 23 01 Paper lift motor /1 (Tray /1) From the tray lowering
M26 02 Paper lift motor /2 (Tray /2) position to the upper limit
M42 03 Paper lift motor /1 (Tray /3)
SD1 24 01 Tray lock solenoid /1 (Tray /1)
SD2 02 Tray lock solenoid /2 (Tray /2)
3 -77

cation code
Paper M5 25 01 Conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
feed
02 Conveyance motor (425 mm/s)
03 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
M18 26 01 Loop motor (1000 mm/s)
02 Loop motor (825 mm/s)
M9 27 01 Paper exit motor /1 (290 mm/s)
02 Paper exit motor /1 (425 mm/s)

M13 10 Reverse paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
11 Reverse paper exit motor (825 mm/s)
12 Reverse paper exit motor (520 mm/s)
M4 28 01 Paper feed motor
M40 02 Paper feed motor (PF)
SD5 29 00 Drum claw solenoid
M41 30 01 PF exit conveyance motor (290 mm/s)
02 PF exit conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
Scanner M27 31 00 Home search + Scan
M21, 32 00 Polygon motor (low speed) + Polygon
FM18 cooling fan
01 Polygon motor (middle speed) + Polygon
cooling fan
02 Polygon motor (high speed) + Polygon
cooling fan
M27,L1 34 00 Shading correction
M27, 35 00 DF scan position move + Scanner cooling
FM19 fan
M27 36 00 Scanner packing lock move Used in re-packing
— 37 — —
LDB, M21 38 00 LD current value measurement (LD alarm level) Can be confirmed with list output
3 -78

cation code
Main M1 40 00 Fusing motor
body 01 Fusing motor (290 mm/s)
02 Fusing motor (425 mm/s)
03 Fusing motor (490 mm/s)
M2,M3 41 00 Drum motor + Developing motor
01 Drum motor (290 mm/s) + Developing
motor
motor
motor
FM19 42 01 Scanner cooling fan
FM6 02 Suction fan /1 (high speed)
03 Suction fan /1 (low speed)
FM5 04 Developing suction fan
FM1 06 Cooling fan /1 (high speed)
07 Cooling fan /1 (low speed)
FM7,8 13 Suction fan /2, /3 (high speed)
14 Suction fan /2, /3 (low speed)
FM18 15 Polygon cooling fan
FM9 16 Paper exit cooling fan /1
FM10 17 Paper exit cooling fan /2
FM20, 18 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1, /Rr1 (Tray /1)
FM21
FM23
FM42
FM44
FM46
FM4 23 Transfer/separation suction fan
FM25, 24 Power supply cooling fan /1, /2
FM26
FM12 25 IPB cooling fan
FM11 26 Pump cooling fan
FM27 27 Power supply cooling fan /3 (high speed)
28 Power supply cooling fan /3 (low speed)
3 -79

cation code
Main CNT1 43 01 Total counter
body CNT2 02 Key counter
PS54 03 Centering sensor LED
M19 44 01 Transfer assist motor Perform with ADU pulled
out to prevent drum dam-
age
M24 45 06 Web motor
Peculiar M23 46 00 Charger cleaning motor (shuttle)
functions 01 Charger cleaning motor (to the back)
02 Charger cleaning motor (to the front)
M20 47 00 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (shut-
tle)
01 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (to the
back)
02 Transfer/separation cleaning motor (to the

front)
OB2 48 00 Illuminate all LEDs
M20, 49 00 Charger cleaning + Transfer/separation
M23 cleaning (shuttle)
M3,M2 50 00 Developing motor + Drum motor
EL 51 00 Erase lamp
TSL 52 00 Transfer exposure lamp
— 53 01 Status indicator lamp — PAT1 ON
02 Status indicator lamp — PAT2 ON
M11 54 00 Intermediate hopper motor
M7 03 Toner hopper motor
M28 04 Toner pump motor (high speed)
05 Toner pump motor (low speed)
M29 06 Air pump motor (high speed)
07 Air pump motor (low speed)
M28, 08 Toner pump motor (high speed) +
M29 Air pump motor (high speed)
09 Toner pump motor (low speed) + Used after moving the
Air pump motor (low speed) machine
M10 10 Air separation motor
LCDB 55 00 Message test
M30 56 00 Recycle cut motor PCS part
— 57 — —
58 — —
59 — —
3 -80

cation code
DF M302 60 1 Original feed motor forward rotation
M302 2 Original feed motor reverse rotation
M301 3 Original conveyance motor forward rotation
M301 4 Original conveyance motor reverse rotation
M304 5 Original exit motor /1 forward rotation
M304 6 Original exit motor /1 reverse rotation
M305 7 Original exit motor /2 forward rotation
M305 8 Original exit motor /2 reverse rotation
M303 9 Tray up down motor forward rotation
M303 10 Tray up down motor reverse rotation
SD302 11 Paper press release solenoid
SD303 12 Gate solenoid
SD304 13 Paper exit gate solenoid
SD301 14 SDF switch solenoid
FM301, 15 Cooling fan /Lt + cooling fan /Rt
FM302
FD M1 70 01 Entrance conveyance motor (R rotation
1000 m/s)
M2 02 Punch conveyance motor (F rotation
1000 m/s)
M3 03 Intermediate conveyance motor (R rota-
tion 1000 m/s)
M4 04 1st folding motor (F rotation 800 m/s)
M4 05 1st folding motor (R rotation 800 m/s)
M5 06 2nd folding motor (F rotation 800 m/s)
M5 07 2nd folding motor (R rotation 800 m/s)
M6 08 3rd folding motor (F rotation 800 m/s)
M6 09 3rd folding motor (R rotation 800 m/s)
M7 10 PI conveyance motor (F rotation 1000 m/s)
M8 11 Paper lift motor /Up (F rotation down)
M8 12 Paper lift motor /Up (R rotation up)
M9 13 Paper lift motor /Lw (F rotation down)
M9 14 Paper lift motor /Lw (R rotation up)
M17 15 Main tray paper exit motor (R rotation
1000 m/s)
M10 21 Punch motor (3 holes/4 holes)
M10 22 Punch motor (2 holes)
M11 23 Tray up down motor (home search)
M12 24 Alignment motor (home search)
M13 26 Punch registration motor (home search)
M14 27 1st folding release motor (conveyance
position move)
3 -81

cation code
FD M14 70 28 1st folding release motor (folding position
move)
M15 29 2nd folding release motor (conveyance
position move)
M15 30 2nd folding release motor (folding position
move)
M16 31 3rd folding release motor (conveyance
position move)
M16 32 3rd folding release motor (folding position
move)
SD1 61 Entrance gate solenoid
SD3 62 S size gate solenoid
SD4 63 L size gate solenoid
SD5 64 Roller solenoid /1

SD9 68 Sub tray gate solenoid
SD12 69 Paper exit solenoid
SD13 70 PI pick-up solenoid /Up
SD14 71 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
SD15 72 Folding gate solenoid
— 73 —
SD18 74 2nd folding roller solenoid
CL1 75 PI registration clutch /Up
CL2 76 PI registration clutch /Lw
— 81 —
MFDB1 82 Multi feed detection board /1 (CLK out-
put)
FDOB 89 FD operation board (lit all LEDs)
JAMIB 90 Jam indicator board (lit all LEDs)
— 99 —
FS M1 72 01 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/sec)
M3 06 Tray up down motor (home search)
07 Tray up down motor (lower limit move)
08 Tray up down motor (staple mode up down)
M22 11 Alignment motor /Fr (home search)
12 Alignment motor /Fr (A4R standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-11 home search
13 Alignment motor /Fr (A4R position move)
Note: effective after 72-12 A4R standby
position move
3 -82

cation code
FS M22 72 14 Alignment motor /Fr (A4R standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-13 A4R position move
M7 16 Main tray paper exit motor (800 mm/sec)
17 Main tray paper exit motor (205 mm/sec)
M8 21 Paper exit opening motor (home search)
22 Paper exit opening motor (full opening:
approx. 55°)
23 Paper exit opening motor (half opening:
approx. 44°)
24 Paper exit opening motor (small opening:
approx. 27°)
M31 26 Stapler motor /Fr (needles out, empty staple)
27 Stapler motor /Fr (staple)
M30 28 Stapler motor /Rr (needles out, empty staple)
29 Stapler motor /Rr (staple)
M11 31 Stapler movement motor (home search)
32 Stapler movement motor (A4 1 staple
position move)
M13 36 Stacker entrance motor (1000 mm/sec)
M26 41 Rear stopper motor (home search)
42 Rear stopper motor (stopper release)
SD5 46 Bypass solenoid
SD2 47 Gate solenoid
SD9 48 Paper exit opening solenoid (ON/OFF)
SD7 49 Intermediate roller release solenoid
M24 51 Stacker assist motor (home search)
M24 52 Stacker assist motor (assist position move)
M25 56 Intermediate roller open/close motor
(home search)
57 Intermediate roller open/close motor
(reserve position move)
M23 61 Paper exit arm motor (home search)
62 Paper exit arm motor (800 mm/sec)
63 Paper exit arm motor (400mm/sec)
M6 66 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/sec)
M5 71 Alignment motor /Rr (home search)
72 Alignment motor /Rr (A4R standby posi-
tion move)
73 Alignment motor /Rr (A4R position move)
Note: effective after 72-72 A4R standby
position move
3 -83

cation code
FS M5 72 74 Alignment motor /Rr (A4R standby posi-
tion move)
Note: effective after 72-73 A4R position move
M2 76 Paddle motor (ON/OFF)
M5, 78 Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr (home search)
M22
79 Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr (A4 standby
position move)
80 Alignment motor /Rr, Fr (A4 position move)
Note: effective after 72-79 A4 standby
position move
JAMIB 90 Jam indicator board (illuminate all LEDs)
— 99 No paper running mode
20 sheets of A3 with 2 staples
LS M2 73 01 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)

tandem 02 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
(1st) M3 03 Sub tray paper exit motor (490 mm/s)
04 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
M6 05 Tandem conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
06 Tandem conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
M4 07 Grip conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
08 Grip conveyance motor (1300 mm/s)
M7 09 Alignment motor (initial operation)
10 Alignment motor
M5 11 Shift unit motor (home search)
12 Shift unit motor
M1 13 Stacker tray up down motor (down)
14 Stacker tray up down motor (up)
SD1 15 1st gate solenoid
SD10 16 2nd gate solenoid (LS-501 only)
SD9 17 Front stopper solenoid
SD3 18 Rear stopper solenoid
SD8 19 Paper press solenoid /3
SD4 21 Front door lock solenoid
SD5 22 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid
SD11 Tandem conveyance lock solenoid
SD2 23 Job partition solenoid
FM1, FM3, 25 Paper cooling fan /Fr, /Mi
FM2, FM6 Paper cooling fan motor /1, /2
FM5 26 Paper cooling fan /Rr
3 -84

cation code
LS M2 74 01 Conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
tandem 02 Conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
(2nd) M3 03 Sub tray paper exit motor (490 mm/s)
04 Sub tray paper exit motor (1000 mm/s)
M6 05 Tandem conveyance motor (490 mm/s)
06 Tandem conveyance motor (1000 mm/s)
M7 09 Alignment motor (initial operation)
10 Alignment motor
M5 11 Shift unit motor (home search)
12 Shift unit motor
M1 13 Stacker tray up down motor (down)
14 Stacker tray up down motor (up)
SD1 15 1st gate solenoid
SD10 16 2nd gate solenoid (LS-501 only)
SD9 17 Front stopper solenoid
SD3 18 Rear stopper solenoid
SD4 21 Front door lock solenoid
SD5 22 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid
SD11 Tandem conveyance lock solenoid (LS-
501 only)
SD2 23 Job partition solenoid
FM1, 25 Paper cooling fan /Fr, Mi
FM3
FM5 26 Paper cooling fan /Rr
ADU SD7 80 01 Reverse/exit solenoid
SD6 02 ADU lock solenoid
SD8 03 Thick paper assist solenoid
M17 83 01 Registration motor (490 mm/s)
02 Registration motor (290 mm/s)
03 Registration motor (425 mm/s)
M12 84 01 Reverse motor (F rotation: 1000 mm/s)
02 Reverse motor (F rotation: 490 mm/s)
03 Reverse motor (R rotation: 1000 mm/s)
3 -85

cation code
ADU M12 84 08 Reverse motor (F rotation: 425 mm/s)
M15 85 01 ADU conveyance motor /1 (1000 mm/s)
02 ADU conveyance motor /1 (490 mm/s)
M16 07 ADU conveyance motor /2 (1000 mm/s)
M13 86 01 Reverse paper exit motor (F rotation:

1000 mm/s)
02 Reverse paper exit motor (F rotation: 490
mm/s)
03 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation:
1000 mm/s)
mm/s)
mm/s)
06 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation: 520
mm/s)
mm/s)
mm/s)
09 Reverse paper exit motor (R rotation: 825
mm/s)
FM13, 87 00 ADU cooling fan /3
FM14, ADU cooling fan /1
FM15 ADU cooling fan /2
M14 88 01 ADU accelerate motor (1000 mm/s)
02 ADU accelerate motor (490 mm/s)
3 -86

cation code
Others — 90 00 FD/FS adjustment data EEPROM storage Perform after installation
(installation data) adjustment
— 91 00 Main body adjustment data parameter Perform after installation
board storage (installation data) adjustment
— 92 00 Parameter board data reset Cannot adjust in the field
— 93 00 FD/FS adjustment data each EEPROM Cannot adjust in the field
storage
— 94 00 Adjustment data display
— 96 00 Main body adjustment data parameter Cannot adjust in the field
board storage (initial data)
— 97 00 Image memory (DRAM) capacity check
— 98 00 Image memory (DRAM) check
HDD1 99 01 HDD1 total capacity
02 HDD1 remaining capacity check
03 HDD1 bad sectors check and recovery
3 -87
4.7 List output tion modes and the results of communications

are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number.
Conduct various list outputs, test pattern outputs and For the meaning of them, refer to the table
running tests. below.
Communication mode Results of

4.7.1 List output
communication
Output various lists.
0000 — Transmitted
(1) Procedure successfully
0001 Initial transmission Connection time out
1. Enter the service mode. when transmitting
2. "Service mode menu screen" 0002 Emergency trans- —
Press the [05 List Output] key. mission
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 0004 Emergency recovery Received
screen. transmission successfully
Press the [01 List Output] key.
0005 — Reception failed
4. "List output mode menu screen"
0008 Transmission for —
The list output mode menu includes the follow-
warning
ing items.
0010 Warning recovery —
• Machine Management List
transmission
• Adjustment Data List
• Pixel Ratio Data List 0020 Maintenance start —
• Parameter List transmission
• Font Pattern 0040 Maintenance com- —
• Communication Log List *1 pletion transmission
• Memory Dump List 0080 Administrator trans- —
mission
NOTE 0100 Fixed date transmis- —
• If you set DIPSW30-1 to 1, the parameter sion
list and after are displayed. 0200 Response transmis- —
• Do not use the parameter list and the mem- sion
ory dump list in the field because they are
0*** — Transmission failed
for development.
1000 Enquiry —
5. Press the key for an item you want to output.
2000 Data rewrite —
6. "List output mode menu screen"
4000 Response reception —
8000 Test mail —
7. Press the Start button to output the selected
list.
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the
8. Press the [SERVICE] key.
RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place
9. "List output mode menu screen" of ***.
To output other lists, repeat steps 4 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and

receiving history of the mail remote notification
system and the CS Remote Care. The start time
of communications, the time period of communi-
cations (modem only), the communication
modes, the results of communications, and the
senders (mail only) are printed. The communica-
3 -88
4.8 Test mode

4.8.1 Test pattern output mode
Output various test patterns to use them for trouble-
shooting.
NOTE
• Do not use any test pattern number not
described in the service manual.
(1) Procedure

Press the [06 Test Mode] key.
screen.
Press the [01 Test Pattern Output Mode] key.
4. "Test pattern output mode screen"
Enter the test pattern No. you want to output
through the numeric keys and press the [Set]
key and then press the [COPY] key.
5. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start button
to output the test pattern.
6. Press the [SERVICE] key.
7. To output other test patterns, repeat steps 4 to
6.
3 -89
No.1 Overall halftone (8-bit output)

(created by random dot pattern)
[Check item]
• When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are white stripes, black stripes, determine whether the fault is with the scanner system or the pro-
cess system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charger unit, transfer/separation charger
unit, scanner mirrors, slit glass, original glass
• When density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is gray background image, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger, high voltage contact
• When density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "4.8.2 Test pattern density."
NOTE
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However, since
this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous. Therefore, when check-
ing an uneven density in halftones (other than 0 and 255 in the density setting), be sure to use
the test pattern No. 9.
Test patterns
When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
1050fs3011c
3 -90
No.3 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "4.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment."
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1050fs3054c
3 -91
No.5 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "4.4.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment."

Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1050fs3012c
3 -92
No.9 Line screen halftone (8-bit output)

(created by line dot pattern)
[Check item]
• Check if there is any uneven density or transfer jitter.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Moisture absorption of paper, developing unit, charger unit, transfer/sepa-
ration charger unit, transfer jitter adjustment
* For the transfer jitter adjustment see "6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment."
NOTE
• The density of halftone changes according to the test pattern density adjustment.
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However, since
this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous, but less conspicuous
than the test pattern No. 1.
Test patterns
1050fs3055c
3 -93
No.11 Beam check (8-bit output)
[Check Items 1]
• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan direc-
tions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger unit, transfer/separation charger unit, developing unit, writing
dust-proof glass.
[Check Items 2]
• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test
pattern in the sub scan direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: transfer/separation charger unit
Test pattern
[1]
[2]
1050fs3013c
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
3 -94
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern (1-bit error diffusion output)
[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading
edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the
test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test pattern
[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 1050fs3014c
[1] Edge of pager
3 -95
4.8.2 Test pattern density 4.8.3 Running test mode

Set the density of test pattern. Conduct a test while in the continuous print opera-
tion.
(1) Procedure In this mode, the following items can be selected:

• Intermittent copy mode
2. "Service mode menu screen" After completion of the printing operation for the
Press the [06 Test Mode] key. set print count, the machine changes into the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resum-
screen. ing the same operation.
Press the [02 Test Pattern Density] key. • Paperless running mode
4. "Test pattern density setting screen" Without detecting paper or jam, the printing
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys operation is made nearly at the same timing as
and press the [Set] key and then press the the normal operation. In the same manner as the
[COPY] key. intermittent mode, after completion of the print-
Setting range: 0 (light) to 255 (dark). ing operation for the set print count, the machine
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5
button to output the test pattern. sec. before resuming the same operation.
• Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the printing
operation is made nearly at the same timing as
the normal operation.
• Paperless endless mode
The machine operates with the print count infi-
nitely set automatically. In the same manner as
the paperless mode, without detecting paper or
jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the
same timing as the normal operation.
• Running mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless
endless mode plus the scanning operation and
the auto paper feed tray switching.
(1) Procedure

Press the [06 Test Mode] key.
screen.
Press the [03 Running Mode] key.
4. "Running mode menu screen"
Select a mode and press the [COPY] key.
5. Press the Start button to start the running test.
6. Press the STOP button to stop the running
test.
3 -96
4.9 System setting B. Software DIPSW setting screen
4.9.1 Software DIPSW setting

Configure settings for the software DIPSW.
NOTE
• DIPSW bits data are written into the parame-
ter board (PB) every time a change is made.
Do not change data hastily, for they cannot
be automatically restored.
• Do not change any switch not described in
the service manual.
A. Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] DIPSW number
[2] 8-bit switch values indicated in hexadeci-
Press the [07 System Setting] key.
mals from 00 to FF.
[3] Bit number (0 to 7)
screen.
Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key on the [4] Bit data : On (1), Off (0)
sub menu.
4. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press the [S], [T] key or the numeric keys to
select a DIPSW bit number.
5. Press the [On (1)] or [Off (0)] key to set the
selected bit number ON/OFF.
6. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Service
mode menu screen" on which the sub menu
was displayed.
3 -97
C. List of software DIPSW
NOTE
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW No Bit Function 0 1 Default setting

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW1 0 Print stop condition after toner *1 *1 0 0 0
1 supply display *1 *1 1 1 1
2 Print stop method after toner *2 *2 1 1 1
3 supply display *2 *2 0 0 0
4 Prohibition of printing when the Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
PM count is reached
*3 *3
5 Print number setting until print- 0 0 0
6 ing is prohibited after PM is *3 *3 0 0 0
7 displayed *3 *3 0 0 0
DIPSW2 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 All charger cleaning cycle (fix- *4 *4 0 0 0
2 ing temperature 50°C or less *4 *4 0 0 0
3 when turning ON) *4 *4 0 0 0
4 All charger cleaning cycle (after *5 *5 0 0 0
5 turned ON) *5 *5 0 0 0
6 Blade auto replacement cycle *6 *6 0 0 0
7 *6 *6 0 0 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 SC latch (SC23-14, 23-17, 34-**, 35-**, 36-**) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Charger cleaning function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4 Transfer/separation charger Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
cleaning function
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 I/O check mode output 15 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
memory clear
7 PageScope JobEditor recognition Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW4 0 RADF auto skew adjustment Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Key counter removal recovery Disabled Enabled 0 1 0
5 APS when change magnification Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Large-size paper count method Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
(other than PM counter)
3 -98

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW5 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Image density selection (laser *7 *7 0 0 0
3 PWM) for copier *7 *7 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW6 0 Background density adjust- *8 *8 0 0 0
1 ment (photo mode) *8 *8 1 1 1
2 Transfer assist control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
3 Minimum black band width in *9 *9 0 0 0
4 black band creation control *9 *9 0 0 0
5 Image stabilization control *10 *10 0 0 0
6 cycle *10 *10 1 1 1
7 Drum potential auto adjust- Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
ment
DIPSW7 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Background density adjustment *11 *11 0 0 0
3 *11 *11 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW8 0 Image density selection (laser *12 *12 0 0 0
1 PWM) for printer *12 *12 0 0 0
2 Fusing initial rotation condition *13 *13 0 0 0
3 *13 *13 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Large-size paper count Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0
method (PM counter)
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW9 0 Operation at key counter Same as Immediate 0 1 1
removal (copier) the stop key stop (jam)
1 Operation at key counter Ignored Same as 0 0 0
removal (printer) DIPSW9-0
*14 *14
2 Message switchover 0 0 0
3 *14 *14 0 0 0
3 -99

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW9 4 Copy quantity limit *15 *15 0 0 0
5 *15 *15 0 0 0
6 *15 *15 0 0 0
7 *15 *15 0 0 0
DIPSW10 0 Image memory usable area *16 *16 0 0 0
1 *16 *16 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Definition change of the large size *17 *17 0 0 0
4 paper in counter control *17 *17 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Erasure amount of trailing edge 3 mm 1 mm 0 0 0

of tab paper
3 SC screen switchover F/E code screen F code screen 0 0 0
switch only
4 Filter for jagged edges on Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
slanting lines
5 Gradation switchover in the 2bitED 1bitED 0 0 0
photo mode
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Printer auto centering correc- Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
tion
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW13 0 Original size detection switchover 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 Original size detection switchover 2 A4R 8.5 x 11R 0 1 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — 0 0 0
5 Original size detection switchover 3 *18 *18 0 0 0
6 *18 *18 0 0 0
7 — *18 *18 1 1 0
3 -100

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW14 0 Original size detection switchover 4 B4, 11 x 17/B5, 8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
8.5 x 11/B5R
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW15 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Staple number allowed *19 *19 0 0 0
2 *19 *19 0 0 0
3 Finishing option alarm stop *20 *20 0 0 0
4 *20 *20 0 0 0
5 CS Remote Care recognition Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
6 Maximum density in printer mode 1.43 1.35 0 0 0
7 Trigger the display of developer/ Number of prints Running time 0 0 0
drum replacement message
DIPSW16 0 Developer/drum running time Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
display
1 Copy reservation function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Count of the key counter in Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
printer mode
4 Utility mode installation date Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
display
*21 *21
5 Non-image area erase mode 0 0 0
6 judge level *21 *21 0 0 0
7 NIC selection for E-Mail CS Controller NIC Machine NIC 0 0 0
Remote Care
*22 *22
DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting 0 0 0
1 *22 *22 0 0 0
2 *22 *22 0 0 0
3 *22 *22 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning *23 *23 0 0 0
5 tab paper *23 *23 0 0 0
6 *23 *23 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
3 -101

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /1 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /2 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: RADF Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD1 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW19 0 Fusing temperature setting *24 *24 1 0 0
1 *24 *24 0 0 0
2 *24 *24 1 0 0
3 *24 *24 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW20 0 Group staple Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Image scanning area with *25 Normal *25 Original priority 0 0 0
image shift
2 Total page number standard in Based on original Based on 0 0 0
stamp mode transfer paper
3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW21 0 Mixed size paper staple Allowed Prohibited 0 0 0
(real-time output) (batch output)
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW22 0 Machine NIC setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1
1 Number of punch holes *26 *26 1 1 0
2 *26 *26 0 0 1
3 Image position for the non-stand- Based on user Based on APS at 0 0 0
ard size original (at DF) selection DF
4 Function of power save button Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
3 -102

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW22 6 Operation when staple empty Request staple Selectable staple 0 0 0
of FNS supply supply or staple
release
7 Jam screen selection Jam position Described by 0 0 0
display illustration
DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Toner density of developer *27 *27 0 0 0
selection
*27 *27
3 0 0 0
4 *27 *27 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Default settings of PageScope Manual Automatic 0 0 0
JobEditor when turned ON
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Z-fold output number limit *28 *28 0 0 0
5 *28 *28 0 0 0
6 Z-fold + Staple output number *29 *29 0 0 0
7 limit *29 *29 0 0 0
DIPSW25 0 PI size detection switchover 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 PI size detection switchover 2 A4R 8.5 x 11R 0 1 0
2 PI size detection switchover 3 *30 *30 0 0 0
3 *30 *30 0 0 0
4 *30 *30 1 1 0
5 PI size detection switchover 4 B4, 11 x 17/B5, 8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
8.5 x 11/B5R
6 PI size detection switchover 5 A3 12 x 18 0 1 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW26 0 Transfer assist control size *31 *31 0 1 0
1 switchover *31 *31 0 0 0
2 Multi feed detection control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
(main body)
3 Multi feed detection control (PI) Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4 Tray /4 forced separation Operate only in Operate always 0 0 0
clutch control high temp.
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Multi feed detection control Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
(DF)
3 -103

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW27 0 Paper weight-line speed con- For Japan For other than 0 1 1
trol switchover Japan
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Image density selection (toner *32 *32 0 0 0
3 control patch density) *32 *32 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Thin characters reproduction Standard Thin-character 0 0 0
improvement (usage of smaller correspondent
laser dot)
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW29 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 Service mode, restriction of Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0
data collection display
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 1 1 1
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
3 -104

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW31 6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW32 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW32 3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW33 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold/ Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
punch function
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray paper exit
3 Faulty part isolation: PI function Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FD Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray-tandem (1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray-tandem (2nd)
DIPSW34 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW35 0 Faulty part isolation: FS staple Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
function
1 Faulty part isolation: FS main Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
tray paper exit
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
3 -105

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW36 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW37 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW38 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW39 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW40 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
3 -106

Japan Inch Metric
DIPSW42 0 TIFF direct print Not output Output 0 0 0
1 TIFF direct print *33 *33 0 0 0
2 APS target paper size (F4) *33 *33 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW43 0 Change of the scanner pres- MMR MH 0 0 0
sure method
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 — — — 0 0 0
DIPSW46 0 Visual Counter Master counter *34 *34 0 0 0
1 value read-off intervals *34 *34 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
3 -107
NOTE *5 All charger cleaning cycle (after turned ON)

• Bold boxes show default settings.
Mode 2-5 2-4
*1 Print stop condition after toner supply display Every 10,000 prints 0 0
Every 20,000 prints 0 1
Mode 1-1 1-0
Stops after 500 prints 0 0
Stops after 750 prints 0 1
Stops after 1,000 prints 1 0 *6 Blade auto replacement cycle
Stops after 2,000 prints 1 1
Mode 2-7 2-6
*2 Print stop method after toner supply display Every 375,000 prints 0 0
Mode 1-3 1-2
Stops after exit paper in 0 0
the machine
Stops at a break between 0 1 *7 Image density selection (laser PWM) for copier
print set Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
Stops at the end of the 1 0 lighter.

current job
Does not stop 1 1 NOTE
• There are two kinds of DIPSWs to lighten
*3 Print number setting until printing is prohibited image density: laser PWM (5-2/3) and toner
after PM is displayed control patch density (27-2/3). As a priority of
adjustment, adjust in the following order.
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5
1) Laser PWM
1,000 prints 0 0 0 2) Toner control patch density: approx. 0.5%
2,000 prints 0 0 1 down
3,000 prints 0 1 0 Using this setting alone may cause white
4,000 prints 1 1 0 spot on the solid section. Be sure to use
together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner den-
5,000 prints 0 0 1
sity of developer) approx. 0.25% up or
1,000 prints 1 0 1
0.5% up.
1,000 prints 0 1 1
1,000 prints 1 1 1
Mode 5-3 5-2
*4 All charger cleaning cycle (fixing temperature Standard (*200/200/186) 0 0
50°C or less when turning ON) Lighter (*167/167/137) 0 1
Mode 2-3 2-2 2-1 Lightest (*142/142/112) 1 0
Cleaning every time 0 0 0 Standard (*200/200/186) 1 1
At 5,000 prints 0 0 1 * 0 (white) to 255 (black) represent density within

the image density range. Numbers represent
At 10,000 prints 0 1 0
each image density at the line speed 490 mm/s,
At 15,000 prints 0 1 1
425 mm/s, 290 mm/s from left.
At 20,000 prints 1 0 0
At 25,000 prints 1 0 1
At 30,000 prints 1 1 0
No cleaning 1 1 1
3 -108
*8 Background density adjustment (photo mode) *12 Image density selection (laser PWM) for printer
Change the laser PWM and set the image density for Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
the highlight section while in the photo mode. lighter.
The numerical values given in the table represent the
Mode 8-1 8-0
density in the image density range of 0 (white) to 255
(black). Standard (*200/200/186) 0 0
Lighter (*167/167/137) 0 1
Mode 6-1 6-0
Lightest (*142/142/112) 1 0
PWM 16 0 0
Standard (*200/200/186) 1 1
PWM 0 0 1
* 0 (white) to 255 (black) represent density within
PWM 8 1 0 the image density range. Numbers represent
PWM 24 1 1 each image density at the line speed 490 mm/s,
425 mm/s, 290 mm/s from left.
*9 Minimum black band width in black band cre-
ation control *13 Fusing initial rotation condition
Set the minimum black band width in the black band In the low temperature environment, fusibility may be
creation control. insufficient immediately after the power is turned ON.
So, rotate the fusing roller while in the warm-up to
Mode 6-4 6-3
obtain an even heat distribution of the fusing roller to
0.25 mm 0 0
avoid the insufficient fusing.
0.5 mm 0 1 In this adjustment, determine the environment in
0.75 mm 1 0 which you implement the fusing initial rotation.
No band 1 1 • Low temperature: perform the fusing initial rotation
in the low temperature environment only.
*10 Image stabilization control cycle • Low/normal temperature: perform the fusing initial
Changes cycle of the image stabilization control rotation in the low and normal temperature envi-
(drum potential, maximum density, gamma auto ronment
adjustment). • Low/normal/high temperature: perform the fusing
initial rotation in all environments.
Mode 6-6 6-5
Every 20,000 prints 0 0 Mode 8-3 8-2
Every 30,000 prints 0 1 Low temperature 0 0
Every 40,000 prints 1 0 Low/normal temperature 0 1
Every 50,000 prints 1 1 Low/normal/high temper- 1 0
ature
*11 Background density adjustment No preparatory rotation 1 1
Change the charging potential and set the image
density of the highlight section. *14 Message switchover
Mode 7-3 7-2 Mode 9-3 9-2

Standard 0 0 Please insert key counter 0 0
Dark (25 V down) 0 1 Please insert copy card 0 1
Lighter (25 V up) 1 0 Please insert coin 1 0
Lightest (50 V up) 1 1 Please insert key counter 1 1
3 -109
*15 Copy quantity limit *17 Definition change of the large size paper in
counter control
Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4
No limit 0 0 0 0 Mode 10-3 10-4
1 prints 0 0 0 1 A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 0 0
3 prints 0 0 1 0 Small size only 0 1
5 prints 0 0 1 1 A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 · 1 0
9 prints 0 1 0 0 8.5 x 14 · B4 · 8K
10 prints 0 1 0 1 A3 · 11 x 17 · 12 x 18 · 1 1
8.5 x 14 · B4 · 8K · F4
20 prints 0 1 1 0
30 prints 0 1 1 1
*18 Original size detection switchover 3
50 prints 1 0 0 0 Default setting for inch is 8.5 x 14 and 8 x 13 for met-
99 prints 1 0 0 1 ric.
No limit 1 0 1 0
Mode 13-7 13-6 13-5
No limit 1 0 1 1
8 x 13 0 0 0
No limit 1 1 0 0
8.25 x 13 0 0 1
No limit 1 1 1 0
8.125 x 13.25 0 1 0
No limit 1 1 1 1
8.5 x 13 0 1 1
*16 Image memory usable area 8.5 x 14 1 0 0

Changes the usable area of DRAM (256 MB) on the Not used 1 0 1
image processing board (IPB). Compression memory Not used 1 1 0
is used within the memory area of compressed image Not used 1 1 1
data, and expansion memory is used for page mem-
ory of expanded image data. There are 2 types of *19 Staple number allowed
image memory; DRAM on IPB and hard disk/1 (10
GB of total 40 GB is used). DRAM is used by priority. Mode 15-2 15-1
If hard disk/1 is damaged and memory overflow 100 sheets 0 0
occurs during scanning or transferring data from PC, 50 sheets 0 1
increase compression memory. If memory overflow 40 sheets 1 0
occurs before printing starts, increase expansion
30 sheets 1 1
memory.
*20 Finishing operation alarm stop
Mode 10-1 10-0
Alarm stop means the following full detection func-
Compression memory 0 0
tions. FD/FS/LS tray lower limit, FD/FS/LS number of
187MB
sheets on the tray, FD punch, FS staple scraps.
Expansion memory 69 MB
Compression memory 0 1 Mode 15-4 15-3
220MB Stops immediately after 0 0
Expansion memory 36 MB detection
Compression memory 1 0 Stops at a break between 0 1
159MB print set after detection
Expansion memory 97 MB Does not stop while print- 1 0
Compression memory 1 1 ing
46MB Does not stop while print- 1 1
Expansion memory 210 MB ing
3 -110
*21 Non-image area erase mode judge level *24 Fusing temperature setting
Temperature up: Decrease insufficient fusing or wrap-
Mode 16-6 16-5
ping jam at fusing.
Standard 0 0 Temperature down: decrease paper exit curling or
Correspond to dark origi- 0 1 waving.
nal
Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1 19-0
Correspond to light inter- 1 0
ference Standard 0 0 0 0
Not used 1 1 Standard + 5°C 0 0 0 1

Standard + 10°C 0 0 1 0
*22 Summer time setting Standard + 15°C 0 0 1 1
Standard -5°C 0 1 0 0
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
0 minute 0 0 0 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
*25 Image scanning area with shift function
120 minutes 1 1 0 0 Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer
130 minutes 1 1 0 1 paper size, the smaller one is to be the image area.
140 minutes 1 1 1 0 Original priority: Original size is to be the image area.
150 minutes 1 1 1 1
Mode 20-1
Normal 0
*23 Density selection at scanning tab paper
Original priority 1
Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
80 0 0 0 *26 Number of punch holes
40 (Lightest) 0 0 1
Mode 22-2 22-1
60 0 1 0
Not used 0 0
100 0 1 1
2 and 3 holes 0 1
120 1 0 0
2 and 4 holes 1 0
160 1 0 1
Not used 1 1
200 1 1 0
255 (Darkest) 1 1 1
3 -111
*27 Toner density of developer selection *30 PI size detection switchover 3

Change developing roller rotation and toner density of Default setting for inch is 8.5 x 14 and 8 x 13 for met-
developer (toner and carrier ratio) to change only ric.
toner density of developer without changing image
Mode 25-4 25-3 25-2
density.
If increasing toner density of developer resulted in 8 x 13 0 0 0
image background, decrease toner density. If lighten- 8.25 x 13 0 0 1
ing image in other DIPSW (5-0/1, 27-2/3) resulted in 8.125 x 13.25 0 1 0
white spot on the solid section, increase toner den- 8.5 x 13 0 1 1
sity. 8.5 x 14 1 0 0
Not used 1 0 1
NOTE
Not used 1 1 0
• After change the DIPSW, image density does
not appear as the setting value until printing Not used 1 1 1
about 500 prints because it need to add toner
to increase toner density of developer or *31 Transfer assist control size switchover
need to consume toner to reduce it. Default setting for inch is "Between 279 mm and 297
mm" and "297 mm or more" for metric.
Mode 23-4 23-3 23-2 NOTE

Standard toner density 0 0 0 • When you make the transfer assist sheet
Approx. 0.5% down 0 0 1 PCS-compliant, be sure to set this switch to
Approx. 1.0% down 0 1 0 "Correspond to PCS."
Approx. 1.5% down 0 1 1

Approx. 0.25% up 1 0 0 Mode 26-1 26-0
Approx. 0.5% up 1 0 1 297 mm or more 0 0
Approx. 0.75% up 1 1 0 Between 279 mm and 0 1
Approx. 1.0% up 1 1 1 297 mm
Do not transfer assist 1 0
*28 Z-fold output number limit Correspond to PCS 1 1
Mode 24-5 24-4

50 sheets 0 0
40 sheets 0 1
30 sheets 1 0
20 sheets 1 1
*29 Z-fold + Staple output number limit
Mode 24-7 24-6

5 sheets 0 0
8 sheets 0 1
10 sheets 1 0
3 sheets 1 1
3 -112
*32 Image density selection (toner control patch den- *34 Visual Count Master counter value read-off inter-
sity) vals
Changes the image density by setting the developing
Mode 46-0 46-1
bias for the toner control patch formed on the drum
to determine the toner density. Once every 10 minutes 0 0
Once every 1 minute 0 1
NOTE Not read off 1 0
• After changing the DIPSW, image density Once every 1 hour 1 1
does not appear as the setting value until
printing about 500 prints because it needs to
add toner to increase the toner density of
developer or consume toner to reduce it.
• Using this setting alone may cause image
background or toner spillage. Be sure to use
together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner density
of developer) approx. 0.5% down or 1.0%
down.
• There are two kinds of DIPSWs to lighten
image density: laser PWM (5-2/3) and toner
control patch density (27-2/3). For the priority
of adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Laser PWM
2) Toner control patch density: approx. 0.5%
down
Using this setting alone may cause white
spots on the solid section. Be sure to use
together with DIPSW23-2/3/4 (toner den-
sity of developer) approx. 0.25% up or
0.5% up.
Mode 27-3 27-2

Standard 0 0
Approx. 0.5% up 0 1
Approx. 1.0% up 1 0
Approx. 0.5% down 1 1
*33 TIFF direct print APS target paper size (F4)
Mode 42-1 42-2

8 x 13 0 0
8.5 x 13 0 1
8.25 x 13 1 0
8.125 x 13.25 1 1
3 -113
4.9.2 Telephone number setting 4.9.3 Serial number setting

Set the telephone number and FAX number of the Set and display the serial number of the main body
service center displayed when malfunction occurs. and options.
A. Procedure
Caution:
1. Enter the service mode. • Never change the serial number of the main
2. "Service mode menu screen" body. Otherwise, the fixing temperature
Press the [07 System Setting] key. abnormality or the drum damage may occur.

screen. A. Procedure
Press the [02 Telephone Number Setting] key
on the sub menu. 1. Enter the service mode.
4. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen" 2. "Service mode menu screen"

Press either the [Service Center Tel (16)] or the Press the [07 System Setting] key.
[Service Center Fax (16)] key you want to set. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
5. Enter the telephone number or FAX number screen.
you register through the numeric keys. Press the [03 M/C Serial Number Setting] key
on the sub menu.

NOTE 4. "Serial number setting mode screen"
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be Press the key for the option you want to set,
sure to use hyphen to fill up the blanks. and enter the serial number through the
6. Press the [OK] key to register data. numeric keys.
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you 5. Press the [OK] key to register data.
entered. Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you
entered.
NOTE
• When the entered data is incorrect, a notice
screen appears. Press the [OK] key to close
the screen and enter data again.
3 -114
4.9.4 Setting date input 4.10 ROM version

Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-
played on the utility mode. Display the ROM version of the main body and
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date options.
of the total counter is not displayed.
NOTE
A. Procedure • The [Image control] that is displayed on the
screen represents the ROM version of the
overall control board (OACB).
Press the [07 System Setting] key. (1) Procedure
screen. 1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [04 Setting Date Input] key on the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
sub menu. Press the [08 ROM Version] key.
4. "Setting date input screen" 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Enter the starting date through the numeric screen.
keys. Press the [01 ROM Version]] key on the sub
5. Press the [OK] key to update data. menu.
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you 4. "Indication of ROM version screen"
updated. Each ROM version is displayed.
3 -115
4.11 CS Remote Care

4.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the
management data of the main body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through
the phone line or E-mail.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body
for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
NOTE
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care

When a change in use is made between the main body NIC and the controller NIC, or when the mail remote
notification system is jointly used, care should be taken of the mail account and the DIPSW setting.
For particulars, see “4.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification sys-
tem.”
In case you setup again the once setup main body, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care and start from step 5.
About how to clear the RAM for CS Remote Care, see “4.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care.”
Step Operation
When using the phone line modem When using the E-mail
Main body NIC Controller NIC
0 Registered the machine ID in the application on the CS Remote Care center side.
When the machine ID is not registered, no initial connection cannot be made.
1 Modem connection When using the E-mail, remove the modem for the
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the phone line.
main body and the modem with a modem cable,
and the modem and the wall outlet with a modu-
lar cable.
* For the connection of a modular cable, see the
instructions of the modem to be used.
2 I/O check mode and data collection clear available
(Service mode → 07 System Setting → 01 Software SW Setting → Set 03-6 to "On (1)")
3 CS Remote Care memory initialization
(Service mode → 04 Machine Condition → 01 I/O Check Mode → [1] [5] [ACCESS] [9] [8] → [Start]
button ON)
4 CS Remote Care function ON
(Service mode → 07 System Setting → 01 Software SW Setting → Set 15-5 to "On (1)")
5 Proceed to the step 6. CS Remote Care used CS Remote Care used
NIC selection (main NIC selection (controller
body NIC used) NIC used)
(Service mode → 07 (Service mode → 07
System Setting → 01 System Setting → 01
Software SW Setting → Software SW Setting →
Set 16-7 to "On (1)") Set 16-7 to "Off (0)")
3 -116
Step Operation
6 CS Remote Care function selection CS Remote Care function selection
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS (Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS
Remote Care → Set 02 Modem) Remote Care → Set 01 E-mail)
7 No. code entry
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS Remote Care → Press No. Code → Enter the No.
code* → Press No. Code)
* For the No. code, enter a specified code.
8 Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 02 Date and time setting → Press Setting Time → Enter the
current time → Press SET → Press Time Zone → Enter the time zone)
9 Center ID setting
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic setting → Press the Center No. → Enter the center
No.*)
* Enter the center No. in five digits.
10 Center telephone Number setting Response time out setting: Optional
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic (Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 03
setting → Press Center Telephone Number → Response time out setting → Enter the response
Enter the center telephone Number*) time out time)
* Make an entry using "T" and "P" as required. (This is usually left as default.)
11 Machine telephone Number setting Proceed to the step 12.
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 01 Basic
setting → Press Machine Telephone Number →
Enter the machine telephone Number *)
* Make an entry using "T" and "P" as required.
12 Modem initialization AT command entry Main body mail address Controller mail address
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → 04 AT setting setting
command → Press First command → Enter the This is set from the Web This is set by the admin-
initialization command *) utility on the browser of istrator set network set-
* For particulars of the initialization command, the PC connected to ting through the
see the instructions of the modem to be used. the main body NIC by operation panel of the
the network. main body.
Be sure to conduct the Be sure to conduct the
sending and receiving sending and receiving
test. test.
13 DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care Proceed to the step 14.
(Enter the No. code → Detail setting → Software
SW setting)
(Baud rate setting: Select the baud rate at the
software DIPSW setting 01-4 to 7.)
14 Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
3 -117
Step Operation
15 First call execution Initial connection mail Initial connection mail
(Service mode → 09 CS Remote Care → 01 CS reception reception
Remote Care → Press No. Code twice → Detail The initial connection The initial connection
setting → 01 Basic setting → First call*) mail is sent to the mail mail is sent to the mail
* When the connection to the center completes address of the main address of the controller
successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen body NIC from the cen- NIC from the center.
is displayed. ter. * When the CS Remote
* When the CS Remote Care related window is
Care related screen is opened while receiving
opened while receiving the initial connection
the initial connection mail from the center, the
mail from the center, the information being cre-
information being created is destroyed and
ated is destroyed and the CS Remote Care
the CS Remote Care setting screen is dis-

setting screen is displayed.
played.
3 -118
4.11.3 List of combinations of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-Mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to
configure the DIPSW setting or the mail account setting.
Case Mail remote E-Mail CS E-Mail CS Setting item Value Remark

notification Remote Care Remote Care
system using the main using the con-
body NIC troller NIC
"Use the mail remote notification Use
system" of the main body NIC’s
Web utility
1 { { — "Service mode - Software 1 (*3)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 1
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
system" of the main body NIC
Web utility
2 { — { "Service mode - Software 1 (*4)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
system" of the main body NIC
Web utility
3 { — — "Service mode - Software 0 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Do not
system" of the main body NIC use
Web utility
4 — { — "Service mode - Software 1 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Do not
system" of the main body NIC use
Web utility
5 — — { "Service mode - Software 1 —
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
*1 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 16-7 (NIC selection of E-Mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main
body NIC)
*3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account
*4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts
3 -119
4.11.4 Detailed setup procedure 5. Set the bit data to "On (1)".
A. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid On (1): CS Remote Care function enabled
Off (0): CS Remote Care function disabled
(default)
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura-
tion.
3. "Sub menu screen"
Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key.
4. "Software SW Setting screen" D. NIC selection for E-Mail CS Remote Care
Set "03" with the DIPSW number.
Set "6" with the DIPSW bit number.
5. Set the bit data to "On (1)".
On (1): I/O check mode, data collection clear
enabled 3. "Sub menu screen"
Off (0): I/O check mode, data collection clear Press the [01 Software SW Setting] key.
disabled (default) 4. "Software SW Setting screen"
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura- Set "16" with the DIPSW number.
tion. Set "7" with the DIPSW bit number.
5. Set the bit data to the NIC you use.

On (1): Use the main body NIC
B. CS Remote Care memory initialization Off (0): Use the controller NIC (default)
6. Press the [Return] key to finish the configura-
tion.
Press the [04 Machine Condition] key.
3. "Sub menu screen" E. CS Remote Care function selection (E-Mail/
Press the [01 I/O Check Mode] key. Phone line modem)
4. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter "15" with the numeric keys. Confirm that
"15-00" is displayed on the message display 2. "Service mode menu screen"
area. Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
5. Press the [Access] button. 3. "Sub menu screen"

Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key.
6. Enter "98" with the numeric keys.
4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
7. Press the [Start] button.
Select the key for the function you use.
Confirm that the output check display switches
01 E-Mail: Use the E-Mail CS Remote Care
to "FIN."
02 Modem: Use the Modem CS Remote Care
5. Press the [No. Code] key.
C. CS Remote Care function ON 6. Enter the No. code* with the numeric keys.
7. Press the [No. Code] key.
8. Press the [Detail setting] key.
9. "Setting menu screen"
Press the [02 Date and time setting] key.
10. Enter the date with the numeric keys, and
press the [Set] key.
4. "Software SW Setting screen"
11. Enter the month with the numeric keys, and
Set "15" with the DIPSW number.
Set "5" with the DIPSW bit number.
3 -120
12. "Date and Time setting screen" *1 When entering the telephone number, keys on
Enter the year in 2 digits with the numeric keys, the screen other than numeric keys represent
and press the [Set] key. the followings.
13. Enter time with the numeric keys, and press the [ , ] Pause: holds the self-dial delivery for some time
[Set] key. [W] Wait: detects the destination dial tone
14. Press the [Time Zone] key. [T] Tone dial: tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial: pulse dialing
15. Enter the time zone with the numeric keys, and
[—] Number delimiter: ignored when actually dialed
[*] [#] [•]: use as necessary
16. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Setting
*2 Change the modem initialization command if
menu screen."
necessary (Usually, there is no need to change).
* Enter the No. code that is assigned in advance. For details, refer to the manual of the modem.
F. Modem initial setting G. Baud rate setting
1. "Modem setting menu screen"

NOTE
Press the [01 Basic setting] key.
• In case you changed bit data by accident, be
2. "Basic setting screen"
sure to restore the previous state.
Press the [Center No.] key.
3. Enter the center ID with the keyboard, and 1. "Modem setting menu screen"
press the [OK] key. Press the [05 Software SW setting] key.
4. Press the [Center Telephone Number] key. 2. "Software SW Setting screen"
5. Enter the center telephone number with the Set "01" with the DIPSW number.
numeric and symbolic keys. Set the modem baud rate using the DIPSW bit
Use [T]s and [P]s depending on the modem number "4 to 7".*
and the phone line. *1 3. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Modem
6. Press the [Machine Telephone Number] key. setting menu screen."
7. Enter the machine telephone number with the
* Modem baud rate
numeric and symbolic keys.
Use [T]s and [P]s depending on the modem Baud rate 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4
and the phone line. *1
1200 bps 0 0 1 1
8. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Modem set-
2400 bps 0 1 0 0
ting menu screen."
4800 bps 0 1 0 1
9. "Modem setting menu screen"
9600 bps 0 1 1 0
Press the [04 AT command] key.
19200 bps 0 1 1 1
10. "AT command setting screen"
Press the [First command] key. 38400 bps 1 0 0 0
11. Enter the modem initialization command with 57600 bps 1 0 0 1

the keyboard, and press the [OK] key. *2
12. Press the [OK] key to return to the "Modem set-
ting menu screen."
3 -121
H. E-Mail initial setting 4.11.5 Software DIPSW setting for CS Remote

Care
1. "E-Mail Setting Menu screen"
NOTE
2. "Basic setting screen" • DIPSW bits data are written into the Parame-
Press the [Center No.] key. ter board (PB) every time a change is made.
3. Enter the center ID with the keyboard, and In case you changed bit data by accident, be
press the [OK] key. sure to restore the previous state.
4. Press the [OK] key to return to the "E-Mail Set-
ting Menu screen." A. Input procedure
5. "E-Mail Setting Menu screen"
Press the [03 Response time out setting] key. *
6. Enter the response time out time with the
numeric keys. (in minutes)
7. Press the [OK] key to return to the "E-Mail Set-
ting Menu screen."
Press the [No. Code] key.
NOTE
• The response time out setting is automati- 5. Use the sheet setting keys to enter the No.
cally set on receiving the initial connection code. *1
mail. Change the setting if necessary. 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
9. "Software SW Setting screen"
Select the DIPSW number.
Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
10. Select the DIPSW bit number.
Use the right arrow key or the numeric keys.
11. Select DIPSW On (1), Off (0).
Use the [On (1)], [Off (0)] key.
12. Press the [Return] key to return to the "Setting
menu screen."
*1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that
No. code.
NOTE
• About functions of each switch, see to “B.
List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.”
3 -122
B. List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
DIPSW No Bit Functions 0 1 Default

DIPSW1 0 — — — 1
1 Modem reception Receive*1 Do not receive*1 0
2 — — — 0
3 — — — 0
4 Baud rate *2 *2 0
5 *2 *2 0
6 *2 *2 0
7 *2 *2 1
DIPSW2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence Do not call Call 1
1 Auto call on date specification Do not call Call 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement Do not call Call 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement Do not call Call 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance Do not call Call 1
(PM)
5 — — — 0
6 — — — 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW3 0 — — — 0
1 Auto call on the toner supply Do not call Call 1
2 Auto call on frequent JAM occurrence Do not call Call 1
3 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode *3 *3 0
1 *3 *3 1
2 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW5 0 Modem redial interval *4 *4 1
1 *4 *4 1
2 *4 *4 0
3 *4 *4 0
4 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW6 0 Modem redial times *5 *5 0
1 *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW7 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
3 -123

DIPSW8 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery *6 *6 0
1 error *6 *6 1
2 *6 *6 1
3 *6 *6 0
4 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW9 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery *7 *7 0
1 error *7 *7 1
2 *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 1
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 0
7 — — — 0
DIPSW10 0 Time zone setting *8 *8 0
1 *8 *8 0
2 *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 0
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
DIPSW11 0 Timer 1 *9 *9 0
1 RING reception → CONNECT reception *9 *9 0
2 *9 *9 0
3 *9 *9 0
4 *9 *9 0
5 *9 *9 1
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
DIPSW12 0 Timer 2 *10 *10 0
1 Dial request completed → CONNECT *10 *10 0
2 reception *10 *10 0
3 *10 *10 0
4 *10 *10 0
5 *10 *10 0
6 *10 *10 1
7 *10 *10 0
DIPSW13 0 Timer 3 — — 0
1 Not used — — 1
2 — — 0
3 — — 1
4 — — 0
3 -124

DIPSW13 5 Timer 3 — — 0
6 Not used — — 0
7 — — 0
DIPSW14 0 Timer 4 *11 *11 0
1 Line connection → Start request telegram *11 *11 0
2 delivery *11 *11 0
3 *11 *11 0
4 *11 *11 0
5 *11 *11 1
6 *11 *11 0
7 *11 *11 0
DIPSW15 0 Timer 5 *12 *12 0
1 Wait time for other side's response *12 *12 1
2 *12 *12 1
3 *12 *12 1
4 *12 *12 1
5 *12 *12 0
6 *12 *12 0
7 *12 *12 0
DIPSW16 0 Retry data, timer 6 *13 *13 1
1 Initialization OK → Dial request *13 *13 1
2 *13 *13 1
3 *13 *13 1
4 *13 *13 1
5 *13 *13 1
6 *13 *13 1
7 *13 *13 1
DIPSW17 0 Copiable number after frequent JAMs call *14 *14 1
1 in the main body *14 *14 0
2 Passable original number after frequent *15 *15 1
3 ADFJAM calls *15 *15 0
4 MCBJ setting after frequent JAMs call in *16 *16 1
5 the main body *16 *16 0
6 MOBJ setting after frequent ADFJAM calls *17 *17 1
7 *17 *17 0
DIPSW18 0 Attention display Do not call Call 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW19 to 0 to 7 — — — 0
DIPSW40
3 -125
*1 Modem reception *6 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
Mode 01-1 Mode 08-3 08-2 08-1 08-0

Receive 0 0 minute 0 0 0 0
Issue ATA by RING delivery 10 minutes 0 0 0 1
Do not receive 1 20 minutes 0 0 1 0
Do not issue ATA by RING delivery 30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
*2 Baud rate
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4 60 minutes 0 1 1 0
1200 bps 0 0 1 1 70 minutes 0 1 1 1
2400 bps 0 1 0 0 80 minutes 1 0 0 0
4800 bps 0 1 0 1 90 minutes 1 0 0 1
9600 bps 0 1 1 0 100 minutes 1 0 1 0
19200 bps 0 1 1 1 110 minutes 1 0 1 1
38400 bps 1 0 0 0 120 minutes 1 1 0 0
57600 bps 1 0 0 1
*7 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error

*3 CS Remote Care communication mode
Mode 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Mode 03-1 03-0 DIPSW09
Data modem 0 0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
FAX (not used) 0 1 10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
E-Mail 1 0 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
Reservation 1 1
*8 Time zone setting
*4 Modem redial interval
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0 DIPSW10
1 minute 0 0 0 1 -12 to -1 1111 0100 to 1111 1111
2 minutes 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 minutes 0 0 1 1 1 to 12 0000 0001 to 0001100
4 minutes 0 1 0 0
*9 Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT recep-
5 minutes 0 1 0 1
tion)
6 minutes 0 1 1 0
7 minutes 0 1 1 1 Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 minutes 1 0 0 0 DIPSW11
9 minutes 1 0 0 1 0 to 31 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
10 minutes 1 0 1 0 32 sec 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 sec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*5 Modem redial times
Mode 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DIPSW06
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
3 -126
*10 Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT *15 Passable original number after frequent ADFJAM
reception) calls
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mode 17-3 17-2

DIPSW12 600 sheets 0 0
0 to 63 sec 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 1200 sheets 0 1
64 sec 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1800 sheets 1 0
65 to 255 sec 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 2400 sheets 1 1
*11 Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request tele- *16 MCBJ setting after frequent JAMs call in the
gram delivery) main body
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mode 17-5 17-4

DIPSW14 1000 0 0
0 to 31 (x 100 msec) 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 2000 0 1
32 (x 100 msec) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 3000 1 0
33 to 255 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 5000 1 1
(x 100 msec)
*17 MOBJ setting after frequent ADFJAM calls
*12 Timer 5 (Wait time for other side's response)
Mode 17-7 17-6
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
100 0 0
DIPSW15
200 0 1
0 to 29 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1101
400 1 0
30 sec 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
600 1 1
31 to 255 sec 0001 1111 to 1111 1111
*13 Retry data, timer 6 (Initialization OK → Dial

request)
Mode 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DIPSW16
0 to 254 (x 5 msec) 0000 0000 to 1111 1110
255 (x 5 msec) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*14 Copiable number after frequent JAMs call in the

main body
Mode 17-1 17-0

3000 copies 0 0
6000 copies 0 1
9000 copies 1 0
12000 copies 1 1
3 -127
4.11.6 Mail address setting 5. Click [E-Mail Initial Setting]. The mail initial set-
A. Procedure for setting the main body NIC ting screen is displayed.
Display the Web utility on the browser of the PC that
is connected to this machine by the network to set
the mail address. The mail setting method of the CS
Remote Care that uses the main body NIC is the
same as that for the mail remote notification system.
Corresponding browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 or
Netscape4.7x or above
1. Start up the PC that is connected to this

machine by the network.
2. Open the browser and select "Open" in the file
menu.
3. Enter the IP address of this machine or the host
name, and press the [Enter] key. The main page
of the Web utility screen of this machine is dis-
played.
4. Click [Extension for maintenance].

Enter "ce" for the user name and then enter the
8-digit CE password (default: 92729272) for
the password, and then click the [OK] button.
The CE extended function screen is displayed.
3 -128
6. Set the following items. Supplement:

• Enable E-mail notification: [Communication log]
Select "Yes." The CE extended function page shows 5 sent-out
The setting method of the CS Remote Care and 5 received mail logs. The CS Remote Care
that uses the main body NIC is the same as related mails are displayed as "Kind: CS Remote
that of the mail remote notification system. Care Mail."
• Sending mail (SMTP) server:
Set the IP address of the sending mail server.
B. Procedure for setting the Controller NIC
• Interval between fetching mails:
Set the intervals from 1 minute to 60 minutes to 1. Press the [Utility] button on the operation panel.
check the receiving mail server to see if a mail is
2. "Utility menu screen"
newly received.
Press the [06 Machine Manager Setting] key.
• Receiving mail server:
3. "Machine manager setting menu screen"
Set the IP address of the receiving mail server.
Press the [04 Network Setting] key.
• Kind of mail spool:
Select either of POP3 and IMAP according to
Press the [02 Controller NIC Setting] key.
the mail server to be used by the main body.
Default: "POP3" 5. "Controller NIC setting menu screen"
• User name on the server: Press the [11 CSRC] key.
Enter the account name assigned to the main 6. "CSRC setting menu screen"
body by the receiving mail server. Press the [01 CSRC Send Setting] key.
• Password: 7. Configure the following items.
Enter the password to the above account • CSRC Send
name. Select [Yes].
• E-mail address of this copy machine: • SMTP Server Address
Enter the mail address assigned to the main Specify the SMTP server address. You can use
body. symbols and alphanumeric characters within
• CE password: 63 characters.
Enter any alphanumeric characters (including • Port Number
symbols) up to 20 characters. Specify the SMTP port number within the range
• Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP: from 1 to 65535. Default is [25].
After authentication is made by the receiving • Connection Time Out Time
mail server, a selection is made if the mail is to Specify the SMTP time out time with in the
be sent out or not. Default: "To be sent." range from 30 to 300 (sec). Default is [60] sec-
* : Change "SMTP port No." and "POP (IMAP) onds.
port No." as necessary. • Machine Manager From Address
* : "Nickname for the copier," "Mail transfer Specify the From address of mails from the
option," "E-mail address for transfer" and "Dis- controller NIC.
play of the time required in the mail" are set for ==========================
the mail remote notification system. Set them In case you use a server in which authentication is
as necessary. required for sending and receiving mails, press the
7. Press the [Apply] button to decide the entry. [Next] key to configure necessary settings.
8. Click the [Sending and Receiving test] button to 8. Press the [OK] key.
conduct the sending and receiving test of the 9. "CSRC setting menu screen"
mail. Press the [02 CSRC Receive Setting] key.
When the test is completed successfully, pro-
ceed to the next step. When the test fails,
check the setting again according to the error
message to conduct the test once more.
3 -129
10. Configure the following items. 4.11.7 Modem First Call

• CSRC Receive Send the machine ID and telephone number to the
Select [Yes]. CS Remote Care center computer to establish con-
• POP Server Address nection with the center.
Specify the POP server address. You can use
symbols and alphanumeric characters within
63 characters.
• User Name
Enter the user name to login to the POP server.
You can use symbols and alphanumeric char-
acters within 63 characters. 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
• Password Press the [No. Code] key.
Enter the password to login to the POP server. 5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. *1
You can use symbols and alphanumeric char- 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
acters within 16 characters. 7. Press the [Detail setting] key.
• APOP
Select [On] to use the APOP function.
• Port Number
9. "Basic setting screen"

Specify the POP port number within the range
Press the [First Call] key.
from 1 to 65535. Default is [110].
• Connection Time Out Time
10. Confirm that the connection with the center is
properly completed. *2
Specify the POP time out time with in the range
When properly completed, the "CS Remote
from 30 to 300 (sec). Default is [60] seconds.
Care setting screen" appears.
Press the [Next] key to configure the following two *1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that
settings. No. code.
• Auto Check *2 In case an error occurred in the communication
Select [Yes]. with the center, check the displayed code. For
• Auto Check Interval Time details on error codes, see "4.11.14 Error code
Specify the interval between checking new list."
mails within the range from 1 to 60 (minutes).
Default is 15 minutes.
11. Press the [OK] key.
12. "CSRC setting menu screen"
Press the [03 CSRC Communication Test] key.
13. "CSRC Communication Test"
Confirm that the sending and receiving are cor-
rectly performed and go to next step. If the test
failed, re-confirm the settings and perform the
test again following the error message.
3 -130
4.11.8 Receiving the initial connection mail 4.11.9 Setup confirmation

In case E-Mails are used, after settings are done on
the main body, the center needs to send an initial
connection mail to the mail address of the main body, 2. "Service mode menu screen"
thus enabling mail transmission between the center Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
and the main body. 3. "Sub menu screen"
MEMO: 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
• About how to send the initial connection mail, refer Make sure that only selected items for
to the CS Remote Care center's manual. "Modem" or "E-Mail" are displayed.
• Mail transmission are possible only between the
center and the main body that the initial connec-
tion has been established.
• The initial connection mail is sent from the center.
The mail address of the center used then is stored
in the main body.
• To check the center's mail address on the main
body, output "Machine Management List." Proce-
dure: Service mode → 05 List Output → 01 List
Output → Machine Management List. Press the
[COPY] key at upper left of the screen to output
the list from the basic screen.
3 -131
4.11.10 Maintenance call 4.11.11 Center call from manager

As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the
of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identi- manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
fied, managed by a distributor.) to notify the center
1. Enter the utility mode.
the start of maintenance. After the maintenance,
pressing the maintenance completion key notifies the 2. "Utility Menu screen"
center the completion of maintenance. Press the [06 Machine Manager Setting] key.
3. "Machine manager setting menu screen"
<At the start of maintenance> Press the [06 System Connection] key.
Press the [01 User Call] key.
5. "User Call screen"
3. "Sub menu screen" If the setup is not completed, or if other call is
Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key. made, the [Start] key is grayed out, disabling to
4. "CS Remote Care setting screen" make a call.
Press the [No. Code] key.
5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. About how to call the center and send various data of
6. Press the [No. Code] key. the main body on the specified date and time, refer to
the CS Remote Care center's manual.
During the maintenance, the [Start] button blinks until
the completion of the maintenance.
<At the end of maintenance>

Press the [Maintenance comp] key.
3 -132
4.11.12 Confirm communication log 4.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote

You can output and confirm the communication log. Care
Initializing the RAM for CS Remote Care enables you
to perform the setup again.
Press the [05 List Output] key. 1. Enter the service mode.
3. "Sub menu screen" 2. "Service mode menu screen"
Press the [01 List Output] key. Press the [09 CS Remote Care] key.
4. "List output mode menu screen" 3. "Sub menu screen"
Press the [Communication Log List] key. Press the [01 CS Remote Care] key.
5. Press the [COPY] key to output the list from the 4. "CS Remote Care setting screen"
basic screen. Press the [No. Code] key.
5. Enter the No. code with the numeric keys. *1
For details of logs, see "4.7 List output." 6. Press the [No. Code] key.
Press the [04 RAM Clear] key.
9. "RAM Clear setting screen"
10. The confirmation screen appears.
Press the [OK] key.
11. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care
setting screen" appears.
12. Perform the setup again if necessary.
*1 If the No. code is already entered, confirm that

No. code.
3 -133
4.11.14 Error code list
Error code Error Solution

K00_00 Connection NG (Cannot connect from the modem, Redial and wait for re-reception.
timed out).
K00_01 No response (After connection, no start telegram Redial and wait for re-reception.
from the center detected).
K00_02 Copying. Could not be written in non-volatile mem-
ory, and line disconnected.
K00_03 Center ID mismatch. Confirm the center ID.
K00_04 Serial number mismatch. Confirm the serial number.
K00_05 Grammar error (when receiving undefined com- Redial.
mands or parameters).
K00_06 Received a write order for an unwritable item.
K00_07 Unread item error.
K00_08 Signal reception time out after a response detection Redial.
(after the start telegram shuttled).
K00_09 Already registered serial number.

K00_10 Communication error occurred because of the car- Redial.
rier OFF (NO CARRIER detected in the modem).
K00_11 Dialtone (NO DIALTONE) detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_12 Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_13 NO ANSWER detected in the modem. Redial.
K00_14 Telegram error (irregular telegram received in Retry standard times, and redial.
response to the telegram you sent).
K00_15 Serial number not registered in the center (4 x 40
telegrams received).
K00_16 Errors not defined in the above -00 to 15 (last 2 dig- Redial.
its).
K00_17 Telephone number you must call was not registered.
K01_00 DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF.

K01_01 Error on creating a message queue.
K01_02 Error on generating a task.
K01_03 Error on sending a message.
K01_04 Error on receiving a message.
K01_05 Received an error (NG) from the timer task.
K02_01 Modem initialization NG.
K03_00 Center call evacuation buffer is full. Cannot evacuate

any more.
K05_90 Because of memory shortage, unable to secure
enough area for sending a mail.
3 -134
Error code Error Solution

K05_92 Controller in operation: unable to send a mail In the manual transmission, retry
because the controller is in operation. when the controller is idling. In the
auto transmission, an automatic retry
is performed after 1 minute.
K05_93 Mail sending error: an error was returned on sending In the auto transmission, an auto-
a mail. matic retry is performed after the
specified time. Check if there is no
fault in the network environment and
the network settings.
K05_94 Machine in operation: unable to send a mail because In the manual transmission, retry
the machine is in operation. when the machine is idling. In the
auto transmission, an automatic retry
is performed after 1 minute.
K05_95 Controller not connected: unable to send a mail Check the connection between the
because the controller is not connected. controller and the main body.
K05_96 Controller-driven SC: unable to send a mail because In case of the controller-driven SC, a
of a controller-driven SC (49-xx). mail cannot be sent through the con-
troller. Use a telephone. This error do
not occur in the main body NIC.
* The shaded error codes are the ones that may occur when a transmission is made from the main body to
the center.
4.11.15 Troubleshooting
Check the followings when the main body neither receives the initial connection mail nor returns a response.
1) The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2) The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3) CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4) Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check this with a transmission
test).
3 -135
4.12 ISW 9. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"

Enter a value through the numeric keys and
See chapter II "3. FIRMWARE VERSION UP." press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-20 (in front) to +20 (in back)
4.13 Finisher adjustment 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.13.1 Staple Finisher adjustment
can be obtained.
Conduct various settings of the FS.
A. Stapling center position adjustment B. Paper width adjustment

Adjust the center position of the staple while in sta- When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle
pling. of paper, conduct this adjustment.
This adjustment adjusts the position of the alignment
(1) Procedure plate while in alignment.

(1) Procedure
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 1. Enter the service mode.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
screen. Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
Press the [01 Staple Position Adj.] key on the 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
sub menu. screen.
4. "Staple Finisher adjustment mode screen" Press the [01 Staple Position Adj.] key on the
Press the [01 Stapling Center Position Adjust- sub menu.
ment] key. 4. "Staple Finisher adjustment mode screen"
5. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen" Press the [02 Paper Width Adjustment] key.
Press the [COPY] key. 5. "Stapling Paper Width Adj. screen"
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and select the 2 Press the [COPY] key.
staplings. Press the Start button to output the 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
test pattern (No.16). adjust. Press the Start button to output the test
7. Fold the outputted paper in half in the paper pattern (No.16).
feed direction to check the misalignment with
the stapling center position.
• Standard value: a = ± 3mm
[1]
[2]
fs503fs3011c
[1] Paper center [2] Stapling center position

3 -136
7. Check to see if the bundle of papers is mis- 4.13.2 Multi folder (hole-punch) adjustment
aligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the Conduct the FD punch related adjustment.
paper width setting is larger than the paper
width) and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve A. Paper width adjustment
occurs when the paper width setting is smaller When a large mis-alignment is found with the position
than the paper width). of a punch hole, use a corresponding paper size to
• Standard value: a = ± 1.0 mm or less adjust the width of the alignment plate.
(16 sheets or less)
a = ± 1.5 mm or less (1) Procedure
(from 17 to 100 sheets)
a Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
screen.
Press the [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] key on
the sub menu.
b
4. "Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) adj. menu screen"
Press the [01 Paper Width Adjustment] key.
fs503fs3012c
5. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
8. When the value is not within the standard value, 6. Set paper you want to adjust in the tray, the
number of copies is set to 10 and press the
9. "Stapling Paper Width Adj. screen" Start button.
Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
7. Check the diameter of the through-hole when
paper size you want to adjust.
the ejected paper is stacked.
10. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
press the [Set] key. No. of holes Standard value (mm)
• Setting range:-20 (wide) to +20 (narrow) 2 & 4 holes φ 5.0 or larger
1 step = 0.1 mm 3 holes φ 6.5 or larger
can be obtained. 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
9. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
10. Enter the set value through the numeric keys
• Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide)
1 step = 0.1 mm
NOTE
• When the alignment plate is wider than an
appropriate position, the punch centering
is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
can be obtained.
3 -137
B. Hole-punch vertical position adjustment 11. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
Adjust punch holes in the sub scan direction. press the [Set] key.
• Setting range:-40 (wide) to +40 (narrow)
(1) Procedure 1 step = 0.1 mm
1. Enter the service mode. 12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the standard value
can be obtained.
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 13. To configure other punch hole/paper size,
repeat steps 5 to 11.
screen.
Press the [02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.] key on
the sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) adj. menu screen"
Press the [02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position
Adjustment] key.
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
adjust in the tray, and select the number of

punch holes. Press the Start button to output
the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the distance a from the outputted paper
leading edge to the punch holes center posi-
tion.
fs503fs3013c
Holes Standard value a (mm)

2 & 4 holes 10.5 ± 5.0
3 holes 9.5 ± 5.0

9. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
10. Press the punch hole key you want to adjust.
3 -138
4.13.3 Multi folder (Fold) adjustment B. Letter fold-in position adjustment

Conduct the FD folding related adjustment. Adjust the folding position on the letter fold-in printing
mode.
A. Folding position adjustment
Adjust the folding position on the fold printing. NOTE
• When adjusting both the single fold and the
(1) Procedure double fold, be sure to start with the double
fold.
• The position of the single fold is based on the
2. "Service mode menu screen" leading edge of paper and the position of the
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. double fold is based on the position of the
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
screen. 7 varies when either position of the single fold
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the and the double fold is changed.
sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. mode screen" (1) Procedure
Press the [01 Folding Position Adjustment] key.
5. "Folding Position Adjustment screen"
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
adjust in the tray. Press the Start button to out-
screen.
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the
7. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the
sub menu.
outputted paper.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. mode screen"
• Standard value a: ± 1.5 mm
Press the [02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjust-
ment] key.
a
5. "Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment screen"
fs503fs3014c
9. "Folding Position Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm
• In the case of the mis-alignment given in the

step 7, enter a set value on the plus side.
can be obtained.
12. To configure other paper size, repeat steps 5 to
11.
3 -139
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper. C. Letter fold-out position adjustment
Adjust the folding position on the letter fold-out print-
ing mode.
a
[2] NOTE
[1] leading edge of paper and the position of the
b double fold is based on the position of the
single fold. So, the dimension "a" and "b" in
fs503fs3015c
the step 7 varies when either position of the
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold single fold and the double fold is changed.
Paper size Standard value (mm)

(1) Procedure
a b
A3 143.0 ± 2.0 1.5 ± 1.5 1. Enter the service mode.
B4 124.3 ± 2.0 2. "Service mode menu screen"
A4R 102.0 ± 2.0 Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
12 x 18 155.4 ± 2.0 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the

screen.
11 x 17 146.9 ± 2.0
8.5 x 14 121.5 ± 2.0
sub menu.
8.5 x 11R 96.1 ± 2.0
8K 133.0 ± 2.0
Press the [03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment]
key.
5. "Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment screen"
9. "Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment screen"
10. Press the [Double Fold] key.
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
• Standard value a: 3.5 ± 1.5 mm
• Standard value b: 3.5 ± 2.5 mm
• The dimension "a" in the step 7 gets larger a [1]

when the set value is moved to the plus side
and gets smaller when moved to the minus
side. [2] b
12. Press the [Single Fold] key.
fs503fs3016c
press the [Set] key. [1] Single fold [2] Double fold
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets larger 9. "Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment screen"
when the set value is moved to the plus side Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
and gets smaller when moved to the minus paper size you want to adjust.
side. 10. Press the [Single Fold] key.
can be obtained.
3 -140
11. Enter a value through the numeric keys and 5. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
press the [Set] key. Press the [COPY] key.
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm 6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to
• The dimension "a" in the step 7 gets larger put the test pattern (No.16).
when the set value is moved to the plus side 7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
and gets smaller when moved to the minus • Standard value a: 1.5 ± 2.5 mm
side. • Standard value b: 5.5 ± 1.5 mm
13. Enter a value through the numeric keys and b
• Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm [1]
[2]
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets larger
when the set value is moved to the plus side a
and gets smaller when moved to the minus fs503fs3017c
side.
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold
can be obtained.
9. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
D. Double parallel position adjustment Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
Adjust the folding position on the double parallel posi- paper size you want to adjust.
tion. 10. Press the [Single Fold] key.
NOTE
double fold, be sure to start with the double
fold.
• The dimension "a" in the step 7 gets smaller
leading edge of paper and the position of the
and gets larger when moved to the minus side.
double fold is based on the position of the
single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
7 varies when either position of the single fold 13. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
and the double fold is changed. press the [Set] key.
(1) Procedure
• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets smaller
1. Enter the service mode. when the set value is moved to the plus side
2. "Service mode menu screen" and gets larger when moved to the minus side.
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. 14. Repeat steps 5 to 13 until the standard value
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the can be obtained.
screen.
sub menu.
Press the [04 Double Parallel Position Adjust-
ment] key.
3 -141
E. Z-fold position adjustment 7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Adjust the folding position on the Z-fold position.
NOTE b
[2]
double fold, be sure to start with the single
fold. a [1]
fs503fs3018c
double fold is based on the position of the [1] Single fold [2] Double fold
single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step
Paper size Standard value (mm)
7 varies when either position of the single fold
a b
and the double fold is changed.
A3 3.5 ± 1.5 Less than 209.0
(1) Procedure B4 Less than 181.0
A4R Less than 147.5
12 x 18 Less than 227.6
11 x 17 Less than 214.9

8.5 x 14 — Less than 279.4
screen. 8.5 x 11R 3.5 ± 1.5 Less than 138.7
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the 8K Less than 194.0
sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. mode screen" 8. When the value is not within the standard value,
Press the [05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment] key.
5. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen" 9. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
put the test pattern (No.16). 11. Enter a value through the numeric keys and

• The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets smaller

can be obtained.
3 -142
F. Gate position adjustment 9. "Gate Position Adjustment screen"

Adjust the folding position on the gate position. Use the [Next] and [Back] key to select the
NOTE
• When adjusting the single fold, the double
fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the
single fold, the double fold and the triple fold
in this order.
double fold is based on the position of the
single fold. So, the dimension "a" and "b" in
the step 7 varies when either position of the 12. Press the [Double Fold] key.
single fold and the double fold is changed. 13. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
(1) Procedure • Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm
1. Enter the service mode. • The dimension "b" in the step 7 gets larger
2. "Service mode menu screen" when the set value is moved to the plus side
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. and gets smaller when moved to the minus
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the side.
screen. 14. Press the [Triple Fold] key.
Press the [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.] key on the 15. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
sub menu. press the [Set] key.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen" • Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm
Press the [06 Gate Position Adjustment] key.
5. "Gate Position Adjustment screen" • The dimension "c" in the step 7 gets smaller
Press the [COPY] key. when the set value is moved to the plus side
6. Set the paper of the paper size you want to and gets larger when moved to the minus side.
adjust in the tray. Press the Start button to out- 16. Repeat steps 5 to 14 until the standard value
put the test pattern (No.16). can be obtained.
7. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
• Standard value a: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm
• Standard value b: 2.0 ± 1.5 mm
• Standard value c: 0 mm ± 2.0 mm
a [1]
[3]
[2]
b c
fs503fs3019c
[1] Single fold [2] Double fold [3] Triple fold

3 -143
G. Fold regist loop adjustment 4.13.4 Multi folder (PI) adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount at the registration roller This is not used in the field.
section to adjust the folding skew, the wrinkling of
paper or a jam at the registration section.
(1) Procedure

screen.
sub menu.
4. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
Press the [07 Fold Regist Loop Adjustment]
key.
5. "Fold Regist Loop Adjustment screen"

6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start
button to output the test pattern (No. 16).
7. When the trouble recurs, press the [SERVICE]
key.
8. "Fold Regist Loop Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and
1 step = 0.1 mm
value is obtained.
3 -144
4.13.5 Stacker adjustment B. Paper length adjustment

Conduct the LS related adjustments. Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-align-
ment occurs in the sub scan direction of the stacker
A. Paper width adjustment tray.
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-align- This adjusts the position of the leading edge stopper.
ment occurs in the main scan direction of the stacker
tray. (1) Procedure
This adjusts the position of the alignment plate while
in alignment.
(1) Procedure Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key.
1. Enter the service mode. screen.
2. "Service mode menu screen" Press the [05 Stacker Adjustment] key on the
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. sub menu.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the 4. "Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu screen"
screen. Press the [02 Paper Length Adjustment] key.
Press the [05 Stacker Adjustment] key on the 5. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
sub menu. Press the [COPY] key.
4. "Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu screen" 6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start
Press the [01 Paper Width Adjustment] key. button to output the test pattern (No. 16).
5. "Paper Width Adjustment screen" 7. When a paper exit mis-alignment occurs, press
Press the [COPY] key. the [SERVICE] key.
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the start 8. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
button to output the test pattern (No. 16). Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select either
7. When a paper exit mis-alignment occurs, press the stacker 1 or the stacker 2.
the [SERVICE] key. 9. Enter a value through the numeric keys and
8. "Paper Width Adjustment screen" press the [Set] key.
Press the [Next] or [Back] key to select either • Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide)
the stacker 1 or the stacker 2. 1 step: 0.1 mm
9. Enter a value through the numeric keys and 10. Repeat the steps 5 to 9 until an appropriate
press the [Set] key. value is obtained.
• Setting range:-20 (narrow) to +20 (wide)
1 step: 0.1 mm
value is obtained.
3 -145
4.13.6 Recall standard data 4.14 Machine manager setting

Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment
to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Important
• The use of the security strengthen mode in
NOTE
the machine manager setting in the utility
• The stacker adjustments cannot recall.
mode is limited only when the manager
authentication is set to "Authentication On."
A. Procedure

4.14.1 Manager authentication
2. "Service mode menu screen" To strengthen security of the machine manager set-
Press the [11 Finisher Adjustment] key. ting of the utility mode, configure the setting so that a
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the password is required to enter the machine manager
screen. setting.
Press the [07 Recall Standard Data] key on the
sub menu. (1) Procedure
4. "Recall Standard Data (Finisher adj.) screen"
Pressing [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Ini-
tial Data] displays "Standard data is returning." 2. "Service mode menu screen"
When completed, the data returns with "Stan- Press the [12 Machine Manager Setting] key.
dard data has returned" displayed. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
screen.
NOTE Press the [01 Manager Authentication] key.
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the 4. "Manager Authentication Setting screen"
factory initial data. Press the [Authentication On] key and press the
• Selecting [Installation Initial Data] recalls [OK] key to confirm.
the adjustment values stored when code 5. To disable the authentication setting, press the
"90-00" of the I/O check mode was con- [Cancel] key or [Authentication Off] key.
ducted.
3 -146
4.14.2 Machine manager password 4.15 CE Setting

Configure a password to enter the machine manager
setting of the utility mode.
Important
The machine manager password can also be set in
• The use of the security strengthen mode in
the machine manager setting of the utility mode.
the machine manager setting in the utility
mode is limited only when the CE authentica-
NOTE
tion setting is set to "Authentication On."
• The selection of the [Machine Manager Pass-
word] key is limited only when the [Manager
Authentication] is set to "Authentication On." 4.15.1 CE authentication
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others To strengthen security of the service mode, configure
such as your name, birthday. the setting so that a password is required to enter the
service mode.
(1) Procedure
(1) Procedure
2. "Service mode menu screen" 1. Enter the service mode.
Press the [12 Machine Manager Setting] key. 2. "Service mode menu screen"
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the Press the [13 CE Setting] key.
screen. 3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the
Press the [02 Machine Manager Password] key. screen.
4. "Machine Manager Password setting screen" Press the [01 CE Authentication Setting] key.
Enter an 8-digit password with alphanumeric 4. "CE Authentication Setting screen"
keys. Press the [Authentication On] key and press the
Default is "00000000." [OK] key to confirm.
5. Press the [OK] key to register data. 5. To disable the authentication setting, press the
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you [Cancel] key or [Authentication Off] key.
entered.
3 -147
4.15.2 CE password setting 4.16 IP HDD format

Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Format the hard disk /2 (HDD2) on the print controller.
NOTE Formatting enables you to secure space/delete inter-
• The selection of the [CE Password Setting] nal data.
key is limited only when the CE authentica-
tion setting is set to "Authentication On." (1) Procedure
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others
such as your name, birthday.
• CE should not inform other people of the 2. "Service mode menu screen"
password. Press the [14 IP HDD Format] key.
(1) Procedure screen.
Press the [01 IP HDD Format] key on the sub
1. Enter the service mode. menu.
2. "Service mode menu screen" 4. "IP HDD Format screen"
Press the [13 CE Setting] key. HDD format includes the following five items.
3. A sub menu appears on the right side of the [ALL]
screen. [Document]
Press the [02 CE Password Setting] key. [Parameter]
4. "CE Password Setting screen" [Font]
Enter an 8-digit password with alphanumeric [Spool]
keys. 5. Press the item you want to format.
Default is "92729272." 6. "Format confirmation screen"
5. Press the [OK] key to register data. The message "Execute Format Yes/No?"
Press the [Cancel] key to cancel the setting you appears.
entered. Press the [Yes] key.
(2) Purpose of each item

• [ALL]
Formats all areas of the hard disk.
This is equal to performing the following four
operations at once. Conduct this on such occa-
sions as replacing the hard disk /2 (HDD2).
• [Document]
Formats the document storage area. Conduct
this when deleting the Scan to HDD job.
• [Parameter]
Formats the storage area for the controller set-
ting information.
Conduct this when deleting the whole setting
information on the print controller (the network
setting and default settings of each port, etc).
NOTE
• Be sure to output the settings information list
before formatting parameters.
3 -148
• [Font]
Formats the font data storage area.
Conduct this when deleting downloaded exter-
nal font data.
NOTE
• By formatting, all downloaded external fonts
are deleted.
• [Spool]
Formats the spool area.
There is no need to format this area alone.
3 -149
5. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Paper feed section
5.1.1 Tray centering adjustment
This adjustment is made when the mis-centering of paper varies each paper supplied from the trays /1 and /2.
The mis-centering is automatically adjusted in the image processing unit, and this adjustment is made only when
a mis-centering exceeding the range of auto correction (±5 mm) occurs.
1. Disable (data=1) the Software DIPSW12-3 "Printer

[2]
mis-centering correction." (see "4.9.1 Software
DIPSW setting")
2. Perform copying/printing without automatic cor-
rection to check the mis-centering of image.
3. Pull out the paper feed tray.
4. If any paper remaining, remove it.
5. If the paper guide [1] is at the small size position,
stretch the guide.
6. Loosen 2 screws [2].

7. Move the paper guide [1]. According to the mis-
centering you checked in step 2, adjust the center
[1] [1] [3] position using the marking line [3].
8. Tighten 2 screws [2].
9. Insert a paper and set the tray.
10. Make a copy/print and check to see if the mis-
centering is within the standard value (±2 mm).
11. When not up to the standard value, repeat the
steps 3 to 10.
12. Enable (data=0) the Software DIPSW12-3 "Printer
mis-centering correction."
1050fs3028c
3 -150
5.1.2 Separation pressure adjustment

Perform the separation pressure adjustment when the no feed (a paper is conveyed to the paper feed roller sec-
tion but stops there) or the double feed occurs at the paper feed.
NOTE
• Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely in the low temper-
ature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment).
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.

2. Change the position of the spring adjustment
lever [1].
NOTE
• The separation pressure is strengthened
when the lever is moved to the direction [2]
and is weakened when the lever is moved to
the direction [3].
Weak: a double feed jam is improved.
[2] [1] [3] Strong: a no feed jam is improved.
Reference
• The spring load changes 10% as the spring is
moved one step.
3. Set the tray to perform copying/printing. Check

whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or
not.
4. In case either jam occurs, repeat steps 1 to 3.
1050fs3029c
3 -151
5.1.3 Pick-up roller load adjustment

In case a no feed jam occurs frequently, perform the pick-up roller load adjustment.
NOTE
• Conducting the pick-up roller pressure adjustment changes the paper feed pick-up amount. So,
be sure to adjust the paper feed pick-up amount by adjusting the pick-up amount after adjust-
ments. (See "Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment")

[2] [1]
2. In the pick-up roller section [1], put paper feed
assist plate [3] on the paper feed assist plate
holder [2], and fix them with accompanying screw
(M3 x 8 mm) [4].
3. Set the tray.
4. Perform copying/printing to check whether the no
feed or the double feed occurs or not.
NOTE
• The maximum number of the paper feed assist

plates that can be attached is 4 plates.
For the number of plates to be attached, see
[4] [3] [4] chapter V "5. Paper setting."
• The paper feed assist plate is approx. 10g
each.
1050fs3030c
3 -152
5.1.4 Pick-up roller height adjustment

Perform this adjustment when the following situations occurred.
• A no feed jam is not improved by the pick-up roller load adjustment
• A no feed jam in which a thick paper is stuck on the entrance guide (a metallic guide plate near the separa-
tion roller)
• A double feed jam is not improved by the separation pressure adjustment
NOTE
• On performing the pick-up roller height adjustment, the paper feed pick-up amount is changed. Be
sure to confirm the paper feed pick-up amount in the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment. (See
"5.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment")

[2] [3] [1]
3. Loosen a screw [1].
4. With the release lever [2] placed at its original
position, hold the stopper [3] and tighten the
screw [1] to fix the stopper.
1050fs3031c
3 -153
5. Set the tray. Confirm that the paper lift finished its
[1]
elevation to the top by hearing the sound of the
paper lift motor. Pull out the tray again.
6. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed
cover [2].
[2] 1050fs3032c
7. Check whether the actuator [1] of the pick-up

[1] [3] [2]
roller section matches with the center [3] position

of the upper limit sensor /1 (PS6), /2 (PS12) [2].
8. Remove the pick-up roller section [4]. (see chapter
II "1.5.6 A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller
assembly/separation roller assembly")
[4]
1050fs3033c
3 -154
9. Record a mark for the height of the sensor placing

[2] [3] [1] plate.
10. Remove 2 screws [3], and place them temporarily
in the slotted hole on the upper limit sensor plac-
ing plate [1].
11. Adjust the height of the sensor placing plate [1],
and fix it with the screws [3].
NOTE
• Place the upper limit sensor placing plate [1]
horizontally.
[4] [1]
Adjustment standard
• Lifting the upper limit sensor position lowers
the height of the pick-up roller [5]. (The differ-
ence of elevation [7] between the paper feed
roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5] becomes
larger.)
• Lowering the upper limit sensor position lifts
the height of the pick-up roller [5]. (The differ-
ence of elevation [7] between the paper feed
[3] roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5] becomes
[5] [6] smaller.)
• In case a no feed occurred, lower the upper
limit sensor.
• In case a double feed occurred, lift the upper
limit sensor.
[7]
12. Place the pick-up roller section, and replace the
stopper of step 4 to the original position.
NOTE
1050fs3034c
• If you set the tray without placing the pick-up
roller, the paper lift does not stop at the upper
limit, thus damaging the tray. Be sure to place
the roller.
13. Insert a paper, and set the tray.

14. Perform copying/printing to confirm that the no
feed or jam do not occur. In case they are not
improved, repeat steps 7 to 14.
15. Confirm the paper feed pick-up amount. (see
"5.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment")
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After the adjustment, be sure to replace the
stopper of the release lever to the original
position.
3 -155
5.1.5 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment

Perform the paper feed pick-up amount adjustment as you have done the pick-up roller height adjustment.

[2] [3] [1]
1050fs3035c
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper feed
cover [2].
[2] 1050fs3036c
3 -156
7. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] to

[1] [2]
measure the gap "A" between the pick-up roller
[3] and the paper lift plate [4] with the gap gauge.
Standard value A = 0.1 to 1.5 mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 8
and after.
8. Loosen the screw [5].
NOTE
• Before loosening the screw [5], record the
position of the pick-up solenoid [1] with the
marking line [6].
9. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of

[5] [3] [6] [4] the pick-up solenoid [1] so that the standard value
can be obtained for the gap A between the pick-
up roller [3] and the paper lift plate [4].
10. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid
[1].
11. Replace the stopper of step 4 to the original posi-
A
tion.
feed does not occur.
1050fs3037c
steps in reverse.
NOTE
position.
3 -157
5.1.6 Paper lift plate skew adjustment

Perform the paper lift plate skew adjustment after replacing a lift wire or when the paper lift plate is skewed.

[2] [3] [1]
1050fs3038c
[1] [2]
6. Remove 2 screws [2] of the stopper of the rails [1]
on the right and left side. Pull out the tray.
1050fs3039c
3 -158
7. Remove 2 screws (with washers) on the right and

[1]
left side[1] and 2 screws on the upper side [2].
NOTE
• Removing the screws [1] and [2] causes the
tray front cover [3] to fall. Support the cover
not to drop.
8. Remove the connector [4] to remove the tray front

cover [3].
[1]
NOTE
• Be sure to connect the connector as you
place it. Otherwise, all trays in the main body
become unable to be pulled out.
[2]
[3]
[4]
1050fs3040c
3 -159
9. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].

[3] [4]
10. In case the paper guide [2] is open, close it to the
smallest-size position.
11. Remove the screw [3], and place them temporarily
in the slotted screw hole [4].
12. While holding the pulley placing plate being
placed with the screw [5], loosen the screw [5] to
adjust the skewed paper lift plate [7] with the
marking line [6].
13. Confirm that the paper lift plate is horizontal, and
fix the screw [5] and [8].
14. Pull down the pick-up roller [1].
15. Place the tray front cover.
jam occurs, and that papers are properly fed.
steps in reverse.
[5] [7] [1] [6] [8]

NOTE
position.
[2] 1050fs3041c
3 -160
5.2 ADU section

5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller nip pressure adjustment
This adjustment enables you to up/down the pre-transfer roller nip pressure.
Perform this adjustment when a transfer jitter occurred. For more information on how to perform this adjust-
ment, see "6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment."
A. Nip pressure up adjustment procedure

1. Pull out the ADU. (see chapter II "1.5 Maintenance
procedure")
2. Remove the ADU cover /Lt, /Rt. (see chapter II
"1.5 Maintenance procedure")
3. Twist counterclockwise the conveyance roller /T
axis [1] until the axis stopper [2] is locked.
NOTE
• To restore the previous nip pressure, twist
clockwise the conveyance roller /T axis until
the axis stopper is locked.

steps in reverse.
[2] [1] 1050fs3025c
3 -161
B. Nip pressure down adjustment procedure

1. Pull out the ADU. (see chapter II "1.5.8 A. Pulling
[5] [4] [3] [6]
out/reinstallation of the ADU")
2. Remove the ADU cover /Lt, /Rt. (see chapter II
"1.5.8 F. Removing/reinstalling the ADU cover")
3. Remove the registration section. (see chapter II
"1.5.8 G. Removing/reinstalling the registration
section")
4. Twist clockwise the conveyance roller /T axis [1] to
make the nip pressure standard. (see "A. Nip
pressure up adjustment procedure")
5. Remove 2 springs /Fr [2], /Rr [3] from the hook
hole /Up [4], /Lw [5]. (By removing the spring, pre-
transfer roller's own weight becomes the only nip
pressure.)
[1] [7]
NOTE
• To restore the standard nip pressure, place
the spring /Fr [2], /Rr [3].

• Removing/placing the spring with the nip
pressure up tends to stretch the spring. Thus,
remove/place the spring with the standard nip
pressure. If tension of the spring /Fr and /Rr
differs, a transfer misalignment occurs. When
restoring the standard nip pressure, in case
the spring was stretched, do not use it and
replace it with a new one.
• In case the spring /Fr [2], /Rr [3] are not easily
removed from the hook hole /Lw [5], remove it
from the hook hole /Up [4] first. Then, while
holding the spring not to drop, twist counter-
clockwise (nip pressure up) the conveyance
roller /T axis [1] and rotate the cam [6] to
make a gap, thus making it easy to remove
the spring.
• Be careful not to drop the spring. Put a paper
over the ADU section [7] so that the spring
does not fall inside the machine.

[2] [6] [5] 1050fs3058c
3 -162
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
6. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD 6.2.1 The front and back registration (printer)
A. Procedure
6.1 Before using the adjustment 1. Use the service mode to adjust various image
for POD timing in the front side of printer system.
This section describes how to make adjustments to

NOTE
improve image quality (The front and back registra-
• With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in
tion, image density, transfer jitter) and paper feeding
the service mode, there is no adjustment
so as to satisfy the needs of customers (especially
for individual tray. In case you need to
POD customers) who demand even higher quality of
adjust individual tray, select the user mode,
image and feeding than the factory settings.
selecting [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray
Setting]. Then, select [Change] - [Both
6.2 The front and back registra- Sides Adj.] to make adjustment with the
tion Image Shift function.
Align image printing position on the front side and

back side.
Misalignment of image printing position occurs for the
following reasons.
• The image leading edge on the front and back side
are different. Thus, in case leading edge timings
are misaligned, image positions on the front and
back side are misaligned.
• Even the standard size papers are not cut off
according to the standard size.
• A paper that passes the fusing section becomes
smaller because of moisture evaporation of the
paper due to heat. In duplex printing, the front side
passes the fusing section twice and the back side
passes once, thus image on the front side
becomes smaller than the back side.
• The shrinkage ratio in passing the fusing section is
different depending on the paper type, paper
brand, temperature/humidity of a paper storage
location. To adjust misalignment due to these fac-
tors, use the front and back adjustment in the user
mode, selecting [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Regis-
ter Type/Weight]. To adjust misalignment due to
individual difference of each tray, select the tray
you want to adjust in the user mode, selecting
[MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting]. Then,
select [Change] - [Both Sides Adj.] to make an
adjustment.
3 -163
ADJUSTMENT FOR POD bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2. Adjust distortion in the main scan direction on both sides. 3. Adjust the leading edge timing of the back side.
Remove the photo conductor cover and open the Use [Printer Restart Timing Adjust-
intermediate toner hopper. Mark current position of ment<SIDE2>] in the service mode. Use the
the positioning plate [1] as a reference point with cross on the figure A to align the leading edge
something like a pencil. Loosen 2 screws [2] to move timing of the back side to that of the front side.
the positioning plate [1] side to side and move the
shaft [3] that positions the write unit, thus adjusting
the distortion and making the lines in the main scan A
direction parallel on both sides.
When distortion is found as shown in the drawing
below, move the positioning plate to the right.
Reference
• Attaching the long screw M4 to the shaft [3]
makes the adjustments easy.
[3] [2]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3043c
[1] Front [2] Back

4. Align the magnification of the back side to the
front side.
Use [Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>]
and [Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>] to
align magnification of the back side to the front
side.
[1]
[1]
[2]
1050fs3044c
[4]
[1] Front [2] Back
[5]
1050fs3042c
[4] Front [5] Back
3 -164
5. Adjust the centering of the back side. 6.2.2 The front and back registration (scan-
At the user mode, select the tray you want to ner)
adjust from [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] - [Tray A. Procedure
Setting]. Then, select [Change] - [Both Sides
1. Set a test chart on the original glass. Make the
Adj.] to make adjustment. Use the Image Shift
sub scan magnification with [Scanner Drum
function to align the centering of the back side
Clock Adjustment] in the service mode.
on the figure A to the front side.
2. Set a test chart on the original glass. Adjust dis-
tortion with [Scanner (Orig. Glass) warp
NOTE
adj.(Main)] and [Scanner (Orig.Glass) warp adj.
• With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in
(Deputy)] in the service mode.
the service mode, there is no adjustment
for individual tray.
3. Align the leading edge timing of both sides.
Use [Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment] in the
• Since a test pattern cannot be output in the
service mode. Use the cross on the figure A to
user mode, output an image from a PC so
align the leading edge timing of both sides.
you can confirm the image centering or use
[Test Pattern Output Mode] in Service
mode.
A
• The [Tray Setting] you set in step 5 is an
individual adjustment, in which the updated
settings are not applied to the registered
paper type. Thus, to change the registered
paper type, select the paper name key you
want to adjust in [MACHINE] - [Paper Set] -
[Register Type/Weight]. Make the adjust-
ment with the Image Shift function of [Both
Sides Adj.].
[1]
[2] 1050fs3046c
A
[1] Front [2] Back
4. Align the centering of both sides.
Use [Scanner Centering Adjustment] in the ser-
vice mode to align the centering of both sides
on the figure A.
[1]
[2] 1050fs3045c
[1] Front [2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3047c
[1] Front [2] Back
3 -165
5. Adjust the original skew. 6. Perform steps 3 and 4 to adjust the misalign-
Remove the original stopper plate /Rr, and ments of timing and centering caused by the
mark the current position of the adjustment original skew adjustment and the magnification
plate [1] with something like a pencil. Loosen adjustment.
the screw [2] to move the adjustment plate [1]
up and down, thus adjusting the mounting
6.2.3 The front and back registration (ADF)
position of the original stopper plate /Rr.
A. Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Set an adjustment chart on the ADF. Make the
sub scan magnification, leading edge timing
and centering adjustment on the front side with
[Scanner(ADF) drum clock adj.], [ADF restart
timing adj.(SIDE1)] and [ADF centering
adj.(SIDE1)] in the service mode.
2. Set the "adjustment chart" on the ADF. Adjust a
distortion with [Scanner(ADF) warp adj.(Main)]
and [Scanner(ADF) warp adj.(Deputy)] in the
service mode.
3. Align the leading edge timing of both sides.
Use [ADF restart timing adjustment(SIDE2)] in
the service mode. Use the cross on the figure A
to align the leading edge timing of the back
side to the front side.
[1]
[2] 1050fs3049c
[1] Front [2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3048c
[1] Front [2] Back
3 -166
4. Align the centering of both sides. 6. Perform steps 3 and 4 to adjust the misalign-
Use [ADF centering adj.(SIDE2)] in the service ments of timing and centering caused by the
mode to align the centering of the back side on ADF paper skew adjustment.
the figure A to the front side.
6.2.4 The front and back registration by user

(by paper brand)
A
Even when conducting the front and back registration
in 6.2.1 to 6.2.3, adjustments may be required
depending on the type and brand of paper to be
used.
NOTE
• Check to see if the front and back registra-
tions in 6.2.1 to 6.2.3 are completed.
A. Procedure
[1]
[2] 1. From "MACHINE screen" in the user mode,
1050fs3050c
press the [Paper Set] key.
[1] Front [2] Back
5. Adjust the ADF paper skew.
With the ADF paper skew adjustment in the
mechanical adjustment, adjust the skew on the
front and back side.
2. Press the [Register Type/Weight] key.
[1]
[2] 1050fs3051c
[1] Front [2] Back
3 -167
3. Press the name key of paper you want to 6.2.5 The front and back registration by user
change, or press [Next] key to register paper (for fine adjustments)
newly. Even when conducting the adjustments for brand of
paper as described in 6.2.4, an adjustment may be
required depending on the number of tray in which
paper is fed, the storage condition (temperature and
humidity) of paper and the temperature and humidity
in the room, etc.
This adjustment describes the method for fine adjust-
ment of each tray to the front and back adjustment of
the paper brand setting described in 6.2.4.
NOTE
• Check to see if the front and back registra-
tions in 6.2.1 to 6.2.4 are completed.
4. Enter the type of paper, the name of paper, the

weight, the color paper and the punch hole. For 1. From "MACHINE screen" in the user mode,
the type of paper and the weight, see chapter V press the [Paper Set] key.
"5. PAPER SETTING."
2. Press the [Tray Setting] key.

5. Press the [Both Sides Adj.] key, and adjust the
front and back registration.
3 -168
3. Press the tray key you want to adjust, and then 6.3 Image density adjustment
press the [Change] key.
6.3.1 Darken image density
Print industry customers may demand image settings
with dark image density in the shadow area such as
the offset printing.
This section describes how to adjust the shadow
area (max. density) to make its image density darker.
If the adjustment to make image density darker is not
performed properly, toner spillage or image back-
ground occurs. By this procedure, the density can be
adjusted more safely, minimizing occurrences of
these problems. However, perform this adjustment
only when necessary.
Related adjustments are as follows.
4. Press the [Both Sides Adj.] key.
• Utility mode
1) Image density selection
This setting changes the charger voltage and the
developing bias.
• Service mode
1) DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of developer
This setting changes the developing roller rota-
tion and toner density, thus changing the toner
density of developer without changing image
density.
2) DIPSW27-2, 3 image density selection (toner con-
trol patch density)
This setting changes the developing bias for cre-
5. Conduct the front and back registration. ating the toner control patch formed on the drum
to determine toner density, thus changing toner
density of developer to change image density.
A. Procedure
1. With the image density selection of the density

setting in the utility mode, set Darker [+1].
2. In the test pattern output mode, output the test
pattern No.11 to check image density.
3. When image density is insufficient, set the
image density selection "approx. 0.5% up" in
the DIPSW27-2, 3.
6. When adjusting another tray, repeat the steps 3 4. With the DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of
to 5. developer, set "approx. 0.5% down" or
"approx. 1.0% down" to prevent from image
background and toner spillage.
3 -169
5. Output 500 prints of test pattern No.11 in the A. Procedure

test pattern output mode.
1. With the image density selection of the density
setting in the utility mode, set Lighter [-1].
NOTE
2. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
• The settings in steps 3 and 4 change the
output mode to confirm image density.
toner density of developer. Thus, image
density does not change without making
3. When image density is insufficient, repeat steps
1 and 2 until "-5."
prints.
6. Confirm image density. 4. When image density is insufficient, set as
"lighter" in the DIPSW5-2, 3.
7. When image density is insufficient, set the
image density selection "approx. 1.0% up" in
5. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
DIPSW27-2, 3.
8. With DIPSW23-2, 3, 4 toner density of devel- 6. When image density is insufficient, set as "light-
est" in the DIPSW5-2, 3.
oper, set "approx. 1.5% down."
9. Output 500 prints of the test pattern No.11 in 7. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern
the test pattern output mode.
10. Confirm image density.
6.3.2 Lighten image density

Such printing materials as books use lighter letters so
as to reduce readers' eyestrain. Thus, print industry
customers may demand light image settings.
This section describes how to lighten image density
of the shadow section (max. density) without chang-
ing image density of the highlight section.
If the adjustment to make image density lighter is not
performed properly, white spots in the shadow sec-
tion occurs. By this procedure, the density can be
adjusted more safely, minimizing occurrences of
problems. However, perform this adjustment only
when necessary.
Related adjustments are as follows.
• Utility mode
1) Image density selection
This setting changes the charger voltage and the
developing bias.
• Service mode
1) DIPSW5-2, 3 image density selection (laser PWM) for copier
This setting changes the image writing laser
PWM.
3 -170
6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment B. Cause and tendency of occurrence

(1) 250 mm from the trailing edge
Describes how to adjust transfer jitter. 1) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
through the loop roller, the stiffness of the paper
A. Preparation: caused the loop created to try and revert.
Adjustments differ depending on the position at This may be found with paper weight 161 g/m2
which transfer jitter occurs. Thus, locate the position or less. (Because less loop is created for paper
where transfer jitter occurs. Measure with a scale. weight 162 g/m2 or more by paper loop control.)
(1) Procedure (2) 145 mm from the trailing edge

1) When the line speed of the registration roller is
1. Output No.9 of the "test pattern output mode"
faster than that of the drum, paper is pushed out
with A3 paper.
from the registration roller to the drum and a loop
is formed between the registration roller and the
NOTE
drum. Accordingly, the paper conveyance speed
• Check to ensure the test pattern density is
may change when paper passes through the
set to 255.
registration roller.
2. Confirm the position where transfer jitter 2) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
occurrs. through the registration roller, the load decreased
and the transfer paper speed became faster
momentarily.
[1]
Possible with thick papers 200 g/m2 or heavier.
[2]
[5]
1) Fluctuation of load when the paper entered the
fusing roller.
Possible with thick papers 130 g/m2 or heavier
2) When paper gets into the fusing unit, the leading
edge of paper hits against the entrance guide
plate and the paper does not enter smoothly.
Possible with paper weight 80 g/m2 or less.
[3][4] (4) 138 to 103 mm from the trailing edge

1050fs3052c 1) When paper gets into the fusing unit, the leading
edge of paper hits against the entrance guide
[1]: Approx. 250 mm from the trailing edge
plate, and the resulting shock creates a loop
between the drum and the pre-transfer roller. The
stiffness of paper causes the loop created to try
[4]: Approx. 138 to 103 mm from the trailing edge
and revert, thus resulting in transfer jitter of band
[5] Approx. 40 mm from the trailing edge
shape.
Transfer jitter occurs randomly other than the
Possible with paper weight around 160 g/m2 at a
above
low humidity.

NOTE
1) When the trailing edge of the paper passed
• The position where transfer jitter occurs dif-
through the pre-transfer roller, the load
fers depending on the paper type, paper
decreased and the paper speed became faster
weight or paper conveyance behavior.
momentarily.
Possible with thick papers 200 g/m2 or heavier.
3 -171
(6) Random occurrence (3) Approx. 138 mm from the trailing edge
1) Transfer jitter that occurs when the leading edge
1. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer
of paper touches the conveyance section. Main
roller. See "5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller nip pressure
causes are as follows.
adjustment."
• Speed change of the conveyance belt itself
• Speed difference between the registration roller
NOTE
and the conveyance belt
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos-
• Rough paper movement while it passes through
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the
the conveyance belt
trailing edge may occur. In this instance
• Shock because of the paper leading edge touch-
select whichever image is best. (before
ing the conveyance belt
pressure increase or after)
• If transfer jitter occurs at around 140 mm
C. Procedure
from the trailing edge, it may be impossible
(1) Approx. 250 mm from the trailing edge
to determine if the jitter is caused by the
1. With the [Printer Regist Loop Adjustment] in the registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing
service mode, reduce loop amount. unit (138 mm). In this instance cut 20 mm
off the trailing edge of an A3 sheet and
(2) Approx. 145 mm from the trailing edge print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the
position of the jitter changes in relation to
1. Adjust the registration line speed. (See "4.3.2
the leading edge the cause can be deter-
Magnification adjustment.")
mined to be the registration roller.
2. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer
2. Remove 2 screws [2] to remove 2 suction cov-
roller. See chapter III "5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller
ers [1] at the lower side of the conveyance belt
nip pressure adjustment."
on both sides of the conveyance section so as
to improve the conveyance suction ability.
NOTE
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos-
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the [2] [1]
select whichever image is best. (before
registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing
unit (138 mm). In this instance cut 20 mm
print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the
mined to be the registration roller. [2] [1] 1050fs3053c
NOTE
• If the transfer suction ability is increased it
is possible that transfer jitter may occur
145 mm from the trailing edge. Select
whichever image is best. (before adjust-
ment or after)
3 -172
3. Reverse the paper set direction in the tray. Set (5) Approx. 40 mm from the trailing edge
paper so that the curling direction of paper
1. Remove 2 pressure screws of the pre-transfer
becomes concave on the conveyance section.
roller.
When the curling is convex, the leading edge of
(See chapter III "5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller nip
paper hits against the entrance guide plate and
pressure adjustment")
this may be apt to cause a transfer jitter.
(4) Approx. 138 to 103 mm from the trailing (6) Random occurrence
edge
1. Remove the 2 suction covers provided under
1. Strengthen the nip pressure of the pre-transfer the conveyance belts on both sides of the con-
roller. See chapter III "5.2.1 Pre-transfer roller veyance section.
nip pressure adjustment."
NOTE
NOTE • If the transfer jitter is due to the speed dif-
• If the nip pressure is strengthened it is pos- ference between the registration roller and
sible that transfer jitter 40 mm from the the conveyance belt, the transfer jitter
occurs more easily. Select whichever
select whichever image is best. (before image is best. (before adjustment or after)
registration roller (145 mm) or by the fusing
unit (138 mm). In this instance cut 20 mm
print a test pattern to the cut paper. If the
mined to be the registration roller.
2. Remove the 2 suction covers provided under
the conveyance belts on both sides of the con-
veyance section.
NOTE
• If the transfer suction ability is increased it
is possible that transfer jitter may occur
145 mm from the trailing edge. Select
whichever image is best. (before adjust-
ment or after)
3. Reverse the paper set direction in the tray. Set
paper so that the curling direction of paper
become concave on the conveyance section.
When the curling is convex, the leading edge of
paper hits against the entrance guide plate and
this may be apt to cause a transfer jitter.
3 -173
6.5 Overlay printing adjustment A. Preparation

1. Make the following settings with the tray /4 in the
Overlay printing is to re-print the company name, the user mode.
address, the logo, etc. on offset printed paper. • Set paper on which overlay printing has been
When overlay printing on non-coated paper such as made.
high-quality paper and paper for printing books, the • Set the type of paper to [Coated B].
regular adjustment method can be used. However, • Set the air assist setting to [On].
when overlay printing on coated paper, the following
adjustments are required. 2. Make the following settings in the service mode.
• Set software DIPSW26-4 to 1. (Sets tray /4 forced
Reference: separation clutch control to the operation at all
• The surface of coated paper is applied with a coat- times.)
ing agent and so it takes more time for the ink of
offset printing to dry. Therefore, to prevent block- 3. Install the cleaning brush.
ing (back transfer), the entire surface of paper is (See chapter II "4.5.3 B Cleaning brush.")
applied with powder.
The powder drastically reduces the conveyance 4. Install the paper feed assist plate.
forces of the pick-up roller and the paper feed (See chapter III "1.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pres-
roller, and this may be apt to cause a no feed jam sure" in the Field Service for the PF-701.)
or a double feed jam.
NOTE
NOTE • The number of paper feed assist plates varies
• Before overlay printing, be sure to take note according to the paper weight.
of following. 130 g/m2 or less → None
a) Apply as little powder as possible when 131 g/m2 or more → 4 pcs.
offset printing.
b) Get paper loosened sufficiently before
setting it in the tray /4.
c) Adjust paper condition with the same
environments (temperature and humidity)
as those for the main body. When left in a
high humidity environment, paper strongly
adhere to each other making them unable
to feed.
• With powder accumulating in the cleaning
brush, no feed condition is apt to occur. Be
sure to clean the cleaning brush once every
2,000 prints.
3 -174
B. Air assist adjustment 4. Check the measurement "a" between the cen-
Check to see if the height of the air supply opening of ter position [1] (The center is 4.5 mm from the
the paper feed assist fan and the upper surface of upper edge [2].) of the air supply openings of
paper are appropriate. Otherwise air assist is not con- the paper feed assist fan /Fr and /Rr and the
ducted properly and this may result in a jam occur- upper surface of paper [3].
rence. • Standard value a: within 4.5 ± 2.5 mm
(1) Procedure When the value is not within the standard, con-
duct step 7 and succeeding steps.
1. Pull out tray /4 and set about 10 sheets of
coated paper that have been printed.
2. Push in the release lever [1], insert the screw [2]
into the hole [3] to fix the release lever, and then
set the tray /4.
[2]
[1] [2]
[3]
[3]
[1] 1050fs3059c
1050fs3067c 5. Release the release lever that was fixed at step

2 and bring down the paper lift plate.
3. After stop sound of the paper lift motor opera-
6. Pull out tray /4 and load it fully with coated
tion (when the paper lift plate gets to the upper
paper that has been printed, and perform steps
limit position), pull out tray /4 again.
2 to 5.
7. Conduct the following adjustments according
to the curling condition of paper.
1) When there is no paper curling with no paper

slant.
Conduct "Pick-up roller height adjustment."
(See chapter III "1.2 Adjusting the pick-up roller
height" in the Field service for the PF-701.)
3 -175
2) If there is slant found due to paper curling: 3) When there is a convex curling found with
paper:
1050fs3060c
Place a pad [1] at the center under the paper 1050fs3062c

that has sufficient thickness to adjust the slant

of the upper surface of paper. Place pads [1] under both sides of paper that
have sufficient size and thickness to adjust the
NOTE convex curling.
• To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
when the remaining paper gets low, place NOTE
the pad to the right side of the air supply • To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
opening position [2], hitting it against the when the remaining paper gets low, place
paper rear guide plate [3]. the pad to the right side of the air supply
It is normally possible to adjust curling by opening position [2], placing it up to the
placing a pad of 3 to 5 mm in thickness. paper rear guide plate [3].
It is normally possible to adjust curling by
[2] [1] [3] placing pads of 3 to 5 mm in thickness.
[2] [1] [3]
1050fs3061c
1050fs3063c
3 -176
4) When there is a concave curling found with 8. After adjustment, repeat step 1 to step 6 to
paper: check again the paper height at the air supply
opening section.
9. Remove the PF right cover.
(See chapter II "2.2.1 A. Removal/reinstallation of the
right cover" in the Field service for the PF-701.)
10. Select the code 42-21 of the service mode - I/
O check and press the Start button to operate
the paper feed assist fan.
11. After checking the paper separation condition
[1] from the right side of the PF, press the Stop
button to complete the I/O check.
12. Conduct the respective operations depending
on the condition of separation.
a. Air is blown upon more than 10 sheets of
paper and separate a sheet each.
1050fs3064c
b. Paper separation is not made for one sheet each, but 10
or more sheets of paper are being floated by air.
Place a pad [1] at the center of under paper c. The number of sheets of paper that are being
that has sufficient size and thickness enough to floated by air is less than 4 or 5.
adjust the concave curling. d. No paper is floated
NOTE
• To prevent air from blowing upon the pad
when the remaining paper gets low, place
the pad to the right side of the air supply
opening position [2], hitting it against the [1]
paper rear guide plate [3].
In the case of a concave curling, it is nor-
mally possible to adjust curling by placing a
pad of 3 to 5 mm in thickness at the center
position 40 mm away from the front and
rear paper guides.
[2] [1] [3]
1050fs3066c
In the cases of "a" and "b," conduct step 12

and succeeding steps.
1050fs3065c In the cases of "c" and "d," repeat step 1 to
step 11.
3 -177
13. Conduct a test print to check to see if a jam C. Paper feed pressure adjustment
occurs. Despite the paper separation being made correctly by
When a jam occurs, conduct "C. Paper feed air from the paper feed assist fan, when a paper jam
pressure adjustment." occurs, conduct the following adjustments.

(1) Procedure
steps in reverse.
1. Conduct the respective operations depending
NOTE on the condition of jam.
• Be sure to release the release lever that
has been fixed at the step 2. • J14-01 (Paper is not conveyed to the separa-
tion roller due to slipping of pick-up roller.)
Add paper feed assist plates to raise pressure
on the pick-up roller. (See chapter III "1.3
Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure" in PF-701
Field Service.)
NOTE
• 4 sheets of paper feed assist plate are nor-

mally used. However, when a no feed con-
dition recurs, it is possible to use up to 8
sheets.
• J14-01 with thick paper (Paper is not conveyed

to the separation roller due to paper being
unable to get over the entrance guide plate.)
Up the pick-up roller height. (Down the sensor
position. 2 mm as a tentative)
height" in PF-701 Field Service.)
• J14-01 (Jam with a crushed leading edge of

paper)
Increase the separation pressure.
(See chapter III "1.4 Adjusting the separation
pressure" in PF-701 Field Service.)
• J14-02 (No feed occurs before the pre-registra-

tion roller.)
Increase the separation pressure.
(See chapter III "1.4 Adjusting the separation
pressure" in PF-701 Field Service.)
• J17-02 (Double feed)

Down the pick-up roller height. (Up the sensor
position. 2 mm as a tentative)
height" in the Field Service for the PF-701.)
3 -178
6.6 User setting of each paper

brand
For the user setting method for paper which is com-
monly used in the POD market, see chapter V "5.
PAPER SETTING," by paper brand.
This document shows the optimum set values for
paper brands tested by KMBT.
However, it does not assure the same image quality
and paper feed ability as the paper specified by
KMBT. Only the basic performance under usual envi-
ronment (temperature and humidity) has been tested
and confirmed.
Information on other brand of paper will be also pro-
vided when the test is finished, by updating the docu-
ment.
3 -179
Blank page
3 -180
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 JAM CODE
IV TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM CODE
1.1 Jam code list
Classifi- Jam Cause Resulting Correction
cation code operation
Tray 1 J11-01 The paper feed sensor /1 (PS7) does If there is a sheet Pull out tray /1 and
During operation
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3) printed when a any.
turns ON. jam occurs, the
J11-02 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17) main body com- Open tray /1 and the
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper main body vertical con-
period of time after the pick-up solenoid exit before stop- veyance door, and
/1 (SD3) turns ON. ping operations. remove jammed paper if
J11-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 any.
(PS19) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the pre-registra-
tion sensor /1 (PS17) turns ON.
J11-04 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- After completion
ing through the vertical conveyance of the exit of the
sensor /1 (PS19), the pre-registration preceding paper,
sensor /1 (PS17) is turned ON by the the main body
succeeding paper. stops operations.
IV Troubleshooting
J11-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 — Open the main body ver-
When idling
(PS19) turns ON while in idling. tical conveyance door

and remove jammed
paper if any.
J11-06 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17) Pull out tray /1 and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
During operation
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the pick-up solenoid /2 (SD4) printed when a any.
turns ON. jam occurs, the
J12-02 The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS18) main body com- Open tray /2 and the
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper main body vertical con-
period of time after the pick-up solenoid exit before stop- veyance door, and
/2 (SD4) turns ON. ping operations. remove jammed paper if
J12-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 any.
4 -1
JAM CODE bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0

Tray 2 J12-04 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- After completion Open tray /2 and the
During operation
ing through the vertical conveyance of the exit of the main body vertical con-
sensor /3 (PS21), the pre-registration preceding paper, veyance door, and
sensor /2 (PS18) is turned ON by the the main body remove jammed paper if
succeeding paper. stops operations. any.
J12-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 — Open the main body ver-
When idling
(PS21) turns ON while in idling. tical conveyance door

and remove jammed
paper if any.
any.
During operation
(PF) not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being remove jammed paper if
time after the pick-up solenoid /1 printed when a any.
(SD14) turns ON. jam occurs, the
J13-02 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS89) main body com- Open tray /3, the PF
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the verti-
period of time after the pick-up solenoid exit before stop- cal conveyance door /
/1 (SD14) turns ON. ping operations. Up, and remove jammed
J13-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 paper if any.
IV Troubleshooting

J13-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 — Open the PF front door
When idling
(PS90) turns ON while in idling. and the vertical convey-

ance door /Up and
remove jammed paper if
any.
any.
4 -2

During operation
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the hori-
period of time after the pick-up solenoid exit before stop- zontal conveyance jam
/2 (SD15) turns ON. ping operations. release lever and remove
J14-03 When the trailing edge of paper is pass- jammed paper if any.
ing through the loop sensor /2 (PS94),
the pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) is
turned ON by the succeeding paper.
J14-04 The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) — Pull out tray /4 and
When idling

any.
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper front door and the verti-
period of time after the pick-up solenoid exit before stop- cal conveyance door /
/3 (SD16) turns ON. ping operations. Lw, and remove jammed
IV Troubleshooting
J15-03 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 paper if any.
J15-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 — Open the PF front door
When idling
(PS96) turns ON while in idling. and the vertical convey-

ance door /Lw and
any.
any.
4 -3

Paper feed J17-01 The registration sensor (PS40) does not If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
convey- turn ON within a specified period of of paper being front doors /R and /L,
ance (com- time after the ADU deceleration sensor printed when a pull out the ADU section
mon to (PS42) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
each tray) J17-02 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) main body com- paper if any.
does not turn ON within a specified pletes the paper
period of time after the loop sensor exit before stop-
(PS16) turns ON. ping operations.
Paper J17-03 The loop sensor (PS16) does not turn After completion Open the main body ver-
feed con- ON within a specified period of time of the exit of the tical conveyance door
veyance after the vertical conveyance sensor /1 preceding paper, and remove jammed
(trays 1/ (PS19) turns ON. the main body paper if any.
and /2) stops operations.
Paper J17-04 The vertical conveyance sensor /2
feed (PS20) does not turn ON within a speci-
convey- fied period of time after the vertical con-
ance veyance sensor /3 (PS21) turns ON.
(tray /2) J17-05 The vertical conveyance sensor /1
fied period of time after the vertical con-
veyance sensor /2 (PS20) turns ON.
Paper J17-06 The loop sensor (PS16) does not turn Open the PF front door
feed ON within a specified period of time and the horizontal con-
convey- after the PF exit sensor (PS99) turns veyance jam release
IV Troubleshooting
ance (PF) ON. lever, and remove

jammed paper if any.
Paper J17-07 The paper leading edge sensor (PS41) — Open the main body
When idling
feed turns ON while in idling. front doors /R and /L,

convey- J17-08 The registration sensor (PS40) turns ON pull out the ADU section
ance while in idling. and remove jammed
J17-09 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) paper if any.
turns ON while in idling.
J17-10 The loop sensor (PS16) turns ON while
in idling.
J17-11 The vertical conveyance sensor /2
(PS20) turns ON while in idling.
J17-12 The multi feed detection boards /1 and If there is a sheet
During operation
/2 detect a double feed. of paper being

printed when a
jam occurs, the
main body com-
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
4 -4

Paper J18-01 The intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) If there is a sheet Open the PF front door
During operation
feed does not turn ON within a specified of paper being and the PF vertical con-
convey- period of time after the vertical convey- printed when a veyance door /Up, and
ance (PF) ance sensor /1 (PS90) turns ON. jam occurs, the remove jammed paper if
J18-02 The loop sensor /1 (PS92) does not main body com- any.
turn ON within a specified period of pletes the paper
time after the intermediate sensor /Up exit before stop-
J18-03 The loop sensor /2 (PS94) does not Open the PF front door
turn ON within a specified period of and the horizontal con-
time after the pre-registration sensor /2 veyance jam release
(PS93) turns ON. lever, and remove
J18-04 The intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97) Open the PF front door
does not turn ON within a specified and the PF vertical con-
period of time after the vertical convey- veyance door /Lw, and
ance sensor /3 (PS96) turns ON. remove jammed paper if
J18-05 The loop sensor /3 (PS98) does not any.
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the intermediate sensor /Lw
(PS97) turns ON.
J18-06 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door,
ON within a specified period of time the PF vertical convey-
after the loop sensor /1 (PS92) turns ance door /Up and the
IV Troubleshooting
ON. horizontal conveyance
jam release lever, and
any.
J18-07 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door
ON within a specified period of time and the PF horizontal
after the loop sensor /2 (PS94) turns conveyance jam release
ON. lever, and remove
J18-08 The PF exit sensor (PS99) does not turn Open the PF front door,
ON within a specified period of time the PF vertical convey-
after the loop sensor /3 (PS98) turns ance door /Lw and the
ON. horizontal conveyance
jam release lever, and
any.
J18-09 The intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) — Open the PF front door
When idling
turns ON while in idling. and the PF vertical con-

J18-10 The loop sensor /1 (PS92) turns ON veyance door /Up, and
while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
4 -5

Paper J18-11 The loop sensor /2 (PS94) turns ON — Open the PF front door
When idling
feed while in idling. and the horizontal con-
convey- veyance jam release
ance (PF) lever, and remove
J18-12 The intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97) Open the PF front door
turns ON while in idling. and the PF vertical con-
J18-13 The loop sensor /3 (PS98) turns ON veyance door /Lw, and
while in idling. remove jammed paper if
any.
J18-14 The PF exit sensor (PS99) turns ON Open the PF front door
while in idling. and the horizontal con-
veyance jam release
lever, and remove
Convey- J19-01 The main body vertical conveyance The main body Close the vertical con-
During operation
ance door is opened while in printing. stops immedi- veyance door.

ately.
PF J19-02 The PF front door is opened while in The main body/ Close the PF front door.
printing. PF stops immedi-
ately.
Fusing/ J21-01 While in the print sequence, the maxi- If there is a sheet Open the main body
paper mum density sensor detects paper at of paper being front doors /R and /L,
exit the specified timing. printed when a pull out the ADU section
IV Troubleshooting
jam occurs, the and remove jammed

main body com- paper if any.
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J21-02 While in idling, the maximum density —
When idling
sensor detects paper at the specified

timing.
J31-01 The paper leading edge sensor (PS41) If there is a sheet

During operation
does not turn ON within a specified of paper being

period of time after the registration printed when a
motor (M17) turns no. jam occurs, the
J31-02 The fusing exit sensor (PS22) does not main body com-
time after the paper leading edge sen- exit before stop-
sor (PS41) turns ON. ping operations.
J32-01 The paper exit sensor (PS3) does not
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS22)
turns ON.
4 -6

Fusing/ J32-02 The ADU acceleration sensor (PS49) If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
paper does not turn ON within a specified of paper being front doors /R and /L,
exit period of time after the fusing exit sen- printed when a pull out the ADU section
sor (PS22) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
J32-03 The reverse sensor /1 (PS48) does not main body com- paper if any.
time after the ADU acceleration sensor exit before stop-
J32-04 The PS46 does not turn ON again
within a specified period of time after
the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) turns ON.
time after the reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
turns ON.
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS3 turns ON.
J32-07 The paper exit sensor (PS3) turns ON —
When idling
while in idling.
J32-08 The ADU acceleration sensor (PS49)
J32-09 The fusing exit sensor (PS22) turns ON
while in idling.
IV Troubleshooting
J32-10 The reverse/exit sensor (PS50) turns
ON while in idling.
J32-11 The fusing jam sensor (PS23) turns ON
while in idling.
J32-12 The reverse sensor /1 (PS48) turns ON
while in idling.
J32-13 The reverse sensor /2 (PS47) turns ON
while in idling.
DF J61-1 The RADF open/close sensor (PS301) The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
turns OFF while in operation. immediately. If cover and remove

J61-2 The cover open/close switch (MS301) there is paper jammed paper if any.
turns OFF while in operation. being transferred
J62-1 The original registration sensor /Rt or having been
(PS306) does not turn OFF within a transferred, the
specified period of time after the pre- main body com-
feed start. pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
4 -7

DF J62-2 The original conveyance sensor The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
(PS308) does not turn ON within a immediately. If cover and remove
specified period of time after the pre- there is paper jammed paper if any.
feed start of the front side of the double being transferred
sided original (including the single sided or having been
original). transferred, the
J62-3 The original conveyance sensor main body com-
(PS308) does not turn ON within a pletes the paper
specified period of time after the pre- exit before stop-
feed start of the back side of the double ping operations.
sided original.
J62-4 While in the forward rotation of the orig-
inal conveyance motor (M301), the orig-
inal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J62-5 While in the reverse rotation of the origi-
nal conveyance motor (M301), the origi-
nal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
J62-6 When entering a large size double sided
original in the reverse section, the origi-
nal reverse sensor (PS309) does not
IV Troubleshooting

time after the original conveyance sen-
sor (PS308) turns ON.
J62-7 When exiting a large size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
(PS307) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the original
conveyance sensor (PS308) turns ON.
J62-8 When exiting a large size double sided
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON.
J62-9 When exiting a large size single sided
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns
ON.
4 -8

DF J62-10 When exiting a large size double sided The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
original, the original exit sensor /Lt immediately. If cover and remove
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a there is paper jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after it turns being transferred
ON. or having been
transferred, the
J63-1 When outputting a large size double
main body com-
sided original from the reverse section,
pletes the paper
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
exit before stop-
does not turn ON.
ping operations.
J63-2 When entering a large size double sided
original into the reverse section, the
original reverse sensor (PS309) does
J63-3 When outputting a large size double
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
J63-4 When exiting a small size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Rt
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON.
IV Troubleshooting
J63-5 When exiting a small size double sided
reverse/exit sensor (PS313) turns ON.
J63-6 When exiting a small size single sided
ON.
J63-7 When exiting a small size double sided
ON.
J63-8 When entering a small size double
sided original into the reverse section,
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after original conveyance
sensor (PS308) turns ON.
4 -9

DF J63-9 When outputting a small size double The DF stops Open the DF open/close
During operation
sided original from the reverse section, immediately. If cover and remove
the original reverse sensor (PS309) there is paper jammed paper if any.
does not turn ON within a specified being transferred
period of time after original conveyance or having been
sensor (PS308) turns ON. transferred, the
J63-10 When entering a small size double main body com-
sided original into the reverse section, pletes the paper
the original reverse sensor (PS309) exit before stop-
does not turn OFF within a specified ping operations.
J63-11 When outputting a small size double
J65-1 The original registration sensor /Rt
J65-2 The original conveyance sensor
J65-4 The original reverse sensor (PS309)
J65-8 The original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
IV Troubleshooting
J65-10 The original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)

J65-20 The original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
J65-40 The reverse jam sensor (PS304) turns
ON while in idling.
J65-80 The original registration sensor /Lt
FD J72-01 The FD entrance sensor (PS1) does not The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
turn ON within a specified period of main body stop any from the FD/main
time after the main body paper exit sen- immediately. body.
sor (PS3) turns ON.
J72-02 The intermediate conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the FD entrance
J72-03 The main tray exit sensor (PS18) does
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the intermediate conveyance
4 -10

FD J72-04 The main tray exit sensor (PS18) does The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
not turn OFF within a specified period of main body stop any from the FD/main
time after it turns ON. immediately. body.
J72-05 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS16)
period of time after the intermediate
J72-09 The punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
period of time after the FD entrance
J72-10 The 3rd folding conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the punch con-
veyance sensor (PS5) turns ON.
J72-11 The punch registration sensor (PS6)
period of time after the punch convey-
ance sensor (PS5) turns ON.
J72-12 The 1st folding conveyance sensor
IV Troubleshooting
fied period of time after the punch regis-
tration sensor (PS6) turns ON.
J72-13 The 3rd folding conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the 1st folding
J72-14 The intermediate conveyance sensor
fied period of time after the 3rd folding
FS J72-16 The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) does The FS and the Remove jammed paper,
not turn ON within a specified period of main body stop if any, from the FS/main
time after the main body paper exit sen- immediately. body.
sor (PS3) turns ON.
J72-17 The main tray exit sensor (PS10) does
time after the stacker entrance sensor
(PS5) turns OFF.
4 -11

FS J72-18 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) The FS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified main body stop if any, from the FS/main
period of time after the FNS entrance immediately. body.
J72-19 While in stapling, the stacker entrance
sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the
stacker entrance motor (M13) turns
ON. While in any other operations than
stapling, the PS5 does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.
J72-20 While in stapling a small size paper, the
main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not
time after the paper exit arm motor
(M23) turns ON.
J72-21 While in stapling a large size paper, the
main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the paper exit arm motor
(M23) turns ON.
J72-22 While in exiting paper in the sub tray,
the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
IV Troubleshooting

period of time after the FNS entrance
J72-23 While in exiting paper in the sub tray,
the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
period of time after the PS1 turns ON.
J72-28 While in the straight/shift of the small
size paper, the main tray paper exit sen-
sor (PS10) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS10
turns ON.
J72-30 While in stapling a small size paper, the
main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) does
time after the PS10 turns ON.
J72-39 The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while The copier stops Close the front door.
in the copy/print. immediately.
4 -12

FD J72-40 While in the folding operation, the 2nd The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
folding conveyance sensor (PS53) does main body stop any from the FD/main
not turn ON within a specified period of immediately. body.
time after the 1st folding motor (M4)
starts to accelerate.
J72-41 While in the folding operation, the 3rd
folding conveyance sensor (PS54) does
time after the 1st folding motor (M4)
time after the 2nd folding motor (M5)
J72-43 While in the folding operation, the inter-
mediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
period of time after the 3rd folding
motor (M6) starts to accelerate.
time after the 2nd folding conveyance
IV Troubleshooting
J72-45 While in the folding operation, the inter-
mediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
period of time after the 3rd folding con-
veyance sensor (PS54) turns ON.
J72-46 The PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31)
period of time after the PI pick-up sole-
noid /Up (SD13) turns ON.
J72-47 The PI exit sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time
after the PI conveyance sensor /Up
(PS31) turns ON.
J72-48 The PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37)
period of time after the PI pick-up sole-
noid /Lw (SD14) turns ON.
J72-49 The PI exit sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time
after the PI conveyance sensor /Lw
(PS37) turns ON.
4 -13

FD J72-50 The FD entrance sensor (PS1) does not The FD and the Remove jammed paper if
During operation
turn ON within a specified period of main body stop any from the FD/main
time after the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns immediately. body.
ON.
J72-58 The PI multi feed is detected.
J72-59 The door switch (MS1) turns OFF.
FS J73-01 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) — Open the FS front door
When idling
turns ON while in idling. and the jam release lever,

J73-02 The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) turns and remove jammed
ON while in idling. paper, if any.
J73-03 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS10)
turns ON while in idling. Or, the stack
empty sensor (PS20) turns ON while
turning ON the power source.
FD J73-05 Either of the FD entrance sensor (PS1), Open the FD front door,
the punch conveyance sensor (PS5) open then the entrance
and the punch registration sensor (PS6) conveyance jam release
turns ON while in idling. levers /1 and /2 and the
punch conveyance jam
release levers /1 and /2,
and then remove
jammed paper, if any.
IV Troubleshooting
J73-06 Either of the intermediate conveyance Open the FD front door

sensor (PS13), the sub tray paper exit and the intermediate
sensor (PS16) and the main tray paper conveyance jam lever,
exit sensor (PS18) turns ON while in and remove the jammed
idling. paper, if any.
J73-07 Either of the 1st folding conveyance Open the FD front door,
sensor (PS51), the 2nd folding convey- pull out the folding con-
ance sensor (PS53), the 3rd folding veyance section, open
conveyance sensor (PS54), the S size the folding conveyance
conveyance sensor (PS58), the folding jam release levers /1 to /
entrance sensor (PS52) and the folding 5, and remove jammed
exit sensor (PS2) turns ON while in paper, if any.
idling.
J73-08 Either of the PI conveyance sensor /Up Open the FD upper door
(PS31), the PI conveyance sensor /Lw and remove jammed
(PS37) and the PI exit sensor (PS4) paper, if any. When
turns ON while in idling. jammed paper gets in
the PI exit, open the
entrance conveyance
jam release lever /1 and
remove the jammed
paper.
4 -14

LS J73-17 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- — Open the tandem (1st)
When idling
dem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
entrance conveyance
jam release lever and
remove jammed paper, if
any.
J73-18 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the Open the tandem (1st)
tandem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS sub tray cover, and
any.
J73-19 Either of the conveyance sensors /1, /2 Open the tandem (1st)
and /3 (PS7, 16 and 17) of the tandem LS JAM door, and
(1st) LS turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
any.
J73-20 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the Open the tandem (1st)
tandem (1st) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
the coupling exit jam
release lever, and
any.
J73-21 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- Open the tandem (2nd)
dem (2nd) LS turns ON while in idling. LS front door, open then
entrance conveyance
jam release lever and
IV Troubleshooting
any.
J73-22 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Open the tandem (2nd)
of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON while LS sub tray cover, and
in idling. remove jammed paper, if
any.
J73-23 Either of the conveyance sensors /1, /2 Open the tandem (2nd)
and /3 (PS7, 16 and 17) of the tandem LS JAM door, and
(2nd) LS turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if
However, in the case of LS-502, only any.
the conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) is
applicable.
J73-24 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the Open the tandem (2nd)
tandem (2nd) LS turns ON while in LS front door, open then
idling. the coupling exit jam
However, in the case of LS-501 only. release lever and remove
jammed paper, if any.
4 -15

LS J74-01 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan- The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
dem (1st) LS does not turn ON within a main body stop if any, from the LS/main
specified period of time after the main immediately. body.
body paper exit sensor (PS3) turns ON.
J74-02 The entrance sensor (PS4) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns ON.
J74-03 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) does
time after the entrance sensor (PS4) of
the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-04 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
J74-05 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) does
the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-06 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) of the
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
IV Troubleshooting

time after the conveyance sensor /1
(PS7) of the tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
J74-08 The conveyance sensor /2 (PS16) of
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
J74-11 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) does
4 -16

LS J74-12 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF main body stop if any, from the LS/main
within a specified period of time after it immediately. body.
turns ON.
J74-19 The LS front door open jam. While in
any other modes than the tandem
mode, the front door switch (MS1) of
the tandem (1st) LS turns OFF while in
the print/print.
dem (2nd) LS does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the cou-
pling exit sensor (PS18) of the tandem
(1st) LS turns ON.
dem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns ON.
J74-33 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) does
the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
J74-34 The sub tray exit sensor (PS10) of the
tandem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF
IV Troubleshooting
turns ON.
the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
J74-36 The conveyance sensor /1 (PS7) of the
turns ON.
(PS7) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.
the tandem (2nd) LS does not turn OFF
turns ON.
(PS16) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns
ON.
4 -17

LS J74-40 The conveyance sensor /3 (PS17) of The LS and the Remove jammed paper,
During operation
the tandem (1st) LS does not turn OFF main body stop if any, from the LS/main
within a specified period of time after it immediately. body.
turns ON.
J74-41 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) does
(PS17) of the tandem (2nd) LS turns
ON.
J74-42 The coupling exit sensor (PS18) of the
turns ON.
J74-49 The LS front door open jam. While in
any other modes other than the tandem
mode, the front door switch (MS1) of
the tandem (2nd) LS turns OFF while in
the print/print.
ADU J92-01 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) does If there is a sheet Open the main body
not turn ON within a specified period of of paper being front doors /R and /L,
time after the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) printed when a pull out the ADU section
turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
J92-02 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) does main body com- paper if any.
not turn ON again within a specified pletes the paper
IV Troubleshooting
period of time after the PS46 turns ON. exit before stop-
ping operations.
J92-03 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) —
When idling

J92-04 The ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)
J93-01 The ADU exit sensor (PS43) does not If there is a sheet
During operation
turn ON within a specified period of of paper being

time after the ADU reverse sensor /1 printed when a
(PS46) turns ON. jam occurs, the
main body com-
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J93-02 The ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS35) —
When idling

J93-03 The ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS36)
4 -18

ADU J94-01 The ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) If there is a sheet Open the main body
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified of paper being front doors /R and /L,
period of time after the ADU exit sensor printed when a pull out the ADU section
(PS43) turns ON. jam occurs, the and remove jammed
main body com- paper if any.
pletes the paper
exit before stop-
ping operations.
J94-03 The ADU exit sensor (PS43) turns ON —
When idling
while in idling.
IV Troubleshooting
4 -19
MALFUNCTION CODE bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Malfunction code list
A. Note for use
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
B. Code list
NOTE
• For codes with "*" in the code column, "Turn ON the power switch again" is displayed on the touch
panel. For other codes, "Please call service" is displayed.
Classification Code Causes Resulting Estimated abnormal parts

operation
Drive SC13-01 An abnormal speed signal of the The main body Paper feed motor (M4)
Main body
paper feed motor (M4) is checked. stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
An error detection signal is to turn OFF the
detected twice in succession a RL1 (main).
specified period of time after M4
was turned ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC13-02 An abnormal speed signal of the Paper feed motor (M40)
PF
PFU paper feed motor (M40) is PF drive board (PFUDB)

checked.
An error detection signal is
IV Troubleshooting
detected twice in succession a

was turned ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC13-03 The blowout of a fuse for the verti- Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
cal conveyance motor (M8) in the Vertical conveyance motor

printer control board (PRCB) is (M8)
checked.
An error detection signal (blowout
of a fuse) of M8 is detected when
M8 is turned ON.
SC13-05 The blowout of a fuse for the exit PF exit conveyance motor
PF
conveyance motor (M41) in the PF (M41)

drive board (PFUDB) is checked. PF drive board (PFUDB)
of a fuse) of M41 is detected when
M41 is turned ON.
Tray /1 SC18-10 The locking of the paper lift motor Paper lift motor /1 (M25)
Main body
/1 (M25) is detected. Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)

An error detection signal of M25 is
detected while M25 is ON.
4 -20
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 MALFUNCTION CODE

operation
Main body Tray /1 SC18-11 When the upper limit sensor /1 Error code is not DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn displayed on the 2)
ON within 20 seconds after the operation panel,
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON but displayed only
for lifting operation. And at this on the data collec-
time, an error detection signal tion, the list output
(24V cut off) is detected. and CSRC. Since
SC18-12 When the upper limit sensor /1 the lifting opera- Printer control board (PRCB)
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn tion of the tray is
ON within 20 seconds after the not completed,
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON "Set paper in the
for lifting operation. And at this tray 1" is displayed
time, an error detection signal on the operation
(blowout of a fuse) is detected. board.
SC18-13 When the upper limit sensor /1 Paper lift motor /1 (M25)
(PS6) is OFF, PS6 does not turn
ON within 20 seconds after the
paper lift motor /1 (M25) turns ON
for lifting operation. And at this
time, an error detection signal is
not detected.
Tray /2 SC18-20 The locking of the paper lift motor The main body Paper lift motor /2 (M26)
/2 (M26) is detected. stops immediately Upper limit sensor /2 (PS12)
When M26 is ON, an error detec- to turn OFF the
IV Troubleshooting
tion signal of the M26 is detected. RL1 (main).
SC18-21 When the upper limit sensor /2 Error code is not DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
SC18-22 When the upper limit sensor /2 the lifting opera- Printer control board (PRCB)
not detected.
4 -21

operation
PF

SC18-32 When the upper limit sensor /1 the lifting opera- PF drive board (PFUDB)
IV Troubleshooting
not detected.
4 -22

operation
PF Tray /4 SC18-43 When the upper limit sensor /2 Error code is not Paper lift motor /2 (M43)
(PS77) is OFF, PS77 does not turn displayed on the
time, an error detection signal is tion, the list output
not detected. and CSRC. Since
the lifting opera-
tion of the tray is
not completed,
"Set paper in the
tray 4" is displayed
on the operation
board.
IV Troubleshooting
not detected.
4 -23

operation
Wire SC21-01 It is checked that the time for the The main body Charger cleaning motor
Main body
cleaning charger cleaning motor (M23) stops immediately (M23)

abnor- operations is over. to turn OFF the Charger cleaning home sen-
mality • When the charger cleaning RL1 (main). sor (PS26)
home sensor (PS26) is OFF with Printer control board (PRCB)
the main power switch (SW1)
ON, PS26 does not turn ON
within 35 seconds after the M23
turns ON for home position
research operation (return oper-
ation). At this time, an error
detection signal (blowout of a
fuse) is not detected.
• PS26 does not turn OFF within
15 seconds after the reverse
operation (return operation) is
started. At this time, an error
• The charger cleaning limit sen-
sor (PS27) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time
after the reverse operation
(return operation) is started for
detection of PS26 being OFF.
IV Troubleshooting
Or, PS26 does not turn ON

after PS27 turns ON. At this
time, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse) is not
detected.
4 -24

operation
Main body Wire SC21-02 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Charger cleaning motor
cleaning charger cleaning motor (M23) in stops immediately (M23)
abnor- the printer control board (PRCB) is to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
mality checked. RL1 (main).
• When the charger cleaning
home sensor (PS26) is OFF with
the main power switch (SW1)
ON, PS26 does not turn ON
within 35 seconds after the M23
turns ON for home position
ation). And at this time, an error
fuse) is detected.
15 seconds after the reverse
started. And at this time, an
error detection signal (blowout
of a fuse) is detected.
• The charger cleaning limit sen-
sor (PS27) does not turn ON
after the reverse operation
(return operation) is started for
IV Troubleshooting
detection of PS26 being OFF.
Or, PS26 does not turn ON
after PS27 turns ON. At this
(blowout of a fuse) is detected.
SC21-03 The locking of the charger clean- Charger cleaning motor
ing motor (M23) is detected. (M23)
A motor lock signal is detected Charger/cleaning member
while moving from the charger
cleaning limit sensor (PS27) side
to the charger cleaning home sen-
sor (PS26) side, and after a retry
operation, a fifth motor lock signal
is detected.
4 -25

operation
Wire SC21-04 It is checked that the operations of The main body Transfer/separation clean-
Main body
cleaning the transfer/separation cleaning stops immediately ing motor (M20)

abnor- motor (M20) are over. to turn OFF the Transfer/separation clean-
mality • When the transfer/separation RL1 (main). ing home sensor (PS38)
cleaning home sensor (PS38) is Transfer/separation clean-
OFF with the main power switch ing limit sensor (PS39)
(SW1) ON, PS38 does not turn ADU drive boards /1, /2
ON within a specified period of (ADUDB/1, /2)
time after the transfer/separa-
tion cleaning motor (M20) turns
ON for a home position
a specified period of time after
the reverse operation (return
operation) is started. At this
(blowout of a fuse) is not
detected.
• The transfer/separation cleaning
limit sensor (PS39) does not
turn ON within a specified
IV Troubleshooting
period of time after the reverse

started for detection of PS38
being OFF. Or, PS38 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time after PS39 turns
ON. At this time, an error detec-
tion signal (blowout of a fuse) is
not detected.
4 -26

operation
Main body Wire SC21-05 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Transfer/separation clean-
cleaning transfer/separation cleaning motor stops immediately ing motor (M20)
abnor- (M20) in the ADU drive boards /1 to turn OFF the ADU drive boards /1, /2
mality and /2 (ADUDB/1 and /2)is RL1 (main). (ADUDB/1, /2)
checked.
• When the transfer/separation
cleaning home sensor (PS38) is
OFF with the main power switch
(SW1) ON, PS38 does not turn
ON within a specified period of
time after the transfer/separa-
tion cleaning motor (M20) turns
ON for a home position
fuse) is detected.
the reverse operation (return
operation) is started. At this
(blowout of a fuse) is detected.
• PS39 does not turn ON within a
IV Troubleshooting
reverse operation (return opera-
tion) is started for detection of
PS38 being OFF. Or, PS38 does
not turn ON within a specified
period of time after PS39 turns
ON. At this time, an error detec-
tion signal (blowout of a fuse) is
detected.
SC21-06 The locking of the transfer/separa- Transfer/separation clean-
tion cleaning motor (M20) is ing motor (M20)
detected. Transfer/separation charger/
Motor lock signals are detected Transfer/separation clean-
while moving from the transfer/ ing member
separation limit sensor (PS39) side
to the transfer/separation home
sensor (PS38) side, and after a
retry operation, a fifth motor lock
signal is detected.
4 -27

operation
Wire SC21-07 The home position search time of The main body Transfer assist motor (M19)
Main body
cleaning the transfer assist motor is out. stops immediately Transfer assist home sensor
abnor- The transfer assist home sensor to turn OFF the (PS39)
mality (PS39) does not turn ON within a RL1 (main). ADU drive boards /1, /2
specified period of time after the (ADUDB/1, /2)
home position search operation of
the transfer assist motor (M19) is
started.
SC21-08 An error is detected while in the Transfer assist motor (M19)
operation of the transfer assist Transfer/separation clean-
motor. ing limit sensor (PS39)
An error is detected of the transfer Transfer assist home sensor
assist motor (M19) while in the (PS39)
print operation.
Motor SC23-01 The speed error signal of the toner Toner bottle motor (M6)
abnor- bottle motor (M6) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
mality An error detection signal is Toner bottle/large capacity
detected twice in succession a hopper
turns ON (the first signal is
ignored).
SC23-02 The speed error signal of the Developing motor (M3)
developing motor (M3) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
Since an error detection signal is
IV Troubleshooting
detected a second after M3 turns

ON, turn OFF M3 for 0.5 seconds.
Then, an error detection signal is
detected again a second after it is
turned ON again.
SC23-03 The locking of the blade motor is Blade motor (M22)
detected. Blade sensor /1 (PS24), /2
The error detection signal (over (PS25)
current) of M22 is detected.
SC23-04 It is checked that the movement of DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
the blade motor (M22) is not com- 2)
pleted, and the 24V power source
is also checked.
The drum READY1 signal (READY
condition) cannot be detected
after the drum motor (M2) turns
ON. Or, the drum READY1 signal
(READY release condition) cannot
be detected within a specified
period of time after M2 turns OFF.
At this time, an error detection sig-
nal (24V cut out) is detected.
4 -28

operation
Main body Motor SC23-05 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Blade motor (M22)
abnor- blade motor (M22) in the printer stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality control board (PRCB) is checked. to turn OFF the
The drum READY1 signal (READY RL1 (main).
At this time, the error detection
signal (blowout of a fuse) of the
blade motor (M22) is detected.
SC23-06 It is checked that the movement of
the blade motor (M22) is not com-
pleted.
The drum READY1 signal (READY
IV Troubleshooting
nal is not detected.
SC23-07 It is checked that the movement of DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
the blade motor (M22) is not com- 2)
pleted, and 24V power source is
also checked.
The blade READY signal (READY
after the blade replacement signal
turns ON. Or, the blade READY
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a spec-
ified period of time after the blade
replacement signal turns OFF. At
this time, an error detection signal
(24V cut off) is detected.
4 -29

operation
Motor SC23-08 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Blade motor (M22)
Main body
abnor- blade motor (M22) in the printer stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality control board (PRCB) is checked. to turn OFF the
The blade READY signal (READY RL1 (main).
after the blade replacement signal
turns ON. Or, the blade READY
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a spec-
ified period of time after the blade
replacement signal turns OFF. At
this time, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse) of the blade
motor (M22) is detected.
SC23-09 It is checked that the movement of
the blade motor (M22) is not com-
pleted. The blade READY signal
(READY condition) cannot be
detected within a specified period
of time after the blade replace-
ment signal turns ON. Or, the
blade READY signal (READY
release condition) cannot be
IV Troubleshooting
of time after the blade replace-

ment signal turns OFF. At this
not detected.
SC23-10 It is checked that the drum motor Drum motor (M2)
(M2) does not start. The drum Printer control board (PRCB)
READY2 signal (READY signal) is
not detected within a specified
period of time after M2 turns ON.
SC23-11 The blowout of a fuse for the inter- Intermediate hopper motor
mediate hopper motor (M11) in (M11)
the printer control board (PRCB) is Printer control board (PRCB)
checked.
of a fuse) is detected when M11
turns ON.
4 -30

operation
Main body Motor SC23-12 The blowout of a fuse for the air The main body Air separation motor (M10)
abnor- separation motor (M10) in the stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality printer control board (PRCB) is to turn OFF the
checked. RL1 (main).
of a fuse) is detected when M10
turns ON.
Toner SC23-13 Air separation motor (M10) rota- Air separation motor (M10)
convey- tion abnormality. Since an error is Air motor encoder sensor
ance detected when M10 turns ON, (PS30)
abnor- turn it OFF. An error is still Resetting of the intermedi-
mality detected when turn it ON again. ate toner hopper section
SC23-14 The toner conveyance abnormality Toner pump motor (M28)
is detected. When toner is sup- Air pump motor (M29)
plied for 8 minutes and the toner Toner remaining sensor /1
remaining sensor /1 (PS31) does (PS31)
not turn ON, it is found that the Toner remaining sensor /3
toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33) (PS33)
of the large capacity hopper turns
ON for the last 15 seconds in suc- Note:
cession. • When the code SC23-
14 occurs, be sure to
repair defective parts
before setting the soft-
IV Troubleshooting
ware DIPSW3-1 to 0.
Setting the DIPSW3-1
to 0 without repairing
defective parts may
cause toner to over-
flow inside and outside
of the machine.
SC23-15 Toner remaining detection sensor / Toner remaining sensor /2
3 (PS33) abnormality. When the (PS32)
toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) Toner remaining sensor /3
does not turn ON even if toner is (PS33)
supplied for 8 minutes, it is found
that the toner remaining sensor /2
(PS32) of the large capacity hop-
per turns ON for the last 15 sec-
onds in succession, and the toner
remaining sensor /3 (PS33) turns
OFF.
4 -31

operation
Toner SC23-17 Leakage at the mixing section is The main body Toner pump motor (M28)
Main body
convey- detected. When the toner pump stops immediately Air pump motor (M29)
ance motor (M28) is operating, the to turn OFF the Toner remaining sensor /4
abnor- toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34) RL1 (main). (PS34)
mality detects the toner being provided
in succession for 20 seconds. Note:
• When the code SC23-
17 occurs, be sure to
repair defective parts
before setting the soft-
ware DIPSW3-1 to 0.
Setting the DIPSW3-1
to 0 without repairing
defective parts may
cause toner to over-
flow inside and outside
of the machine.
SC23-20 Toner pump motor (M28) abnor- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
mality. The rotation of the toner 2)
pump motor (M28) and the 24 V Toner pump motor (M28)
power source are checked. While
M28 is rotating, an error detection
signal (abnormal rotation) is
detected for more than 1 second.
IV Troubleshooting
nal (24V cut off) is detected.

SC23-21 Toner pump motor (M28) abnor- Printer control board (PRCB)
mality. The blowout of a fuse for Toner pump motor (M28)
the toner pump motor (M28) in the
printer control board (PRCB) is
checked.
While M28 is rotating, an error
detection signal (abnormal rota-
tion) is detected for more than 1
second. At this time, an error
fuse) is detected, but an error sig-
nal (24V cut off) is not detected.
SC23-22 Toner pump motor (M28) abnor- Toner pump motor (M28)
mality. The rotation of the toner Pump encoder sensor /1
pump motor (M28) is checked. (PS28)
second. At this time, error signals
(blowout of a fuse and 24V cut off)
are not detected.
4 -32

operation
Main body Toner SC23-24 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
convey- ity. The rotation of the air pump stops immediately 2)
ance motor (M29) and the 24V power to turn OFF the Air pump motor (M29)
abnor- source are checked. RL1 (main).
mality While M29 is rotating, an error
second. At this time, an error sig-
SC23-25 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- Printer control board (PRCB)
ity. The blowout of a fuse for the Air pump motor (M29)
air pump motor (M29) in the
checked.
second. At this time, an abnormal-
ity signal (blowout of a fuse) is
detected, but no abnormality sig-
SC23-26 Air pump motor (M29) abnormal- Air pump motor (M29)
ity. The rotation of the air pump Pump encoder sensor
motor (M29) is checked for more (PS29)
IV Troubleshooting
than 1 second. An error detection Load of the pump
signal (abnormal rotation) is
detected for more than 1 second.
At this time, error signals (blowout
of a fuse and 24V cut off) are not
detected.
Drum SC24-01 When the change in temperature Drum temperature sensor
of the drum temperature sensor (TH5)
(TH5) is less than -2°C a specified
period of time after the main
power switch (SW1) turns ON to
start the control of the dehumidifi-
cation heater /1 (HTR1) and the
drum temperature is below 10°C
after the elapse of 1 minute.
SC24-02 When the main power switch
(SW1) turns ON with the fusing
temperature below 50°C, the
detected temperature of the drum
temperature sensor (TH5) is more
than 52°C, and when the detected
temperature is above 52°C after a
specified period of time.
4 -33

operation
High SC28-01 A charge leak is detected. After a The main body Charger
Main body
voltage charge error detection signal is stops immediately Power feeding contact
power detected while in the charge ON, to turn OFF the High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
source up to 5 charge ON/OFF opera- RL1 (main).
abnor- tions occur in succession while in
mality 10 prints.
SC28-02 A transfer leak is detected. After a Transfer/separation charger
transfer error detection signal is Power feeding point
detected while in the transfer ON, High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
up to 5 transfer ON/OFF opera-
tions occur in succession while in
10 prints.
SC28-03 A separation leak is detected.
After a separation error detection
signal is detected while in the sep-
aration ON, up to 5 separation
ON/OFF operations occur in suc-
cession while in 10 prints.
SC28-04 The error detection signal (blowout ADU drive boards /1, /2
of a 24V fuse) of the high voltage (ADUDB1, 2)
unit /2 (HV2) is detected. High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
Process SC29-01 The dirt correction of the sensor is Toner control sensor board
abnor- not completed. While in the maxi- (TCSB)
mality mum density correction, the dirt
IV Troubleshooting
correction of the maximum density

sensor is not sufficient. When this
condition is detected 10 times in
succession, the error code is dis-
played.
SC29-02 The maximum density correction Error code is not Toner control sensor board
is not completed. While in the displayed on the (TCSB)
maximum density correction, the operation panel, Developing motor (M3)
number of rotations of the devel- but displayed only
oping sleeve gets to the maxi- on the data collec-
mum. tion, the list output
SC29-03 The maximum density sensor out- and the CSRC. Toner control sensor board
put abnormality. While in the maxi- The control of the (TCSB)
mum density correction, a patch main body is Write unit
for control is not output. (No out- made by using a Image processing board
put is made from the maximum data previously (IPB)
density sensor.) obtained. Overall control board
(OACB)
4 -34

operation
Main body Process SC29-04 The dirt correction of the sensor is The main body Toner control sensor board
abnor- not completed. While in gamma stops immediately (TCSB) (gamma sensor
mality correction, the dirt correction of to turn OFF the cleaning required)
the gamma sensor is not suffi- RL1 (main).
cient. When SC29-4 or SC29-7 is
detected ten times in succession,
this error code is displayed.
SC29-05 The gamma sensor output abnor- Error code is not Toner control sensor board
mality. While in the gamma correc- displayed on the (TCSB)
tion, a patch for control is not operation panel, Write unit
output. (No output is made from but displayed only Image processing board
the gamma sensor.) on the data collec- (IPB)
tion, the list output Overall control board
and the CSRC. (OACB)
SC29-06 The gamma correction data is The control of the Image processing board
defective. The gamma correction main body is (IPB)
output is abnormal. A regression made by using a Printer control board (PRCB)
error when carrying out a gamma data previously
curve operation while in the obtained.
gamma correction.
SC29-07 The dirt correction of the sensor is The main body Toner control sensor board
not completed. While in the dot stops immediately (TCSB) (gamma sensor
diameter correction, the dirt cor- to turn OFF the cleaning required)
rection of the gamma sensor is RL1 (main).
IV Troubleshooting
not sufficient. When SC29-4 or
SC29-7 is detected ten times in
succession, this error code is dis-
played.
SC29-08 Correction abnormality. While in Error code is not Image processing board
the dot diameter correction, the displayed on the (IPB)
correction is terminated with an operation panel, Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormal value. but displayed only
on the data collec-
tion, the list output
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
4 -35

operation
Process SC29-09 Drum potential sensor (DPS) out- The main body Drum potential sensor (DPS)
Main body
abnor- put abnormality. While in the 0V stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality check of the DPS, more than to turn OFF the
100V of the drum surface potential RL1 (main).
is detected more than 5 times.
When the error code is detected 5
times in succession, this error
code is displayed.
SC29-10 Drum potential sensor (DPS) out-
put abnormality. While in the drum
potential correction, a patch for
control is not output with the V1
getting to more than 350V. When
this condition is detected 5 times
in succession, the error code is
displayed.
SC29-11 The data is defective. While in the
drum potential correction, no con-
vergence is obtained even after
correction is made more than 10
times. When this condition is
detected 5 times in succession,
the error code is displayed.
SC29-12 Auto adjustment monitor value Error code is not High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
IV Troubleshooting
abnormality. No convergence is displayed on the

made in the auto adjustment of operation panel,
the transfer current. but displayed only
SC29-13 Auto adjustment monitor value on the data collec-
abnormality. No convergence is tion, the list output
made in the auto adjustment of and the CSRC.
the separation (AC) current. The control of the
SC29-14 Auto adjustment monitor value main body is
abnormality. No convergence is made by using a
made in the auto adjustment of data previously
the separation (DC) current. obtained.
SC29-15 Auto adjustment monitor value High voltage unit /1 (HV1)

abnormality. No convergence is
made in the auto adjustment of
the developing bias.
4 -36

operation
Main body Process SC29-16 Drum charger capacity deteriora- The main body Drum
abnor- tion abnormality. When the stops immediately Drum potential sensor (DPS)
mality charger grid/developing bias is in to turn OFF the
excess of the limit of correction, RL1 (main).
lower the developing potential/
fogging margin potential in steps
of 50V. And as a result, less than
50V of the difference with the tar-
get charger potential is detected
10 times in succession.
Fan SC32-01 The rotation of the IPB cooling fan DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
abnor- (FM12) is checked, and the 24V 1)
mality power source is also checked. An
abnormal signal condition occurs
FM12 is turned ON. This abnormal
condition recurs even a specified
period of time after FM12 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is detected.
SC32-02 The blowout of a fuse for the IPB AC drive board (ACDB)
cooling fan (FM12) in the AC drive IPB cooling fan (FM12)
board (ACDB) is checked.
IV Troubleshooting
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM12 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM12 is
turned ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified period
of time after FM12 is turned OFF
and then turned ON, and an error
fuse) is detected with the 24V nor-
mal.
SC32-03 The rotation of the IPB cooling fan
(FM12) is checked.
detection signal (24V cut off/blow-
out of a fuse) is not detected.
4 -37

operation
Fan SC32-04 When the print is started, the EM Error code is not AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
abnor- signal of the PB cooling fan displayed on the IPB cooling fan (FM12)
mality (FM12) turns ON. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
SC32-05 The rotation of the pump cooling The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
fan (FM11) is checked, and the stops immediately 2)
24V power source is also to turn OFF the
checked. RL1 (main).
detection signal (24V cut off) is
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-06 The blowout of a fuse for the Pump cooling fan (FM11)
pump cooling fan (FM11) in the Printer control board (PRCB)
checked.
fuse) is detected.
4 -38

operation
Main body Fan SC32-07 The rotation of the pump cooling The main body Pump cooling fan (FM11)
abnor- fan (FM11) is checked. stops immediately Printer control board (PRCB)
mality An abnormal condition occurs to turn OFF the
with the FM11 EM signal a speci- RL1 (main).
SC32-09 The rotation of the transfer/sepa- DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
ration suction fan (FM4) is 1)
checked, and the 24V power
source is also checked.
with the FM4 EM signal a specified
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM4 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-10 The blowout of a fuse for the Transfer/separation suction
transfer/separation suction fan fan (FM4)
(FM4) in the printer control board Printer control board (PRCB)
(PRCB) is checked.
mal.
4 -39

operation
Fan SC32-11 The rotation of the transfer/sepa- The main body Transfer/separation suction
Main body
abnor- ration suction fan (FM4) is stops immediately fan (FM4)

mality checked. to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
An abnormal condition occurs RL1 (main).
SC32-12 The rotation of the developing DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
suction fan (FM5) is checked, and 1)
the 24V power source is also
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-13 The blowout of a fuse for the Developing suction fan

developing suction fan (FM5) in (FM5)
checked.
mal.
4 -40

operation
Main body Fan SC32-14 The rotation of the developing The main body Developing suction fan
abnor- suction fan (FM5) is checked. stops immediately (FM5)
mality An abnormal condition occurs to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
with the FM5 EM signal a specified RL1 (main).
SC32-15 The rotation of the paper exit cool- DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
ing fan /1 (FM9) is checked, and 1)
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-16 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper exit cooling fan /1
paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9) in (FM9)
checked.
mal.
4 -41

operation
Fan SC32-17 The rotation of the paper exit cool- The main body Paper exit cooling fan /1
Main body
abnor- ing fan /1 (FM9) is checked. stops immediately (FM9)

with the FM9 EM signal a specified RL1 (main).
SC32-18 The rotation of the paper exit cool- DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
ing fan /2 (FM10) is checked, and 1)
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-19 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper exit cooling fans /2
paper exit cooling fans /2 (FM10) (FM10), /3 (FM28)
and /3 (FM28) in the printer control
board (PRCB) is checked.
mal.
4 -42

operation
Main body Fan SC32-20 The rotation of the paper exit cool- The main body Paper exit cooling fans /2
abnor- ing fans /2 (FM10) and /3 (FM28) stops immediately (FM10), /3 (FM28)
mality is checked. to turn OFF the
SC32-21 The rotation of the paper feed DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) is checked, 1)
and the 24V power source is also
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-22 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) (FM20)
in the printer control board (PRCB) Printer control board (PRCB)
is checked.
mal.
4 -43

operation
Fan SC32-23 The rotation of the paper feed The main body Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
Main body
abnor- assist fan /Fr1 (FM20) is checked. stops immediately (FM20)

assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) is checked, 1)
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC32-25 The blowout of a fuse for the Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) (FM21)
is checked.
mal.
4 -44

operation
Main body Fan SC32-26 The rotation of the paper feed The main body Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
abnor- assist fan /Rr1 (FM21) is checked. stops immediately (FM21)
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
fuse) is detected.
4 -45

operation
Main body

checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -46

operation
Main body Fan SC32-32 The rotation of the paper feed The main body Paper feed assist fan /Rr2
PF

checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
in the printer control board (PRCB) PF drive board (PFUDB)
is checked.
mal.
4 -47

operation
PF

mality An abnormal condition occurs to turn OFF the PF drive board (PFUDB)
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -48

operation
PF Fan SC32-38 The rotation of the paper feed The main body Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -49

operation
PF

checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -50

operation
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -51

operation
PF

and then turned ON, and no error
out of a fuse) is detected.
checked.
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
is checked.
mal.
4 -52

operation
SC32-51 The rotation of the cooling fan DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM20) is checked, and the 24V 2)
power source is also checked.
detected.
SC32-52 The blowout of a fuse for the cool- Cooling fan (FM20)
IV Troubleshooting
ing fan (FM20) in the printer con- PF drive board (PFUDB)
trol board (PRCB) is checked.
mal.
SC32-53 The rotation of the cooling fan
(FM20) is checked.
4 -53

operation
Fan SC32-54 The rotation of the power supply The main body DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
Main body
abnor- cooling fan /3 (FM27) is checked. stops immediately 2)

mality An abnormal condition occurs to turn OFF the
and then turned ON, and no error
out of a fuse) is detected.
SC32-55 The EM signal of the power supply Error code is not
cooling fan /3 (FM27) is ON when displayed on the
starting the print. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
ADU SC33-01 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body ADU drive board /2
IV Troubleshooting
sec- motor of the registration section in stops immediately (ADUDB2)

tion the ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2) to turn OFF the ADU conveyance motor /2
motor is checked. RL1 (main). (M16)
abnor- An error detection signal (blowout Registration motor (M17)
mality of a fuse) of the ADU conveyance Loop motor (M18)
motor /2 (M16)/ registration motor
(M17)/loop motor (M18) is
detected after the print is started.
At this time, the closing of the
door detection/PFU door is
detected 10 times in succession.
4 -54

operation
Main body ADU SC33-02 The blowout of a fuse for the ADU The main body ADU drive board /1
sec- motor in the ADU drive board /1 stops immediately (ADUDB1)
tion (ADUDB1) is checked. to turn OFF the Reverse/exit motor (M13)
motor An error detection signal (blowout RL1 (main). ADU accelerate motor (M14)
abnor- of a fuse) of the reverse/exit motor ADU conveyance motor /1
mality (M13)/ADU acceleration motor (M15)
(M14)/ ADU conveyance motor /1 ADU reverse motor (M12)
(M15)/ADU reverse motor (M12) is
detected after the print is started.
At this time, the closing of the
door detection/PFU door is
detected 10 times in succession.
SC33-04 The blowout of a fuse for the Printer control board (PRCB)
transfer assist motor (M19) in the Transfer assist motor (M19)
checked.
When M19 turns ON from OFF, an
error detection signal (blowout of a
fuse) is detected. At this time, the
closing of the door is detected 10
times in succession.
SC33-05 The blowout of a fuse for the web DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
motor (M24) in the printer control 2)
board (PRCB) is checked, and the
IV Troubleshooting
24V power source is also
checked.
When M24 turn ON from OFF,
error detection signals (blowout of
a fuse and the 24V cut off) are
detected.
SC33-06 The blowout of a fuse for the web Printer control board (PRCB)
motor (M24) in the printer control Web motor (M24)
board (PRCB) is checked.
When M24 turns ON from OFF, an
fuse) is detected. At this time, an
is not detected.
4 -55

operation
Fusing SC34-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera- The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body
high tem- ture detection (software). stops immediately AC drive board (ACDB)
perature TH1 detects a temperature of to turn OFF the Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
abnor- 210°C or above 5 times in a RL1 (main). Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
mality period of 1 second. Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
SC34-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera- Thermistor /1 (TH1)
ture detection (software). Thermistor /2 (TH2)
TH3 detects a temperature of Thermistor /3 (TH3)
230°C or above 5 times in a Thermistor /4 (TH4)
period of 1 second. Caution:
SC34-03 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera- • When SC34-**, SC35-**
ture detection (hardware). or SC36-** (fusing tem-
An abnormal condition is detected perature related abnor-
with the fusing error detection sig- malities) occur, be sure
nal 1. to repair defective
parts before setting the
SC34-04 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera-
software DIPSW3-1 to
ture detection (hardware). An
0. Setting the DIPSW3-
abnormal condition is detected
1 to 0 with defective
with the fusing error detection sig-
parts not repaired may
nal 4.
result in a fire.
Fusing SC35-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera-
low tem- ture detection (software). TH1
perature does not get to 50°C when a
abnor- specified period of time elapses
IV Troubleshooting
mality after the main switch (SW1) is

turned ON for the fusing ON con-
trol.
SC35-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera-
ture detection (software). TH3
does not get to 50°C when a
specified period of time elapses
after the main switch (SW1) is
turned ON for the fusing ON con-
trol.
Fusing SC36-01 Thermistor /1 (TH1) high tempera-
sensor ture detection (long time/soft-
abnor- ware). TH1 detects a temperature
mality of 200°C or above 30 times in a
row in a period of 1 second.
SC36-02 Thermistor /3 (TH3) high tempera-
ture detection (long time/soft-
ware). TH3 detects a temperature
of 220°C or above 30 times in a
row in a period of 1 second.
4 -56

operation
Main body Fusing SC36-03 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera- The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
sensor ture detection (hardware). TH1 stops immediately AC drive board (ACDB)
abnor- detects an abnormal condition to turn OFF the Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
mality with the fusing error detection sig- RL1 (main). Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
nal 2. Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
SC36-04 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera- Thermistor /1 (TH1)
ture detection (hardware). TH3 Thermistor /2 (TH2)
detects an abnormal condition Thermistor /3 (TH3)
with the fusing error detection sig- Thermistor /4 (TH4)
nal 5. Caution:
SC36-05 Thermistor /1 (TH1) low tempera- • When SC34-**, SC35-**
ture detection (hardware). TH1 or SC36-** (fusing tem-
detects an abnormal condition perature related abnor-
with the fusing error detection sig- malities) occur, be sure
nal 3. to repair defective
parts before setting the
SC36-06 Thermistor /3 (TH3) low tempera-
software DIPSW3-1 to
ture detection (hardware). TH3
0. Setting the DIPSW3-
detects an abnormal condition
1 to 0 with defective
with the fusing error detection sig-
parts not repaired may
nal 6.
result in a fire.
Scanner SC41-01 It is checked that the movement DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
abnor- time for the scanner motor (M27) 1)
mality is over, and the 24V power source
is also checked. The scanner
IV Troubleshooting
home sensor (PS51) or the APS
sensor /1 (PS52) does not turn
ON within a specified period of
time after the home position
search is started. And an error
detected with the scanner motor
(M27).
SC41-02 The blowout of a fuse for the Scanner drive board (SDB)
scanner motor (M27) in the scan- Scanner motor (M27)
ner drive board (SDB) is checked.
The scanner home sensor (PS51)
or the APS sensor /1 (PS52) does
period of time after the home posi-
tion search is started. And an error
fuse) is detected with M27. At this
(24V cut off) is not detected with
the M27.
4 -57

operation
Scanner SC41-03 The time for the movement of the The main body Scanner drive board (SDB)
Main body
abnor- scanner motor (M27) is over. The stops immediately Scanner motor (M27)
mality scanner home sensor (PS51) or to turn OFF the Scanner home sensor
the APS sensor /1 (PS52) does RL1 (main). (PS51)
period of time after the home posi-
tion search is started. And an error
fuse/24V cut off) is not detected
with the M27.
Write SC41-10 The abnormal speed of the poly- DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
abnor- gon motor (M21) is checked, and 1)
mality the 24V power source is also
checked. When switching the
speed of M21, the lock signal of
M21 is not detected within a
switchover is started, and an error
detected.
SC41-11 The abnormal speed of the poly- Polygon motor (M21)
gon motor (M21) is checked. Printer control board (PRCB)
When switching the speed of
M21, the lock signal of M21 is not
IV Troubleshooting

of time after the switchover is
started.
Fan SC42-01 The rotation of the scanner cool- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
abnor- ing fan (FM19) is checked, and 2)
mality 24V power source is also
checked. An abnormal condition
occurs with the FM19 EM signal a
specified period of time after
FM19 turns ON. This abnormal
is detected.
4 -58

operation
Main body Fan SC42-02 The blowout of a fuse for the The main body Scanner drive board (SDB)
abnor- scanner cooling fan (FM19) in the stops immediately Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
mality scanner drive board (SDB) is to turn OFF the
checked. An abnormal condition RL1 (main).
is not detected.
SC42-03 The rotation of the scanner cool- Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
ing fan (FM19) is checked. An
abnormal condition occurs with
the FM19 EM signal a specified
period of time after FM19 turns
IV Troubleshooting
SC42-04 The rotation of the suction fan /1 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM6) is checked, and 24V power 2)
source is also checked. An abnor-
mal condition occurs with the FM6
EM signal a specified period of
time after FM6 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
specified period of time after FM6
is turned OFF and then turned
ON, and an error detection signal
4 -59

operation
Fan SC42-05 The blowout of a fuse for the suc- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
abnor- tion fan /1 (FM6) in the AC drive stops immediately Suction fan /1 (FM6)
mality board (ACDB) is checked. An to turn OFF the
abnormal condition occurs with RL1 (main).
period of time after FM6 turns ON.
This abnormal condition recurs
even a specified period of time
after FM6 is turned OFF and then
turned ON, and an error detection
signal (blowout of a fuse) is
detected. At this time, an error
detection signal (24V cut off) is not
detected.
SC42-06 The rotation of the suction fan /1
(FM6) is checked. An abnormal
condition occurs with the FM6 EM
signal a specified period of time
after FM6 turns ON. This abnor-
mal condition recurs even a speci-
turned OFF and then turned ON,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off/blowout of a fuse) is not
detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC42-07 The EM signal of the suction fan /1 Suction fan /1 (FM6)

(FM6) is ON when the printing is
started.
SC42-08 The rotation of the suction fans /2 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM7) and /3 (FM8) is checked, 2)
occurs with the FM7/FM8 EM sig-
nal a specified period of time after
FM7/FM8 turns ON. This abnor-
fied period of time after FM7/FM8
4 -60

operation
Main body Fan SC42-09 The blowout of a fuse for the suc- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
abnor- tion fans /2 (FM7) and /3 (FM8) in stops immediately Suction fan /2 (FM7)
mality the AC drive board (ACDB) is to turn OFF the Suction fan /3 (FM8)
checked. An abnormal condition RL1 (main).
occurs with the FM7/FM8 EM sig-
nal a specified period of time after
FM7/FM8 turns ON. This abnor-
(blowout of a fuse) is detected. At
this time an error detection signal
(24V cut off) is not detected.
SC42-10 The rotation of the suction fans /2
(FM7) and /3 (FM8) is checked. An
the FM7/FM8 EM signal a speci-
turns ON. This abnormal condition
time after FM7/FM8 is turned OFF
IV Troubleshooting
SC42-16 The rotation of the polygon cool- DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
ing fan (FM18) is checked, and the 2)
24V power source is also
is detected.
4 -61

operation
Fan SC42-17 The blowout of a fuse for the poly- The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
abnor- gon cooling fans (FM18) in the AC stops immediately Polygon cooling fan (FM18)
mality drive board (ACDB) is checked. to turn OFF the
fied period of time after FM18
turns ON. This abnormal condition
is not detected.
SC42-18 Rotation of the polygon cooling
fans (FM18) is checked. An abnor-
mal condition occurs with the
FM18 EM signal a specified period
of time after FM18 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
FM18 is turned OFF and then
signal (24V cut off/blowout of a
IV Troubleshooting
SC42-19 The EM signal of the polygon Error code is not Polygon cooling fan (FM18)
cooling fan (FM18) is ON when the displayed on the
printing is started. operation panel,
but displayed only
on the data collec-
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
4 -62

operation
Main body Image SC46-01* APC abnormality. While in the If there is a copy Write unit
proces image write, APC is not applicable being made, the Power connector of the
sing for the correction of the sub scan main body com- image processing board
abnor- beam. Due to the 12V DC power pletes the paper (IPB)
mality for the laser drive not supplied, the exit before stop-
MPC being wrong and the laser ping operations.
defective, the laser does not light Turn OFF the RL1
up. (main).
Also, due to the rotation of the
polygon mirror unavailable, the
displacement of the index sensor,
and the index sensor being defec-
tive, the index sensor cannot
detect the laser.
SC46-02* Scanner FIFO abnormality. FIFO Image processing board
address abnormality for the scan- (IPB)
ner.
While in the image read, the com-
pression of image data that is read
in is not correctly terminated.
SC46-03* FIFO address abnormality for the
printer.
While in the image write, the
expansion processing of image
IV Troubleshooting
data that is read in is not correctly
terminated.
SC46-05* Compression input FIFO abnor-
mality. An error interrupt occurs
with the compression/expansion
chip FIFO.
SC46-06* Elongation abnormality. Due to the
elongation of data the compres-
sion of which is not completed,
the destruction of the compressed
data and the abnormal length of
data, an elongation abnormality is
detected.
SC46-08* Index sensor abnormality. While in Write unit
the execution of APC, no change Power connector of the
is found in the output of the index image processing board
sensor. (IPB)
SC46-12* SVV length abnormality. After Image processing board
negation of SVV, the compression (IPB)
of images that are read in and their
development into the page mem-
ory are not terminated within a
4 -63

operation
Image SC46-13* Scanner time out. While in the If there is a copy Image processing board
Main body
proces image read, the compression pro- being made, the (IPB)
sing cessing from the scanner into the main body com- ADF
abnor- memory does not terminate within pletes the paper Printer control board (PRCB)
mality a specified period of time. The exit before stop-
development from the scanner ping operations.
into the page memory does not Turn OFF the RL1
terminate within a specified period (main).
of time. The SVV is not detected
within a specified period of time.
SC46-14* Printer time out. While in the Image processing board
image write, the expansion pro- (IPB)
cessing from the memory to the Printer control board (PRCB)
printer does not terminate within a
The output from the page memory
to the printer does not terminate
The PVV is not detected within a
SC46-15* Expansion device access abnor- Image processing board
mality. While in the image write, (IPB)
despite of no resource provided, Image processing program
an inappropriate processing such
IV Troubleshooting
as accessing to the elongation

device is made.
SC46-16* Compression device access
abnormality. When writing images,
in spite of no resource provided,
an inappropriate processing such
as an access to the compression
device is made.
SC46-17* Filter coefficient abnormality.
When processing images, a filter
coefficient cannot be created nor-
mally.
SC46-19* When accessing to the memory
device, a defective software is
detected.
4 -64

operation
Main body Image SC46-21* Memory time out. The expansion If there is a copy Image processing board
proces processing from the memory to being made, the (IPB)
sing the pate memory is not terminated main body com- Image processing program
abnor- within a specified period of time. pletes the paper Printer control board (PRCB)
mality The compression processing from exit before stop-
the page memory to the memory ping operations.
is not terminated within a specified Turn OFF the RL1
period of time. (main).
The development from the mem-
ory into the page memory is not
terminated within a specified
period of time. The transmission of
the compressed data from mem-
ory to memory is not terminated
SC46-23* SVV off abnormality. While in the Image processing board
image read, SVV does not turn (IPB)
OFF within a specified period of
time and the preparation for scan-
ning the next page cannot be
started.
SC46-24* Shading correction abnormality Image processing board
(GA abnormality). (IPB)
SC46-25* AOC/AGC adjustment level abnor- Image processing program
IV Troubleshooting
mality.
• The light blocking cover at the
read section and the lens cover
are removed.
• The connector of the A/D con-
verter board is disconnected.
• The power cable of the A/D
converter board is unplugged.
• The IC protector of the A/D con-
verter board is cut off.
• The light volume of the expo-
sure lamp is excessive.
• The exposure lamp does not
light up.
4 -65

operation
Image SC46-26 The adjustment data evacuated Error code is not Image processing board
Main body
proces by resolutions is not available. displayed on the (IPB)

sing operation panel,
abnor- but displayed only
mality SC46-27 A density conversion gamma on the data collec-
curve cannot be created normally. tion, the list output
and the CSRC.
The control of the
main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
SC46-31* Despite of the MPC not being ter- If there is a copy Image processing board
minated, the initial sampling of the being made, the (IPB)
APC is attempted. main body com- Image processing program
SC46-32* While executing the APC, the exe- pletes the paper
cution of the MPC is attempted. exit before stop-
SC46-35* Sequentially shot page area ping operations.
abnormality. Due to an image area Turn OFF the RL1
abnormality on the memory, (main).
images cannot be developed on
the memory.
SC46-36* Initial APC timing abnormality. The Write section
PVV is turned ON before the initial Printer control program
IV Troubleshooting
APC start processing is com- Image processing program

pleted.
SC46-40 Hard disk initialization abnormality. The main body Image processing board
The hard disk is defective, or the stops immediately (IPB)
connector is poorly connected. to turn OFF the Image processing program
RL1 (main). Hard disk /1 (HDD1)
SC46-41 The JOB information cannot be
stored on the hard disk.
SC46-43 Hard disk access defective.
The hard disk is defective or the
connector is connected improp-
erly.
4 -66

operation
Main body Image SC46-61 The scan operation starts before Error code is not ADF
proces the original skew adjustment is displayed on the Original skew sensor /Fr
sing terminated. (The skew adjustment operation panel, (PS312), /Rr (PS311)
abnor- is too late.) but displayed only
mality SC46-62 The print operation starts before on the data collec- Centering sensor (PS54)
the paper mis-centering adjust- tion, the list output
ment is terminated. (The mis-cen- and the CSRC.
tering adjustment is too late.) The control of the
SC46-63 The AGC is retried due to the main body is Exposure lamp (L1)
decreased light volume of the made by using a
exposure lamp. However, no error data previously
occurs. obtained.
SC46-64 A PWM gamma curve is not cre- Toner control sensor board
ated properly. (TCSB)
SC46-66 Shift amount abnormality while in
the repeat (when the width is
specified, or in the auto mode).
When the shift amount while in the
repeat is negative (-).
SC46-80* The message queue is insufficient If there is a copy Image processing program
or destroyed. being made, the
SC46-81* The parameter value is in excess main body com- Image processing board
of the permissible limits. pletes the paper (IPB)
SC46-82* The ID of the task that sends the exit before stop-
IV Troubleshooting
message queue is undefined. ping operations.
Turn OFF the RL1
SC46-83* The receiving event of the mes-
(main).
sage is undefined.
SC46-90* Memory access abnormality.
SC46-91* Header readout address abnor-
mality.
SC46-99* DIMM memory abnormality. An
error is detected in the DIMM
memory check at the start.
IC SC49-01 Printer controller initial communi- The main body IC board (ICB)
Con- cation abnormality stops immediately Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
troller SC49-03 Transfer error to the main body to turn OFF the IC board (ICB)
abnor- image memory RL1 (main).
mality SC49-04 Hard disc /2 (HDD2) abnormality IC board (ICB)
Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
SC49-05 IC cooling fan (FM24) lock abnor- IC board (ICB)
mality
SC49-07 The CF version is different from Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
the version information in the hard format
disc /2 (HDD2). HDD2
4 -67

operation
IC SC49-08 While in the security ON, the The main body Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
Main body
Con- unlock of the HDD results in a fail- stops immediately format

troller ure due to the mismatched pass- to turn OFF the HDD2
abnor- word of the hard disk /2 (HDD2). RL1 (main).
mality SC49-10 An unformatted hard disc /2
(HDD2) is detected.
Drive SC50-01* Main body drive serial input abnor- Printer control board (PRCB)
abnormality 1.
mality In the I/O initial communication
check in the printer control board
(PRCB) from the power on ACK, a
serial data is not received from the
main body drive unit within a
SC50-02* Main body drive serial input abnor-
mality 2.
In the I/O initial communication
mality 3.
IV Troubleshooting

mality 4.
Commu- SC50-05* Drive communication reception
nication error detection abnormality.
abnor- SC50-06* Drive communication reception
mality error detection abnormality.
SC50-07* Drive communication reception
error detection abnormality.
4 -68

operation
Main body Commu- SC50-08* Drive communication reception The main body Printer control board (PRCB)
nication error detection abnormality. stops immediately
abnor- SC50-10* Initial communication check to turn OFF the Overall control board
mality between the IC board (ICB)/printer RL1 (main). (OACB)
control board (PRCB). Image pro- Printer control board (PRCB)
cessing board communication
connection abnormality.
An initial data is not received from
the image processing board (IPB)
after the power is turned ON.
SC51-02* Drive communication reception Printer control board (PRCB)
Main body/PF
error detection abnormality. PF drive board (PFUDB)

Fan SC52-01 The rotation of the cooling fan /1 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
Main body
abnor- (FM1) is checked, and +24V 2)

mality power source is also checked. An
IV Troubleshooting
signal (24V cut off) is detected.
SC52-02 The blowout of a fuse for the cool- AC drive board (ACDB)
ing fan /1 (FM1) in the AC drive Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
board (ACDB) is checked. An Printer control board (PRCB)
detected.
4 -69

operation
Fan SC52-03 Rotation of the cooling fan /1 The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body
abnor- (FM1) is checked. An abnormal stops immediately Cooling fan /1 (FM1)

mality condition occurs with the FM1 EM to turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB)
signal a specified period of time RL1 (main).
detected.
SC52-04 The rotation of the cooling fan /2 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM2) is checked, and +24V 2)
power source is also checked. An
IV Troubleshooting

detected.
4 -70

operation
Main body Fan SC52-06 Rotation of the cooling fan /2 The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
detected.
SC52-07 The rotation of the cooling fan /3 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
(FM3) is checked, and +24V 2)
power source is also checked. An
IV Troubleshooting
detected.
4 -71

operation
Fan SC52-09 Rotation of the cooling fan /3 The main body AC drive board (ACDB)
Main body

detected.
SC52-10 The EM signal of the cooling fan /1 Error code is not Cooling fan /1 (FM1)
(FM1) is ON when the print is displayed on the
started. operation panel,
SC52-11 The EM signal of the cooling fan /2 but displayed only Cooling fan /2 (FM2)
(FM2) is ON when the print is on the data collec-
started. tion, the list output
SC52-12 The EM signal of the cooling fan /3 and the CSRC. Cooling fan /3 (FM3)
(FM3) is ON when the print is The control of the
started. main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
Power SC53-01 A speed error signal of the fusing The main body Fusing motor (M1)
IV Troubleshooting
abnor- motor (M1) is checked. An error stops immediately

mality detection signal is detected twice to turn OFF the
in succession a specified period of RL1 (main).
time after M1 turns ON. (The first
signal is ignored.)
SC53-02 The 24V power source for the total DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
counter (CNT1) is checked. When 2)
CNT1 is turned ON from OFF, an
fuse/24V cut off) is detected.
SC53-03 The blowout of a fuse for the total Main relay (RL1)
counter (CNT1) in the AC drive Total counter (CNT1)
board (ACDB) is checked. When AC drive board (ACDB)
fuse) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-04 The 24V power source for the key DC power supply /2 (DCPS/
counter (CNT2) is checked. When 2)
fuse/24V cut off) is detected.
4 -72

operation
Main body Power SC53-05 The blowout of a fuse for the key The main body Key counter (CNT2)
abnor- counter (CNT2) in the AC drive stops immediately
mality board (ACDB) is checked. When to turn OFF the
CNT2 is turned ON from OFF, an RL1 (main).
fuse) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-06 The blowout of a 12V fuse for the AC drive board (ACDB)
AC drive board (ACDB) is
checked. In the serial initial com-
munication, a signal of the blow-
out of a 12V fuse (AC drive) is
detected.
SC53-07 The blowout of a 5V fuse for the
AC drive board (ACDB) is
checked. In the serial initial com-
munication, a signal of the blow-
out of a 5V fuse (AC drive) is
detected.
SC53-08 The 12V power source in the DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
printer control board (PRCB) is 1)
checked. An error detection signal Printer control board (PRCB)
of the 12V in PRCB is detected.
IV Troubleshooting
SC53-11 The blowout of a SD/CL fuse in DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
the tray is detected 1. The 24V 1)
power source for the SD/CL in the
checked. At the start, an error
detection signal (blowout of a fuse
for the solenoid/clutch) is
detected, and an error detection
signal (24V cut off) is also
detected.
SC53-12 The blowout of a SD/CL fuse in Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /
the tray is detected 2. The blow- 2 (CL6)
out of a fuse for the SD/CL in the Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /
printer control board (PRCB) is 2 (CL7)
checked. At the start, an error Printer control board (PRCB)
detection signal (blowout of a fuse
for the solenoid/clutch) is
detected. However, an error
detected.
4 -73

operation
Power SC53-13 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in The main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/
Main body
abnor- the vertical conveyance is stops immediately 1)

mality detected 1. The 24V power to turn OFF the
source for SD/CL in the printer RL1 (main).
control board (PRCB) is checked.
At the start, an error detection sig-
nal (blowout of a fuse for the sole-
noid/clutch) is detected, and an
is detected.
SC53-14 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in Tray lock solenoid /1 (SD1),
the vertical conveyance is /2 (SD2), /3 (SD5)
detected 2. The blowout of a fuse Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
for SD/CL in the printer control Pre-registration clutch /1
board (PRCB) is checked. At the (CL1), /2 (CL3)
start, an error detection signal Vertical conveyance clutch
(blowout of a fuse for the solenoid/ (CL2)
clutch) is detected. However, an Printer control board (PRCB)
is not detected.
SC53-15 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in PF drive board (PFUDB)
the PF is detected 1. The 24V
power source for SD/CL in the PF
drive board (PFUCB) is checked.
IV Troubleshooting
At the start, an error detection sig-

nal (blowout of a fuse for the sole-
noid/clutch) is detected, and an
is detected.
SC53-16 The blowout of a fuse for SD/CL in
the PF is detected 2. The blowout
of a fuse for SD/CL in the PF drive
board (PFUDB) is checked. At the
start, an error detection signal
(blowout of a fuse for the solenoid/
motor) is detected. However, an
is not detected.
SC53-17 The blowout of the sensor 5VICP Printer control board (PRCB)
is detected. An error detection
signal of the blowout of the 5VICP
is detected.
4 -74

operation
Main body Power SC53-18 The fall-off of the erase lamp (EL) The main body Erase lamp (EL)
abnor- CN is detected. When turning ON stops immediately
mality the power, an error detection sig- to turn OFF the
nal (fall-off) is detected a specified RL1 (main).
period of time after the fall-off
detection control signal of the EL
CN turns ON.
SC53-19 An M5 EM error detection signal is Conveyance motor (M5)
detected twice in succession a Printer control board (PRCB)
conveyance motor (M5) turns ON.
SC53-20 An M5 EM error detection signal is ADU reverse paper exit
detected twice in succession a motor (M31)
specified period of time after the Printer control board (PRCB)
ADU reverse/exit motor (M31)
turns ON.
SC56-02 The communication between the Operation board /1 (OB1)
image processing board (IPB) and Overall control board
the operation board /1 (OB1) is (OACB)
checked. An initial communica-
tion from the main body to the
operation board is not sent within
30 seconds after the power is
turned ON.
IV Troubleshooting
DF SC60-01* Although the main body sent out If there is a copy Image processing board
DF
abnor- data according to the data trans- being made, the (IPB)
mality mission request by the DF, the main body and the
same request is received again. DF complete the
SC60-02* When a checksum error or an paper exit before RADF control board
SRGA reception error was stopping opera- (ADFCB)
detected while in the reception in tions. Turn OFF
serial communication, a signal the RL1 (main).
was sent to make a request for
sending data again. And when
data is being received upon this
request, a checksum error or an
SRGA reception error is detected
again.
SC60-03* When the main power switch RADF control board
(SW1) is ON, there is no response (ADFCB)
to the initial communication
request from the main body to the
DF even after a specified period of
time elapses.
4 -75

operation
DF SC60-11 When the main power switch If there is a copy RADF control board
DF
abnor- (SW1) is ON, a region into which being made, the (ADFCB)
mality no write was made by the ISW is main body and the
detected in the DF control pro- DF complete the RADF program
gram. paper exit before
stopping opera-
tions. Turn OFF
the RL1 (main).
SC67-01 Original registration sensor /Rt If there is a copy Original registration sensor /
(PS306) abnormality. being made, the Rt (PS306)
SC67-02 Original conveyance sensor main body com- Original conveyance sensor
(PS308) abnormality. pletes the paper (PS308)
SC67-03 Original reverse sensor (PS309) exit before stop- Original reverse sensor
abnormality. ping operations. (PS309)
Turn OFF the RL1
SC67-04 Non-volatile memory error RADF control board
(main).
(ADFCB)
SC67-05 Cooling fan /Lt (FM301) abnormal- Cooling fan /Lt (FM301)
ity.
SC67-06 Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse sensor
abnormality. (PS309)
SC67-07 Original reverse/exit sensor Original reverse/exit sensor
(PS313) abnormality. (PS313)
SC67-08 Tray up/down motor (M303) Tray up/down motor (M303)
abnormality.
IV Troubleshooting
SC67-09 Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) Original skew sensor /Fr
SC67-10 Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) Original skew sensor /Rr
SC67-11 Original registration sensor /Lt Original registration sensor /
(PS318) abnormality. Lt (PS318)
SC67-12 Mis-centering sensor /Fr (PS320) Centering sensor /Fr
SC67-13 Mis-centering sensor /Rr (PS321) Centering sensor /Rr
SC67-14 Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1)
abnormality.
4 -76

operation
LS LS SC76-01 The Stacker tray encoder sensor The main body Stacker tray up down motor
abnor- (PS2) does not turn ON within a and the LS stop (M1)
mality specified period of time after the immediately to LS control board (LSCB)
stacker tray up down motor (M1) turn OFF the main
of the tandem (1st) LS turns ON. relay (RL1).
Or, the initial operation or the
stacker tray down operation is not
completed within a specified
period of time.
SC76-02 The shift unit home sensor (PS11) Shift unit motor (M5)
does not turn OFF within a speci- LS control board (LSCB)
fied period of time after the shift
unit motor (M5) of the tandem (1st)
LS turns ON. Or, PS11 does not
turn ON within a specified period
of time.
SC76-03 The alignment plate home sensor Alignment motor (M7)
(PS12) does not turn OFF within a LS control board (LSCB)
alignment motor (M7) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS turns ON. Or, PS12
does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time.
SC76-04 The grip conveyance home sensor Grip conveyance motor (M4)
IV Troubleshooting
grip conveyance motor (M4) of the
tandem (1st) LS turns ON.
SC76-05 The stacker tray upper limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
(MS2) is ON when the stacker tray (M1)
up down motor (M1) of the tan- Stacker tray upper limit
dem (1st) LS is in the up opera- switch (MS2)
tion.
SC76-06 The stacker tray lower limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
dem (1st) LS is in the down opera- switch (MS3)
tion.
SC76-07 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Fr
detected for a specified period of (FM1)
time in succession while the paper LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) of the
tandem (1st) LS is ON.
4 -77

operation
LS SC76-08 An error detection signal is The main body Cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
LS
abnor- detected for a specified period of and the LS stop LS control board (LSCB)
mality time in succession while the cool- immediately to
ing fan motor /1 (FM2) of the tan- turn OFF the main
dem (1st) LS is ON. relay (RL1).
SC76-09 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Mi
cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) of the
SC76-10 An error detection signal is Motor cooling fan motor
time in succession while the motor LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor (FM4) of the tan-
dem (1st) LS is ON.
SC76-11 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Rr
cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) of the
SC76-31 The stacker tray encoder sensor Stacker tray up down motor
(PS2) does not turn ON a speci- (M1)
fied period of time after the LS control board (LSCB)
stacker tray up down motor (M1)
IV Troubleshooting
of the tandem (2nd) LS turns ON.

Or, the initial operation or the
stacker tray down operation is not
completed within a specified
period of time.
SC76-32 The shift unit home sensor (PS11) Shift unit motor (M5)
does not turn OFF within a speci- LS control board (LSCB)
fied period of time after the shift
unit motor (M5) of the tandem
(2nd) LS turns ON. Or, PS11 does
period of time.
(PS12) does not turn OFF within a LS control board (LSCB)
alignment motor (M7) of the tan-
dem (2nd) LS turns ON. Or, PS12
does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time.
4 -78

operation
LS LS SC76-34 The grip conveyance home sensor The main body Grip conveyance motor (M4)
abnor- (PS5) does not turn ON within a and the LS stop
mality specified period of time after the immediately to
grip conveyance motor (M4) of the turn OFF the main
tandem (2nd) LS turns ON. relay (RL1).
SC76-35 The stacker tray upper limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
dem (2nd) LS is in the up opera- switch (MS2)
tion.
SC76-36 The stacker tray lower limit switch Stacker tray up down motor
up down motor (M1) of the tan- Stacker tray lower limit
dem (2nd) LS is in the down oper- switch (MS3)
ation.
SC76-37 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Fr
cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) of the
tandem (2nd) LS is ON.
SC76-38 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /1,
detected for a specified period of /2 (FM2, FM6)
cooling fan motor /1, /2 (FM2,
IV Troubleshooting
FM6) of the tandem (2nd) LS is
ON.
SC76-39 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Mi
cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) of the
SC76-40 An error detection signal is Motor cooling fan motor
time in succession while the motor LS control board (LSCB)
cooling fan motor (FM4) of the tan-
dem (2nd) LS is ON.
SC76-41 An error detection signal is Paper cooling fan motor /Rr
cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) of the
4 -79

operation
FS SC77-01 The conveyance motor (M1) oper- The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
abnor- ates for more than the allowed and the FS stop FNS drive board (FNSDB)
mality time at a speed out of the speci- immediately to Conveyance motor (M1)
fied one. turn OFF the main
SC77-02 The tray up down motor (M3) relay (RL1). FNS control board (FNSCB)
does not turn OFF even when a FNS drive board (FNSDB)
specified period of time elapses Tray up down motor (M3)
after it starts operations. Or, it Tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
operates for more than the Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
allowed time at a speed out of the
specified one.
SC77-03 The alignment home sensors /Rr FNS control board (FNSCB)
(PS8) and /Fr (PS31) do not turn FNS drive board (FNSDB)
ON within a specified period of Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
time after the home position Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
search operation of the alignment Alignment home sensor /Rr
motors /Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) (PS8)
starts. Alignment home sensor /Fr
(PS31)
SC77-04 The main tray paper exit motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M7) operates for more than the FNS drive board (FNSDB)
allowed time at a speed out of the Main tray exit motor (M7)
specified one.
SC77-05 The paper exit opening unit does FNS control board (FNSCB)
IV Troubleshooting
not get to the specified opening FNS drive board (FNSDB)

position within a specified period Paper exit opening motor
of time after the paper exit open- (M8)
ing motor (M8) starts operations. Paper exit opening sensor
(PS12)
SC77-06 The stapler movement home sen- FNS control board (FNSCB)
sor (PS11) does not turn ON FNS drive board (FNSDB)
within a specified period of time Stapler movement motor
after the home position search (M11)
operation of the stapler movement Stapler movement home
motor (M11) starts. sensor (PS11)
SC77-07 The stapler rotation home sensor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(PS14) does not turn ON within a FNS drive board (FNSDB)
specified period of time after the Stapler rotation motor (M4)
home position search operation of Stapler rotation home sen-
the stapler rotation motor (M4) sor (PS14)
starts.
4 -80

operation
FS FS SC77-08 The stapler rotation home sensor The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
abnor- (PS14) does not turn OFF within a and the FS stop FNS drive board (FNSDB)
mality specified period of time after the immediately to Stapler rotation motor (M4)
home position search operation of turn OFF the main Stapler rotation home sen-
the stapler rotation motor (M4) relay (RL1). sor (PS14)
starts.
SC77-11 After the stapler motor /Fr (M31) FNS control board (FNSCB)
starts operations, it does not com- FNS drive board (FNSDB)
plete operations within a specified Stapler board (SB)
period of time, and the stapler Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
home sensor /Fr (PS41) does not Stapler home sensor /Fr
turn ON. (PS41)
SC77-12 After the stapler motor /Rr (M30) FNS control board (FNSCB)
starts operations, it does not com- FNS drive board (FNSDB)
plete operations within a specified Stapler board (SB)
period of time, and the stapler Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
home sensor /Rr (PS40) does not Stapler home sensor /Rr
turn ON. (PS40)
SC77-15 After the paper exit arm motor FNS control board (FNSCB)
(M23) starts operations, it does FNS drive board (FNSDB)
not complete operations within a Paper exit arm motor (M23)
specified period of time, and the Paper exit arm home sensor
paper exit arm sensor (PS9) does (PS9)
not turn ON. Or, it operates for
IV Troubleshooting
more than the allowed time at a
speed out of the specified one.
SC77-21 After the home position search FNS control board (FNSCB)
operation of the rear stopper FNS drive board (FNSDB)
motor (M26) starts, the rear stop- Rear stopper motor (M26)
per home sensor (PS35) does not Rear stopper home sensor
turn ON within a specified period (PS35)
of time.
operation of the stack assist guide FNS drive board (FNSDB)
motor (M24) starts, the stack Stack assist guide motor
assist home sensor (PS32) does (M24)
not turn ON within a specified Stack assist home sensor
period of time. (PS32)
operation of the intermediate roller FNS drive board (FNSDB)
open close motor (M25) starts, the Intermediate roller open
intermediate roller home sensor close motor (M25)
(PS33) does not turn ON within a Intermediate roller home
specified period of time. sensor (PS33)
4 -81

operation
FS SC77-28 Data was resent according to the The main body FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
abnor- re-dispatch request of communi- and the FS stop

mality cation data, but the error recurs. immediately to
turn OFF the main
relay (RL1).
FD SC77-30 After the 1st folding release motor The main body 1st folding release motor
FD
abnor- (M14) turns ON, the 1st folding and the FD stop (M14)
mality cam home sensor (PS55) does immediately to Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified turn OFF the main 1st folding cam home sen-
period of time. relay (RL1). sor (PS55)
SC77-31 After the 2nd folding release motor 2nd folding release motor
(M15) turns ON, the 2nd folding (M15)
cam home sensor (PS56) does Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified 2nd folding cam home sen-
period of time. sor (PS56)
SC77-32 After the 3rd folding release motor 3rd folding release motor
(M16) turns ON, the 3rd folding (M16)
cam home sensor (PS57) does Folding drive board (FDB)
not turn ON within a specified 3rd folding cam home sen-
period of time. sor (PS57)
SC77-33 The 2 holes punch home sensor Punch motor (M10)
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the 2 2 holes punch home sensor
holes punch home position return (PS8)
IV Troubleshooting
operation starts. Or, after the

punch motor (M10) turns ON, the
2 holes punch home sensor (PS8)
does not turn OFF.
SC77-34 The 3 holes/4 holes punch home Punch motor (M10)
sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF Punch drive board (PDB)
within a specified period of time 3 holes/4 holes punch home
after the 3 holes/4 holes punch sensor (PS9)
home position return operation
starts. Or, after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 3 holes/4
holes punch home sensor (PS9)
does not turn OFF.
(PS10) does not turn ON within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the Alignment plate home sen-
alignment plate home position sor (PS10)
return operation starts. Or, after
the alignment motor (M12) turns
ON, the alignment plate home
sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF.
4 -82

operation
FD FD SC77-36 The punch registration home sen- The main body Punch registration motor
abnor- sor (PS11) does not turn ON and the FD stop (M13)
mality within a specified period of time immediately to Punch drive board (PDB)
after the punch registration claw turn OFF the main Punch registration home
home position return operation relay (RL1). sensor (PS11)
starts. Or, after the punch registra-
tion motor (M13) turns ON, the
punch registration home sensor
(PS11) does not turn OFF.
SC77-37 The main tray upper limit sensor Tray up down motor (M11)
(PS20) does not turn ON within a Main tray upper limit sensor
specified period of time after the (PS20)
main tray home position search Punch drive board (PDB)
starts. Or, after the tray up down
motor (M11) turns ON, the main
tray upper limit sensor (PS20)
does not turn OFF.
SC77-38 The main tray lower limit sensor Tray up down motor (M11)
(PS22) does not turn ON within a Punch drive board (PDB)
specified period of time after the Main tray lower limit sensor
tray up down motor (M11) is in the (PS22)
down operation.
SC77-39 After the FD paper lift motor /Up Paper lift motor /Up (M8)
(M8) is in the down operation, the PI drive board (PIDB)
IV Troubleshooting
PI lift plate home sensor /Up PI lift plate home sensor /Up
(PS34) does not turn ON within a (PS34)
specified period of time. Or, after PI tray upper limit sensor /
the paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in Up (PS32)
the up operation, the PI tray upper
limit sensor /Up (PS32) does not
turn ON.
SC77-40 After the FD paper lift motor /Lw Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
(M9) is in the down operation, the PI drive board (PIDB)
PI lift plate home sensor /Lw PI lift plate home sensor /Lw
(PS40) does not turn ON within a (PS40)
specified period of time. Or, after PI tray upper limit sensor /
the paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in Lw (PS38)
the up operation, the PI tray upper
limit sensor /Lw (PS38) does not
turn ON.
SC77-41 The entrance conveyance motor Entrance conveyance motor
(M1) detects an error detection (M1)
signal for a specified period of Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession.
4 -83

operation
FD SC77-42 The intermediate conveyance The main body Intermediate conveyance
FD
abnor- motor (M3) detects an error detec- and the FD stop motor (M3)
mality tion signal for a specified period of immediately to Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession. turn OFF the main
SC77-43 The PI conveyance motor (M7) relay (RL1). PI conveyance motor (M7)
detects an error detection signal PI drive board (PIDB)
for a specified period of time in
succession.
SC77-44 The main tray paper exit motor Main tray paper exit motor
(M17) detects an error detection (M17)
signal for a specified period of Punch drive board (PDB)
time in succession.
SC77-48 Resending of communication data Main body I/F wiring har-
due to an error is not available. ness
SC77-49 When non-volatile memory is FD control board (FDCB)
being accessed, no response is
obtained for a specified period of
time.
SC77-58 When the FD is unready, a signal Irregular operations.
to start operations is received from Recovery by turning the
the main body. power ON and OFF.
SC77-59 The communication message
queue between the tasks in the
FD is full.
IV Troubleshooting
Commu- SC80-40 The ISW information is not written. FD control board (FDCB)
nication Or, the ROM check of the FD Wiring harness between the
abnor- results in an error. FDCB and the main body
mality SC80-42 The ISW information is not written. FNS control board (FNSCB)
FS
Or, the ROM check of the FNS Wiring harness between the
results in an error. FNSCB and the main body
4 -84
C. Function to detach defective sections

For those abnormalities listed in the table below, defective units can be detached temporarily to use other con-
trol units.
While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
(1) User operation

When an error code occurs, press the HELP key following the message on the LCD and then turn the power
switch (SW2) OFF and ON. This allows you to use it temporarily until the main power switch (SW1) is OFF and
ON (including an OFF/ON operation by the weekly timer) next time.
(2) DIPSW setting

Turning the main switch OFF and ON after setting the specified software DIPSW bit allows you to make a limited
use of it until the bit setting is released next time (this requires the OFF/ON operation of the main power switch
(SW1)).
Classifi- Error code Description Control while detached DIPSW

cation
SC18-10 Paper lift motor /1 abnormality Paper feed in tray /1 is unavail- DIPSW18-0
Main body
SC18-11 Tray /1 up abnormality 1 able

SC18-12 Tray /1 up abnormality 2 (The operation panel is displayed
in hatching)
SC18-13 Tray /1 up abnormality 3
SC18-22 Tray /2 up abnormality 2 (The control panel is displayed in
hatching)
IV Troubleshooting
PF

hatching)
hatching)
hatching)
SC46-40 HDD initialization abnormality The use of HDD is unavailable DIPSW18-7
Main body
SC46-41 JOB RAM storage abnormality (not connected)

SC46-42 HDD periodic cleaning abnormality
SC46-43 HDD access error
SC67-01 Original registration abnormality DF mode unavailable DIPSW18-4
DF
SC67-02 Original conveyance abnormality (DF connection not recognized)

SC67-03 Original reverse abnormality
SC67-04 RADF control board abnormality
4 -85

cation
SC67-05 Cooling fan abnormality DF mode unavailable DIPSW18-4
DF
SC67-06 Original reverse abnormality (DF connection not recognized)

SC67-07 Original reverse/exit abnormality
SC67-08 Tray up/down abnormality
SC76-01 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray up down The use of the tandem (1st) LS is DIPSW33-06
LS
abnormality unavailable.
SC76-02 Tandem (1st) LS shift unit drive abnormality
SC76-03 Tandem (1st) LS alignment plate drive
abnormality
SC76-04 Tandem (1st) LS grip drive abnormality
SC76-05 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray upper
limit abnormality
SC76-06 Tandem (1st) LS stacker tray lower limit
abnormality
SC76-07 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Fr
drive abnormality
SC76-08 Tandem (1st) LS cooling fan drive
abnormality
SC76-09 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Mi
drive abnormality
SC76-10 Tandem (1st) LS motor cooling fan
drive abnormality
SC76-11 Tandem (1st) LS paper cooling fan /Rr
IV Troubleshooting
drive abnormality
SC76-31 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray up down The use of the tandem (2nd) LS DIPSW33-07
abnormality is unavailable
SC76-32 Tandem (2nd) LS shift unit drive abnormality
SC76-33 Tandem (2nd) LS alignment plate drive
abnormality
SC76-34 Tandem (2nd) LS grip drive abnormality
SC76-35 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray upper
limit abnormality
SC76-36 Tandem (2nd) LS stacker tray lower
limit abnormality
SC76-37 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Fr
drive abnormality
SC76-38 Tandem (2nd) LS cooling fan drive
abnormality
SC76-39 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Mi
drive abnormality
SC76-40 Tandem (2nd) LS motor cooling fan
drive abnormality
SC76-41 Tandem (2nd) LS paper cooling fan /Rr
drive abnormality
4 -86

cation
SC77-02 Tray up down drive abnormality The use of sorting and stapling DIPSW35-1
FS
SC77-03 Alignment drive abnormality functions is unavailable
SC77-04 Paper exit roller drive abnormality
SC77-05 Paper exit opening drive abnormality
SC77-06 Staple abnormality The use of staple is unavailable DIPSW35-0
SC77-07 Staple rotation drive abnormality (skew
rotation)
SC77-08 Staple rotation abnormality (vertical
rotation)
SC77-11 Staple unit /Fr abnormality
SC77-12 Staple unit /Rr abnormality
SC77-15 Paper exit arm drive abnormality The use of sorting and stapling DIPSW35-1
SC77-21 Rear stopper drive abnormality functions is unavailable
SC77-22 Stack assist drive abnormality
SC77-25 Intermediate roller open/close drive
abnormality
SC77-30 1st folding cam drive abnormality The use of the folding function DIPSW33-0
FD
SC77-31 2nd folding cam drive abnormality and the punch section is unavail-
able
SC77-32 3rd folding cam drive abnormality
SC77-33 2 holes punch drive abnormality
SC77-34 3 holes/4 holes punch drive abnormality
IV Troubleshooting
SC77-35 Punch alignment plate drive abnormality
SC77-36 Punch paper rear registration drive
abnormality
SC77-37 Main tray upper limit abnormality Main tray paper exit is unavail- DIPSW33-2
able
SC77-38 Main tray lower limit abnormality
SC77-39 PI lift plate /Up up/down abnormality The use of the PI section DIPSW33-3
SC77-40 PI lift plate /Lw up/down abnormality unavailable
SC77-41 Entrance conveyance drive abnormality The use of the entire FD unavail- DIPSW33-4
SC77-42 Intermediate conveyance drive abnormality able
SC77-43 PI conveyance drive abnormality
SC77-44 Paper exit conveyance drive abnormality
4 -87
Blank page
IV Troubleshooting
4 -88
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
V APPENDIX
1. ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

1.1 Main body
A. Switch/sensor
(1) Main body rear side
[3] [2] [1]

1050fs5001c
[1] Pump encoder sensor /1 (PS28) [3] Dehumidification heater switch (SW3)
[2] Pump encoder sensor /2 (PS29)
V Appendix
5 -1
ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
(2) Main body upper surface
[6]
[5]
[7] [8] [9] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
1050fs5002c
[1] Air motor encoder sensor (PS30) [6] Door open/close sensor /1 (PS1)
[2] Main power switch (SW1) [7] Scanner home sensor (PS51)
[3] Interlock switch /2 (MS2) [8] APS sensor /1 (PS52)
[4] Door open/close sensor /2 (PS2) [9] APS sensor /2 (PS53)
[5] Interlock switch /1 (MS1)
V Appendix
5 -2
(3) Cleaning section
[2]
[1] 1050fs5003c
[1] Blade sensor /1 (PS24) [2] Blade sensor /2 (PS25)
(4) Charger unit
[2] [1]
V Appendix
1050fs5004c
[1] Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) [2] Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27)
5 -3
(5) Toner supply section
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1050fs5005c
[1] Toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [4] Toner remaining sensor /3 (PS33)
[2] Door switch /2 (SW5) [5] Toner remaining sensor /4 (PS34)
[3] Toner remaining sensor /2 (PS32)
(6) Photosensitive material section

V Appendix
[2] [1]
1050fs5006c
[1] Drum temperature sensor (TH5) [2] Drum potential sensor (DPS)
5 -4
(7) Paper feed section
[8]
[6] [7]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2] 1050fs5062c
[1] Handle release sensor /1 (PS9), /2 (PS15) [5] Remaining paper VR /1 (VR1), /2 (VR3)
[2] Paper size VR /1 (VR2), /2 (VR4) [6] Upper limit sensors /1 (PS6), /2 (PS12) V Appendix
[3] Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS5), /2 (PS11) [7] Paper feed sensor /1 (PS7), /2 (PS13)
[4] Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10) [8] Paper empty sensor /1 (PS8), /2 (PS14)
5 -5
(8) Vertical conveyance section
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
1050fs5063c
[1] Loop sensor (PS16) [5] Vertical conveyance sensor /2 (PS20)

[2] Door switch /1 (SW4) [6] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17)
V Appendix
[3] Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS18) [7] Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)

[4] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS21)
5 -6
(9) Registration section
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
1050fs5007c
[1] ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) [3] Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
[2] Centering sensor (PS54) [4] Registration sensor (PS40)
(10) ADU section 1
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
V Appendix
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 1050fs5008
[1] ADU exit sensor (PS43) [6] Paper exit sensor (PS3)
[2] ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS36) [7] Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
[3] ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS35) [8] Reverse sensor /2 (PS47)
[4] ADU accelerate sensor (PS49) [9] ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46)
[5] ADU reverse paper exit sensor (PS50) [10] ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)
5 -7
(11) ADU section 2
[3] [1]
[2]
1050fs5009c
[1] Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS39) [3] ADU handle release sensor (PS44)
[2] Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS38)
(12) Transfer/separation charger unit
[1]
V Appendix
1050fs5010
[1] Transfer assist home sensor (PS37)
5 -8
(13) Fusing section
[8]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[4] [2] [1]

[5]
1050fs5011c
[1] Fusing jam sensor (PS23) [5] Thermistor /4 (TH4)

[2] Fusing exit sensor (PS22) [6] Thermostat /1 (TS1)
[3] Thermistor /3 (TH3) [7] Thermistor /1 (TH1)
[4] Thermostat /2 (TS2) [8] Thermistor /2 (TH2)
(14) Operation panel section
[1]
V Appendix
1050fs5012
[1] Power switch (SW2)
5 -9
B. Load
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]
[12] [1]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7] [6]
1050fs5013c
[1] Pump cooling fan (FM11) [11] Vertical conveyance motor (M8)
[2] Cooling fan /1 (FM1) [12] IC cooling fan (FM24)
[3] Paper exit motor /1 (M9) [13] Developing motor (M3)
[4] Conveyance motor (M5) [14] Drum motor (M2)
[5] Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [15] Cooling fan /3 (FM3)
[6] Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM27) [16] Scanner motor (M27)
[7] Power supply cooling fan /2 (FM26) [17] Cooling fan /2 (FM2)
[8] Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM25) [18] Fusing motor (M1)
V Appendix
[9] Paper feed motor (M4) [19] Air pump motor (M29)
[10] Paper feed motor (M4) [20] Toner pump motor (M28)
5 -10
[1]
[3] [2]
1050fs5014c
[1] Air separation motor (M10) [3] Scanner cooling fan (FM19)
[2] IPB cooling fan (FM12)
(3) Main body right side
[1]
[2]
[3]
V Appendix
[4]
1050fs5015c
[1] Polygon cooling fan (FM18) [3] Suction fan /2 (FM7)

[2] Suction fan /1 (FM6) [4] Suction fan /3 (FM8)
5 -11
(4) Main body left side
[3]
[2]
[1]
1050fs5016c
[1] Paper exit cooling fan /2 (FM10) [3] Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)
[2] Paper exit cooling fan /3 (FM28)
(5) Cleaning section
[1]
V Appendix
1050fs5017
[1] Blade motor (M22)
5 -12
(6) Charger unit
[1]
1050fs5018c
[1] Charger cleaning motor (M23)
(7) Toner supply section
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
V Appendix
[3]
1050fs5019c
[1] Tray lock solenoid /1 (SD1) [4] Toner hopper motor (M7)
[2] Tray lock solenoid /2 (SD2) [5] Toner bottle motor (M6)
[3] Intermediate hopper motor (M11)
5 -13
(8) Drum claw unit
[1]
1050fs5020c
[1] Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
(9) Paper feed section
[5] [6]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
V Appendix
1050fs5064c
[1] Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) [4] Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)
[2] Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7) [5] Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22)
[3] Paper lift motor /1 (M25), /2 (M26) [6] Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM21), /Rr2 (FM23)
5 -14
[1]
[2]
1050fs5066c
[1] Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) [2] Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR2)
(10) Vertical conveyance section
[3]
[2]
V Appendix
[1]
1050fs5065c
[1] Pre-registration clutch /2 [3] Pre-registration clutch /1

[2] Vertical conveyance clutch
5 -15
(11) ADU
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[17] [16] [5] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
1050fs5021
[1] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) [10] Registration cooling fan (FM17)

[2] ADU cooling fan /3 (FM13) [11] Loop motor (M18)
[3] Thick paper assist solenoid (SD8) [12] ADU cooling fan /1 (FM14)
[4] Transfer assist motor (M19) [13] Registration motor (M17)
[5] Reverse paper exit motor (M13) [14] ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
[6] ADU conveyance motor /2 (M16) [15] Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20)
[7] ADU accelerate motor (M14) [16] ADU reverse motor (M12)
[8] ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) [17] Sensor cooling fan (FM16)
V Appendix
[9] ADU conveyance motor /1 (M15)
5 -16
(12) Writing section
[1]
1050fs5022c
[1] Polygon motor (M21)
(13) Fusing section
[1]
V Appendix
1050fs5023c
[1] Web motor (M24)
5 -17
C. Boards and others

[24]
[25]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]

1050fs5024c
[1] Recycle cut drive board (RCDB) [13] Coil (L)

[2] High voltage unit /1 (HV1) [14] Transformer /2 (T2)
V Appendix
[3] PCI relay board (PCIRB) [15] DC power supply /2 (DCPS2)

[4] Printer control board (PRCB) [16] Hard disk /2 (HDD2)
[5] AC drive board (ACDB) [17] DC power supply /1 (DCPS1)
[6] Transformer /1 (T1) [18] Parameter board (PB)
[7] Noise filter /2 (NF2) [19] Image processing board (IPB)
[8] Noise filter /1 (NF1) [20] Hard disk /1 (HDD1)
[9] Outlet [21] Overall control board (OACB)
[10] Circuit breaker (CBR) [22] IC board (ICB)
[11] Sub relay (RL2) [23] Scanner drive board (SDB)
[12] Main relay (RL1) [24] Triac /2 (TRC2)
[25] Triac /1 (TRC1)
5 -18
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
1050fs5025c
[1] CCD board (CCDB) [3] Exposure lamp (L1)

[2] L1 inverter (L1 INVB) [4] Total counter (CNT1)
(3) Charger unit
V Appendix
[1] 1050fs5031c
[1] Erase lamp (EL)
5 -19
(4) Photosensitive material section
[2] [1]
1050fs5026c
[1] Drum potential sensor board (DPSB) [2] Toner control sensor board (TCSB)
(5) Registration section

V Appendix
[2] [1]
1050fs5027c
[1] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)
5 -20
(6) ADU
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
1050fs5028
[1] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) [3] ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2)
[2] High voltage unit /2 (HV2) [4] ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1)
V Appendix
5 -21
(7) Writing section
[2] [3]
[1]
1050fs5029c
[1] Polygon motor drive board (PMDB) [3] Laser drive board (LDB)
[2] Index board (INDEXB)
(8) Fusing section
[2] [3]
V Appendix
[1]
1050fs5030c
[1] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3) [3] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
[2] Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4)
5 -22
(9) Operation panel section
[1] [2] [3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
1050fs5032
[1] LCD board (LCDB) [5] Operation board /3 (OB3)

[2] Backlight /1 [6] Operation board /1 (OB1)
[3] Backlight /2 [7] Panel key board (PKB)
[4] Operation board /2 (OB2) [8] OB inverter (OB INVB)
V Appendix
5 -23
1.2 DF-603
A. Front side
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2] df603fs5001c
[1] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [4] Gate solenoid (SD303)
[2] Exit gate solenoid (SD304) [5] RADF open/close sensor (PS301)
[3] Pressure roller release solenoid (SD302)
V Appendix
5 -24
B. Rear side
[12] [13] [14] [15] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6]

df603fs5002c
[1] Original conveyance motor (M301) [9] Original paper exit motor /1 (M304)
[2] Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) [10] Original paper exit motor /2 (M305)
[3] Original conveyance sensor (PS308) [11] RADF control board (RADFCB)
[4] Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) [12] Cooling fan /Rt (FM302)
[5] Cooling fan /Lt (FM301) [13] Tray up/down motor (M303)
[6] APS timing sensor (PS317) [14] Cover open/close switch (MS301)
[7] Original feed motor (M302) [15] Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)
[8] SDF switching solenoid (SD301)
V Appendix
5 -25
C. Upper surface
[15] [16] [17] [1] [2] [3]

[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10] [14] [13] [12] [4]
[9]
df603fs5003c
[1] Original count sensor (PS310) [10] Multi feed sensor /2 (MFS2)
[2] Original size sensor /Lt (PS303) [11] Original registration sensor /Lt (PS306)
[3] Original size sensor /Rt (PS302) [12] Original reverse sensor (PS309)
[4] Reverse jam sensor (PS304) [13] Centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319)
[5] Original empty sensor (PS305) [14] Centering sensor /Fr (PS320)
[6] Tray upper limit sensor (PS315) [15] Centering sensor /Rr (PS321)
[7] Original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [16] Centering LED sensor /Rr (PS322)
[8] Multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) [17] Original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
[9] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)
V Appendix
5 -26
D. Upper tray rear side
[1]
[2]
df603fs5004c
[1] Tray board (TB) [2] Original size VR (VR301)
E. Reverse tray rear side
[1]
V Appendix
[2] df603fs5005c
[1] Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314) [2] Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
5 -27
1.3 PF-701
A. Configuration front side
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
pf701fs5001c
[1] Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) [4] Tray lock solenoid /3 (SD12)

B. Configuration left side/exit conveyance section
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
V Appendix
[4]
[3]
pf701fs5002c
[1] Door open/close sensor (PS70) [4] PF exit sensor (PS99)

[2] Door switch (SW10) [5] Horizontal conveyance door switch (SW13)
[3] Paper feed motor (M40) [6] PF exit conveyance motor (M41)
5 -28
C. Configuration rear side
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
pf701fs5003c
[1] Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1) [5] Intermediate clutch /Lw (CL5)

[2] Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2) [6] Pre-registration clutch /3 (CL4)
[3] Cooling fan (FM20) [7] PF drive board (PFUDB)
[4] Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3)
V Appendix
5 -29
D. Vertical conveyance section
[1]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10] [9]
pf701fs5004c
[1] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS89) [7] Intermediate sensor /Lw (PS97)

[2] Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS90) [8] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS96)
[3] Intermediate sensor /Up (PS91) [9] Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS95)
[4] Loop sensor /1 (PS92) [10] Loop sensor /2 (PS94)
V Appendix
[5] Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS93) [11] Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw (SW12)
[6] Loop sensor /3 (PS98) [12] Vertical conveyance door switch /Up (SW11)
5 -30
E. Tray section 1
[1]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[7] [6] pf701fs5005c
[1] Paper feed assist fan /Fr1, /Fr2, /Fr3 [6] Remaining paper VR /1, /2, /3 (VR10/VR12/
(FM41/FM43/FM45) VR14)
[2] Pick-up solenoid /1, /2, /3 (SD14/SD15/SD16) [7] Forced separation clutch (CL11) (tray 4 only)
[3] Paper feed sensor /1, /2, /3 (PS72/PS78/PS84) [8] Separation clutch /1, /2, /3 (CL7/CL10/CL13)
[4] Upper limit sensors /1, /2, /3 (PS71/PS77/PS83) [9] Pick-up clutches /1, /2, /3 (CL6/CL9/CL12)
[5] Paper lift motor /1, /2, /3 (M42/M43/M44) [10] Paper feed assist fan /Rr1, /Rr2, /Rr3
(FM42/FM44/FM46)
V Appendix
5 -31
F. Tray section 2
[4] [1]
[3] [2] pf701fs5006c
[1] Paper size VR /1, /2, /3 (VR11/VR13/VR15) [3] Paper size sensor /Fr1, /Fr2, /Fr3 (PS75/
[2] Paper size sensor /Rr1, /Rr2, /Rr3 (PS76/ PS81/PS87)
PS82/PS88) [4] Paper empty sensor /1, /2, /3 (PS73/PS79/
PS85)
V Appendix
5 -32
1.4 FD-501
A. Conveyance section front side/right side
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
fd501fs5001c
[1] Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [7] Door switch (MS1)
[2] FD entrance sensor (PS1) [8] Jam indicator board (JAMIB)
[3] Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) [9] Temperature sensor board (TSB)
[4] Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2)
[5] Roller solenoid /3 (SD7) [11] PI exit sensor (PS4)
[6] Roller solenoid /4 (SD8) [12] FD operation board (FDOB)
V Appendix
5 -33
B. Major boards in the power source section
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[11]
[7]
[10] [9] [8] fd501fs5002c
[1] PI drive board (PIDB) [7] Noise filter (NF1)

[2] FD control board (FDCB) [8] Inlet
[3] Punch drive board (PDB) [9] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[4] DC power supply (DCPS) [10] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
[5] Folding drive board (FDB) [11] Relay (RL1)
[6] Outlet
V Appendix
5 -34
C. Conveyance section rear side/left side
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[7] [6] [5]
[13]
[8]
[12]
[11] [10] [9] fd501fs5003c
[1] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [11] Tray up down motor (M11)
[2] Paper exit solenoid (SD12) [12] L size gate solenoid (SD4)
[3] Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS16) [13] S size gate solenoid (SD3)
[4] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17) [14] Alignment motor (M12)
[5] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) [15] Punch conveyance motor (M2)
[6] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) [16] Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
[7] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9) [17] Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
[8] Main tray empty sensor (PS23) [18] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[9] Main tray folding paper full sensor (PS7) [19] Main tray paper exit motor (M17)
[10] Main tray lower limit sensor (PS22)
V Appendix
5 -35
D. PI rear side
[6] [7] [8] [1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5] fd501fs5004c
[1] Paper lift motor /Up (M8) [5] PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2)
[2] PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) [6] PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31)
[3] Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) [7] PI conveyance motor (M7)
[4] PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) [8] PI registration clutch /Up (CL1)
E. PI upper surface
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
V Appendix
[13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] fd501fs5005c
[1] PI paper set sensor /Up (PS44) [7] PI paper empty sensor /Up (PS33)
[2] S size sensor /Up (PS36) [8] PI paper empty sensor /Lw (PS39)
[3] PI max paper size sensor /Up (PS47) [9] PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37)
[4] L size sensor /Up (PS35) [10] PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
[5] Paper size VR /Up (VR31) [11] PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)
[6] PI cover open/close sensor (PS43) [12] PI pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD14)
[13] PI pick-up solenoid /Up (SD13)
5 -36
F. PI lower tray
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] fd501fs5006c
[1] PI paper set sensor /Lw (PS45) [4] L size sensor /Lw (PS41)
[2] Paper size VR /Lw (VR32) [5] PI max paper size sensor /Lw (PS48)
[3] S size sensor /Lw (PS42)
V Appendix
5 -37
G. Punch section
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[7] [6] [5] [4] fd501fs5007c
[1] Punch registration home sensor (PS11) [7] Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
[2] Punch motor (M10) [8] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS12)
[3] 3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9) [9] Alignment plate home sensor (PS10)
[4] 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) [10] Punch scraps full sensor (PS26)
[5] Punch registration motor (M13) [11] Folding exit sensor (PS2)
[6] Punch registration sensor (PS6) [12] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
V Appendix
5 -38
H. Folding unit front side/right side
[1]
[10] [2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7] [4]
[6] [5] fd501fs5008c
[1] S size conveyance sensor (PS58) [6] 1st folding release motor (M14)
[2] 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) [7] 2nd folding release motor (M15)
[3] Folding entrance sensor (PS52) [8] 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
[4] 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) [9] 3rd folding release motor (M16)
[5] 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55) [10] 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
V Appendix
5 -39
I. Folding unit rear side/left side
[1] [2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] fd501fs5009c
[1] 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [4] 2nd folding motor (M5)
[2] 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [5] Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
[3] 1st folding motor (M4) [6] 3rd folding motor (M6)
V Appendix
5 -40
1.5 LS-501/502
A. Front side
[13] [14] [15] [16]
[17] [18] [19] [20] [21]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10] [9] [8]
[12] [11] ls502fs5001c
[1] Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) [11] Paper empty sensor (PS6)
[2] Entrance sensor (PS4) [12] Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
[3] Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) [13] Relay board /1 (RLB/1)
[4] Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) [14] Shift unit home sensor (PS11)
[5] Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) [15] Stacker tray set LED (LED1)
[6] Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) [16] Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)
[7] Front door lock solenoid (SD4) [17] Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)
[8] Front door switch (MS1) (LS-501 only) V Appendix
[9] Hand cart set switch (RS1) [18] Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7)
[10] Stacker tray set sensor (PS1) [19] Alignment motor (M7)
[20] 2nd gate solenoid (SD10) (LS-501 only)
[21] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) (LS-502 only)
5 -41
B. Upper surface
[9] [10] [11] [12] [1] [2]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] ls502fs5002c
[1] Conveyance sensor /3 (PS17) (LS-501 only) [7] Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
[2] Jam indication board (JAMIB) [8] Stacker tray operation board (TOB)
[3] Coupling exit sensor (PS18) (LS-501 only) [9] Conveyance sensor /1 (PS7)
[4] JAM door switch (MS4) (LS-501 only) [10] Sub tray full sensor (PS9)
[5] Sub tray door sensor (PS8) [11] Sub tray exit sensor (PS10)
[6] Paper cooling fan motor /2 (FM6) [12] Conveyance sensor /2 (PS16) (LS-501 only)
V Appendix
5 -42
C. Rear side
[20]
[19]
[1]
[18] [2]
[17] [3]
[4]
[16]
[15] [5]
[6]
[14]
[13] [7]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8] ls502fs5003c
[1] Shift unit motor (M5) [11] 2,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13)
[2] Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) [12] Inlet (LS-501 only)
[3] Grip conveyance motor (M4) [13] Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[4] Coupling conveyance motor (M6) (LS-501 only) [14] Stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2)
[5] LS control board (LSCB) [15] Job partition solenoid (SD2)
[6] DC power supply (DCPS) (LS-501 only) [16] 1st gate solenoid (SD1)
V Appendix
[7] Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) [17] Conveyance motor (M2)
[8] Outlet (LS-501 only) [18] Sub tray exit motor (M3)
[9] Stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15) [19] Motor cooling fan motor (FM4)
[10] 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) [20] Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
5 -43
D. Shift unit
[3] [4]
[2] [1] ls502fs5004c
[1] Front stopper solenoid (SD9) [3] Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
[2] Relay board /2 (RLB/2) [4] Stacker tray upper limit sensor (PS3)
V Appendix
5 -44
1.6 FS-503
A. Rear side 1
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
[3] fs503fs5001c
[1] Counter reset sensor (PS15) [4] FNS drive board (FNSDB)
[2] Tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [5] FNS control board (FNSCB)
[3] Tray up down motor (M3)
V Appendix
5 -45
B. Rear side 2
[6] [7] [8] [1]

[2]
[3]
[5] [4] fs503fs5002c
[1] Main tray exit motor (M7) [5] Gate solenoid (SD2)
[2] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9) [6] Conveyance motor (M1)
[3] Paper exit opening sensor (PS12) [7] Paper exit opening motor (M8)
[4] Bypass solenoid (SD5) [8] Sub tray exit motor (M6)
C. Front side
[8] [9] [10]
[1]
[2]
V Appendix
[7] [6] [5] [3]
[4]
fs503fs5003c
[1] FNS entrance sensor (PS4) [6] Staple exit upper limit sensor (PS7)
[2] Staple scraps box set sensor (PS34) [7] Tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
[3] Door switch (MS1) [8] Main tray exit sensor (PS10)
[4] Jam indication board (JAMIB) [9] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)
[5] Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) [10] Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
5 -46
D. Stacker inside 1
[9] [10] [1]
[8]
[2]
[7] [3]
[5] [4]
[6]
fs503fs5004c
[1] Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) [6] Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
[2] Stacker entrance motor (M13) [7] Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
[3] Paper exit arm motor (M23) [8] Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
[4] Paddle motor (M2) [9] Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
[5] Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [10] Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
V Appendix
5 -47
E. Stacker inside 2
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
V Appendix
[7] [6] fs503fs5005c
[1] Alignment motor /Rr (M5) [6] Rear stopper motor (M26)
[2] Alignment motor /Fr (M22) [7] Stapler movement motor (M11)
[3] Stack assist guide motor (M24) [8] Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
[4] Stack assist home sensor (PS32) [9] Stapler rotation motor (M4)
[5] Rear stopper home sensor (PS35) [10] Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)
5 -48
F. Stapler
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs5006c
[1] Stapler ready sensor /Rr (PS46) [4] Stapler board (STB)
Stapler ready sensor /Fr (PS47) [5] Staple empty sensor /Rr (PS44)
[2] Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40) Staple empty sensor /Fr (PS45)
Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41) [6] Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
[3] Cartridge set sensor /Rr (PS42) Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
Cartridge set sensor /Fr (PS43)
V Appendix
5 -49
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 Main body
A. Connector in the board
(1) Printer control board
222(W : 18 pin) 216(W : 15 pin) 214(W : 11 pin) 223(W : 16 pin)

227(W : 10 pin) 225(W : 16 pin) 228(W : 26 pin) 401(W : 2 pin)
301(W : 2 pin)
224(W : 6 pin) 293(W : 10 pin) 211(W : 15 pin)

325(W : 6 pin) 422(W : 6 pin)
211(W : 15 pin)
212(W : 4 pin)
324(W : 7 pin) 215(W : 20 pin)
424(W : 4 pin)
210(W : 19 pin)
328(W : 6 pin)
323(W : 8 pin)
229(W : 17 pin)
326(W : 4 pin) 300(W : 2pin)
320(W : 16pin)
322(W : 5 pin) 213(W : 34 pin)
321(W : 4 pin) 220(GY : 34 pin) 200(W : 7 pin)

327(W : 10 pin) 217(W : 15 pin) 218(W : 9 pin)
1050fs5033c
(2) Image processing board
195 (GY : 40 pin)

110 (W : 40 pin) 103 (W : 4 pin)
V Appendix
124 (BK : 100 pin)
125 (W : 2 pin)
123 (BK : 100 pin)

134 (BK : 36 pin)
132 (W : 5 pin) 129 (W : 40 pin)
130 (W : 24 pin) 128 (W : 10 pin) 1050fs5034c
5 -50
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
(3) Overall control board
136 (W : 40 pin)
104 (W : 4 pin) 112 (BK : 100 pin) 113 (BK : 100 pin)
111 (W : 4 pin)
139 (BK : 9 pin) 109 (BK : 120 pin)
137 (W : 15 pin)
138 (W : 15 pin) 100 (W : 6 pin)

135 (W : 19 pin) 101 (W : 12 pin) 1050fs5035c
(4) AC drive board
420 (W : 18 pin)
35 (W : 5 pin)
36 (W : 10 pin)
411 (W : 11 pin)
V Appendix
410 (W : 34 pin)
100 (W : 8 pin) 442 (W : 9 pin)

440 (W : 4 pin) 1050fs5036c
5 -51
(5) Scanner drive board
620 (W : 3 pin)
623 (W : 7 pin) 621 (W : 3 pin)
622 (W : 4 pin)
610 (W : 15 pin) 600 (W : 6 pin)

1050fs5037c
(6) ADU drive board /1
528 (W : 6 : pin)
520 (W : 6 pin)
620 (W : 3 pin)
510 (GY : 2 pin) 521 (GY : 28 pin)
510 (GY : 15 pin)

534 (W : 3 pin) 513 (W : 2 pin)
529 (W : 6 pin)
523 (GY : 19 pin)
531 (W : 10 pin) 527 (GY : 30 pin) 512 (W : 6 pin) 524 (W : 6 pin)

500 (W : 9 pin) 526 (GY : 30 pin) 511 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5038c
V Appendix
5 -52
(7) ADU drive board /2
594 (W : 6 pin)
590 (GY : 19 pin)
596 (W : 3 pin)
591 (GY : 2 pin) 592 (W : 6 pin)

593 (W : 6 pin) 595 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5039c
(8) DC power supply /1
2 (W : 3 pin)
76 (W : 4 pin) 75 (W : 2 pin)
77 (W : 10 pin) 71 (W : 7 pin)
74 (W : 14 pin) 73 (W : 6 pin) 1050fs5040c
V Appendix
5 -53
(9) DC power supply /2
11 (W : 14 pin) 13 (W : 18 pin) 21 (W : 4 pin)

3 (W : 3 pin) 15 (W : 14 pin) 12 (W : 22 pin) 14 (W : 4 pin)
4 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 3 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
1050fs5041c
(10) High voltage unit /1
251 (W : 11 pin) 250 (W : 3 pin) 1050fs5056c

V Appendix
5 -54
(11) High voltage unit /2
650 (W : 4 pin)
651 (W : 11 pin) 1050fs5042c
(12) Operation board /1
711 (W : 6 pin) 707 (W : 4 pin)

704 (W : 28 pin) 710 (W : 5 pin) 706 (W : 5 pin)
709 (W : 2 pin) 705 (W : 7 pin)
1050fs5043
V Appendix
5 -55
708 (W : 4 pin) 700 (W : 40 pin)
703 (W : 28 pin) 701 (W : 4 pin) 702 (W : 41 pin) 1050fs5044c
712 (W : 7 pin) 1050fs5045c
(15) OB inverter
713 (W : 7 pin) 714 (W : 3 pin) 715 (W : 3 pin) 1050fs5046c
(16) CCD board

V Appendix
170 (W : 50 pin)
1050fs5047c
(17) Polygon motor drive board
131 (W : 6 pin) 133 (W : 11 pin)

1050fs5048c
5 -56
(18) Laser drive board
56 (GY : 24 pin)
1050fs5049c
(19) Index board
51 (GY : 5 pin)
1050fs5050c
(20) L1 inverter
632 (W : 4 pin) 2 (W : 2 pin)

1050fs5051c
(21) Toner control sensor board
V Appendix
454 (W : 10 pin) 1050fs5057c
(22) Drum potential sensor board
457 (W : 5 pin) 458 (W : 4 pin) 1050fs5058c
5 -57
(23) Multi feed detection board /1
490 (W : 3 pin)
1050fs5052c
(24) Multi feed detection board /2
491 (W : 6 pin)
1050fs5053c
(25) Parameter board
141 (W : 40 pin)
V Appendix
142 (W : 20 pin)
1050fs5059c
5 -58
(26) IC board
882 (BK : 160 pin)

881 (BK : 160 pin)
889 (BK : 9 pin) 893 (BK : 40 pin)
886 (BK : 4 pin)
885 (W : 4 pin)
897 (BK : 80 pin) 884 (B : 80 pin) 1050fs5054c
V Appendix
5 -59
2.2 DF-603
2.2.1 Connector in the board
A. RADF control board
J1 (N.C.) J3 (N.C.) 5 (W : 3 pin) 7 (W : 12 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
4 (W : 4 pin) 6 (W : 4pin) 8 (GY : 34 pin)
2 (W : 8 pin) J2 (N.C.)
9 (W : 5 pin)
1 (W : 4 pin)
10 (W : 6 pin)
17 (W : 4 pin)
14 (W : 6 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
16 (W : 3 pin) 15 (W : 9 pin) 13 (W : 6 pin) 12 (W : 7 pin) df603fs5007c
B. Tray board
24 (W : 9 pin)
23 (W : 6 pin)
25 (W : 3 pin)
df603fs5008c
V Appendix
C. Multi feed detection board /1
26 (W : 3 pin)
27 (W : 2 pin) df603fs5009c
5 -60
D. Multi feed detection board /2
22 (W : 2 pin)
21 (W : 3 pin) df603fs5010c
V Appendix
5 -61
2.3 PF-701
A. PFU control board
720 (W : 10 pin)
714 (W : 3 pin) 724 (W : 6 pin) 701 (W : 2 pin)
716 (GY : 4 pin)

710 (W : 14 pin)
723 (W : 6 pin)
722 (W : 10 pin)
N.C.
711 (GY : 28 pin)

N.C.
721 (GY : 22 pin)
SW1
717 (GY : 10 pin)
712 (GY : 14 pin) 715 (W : 6 pin) 700 (W : 7 pin)

713 (GY : 15 pin) 705 (GY : 15 pin)
SW1
ON
1
2
pf701fs5007c
NOTE
• Since the setting of DIP switch (SW1) is peculiar to the type, be sure not to change its setting.
V Appendix
5 -62
2.4 FD-501
A. FD control board
18 (W : 2 pin) 13 (GY : 9 pin) 9 (N.C.)

17 (W : 8 pin) 11 (GY : 6 pin) 7 (N.C.)
16 (W : 7 pin)
12 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
20 (W : 4 pin) 22 (N.C.)
15 (GY : 7 pin)
SW3
21 (N.C.) 5 (B : 40 pin)
2 (GY : 40 pin)
14 (GY : 18 pin) 1 (GY : 32 pin) 6 (B : 16 pin)

3 (GY : 16 pin) 4 (B : 32 pin)
ON
SW3
1 2 3 4 fd501fs5010c
NOTE
• Since the setting of DIP switch (SW3) is peculiar to the type, be sure not to change its setting.
V Appendix
5 -63
B. Punch drive board
224 (GY : 20 pin) 210 (GY : 28 pin) 203 (GY : 18 pin)
220 (GY : 24 pin) 201 (GY : 40 pin)
219 (GY : 26 pin)

208 (GY : 9 pin)
222 (GY : 12 pin) 202 (GY : 32 pin)
206 (W : 4 pin)
221 (GY : 22 pin) 204 (GY : 40 pin)
223 (GY : 11 pin) 209 (GY : 34 pin)
215 (W : 8 pin)
211 (W : 4 pin)
217 (W : 9 pin) 207 (W : 6 pin)
216 (W : 12 pin) 205 (W : 5 pin) fd501fs5011c
C. Folding drive board
500 (W : 4 pin) 508 (GY : 36 pin) 507 (GY : 15 pin)
501 (GY : 34 pin)
503 (GY : 16 pin)

V Appendix
506 (W : 6 pin)
505 (W : 12 pin) fd501fs5012c
5 -64
D. PI drive board
309 (W : 4 pin) 311 (GY : 26 pin) 314 (GY : 15 pin)
313 (GY : 8 pin)

306 (GY : 18 pin)
305 (GY : 16 pin)
318 (GY : 7 pin)

315 (GY : 6 pin) 307 (GY : 20 pin)
308 (W : 3 pin)
317 (GY : 4 pin) 303 (GY : 6 pin) 300 (W : 2 pin)
304 (GY : 28 pin) 301 (GY : 16 pin) 302 (GY : 32 pin) fd501fs5013c
E. FD operation board
361 (GY : 26 pin)
fd501fs5014c
F. Jam indicator board
370 (GY : 6 pin)
V Appendix
fd501fs5015c
5 -65
G. DC power supply board
51 (W : 8 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin) fd501fs5016c
H. Multi feed detection board /1, /2
490 (W : 3 pin)
fd501fs5025c
I. Temperature sensor board
374 (GY : 4 pin)
fd501fs5026c
V Appendix
5 -66
2.5 LS-501/502
A. LS control board
22 (W : 2 pin) 5 (W : 9 pin)
21 (W : 4 pin) 11 (W : 6 pin)
24 (W : 12 pin) 2 (W : 15 pin)
6 (W : 3 pin) 1 (W : 13 pin)
23 (W : 11 pin) 3 (W : 5 pin) 4 (W : 12 pin)

30 (BL : 10 pin) 29 (W : 7 pin)
28 (W : 2 pin) (N.C.) (N.C.) 9 (W : 11 pin)
26 (W : 5 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
27 (W : 4 pin)
12 (W : 6 pin) 25 (W : 6 pin) 13 (W : 7 pin)
14 (W : 2 pin)
10 (W : 10 pin)
20 (W : 4 pin)
18 (W : 7 pin)
19 (W : 3 pin) 7 (W : 14 pin)
15 (W : 12 pin) 17 (W : 6 pin) 16 (W : 13 pin) ls502fs5005c
B. Relay board /1
4 (W : 16 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin) ls502fs5006c
V Appendix
C. Relay board /2
4 (W : 16 pin)
1 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 4 pin) ls502fs5007c
5 -67
D. DC power supply
51 (W : 6 pin)
1 (W : 5 pin)
52 (W : 2 pin)
ls502fs5008c
V Appendix
5 -68
2.6 FS-503
A. FNS control board
19 (W : 4 pin) 9 (GY : 40 pin)
16 (W : 7 pin)
10 (GY : 3 pin) 12 (N.C.)
20 (W : 4 pin) 22 (GY : 20 pin)
23 (N.C.)
SW3
21 (W : 3 pin)
2 (GY : 40 pin)
14 (GY : 18 pin) 1 (GY : 32 pin)

3 (GY : 16 pin)
ON
SW3
1 2 3 4 fs503fs5007c
NOTE
• Since the setting of DIP switch (SW3) is peculiar to the type, be sure not to change its setting (All
settings are “ON.”).
V Appendix
5 -69
B. FNS drive board
53 (W : 8 pin) 66 (W : 2 pin) 62 (GY : 16 pin)
52 (W : 18 pin) 71 (GY : 6 pin)

70 (W : 8 pin)
55 (GY : 15 pin)
61 (GY : 40 pin)
51 (W : 26 pin)
65 (GY : 3 pin)
56 (W : 22 pin)
64 (GY : 18 pin)
60 (W : 4 pin)
57 (GY : 40 pin)
58 (GY : 30 pin) 63 (GY : 32 pin)

54 (W : 15 pin) 59 (GY : 14 pin) fs503fs5008c
C. Stapler board
2 (O : 3 pin) 4 (R : 3 pin)
3 (W : 3 pin) 5 (O : 3 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
fs503fs5009c
V Appendix
5 -70
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 TIMING CHART
3. TIMING CHART
3.1 Main body
A. A4, life size, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), reversed paper exit, paper feed
tray /1, line speed 490 mm/sec
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Item
Paper feed sensor /1 (PS7)
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS17)
Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)
Loop sensor (PS16)
ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)
Registration sensor (PS40)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
Fusing exit sensor (PS22)
ADU accelerate sensor (PS49)
Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)
ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46)
ADU exit sensor (PS43)
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Transfer assist motor (M19)

Fusing motor (M1)
Paper feed motor (M4)
Separation clutch /1 (CL5)
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4)
Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3)
Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1)
Vertical conveyance motor H
(M8) L
Loop motor (M18) H
L
Registration motor (M17)
Reverse/exit motor (M13)
Conveyance motor (M5)
Paper exit motor /1 (M9) H
L
ADU conveyance motor /1 H
(M15) L
(M16) L
ADU reverse H
F
paper exit motor L
(M31) H
R
L
Reverse motor H
F
(M12) L V Appendix
H
R
L
ADU acceleration motor H
L
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7)
Drum motor (M2)

Developing motor (M3)
Charging
Developing bias
Erase lamp (EL)
Separation
Transfer
Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
Guide plate
Start button ON
1050fs5060c
5 -71
TIMING CHART bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
B. A4, life size, 2 double sided originals, double sided copy (1 copy), straight paper exit, paper feed
tray /1, line speed 490 mm/sec
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Item
Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS19)
Loop sensor (PS16)
ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)
Registration sensor (PS40)
Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)
Fusing exit sensor (PS22)
ADU accelerate sensor (PS49)
ADU exit sensor (PS43)
Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Transfer assist motor (M19)

Fusing motor (M1)
Vertical conveyance motor H
(M8) L
Loop motor (M18) H
L
Registration motor (M17)
Reverse/exit motor (M13)
Paper exit motor /1 (M9) H
L
(M15) L
(M16) L
ADU reverse H
F
paper exit motor L
(M31) H
R
L
Reverse motor H
F
(M12) L
H
R
L
ADU acceleration motor H
L
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD7)
V Appendix
Drum motor (M2)

Developing motor (M3)
Charging
Developing bias
Erase lamp (EL)
Separation
Transfer
Drum claw solenoid (SD5)
Guide plate
Start button ON
1050fs5061c
5 -72
Item Time (sec) 0 1 2 3
3.2
Tray upper limit sensor (PS315)
Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)
Tray up/down motor (M303) Up

Down
DF-603
Original count sensor (PS310)
Original empty sensor (PS305)
Original registration sensor /Rt (PS318)
Original feed motor (M302) F 800 mm/s

465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
Original registration sensor /Lt (PS306)
Original conveyance sensor (PS308)
Original conveyance motor 620 mm/s

F
(M301) 465 mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original, 3 originals
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
Original paper exit motor /1 620 mm/s
(M304) F 465 mm/s
250 mm/s
250 mm/s
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Original reverse sensor (PS309)
Reverse jam sensor /Lt (PS304)

(M305) F 465 mm/s
370 mm/s
370 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
V-VALID signal
Start button ON 1st sheet of paper 2nd sheet of paper 3rd sheet of paper scanned Exit of the 3rd
sheet of paper
df603fs5011c
scanned scanned
completed
TIMING CHART
5 -73
V Appendix
V Appendix
5 -74
Item Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tray upper limit sensor (PS315)

TIMING CHART
Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)
Tray up/down motor (M303) Up

Down
Original count sensor (PS310)
Original empty sensor (PS305)
Original registration sensor /Rt (PS318)
Original feed motor (M302) 800 mm/s

F
465 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
Original registration sensor /Lt (PS306)
Original conveyance sensor (PS308)

Original conveyance motor 620 mm/s
(M301) F
465 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
620 mm/s
B. A4, life size, double sided original, 3 originals

(M304) F 465 mm/s
250 mm/s
250 mm/s
465 mm/s
R
550 mm/s
620 mm/s
Original reverse sensor (PS309)
Reverse jam sensor /Lt (PS304)

(M305) F 465 mm/s
370 mm/s
250 mm/s
R 465 mm/s
620 mm/s
Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
Exit gate solenoid (SD304)
V-VALID signal
Back of the Back of the

Start button Front of the 1st sheet 1st sheet of
Front of the 2nd 2nd sheet Front of the 3rd sheet Back of the 3rd sheet
of paper scanned paper sheet of paper of paper of paper scanned of paper scanned
df603fs5012c
ON scanned
scanned scanned
3.3
PF-701
Time (sec)
0 1 2 3 4 5
A. Tray 4, A4, 2 originals
Item

Loop sensor /2 (PS94)
Exit sensor (PS99)
Forced separation clutch (CL11)
PF exit conveyance motor (M41)
Main body: Paper exit sensor (PS3)
Start button ON
pf701fs5008
TIMING CHART
5 -75
V Appendix
3.4 FD-501
A. Letter fold-in, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Main body paper exit sensor (PS3)
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Punch conveyance motor (M2)
Punch registration motor (M13)
Alignment plate motor (M12) F

R
Punch drive motor (M10)
1st folding motor (M4)
1st folding release motor (M14)
2nd folding motor (M5)
2nd folding release motor (M15)
3rd folding motor (M6)
3rd folding release motor (M16)
Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
Main tray paper exit motor (M17)
Roller solenoid /1 (SD5)
Folding gate solenoid (SD15)
Paper exit solenoid (SD12)
FD entrance sensor (PS1)
Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)
Punch registration sensor (PS6)

V Appendix
1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)
2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
S size conveyance sensor (PS58)
Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13)
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS18)
Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS16)
Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON

fd501fs5017c
5 -76
B. Letter fold-out, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

R
2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) V Appendix

fd501fs5018c
5 -77
C. Double parallel, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R

V Appendix

fd501fs5019c
5 -78
D. Folding, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R

fd501fs5020c
5 -79
E. Gate fold, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

R

V Appendix

fd501fs5021c
5 -80
F. Z-fold, A3, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Item

R

fd501fs5022c
5 -81
G. PI cover insertion, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Item

R

V Appendix

Start button ON fd501fs5023c
5 -82
H. Punch, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, sub tray paper exit
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3
Item

R

fd501fs5024c
5 -83
V Appendix
5 -84
3.5
TIMING CHART
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
Entrance sensor (PS4)
Conveyance motor 1000 mm/s
LS-501/502
(M2) 490 mm/s

Sub tray exit motor 1000 mm/s
(M3) 490 mm/s
Coupling conveyance motor (M6)
Grip conveyance 1300 mm/s
motor (M4) 1000 mm/s
490 mm/s
Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)
Alignment motor (M7)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)
A. A4, straight mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set
Shift unit motor (M5)

Shift unit home sensor (PS11)
1st gate solenoid (SD1)

2nd gate solenoid (SD10)
Front stopper Latch ON
solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF
Rear stopper Latch ON
Job partition Latch ON
Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
Conveyance sensor /1 (PS7)

Coupling exit sensor (PS18)
Sub tray exit sensor (PS10)
ls502fs5009c
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s
(M3) 490 mm/s
490 mm/s

B. A3, shift mode, 2 originals, 2 copies set



ls502fs5010c
TIMING CHART
5 -85
V Appendix
V Appendix
5 -86
TIMING CHART
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s
(M3) 350 mm/s
490 mm/s
C. A4, Sub tray mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set


ls502fs5011c
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Item
(M2) 490 mm/s
(M3) 490 mm/s
490 mm/s

D. A4, tandem mode, 3 originals, 1 copy set



ls502fs5012c
TIMING CHART
5 -87
V Appendix
V Appendix
5 -88
3.6
TIMING CHART
Time (sec)
Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Signal while in FS operation

FS-503
Tray up down motor (M3)
Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
Stack assist guide motor (M24)
Paper exit opening motor (M8)
Rear stopper motor (M26)

A. Sort, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, Single side
Intermediate roller open close motor (M25)
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
Main tray exit motor (M7)
Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
Main body side paper exit sensor (PS3)
FNS entrance sensor (PS4)
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
Main tray exit sensor (PS10)
Counter reset sensor (PS15)
Start button ON
fs503fs5010c
Time (sec)
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6


B. Sub tray, A4, 2 original, 2 copies, single side
Sub tray exit motor (M6)

H
fs503fs5011c
TIMING CHART
5 -89
V Appendix
V Appendix
5 -90
TIMING CHART
Time (sec)
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6

C. Staple, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies, single side
Sub tray exit motor (M6)
fs503fs5012c
4.1
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
59
60
58
128
41
126
51
601-6
601-5
601-4
601-3
601-2
601-1
601-7
1
1
Main body 1/4
610-1 SCAN_CLK
300
610-2 SCAN_FR
Power plug
301
610-3 SCAN_W23
302
600-1 5V
600-6 P.G
600-5 P.G
600-2 S.G
600-4 24V
600-3 24V
610-4 SCAN_V0
303
610-5 SCAN_V1
304
610-6 SCAN_V2
305
620-1 U
610-7 LUMP_CONT
306
610-8 FAN_CONT
307
610-9 FAN_EM 620-2 V Scanner motor
308
M27
610-10 HP_PS
309
610-11 LOVRUN_PS
310
620-3 W G/Y
610-12 TOP_PS
311
631-1 632-1
FT11
FT10
610-13 ROVRUN_PS
312
623-1 24V
610-14 SCAN24V_FEM
313
631-2 632-2
610-15 S.GND 623-2 CONT
314
631-3 632-3
L1
Exposure lamp
CBR
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
623-3 P.GND
631-4 632-4
L1 INVB
Circuit breaker
A
631-5
F/G
FT13
FT12
F/G
640-3-1
FT14
621-1 CONT
FT15
2
2
640-2-2
621-2 EM Scanner cooling fan
FM19
640-1-3
NF1
621-3 P.GND
Noise filter /1
650-1
FT17
FT16
622-1 5V
650-2 Scanner home
SDB
622-2 SIG
FT41
650-3
FT42
sensor
PS51
622-3 S.GND
NF2
622-4 SIG
Noise filter /2
CN19-2
CN19-1
SCANNER
CN10-5
Transformer /2
3
753-5 CN20-1
CN18-2
19
2
Dehumidification
T2
10
11
506
550
507
Dehumidification heater/2 753-6 CN20-4 heater switch
20
284-1
Main relay
RL1
305-5
HTR2
40
45
84
SW3
161
3
3
284-2 283-1 CN12-1

FT100
1
5
FT18
46
44
81
87
35
32
305-1
509
510
92
85
34
31
162
131
6
T1
CN18-1
33
30
Dehumidification heater/1 305-6
CN12-4
10
285-1 283-2
FT19
HTR1
T1
T1
285-2 305-2 Transformer /1

FT101
4
508
502
503
G
G
T2
12
T2
Triac /1
TRC2
TRC1
CN14-1
100-3 5v0
100-2 5v0
100-1 5v0
100-6 S.G
100-5 S.G
100-4 S.G
101-9 S.G
101-8 S.G
101-7 S.G
101-4 S.G
101-2 S.G
101-11 S.G
504
505
Triac /2
101-12 12V(OP)
101-3 12v(CCD)
101-1 12v(HDD)
163-7-1 665-3
101-6 5v1(IMAGE)
101-5 5v1(IMAGE)
CN137-1 APS/5V
101-10 5v1(HDD/OP)
163-6-2 665-2 APS
CN137-2 SIG
501
503
163-5-3 665-1
SW1
CN137-3 S.GND
sensor /1
163-4-4 666-3
CN137-4 APS/5V
163-3-5 666-2 APS
Main power switch
CN137-5 SIG
163-2-6 666-1 sensor /2
PS52 PS53
CN14-2
CN137-6 S.GND
163-1-7
A
CN137-7 LAMP_H/L
SCANNER
For Option
4
4
OUT
200V
Outlet
160-1-6
CN138-12 PAT1
160-2-5
CN138-13 PAT2
160-3-4
CN10-3
-3 Vpp
CN138-14 PAT3
160-4-3
711-1 5V1
710-1 5V1
-6 SGND
-5 SGND
CN138-15 PAT4
CN10-4
160-5-2
LAMP
G/Y
10
STATUS
160-6-1
-2 ROM_RXDin
-3 MONI_RXDin
INDICATOR
-5 ROM_RESET
-4 ROM_TXDout
3
11
-2 MONI_CLKout
-4 MONI_TXDout
12
709-1 FOOT_SW
703-A14 12V3 704-A1
-2 SGND
-A13 12V3 -A2
CN2-3
CN2-1
-A12 12V3 -A3

AC_NEU
AC_HOT
707-1 SUB_SW
-A11 SHUT_SIG -A4
SW2
30
-2 SGND CN72-1 5V0

-A10 SW_LED -A5
31
-3 N.C. CN72-2 5V0

-A9 WT_LED -A6
Power switch
32
-A8 SHUT_LED -A7 CN72-3 5V0

33
-A7 5V0 -A8 CN72-4 S.GND

OACB
34
CN72-5 S.GND
cooling fan /1
Power supply
-A6 SW_SIG -A9

35
-A5 SGND -A10 706-1 BRT 712-6 CN72-6 S.GND
5
5
-A4 Y2 -A11 -2 5V1 -5

SW
VR
LED
FM25
-A3 X1 -A12 -3 DATA_LED -4

36
HDD2 CN73-1 12V0

OB1
-A2 Y1 -A13 -4 GND -3 CN73-2 12V0

-A1 X2 -A14 -5 MAIN_LED -2
38
PRCB CN73-3 12V3

LED
OB2
DATA
703-B14 5V1_1 704-B1 -6 SUB_LED -1

39
PFU CN73-4 12V3

-B13 5V1_1 -B2
40
OACB CN73-5 12V3

-B12 CTS_IN -B3 CN73-6 12V3
-B11 SGND -B4
42
HDD2 CN73-7 S.GND

-B10 DSR_IN -B5 705-1 12V2 713-1 CN73-8 S.GND
-B9 SGND -B6
44
-2 12V2 -2 CN73-9 S.GND

-B8 RXD_IN -B7
45
-3 SGND -3 CN73-10 S.GND

-B7 SGND -B8
46
-4 SGND -4
OACB
CN73-11 S.GND
FM26 cooling fan /2
Power supply
-B6 RTS_OUT -B9 -5 RMT -5 CN73-12 S.GND

-B5 SGND -B10 -6 ALM -6
-2 NC
-2 NC
-3 VL2
-3 VL1
-B4 DTR_OUT -B11 -7 BRT -7

OB INVB
715-1 VH2
714-1 VH1
48
-B3 SGND -B12 FNS CN74-1 24v2

758-1
49
-B2 TXD_OUT -B13 ADF CN74-2 24v2

50
-B1 SGND -B14 ADUDB1 CN74-3 24v2

51
SDB CN74-8 24v2

52
M21/RCDB CN74-9 24v2

CN74-10 24v2
53
PRCB
54
FNS CN74-4 P.GND

6
6
55
ADF CN74-5 P.GND

136-A1 SGND 700-A20 SGND 702-1 SGND 716-1
56
ADUDB1 CN74-6 P.GND

136-A2 LCD_UD -A19 LCD_U/D -2 CLK -2
57
PRCB CN74-7 P.GND

136-A3 LCD_RL -A18 LCD_R/L -3 SGND -3
58
CN74-11 P.GND
136-A4 SGND -A17 SGND -4 Hsync -4
59
CN74-12 P.GND
SCB
136-A5 SGND -A16 SGND -5 Vsync -5

60
CN74-13 P.GND
136-A6 TXCLKOUT+ -A15 RXCLKIN+ -6 SGND -6
61
PRCB CN74-14 P.GND

136-A7 TXCLKOUT- -A14 RXCLKIN- -7 SGND -7
136-A8 SGND -A13 SGND -8 SGND -8
62
136-A9 TXOUT2+ -A12 RXIN2+ -9 R_0 -9 CN75-1 36v

DCPS/1
63
136-A10 TXOUT2- -A11 RXIN2- -10 R_1 -10 CN75-2 P.GND

PMDB
136-A11 SGND -A10 SGND -11 R_2 -11

136-A12 TXOUT1+ -A9 RXIN1+ -12 SGND -12
64
CN76-1 24v3
136-A13 TXOUT1- -A8 RXIN1- -13 R_3 -13
65
CN76-1 24v3
M4
136-A14 SGND -A7 SGND -14 R_4 -14

66
CN76-3 P.GND
136-A15 TXOUT0+ -A6 RXIN0+ -15 R_5 -15
67
OACB 1/2
CN76-4 P.GND
136-A16 TXOUT0- -A5 RXIN0- -16 SGND -16
136-A17 SGND -A4 SGND -17 SGND -17
68
136-A18 SGND -A3 SGND -18 SGND -18 CN77-1 P.GND

69
PRCB
136-A19 LCD5V -A2 5V1 -19 G_0 -19 CN77-2 P.GND

CN77-3 P.GND
70
136-A20 LCD5V -A1 5V1 -20 G_1 -20 HV1

OB3
Backlight /1
Backlight /2
71
136-B1 RTS_OUT 700-B20 CTS_IN -21 G_2 -21 CN77-4 P.GND

7
7
72
136-B2 SGND -B19 SGND -22 SGND -22 CN77-5 P.GND

73
136-B3 DTR_OUT -B18 DSR_IN -23 G_3 -23 CN77-6 P.GND

CN77-7 P.GND
74
136-B4 SGND -B17 SGND -24 G_4 -24

75
CN77-8 P.GND
LCDB
136-B5 TXD_OUT -B16 RXD_IN -25 G_5 -25

76
136-B6 SGND -B15 SGND -26 SGND -26 CN77-9 P.GND

PKB
77
136-B7 CTS_IN -B14 RTS_OUT -27 SGND -27 CN77-10 P.GND

M1/M2/M3 FNS
136-B8 SGND -B13 SGND -28 SGND -28

136-B9 DSR_IN -B12 DTR_OUT -29 B_0 -29
78
MS2 FT-1 24v3

136-B10 SGND -B11 SGND -30 B_1 -30
136-B11 RXD_IN -B10 TXD_OUT -31 B_2 -31
136-B12 SGND -B9 SGND -32 SGND -32
136-B13 WT_LED -B8 WT_LED -33 B_3 -33 CN71-1 5V_IN
142
DCPS/2
136-B14 SHUT_LED -B7 SHUT_LED -34 B_4 -34 CN71-2 S.GND
136-B15 SW_SIG -B6 SW_SIG -35 B_5 -35 CN71-3 /REM1
136-B16 SGND -B5 SGND -36 SGND -36 CN71-4 /REM2
136-B17 SHUT -B4 SHUT_SIG -37 LCD_EN -37 CN71-5 /REM3
136-B18 SW_LED -B3 SW_LED -38 R/L("H") -38 CN71-6 CUR_EM
136-B19 5V0 -B2 5V0 -39 3.3V -39 CN71-7 AC_OFF
136-B20 5V0 -B1 5V0 -40 3.3V -40 CN71-8 FAN_H/L
-41 U/D("L") -41
8
8
104-1 5V1 708-1 5V1 701-1 X2

-2 SGND -2 SGND -2 Y1
316
-3 12V4 -3 12V4 -3 X1
315
-4 SGND -4 SGND -4 Y2
90-1
7
138-1 5v0
90-2
8
138-2 POWER_RL
138-7 REM/5
138-6 REM/4
138-5 REM/3
138-10 POWER_EM
138-9 5v0_ACOFF
138-8 HT_RL
9
9
138-3 REM/1
138-4 REM/2
138-11 5v1_ACOFF
320
319
318
317
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
Symbol Part name Location

— Power plug 1-A
M27 Scanner motor 1-F
SDB Scanner drive board 1-G
CBR Circuit breaker 2-A
NF1 Noise filter /1 2-A
NF2 Noise filter /2 2-A
L1 Exposure lamp 2-E
L1 INVB L1 inverter 2-F
FM19 Scanner cooling fan 2-F
PS51 Scanner home sensor 2-F
RL1 Main relay 3-A
TRC1 Triac /1 3-B
TRC2 Triac /2 3-C
SW3 Dehumidification heater switch 3-D
T1 Transformer /1 3-E
T2 Transformer /2 3-E
HTR1 Dehumidification heater /1 3-G
HTR2 Dehumidification heater /2 3-G
OACB Overall control board 3-H
SW1 Main power switch 4-A
— Outlet 4-C
OB1 Operation board /1 4-E
PS52 APS sensor /1 4-G
PS53 APS sensor /2 4-G
— Status indicator lamp 4-G
FM25 Power supply cooling fan /1 5-A
DCPS/1 DC power supply /1 5-A
SW2 Power switch 5-D
OB2 Operation board /2 5-D
OB INVB OB inverter 5-D
OB3 Operation board /3 5-G
LCDB LCD board 6-D
PKB Panel key board 7-D
— Backlight /1 7-D
— Backlight /2 7-D
4.2
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
24V
36V
P.GND
320
PLL_LK 170
CONT 172
316
52
62
63
CLK 171
319
315
37
318
172-9-1
172-4-6
172-7-3
172-8-2
172-6-4
172-5-5
317
173-5-1
173-5-1
173-2-4
173-1-5
173-3-3
173-4-2
1
1
Main body 2/4
131-4
131-6
131-5
131-3
131-2
131-1
POLYGON MOTOR
DRIVE BOARD
36pin
Amphenol
USB
M21
CN125-2 -D
CN134-9 D7
CN134-8 D6
CN134-7 D5
CN134-6 D4
CN134-5 D3
CN134-4 D2
CN134-3 D1
CN134-2 D0
CN125-3 +D
CN134-31 INIT
CN134-12 ACK
CN125-1 VBUS
CN125-4 S.GND
Sub relay
RL2
CN134-13 xFLAG
CN134-14 PBUSY
CN134-14 HBUSY
CN134-1 STROBE
CN134-33~35 N.C.
CN134-28~30 N.C.
CN134-15~18 N.C.
FT102
CN134-10 PTRCLK
CN134-36 1284ACT
CN134-32 NDVALID
7
FT22
Polygon motor
CN134-19~27 S.GND
8
192-5-9 194-9
CN132-1 INDPR
192-4-10 194-10
CN132-2 S.GND
FT23
CN10-1
192-3-11 194-11
CN10-2
WRITE UNIT
2
2
FT103
CN132-3 IND
192-2-12 194-12
CN132-4 S.GND
192-1-13 194-13
CN3-1
CN132-5 5V INDEXB
L
Coil
191-14-1
CN130-A1 ENB
191-13-2
CN130-A2 ALM1
CN3-2
191-12-3
CN130-A3 S/HB1
191-11-4
CN130-A4 S/H1
191-10-5
CN130-A5 S.GND
191-9-6
CN130-A6 LD+5V
191-8-7
CN130-A7 LD+5V
191-7-8
CN130-A8 LPR5V
191-6-9
CN130-A9 S.GND
CN1-6
CN1-5
CN1-3
CN1-2
191-5-10
AC_NEU
AC_NEU
AC_HOT
AC_HOT
CN130-A10 -VIDEO2
191-4-11
CN130-A11 +VIDEO2
191-3-12
79
CN130-A12 S.GND PRCB CN11-1 5v1

190-12-1
80
CN130-B1 LOAD ADUDB1 CN11-2 5v1

190-11-2
81
CN130-B2 DACLK OACB CN11-3 5v1

LDB
190-10-3
141
CN130-B3 DI PFU
190-9-4
142
CN130-B4 S.GND DCPS/1,/2

190-8-5
161
CN130-B5 ALM2 OACB
3
3
190-7-6
82
CN130-B6 S/HB2 ADF CN11-4 5v1

190-6-7
CN11-5 5v1
162
CN130-B7 S/H2 OACB

190-5-8
CN130-B8 ALMRST
190-4-9
84
CN130-B9 S.GND CN11-6 12v1-1

190-3-10
85
CN11-7 12v1-2
OACB
CN130-B10 -VIDEO1
190-2-11
86
CN130-B11 +VIDEO1 PRCB CN11-8 S.GND

190-1-12
87
CN130-B12 S.GND OACB CN11-9 S.GND

88
ADUDB1 CN11-10 S.GND

89
PFU CN11-11 S.GND

90
ADF CN11-12 S.GND

91
FNS CN11-13 S.GND

92
CN195- 1 RST OACB CN11-14 S.GND

CN195- 2 S.GND
CN195- 3 D7
CN195- 4 D8 51-1
93
CN195- 5 D6 MS2 CN21-1 24v2

CN195- 6 D9
94
CN195- 7 D5 PFU CN21-2 24v2

CN195- 8 D10
95
OACB 2/2
CN195- 9 D4 ADUDB1 CN21-3 P.GND
CN195-10 D11
96
CN195-11 D3 PFU CN21-4 P.GND

CN195-12 D12
CN195-13 D2
CN195-14 D13
97
CN195-15 D1 ACDB CN12-1 24v1

CN195-16 D14
98
CN195-17 D0 PFU CN12-2 24v1

CN195-18 D15
99
CN195-19 S.GND ADUDB1 CN12-3 24v1

CN195-20 N.C.(KEY pin)
100
CN195-21 DMARQ CN12-4 12v2
4
4
CN195-22 S.GND
ACDB
CN12-5 12v2
101
CN195-23 DIOW ADUDB1

CN195-24 S.GND
CN195-25 DIOR CN12-6 5v2
CN195-26 S.GND
CN12-7 5v2
103
CN195-27 IDRDY PRCB

CN195-28 CSEL
CN12-8 5v2
104
CN195-29 DMACK M3
CN195-30 S.GND
IPB
CN12-9 5v2
105
CN195-31 INT0 ADUDB1

CN195-32 Reserved
CN12-10 5v2
106
CN195-33 DA1 ACDB

CN195-34 PDAIG
HDD1
CN12-11 -5v
107
CN195-35 DA0 ADUDB1

CN195-36 DA2
CN195-37 CS0
CN195-38 CS1
CN12-12 S.GND
108
CN195-39 DASP ACDB

CN195-40 S.GND
CN12-13 S.GND
109
PFU
CN12-14 S.GND
CN12-15 S.GND
111
PRCB
CN12-16 S.GND
112
CN103-1 +5V1 ADUDB1

CN 123
CN 112
CN12-17 S.GND
113
CN103-2 S.GND
ACDB CN12-18 P.GND
114
CN103-3 S.GND
CN12-19 P.GND
115
CN103-4 +12V(HDD) PFU

135-1 DF_CVR
321
CN12-20 P.GND
116
135-2 ERR_T
322
ADUDB1 CN12-21 P.GND
117
135-3 PVV
DCPS/2
323
CN12-22 24v1
118
135-4 TNVV PRCB
324
CN110-1 S.GND S.GND CN170-50
135-5 B_VV
325
CN110-2 TG TG -49 CN13-1 24v1
119
135-6 S_VV
326
M6
CN110-3 TG_OUT TGOUT -48
5
5
CN13-2 24v1
120
135-7 5V_MON
327
CN110-4 CLAMP CLAMP -47
135-8 EE_VV
328
CN110-5 A_CLAMP ACLAMP -46
180
135-9 PRI_RST
329
CN110-6 PRDKEEP PRDKEEP -45
181
135-10 RST_CONT
330
CN110-7 S.GND S.GND -44 CN13-3 24v1
121
135-11 RXD
331
CN110-8 +LCLK LCLK+ -43 CN13-4 24v1
122
M31 M7
135-12 S.GND
FM27
332
CN110-9 -LCLK LCLK- -42
135-13 RTS 343-1
333
CN110-10 S.GND S.GND -41 CN13-5 24v1
123
DPSB
135-14 S.GND
334
CN110-11 -RCK RCK- -40 CN13-6 5v2

124
M6
135-15 ERR_R
335
CN110-12 +RCK RCK+ -39 CN13-7 5v2

125
135-16 TXD
M4
336
CN110-13 S.GND S.GND -38 CN13-8 5v2

126
135-17 S.GND
SDB
337
CN110-14 S.GND S.GND -37 CN13-9 5v2

127
HV1
cooling fan /3
Power supply
135-18 CTS
338
CN110-15 +TCK TCK+ -36 CN13-10 S.GND

128
135-19 S.GND
SDB
339
CN110-16 -TCK TCK- -35 CN13-11 S.GND

129
ADUDB1
CN110-17 S.GND S.GND -34 CN13-12 S.GND
CN110-18 S.GND S.GND -33 CN13-13 S.GND
131
OACB
CN110-19 SCLK SCLK -32 CN13-14 P.GND
132
CN139-1 DCD CN110-20 SEN SEN -31 CN13-15 P.GND

133
CN139-2 RXD CN110-21 SDI SDI -30

182
CN139-3 TXD CN110-22 SDO SDO -29

183
CN139-4 DTR CN110-23 S.GND S.GND -28 CN13-16 P.GND

134
CN139-5 GND
M6 M31 M7
CN110-24 -AD_D0 AD_D0- -27 CN13-17 P.GND

135
CN139-6 DSR 343-2

6
6
CN110-25 +AD_D0 AD_D0+ -26 CN13-18 P.GND

136
CN 113
CN 124
CN139-7 RTS DPSB

CN110-26 S.GND S.GND -25
CN139-8 CTS CN110-27 -AD_D1 AD_D1- -24
130
CN139-9 RI CN110-28 +AD_D1 AD_D1+ -23

CCDB
CSRC I/F
CN14-1 12v2
137
(RS232C)
CN110-29 S.GND S.GND -22 CN14-2 5v2

138
CN110-30 -AD_D2 AD_D2- -21 CN14-3 S.GND

139
CN111-1 TD+
FNS
CN110-31 +AD_D2 AD_D2+ -20 CN14-4 S.GND

140
CN111-2 TD-
PB
CN111-3 RD+
CN111-4 CT CN110-33 -LVDSCLK LVDSCLK- -18 CN15-4 HT_RL
CN110-34 +LVDSCLK LVDSCLK+ -17 CN15-5 FAN_CONT
200
CN111-5 CT
CN110-35 S.GND S.GND -16 CN15-6 FAN_EM
201
CN111-6 RD-
RJ45
CN111-7 N.C. CN110-36 ADRST ADRST -15 CN15-10 REM/1

CN111-8 CHS CN110-37 APR APR -14 CN15-11 REM/2
CN110-38 LVDSPDN PDWN -13 CN15-14 AC_OFF
CN110-40 +5V1 +5V1 -11
CN110-41 +5V1 +5V1 -10
+5V1 -9 10-6
CN110-42 +5V1
550
CN110-43 +5V1 +5V1 -8

2
+5V1 -7
RL3
CN110-44 +5V1
CN110-45 +5V1 +5V1 -6
Heater relay

7
7
CN110-47 +12V(CCD) +12V -4

CN110-48 +12V(CCD) +12V -3
78
93
CN110-49 +12V(CCD) +12V -2

CN110-50 S.GND S.GND -1 83-1
CN 898 83-2
CN80-1
CN80-2
CN137-14 COVER
CN137-13 DDF_VV
CN137-12 CTS(I)
CN137-11 DTR(O)
CN137-10 TXD
CN137-9 RTS(O)
CN137-8 DSR(I)
CN137-7 RXD
PRCB
83-3
HV1
83-4
173-1-8
173-2-7
173-3-6
173-4-5
173-5-4
173-6-3
173-7-2
173-8-1
M3
83-5
M2
MS2
Interlock
switch /2
81-6
36
150 151 152 153 154 155
CN887-1 GND M1
42
CN887-2 12V
82-1
CN887-3 12Vout ADUDB1
CN887-4 GND 82-2
156 157
CN887-5 GND ADUDB2

MS1
Interlock
switch /1
CN887-6 5Vout
CN 899
78-1A 78-1B 79-1B 79-1A
78-2A 78-2B 79-2B 79-2A
PCI RB
CN80-3
CN80-4
8
8
CN889-1 N.C CN1-1

CN1-2
CN889-2 RXD CN1-3
758-1
CN1-4
CN889-3 TXD CN1-5
48
24V CN1-6
758-2 CN889-4 N.C CN1-7
DIMM
55
P.GND CN1-8
758-3 CN889-5 GND CN1-9
5V
82
758-4
CN1-10
CN889-6 N.C CN1-11
90
S.GND
DF
CN1-12
RS232C
CN889-7 RTS CN1-13

CN1-14
CN1-15
IC cooling fan FM24
CN889-8 CTS
CN1-16
Compact Flash
CN889-9 N.C CN1-17

CN1-18
DF-603
CN1-19
CN1-20
CN1-21
CN1-22
CN1-23
CN1-24
CN1-25
ICB
CN886-1 VBUS CN1-26

CN1-27
CN886-2 -D CN1-28
HDD2
CN1-29
CN886-3 +D CN1-30
USB
CN1-31
CN886-4 S.GND CN1-32
CN1-33
CN1-34
CN1-35
CN1-36
CN1-37
CN1-38
CN1-39
CN1-40
9
9
CN888-36 1284ACT
CN888-33~35 N.C.
CN888-32 NDVALID
CN888-31 INIT
CN888-28~30 N.C.
CN888-19~27 S.GND
CN888-15~18 N.C.
CN888-14 HBUSY
CN888-13 xFLAG
CN888-12 ACK
CN888-14 PBUSY
CN888-10 PTRCLK
CN888-9 D7
CN888-8 D6
CN888-7 D5
CN888-6 D4
CN888-5 D3
CN888-4 D2
CN888-3 D1
CN888-2 D0
CN888-1 STROBE
CN885-8 CHS
CN885-7 N.C.
CN885-6 RD-
CN885-5 CT
CN885-4 CT
CN885-3 RD+
CN885-2 TD-
CN885-1 TD+
RJ45 Amphenol 36pin

I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

RL2 Sub relay 2-A
L Coil 2-A
M21 Polygon motor 2-D
INDEXB Index board 2-C
LDB Laser drive board 2-C
IPB Image processing board 2-E
DCPS/2 DC power supply /2 3-A
HDD1 Hard disk /1 3-C
CCDB CCD board 5-C
PB Parameter board 6-F
RL3 Heater relay 7-A
MS2 Interlock switch /2 7-A
PCI RB PCI relay board 7-D
MS1 Interlock switch /1 8-A
HDD2 Hard disk /2 8-C
ICB IC board 8-D
FM24 IC cooling fan 8-F
4.3
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
69
370-1-2 401-2 P.GND
326-1 P1_M24
Toner pump motor 370-2-1 401-1 24V3
150
326-2 P1_M
371-1-2
326-3 P2_M24
68
Air pump motor 371-2-1
301-2 P.GND
326-4 P2_M 301-1 24V3
M28 M29
151
374-1 372-3-1
61
211-3 5V 300-4 P.GND
374-2 372-2-2
57
Pump encoder sensor /1 211-2 SIG 300-3 P.GND
374-3 372-1-3
1
1
53
300-2 24V2
PS28
211-1 GND
300-1 24V2
118
Main body 3/4
375-1 373-3-1
211-6 5V 200-8 S.GND
111
375-2 373-2-2
Pump encoder sensor /2 211-5 SIG
86
375-3 373-1-3 200-7 S.GND
PS29
211-4 GND 200-6 F_CONT
200
200-5 F_EM
201
369-1 393-3-1 377-3-1
222-B9 5V 200-4 5V2
103
369-2 393-2-2 377-2-2
79
Air motor encoder sensor 222-B8 SIG 200-3 5V1
369-3 393-1-3 377-1-3
PS30
38
222-B10 GND 200-2 12V3
TONER SUPPLY
380-3 200-1 NC
324-1 24V
380-9
324-2 24V
380-1
324-3 A
380-5 216-15 SCAN_CLK_O
300
Air separation motor 324-4 /A
M10
380-7 216-14 SCAN_FR
301
324-5 B
380-11 216-13 SCAN_MGN
302
324-6 /B
216-12 SCAN_CUR1
303
324-7 NC
216-11 SCAN_CUR2
304
24V 382-1-6 384-1-9

328-1 24V 216-10 SCAN_CUR3
305
24V 382-2-5 384-2-8

328-2 24V 216-9 EXP_CONT
306
B 382-5-2 384-3-7
328-3 A 216-8 SCANFAN_CONT
307
Intermediate hopper motor /B 382-3-4 384-4-6

328-4 /A 216-7 SCANFAN_EM
M11
308
A 382-6-1 384-5-5
328-5 B 216-6 SCANHP_PS
2
2
309
/A 382-4-3 384-6-4
328-6 /B 216-5 NC
310
381-1 383-3-1 384-7-3 385-1-3 216-4 NC

311
229-1 T_SENSE_CONT
381-2 383-2-2 384-8-2 385-2-2 216-3 NC
312
Toner remaining sensor /1 229-2 TONER_SIG

381-3 383-1-3 384-9-1 385-3-1 216-2 SCAN24V_FEM
313
PS31
229-3 S.GND
216-1 S.GND
314
250-12
220-A1 T1_SET_P
386-1 390-1-12 396-1-14 250-14 270-1
229-4 T_SEN_CNT2 220-A2 5V2
386-2 390-2-11 396-2-13 250-11 270-2 Paper size
Toner remaining sensor /2 229-5 TOR_SIG2(60K) 220-A3 T1SIZE_PS1
250-22 270-3
PS4
386-3 390-3-10 396-3-12 220-A4 S.GND sensor /Fr1
PS32
229-6 S.GND
271-1
387-1 250-6 271-2 Paper size
220-A5 T1SIZE_PS2
387-2 390-4-9 396-4-11 271-3
PS5
Toner remaining sensor /3 229-7 TP1_PS(30K) sensor /Rr1

387-3 263-1-6 277-1
PS33
250-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
TRAY1
388-1 348-10-1 391-1-9 397-1-9

220-A7 T1UP_PS
5V 263-3-4 277-3
PS6
124
-2 348-5-6
sensor /1
S.G.
-3 348-9-2 390-5-8 396-5-10 263-6-1 276-3
CONT 229-8 TONM_CONT
-4 348-8-3 390-6-7 396-6-9
CLK 229-9 TONM_CLK 250-23 263-5-2 276-2
F/R -5 348-7-4 220-A12 T1FEED_PS Paper feed sensor /1
263-4-3 276-1
PS7
Toner bottle EM -6 348-6-5 390-7-6 396-7-8

229-10 TONM_EM
M6
motor H/L -7 264-3-1 275-1
P.G. -8 348-4-7 391-2-8 397-2-8
3
3
250-2 264-2-2 275-2

P.G. -9 348-3-8 391-3-7 397-3-7 220-A12 T1_0PS Paper empty sensor /1
-10 348-2-9 391-4-6 397-4-6 264-1-3 275-3
PS8
24V
133 120
24V -11 348-1-10 391-5-5 397-5-5

132 119
265-1
250-4 265-2
220-A6 T1GRIP_PS Handle release sensor /1
265-3
PS9
389-1 390-8-5 396-8-7

229-11 5V2 250-7 273-1
389-2 390-9-4 396-9-6 220-A10 A5V
Toner remaining sensor /4 229-12 TP2_PS(CUP) 250-5 273-2
389-3 220-A8 T1 REMAIN_VR Remaining paper VR /1
PS34
273-3
VR1
268-1
5V 392-1 349-8-1
-2 250-8 268-2
S.G. 220-A11 T1SIZE_VR Paper size VR /1
-3 349-7-2 390-10-3 396-10-5
CONT 229-13 HOPM1_CONT 268-3
VR2
-4 349-6-3 390-11-2 396-11-4

CLK 229-14 HOPM1_CLK
F/R -5
Toner hopper -6 349-5-4 390-12-1 396-12-3 250-20 272-1-2
EM 229-15 HOPM1_EM 320-A7 T1UPSD_CONT
M7
motor H/L -7 272-2-1 Pick-up solenoid /1
P.G. -8 349-4-5 391-6-4 397-6-4
P.G. -9 349-3-6 391-7-3 397-7-3
250-19 260-1-2
24V -10 349-2-7 391-8-2 397-8-2 320-A6 T1 FEED CL_CONT
135 122
-11 349-1-8 391-9-1 397-9-1 250-15 260-2-1 Paper feed clutch /1

24V 250-24
134 121
320-A5 24V
F/G
F/G
250-18 266-1-2
320-B7 T1 SEP CL_CONT
266-2-1 Separation clutch /1
SD3 CL4 CL5
394-2 395-1-2 396-13-2 229-16 TB_DOOR

Door switch /2 394-1 395-2-1 396-14-1 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
229-17 S.GND
4
4
SW5
250-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed

220-A13 FAN/Fr EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND) assist fan /Fr1
250-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
320-B3 T1FAN_CONT
92-1 250-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
327-1 FS_FAN_DRIVE 220-A14 FAN/Rr EM
250-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND) assist fan /Rr1
FM20 FM21
320-B5 P.GND
Transfer/separation suction fan 92-2
228-B8 FSFAN_EM
FM4
92-3 250-13 278-1(CONT)

327-2 P.GND 320-A2 UPT1M_CONT
250-1 278-2(24V) Paper lift motor /1
320-A1 UPT1M24V
M25
89-1
327-3 GFAN_DRIVE
Developing suction fan 89-2

228-B9 GFANEM
FM5
89-3 251-12
327-4 P.GND 220-B1 T2_SET_P
97-1-4 88-9-3 251-14 270-1
327-5 EXUPFAN_DRIVE 220-B2 5V2
97-3-2 88-8-4 251-11 270-2 Paper size
327-10 P.GND 220-B3 T2SIZE_PS1
Paper exit cooling fan /1 97-2-3 88-10-2 251-22 270-3 sensor /Fr2
228-B10 EXUPFEM 220-B4 S.GND
FM9
97-4-1 88-11-1 271-1

327-6 P.GND
251-6 271-2 Paper size
220-B5 T2SIZE_PS2
76-1-3 271-3 sensor /Rr2
329-1 OP/FAN_CONT
263-1-6 277-1
Pump cooling fan 76-2-2 251-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
329-2 OP/FAN_EM
TRAY2
220-B7 T2UP_PS
FM11
76-3-1 263-3-4 277-3

329-3 P.GND sensor /2
5
5
59-1 263-6-1 276-3

251-23 263-5-2 276-2
Paper exit cooling fan /3 220-B14 T2FEED_PS Paper feed sensor /2
59-2 263-4-3 276-1
FM28
59-3
264-3-1 275-1
4
99-1-3 88-3-9 251-2 264-2-2 275-2

327-7 EXDWFAN_DRIVE 220-B9 T2_0PS Paper empty sensor /2
264-1-3 275-3
CN18-3
Paper exit cooling fan /2 99-2-2 88-4-8

265-1
228-B11 EXDWFEM
FM10
99-3-1 88-5-7
327-8 P.GND 251-4 265-2
508
509
85-1
220-B6 T2GRIP_PS Handle release sensor /2
265-3
85-3
228-A13 MF1H/L 251-7 273-1
Cooling fan /1 85-2 220-B10 A5V
CN450-7
CN450-6
CN450-5
CN450-4
CN450-8
228-B1 MF1EM 251-5 273-2

FM1
85-4 220-B8 T2 REMAIN_VR Remaining paper VR /2

273-3
PS10 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS14 PS15 VR3
84-1-4
268-1
84-3-2
228-B2 MF2H/L 251-8 268-2
Cooling fan /2 84-2-3 220-B11 T2SIZE_VR Paper size VR /2
268-3
VR4
228-B3 MF2EM
FM2
84-4-1
91-1-4 251-20 272-1-2

320-B1 T2UPSD_CONT
FUSING UNIT
91-3-2 272-2-1 Pick-up solenoid /2

228-B4 MF3H/L
Cooling fan /3 91-2-3
TS1 Thermostat /1
TS2 Thermostat /2
228-B5 MF3EM
FM3
91-4-1 251-19 260-1-2

320-A8 T2 FEED CL_CONT
251-15 260-2-1 Paper feed clutch /2
77-1-3 171-8-6 320-B2 24V 250-24
6
6
F/G
F/G
251-18 266-1-2
IPB cooling fan 77-2-2 171-9-5 320-B8 T2 SEP CL_CONT
228-B6 GFAN_EM 266-2-1 Separation clutch /2
FM12
SD4 CL6 CL7
L3
L4
77-3-1 171-10-4
L2
87-1-4 171-1-13 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
87-3-2 171-3-11 251-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed assist

222-B3 HINF1_H/L 220-B12 FAN/Fr EM
Suction fan /1 87-2-3 171-2-12 262-1-3 267-1-3(GND) fan /Fr2
Fusing heater lamp /2
222-B4 HINF1_EM
FM6
87-4-1 171-4-10 251-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)

320-B4 T2FAN_CONT
595-1-3 171-5-9 251-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed assist
220-B13 FAN/Rr EM
462-1
251-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND) fan /Rr2

FM22 FM23
222-B5 HINF2_H/L 320-B6 P.GND

Suction fan /2 595-2-2 171-6-8
222-B6 HINF2_EM 278-1(CONT)
FM7
251-13
595-3-1 171-7-7 320-A4 UPT1M_CONT
78-1-3 172-7-3 320-A3 UPT1M24V
M26
450-2
450-1
450-3
506
11
Suction fan /3 78-2-2 172-8-2 398-4-1 298-1

228-B12 FAN_EM
FM8
78-3-1 172-9-1 321-1 24V

398-3-2 298-2 Tray lock solenoid /1
321-2 T1LKSD_CONT
SD1
510
222-B13 N.C.
78-1-3 171-11-3
507
505
501
398-2-3 299-1
502
321-3 24V
504
FAN
Polygon cooling fan 78-2-2 171-12-2 398-1-4 299-2 Tray lock solenoid /2
222-B7 PFAN_EM 321-4 T2LKSD_CONT
SD2
FM18
78-3-1 171-13-1
7
7
254-9-5 253-9-5 292-3-1 291-3

420-A2 P.GND 222-A1 5V
442-6 L3_DRV 254-5-9 253-5-9 292-2-2 291-2
420-B8 N.C 222-A5 LOOP_PS Loop sensor
440-1 T1_DRV 228-B12 EM 254-6-8 253-6-8 292-1-3 291-1
420-A3 P.GND 222-A4 S.GND
327-9 CONT 286-1-3 288-1
442-1 T2_DRV 420-B7 POLYGON F_CONT 288-2
254-8-6 253-8-6 286-2-2 Pre-registration
420-A4 P.GND 222-A2 T1VFIN_PS
286-3-1 288-3 sensor /1
440-2 T2_TRIG 420-B6 SUCTION F2_CONT
287-1-5 289-1
442-2 T2_TRIG 420-A5 P.GND
254-7-7 253-7-7 287-2-4 289-2 Pre-registration
440-6 ACN 420-B5 SUCTION F1_CONT 222-A3 T2VFIN_PS
287-3-3 289-3 sensor /2
442-8 ACN 420-A6 P.GND
442-4 ACH 420-B4 IMAGE F_CONT 287-4-2 296-1
440-4 T3_DRVG 420-A7 P.GND
254-1-13 253-1-13 287-5-1 296-2 Door switch /1
420-B3 MAIN F3_CONT 222-A9 VF_DOOR_PS
420-A8 P.GND 293-1
97
400-1 24V1 420-B2 MAIN F2_CONT 254-4-10 253-4-10 293-2 Vertical conveyance
400-2 12V 222-A6 VF_UPPS
100
420-A9 P.GND 293-3 sensor /1

400-3 5V
106
420-B1 MAIN F1_CONT

294-1
400-4 S.GND
108
410-A1 MRL_CONT 213-A17 MRL_CONT 254-2-12 253-2-12 294-2 Vertical conveyance

400-5 S.GND
113
222-A8 VF_PS
410-A2 MRL_SIG 213-A16 MRL_SIG 294-3 sensor /2
400-6 P.GND
114
410-A3 TC_CONT 213-A15 TC_CONT 295-1

410-A4 TC_24FEM 213-A14 TC_24FEM 254-3-11 253-3-11 295-2 Vertical conveyance
222-A7 VF_DWPS
8
8
410-A5 ACV_EM1 213-A13 ACV_EM

10
435-1 24V 295-3 sensor /3

PS16 PS17 PS18 SW4 PS19 PS20 PS21
410-A6 ZERO_CROSS 213-A12 ZERO_CROSS

11
435-2 PGND
213-A11 TH_CONT 254-12-2 253-12-2 281-1-2
410-A7 TH_CONT 322-2 VFUP_MC
410-A8 T1_CONT 213-A10 T1_CONT 254-13-1 253-13-1 281-2-1 Pre-registration clutch /1
322-1 24V
75-1 120-2-1 88-2-10 410-A9 T2_CONT 213-A9 T2_CONT
420-A1 24V 254-10-4 253-10-4 290-1-2
75-2 120-1-2 88-1-11 410-A10 T3_CONT 213-A8 T3_CONT 322-4 VF_MC Vertical conveyance
290-2-1
CNT1
420-B9 CONT 213-A7 L3_CONT

410-A11 L3_CONT clutch
VERTICAL
410-A12 AC5V_FEM 213-A6 AC5V_FEM

Total counter
254-11-3 253-11-3 282-1-2

410-A13 AC12V_FEM 213-A5 AC12V_FEM 322-3 VFDW_MC
282-2-1 Pre-registration clutch /2
90-3
CL1 CL2 CL3
410-A14 DH_CONT 213-A4 DH_CONT

5
CONVEYANCE
400-7 MRL_24V 322-5 N.C.

410-A15 DH_OPEN 213-A3 DH_OPEN
90-4
6
400-8 MRL_CONT 410-A16 AC_ENB 213-A2 AC_ENB

410-A17 N.C 213-A1 N.C.
ACDB 1/2
410-B1 HFAN1_CONT 213-B17 HFAN1_CONT

410-B3 HFAN_FEM 213-B15 HFAN_FEM
410-B5 HFAN3_FEM 213-B13 HFAN3_FEM
410-B6 SFAN_CONT 213-B12 SFAN_CONT
77A-4 410-B7 SFAN_FEM 213-B11 SFAN_FEM
35-1 24V 410-B8 WRITE F1_CONT 213-B10 MCOOL F1_CONT
77B-1 77A-2
35-2 KEY_SIG 410-B9 WRITE F2_CONT 213-B9 MCOOL F2_CONT
77B-2 77A-1
9
9
Key counter 35-3 S.GND 410-B10 WRITE F_FEM 213-B8 MCOOL F1/F2_FEM
77A-1
35-4 C_DRIVE 213-B7 POLYGON F_CONT
CN77B
CN77A
CNT2
410-B11 POLYGON F_CONT

35-5 P.GND 410-B12 N.C 213-B6 N.C
410-B13 POLYGON F_FEM 213-B5 POLYGON F_FEM
410-B14 S.GND 213-B4 S.GND
410-B15 KEY_CONT 213-B3 KEY_CONT
PRCB 1/2
410-B16 KEY_24FEM 213-B2 KEY_24FEM

410-B17 TC_DRV 213-B1 TCOP
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location

PRCB Printer control board 1-C SD2 Tray lock solenoid /2 7-B
M28 Toner pump motor 1-F PS16 Loop sensor 7-B
M29 Air pump motor 1-F PS17 Pre-registration sensor /1 7-B
PS28 Pump encoder sensor /1 1-F PS18 Pre-registration sensor /2 7-B
PS29 Pump encoder sensor /2 1-F SW4 Door switch /1 7-B
PS30 Air motor encoder sensor 1-F ACDB AC drive board 7-F
PS4 Paper size sensor /Fr1 2-B FM8 Suction fan /3 7-F
M10 Air separation motor 2-F FM18 Polygon cooling fan 7-F
M11 Intermediate hopper motor 2-F PS19 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 8-B
PS31 Toner remaining sensor /1 2-F PS20 Vertical conveyance sensor /2 8-B
PS32 Toner remaining sensor /2 2-F PS21 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 8-B
PS5 Paper size sensor /Rr1 3-B CL1 Pre-registration clutch /1 8-B
PS6 Upper limit sensor /1 3-B CL2 Vertical conveyance clutch 8-B
PS7 Paper feed sensor /1 3-B CL3 Pre-registration clutch /2 8-B
PS8 Paper empty sensor /1 3-B CNT1 Total counter 8-H
PS9 Handle release sensor /1 3-B CNT2 Key counter 9-I
VR1 Remaining paper VR /1 3-B
VR2 Paper size VR /1 3-B
PS33 Toner remaining sensor /3 3-F
PS34 Toner remaining sensor /4 3-F
M6 Toner bottle motor 3-G
SD3 Pick-up solenoid /1 4-B
CL4 Paper feed clutch /1 4-B
CL5 Separation clutch /1 4-B
FM20 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 4-B
FM21 Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 4-B
M25 Paper lift motor /1 4-B
SW5 Door switch /2 4-F
FM4 Transfer/separation suction fan 4-F
FM5 Developing suction fan 4-F
M7 Toner hopper motor 4-G
PS10 Paper size sensor /Fr2 5-B
PS11 Paper size sensor /Rr2 5-B
PS12 Upper limit sensor /2 5-B
PS13 Paper feed sensor /2 5-B
PS14 Paper empty sensor /2 5-B
PS15 Handle release sensor /2 5-B
VR3 Remaining paper VR /2 5-B
FM9 Paper exit cooling fan /1 5-F
FM11 Pump cooling fan 5-F
FM1 Cooling fan /1 5-F
VR4 Paper size VR /2 6-B
SD4 Pick-up solenoid /2 6-B
CL6 Paper feed clutch /2 6-B
CL7 Separation clutch /2 6-B
FM22 Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 6-B
FM23 Paper feed assist fan /Rr2 6-B
FM12 IPB cooling fan 6-F
FM6 Suction fan /1 6-F
FM7 Suction fan /2 6-F
TS1 Thermostat /1 6-H
TS2 Thermostat /2 6-H
L2 Fusing heater lamp /1 6-H
M26 Paper lift motor /2 7-B
SD1 Tray lock solenoid /1 7-B
4.4
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
411-1 KEY_SIG 214-11 KEY_SIG
411-2 S.GND 214-10 S.GND
411-3 CVM1_SIG 214-9 CVM1_SIG
411-4 CVFEED_SIG 214-8 CVFEED_SIG
323-8 N.C
411-5 CV_SIZE0 214-7 CV_SIZE0 341-14 353-2-10 356-1-2
323-5 CONT
214-6 CV_SIZE1 353-1-11 356-2-1 Erase lamp
411-6 CV_SIZE1
EL
411-7 CV_SIZE2 214-5 CV_SIZE2
341-13 354-2
F/G
1
1
411-8 CV_SIZE3 214-4 CV_SIZE3 323-4 CONT Drum claw

341-12 354-1
411-9 CVDUP_SIG 214-3 CVDUP_SIG 323-3 24V
SD5
solenoid
Main body 4/4
411-10 OPF0 214-2 CPF0

356-9
411-11 OPF1 214-1 CPF1
F/G
F/G
36-1 M1_SIG 341-18 353-11-1 359-2
323-7 TM_D2 353-10-2 359-3 Charger
36-2 PAPER FEED_SIG 341-24
353-9-3 359-1
355-1-9
37-7 S.GND 341-17 cleaning motor

M23
36-3 SIZE 0 323-6 TM_D1
36-4 SIZE 1 37-8 5V
341-16 355-2-8 356-2
36-5 SIZE 2 37-1 OP_TXD 323-2 BLA_2

341-15 355-1-9 356-1 Blade motor
F/G
37-2 OP_DTR 323-1 BLA_1

M22
36-6 SIZE 3
ACDB 2/2
DRUM UNIT
36-7 DUPLEX_SIG 37-3 OP_CTS 341-19 355-3-7 356-3 360-1

37-4 OP_RXD 225-A1 5V
36-8 CPF0 341-20 355-4-6 356-4 360-2
Coin vendor
37-5 OP_DSR 225-A2 SIG Blade sensor /1
36-9 CPF1 341-21 355-5-5 356-5 360-3
37-6 OP_RTS 225-A3 S.GND
36-10 P.GND 355-6-4 356-6 360-1
341-22 355-7-3 356-7 360-2
539-1-5
225-A4 SIG Blade sensor /2
209- 1 SEP PWM(DC) 355-8-2 356-8 360-3
PS24 PS25
539-2-4
209- 2 SEP AC_FB 353-3-9 360-1
539-3-3
209- 3 TRANS/SEP DC_FB 341-11 353-4-8 360-2
539-4-2 225-A5 SIG Charger cleaning home sensor
209- 4 SEP PWM(AC) 353-5-7 360-3
539-5-1
209- 5 TRNANS PWM 353-6-6 360-1
540-1-15
510-15 1mSEC TIMER 215- 1 1MSEC_TIMER 341-23 353-7-5 360-2
540-2-14 Charger cleaning limit sensor
2
2
225-A6 SIG
F/G
510-14 REQ1 215- 2 REQ1 353-8-4 360-3
540-3-13
510-13 REQ2 215- 3 REQ2
540-4-12 340-5 350-4-2 458-1 457-1
123
510-12 GND 215-4 S.GND 457-2

540-5-11 340-2 350-3-3 458-2
510-11 FUSER EXIT PS 215- 5 FUSER EXIT PS 224-5 SIG 457-3
540-6-10 340-3 350-2-4 458-3 457-4
F/G
510-10 ACK2 215- 6 ACK2 224-6 A.GND Drum potential sensor
DPS
340-4 350-1-5 457-5

PS26 PS27 DPSB
540-7-9 458-4
136
510-9 EDGE PS 215- 7 EDGE PS

540-8-8 340-8
510-8 ERR 215- 8 ERR 224-2 5V Drum potential
540-9-7 340-1
510-7 ACK 215- 9 ACK 224-1 D_SET sensor board
540-10-6 351-4-1
510-6 TXD 215-10 RXD
540-11-5 351-3-2
510-5 REQ 215-11 REQ
540-12-4 340-7 351-1-4
510-4 CLK_T 215-12 CLK_R 224-4 THD- TH5
TRANFER
540-13-3 Drum temperature sensor
CHARGER
215-13 LATCH 340-6 351-2-3
510-3 LATCH
TRANSFER/
540-14-2
224-3 THD+
SEPARATION
SEPARATION
GUIDE PLATE
510-2 CLK_R 215-14 CLK_T
540-15-1 341-1 454-1
510-1 RXD 215-15 TXD 225-A7 5V 5V
341-2 454-2
225-A8 DCONT DCONT
560-2 325-1 24V 341-3 454-3
529-1 24V2 225-B1 Vref Vref
CN650-1 24V 531-1 24V 560-5 325-2 24V 341-4 454-4
529-2 24V2 Vertical 225-B2 Gamma CONT Gamma CONT
CN650-2 5V 531-2 5V 560-1 ADU 325-3 A 341-5 454-5
529-3 A conveyance 225-B3 JAMCONT JCONT Toner control sensor board
M8
CN651-1 TRANS G_CONT 531-3 TRANS G_CONT 560-3 accelerate 325-4 /A 341-6 454-6
529-4 /A 225-B4 DSIG DSIG
M14
CN651-2 TRANS_CONT 531-4 TRANS_CONT 560-4
motor 325-5 B 341-7 454-7
529-5 B
motor 225-B5 DmonSIG Dmon
CN651-3 TRPWM 560-6 325-6 /B 341-8 454-8
529-6 /B 225-B6 Gamma SIG Gamma SIG
CN651-4 SEP_CONT 531-5 SEP_CONT 341-9 454-9
561-2 225-B7 JAMSIG JAM
3
3
CN651-5 SPAC_PWM 524-1 24V2 422-1 24V 341-10 454-10

TCSB
561-5 225-B8 A.GND A.GND

CN651-6 SPDC_PWM 524-2 24V2 422-2 24V
561-1
CN651-7 SHIFT SIG 531-6 SHIFT SIG 524-3 A ADU reverse Paper exit 422-3 A
561-3
524-4 /A motor motor /1 M9 422-4 /A
M12
CN651-8 TSDC_FB 561-4
F/G
524-5 B 422-5 B
HV2
CN651-9 SPAC_FB
110
152
102
561-6
CN651-10 TRANS EM 531-7 TRANS EM 524-6 /B 422-6 /B
534-6-1 562-2 181-1 159-1 255-1
104
CN651-11 SEP EM 531-8 SEP EM 528-1 24V2 5V

534-5-2 562-5 181-2 255-2
127
CN650-3 S.GND 531-9 S.GND 528-2 24V2 S.G.

534-4-3 562-1 181-3 159-2 256-1
CN650-4 P.GND 531-10 P.GND 528-3 A Reverse/exit CONT 228-A1 CONT 227-11 S.GND
534-3-4 562-3 181-4 159-3 256-2
BIAS
528-4 A/ motor CLK 228-A2 CLK 227-10CHARGE1 CONT
M13
534-2-5 562-4 181-5 256-3
F/R 227-9 CHARGE2 CONT
F/G
528-5 B 256-4
534-1-6 562-6 181-6 159-4
528-6 B/ EM 228-A3 EM 227-8 CHARGE PWM
181-7 159-5 256-5
DEVELOPING
M3
563-3 H/L 228-A12 GAIN 227-7 GRID PWM

520-1 24V2 181-8 159-6 256-6
563-9 227-6 DEV BIAS CONT
74
P.G.
520-2 24V2 ADU 181-9 159-7 256-7
563-1 227-5 DEV BIAS PWM
75
P.G.
Developing motor
DRUM UNIT
520-3 A 181-10 159-8 83-4 256-8

HV1
574-1 557-3-1 563-5 conveyance 24V 227-4 CHARGE EM

153
526-A3 5V 520-4 A/ 181-11 159-9 256-9

557-2-2 563-7
M15
CHARGER
ADU conveyance 574-2 motor /1 24V 227-3 DEV BIAS FB

526-A2 SIG 520-5 B 256-10
sensor /1 574-3 557-1-3 563-11 227-2 DEV BIAS(AC) CONT
526-A1 S.GND 520-6 B/ 256-11
227-1 DEV BIAS(AC) PWM
575-1 543-3-1 255-3
GRID BIAS
526-A6 5V 451-1 182-1

543-2-2 221-1 FIX_SET_P 5V 228-A11 5V
UNIT
ADU conveyance 575-2 182-2

526-A5 SIG 451-19
sensor /2 575-3 543-1-3 221-2 5V 464-1 S.G.
47
70
43
182-3
PS35 PS36
526-A4 S.GND 228-A8 CONT
451-15 464-2 Fusing exit CONT
4
4
CHARGER
583-1 538-3-1 549-3-7 221-4 FEXIT_PS 182-4 81-1-9 70-1-3 480-1

Transfer 526-A9 5V 464-3 sensor CLK 228-A9 CLK 211-15 5V2
583-2 538-2-2 549-2-8 182-5 81-2-8 70-2-2 480-2
assist home 526-A8 SIG F/R 228-B7 GND 211-14 MEXIT_PS Paper exit sensor
583-3 538-1-3 549-1-9 451-14 465-1 182-6 81-3-7 70-3-1 480-3
PS3
PS37
sensor 526-A7 S.GND 221-3 5V EM 228-A10 LD 211-13 S.GND
451-16 465-2 Fusing jam 182-7
M1
577-1 549-6-4 221-5 FJAM_PS H/L

Transfer/ 526-A12 5V 451-12 465-3 sensor 182-8 81-4-6 130-1-6 86-1
PS22 PS23
549-5-5
71
577-2 221-7 S.GND P.G. 211-12 5V2

Fusing motor
separation cleaning 526-A11 SIG 451-10 182-9 81-5-5 130-2-5 86-2

549-4-6
72
577-3 221-6 FIX_SET_N P.G. 211-11 DOOR_PS1 Door open/close sensor /1

home sensor 526-A10 S.GND 182-10 83-6 81-6-4 130-3-4 86-3
PS1
451-2 466-1-2
155
TH1 24V 211-10 S.GND

223-1 TH1+ Thermistor /1 182-11
578-1 549-9-1 451-3 466-2-1
Transfer/ 526-A15 5V 24V
223-2 TH1- 81-7-3 130-4-3 87-1
578-2 549-8-2
separation cleaning 526-A14 SIG 211-9 5V2
578-3 549-7-3 451-4 467-1-3 81-8-2 130-5-2 87-2
PS38 PS39
limit sensor 526-A13 S.GND 223-3 TH2+ TH2 Thermistor /2 211-8 DOOR_PS2 Door open/close sensor /2
335-1 81-9-1 130-6-1 87-3
PS2
451-5 467-3-1 5V 207-5 5V

544-3-1 547-3-4 223-4 TH2- 335-2
211-7 S.GND
579-1
526-B3 5V 451-6 S.G.
Registration 579-2 544-2-2 547-2-5 223-5 TH3+ TH3 Thermistor /3 335-3
526-B2 SIG 451-7 CONT 207-1 CONT
sensor 579-3 544-1-3 547-1-6 223-6 TH3- 335-4
526-B1 S.GND CLK 207-2 CLK
451-8 469-2-4 335-5
223-7 TH4+ TH4 207-4 GND 210-19 DF_OPEN
321
581-3 547-4-3 Thermistor /4 F/R

451-9 469-4-2 335-6
526-B4 5V 223-8 TH4- 207-3 LD 210-18 ERR_R
322
Paper leading 581-2 547-5-2 EM

526-B5 SIG 451-11 452-1 335-7
M5
210-17 PVV
323
edge sensor 581-1 547-6-1 424-1 WEBM_D1 S.G.

335-8 336-1-4
PS40 PS41
526-B6 S.GND 451-20 452-2
PRCB 2/2
210-16 TONER_VV
47
324
424-2 WEBM_D2 Web P.G.

451-18 452-3 335-9 336-2-3
545-3-1 210-15 APC
43
325
580-1 424-3 WEBM_D3 motor P.G.

M24
526-B9 5V 335-10 336-3-2

Conveyance motor
451-17 452-4 360-1

ADU deceleration 545-2-2 24V 210-14 S_VV
326
37
580-2
110
526-B8 SIG 424-4 WEBM_D4

Transfer/ 335-11 336-4-1 360-2
sensor 545-1-3 24V 210-13 5V_SIG
327
580-3
41
102
571-2-9 564-2-1
PS42
526-B7 S.GND 521-A10 D1 separation 210-12 E_VV
328
571-1-10 564-1-2
5
5
582-1 548-3-1 521-A11 D2 cleaning 222-A10 POL_LOCK

M20
170
210-11 RES_OUT
329
526-B12 5V
582-2 548-2-2 motor 222-B1 POL_CLK 361-3
171
210-10 RES_CONT
330
ADU exit sensor 526-B11 SIG

582-3 548-1-3 565-2-1 222-B2 POL_CONT 361-4
172
210-9 SYS_TXD
331
526-B10 S.GND 521-B1 24V ADU lock

565-1-2 53-1 361-5
183-1 210-8 S.GND
332
521-B2 CONT
SD6
576-1
solenoid 5V 220-A17 N.C.
125
526-B15 5V 361-6
183-2 210-7 SYS_CTS
333
RCDB
ADU handle 576-2

526-B14 SIG S.G. 361-10
183-3 210-6 S.GND
334
566-2-1
release sensor 576-3 527-B11 24V Reverse/exit CONT 220-A15 FEEDM_CONT
526-B13 S.GND 183-4 210-5 ERR_T
335
566-1-2
527-B10 CONT CLK 220-B15 FEEDM_CLK
SD7
solenoid 183-5 210-4 SYS_RXD

336
584-3 550-1-3 220-B16 FEEDM_F/R

527-A7 5V F/R
183-6 210-3 S.GND
337
ADU reverse 584-2 550-2-2 220-A16 FEEDM_EM

527-A8 SIG Thick paper EM
183-7 210-2 SYS_RTS
338
sensor /2 550-3-1 525-1 24V

M4
584-1 H/L
527-A9 S.GND assist 220-B17 N.C. 210-1 S.GND
183-8
339
525-2 CONT
SD8
solenoid P.G.
585-3 551-1-3 183-9
527-A10 5V P.G.
551-2-2 183-10
371-1-2
ADU reverse
Paper feed motor
585-2 527-A11 SIG 534-1 CONT

ADU cooling 24V
sensor /1 585-1 551-3-1 534-2 EM 183-11
PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46
67 66 65 64
527-A12 S.GND fan /1 24V 212-1 R_POM_EM

FM14
534-3 P.GND
552-1-3 212-2 R_POM_VR
586-3 527-A13 5V 180-1 158-1
468-1-4569-3-1 24V 212-3 R_POM_VS
154
586-2 552-2-2 527-A1 CONT

527-A14 SIG 180-2 158-2
Reverse sensor /2 468-2-3569-2-2 ADU cooling PWM 228-A4 PWM 212-4 R_POM_GND
586-1 552-3-1 527-A2 EM
527-A15 S.GND 180-3 158-3
569-1-3 fan /2 F/R 228-A5 F/R 212-5 R_POM_CONT
FM15
527-A3 P.GND 180-4 158-4

M2
587-3 553-1-3 CONT 228-A6 CONT 212-6 NC

527-B1 5V 180-5 158-5
553-2-2 568-3-1 567-3-1 EM 228-A7 EN
587-2 527-A4 CONT
Drum motor
Reverse sensor /1 527-B2 SIG Sensor 180-6 158-6

568-2-2 567-2-2 P.G.
73
553-3-1
6
587-1
6
527-B3 S.GND 527-A5 EM

568-1-3 567-1-3 cooling fan
FM16
527-A6 P.GND 208-1 5V2

588-3 554-1-3 208-2 SIG
527-B4 5V
546-3-1
FUSING UNIT
ADU accelerate 554-2-2

(OPTION)
588-2
M30 Recycle cut motor
527-B5 SIG 527-B13 CONT 334-1 208-3 S.GND

sensor 554-3-1 546-2-2 ADU cooling 5V 219-1 5V
588-1 527-B6 S.GND 527-B14 EM 334-2
546-1-3 fan /3 S.G.
FM13
527-B15 P.GND 334-3 208-4 5V2

589-1 555-3-1 CONT 219-2 CONT
527-B9 5V
RECYCLE CUT
570-3-1 334-4 208-5 SIG

ADU reverse 589-2 555-2-2 521-A1 CONT CLK 219-3 CLK
527-B8 SIG 570-2-2 Registration 334-5 208-6 S.GND
paper exit sensor 589-3 555-1-3 521-A2 EM F/R 219-4 F/R
PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50
527-B7 S.GND 570-1-3 cooling fan 334-6

FM17
521-A3 P.GND EM 219-5 LD

***-1-6 334-7
S.G.
M31
599-1 S.GND 756-6-1

***-2-5 Transfer 334-8 333-1-4 218-1 FIN_TXD
571-10-1 572-2-1
183
599- 2 SIZE_SIG1 P.G. 756-5-2

521-B3 24V 334-9 333-2-3
***-3-4 571-9-2 572-1-2 exposure 218-2 S.GND
182
599- 3 SIZE_SIG2 P.G. 756-4-3

521-B4 CONT
TSL
***-4-3 334-10 333-3-2 218-3 FIN_CTS

lamp
TRANSFER
24V
181
599- 4 SIZE_SIG3
***-5-2 334-11 333-4-1 218-4 S.GND
24V
180
599- 5 SIZE_SIG4 756-3-4

ADU reverse paper exit motor
556-10-1 573-1
***-6-1 521-B5 VIDEO 218-5 FIN_RXD
ASSIST ADAPTER
599-6 S.GND 556-9-2 573-2 756-2-5

521-B6 SGND 218-6 S.GND
556-8-3 573-3 756-1-6
521-B7 5V 218-7 FIN_RTS
556-7-4 573-4
521-B8 -5V 218-8 S.GND
556-6-5 573-5 757-5-1
521-B9 S.GND 218-9 EXIT_PS
556-5-6 573-6 Centering
521-B10 SI
PS54
556-4-7 573-7 sensor

521-B11 S.GND 755-1
48
556-3-8 573-8 24V

FS-503
755-2
FD-501
521-B12 CLK 5V
138
556-2-9
7
7
573-9 755-3
521-B13 LED
91
556-1-10 573-10
S.GND
521-B14 24V 755-4
54
P.GND
755-5
76
P.GND
(OPTION)
571-8-3 559-6-1 755-6

77
521-A4 24V2 P.GND

571-7-4 559-5-2 757-1-5
5V
130
LS-501/502
521-A5 24V2 Transfer 757-2-4

571-3-8 559-1-6(A)
5V
137
521-A6 A assist 757-3-3

571-5-6 559-3-4(/A)
S.GND
139
521-A7 /A
M19
571-4-7 559-2-5(B) motor 757-4-2

S.GND
140
521-A8 B
217-6 IO_DTXD
217-7 5V
217-8 IO_DCLK
217-9 S.GND
217-10 PFU_LATCH
217-11 IO_UCLK
217-12 ERR_OUT1
217-13 IO_URXD
217-14 ACK1
217-15 REQ13
217-1 NC
217-2 NC
217-3 ERR_OUT3
217-4 ACK3
217-5 REQ3
571-6-5 559-4-3(/B)
ADUDB1
521-A9 /B
F/G
521-A13 RESERVE SIG

751-9-2
751-8-3
751-7-4
751-6-5
751-5-6
751-4-7
751-3-8
751-2-9
752-5-1
752-4-2
752-3-3
752-2-4
752-1-5
751-10-1
751-1-10
F/G
258-12 542-12
258-11 542-11
513-2 GND
116
258-10 542-10
99
513-1 24V
258-9 542-9
500-9 A.GND
112
258-8 542-8
500-8 5VA
105
258-7 542-7
56
500-3 P.GND
258-6 542-6 523-1 LOOP ENG 590-19 LOOP ENG
500-6 S.GND
8
8
129
258-5 542-5 523-2 REG_CLK 590-18 REG_CLK

88
500-5 S.GND 523-3 REG_REF1 590-17 REG_REF1

258-4 542-4
500-7 -5V 523-4 REG_REF2 590-16 REG_REF2
107
258-3 542-3 523-5 REG_REF3 590-15 REG_REF3

80
500-4 5V
258-2 542-2 523-6 LOOP_CLK 590-14 LOOP_CLK
500-2 12V 523-7 LOOP_REF1 590-13 LOOP_REF1
101
258-1 542-1
523-8 LOOP_REF2 590-12 LOOP_REF2
50
500-1 24V1
259-2 541-2 523-9 LOOP_REF3 590-11 LOOP_REF3
95
501-2 P.GND 523-10 CONV/2_ENG 590-10 CONV/2_ENG

259-1 541-1
501-1 24V2 502-1 541-3 259-3
156
523-11 CONV/2_CLK 590-9 CONV/2_CLK

591-1 24V2
157
523-12 CONV/2_REF1 590-8 CONV/2_REF1 502-2 541-4 259-4

591-2 P.GND
117
523-13 CONV/2_REF2 590-7 CONV/2_REF2

523-14 CONV/2_REF3 590-6 CONV/2_REF3
599-6
Crimp
523-15 S.GND 590-5 S.GND

PF-701
523-16 RESEET 590-4 RESET 594-6 /B

599-4
Symbol
523-17 CONV/2_FUSE 590-3 CONV/2_FUSE 594-5 B

599-3
(OPTION)
523-18 LOOP_FUSE 590-2 LOOP FUSE 594-4 /A

523-19 RESIST_FUSE 590-1 RESIST FUSE 599-1 Loop motor
594-3 A
M18
521-A12 5V 597-1 5V 599-5

594-2 24V2
512-1 SHIELD 521-A14 S.GND 597-2 S.GND 599-2
594-1 24V2
512-2 SIG 511-1 CLK 595-1 CLK 598-6
592-6 /B
S.GND
12V
P.GND
24V
HT
HT
P.GND
S.GND
5V
24V
512-3 GND 511-2 -12V 595-2 -12V 598-4

512-4 -12V 511-3 GND 595-3 GND 592-5 B
598-3
Connector
512-5 12V 511-4 12V 595-4 12V 592-4 /A Registration

598-1
511-5 SHIELD 595-5 SHIELD 592-3 A
M17
512-6 TH_SIG motor

754-4
754-3
754-2
754-1
753-6
753-5
753-4
753-3
753-2
753-1
598-5
592-2 24V2
598-2
9
9
592-1 24V2
94
98
597-11
96
491-6 TH_SIG 593-6 /B

141
597-7
39
89
491-5 +12V 593-5 B

597-5 ADU
491-4 -12V 593-4 /A
109
115
490-1 CLK+ 596-1 CLK+ 597-1 conveyance

491-3 GND
19
490-2 CLK- 593-3 A

M16
596-2 CLK- 597-9 motor /2

491-2 SIG
20
490-3 GND 596-3 GND 593-2 24V2

597-3
Relay connector
491-1 SHELD 593-1 24V2

Faston
MFDB2
MFDB1
ADUDB2
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

EL Erase lamp 1-B M31 ADU reverse paper exit motor 6-E
SD5 Drum claw solenoid 1-B FM13 ADU cooling fan /3 6-F
M22 Blade motor 1-B FM14 ADU cooling fan /1 6-F
M23 Charger cleaning motor 1-B FM15 ADU cooling fan /2 6-F
— Coin vendor 1-E FM16 Sensor cooling fan 6-F
PS24 Blade sensor /1 2-B FM17 Registration cooling fan 6-F
PS25 Blade sensor /2 2-B TSL Transfer exposure lamp 6-F
PS26 Charger cleaning home sensor 2-B PS46 ADU reverse sensor /1 6-I
PS27 Charger cleaning limit sensor 2-B PS47 Reverse sensor /2 6-I
DPS Drum potential sensor 2-B PS48 Reverse sensor /1 6-I
DPSB Drum potential sensor board 2-B PS49 ADU accelerate sensor 6-I
TH5 Drum temperature sensor 2-B PS50 ADU reverse paper exit sensor 6-I
ADUDB1 ADU drive board /1 2-G — Transfer assist adapter 6-I
— Transfer bias 2-I PS54 Centering sensor 7-F
— Guide plate bias 2-I M19 Transfer assist motor 7-F
— Separation bias 2-I ADUDB2 ADU drive board /2 8-F
— Transfer/separation charger 2-I M16 ADU conveyance motor /2 9-E
— Developing bias 3-A M17 Registration motor 9-E
TCSB Toner control sensor board 3-B M18 Loop motor 9-E
HV1 High voltage unit /1 3-B MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 9-G
M3 Developing motor 3-E MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 9-H
M8 Vertical conveyance motor 3-E
M9 Paper exit motor /1 3-E
M12 ADU reverse motor 3-F
M13 Reverse/exit motor 3-F
M14 ADU accelerate motor 3-F
HV2 High voltage unit /2 3-I
— Charger 4-A
— Grid bias 4-A
PS1 Door open/close sensor /1 4-B
PS2 Door open/close sensor /2 4-B
PS3 Paper exit sensor 4-B
M1 Fusing motor 4-E
M15 ADU conveyance motor /1 4-F
PS22 Fusing exit sensor 4-F
PS23 Fusing jam sensor 4-F
TH1 Thermistor /1 4-F
PS35 ADU conveyance sensor /1 4-I
PS36 ADU conveyance sensor /2 4-I
PS37 Transfer assist home sensor 4-I
PS38 Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor 4-I
PS39 Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor 4-I
RCDB Recycle cut drive board 5-A
M4 Paper feed motor 5-E
M5 Conveyance motor 5-E
M20 Transfer/separation cleaning motor 5-F
M24 Web motor 5-F
SD6 ADU lock solenoid 5-F
SD7 Reverse/exit solenoid 5-F
SD8 Thick paper assist solenoid 5-F
PS40 Registration sensor 5-I
PS41 Paper leading edge sensor 5-I
PS42 ADU deceleration sensor 5-I
PS43 ADU exit sensor 5-I
PS44 ADU handle release sensor 5-I
PS45 ADU reverse sensor /2 5-I
M30 Recycle cut motor 6-A
M2 Drum motor 6-E
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
4.5 DF-603
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A MFS1
A
To MAIN BODY Multi feed sensor/1
MFDB1
MS301 Cover open/close switch
B Original exit sensor/Rt PS314

B
SD301 SDF switching solenoid
Original reverse/exit sensor PS313
SD302 Pressure roller release solenoid
MFDB2
MFS2
SD303 Gate solenoid
C Multi feed sensor/2 C
Tray lower limit sensor PS316
Original size sensor/Rt PS302 FM302 Cooling fan/Rt
TB
Original size sensor/Lt PS303
D M305 Original paper exit motor/2

D
Original count sensor PS310
Original registration sensor/Rt PS318 Original size

VR VR301 M304 Original paper exit motor/1
Original registration sensor/Lt PS306
E Original empty sensor PS305

E
M303 Tray up/down motor
Reverse jam
Tray upper limit sensor PS315 sensor PS304
Original reverse sensor PS309 M302 Original feed motor
F Original exit sensor/Lt

F
PS307
M301 Original conveyance motor
RADF open/close sensor PS301
Original conveyance sensor PS308 SD304 Paper exit gate solenoid
G Original skew sensor/Rr PS311 G

FM301 Cooling fan/Lt
Original skew sensor/Fr PS312
Centering sensor/Fr PS320
Centering sensor/Rr PS321
H RADFCB Symbol H
Centering LED sensor/Fr PS319
Centering LED sensor/Rr PS322 Connector Faston

Crimp Relay connector
I I
APS timing Sensor PS317
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

FM301 Cooling fan /Lt 8-G
SD301 SDF switching solenoid 8-B
M301 Original conveyance motor 6-F
M302 Original feed motor 7-F
M304 Original paper exit motor /1 7-D
M305 Original paper exit motor /2 6-D
M303 Tray up/down motor 6-E
FM302 Cooling fan /Rt 7-C
SD303 Gate solenoid 8-C
SD302 Pressure roller release solenoid 8-B
SD304 Paper exit gate solenoid 7-G
MS301 Cover open/close switch 7-B
MFS1 Multi feed sensor /1 9-A
MFS2 Multi feed sensor /2 2-C
MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 7-A
MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 3-C
TB Tray board 4-C
PS301 RADF open/close sensor 2-F
PS302 Original size sensor /Rt 3-C
PS303 Original size sensor /Lt 3-D
PS304 Reverse jam sensor 3-E
PS305 Original empty sensor 2-E
PS306 Original registration sensor /Lt 2-E
PS307 Original exit sensor /Lt 2-F
PS308 Original conveyance sensor 2-G
PS309 Original reverse sensor 3-F
PS310 Original count sensor 3-D
PS311 Original skew sensor /Rr 2-G
PS312 Original skew sensor /Fr 2-G
PS313 Original reverse/exit sensor 4-B
PS314 Original exit sensor /Rt 4-B
PS315 Tray upper limit sensor 2-E
PS316 Tray lower limit sensor 4-C
PS317 APS timing sensor 2-I
PS318 Original registration sensor /Rt 2-D
PS319 Centering LED sensor /Fr 1-H
PS320 Centering sensor /Fr 2-H
PS321 Centering sensor /Rr 2-H
PS322 Centering LED sensor /Rr 2-I
VR301 Original size VR 3-D
RADFCB RADF control board 5-A
4.6
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
PF-701
1
1
753-1
CN700-1 24V1
753-2
CN700-5 5V1
753-3
CN700-6 S.GND
753-4 751-1-10
CN700-2 P.GND 705-10 RXD_DN 217-6 IO_DTXD
751-2-9 217-7 5V
705-9 5V
N.C CN700-3 P.GND 751-3-8
Dehumidification heater/1 705-8 CLK_DN 217-8 IO_DCLK
751-4-7 217-9 S.GND
795-1 795-2 705-7 S.GND
751-5-6 217-10 PFU_LATCH
HTR 1 705-6 /LATCH_DN
751-6-5 217-11 IO_UCLK
705-5 CLK_UP
751-7-4 217-12 ERR_OUT1
705-4 /ERR_GA
Dehumidification heater/2 705-3 TXD_UP
751-8-3 217-13 IO_URXD
753-5 796-1 796-2 751-9-2
705-2 /ACK_GA 217-14 ACK1
HTR 2 751-10-1
705-1 /REQ_GA 217-15 REQ13
Dehumidification heater/3 752-1-5 217-1 PFU_EXPS

705-15 /EXIT PS OUT
2
2
752-2-4
PRCB
797-1 797-2 705-14 NC 217-2 PFU_LPPS

752-3-3
Dehumidification heater
HTR 3 705-13 /IO ERR 217-3 ERR_OUT3
752-4-2 217-4 ACK3
753-6 705-12 /IO ACK
752-5-1 217-5 REQ3
3
705-11 /IO REQ
MAIN BODY
Door switch
770-1 775-1
SW10
754-1 FT1 FT2
770-2 775-2
CN701-1 24V2(I/L)
MAIN BODY
1
24V
2
760-12
710-2 T1_SET_P
760-14
710-1 5V1
3
760-22
710-8 S.GND
Paper Paper
4
feed M feed M
P.GND
754-2
CN701-2 P.GND
263-1-6 277-1
760-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
710-5 /T1UP_PS
754-3 263-3-4 277-3
PS71
CN700-4 12V3 sensor /1

263-6-1 276-3
TRAY1
754-4
CN700-7 S.GND 760-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed
710-3 /T1FEED_PS
PS72
263-4-3 276-1 sensor /1

264-3-1 275-1
3
3
760-2 264-2-2 275-2 Paper empty

730-1 745-3-10 710-4 T1_0PS
PS73
CN712-3 5V1 264-1-3 275-3 sensor /1

Pre-registration 730-2 745-2-11
CN712-2 /T1PRE_REG_PS 265-1
730-3 745-1-12
PS89
sensor /1 CN712-1 S.GND 760-4 265-2 Handle release
710-6 /T1GRIP_PS
265-3
PS74
731-1 745-6-7
sensor /1
CN712-6 5V1 270-1
Vertical conveyance 731-2 745-5-8
CN712-5 /T1_CONV_PS 760-11 270-2 Paper size
731-3 745-4-9
PS90
sensor /1 CN712-4 S.GND 710-14 T1SIZE_PS1
270-3
PS75
sensor /Fr1
732-1 745-9-4 271-1
CN712-9 5V1 760-6 271-2 Paper size
Intermediate 732-2 745-8-5 710-13 T1SIZE_PS2
CN712-8 /T1_CONV_MID_PS 271-3
PS76
732-3 745-7-6 sensor /Rr1
PS91
sensor /Up CN712-7 S.GND
760-7 273-1
733-1 745-12-1 710-9 A5V
CN712-12 5V1 760-5 273-2 Remaining
733-2 745-11-2 710-7 T1REMAIN_VR
273-3
VR10
Loop sensor /1 CN712-11 /T1_LOOP_PS paper VR /1

733-3 745-10-3
PS92
CN712-10 S.GND 268-1
760-8 268-2 760-24
710-10 T1SIZE_VR
F/G
734-1 746-6-1 268-3

Paper size VR /1
VR11
CN713-15 5V1
F/G
Pre-registration 734-2 746-5-2

CN713-14 /T2PRE_REG_PS
734-3 746-4-3
PS93
sensor /2 CN713-13 S.GND 760-20 272-1-2
720-3 /T1UPSD_CONT Pick-up
272-2-1
735-1 746-3-4 solenoid /1
CN713-12 5V1
735-2 746-2-5 760-19 260-1-2
Loop sensor /2 CN713-11 /T2_LOOP_PS 720-2 /T1FEEDCL_CONT Paper feed
735-3 746-1-6 760-15 260-2-1
PS94
SD14 CL6
CN713-10 S.GND 720-1 24V1 clutch /1

760-18 266-1-2
736-1 747-5-1 720-9 /T1HNDLNGCL_CONT Separation
CN717-10 5V1 266-2-1
4
4
CL7
Pre-registration 736-2 747-4-2 clutch /1

CN717-9 /T3PRE_REG_PS
736-3 747-3-3
PS95
Vertical conveyance
sensor /3 CN717-8 S.GND
737-1 744-3-7
CN713-3 5V1
Vertical conveyance 737-2 744-2-8 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
CN713-2 /T3_CONV_PS 720-5 T1FAN_CONT
737-3 744-1-9 760-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed
PS96
sensor /1 CN713-1 S.GND 710-11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND) assist fan /Fr1
738-1 744-6-4 760-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
CN713-6 5V1 720-4 T1FAN_CONT
Intermediate 738-2 744-5-5 760-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
CN713-5 /T3_CONV_MID_PS 710-12 /FAN_R_EM
738-3 744-4-6 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)
PS97
760-21
FM41 FM42
sensor /Lw CN713-4 S.GND 720-6 P.GND assist fan /Rr1

760-13 278-1(CONT)
739-1 744-9-1 720-8 UPM_CONT
CN713-9 5V1 760-1 278-2(24V) Paper lift motor /1
739-2 744-8-2
M42
720-7 UPM24V
Loop sensor /3 CN713-8 /T3_LOOP_PS
739-3 744-7-3
PS98
CN713-7 S.GND
761-12
711-A2 T2_SET_P
761-14
711-A1 5V1
761-22
765-1-2 711-A8 S.GND
Pre-registration CN722-1 24V1
765-2-1
CL1
clutch /1 CN722-2 /T1PRE_REGCL_CONT

263-1-6 277-1
761-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
711-A5 /T2UP_PS
263-3-4 277-3
PS77
766-1-2 sensor /2
Intermediate CN722-3 24V1
TRAY2
766-2-1 263-6-1 276-3

CL2
clutch /Up CN722-4 /T1_CONVCL_CONT

761-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed
711-A3 /T2FEED_PS
5
5
263-4-3 276-1
PS78
sensor /2
767-1-2 264-3-1 275-1
Pre-registration CN722-5 24V1
767-2-1 761-2 264-2-2 275-2
CL3
CN722-6 /T2PRE_REGCL_CONT 711-A4 T2_0PS

Paper empty
PFDB
clutch /2 264-1-3 275-3

PS79
sensor /2
265-1
768-1-2 761-4 265-2 Handle release
Intermediate CN722-7 24V1 711-A6 T2GRIP_PS
768-2-1 265-3
PS80
CL5
clutch /Lw CN722-8 /T3_CONVCL_CONT sensor /2

270-1
761-11 270-2 Paper size
769-1-2 711-A14 T2SIZE_PS1
270-3
PS81
Pre-registration CN722-9 24V1 sensor /Fr2

769-2-1
CL4
clutch /3 CN722-10 /T3PRE_REGCL_CONT 271-1

711-A13 T2SIZE_PS2
271-3
PS82
sensor /Rr2
761-7 273-1
711-A9 A5V
761-5 273-2 Remaining
711-A7 T2REMAIN_VR
273-3
VR12
782-1 5V 780-1-6
paper VR /2
CN715-1 5V1 268-1
782-2 S.GND(N.C)
782-3 CONT 780-2-5 761-8 268-2 761-24
CN715-2 /CONT 711-A10 T2SIZE_VR Paper size VR /2
F/G
268-3
VR13
782-4 CLK 780-3-4

F/G
CN715-3 CLK
782-5 F/R 780-4-3
CN715-4 F/R
782-6 LD 780-6-1 761-20 272-1-2
Paper feed motor CN715-6 /LD 721-A3 /T2UPSD_CONT Pick-up
M40
782-7 H/L 780-5-2 272-2-1

CN715-5 H/L solenoid /2
782-8 PGND 781-4
3
761-19 260-1-2
782-9 PGND 781-3 721-A2 /T2FEEDCL_CONT Paper feed
4
761-15 260-2-1
782-1024V 781-2 721-A1 24V1
1
clutch /2
6
6
782-1124V 781-1
2
761-18 266-1-2
721-A10 /T2HDNLNGCL_CONT Separation
266-2-1
clutch /2
761-16 267-1-2
721-A11 /T2REVCL_CONT Forced separation
267-2-1
SD15 CL9 CL10 CL11
740-1 743-2-1 clutch

Vertical conveyance CN712-14 /VER_DOOR_UPSW_SIG
740-2 743-1-2 262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
CN712-13 S.GND 721-A4 T2FAN_CONT
SW11
door switch /Up 761-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed

711-A11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND)
FM43
721-A7 P.GND assist fan /Fr2

761-17 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
742-1 747-2-4 721-A5 T2FAN_CONT
Vertical conveyance CN717-7 /VER_DOOR_LOSW_SIG 761-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
742-2 747-1-5 711-A12 /FAN_R_EM
761-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)
FM44
door switch /Lw CN717-6 S.GND assist fan /Rr2

SW12
721-A6 P.GND
761-13 278-1(CONT)
721-A9 UPM_CONT
M43
721-A8 UPM24V
762-12
711-B2 T3_SET_P
762-14
711-B1 5V1
723-1 A 748-3
CN723-3 A
723-2 24V 748-1 762-22
PF exit CN723-1 24V2(I/L) 711-B8 S.GND
723-3 /A 748-4
CN723-4 /A
conveyance 723-4 B 748-5
M41
CN723-5 B 263-1-6 277-1

723-5 24V 748-2
motor CN723-2 24V2(I/L) 762-3 263-2-5 277-2 Upper limit
723-6 /B 748-6 711-B5 /T3UP_PS
CN723-6 /B 263-3-4 277-3
PS83
sensor /3
263-6-1 276-3
TRAY3
7
7
762-23 263-5-2 276-2 Paper feed

711-B3 /T3FEED_PS
263-4-3 276-1
PS84
sensor /3
741-1 749-5-1 264-3-1 275-1
Horizontal conveyance CN717-5 /HOR_DOOR_SW_SIG
741-2 749-4-2 762-2 264-2-2 275-2 Paper empty
CN717-4 S.GND 711-B4 T3_0PS
SW13
door switch 264-1-3 275-3

PS85
sensor /3
265-1
724-1 749-3-3 762-4 265-2 Handle release
CN717-3 5V1 711-B6 /T3GRIP_PS
PF exit conveyance 724-2 749-2-4 265-3
PS86
CN717-2 /EXIT_PS sensor /3

PS99
sensor 724-3 749-1-5

CN717-1 S.GND 270-1
762-11 270-2 Paper size
711-B14 T3SIZE_PS1
Exit conveyance
270-3
PS87
sensor /Fr3
271-1
729-1-4 711-B13 T3SIZE_PS2
271-3
PS88
CN716-1 PFUFAN_CONT sensor /Rr3

729-3-2
CN716-2 EM
Cooling fan 729-2-3 762-7 273-1
CN716-3 H/L 711-B9 A5V
FM20
729-4-1 762-5 273-2 Remaining paper

CN716-4 PGND 711-B7 T3REMAIN_VR
273-3
VR14
VR /3
268-1
762-8 268-2 762-24
711-B10 T3SIZE_VR Paper size VR /3
F/G
268-3
VR15
F/G
762-20 272-1-2
721-B3 /T3UPSD_CONT Pick-up
272-2-1
solenoid /3
762-19 260-1-2
721-B2 /T3FEEDCL_CONT
8
Paper feed
8
762-15 260-2-1
779-1 744-1-3 721-B1 24V1 clutch /3
CN714-1 5V1
Door open/close 779-2 744-2-2
CN714-2 /FRONTDOOR_PS 762-18 266-1-2
779-3 744-3-1 721-B10 T3HNDLNGCL_CONT Separation
PS70
sensor CN714-3 S.GND 266-2-1

SD16 CL12 CL13
clutch /3
782-1 773-1-6
CN724-1 24V1
Tray lock solenoid /1 782-2 773-2-5
CN724-2 /T1_LOCKSD_CONT
SD10
262-3-1 267-3-1(CONT)
721-B4 T3FAN_CONT
762-10 262-2-2 267-2-2(EM) Paper feed
783-1 773-3-4 711-B11 /FAN_F_EM
262-1-3 267-1-3(GND)
FM45
CN724-3 24V1 assist fan /Fr3

Tray lock solenoid /2 783-2 773-4-3 721-B7 P.GND
CN724-4 /T2_LOCKSD_CONT 261-3-1 266-3-1(CONT)
SD11
762-17
721-B5 T3FAN_CONT
762-9 261-2-2 266-2-2(EM) Paper feed
711-B12 /FAN_R_EM
Crimp
762-21 261-1-3 266-1-3(GND)

FM46
784-1 773-5-2 721-B6 P.GND assist fan /Rr3

CN724-5 24V1
Tray lock solenoid /3 784-2 773-6-1 762-13 278-1(CONT)
CN724-6 /T3_LOCKSD_CONT
SD12
721-B9 UPM_CONT
Symbol

M44
721-B8 UPM24V
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

FM20 Cooling fan 8-G PS78 Paper feed sensor /2 5-C
FM41 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 4-C PS79 Paper empty sensor /2 5-C
FM42 Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 4-C PS80 Handle release sensor /2 5-C
FM43 Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 6-C PS81 Paper size sensor /Fr2 5-C
FM44 Paper feed assist fan /Rr2 6-C PS82 Paper size sensor /Rr2 5-C
FM45 Paper feed assist fan /Fr3 8-C PS83 Upper limit sensor /3 7-C
FM46 Paper feed assist fan /Rr3 8-C PS84 Paper feed sensor /3 7-C
HTR1 Dehumidification heater /1 2-G PS85 Paper empty sensor /3 7-C
HTR2 Dehumidification heater /2 2-G PS86 Handle release sensor /3 7-C
HTR3 Dehumidification heater /3 2-G PS87 Paper size sensor /Fr3 7-C
M40 Paper feed motor 6-G PS88 Paper size sensor /Rr3 7-C
M41 PF exit conveyance motor 7-G PS89 Pre-registration sensor /1 3-G
M42 Paper lift motor /1 4-C PS90 Vertical conveyance sensor /1 3-G
M43 Paper lift motor /2 7-C PS91 Intermediate sensor /Up 3-G
M44 Paper lift motor /3 9-C PS92 Loop sensor /1 4-G
CL1 Pre-registration clutch /1 5-G PS93 Pre-registration sensor /2 4-G
CL2 Intermediate clutch /Up 5-G PS94 Loop sensor /2 4-G
CL3 Pre-registration clutch /2 5-G PS95 Pre-registration sensor /3 4-G
CL4 Pre-registration clutch /3 5-G PS96 Vertical conveyance sensor /3 4-G
CL5 Intermediate clutch /Lw 5-G PS97 Intermediate sensor /Lw 4-G
CL6 Paper feed clutch /1 4-C PS98 Loop sensor /3 4-G
CL7 Separation clutch /1 4-C PS99 PF exit conveyance sensor 7-G
MC8 — 4-C SD10 Tray lock solenoid /1 8-G
CL9 Paper feed clutch /2 6-C SD11 Tray lock solenoid /2 8-G
CL10 Separation clutch /2 6-C SD12 Tray lock solenoid /3 9-G
CL11 Forced separation clutch 6-C SD14 Pick-up solenoid /1 4-C
CL12 Paper feed clutch /3 8-C SD15 Pick-up solenoid /2 6-C
CL13 Separation clutch /3 8-C SD16 Pick-up solenoid /3 8-C
MC14 — 8-C SW10 Door switch 2-G
PFUDB PF drive board 1-C SW11 Vertical conveyance door switch /Up 6-G
PS70 Door open/close sensor 8-G SW12 Vertical conveyance door switch /Lw 6-G
PS71 Upper limit sensor /1 3-C SW13 Horizontal conveyance door switch 7-G
PS72 Paper feed sensor /1 3-C VR10 Remaining paper VR /1 3-C
PS73 Paper empty sensor /1 3-C VR11 Paper size VR /1 4-C
PS74 Handle release sensor /1 3-C VR12 Remaining paper VR /2 6-C
PS75 Paper size sensor /Fr1 3-C VR13 Paper size VR /2 6-C
PS76 Paper size sensor /Rr1 3-C VR14 Remaining paper VR /3 8-C
PS77 Upper limit sensor /2 5-C VR15 Paper size VR /3 8-C
4.7
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
CN505- 5 M4_B CN530- 1 YEL
CN505- 1 M4_24V CN530- 2 BLK
CN505- 6 M4_ B/ CN530- 3 RED
CN505- 3 M4_A CN530- 4 ORG 1st folding motor
M4
CN505- 2 M4_24V CN530- 5 WIT
CN505- 4 M4_A/ CN530- 6 BLU
CN505- 11 M5_B CN531- 1 YEL

CN505- 7 M5_24V CN531- 2 BLK
CN505- 12 M5_B/ CN531- 3 RED
CN505- 9 M5_A CN531- 4 ORG 2nd folding motor
M5
CN505- 8 M5_24V CN531- 5 WIT
CN531- 6 BLU
FD-501
CN505- 10 M5_A/
510-16A-1A
CN3- 1 KCOUT_41 CN503-16 KCOUT_41
510-15A-2A
CN3- 2 KCOUT_42 CN503-15 KCOUT_42 CN506- 5 M6_B CN532- 1 YEL
Power plug
510-14A-3A CN532- 2 BLK
CN3- 3 KCOUT_43 CN503-14 KCOUT_43 CN506- 1 M6_24V
510-13A-4A CN532- 3 RED
CN3- 4 KCOUT_44 CN503-13 KCOUT_44 CN506- 6 M6_B/ CN532- 4 ORG
510-12A-5A CN506- 3 M6_A 3rd folding motor
M6
510-11A-6A CN506- 2 M6_24V CN532- 5 WIT
CN3- 6 KCOUT_46 CN503-11 KCOUT_46 CN532- 6 BLU
510-10A-7A CN506- 4 M6_A/
CN3- 8 KCOUT_48 510-9A-8A
CN503- 9 KCOUT_48
1
1
510-8A-9A
CN3- 9 KCOUT_49 CN503- 8 KCOUT_49 CN533-6- 1 RED
510-7A-10A
CN3-10 KCOUT_50 CN503- 7 KCOUT_50 CN508-A 1 M14_24V CN533-5- 2 RED
510-6A-11A
CN3-11 KCOUT_51 CN503- 6 KCOUT_51 CN508-A 2 M14_24V CN533-4- 3 BLK
510-5A-12A CN508-A 3 M14_A
Inlet
CN3-12 KCOUT_52 CN503- 5 KCOUT_52 CN508-A 4 M14_A/ CN533-3- 4 BLN 1st folding release motor
510-4A-13A CN533-2- 5 ORG
M14
CN3-13 KCOUT_53 CN503- 4 KCOUT_53 CN508-A 5 M14_B

510-3A-14A CN533-1- 6 YEL
CN3-14 KCOUT_54 CN503- 3 KCOUT_54 CN508-A 6 M14_B/
510-2A-15A
FT2
FT1
CN3-15 KCOUT_55 CN503- 2 KCOUT_55
CN3-16 KCOUT_56 510-1A-16A CN503- 1 KCOUT_56
CN508-A 7 M15_24V CN534-6- 1 RED
CN508-A 8 M15_24V CN534-5- 2 RED
CN508-A 9 M15_A CN534-4- 3 BLK
CN508-A10 M15_A/ CN534-3- 4 BLN 2nd folding release motor
CN534-2- 5 ORG
M15
CN508-A11 M15_B CN534-1- 6 YEL

CN508-A12 M15_B/
Y/G
WIT
BLK
CN13-1 /CPUIN_1(IRQ4) CN222-9 /CPUIN_1(IRQ4) 511-15A-1A CN535-6- 1 RED
CN13-2 /CPUIN_2(IRQ3) CN222-8 /CPUIN_2(IRQ3) CN209-A 1 KCIN_24 CN501-A17 PS51_SIG CN508-A13 M16_24V
511-14A-2A CN535-5- 2 RED
RT1
CN209-A 2 KCIN_25 CN501-A16 PS52_SIG CN508-A14 M16_24V
CN13-3 CPUIN_3(IRQ1) CN222-7 CPUIN_3(IRQ1) 511-13A-3A CN535-4- 3 BLK

CN13-4 CPUIN_4(TIM Input) CN209-A 3 KCIN_26 CN501-A15 PS53_SIG CN508-A15 M16_A CN535-3- 4 BLN 3rd folding release motor
CN222-6 CPUIN_4(TIM Input) 511-12A-4A M16_A/
CN209-A 4 KCIN_27 CN501-A14 PS54_SIG CN508-A16 CN535-2- 5 ORG
M16
CN13-5 NC CN222-5 NC 511-11A-5A CN508-A17 M16_B CN535-1- 6 YEL

CN13-6 CPUIN_7(TIM Input) CN209-A 5 KCIN_28 CN501-A13 PS55_SIG CN508-A18 M16_B/
CN222-4 CPUIN_7(TIM Input) 511-10A-6A
CN13-7 SGND CN222-3 GND CN209-A 6 KCIN_29 CN501-A12 PS56_SIG
511-9A-7A
CN13-8 CPUIN_8(TIM Input) CN209-A 7 KCIN_30 CN501-A11 PS57_SIG
CN222-2 CPUIN_8(TIM Input) 511-8A-8A
CN13-9 5V CN222-1 NC CN209-A 8 ORI_SET 511-7A-9A
CN501-A10 ORI_SET
CN209-A 9 KCOUT_73 CN501-A 9 M4_CONT1 CN508-B 1 SGND
FT4
FT3
511-6A-10A CN508-B 2
CN209-A10 KCOUT_74 511-5A-11A
CN501-A 8 M4_CONT2
CN209-A11 KCOUT_75 CN501-A 7 M4_F/R CN508-B 3 5V CN517- 3
511-4A-12A CN508-B 4 SGND
CN209-A12 KCOUT_76 CN501-A 6 M4_RESET CN508-B CN517- 2
CN2-A 1 KCOUT_1 CN201-A20 KCOUT_1 511-3A-13A 5 PS57 SIG CN517- 1 PS57 3rd folding cam home sensor
CN2-A 2 KCOUT_2 CN201-A19 KCOUT_2 CN209-A13 SGND 511-2A-14A
CN501-A 5 SGND CN508-B 6 5V
CBR2
CN209-A14 SGND CN501-A 4 SGND
CBR1
CN2-A 3 KCOUT_3 CN201-A18 KCOUT_3 511-1A-15A
CN2-A 4 KCOUT_4 CN201-A17 KCOUT_4 CN209-A15 SGND 511-1A-15A
CN501-A 3 SGND
CN209-A16 SGND CN501-A 2 SGND CN516- 3
FT6
FT5
CN2-A 5 KCOUT_5 CN201-A16 KCOUT_5 511-1A-15A CN508-B 7 SGND
CN2-A 6 KCOUT_6 CN201-A15 KCOUT_6 CN209-A17 5V CN501-A 1 5V CN516- 2
CN209-B 1 KCOUT_77 511-15B-1B CN501-B17 M4_ENBLECN508-B 8 PS56 SIG CN516- 1 PS56 2nd folding cam home sensor
CN2-A 7 KCOUT_7 CN201-A14 KCOUT_7 511-14B-2B CN508-B 9 5V
Circuit breaker/2
Circuit breaker/1
CN2-A 8 KCOUT_8 CN201-A13 KCOUT_8 CN209-B 2 KCOUT_78 CN501-B16 M5_CONT1
511-13B-3B
CN2-A 9 KCOUT_9 CN201-A12 KCOUT_9 CN209-B 3 KCOUT_79 CN501-B15 M5_CONT2
511-12B-4B
WIT
BLK
CN2-A10 KCOUT_10 CN201-A11 KCOUT_10 CN209-B 4 KCOUT_80 511-11B-5B
CN501-B14 M5_F/R
CN10-1 IRQ4 CN515- 3
CN2-A11 KCOUT_11 CN201-A10 KCOUT_11 CN209-B 5 KCOUT_81 511-10B-6B
CN501-B13 M5_RESET CN508-B10 SGND CN515- 2
CN10-2 /IRQ3 CN209-B 6 KCOUT_82 CN501-B12 M5_ENBLECN508-B11 PS55 SIG PS55 1st folding cam home sensor
CN2-A12 KCOUT_12 CN201-A 9 KCOUT_12 511-9B-7B CN515- 1
CN10-3 IRQ CN209-B 7 KCOUT_83 CN501-B11 M6_CONT1 CN508-B12 5V
CN2-A13 KCOUT_13 CN201-A 8 KCOUT_13 511-8B-8B
CN209-B 8 KCOUT_84 CN501-B10 M6_CONT2
Interrupt
CN2-A14 KCOUT_14 CN201-A 7 KCOUT_14 511-7B-9B
CN2-A15 KCOUT_15 CN201-A 6 KCOUT_15 CN209-B 9 KCOUT_85 511-6B-10B
CN501-B 9 M6_F/R
CN501-B 8 M6_RESET CN508-B13 SGND CN514- 3
CN2-A16 KCOUT_16 CN201-A 5 KCOUT_16 CN209-B10 KCOUT_86 511-5B-11B CN514- 2
FT8
FT7
CN2-A17 KCOUT_17 CN201-A 4 KCOUT_17 CN209-B11 KCOUT_87 511-4B-12B
CN501-B 7 M6_ENBLE CN508-B14 PS54 SIG PS54 3rd folding conveyance sensor
CN514- 1
CN2-A18 KCOUT_18 CN201-A 3 KCOUT_18 CN209-B12 5V CN501-B 6 5V CN508-B15 5V
511-3B-13B
4
3
2
2
CN2-A19 KCOUT_19 CN201-A 2 KCOUT_19 CN209-B13 5V 511-2B-14B

CN501-B 5 5V
CN23-1 TCK CN2-A20 KCOUT_20 CN201-A 1 KCOUT_20 CN209-B14 5V 511-1B-15B
CN501-B 4 5V
NF1
CN209-B15 TIME0 CN501-B 3 M4_CLK
2
1
CN23-2 TDO3 CN2-B 1 KCOUT_21 CN201-B20 KCOUT_21 511-1B-15B CN511- 3
CN23-3 TDI CN209-B16 TIME2 CN501-B 2 M5_CLK CN508-B16 SGND CN511- 2
CN2-B 2 KCOUT_22 CN201-B19 KCOUT_22 511-1B-15B 1st folding conveyance sensor
CN23-4 TMS CN209-B17 TIME3 CN501-B 1 M6_CLK CN508-B17 PS51 SIG CN511- 1 PS51
FT9
CN2-B 3 KCOUT_23 CN201-B18 KCOUT_23 CN508-B18 5V
JTAG
FT10
CN23-5 TRST CN2-B 4 KCOUT_24 CN201-B17 KCOUT_24
CN2-B 5 KCOUT_25 CN201-B16 KCOUT_25
CN2-B 7 KCOUT_27 CN201-B14 KCOUT_27 512-1-1
WIT
BLK
CN500- 1 24VDC CN513- 3
Outlet
CN2-B 8 KCOUT_28 CN201-B13 KCOUT_28 512-2-2 CN507- 1 SGND
512-3-3 CN500- 2 24VDC CN513- 2
CN2-B 9 KCOUT_29 CN201-B12 KCOUT_29 CN507- 2 PS53 SIG 2nd folding conveyance sensor
8 10
512-4-4 CN500- 3 PGND CN513- 1 PS53
CN2-B10 KCOUT_30 CN201-B11 KCOUT_30 CN507- 3 5V
9 11
CN500- 2 PGND
CN24-1 5V CN2-B11 KCOUT_31 CN201-B10 KCOUT_31
CN24-2 RL_CONT CN2-B12 KCOUT_32 CN201-B 9 KCOUT_32
Relay
CN2-B13 KCOUT_33 CN201-B 8 KCOUT_33 CN512- 3
CN2-B14 KCOUT_34 CN201-B 7 KCOUT_34 CN507- 4 SGND CN512- 2
Y/G
CN52- 2
WIT
BLK
BLK CN201-B 6 KCOUT_35 CN216-12 M12_24V CN507- 5 PS52 SIG PS52 Folding entrance sensor
CN182- 1
PGC1 BLK CN2-B15 KCOUT_35 CN52- 5 CN507- 6 5V CN512- 1
CN216-11 M12_24V
CN181- 1
PGC2 CN216-10 M12_A Punch conveyance
WIT CN2-B17 KCOUT_37 CN201-B 4 KCOUT_37 CN216- 9 M 2_A/ CN52- 3
M2
CN2-B18 KCOUT_38 CN201-B 3 KCOUT_38 CN216- 8 M 2_ B CN52- 4 motor

WIT CN52- 6
CN2-B19 KCOUT_39 CN201-B 2 KCOUT_39 CN216- 7 M 2_B/
To 5V (CCP)
CN201-B 1 KCOUT_40 CN536- 1
CN2-B20 KCOUT_40 CN507- 7 SD18_DRV CN536- 2
CN62- 2
RT5
CN216- 6 M12_24V CN507- 8 SD_24V SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
CN182- 2
CN62- 5
CN181- 2
CN216- 5 M12_24V
WIT
CN216- 4 M12_A CN62- 1
CN216- 3 M12_A/ CN62- 3 Alignment motor
CN1-A 1 KCIN_1 CN62- 4
M12
CN202-A16 KCIN_1 CN216- 2 M12_ B

CN1-A 2 KCIN_2 CN202-A15 KCIN_2 CN62- 6 CN536- 1
BLK FT11
CN216- 1 M12_B/ CN507- 9 SD15_DRV CN536- 2
CN151- 1
RED CN1-A 3 KCIN_3 CN202-A14 KCIN_3 CN507-10 SD_24V SD15 Folding gate solenoid
A
CN1-A 4 KCIN_4 CN202-A13 KCIN_4
CN1-A 5 KCIN_5 CN202-A12 KCIN_5 CN217- 1 M11 DRV1 CN61- 1 RED Tray up down
CN1-A 6 KCIN_6 CN202-A11 KCIN_6 CN217- 2 M11 DRV2 CN61- 2 BLU
FDB
BLK
M11
CN1-A 7 KCIN_7 motor
RL1
CN202-A10 KCIN_7
B
CN1-A 8 KCIN_8 CN202-A 9 KCIN_8
CN217- 3 5V
B
CN1-A 9 KCIN_9 CN202-A 8 KCIN_9

CN217- 4 RL_CONT
A
CN1-A10 KCIN_10 CN202-A 7 KCIN_10

CN517- 3
CN151- 2
CN1-A11 KCIN_11 CN202-A 6 KCIN_11 CN507-13 SGND CN517- 2 S size conveyance
CN183- 1
WIT
CN33- 3 CN507-14 PS57 SIG
CN1-A12 KCIN_12 CN202-A 5 KCIN_12 CN224- 5 5V CN33- 2 Main tray lower CN517- 1 PS58
FT12 BLK
CN1-A13 KCIN_13 CN202-A 4 KCIN_13 CN217- 6 PS13_SIG PS22 CN507-15 5V sensor
CN33- 1
CN1-A14 KCIN_14 CN202-A 3 KCIN_14 CN217- 7 SGND limit sensor
CN1-A15 KCIN_15 CN202-A 2 KCIN_15
WIT
CN1-A16 KCIN_16
BLK
CN202-A 1 KCIN_16
CN1-B 1 KCIN_17 CN202-B16 KCIN_17
CN183- 2
3
3

CN183-A2
CN183-A1
CN1-B 6 KCIN_22 CN202-B11 KCIN_22 CN219-A13 5V CN51- 1
CN1-B 7 KCIN_23 CN202-B10 KCIN_23 CN219-A12 SGND CN51- 2
CN219-A11 M1_CONT CN51- 3
MS1
CN1-B 8 KCIN_24 CN202-B 9 KCIN_24 CN51- 4
CN1-B 9 KCIN_25 CN202-B 8 KCIN_25 CN219-A10 M1_CLK CN51- 5
CN219-A 9 M1_F/R
Crimp
Symbol
CN1-B10 KCIN_26 CN202-B 7 KCIN_26 CN219-A 8 M1_LD CN51- 6

CN51- 7 Entrance conveyance motor
CN183-B2
CN183-B1
M1
CN1-B11 KCIN_27 CN202-B 6 KCIN_27 CN219-A 7 M1_H/L

CN1-B12 KCIN_28 CN202-B 5 KCIN_28 CN219-A 6 PGND CN51- 8
WIT
CN183- 1
CN51- 9
WIT
BLK
CN1-B13 KCIN_29 CN202-B 4 KCIN_29 CN219-A 5 PGND CN51-10
CN1-B14 KCIN_30 CN202-B 3 KCIN_30 CN219-A 4 24V CN51-11
CN219-A 3 24V
CN1-B15 KCIN_31 CN202-B 2 KCIN_31
CN1-B16 KCIN_32 CN202-B 1 KCIN_32
CN219-A 2 SD12_24V CN82- 1 RED
CN219-A 1 SD12_DRV CN82- 2 BLU SD12 Paper exit solenoid
CN183- 2
CN5-A 1 KCOUT_57 CN204-A20 KCOUT_57
CN5-A 2 KCOUT_58 CN204-A19 KCOUT_58
CN5-A 3 KCOUT_59 CN204-A18 KCOUT_59 CN67- 1
CN5-A 4 KCOUT_60 CN204-A17 KCOUT_60 CN219-B13 5V CN37- 2
CN219-B12 SGND CN67- 3
CN5-A 5 KCOUT_61 CN204-A16 KCOUT_61 CN219-B11 M17_CONT CN67- 4
CN5-A 6 KCOUT_62 CN204-A15 KCOUT_62 CN219-B10 M17_CLK CN67- 5
Connector
CN5-A 7 KCOUT_63 CN204-A14 KCOUT_63 CN219-B 9 M17_F/R
RT2
CN67- 6
CN5-A 8 KCOUT_64 CN204-A13 KCOUT_64 CN219-B 8 M17_LD CN67- 7 Main tray paper exit motor
M17
CN5-A 9 KCOUT_65 CN204-A12 KCOUT_65 CN219-B 7 M17_H/L CN67- 8

CN219-B 6 PGND CN67- 9
CN5-A10 KCOUT_66 CN204-A11 KCOUT_66 CN219-B 5 PGND CN67-10
CN5-A11 KCOUT_67 CN204-A10 KCOUT_67 CN219-B 4 24V
Y/G
CN67-11
WIT
BLK
CN5-A12 KCOUT_68 CN204-A 9 KCOUT_68 CN219-B 3 24V
CN5-A13 KCOUT_69 CN204-A 8 KCOUT_69
CN5-A14 KCOUT_70 CN204-A 7 KCOUT_70 CN219-B 2 SD24V_2
CN5-A15 KCOUT_71 CN204-A 6 KCOUT_71 CN219-B 1 SD7_DRV
:line(L)
CN184-3
CN184-1
CN184-5
CN5-A18 KCOUT_74 CN204-A 3 KCOUT_74 CN37- 3
:neutral(N)
CN204-A 2 KCOUT_75 CN220-A 1 SGND CN37- 2
CN5-A19 KCOUT_75
:frame GND
CN220-A 2 PS17_SIG CN37- 1 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor
CN5-A20 KCOUT_76 CN204-A 1 KCOUT_76 CN220-A 3 5V
CN5-B 3 KCOUT_79 CN204-B18 KCOUT_79 CN36- 3
CN204-B17 KCOUT_80 CN220-A 4 SGND CN36- 2
CN5-B 4 KCOUT_80 CN220-A 5 PS16_SIG
Relay connector
CN5-B 5 KCOUT_81 CN204-B16 KCOUT_81 CN36- 1 PS16 Sub tray paper exit sensor
DCPS
CN220-A 6 5V
Faston

4
4
CN5-B 8 KCOUT_84 CN204-B13 KCOUT_84 CN24- 3

CN204-B12 KCOUT_85 CN220-A 7 SGND CN24- 2
CN5-B 9 KCOUT_85 CN220-A 8 PS4_SIG PI exit sensor
CN5-B10 KCOUT_86 CN204-B11 KCOUT_86 CN24- 1 PS4
:-V/PGND
CN191-1
:-V/PGND
CN191-2
:-V/PGND
CN191-3
:-V/PGND
CN191-4
:+V/24V
CN191-5
:+V/24V
CN191-6
:+V/24V
CN191-7
:+V/24V
CN191-8
CN220-A 9 5V
CN5-B11 KCOUT_87 CN204-B10 KCOUT_87
CN5-B12 KCOUT_88 CN204-B 9 KCOUT_88
CN204-B 7 KCOUT_90 CN220-A10 SGND CN21- 2
CN5-B14 KCOUT_90 CN220-A11 PS1_SIG FD entrance sensor
CN5-B15 KCOUT_91 CN204-B 6 KCOUT_91 CN220-A12 5V CN21- 1 PS1
CN5-B19 KCOUT_95 CN204-B 2 KCOUT_95 CN220-B12 5V CN53- 1
CN5-B20 KCOUT_96 CN204-B 1 KCOUT_96 CN220-B11 SGND CN53- 2
CN220-B10 M3_CONT CN53- 3
CN220-B 9 M3_CLK CN53- 4
CN220-B 8 M3_F/R CN53- 5 CN311-A13 OP_LED12 CN361-A 1 OP_LED12
CN220-B 7 M3_LD CN53- 6 Intermediate CN311-A12 OP_LED13
CN53- 7 CN361-A 2 OP_LED13
M3
CN14- 1 TIME_0 CN203-18 TIME_0 CN220-B 6 M3_H/L CN311-A11 OP_LED14

CN53- 8 conveyance motor CN361-A 3 OP_LED14
CN14- 2 TIME_1 CN203-17 TIME_1 CN220-B 5 PGND CN311-A10 OP_LED15
CN220-B 4 PGND CN53- 9 CN361-A 4 NC
CN14- 3 TIME_2 CN203-16 TIME_2 CN53-10 CN311-A 9 OP_LED16
CN220-B 3 24V CN361-A 5 NC
CN14- 4 TIME_3 CN203-15 TIME_3 CN53-11 CN311-A 8 OPE_SW1
CN220-B 2 24V CN361-A 6 OPE_SW1
CN14- 5 TIME_4 CN203-14 TIME_4 CN220-B 1 NC CN311-A 7 OPE_SW2 CN361-A 7 OPE_SW2
CN14- 6 TIME_5 CN203-13 TIME_5 CN311-A 6 OPE_SW3 CN361-A 8 OPE_SW3
CN14- 7 TIME_6 CN203-12 TIME_6 CN311-A 5 OPE_SW4 CN361-A 9 OPE_SW4
CN14- 8 TIME_7 CN203-11 TIME_7 CN311-A 4 OPE_SW5 CN361-A10 OPE_SW5
CN14- 9 TIME_8 CN203-10 TIME_8 CN311-A 3 OPE_S1 CN361-A11 NC
CN14-10 TIME_9 CN203- 9 TIME_9 CN311-A 2 OPE_S2 CN361-A12 NC
CN14-11 TIME_10 CN203- 8 TIME_10
PDB
CN46- 3 CN311-A 1 OPE_S3 CN361-A13 NC

CN14-12 TIME_11 CN203- 7 TIME_11 CN222- 1 SGND CN311-B13 5V
CN46- 2 CN361-B 1 5V
CN14-13 TIME_12 CN203- 6 TIME_12 CN222- 2 PS26_SIG CN46- 1 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor
CN222- 3 5V CN311-B12 SGND CN361-B 2 SGND
CN14-14 TIME_13 CN203- 5 TIME_13
4
CN311-B11 OP_LED 1
FDCB
CN361-B 3 OP_LED 1
CN14-15 TIME_14 CN203- 4 TIME_14 CN311-B10 OP_LED 2 CN361-B 4 OP_LED 2
CN14-16 TIME_15 CN203- 3 TIME_15
5
3
2
1
CN32- 3 CN311-B 9 OP_LED 3 CN361-B 5 OP_LED 3

CN14-17 TIME_16 CN203- 2 TIME_16 CN222- 4 SGND
PDB
CN32- 2 Punch scraps box set CN311-B 8 OP_LED 4 CN361-B 6 OP_LED 4

CN14-18 TIME_17 CN203- 1 TIME_17 CN222- 5 PS12_SIG CN32- 1 PS12
CN222- 6 5V CN311-B 7 OP_LED 5 CN361-B 7 OP_LED 5
sensor CN311-B 6 OP_LED 6 CN361-B 8 OP_LED 6
CN311-B 5 OP_LED 7 CN361-B 9 OP_LED 7
CN30- 3 CN311-B 4 OP_LED 8 CN361-B10 OP_LED 8
CN222- 7 SGND CN30- 2 Alignment plate home CN311-B 3 OP_LED 9 CN361-B11 OP_LED 9
CN222- 8 PS10_SIG CN30- 1 PS10
CN222- 9 5V CN311-B 2 OP_LED10 CN361-B12 OP_LED10
sensor CN311-B 1 OP_LED11 CN361-B13 OP_LED11
Punch motor CN215- 8 M10 DRV1
CN215- 7 M10 DRV2
M10
CN20-1 5V CN25- 3
CN222-10 SGND CN25- 2
CN20-2 5V CN222-11 PS5_SIG PS5 Punch conveyance sensor
5
5
CN215- 6 M13 24V CN25- 1

18 22
CN20-3 S.GND CN222-12 5V

CN215- 5 M13 24V
27 30
CN20-4 S.GND CN215- 4 M13 A

Punch registration motor CN215- 3 M13 A/
M13
CN215- 2 M13 B
CN215- 1 M13 B/
FDOB
MAIN BODY I/F CN223- 1 SD8_DRV CN78- 1 RED Roller

6 CN600-1 CN78- 2 BLU
CN**-1 TXD 5 CN600-2
CN16-1 SYS_SIN CN223- 2 SD24V_2 SD8
CN**-2 S.GND CN16-2 S.GND solenoid/4
4 CN600-3
CN**-3 CTS CN16-3 /SYS_RTS CN221-A 1 SGND
3 CN600-4 CN221-A 2 PS11_SIG CN374- 4
CN**-4 RXD 2 CN600-5
CN16-4 SYS_SOUT Punch registration home sensor PS11 CN317- 1 TH_SIG CN374- 3
CN**-5 S.GND CN16-5 S.GND CN221-A 3 5V CN77- 1 RED Roller CN317- 2 GND
1 CN600-6 CN223- 3 SD7_DRV CN77- 2 BLU CN374- 2 TSB Temperature sensor board
CN**-6 RTS CN16-6 /SYS_CTS CN223- 4 SD24V_2 SD7 CN317- 3 N.C CN374- 1
CN16-7 /PAPEROUT_1 solenoid/3 CN317- 4 5V
CN221-A 4 SGND
3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor PS9 CN221-A 5 PS9_SIG
CN221-A 6 5V CN74- 1 RED L size gate CN490- 2
CN223- 5 SD4_DRV CN74- 2 BLU
CN308- 1 + Multi feed detection
CN223- 6 SD24V_2 SD4 CN490- 1
5 CN601-1 CN308- 2 - CN490- 2 MFDB2
CN**-5 EXIT PS solenoid CN300- 3 AGND board/2
4 CN601-2 CN221-A 7 SGND
CN**-4 S.GND 3 CN601-3 CN221-A 8 PS8_SIG
CN**-3 S.GND 2 holes punch home sensor PS8
2 CN601-4 CN221-A 9 5V
CN73- 1 RED
15 13
CN**-2 5V 1 CN601-5 CN223- 7 SD3_DRV CN73- 2 BLU

S size gate
MAIN BODY
14 12
CN**-1 5V CN223- 8 SD24V_2 SD3 CN490- 3

solenoid CN309- 1 SGND
CN490- 1 Multi feed detection
CN309- 2 + MFDB1
CN309- 3 - CN490- 2
CN71- 2 CN33- 3 CN309- 4 NC board/1
CN71- 1
CN221-A10 SD1_DRV CN223- 9 SGND CN33- 2 Punch registration
Entrance gate solenoid SD1 CN221-A11 SD24V_1 CN223-10 PS6_SIG CN33- 1 PS6
CN223-11 5V sensor
CN19-1 SYS_SIN
CN**-6 F.GND
CN**-5 P.GND
CN**-4 P.GND
CN**-3 S.GND
CN**-2 5V
CN**-1 24V
CN325- 3
CN19-2 /SYS_RTS CN306- 1 SGND CN325- 2
CN19-3 FNS2_SIN CN306- 2 PS35_SIG CN325- 1 PS35 L size sensor/Up
CN19-4 /FNS2_RTS CN370- 6 5V CN79- 1 RED Sub tray gate CN306- 3 5V
CN221-B 1 5V CN224- 1 SD9_DRV
CN370- 5 LED1_SIG CN224- 2 SD24V_3 CN79- 2 BLU SD9
CN221-B 2 LED1_SIG
CN602-6
CN602-5
CN602-4
CN602-3
CN602-2
CN602-1
CN370- 4 LED2_SIG CN221-B 3 LED2_SIG solenoid

CN326- 3
CN370- 3 LED3_SIG CN221-B 4 LED3_SIG CN306- 4 SGND CN326- 2
CN370- 2 LED4_SIG CN221-B 5 LED4_SIG CN306- 5 PS36_SIG CN326- 1 PS36 S size sensor/Lw
JAMIB
CN38- 3 CN306- 6 5V
CN370- 1 NC CN221-B 6 LED5_SIG CN224- 3 SGND CN38- 2 Main tray paper exit
6
6
CN224- 4 PS18_SIG CN38- 1 PS18

CN224- 5 5V sensor
CN341- 1
CN306- 7 SGND CN341- 2
CN306- 8 UPTRY_SIZ CN341- 3 VR31 Paper size VR/Up
CN33- 3 CN306- 9 3.3V
CN224- 6 SGND CN33- 2
CN224- 7 PS13_SIG Folding exit sensor
24
CN224- 8 5V CN33- 1 PS2

CN71- 1
CN221-B 7 SD6_DRV
RT10
SD6 CN71- 2 CN334- 3

Roller solenoid/2 CN221-B 8 SD24V_1 CN306-10 SGND
25
CN334- 2
CN43- 3 CN306-11 PS44_SIG CN334- 1 PS44 PI paper set sensor/Up
CN224- 9 SGND CN43- 2 Main tray empty CN306-12 5V
CN224-10 PS23_SIG CN43- 1 PS23
CN71- 1 CN224-11 5V
26
CN221-B 9 SD5_DRV
sensor
Roller solenoid/1 SD5 CN71- 2 CN325- 3
CN221-B10 SD24V_1
RT11
CN306-13 SGND CN325- 2

CN40- 3 CN306-14 PS47_SIG PI max paper size sensor/Up
29
CN224-12 SGND CN325- 1 PS47

CN224-13 PS20_SIG CN40- 2 Main tray upper CN306-15 5V
CN224-14 5V CN40- 1 PS20
limit sensor
CN211- 1 24V CN321- 3
CN26- 3
CN306-16 SGND CN321- 2
CN211- 2 5V CN224-15 SGND CN26- 2 Main tray folding CN306-17 PS31_SIG CN321- 1 PS31 PI conveyance sensor/Up
CN603-6
CN603-5
CN603-4
CN603-3
CN603-2
CN603-1
CN211- 3 SGND CN224-16 PS7_SIG CN26- 1 PS7 CN306-18 5V

CN224-17 5V paper full sensor
CN211- 4 PGND
5V
24V
CN33- 3 CN328- 3
CN313- 1 SGND
F.GND
P.GND
P.GND
S.GND
CN224-18 SGND CN33- 2 Intermediate CN328- 2

PIDB
CN224-19 PS13_SIG PS13 CN313- 2 PS38_SIG CN328- 1 PS38 PI upper limit sensor/Lw
CN33- 1
19
CN206- 1 5VDC CN224-20 5V CN313- 3 5V

1 CN610-2
conveyance sensor
CN19-4 /FNS2_RTS CN18-2 FNS2_SIN CN206- 2 5VDC
2 CN610-1
CN19-3 FNS2_SIN CN206- 3 SGND
23
CN18-1 /FNS2_RTS CN329- 3

CN19-2 /SYS_RTS CN206- 4 SGND CN313- 4 SGND
28 31
CN329- 2
CN19-1 SYS_SIN CN313- 5 PS39_SIG CN329- 1 PS39 PI paper empty sensor/Lw
CN313- 6 5V
CN210-A 1 TCLKE_2 CN304-A14 M7_CLK7
1 CN605-6
CN21-1 SYS_SIN CN17-1 FNS1_SOUT CN210-A 2 TCLKF_2 CN304-A13 JYU_CLK7
2 CN605-5
CN21-2 S.GND CN17- 2 S.GND CN210-A 3 SGND CN304-A12 SGND
3 CN605-4 CN343-1/1
6
CN21-3 /SYS_RTS CN17-3 /FNS1_CTS CN207- 1 24VDC CN210-A 4 SGND CN304-A11 SGND CN313- 7 SD13_DRV CN343-2/2
4 CN605-3 CN313- 8 SD_24V SD13 PI pick-up solenoid/Up
CN21-4 SYS_SOUT CN17-4 FNS1_SIN CN210-A 5 SGND CN304-A10 SGND
7
5 CN605-2
CN207- 2 PGND
CN21-5 S.GND CN17-5 /FNSSET CN210-A 6 5V CN304-A 9 5VD
8
6 CN605-1 CN207- 3 24VDC

CN21-6 /SYS_CTS CN17-6 /FNS1_RTS CN210-A 7 5V CN304-A 8 5VD
CN21-7 /PAPEROUT_1 CN207- 4 24VDC CN304-A 7 5VD
CN17-7 /PAPEROUT_2 CN210-A 8 5V
CN331- 3
10
CN207- 5 PGND CN210-A 9 NC CN304-A 6 NC CN307- 1 SGND

1 CN604-5 CN17- 8 NC CN331- 2
CN307- 2 PS41_SIG
9 11
CN207- 6 PGND CN210-A10 NC CN304-A 5 NC CN331- 1 PS41 L size sensor/Lw

2 CN604-4 CN307- 3 5V
S.GND CN210-A11 SUBIN1 CN304-A 4 PANCH_S3 (Reserve)
3 CN604-3
S.GND CN210-A12 NC CN304-A 3 NC
7
7
4 CN604-2
5V
16 20
5 CN210-A13 KCOUT71 CN304-A 2 OP_LED15

5V CN604-1 CN332- 3
17 21
CN210-A14 KCOUT72 CN304-A 1 OP_LED16 CN307- 4 SGND

CN304-B14 OP_LED 1 CN332- 2
CN210-B 1 KCOUT57 CN307- 5 PS42_SIG CN332- 1 PS42 S size sensor/Lw
1
CN205- 1 24VDC CN210-B 2 KCOUT58 CN304-B13 OP_LED 2 CN307- 6 5V

3
CN205- 2 PGND CN210-B 3 KCOUT59 CN304-B12 OP_LED 3

To Next Option
CN210-B 4 KCOUT60 CN304-B11 OP_LED 4

2
AC N
F.GND
AC L
AC INRET
CN205- 3 24VDC
CN210-B 5 KCOUT61 CN304-B10 OP_LED 5 CN342- 1
4
CN205- 4 PGND CN307- 7 SGND

CN210-B 6 KCOUT62 CN304-B 9 OP_LED 6 CN342- 2
CN307- 8 LOWTRY_SZ
5
CN205- 5 PGND CN304-B 8 OP_LED 7 CN342- 3 VR32 Paper size VR/Lw

CN210-B 7 KCOUT63 CN307- 9 3.3V
CN210-B 8 KCOUT64 CN304-B 7 OP_LED 8
CN606- 3 CN210-B 9 KCOUT65 CN304-B 6 OP_LED 9
CN304-B 5 OP_LED10
12
CN210-B10 KCOUT66
CN606- 1 CN304-B 4 OP_LED11 CN335- 3
CN210-B11 KCOUT67 CN307-10 SGND CN335- 2
CN606- 4 CN307-11 PS45_SIG PI paper set sensor/Lw
CN210-B12 KCOUT68 CN304-B 3 OP_LED12 CN335- 1 PS45
CN304-B 2 OP_LED13 CN307-12 5V
CN15- 1 TIME_18 CN210-B13 KCOUT69
SSJC HYB6
CN606- 5 CN15- 2 TIME_19 CN210-B14 KCOUT70 CN304-B 1 OP_LED14

CN15- 3 TIME_20
13
CN326- 3
MAIN BODY
CN606- 2 CN15- 4 TIME_21 CN307-13 SGND CN326- 2

CN606- 6 CN15- 5 TIME_22 CN307-14 PS48_SIG CN326- 1 PS48 PI mac paper size sensor/Lw
16 17 18 19
CN307-15 5V
CN15- 6 TIME_23
FNS FDCB PDB
CN15- 7 NC
CN324- 3
CN307-16 SGND CN324- 2
CN307-17 PS46_SIG CN324- 1 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full sensor
CN307-18 5V
CN11-1 3.3V CN303- 6 3.3V CN307-19 MC2_DRV CN346- 1

CN11-2 3.3V CN303- 5 3.3V CN307-20 24V CN346- 2 CL2 PI registration clutch/Lw
CN7-A 1 KCIN_65 CN11-3 AD_0 CN303- 4 AD_1
CN606- 3 CN7-A 2 KCIN_66 CN11-4 AD_1 CN303- 3 AD_2
CN11-5 AD_2 CN303- 2 AD_3
14
CN7-A 3 KCIN_67
CN606- 1 CN11-6 AD_3 CN303- 1 AD_4
CN606- 4
CN7-A 4 KCIN_68 CN315- 1 SGND CN327- 3
CN7-A 5 KCIN_69 CN327- 2
CN315- 2 PS37_SIG CN327- 1 PS37 PI conveyance sensor/Lw
CN7-A 6 KCIN_70 CN315- 3 5V
CN7-A 7 KCIN_71
SGND
CN606- 5
CN7-A 8 KCIN_72
15
MAIN BODY
CN606- 2 CN7-A 9 KCIN_73

CN606- 6 CN7-A10 KCIN_74 CN 6- 1 KCOUT_97 CN301-16 KCOUT_97 CN330- 3
20 21 22 23
CN 6- 2 KCOUT_98 CN301-15 KCOUT_98 CN315- 4 SGND CN330- 2

CN7-A11 KCIN_75 CN315- 5 PS40_SIG
FNS FDCB PDB
CN7-A12 KCIN_76 CN 6- 3 KCOUT_99 CN301-14 KCOUT_99 CN315- 6 5V CN330- 1 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor/Lw
CN7-B 1 KCIN_77 CN 6- 4 KCOUT_100 CN301-13 KCOUT_100
8
8

CN7-B 4 KCIN_80 CN 6- 7 KCOUT_103 CN301-10 KCOUT_103 CN322- 3
CN 6- 8 KCOUT_104 CN301- 9 KCOUT_104 CN314- 1 SGND CN322- 2
CN7-B 5 KCIN_81 CN314- 2 PS32_SIG PS32 PI upper limit sensor/Up
CN 6- 9 KCOUT_105 CN301- 8 KCOUT_105 CN322- 1
CN7-B 6 KCIN_82 CN314- 3 5V
CN610- 2 CN7-B 7 KCIN_83 CN 6-10 KCOUT_106 CN301- 7 KCOUT_106
CN7-B 8 KCIN_84 CN 6-11 KCOUT_107 CN301- 6 KCOUT_107
5v
CN610- 1 CN7-B 9 KCIN_85 CN 6-12 KCOUT_108 CN301- 5 KCOUT_108 CN323- 3

CN610- 3 CN 6-13 KCOUT_109 CN301- 4 KCOUT_109 CN314- 4 SGND CN323- 2
CN7-B10 KCIN_86 CN314- 5 PS33_SIG PS33 PI paper empty sensor/Up
CN 6-14 KCOUT_110 CN301- 3 KCOUT_110 CN323- 1
CN7-B11 KCIN_87 CN314- 6 5V
CN7-B12 KCIN_88 CN 6-15 KCOUT_111 CN301- 2 KCOUT_111
CN610- 4
CN 6-16 KCOUT_112 CN301- 1 KCOUT_112
CN610- 6 CN344-1/1
CN314- 7 SD14_DRV CN344-2/2
CN314- 8 24V SD14 PI pick-up solenoid/Lw
FNS
CN610- 7 CN8-A 1 KCOUT_113

CN8-A 2 KCOUT_114 CN4-A 1 KCIN_33 CN302-A16 KCIN_33
24 MAIN BODY 25
CN610- 5 CN8-A 3 KCOUT_115 CN4-A 2 KCIN_34 CN302-A15 KCIN_34

CN610- 8 CN8-A 4 KCOUT_116 CN4-A 3 KCIN_35 CN302-A14 KCIN_35 CN345- 1
SGND
CN314- 9 MC1_DRV
26 27 28 29 30 31
CN8-A 5 KCOUT_117 CN4-A 4 KCIN_36 CN302-A13 KCIN_36 CN314-10 24V CN345- 2 CL1 PI registration clutch/Up
FNS FDCB PDB FDCB PDB

CN9-A 9 KCOUT_121 CN4-A 8 KCIN_40 CN302-A 9 KCIN_40
CN8-A10 KCOUT_122 CN4-A 9 KCIN_41 CN338- 2/1 RED
CN302-A 8 KCIN_41 CN314-11 M8_DRV1
CN4-A10 KCIN_42 CN314-12 M8_DRV2 CN338- 1/2 BLU Paper lift motor/Up
CN8-A11 KCOUT_123 CN302-A 7 KCIN_42
M8
CN8-A12 KCOUT_124 CN4-A11 KCIN_43 CN302-A 6 KCIN_43

CN8-A13 KCOUT_125 CN4-A12 KCIN_44 CN302-A 5 KCIN_44
CN8-A14 KCOUT_126 CN4-A13 KCIN_45 CN302-A 4 KCIN_45 CN333- 3
CN8-A15 KCOUT_127 CN4-A14 KCIN_46 CN302-A 3 KCIN_46 CN314-13 SGND CN333- 2
CN8-A16 KCOUT_128 CN4-A15 KCIN_47 CN302-A 2 KCIN_47 CN314-14 PS43_SIG CN333- 1 PS43 PI cover open/close sensor
CN8-A17 NC CN4-A16 KCIN_48 CN314-15 5V
CN302-A 1 KCIN_48
CN8-B 1 KCOUT_129 CN4-B 1 KCIN_49 CN302-B16 KCIN_49
CN8-B 2 KCOUT_130 CN4-B 2 KCIN_50 CN302-B15 KCIN_50
CN8-B 3 KCOUT_131 CN4-B 3 KCIN_51 CN302-B14 KCIN_51 CN337-11
CN305- 1 24V CN337-10
CN8-B 4 KCOUT_132 CN4-B 4 KCIN_52 CN302-B13 KCIN_52 CN305- 2 24V CN337- 9
CN8-B 5 KCOUT_133 CN4-B 5 KCIN_53 CN302-B12 KCIN_53 CN305- 3 M7 PGND CN337- 8
CN8-B 6 KCOUT_134 CN4-B 6 KCIN_54 CN302-B11 KCIN_54 CN305- 4 M7 PGND CN337- 7
CN8-B 7 KCOUT_135 CN4-B 7 KCIN_55 CN302-B10 KCIN_55 CN305- 5 M7 H/L CN337- 6
CN8-B 8 KCOUT_136 CN4-B 8 KCIN_56 CN305- 6 M7 LD CN337- 5 PI conveyance motor
M7
CN302-B 9 KCIN_56 CN305- 7 M7 F/R

CN8-B 9 KCOUT_137 CN4-B 9 KCIN_57 CN302-B 8 KCIN_57 CN337- 4
CN305- 8 M7 CLK CN337- 3
CN8-B10 KCOUT_138 CN4-B10 KCIN_58 CN302-B 7 KCIN_58 CN305- 9 M7 S/P CN337- 2
CN8-B11 KCOUT_139 CN4-B11 KCIN_59 CN302-B 6 KCIN_59 CN305-10 SGND CN337- 1
CN8-B12 KCOUT_140 CN4-B12 KCIN_60 CN302-B 5 KCIN_60 CN305-11 5V
9
9
CN8-B13 KCOUT_141 CN4-B13 KCIN_61 CN302-B 4 KCIN_61

CN8-B14 KCOUT_142 CN4-B14 KCIN_62 CN302-B 3 KCIN_62
CN324- 3
CN8-B15 KCOUT_143 CN4-B15 KCIN_63 CN302-B 2 KCIN_63 CN305-12 SGND CN324- 2
CN8-B16 KCOUT_144 CN4-B16 KCIN_64 CN302-B 1 KCIN_64 CN305-13 PS34_SIG CN324- 1 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor/Up
CN8-B17 NC CN305-14 5V
6
CN300- 1 24VDC
7
CN300- 2 PGND CN339- 2/1 RED

CN305-15 M9_DRV1 CN339- 1/2 BLU Paper lift motor/Lw
CN305-16 M9_DRV2
M9
CN15-1 NC CN318-1 NC
CN15-7 JYU_CLK1 CN318-7 JYU_CLK1
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

— Outlet 2-I PS18 Main tray paper exit sensor 6-D
— Inlet 1-H PS20 Main tray upper limit sensor 6-D
— Power plug 1-H PS22 Main tray lower limit sensor 3-D
CBR1 Circuit breaker /1 2-H PS23 Main tray empty sensor 6-D
CBR2 Circuit breaker /2 2-H PS26 Punch scraps full sensor 5-D
CL1 PI registration clutch /Up 8-A PS31 PI conveyance sensor /Up 6-A
CL2 PI registration clutch /Lw 8-A PS32 PI upper limit sensor /Up 8-A
DCPS DC power supply 4-H PS33 PI paper empty sensor /Up 8-A
FDB Folding drive board 1-B PS34 PI lift plate home sensor /Up 9-A
FDCB FD control board 1-G PS35 L size sensor /Up 6-A
FDOB FD operation board 4-A PS36 S size sensor /Up 6-A
JAMIB Jam indicator board 6-F PS37 PI conveyance sensor /Lw 8-A
M1 Entrance conveyance motor 3-D PS38 PI upper limit sensor /Lw 7-A
M2 Punch conveyance motor 2-D PS39 PI paper empty sensor /Lw 7-A
M3 Intermediate conveyance motor 4-D PS40 PI lift plate home sensor /Lw 8-A
M4 1st folding motor 1-B PS41 L size sensor /Lw 7-A
M5 2nd folding motor 1-B PS42 S size sensor /Lw 7-A
M6 3rd folding motor 1-B PS43 PI cover open/close sensor 9-A
M7 PI conveyance motor 9-A PS44 PI paper set sensor /Up 6-A
M8 Paper lift motor /Up 9-A PS45 PI paper set sensor /Lw 7-A
M9 Paper lift motor /Lw 9-A PS46 Sub tray folding paper full sensor 8-A
M10 Punch motor 5-F PS47 PI max paper size sensor /Up 6-A
M11 Tray up down motor 3-D PS48 PI max paper size sensor /Lw 6-A
M12 Alignment motor 3-D PS51 1st folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M13 Punch registration motor 5-F PS52 Folding entrance sensor 2-B
M14 1st folding release motor 1-B PS53 2nd folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M15 2nd folding release motor 1-B PS54 3rd folding conveyance sensor 2-B
M16 3rd folding release motor 1-B PS55 1st folding cam home sensor 2-B
M17 Main tray paper exit motor 4-D PS56 2nd folding cam home sensor 2-B
MFDB1 Multi feed detection board /1 6-A PS57 3rd folding cam home sensor 2-B
MFDB2 Multi feed detection board /2 5-A PS58 S size conveyance sensor 3-B
MS1 Door switch 3-I RL1 Relay 3-H
NF1 Noise filter 2-H SD1 Entrance gate solenoid 6-F
PDB Punch drive board 1-D SD3 S size gate solenoid 6-C
PIDB PI drive board 4-B SD4 L size gate solenoid 5-C
PS1 FD entrance sensor 4-D SD5 Roller solenoid /1 6-F
PS2 Folding exit sensor 6-D SD6 Roller solenoid /2 6-F
PS4 PI exit sensor 4-D SD7 Roller solenoid /3 5-C
PS5 Punch conveyance sensor 5-D SD8 Roller solenoid /4 5-C
PS6 Punch registration sensor 6-D SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid 6-C
PS7 Main tray folding paper full sensor 6-D SD12 Paper exit solenoid 3-C
PS8 2 holes punch home sensor 5-E SD13 PI pick-up solenoid /Up 7-A
PS9 3 holes/4 holes home sensor 5-E SD14 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw 8-A
PS10 Alignment plate home sensor 5-D SD15 Folding gate solenoid 3-B
PS11 Punch registration home sensor 5-E SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid 2-B
PS12 Punch scraps box set sensor 5-D VR31 Paper size VR /Up 6-A
PS13 Intermediate conveyance sensor 7-D VR32 Paper size VR /Lw 7-A
PS16 Sub tray paper exit sensor 4-D TSB Temperature sensor board 5-A
PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor 4-D
4.8
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
LS-501/502
1
1
Stacker tray
upper limit sensor
PS3
Paper press
solenoid/3 SD8
RLB/2
RLB/1
2
2
Front stopper
solenoid SD9
Entrance
sensor
PS4
Grip conveyance
home sensor
PS5
TOB
Paper empty
sensor
PS6
Conveyance
sensor/1
PS7
JAMIB
Sub tray door

sensor
PS8
3
3
Sub tray full

sensor
PS9
Sub tray exit 1st gate solenoid
sensor SD1
PS10
Job partition
SD2
LS-501 only
Conveyance solenoid
sensor/2
PS16
Rear stopper
JAM door SD3 solenoid
switch
RS2
Front door lock
SD4 solenoid
Sub tray door
sensor Paper cooling fan
PS8
FM1 motor/Fr
Sub tray full Entrance
sensor conveyance
PS9
SD5
lock solenoid
4
4
LS-502 only
Sub tray exit Paper press

sensor SD6 solenoid/1
PS10
LS-501 only
2nd gate
SD10 solenoid
Hand cart set
switch
RS1
Paper press
SD7 solenoid/2
Stacker tray set Coupling
LED
LED1
SD11 conveyance
lock solenoid
LS-501 only
Main tray
encoder
PS2
Stacker tray set sensor

sensor
PS1
LS-501 only
Conveyance Paper cooling fan
LS-501 only
FM3
PS17
sensor/3 motor/Mi
Shift unit home

Paper cooling fan
PS11
5
5
sensor FM5 motor/Rr

Alignment plate
home sensor
PS12 Stacker tray
M1
up down motor
LS-502 only
2,000 sheets
LSCB
stacked sensor Conveyance

PS13
M2
motor
5,000 sheets
stacked sensor
PS14
Sub tray exit

M3
Stacker tray arm motor

release sensor
PS15
LS-501 only
Coupling exit Grip conveyance

PS18
sensor
M4
motor
6
6
Shift unit motor

M5
Paper cooling fan

motor/1
FM2
Coupling
M6
conveyance motor
Paper cooling fan
FM6
motor/2
Motor cooling fan Coupling

M6
conveyance motor
FM4
motor
LS-501 only LS-502 only
MAIN BODY Alignment motor

M7
I/F
7
7
Front Door switch

MS1
MAIN BODY
I/F
Stacker tray
MS2
upper limit switch
CONVE- Stacker tray

MS3
YANCE lower limit switch

I/F
CONVE- Main
LS-501 only
YANCE Body/LS
I/F
CONVE-
YANCE
I/F LS/FS
LS-501 only
8
8
LS-501 only
MAIN BODY
I/F
Inlet
Crimp
AC
Symbol
DCPS
CONVEYANCE
LS-501 only
AC
Connector
Outlet
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

M1 Stacker tray up down motor 5-A PS6 Paper empty sensor 3-H
M2 Conveyance motor 5-A PS7 Conveyance sensor /1 3-H
M3 Sub tray exit motor 6-A PS8 Sub tray door sensor 3-H (LS-501)
M4 Grip conveyance motor 6-A 4-H (LS-502)
M5 Shift unit motor 6-A PS9 Sub tray full sensor 3-H (LS-501)
M6 Coupling conveyance motor 6-A (LS-501) 4-H (LS-502)
7-A (LS-502) PS10 Sub tray paper exit sensor 3-H (LS-501)
M7 Alignment motor 7-A 4-H (LS-502)
FM1 Paper cooling fan motor /Fr 4-A PS11 Shift unit home sensor 5-H
FM2 Paper cooling fan motor /1 6-H PS12 Alignment plate home sensor 5-H
FM3 Paper cooling fan motor /Mi 5-A PS13 2,000 sheets stacked sensor 5-H
FM4 Motor cooling fan motor 7-H PS14 5,000 sheets stacked sensor 5-H
FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /Rr 5-A PS15 Stacker tray arm release sensor 6-H
FM6 Paper cooling fan motor /2 6-H PS16 Conveyance sensor /2 3-H (LS-501 only)
SD1 1st gate solenoid 3-A PS17 Conveyance sensor /3 5-H (LS-501 only)
SD2 Job partition solenoid 3-A PS18 Coupling exit sensor 6-H (LS-501 only)
SD3 Rear stopper solenoid 3-A RS1 Hand cart set switch 4-H
SD4 Front door lock solenoid 4-A RS2 JAM door switch 4-H (LS-501 only)
SD5 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid 4-A MS1 Front door switch 7-A
SD6 Paper press solenoid /1 4-A MS2 Stacker tray upper limit switch 7-A
SD7 Paper press solenoid /2 4-A MS3 Stacker tray lower limit switch 7-A
SD8 Paper press solenoid /3 2-H TOB Stacker tray operation board 2-A
SD9 Front stopper solenoid 2-H JAMIB Jam indication board 3-A
SD10 2nd gate solenoid 4-A (LS-501 only) RLB/1 Relay board /1 2-F
SD11 Coupling conveyance lock solenoid 4-A (LS-501 only) RLB/2 Relay board /2 2-G
LED1 Stacker tray set LED 4-H LSCB LS control board 2-D
PS1 Stacker tray set sensor 5-H DCPS DC power supply 8-G (LS-501 only)
PS2 Stacker tray encoder sensor 5-A Inlet 8-H (LS-501 only)
PS3 Stacker tray upper limit sensor 2-H Outlet 8-H (LS-501 only)
PS4 Entrance sensor 2-H
PS5 Grip conveyance home sensor 2-H
4.9
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
FS-503
1
1
CN121-1 CN205-1 CN205-1 CN60-1 R_DRV1 CN51-A 1 M1_24V CN100-11

CN121-2 CN205-2 CN205-2 CN60-2 R_DRV2 CN51-A 2 M1_24V CN100-10
CN51-A 3 M1_P.GND CN100-9

CN122-1 CN204-1 CN204-14 CN59- 1 R_5V CN51-A 5 M1_H/L CN100-7
Stapler unit/Rr CN122-2 CN204-2 CN204-13 CN59- 2 R_HP_SIG CN51-A 6 M1_LD_SIG CN100-6
CN204-3 CN204-12 M1 Conveyance motor
CN122-3 CN59- 3 R_S.GND CN51-A 7 M1_F/R CN100-5
CN122-4 CN204-4 CN204-11 CN59- 4 R_LS_SIG CN51-A 8 M1_CLK CN100-4
CN122-5 CN204-5 CN204-10 CN59- 5 R_CD_SIG CN51-A 9 M1_CONT CN100-3
CN122-6 CN204-6 CN204-9 CN59- 6 R_READY_SIG CN51-A10 M1_S.GND CN100-2
CN122-7 CN204-7 CN204-8 CN59- 7 R_S.GND CN51-A11 M1_5V CN100-1
CN51-A12 SD2_24V -2 CN104-1

CN51-A13 SD2_DRV -1 CN104-2 SD2 Gate solenoid
CN123-1 CN205-3 CN205-3 CN60-3 F_DRV1
CN123-2 CN205-4 CN205-4 CN60-4 F_DRV2
CN51-B 1 SD5_24V -2 CN105-1
CN51-B 2 SD5_DRV -1 CN105-2 SD5 Bypass solenoid
CN124-1 CN204-8 CN204-7 CN59- 8 F_5V
2
2
CN124-2 CN204-9 CN204-6 CN59- 9 F_HP_SIG

Stapler unit/Fr CN204-10 CN204-5
CN124-3 CN59-10 F_S.GND CN51-B 3 M3_24V CN145-11
CN124-4 CN204-11 CN204-4 CN59-11 F_LS_SIG CN51-B 4 M3_24V CN145-10
CN124-5 CN204-12 CN204-3 CN59-12 F_CD_SIG CN51-B 5 M3_P.GND CN145-9
CN124-6 CN204-13 CN204-2 CN59-13 F_READY_SIG CN51-B 6 M3_P.GND CN145-8
CN124-7 CN204-14 CN204-1 CN59-14 F_S.GND CN51-B 7 M3_H/L CN145-7
CN51-B 8 M3_LD_SIG CN145-6 M3 Tray up down motor
CN51-B 9 M3_F/R CN145-5
CN51-B10 M3_CLK CN145-4
CN127-3 CN209-1 CN209-6 CN58-A 1 PS11_S.GND CN51-B11 M3_CONT2 CN145-4
Stapler movement CN127-2 CN209-2 CN209-5 CN58-A 2 PS11_SIG CN51-B12 M3_S.GND CN145-2
home sensor PS11 CN127-1 CN209-3 CN209-4 CN58-A 3 PS11_5V CN51-B13 M3_5V CN145-1
CN128-3 CN211-1 CN211-3 CN209-4 CN209-3 CN58-A 4 PS14_S.GND

Stapler rotation CN128-2 CN211-2 CN211-2 CN209-5 CN209-2 CN58-A 5 PS14_SIG
home sensor PS14 CN128-1 CN211-3 CN211-1 CN209-6 CN209-1 CN58-A 6 PS14_5V CN52-A 1 M7_24V CN102-11
CN52-A 2 M7_24V CN102-10
CN131-3 CN200-A1 CN200-A12 CN52-A 4 M7_P.GND CN102-8
CN58-A 7 PS32_S.GND
Stack asist CN131-2 CN200-A2 CN200-A11 CN52-A 5 M7_H/L CN102-7
PS32 CN58-A 8 PS32_SIG
home sensor CN131-1 CN200-A3 CN200-A10 CN52-A 6 M7_LD_SIG CN102-6
CN58-A 9 PS32_5V M7 Main tray exit motor
CN52-A 7 M7_F/R CN102-5
CN52-A 8 M7_CLK CN102-4
CN132-3 CN200-A4 CN200-A9 CN58-A10 PS33_S.GND CN52-A 9 M7_CONT CN102-3
Intermediate roller CN132-2 CN200-A5 CN200-A8 CN58-A11 PS33_SIG CN52-B 1 M7_S.GND CN102-2
home sensor PS33 CN132-1 CN200-A6 CN200-A7 CN58-A12 PS33_5V CN52-B 2 M7_5V CN102-1
3
3
CN133-3 CN200-A7 CN200-A6 CN58-A13 PS35_S.GND CN52-B 3 M8_24V -6 CN103-1

Rear stopper CN133-2 CN200-A8 CN200-A5 CN58-A14 PS35_SIG CN52-B 4 M8_24V -5 CN103-2
home sensor PS35 CN133-1 CN200-A9 CN200-A4 CN58-A15 PS35_5V CN52-B 5 M8_DRV_A -4 CN103-3
CN52-B 6 M8_DRV_A/ -3 CN103-4 M8 Paper exit opening motor
CN52-B 7 M8_DRV_B -2 CN103-5
CN117-3 CN58-B 1 PS34_S.GND CN52-B 8 M8_DRV_B/ -1 CN103-6
Staple scraps box PS34 CN117-2 CN58-B 1 PS34_SIG CN52-B 9 NC
set sensor CN117-1 CN58-B 1 PS34_5V
CN53-1 M6_24V -6 CN106-1
CN53-2 M6_24V -5 CN106-2
CN130-3 CN206-1 CN206-6 CN200-B1 CN200-B12 CN58-B 4 PS 8_S.GND CN53-3 M6_DRV_A -4 CN106-3
Alignment home CN130-2 CN206-2 CN206-5 CN200-B2 CN200-B11 CN58-B 5 PS 8_SIG CN53-4 M6_DRV_A/ -3 CN106-4 M6 Sub tray exit motor
sensor/Rr PS8 CN130-1 CN206-3 CN206-4 CN200-B3 CN200-B10 CN58-B 6 PS 5_5V CN53-5 M6_DRV_B -2 CN106-5
CN53-6 M6_DRV_B/ -1 CN106-6
CN129-3 CN206-4 CN206-3 CN200-B4 CN200-B9 CN58-B 7 PS20_S.GND

Stacker empty CN129-2 CN206-5 CN206-2 CN200-B5 CN200-B8 CN58-B 8 PS20_SIG CN53-7 SD9_24V -2 CN107-1
sensor PS20 CN129-1 CN206-6 CN206-1 CN200-B6 CN200-B7 CN58-B 9 PS20_5V CN53-8 SD9_DRV -1 CN107-2 SD9 Paper exit opening solenoid
CN126-3 CN216-1 CN216-6 CN200-B7 CN200-B6 CN58-B10 PS 9_S.GND

Paper exit arm PS9 CN126-2 CN216-2 CN216-5 CN200-B8 CN200-B5 CN58-B11 PS 9_SIG
home sensor CN126-1 CN216-3 CN216-4 CN200-B9 CN200-B4 CN58-B12 PS 9_5V CN54- 1 PS 2_S.GND CN212-6 CN212-1 CN109-3
CN54- 2 PS 2_SIG CN212-5 CN212-2 CN109-2
Tray upper limit
CN54- 3 PS 2_5V CN212-4 CN212-3 CN109-1
PS2 sensor
CN125-3 CN216-4 CN216-3 CN200-B10 CN200-B3 CN58-B13 PS31_S.GND
Alignment home CN125-2 CN216-5 CN216-2 CN200-B11 CN200-B2 CN58-B14 PS31_SIG
4
4
sensor/Fr PS31 CN125-1 CN216-6 CN216-1 CN200-B12 CN200-B1 CN58-B15 PS31_5V CN54- 4 PS 7_S.GND CN212-3 CN212-4 CN144-3
CN54- 5 PS 7_SIG CN212-2 CN212-5 CN144-2
Staple exit upper
CN54- 6 PS 7_5V CN212-1 CN212-6 CN144-1
PS7 limit sensor
CN136-3 CN203-A1 CN203-A18 CN57-A 1 M22_24V CN54- 7 PS 3_S.GND CN110-3

CN203-A2 CN203-A17 CN54- 8 PS 3_SIG CN110-2
Tray lower limit
CN136-9 CN57-A 2 M22_24V PS3 sensor
CN136-1 CN203-A3 CN203-A16 CN57-A 3 M22_DRV_A CN54- 9 PS 3_5V CN110-1
Alignment motor/Fr M22 CN136-5 CN203-A4 CN203-A15
FNSDB
CN57-A 4 M22_DRV_A/
CN136-7 CN203-A5 CN203-A14 CN57-A 5 M22_DRV_B
CN136-11 CN203-A6 CN203-A13 CN57-A 6 M22_DRV_B/ CN54-10 PS10_S.GND CN115-3
CN54-11 PS10_SIG CN115-2 PS15 Counter reset sensor
CN54-12 PS10_5V CN115-1
CN134-3 CN203-A7 CN203-A12 CN57-A 7 M 5_24V
CN134-9 CN203-A8 CN203-A12 CN57-A 8 M 5_24V
CN203-A9 CN203-A10 CN54-13 PS12_S.GND CN213-3 CN213-1 CN111-3
CN134-1 CN57-A 9 M 5_DRV_A CN213-2 CN213-2
Alignment motor/Rr M5 CN134-5 CN203-A10 CN203-A9 CN57-A10 M 5_DRV_A/ CN54-14 PS12_SIG CN111-2 PS4 FNS entrance sensor
CN203-A11 CN203-A8 CN54-15 PS12_5V CN213-1 CN213-3 CN111-1
CN134-7 CN57-A11 M 5_DRV_B
CN134-11 CN203-A12 CN203-A7 CN57-A12 M 5_DRV_B/
CN137-1 -6 CN203-A13 CN203-A6 CN57-A13 M24_24V

CN137-2 -5 CN203-A14 CN203-A5 CN55- 1 PS10_S.GND CN113-3 tray paper exit
CN57-A14 M24_24V CN55- 2 PS10_SIG CN113-2 PS10 Main
Stack asist guide CN137-3 -4 CN203-A15 CN203-A4 CN57-A15 M24_DRV_A sensor
CN137-4 -3 CN203-A16 CN203-A3 CN55- 3 PS10_5V CN113-1
motor M24 CN57-A16 M24_DRV_A/
CN137-5 -2 CN203-A17 CN203-A2 CN57-A17 M24_DRV_B
CN137-6 -1 CN203-A18 CN203-A1 CN57-A18 M24_DRV_B/ CN55- 4 PS 1_S.GND CN108-3
Sub tray paper exit
5
5
CN55- 5 PS 1_SIG CN108-2 PS1

-2 CN55- 6 PS 1_5V CN108-1 sensor
CN138-1 CN203-B5 CN203-B14 CN57-A19 M25_DRV
Intermediate roller
open close motor M25 CN138-2 -1 CN203-B6 CN203-B13 CN214-3 CN214-1
CN57-A20 M25_24V CN55- 7 PS30_S.GND CN116-3
CN55- 8 PS30_SIG CN214-2 CN214-2 CN116-2
tray paper full
CN55- 9 PS30_5V CN214-1 CN214-3 CN116-1
PS30 Sub
sensor
CN139-1 -6 CN203-B7 CN203-B12 CN57-B 1 M26_24V
CN139-2 -5 CN203-B8 CN203-B11 CN57-B 2 M26_24V
CN139-3 -4 CN203-B9 CN203-B10 CN57-B 3 M26_DRV_A CN217-3 CN217-1
Rear stopper motor CN139-4 -3 CN203-B10 CN203-B9 CN55-10 PS 5_S.GND CN112-3
M26 CN57-B 4 M26_DRV_A/ CN55-11 PS 5_SIG CN217-2 CN217-2 CN112-2
Stacker entrance
CN139-5 -2 CN203-B11 CN203-B8 CN57-B 5 M26_DRV_B CN217-1 CN217-3 PS5 sensor
CN139-6 -1 CN203-B12 CN203-B7 CN55-12 PS 5_5V CN112-1
CN57-B 6 M26_DRV_B/
CN55-13 PS12_S.GND CN213-3 CN114-3

CN146-1 -6 CN203-B13 CN203-B6 CN57-B 7 M 2_24V CN213-2 exit opening
CN146-2 -5 CN203-B14 CN203-B5 CN55-14 PS12_SIG CN114-2 PS12 Paper
CN57-B 8 M 2_24V CN55-15 PS12_5V CN213-1 CN114-1 sensor
CN146-3 -4 CN203-B15 CN203-B4 CN57-B 9 M 2_DRV_B/
Paddle motor M2 CN146-4 -3 CN203-B16 CN203-B3 CN57-B10 M 2_DRV_A/
CN146-5 -2 CN203-B17 CN203-B2 CN57-B11 M 2_DRV_B
CN146-6 -1 CN203-B18 CN203-B1 CN57-B12 M 2_DRV_A
CN71-1 5V CN370-6 5V
CN135-1 -6 CN208-1 CN208-8 CN71-2 LED5 CN370-5 LED5
CN57-B13 M11_24V CN71-3 LED6 CN370-4 LED6
CN135-2 -5 CN208-2 CN208-7 Jam indication board
CN57-B14 M11_24V CN71-4 LED7 CN370-3 LED7 JAMIB
CN135-3 -4 CN208-3 CN208-6
Stapler movement CN57-B15 M11_DRV_A CN71-5 LED8 CN370-2 LED8
M11 CN135-4 -3 CN208-4 CN208-5
motor CN57-B16 M11_DRV_A/ CN71-6 NC CN370-1 NC
CN135-5 -2 CN208-5 CN208-4
CN57-B17 M11_DRV_B
CN135-6 -1 CN208-6 CN208-3
CN57-B18 M11_DRV_B/
6
6
CN141-1 -2 CN210-1 CN210-2 CN208-7 CN208-2 CN57-B19 M 4_24V

Stapler rotation
M4 CN210-1 CN750-A
1
motor CN141-2 -1 CN210-2 CN208-8 CN208-1 CN57-B20 M 4_DRV CN20-1 5V

CN751-A
2
CN20-2 5V
CN750-B
3
CN140-1 -2 CN201-1 CN201-8 CN56-A 1 SD7_24V CN20-3 S.GND

Intermediate roller
SD7 CN751-B
4
release solenoid CN140-2 -1 CN201-2 CN201-7 CN56-A 2 SD7_DRV CN65-1 STP_HP_SIG CN10- 3 CN20-4 S.GND
CN65-2 PS8_SIG CN10- 2
CN65-3 PS31_SIG CN10- 1
CN142-3 CN201-3 CN201-6 CN56-A 3 M13_24V CN19-1 NC
CN142-9 CN201-4 CN201-5 CN56-A 4 M13_24V CN66-1 M13_VREF CN19-2 NC
CN142-1 CN201-5 CN201-4 CN56-A 5 M13_DRV_A CN66-2 NC CN19-3 FNS2_SIN CN757-2 SIN
Stacker entrance motor M13 CN142-5 CN201-6 CN201-3 CN56-A 6 M13_DRV_A/ CN19-4 FNS2_RTS CN757-1 RTS
CN142-7 CN201-7 CN201-2 CN56-A 7 M13_DRV_B CN62- 1 M8_A CN3-16
CN142-11 CN201-8 CN201-1 CN56-A 8 M13_DRV_B/ CN62- 2 M8_A/ CN3-15
CN56-A 9 NC CN62- 3 M8_B CN3-14
CN56-A10 NC CN62- 4 M8_B/ CN3-13 CN16-1 SYS_SIN CN756-1 MTXD
CN56-A11 NC CN62- 5 M24_A CN3-12 CN16-2 S.GND CN756-2 S.GND
CN143-11 CN56-B 1 M23_24V CN62- 6 M24_A/ CN3-11 CN16-3 SYS_RTS CN756-3 MCTS
CN143-10 CN56-B 2 M23_24V CN62- 7 M24_B CN3-10 CN16-4 SYS_SOUT CN756-4 MRXD
CN143-9 CN56-B 3 M23_P.GND CN62- 8 M24_B/ CN3- 9 CN16-5 S.GND CN756-5 S.GND
CN143-8 CN56-B 4 M23_P.GND CN62- 9 M26_A CN3- 8 CN16-6 SYS_CTS CN756-6 MRTS
CN143-7 CN56-B 5 M23_H/L CN62-10 M26_A/ CN3- 7
Paper exit arm motor M23 CN143-6 CN56-B 6 M23_LD_SIG CN62-11 M26_B CN3- 6 CN16-7 PAPEROUT_1 CN752-1
7
7
CN143-5 CN56-B 7 M23_F/R CN62-12 M26_B/ CN3- 5

CN143-4 CN56-B 8 M23_CLK CN62-13 M11_A CN3- 4 CN750-B
3
CN752-2 S.GND
CN143-3 CN56-B 9 M23_CONT CN62-14 M11_A/ CN3- 3
CN143-2 CN56-B10 M23_S.GND CN62-15 M11_B CN3- 2 CN750-B
3
CN752-3 S.GND
CN143-1 CN56-B11 M23_5V CN62-16 M11_B/ CN3- 1
CN750-A
1
CN752-4 5V
CN64- 1 NC CN14-18
CN64- 2 NC CN14-17 CN750-A
1
CN752-5 5V
CN755-1 CN64- 3 NC CN14-16
CN64- 4 NC CN14-15
CN29-2 CN29-2 CN64- 5 NC CN14-14
Door switch MS1 CN29-1 CN29-1 CN70-1 24V CN64- 6 NC CN14-13
CN64- 7 M1_CLK CN14-12
CN751-A CN750-A
2
1
CN755-2 CN70-2 5V CN64- 8 M7_CLK CN14-11

CN751-B CN751-A
4
2
CN755-3 CN70-3 5V CN64- 9 NC CN14-10

CN70-4 F.GND CN64-10 NC CN14- 9
CN755-4 CN70-5 P.GND CN64-11 M3_CLK CN14- 8
CN755-5 CN70-6 P.GND CN64-12 M23_CLK CN14- 7
CN750-B
3
CN70-7 S.GND CN64-13 M22_CLK CN14- 6

CN751-B
4
CN755-6 CN70-8 S.GND CN64-14 M5_CLK CN14- 5

CN64-15 NC CN14- 4
CN64-16 NC CN14- 3
CN64-17 NC CN14- 2
CN64-18 M13_CLK CN14- 1
8
8
CN63-B16 M23_LD_SIG
CN63-B15 M3_LD_SIG
CN63-B14 M7_LD_SIG
CN63-B13 M1_LD_SIG
CN63-B12 F_READY_SIG
CN63-B11 F_CD_SIG
CN63-B10 F_LS_SIG
CN63-B 9 F_HP_SIG
CN63-B 8 R_READY_SIG
CN63-B 7 R_CD_SIG
CN63-B 6 R_LS_SIG
CN63-B 5 R_HP_SIG
CN63-B 4 NC
CN63-B 3 PS20_SIG
CN63-B 2 PS9_SIG
CN63-B 1 24VDEC
CN63-A16 PS35_SIG
CN63-A15 PS33_SIG
CN63-A14 PS32_SIG
CN63-A13 PS14_SIG
CN63-A12 PS11_SIG
CN63-A11 PS34_SIG
CN63-A10 PS30_SIG
CN63-A 9 PS1_SIG
CN63-A 8 PS5_SIG
CN63-A 7 PS4_SIG
CN63-A 6 PS15_SIG
CN63-A 5 PS12_SIG
CN63-A 4 PS10_SIG
CN63-A 3 PS3_SIG
CN63-A 2 PS7_SIG
CN63-A 1 PS2_SIG
CN61-B20 M5_VREF
CN61-B19 M5_EN
CN61-B18 M5_F/R
CN61-B17 M22_VREF
CN61-B16 M22_EN
CN61-B15 M22_F/R
CN61-B14 LED6
CN61-B13 M13_EN
CN61-B12 LED7
CN61-B11 M2_B/
CN61-B10 M2_B
CN61-B 9 M2_A/
CN61-B 8 M2_A
CN61-B 7 LED8
CN61-B 6 M23_CONT
CN61-B 5 M23_F/R
CN61-B 4 M23_H/L
CN61-B 3 M25_CONT
CN61-B 2 SD7_CONT
CN61-B 1 M4_CONT
CN61-A20 STA_F_F/R
CN61-A19 STA_F_CONT
CN61-A18 STA_R_F/R
CN61-A17 STA_R_CONT
CN61-A16 SD9_CONT
CN61-A15 M6_B/
CN61-A14 SD5_CONT
CN61-A13 SD2_CONT
CN61-A12 M6_B
CN61-A11 M6_A/
CN61-A10 M6_A
CN61-A 9 M3_CONT
CN61-A 8 M3_F/R
CN61-A 7 LED5
CN61-A 6 M7_CONT
CN61-A 5 M7_F/R
CN61-A 4 M7_H/L
CN61-A 3 M1_CONT
CN61-A 2 M1_F/R
CN61-A 1 M1_H/L
FNSCB
Crimp
Symbol
CN 1-B 1
CN 1-B 2
CN 1-B 3
CN 1-B 4
CN 1-B 5
CN 1-B 6
CN 1-B 7
CN 1-B 8
CN 1-B 9
CN 1-A 1
CN 1-A 2
CN 1-A 3
CN 1-A 4
CN 1-A 5
CN 1-A 6
CN 1-A 7
CN 1-A 8
CN 1-A 9
CN 2-B 1
CN 2-B 2
CN 2-B 3
CN 2-B 4
CN 2-B 5
CN 2-B 6
CN 2-B 7
CN 2-B 8
CN 2-B 9
CN 2-A 1
CN 2-A 2
CN 2-A 3
CN 2-A 4
CN 2-A 5
CN 2-A 6
CN 2-A 7
CN 2-A 8
CN 2-A 9
CN 1-B10
CN 1-B11
CN 1-B12
CN 1-B13
CN 1-B14
CN 1-B15
CN 1-B16
CN 1-A10
CN 1-A11
CN 1-A12
CN 1-A13
CN 1-A14
CN 1-A15
CN 1-A16
CN 2-B10
CN 2-B11
CN 2-B12
CN 2-B13
CN 2-B14
CN 2-B15
CN 2-B16
CN 2-B17
CN 2-B18
CN 2-B19
CN 2-B20
CN 2-A10
CN 2-A11
CN 2-A12
CN 2-A13
CN 2-A14
CN 2-A15
CN 2-A16
CN 2-A17
CN 2-A18
CN 2-A19
CN 2-A20
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G

FNSCB FNS control board 6-B PS8 Alignment home sensor /Rr 3-H
FNSDB FNS drive board 1-C PS9 Paper exit arm home sensor 4-H
JAMIB Jam indication board 6-A PS10 Main tray paper exit sensor 5-A
M1 Conveyance motor 1-A PS11 Stapler movement home sensor 2-H
M2 Paddle motor 6-H PS12 Paper exit opening sensor 5-A
M3 Tray up down motor 2-A PS14 Stapler rotation home sensor 3-H
M4 Stapler rotation motor 6-H PS15 Counter reset sensor 4-A
M5 Alignment motor /Rr 4-H PS20 Stacker empty sensor 4-H
M6 Sub tray exit motor 3-B PS30 Sub tray paper full sensor 5-A
M7 Main tray exit motor 3-A PS31 Alignment home sensor /Fr 4-H
M8 Paper exit opening motor 3-B PS32 Stack asist home sensor 3-H
M30 Stapler motor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr PS33 Intermediate roller home sensor 3-H
M11 Stapler movement motor 6-H PS34 Staple scraps box set sensor 3-H
M13 Stacker entrance motor 6-H PS35 Rear stopper home sensor 3-H
M31 Stapler motor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr PS40 Stapler home sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M22 Alignment motor /Fr 4-H PS41 Stapler home sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
M23 Paper exit arm motor 7-H PS42 Cartridge set sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M24 Stack asist guide motor 5-H PS43 Cartridge set sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
M25 Intermediate roller open close motor 5-H PS44 Staple empty sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit /Rr
M26 Rear stopper motor 5-H PS45 Staple empty sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
MS1 Door switch 7-H PS46 Stapler ready sensor /Rr Inside the stapler unit/Rr
PS1 Sub tray paper exit sensor 5-A PS47 Stapler ready sensor /Fr Inside the stapler unit /Fr
PS2 Tray upper limit sensor 4-A SD2 Gate solenoid 2-B
PS3 Tray lower limit sensor 4-A SD5 Bypass solenoid 2-B
PS4 FNS entrance sensor 5-A SD7 Intermediate roller release solenoid 6-H
PS5 Stacker entrance sensor 5-A SD9 Paper exit opening solenoid 4-B
PS7 Staple exit upper limit sensor 4-A SB Stapler board
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 PAPER SETTING
5. PAPER SETTING
5.1 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand (U.S.A. paper)
NOTE
• This table lists the optimum setting values by paper brands checked for paper through by Konica Minolta. For other brands, it is scheduled that information is provided in due course upon completion of the paper through check.
Weight 50 to 61 g/m2 62 to 71 g/m2 72 to 91 g/m2 92 to 130 g/m2 131 to 161 g/m2 162 to 209 g/m2 210 to 244 g/m2 245 to 300 g/m2
Paper type Tray/4 only
2
Coated A Futura Leser (105 g/m )
(Smoothness: over 100 sec)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 490 425
Disable
Fusing temp. (°C) -15 -15 Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5
(A separation performance is not
Coated B
securable.)
(Smoothness: over 100 sec)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 490 425
2
Fine Domtar (16 lb, 60 g/m ) Gilbert Neutech Color Kromekote Cover Leser High Gross
(Smoothness: 50 to 100 sec) (28 lb, 105 g/m2) (183 g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Paper Domter Color (65 lb, 176 g/m2)
(28 lb, 90 g/m2) Cover Supersmooth (65 lb, 176 g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 425 425 290
Fusing temp. (°C) -15 -15 -15 Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5
Normal Docupaque (16 lb, 60 g/m2) Hammermill Tidal MP (20 lb, 75 g/m2) Weyerhaeuser Cougar Opaque Digital
(Smoothness: 20 to 50 sec) Hammermill Fore MP (20 lb, 75 g/m2) Smooth Cover (65 lb, 176 g/m2)
Weyerhaeuser Recycled Laser Copy
(20 lb, 75 g/m2)
Domter (20 lb, 75 g/m2)
GreatWhite(20 lb, 75 g/m2)
GreatWhite Rycycle Content
(20 lb, 75 g/m2)
Xerox 4024 (20 lb, 75 g/m2)
Husky Xerocopy (20 lb, 75 g/m2)
RecycleEclips (20 lb, 75 g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 490 490 490 425 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) -5 -5 Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5 +5
Book/News Weyerhaeuser Cougar Cover
(Smoothness: 10 to 20 sec) (65 lb, 176 g/m2)
Digiital Laser Opaque Couverture
Cover (65 lb, 176 g/m2)*
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 490 425 425 290 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) Standard temp. Standard temp. Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5 +10
Embossed Gilbert Neutech 25% Cotton Wasau Exact Vellum Bristol Hammermill Cover (65 lb, 176 g/m2)
(Smoothness: 5 to 10 sec) (20 lb, 75 g/m2)* (67 lb, 145 g/m2)
Gilbert Neutech 25% Cotton Disable
(24 lb, 90 g/m2)* (A fusing performance is not securable.)
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 425 290 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +10 +10
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Bekk smoothness tester stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which can not be found, obtain the smoothness data from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value
of smoothness.
3. Coated B: To be used when it is corresponding to overlay printing. For details, see chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service.
Setting of the condition for paper feeding

~ Air assist setting ~ Paper feed assist plate
Halftone dot: Air ON Frame in a thick line: 4 paper feed assist plates used
No halftone dot: Air auto Frame in a thin line: No paper feed assist plate used
NOTE
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
PAPER SETTING bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
5.2 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand (European paper)
NOTE
• This table lists the optimum setting values by paper brands checked for paper through by Konica Minolta. For other brands, it is scheduled that information is provided in due course upon completion of the paper through check.
Weight 50 to 61 g/m2 62 to 71 g/m2 72 to 91 g/m2 92 to 130 g/m2 131 to 161 g/m2 162 to 209 g/m2 210 to 244 g/m2 245 to 300 g/m2
Paper type Tray/4 only
Coated A PRIMASET 115 (115 g/m2) RDEREY (160 g/m2) RDEREY (200 g/m2)
(Smoothness: over 100 sec) Schneidersohne Business Paper
Color Copy (120 g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 490 425
Disable
(A separation performance is not
Coated B NEU Color Copy (200 g/m2)
securable.)
(Smoothness: over 100 sec) PRIMASET (170 g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 490 425
Fine Clair Mail (60 g/m2) NEU Color Copy (200 g/m2)
(Smoothness: 50 to 100 sec) PRIMASET (170 g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 425 490 490 490 490 490 425 290
Fusing temp. (°C) -15 -15 -15 Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5
Normal NEU CEETEE COPIER (60 g/m2) Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2) * Nautilaus (80 g/m2) Schneidersohne PlanoJet 90
(Smoothness: 20 to 50 sec) NOPA Top (80 g/m2) (90 g/m2)
Konica Minolta Original (80 g/m2)
NEU Color Copy (90 g/m2)
REPEAT (80 g/m2)
TURBOCOPY 80 (80 g/m2)
TURBOCOPY 80 (SB, BB) (80 g/m2)
AVERY DSP24
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 490 490 490 425 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) -5 -5 Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5 +5
Book/News Xerox3R91978 (160 g/m2) TURBOCOPY (160 g/m2)*
(Smoothness: 10 to 20 sec)
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 490 425 425 290 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) Standard temp. Standard temp. Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +5 +10
Embossed
(Smoothness: 5 to 10 sec)
Disable
(A fusing performance is not securable.)
Line speed (mm/s) 490 490 425 290 290 290
Fusing temp. (°C) Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +10 +10
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Bekk smoothness tester stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which can not be found, obtain the smoothness data from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value
of smoothness.
3. Coated B: To be used when it is corresponding to overlay printing. For details, see chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service.
Setting of the condition for paper feeding

~ Air assist setting ~ Paper feed assist plate
Halftone dot: Air ON Frame in a thick line: 4 paper feed assist plates used
No halftone dot: Air auto Frame in a thin line: No paper feed assist plate used
NOTE
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 PAPER SETTING
5.3 Conversion table of paper weight

Reference:
• Paper weight (g/m2):Unit showing the mass of a 1 m2 sheet of paper in gram.
• Basis Weight (lb): The basis weight of a paper is the designated fixed weight of 500 sheets, measured in pounds, in that paper's basic sheet size.
It is important to note that the "basic size" is not the same for all types of paper.
Paper type Bond Cover Index Bristol Tag Book

Basic size (inch) 17 x 22 20 x 26 25.5 x 30.5 22.5 x 28.5 24 x 36 25 x 38
(mm) 432 x 559 508 x 660 648 x 775 572 x 724 610 x 914 635 x 965
g/m2 lb lb lb lb lb lb
50.0 13.3 18.5 27.7 22.8 30.8 33.8
52.3 13.9 19.4 29.0 23.9 32.2 35.4
54.2 14.4 20.1 30.0 24.7 33.3 36.7
60.2 16.0 22.3 33.3 27.5 37.0 40.7
64.0 17.0 23.7 35.4 29.2 39.4 43.3
66.3 17.7 24.6 36.7 30.3 40.8 44.9
68.7 18.3 25.4 38.0 31.4 42.3 46.5
72.3 19.3 26.8 40.0 33.0 44.5 48.9
75.9 20.2 28.1 42.0 34.7 46.7 51.3
80.0 21.3 29.6 44.3 36.5 49.2 54.1
83.7 22.3 31.0 46.4 38.2 51.5 56.6
88.0 23.4 32.6 48.7 40.2 54.1 59.5
90.0 24.0 33.3 49.8 41.1 55.4 60.9
98.3 26.2 36.4 54.4 44.9 60.5 66.5
100.0 26.6 37.0 55.4 45.7 61.5 67.6
104.7 27.9 38.8 58.0 47.8 64.4 70.8
108.0 28.8 40.0 59.8 49.3 66.4 73.1
110.0 29.3 40.7 60.9 50.2 67.7 74.4
120.0 32.0 44.4 66.5 54.8 73.8 81.2
127.9 34.1 47.4 70.8 58.4 78.7 86.5
130.0 34.6 48.1 72.0 59.4 80.0 87.9
140.0 37.3 51.8 77.5 63.9 86.1 94.7
150.0 39.9 55.5 83.1 68.5 92.3 101.5
160.0 42.6 59.2 88.6 73.1 98.4 108.2
170.0 45.3 62.9 94.2 77.6 104.6 115.0
180.0 47.9 66.7 99.7 82.2 110.7 121.8
190.0 50.6 70.4 105.2 86.8 116.9 128.5
200.0 53.3 74.1 110.8 91.3 123.1 135.3
210.0 55.9 77.8 116.3 95.9 129.2 142.1
220.0 58.6 81.5 121.8 100.5 135.4 148.8
230.0 61.3 85.2 127.4 105.0 141.5 155.6
240.0 63.9 88.9 132.9 109.6 147.7 162.4
250.0 66.6 92.6 138.5 114.2 153.8 169.1
260.0 69.2 96.3 144.0 118.7 160.0 175.9
270.0 71.9 100.0 149.5 123.3 166.1 182.7
280.0 74.6 103.7 155.1 127.9 172.3 189.4
290.0 77.2 107.4 160.6 132.4 178.4 196.2
300.0 79.9 111.1 166.1 137.0 184.6 202.9
Divisor 3.7548 2.7006 1.8056 2.1899 1.6253 1.4782
DF-603
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
See the main body service manual on page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
I OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.5 Originals not allowed to be fed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.6 Combination of mixed originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.8 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Conveyance section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
1.1.3 Read section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
1.1.4 Paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2. OTHER PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and/or adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2 List of parts to be disassembled and assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3 Removal procedure of parts to be disassembled and assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
1. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 DF paper skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 DF hinge pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3 DF height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.4 Adjustment to prevent false detection by the original detection sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1.5 Centering sensor switchover adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Name: Double sided original auto feeder
Type: Sheet-through type original auto feeder
1.2 Functions
Original size: Inch: 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, A5, A5R
Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13
Maximum original size: 297 x 431.8
Minimum original size: 128 x 139.7
Original stacking capacity: 100 sheets, max. (80 g/m2)
Original read speed Single sided copy mode : 105 sheets/min. (A4 size)
: 103 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11 size)
Double sided copy mode : 65 sheets/min. (A4/8.5 x 11 size)
Original feed layout: Set with the front side up, at center as standard
Original image read position: Dedicated slit glass section
Resolution: 600 dpi
1.3 Type of paper

High-quality paper of 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2
In the case of the single sided copy mode, however, high-quality paper of 131 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 is also avail-
able in the single feed mode.
Amount of curling: Up to 10 mm with 5 originals overlapped one another
Original
Amount of curling df603to1001c
1.4 Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be
guaranteed
With the following originals, no severe problems are found such as frequent jams and major damage to the orig-
inals, although it is not possible to obtain a numeric value indicating reliability that can be specified in product
guarantee terms:
Recycled paper, straw paper, heat sensitive paper, originals fed in the
mixing of perforated original mode, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to
50 g/m2, irregular-sized originals (such as CF originals), coated
paper, originals with a rough surface (such as letterhead), folded orig-
inals (Z-folded or folded in two)
1 -1
1.5 Originals not allowed to be fed

The following originals are not allowed to be used:
I Outline
OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded original,
high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 201 g/m2
1.6 Combination of mixed originals

Combinations of the same and different size originals is available. The following table shows the available combi-
nation of mixed originals.
Metric:Europe
Reference original (original with a maximum width)

A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
B4 ~ ~ U { — — — —
B5 ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4R ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
B5R X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5R X X X X X X X U
Inch

11 x 17 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 5.5 8.5 x 5.5R
Other 11 x 17 U { — — — —
originals 8.5 x 11 { U — — — —
8.5 x 14 ~ ~ U { { —
8.5 x 11R ~ ~ { U { —
8.5 x 5.5 ~ ~ { { U —
8.5 x 5.5R X X X X X U
1 -2
Taiwanese
I Outline
A3 A4 8K 16K A4R A5 16KR A5R
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
8K ~ ~ U { — — — —
16K ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4R ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
16KR X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5R X X X X X X ~ U
U: Single size {: Same size ~: Different size X: Mixing not allowed —: Cannot be set
1.7 Maintenance
Maintenance: Same as the main body.
Machine service life: Same as the main body.
1.8 Machine data

Power source: 24V/5.1V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption: 210W or less
Dimensions: W 650 mm x D 570 mm x H 170 mm
Weight: Approx. 22 kg

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH (with no condensation)
1 -3
I Outline
Blank page
1 -4
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
Caution:
• Be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body from the power outlet.
II Maintenance
A. Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/paper feed assist roller
• Pick-up roller: Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 800,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
• Paper feed roller: Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 800,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
• Paper feed assist roller: Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 800,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the open/close cover [1].
sor cover [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
[3]
[2]
[1] df603fs2001c
2 -1
3. Remove the spring [2] of the pick-up roller unit

[7] [1].
4. Remove the C-rings [3] and [4], and slide the
bearing [5] and the one-way clutch [6] to the out-
side respectively.
[4] [2] 5. Slide the pick-up roller unit [1] to the front side,
and release it from the coupling [7] to remove it
upward.
[5]
II Maintenance
[1]
[6]
[3]
df603fs2002c
6. Remove the one-way clutch [1].

[7] [17]
7. Remove the C-ring [2], and then remove the gear
[18] [6] [3] (with a pin provided) and the belt [4].
[10] 8. Remove the C-ring [5] and pull out the shaft [6] to
[5]
remove the pick-up roller [7].
[15] 9. Pull out a pin for the gear [3] from the shaft [8]
and remove the spacer [9].
10. Remove the C-rings [10], [11] and [12] and pull
[4] [16]
out the pin for the gear [13] from the shaft [8]
while sliding the gear [13] in the arrow-marked
direction.
11. Pull out the shaft [8] and remove the paper feed
[8]
roller [14].
[12] 12. Remove the C-ring [15] and pull out a pin for the
gear [17] from the shaft [16].
[13] 13. Pull out the shaft [16] and remove the paper feed
assist roller [18].
[1] [9] [11]
[3] df603fs2003c
2 -2
NOTE
• Be sure to take note of the installation direc-
tion of the one-way clutch in each of the roll-
ers.
• Make sure that the fold [1] at the tip on the
original feed tray side of the pick-up roller unit
comes above the fold [2] of the stay. If it
comes under the fold, paper is not fed cor-
rectly.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
df603fs2004c
B. Replacing the separation roller/torque limiter

• Separation roller: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 400,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
• Torque limiter: Every 4,500,000 prints (once for every 800,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the pick-up roller unit. (See "1.1.1 A.
Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/
paper feed assist roller.")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the assist
[2] roller assembly [2].
[1]
df603fs2005c
2 -3
3. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the gear

[2].
[1]
[2] 4. Slide 2 bearings [3] to the outside and remove
the separation roller unit [4].
[4]
[3]
II Maintenance
df603fs2006c
5. Remove the bearing and the C-ring [1] and sepa-

[2]
rate the separation roller [2] and the torque limiter
[3] from the separation roller unit.
[3]
steps in reverse.
[1]
df603fs2007c
2 -4
C. Cleaning the pick-up roller unit

• Pick-up roller: Every 750,000 prints
• Paper feed roller: Every 750,000 prints
• Paper feed assist roller: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the pick-up roller unit. (See "1.1.1 A. Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/paper feed
assist roller.")
2. Clean each of the rollers with drum cleaner and a cleaning pad.
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
NOTE
paper feed tray side of the pick-up roller unit
rectly.
[1]
[2]
df603fs2008c
2 -5
D. Cleaning the cleaning pad/registration roller

• Cleaning pad: Every 750,000 prints
• Registration roller: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the screw [2] and take off the cleaning
[3] [1]
pad [3].
3. Clean the cleaning pad with a blower brush.
II Maintenance
4. Clean the registration roller [4] with drum cleaner

and a cleaning pad.
steps in reverse.
[4] df603fs2009c
E. Cleaning the pre-handling rubber

• Pre-handling rubber: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the pick-up roller unit. (See "1.1.1 A.
Replacing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/
paper feed assist roller.")
2. Clean the pre-handling rubber [1] with drum
cleaner and a cleaning pad.
steps in reverse.
[1]
df603fs2010c
2 -6
NOTE
paper feed tray side of the pick-up roller unit
rectly.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
df603fs2011c
F. Cleaning the paper feed section sensor

• Original count sensor (PS310): Every 750,000 prints
• Original size sensor /Lt (PS303): Every 750,000 prints
• Original size sensor /Rt (PS302): Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Close the DF.
[1] [2] [3]
2. Use a blower brush to clean the original count
sensor (PS310) [1], the original size sensor /Lt
(PS303) [2] and the original size sensor /Rt
(PS302) [3].
df603fs2012c
2 -7
1.1.2 Conveyance section

A. Cleaning the conveyance section sensor
• Original registration sensor /Lt (PS306): Every 750,000 prints
• Original registration sensor /Rt (PS318): Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the sensor cover. (See "1.1.1 A. Replac-
ing the pick-up roller/paper feed roller/paper feed
assist roller.")
II Maintenance
2. Use a blower brush to clean the original registra-

tion sensor /Lt (PS306) [1] and the original regis-
tration sensor /Rt (PS318) [2].
steps in reverse.
[1]
df603fs2013c
2 -8
1.1.3 Read section

A. Cleaning the read section sensor/mirror for the sensor
• Original conveyance sensor (PS308): Every 750,000 prints
• Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311): Every 750,000 prints
• Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312): Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
[3] [2] 2. Open the platen guide [1].
II Maintenance
[5] 3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the driven
roller assembly [3].
veyance guide [5].
[4]
[1]
df603fs2014c
5. Use a blower brush to clean 3 mirrors [2] of the

[1] conveyance guide [1].
[2] df603fs2015c
6. Close the platen guide and then close the DF.

7. Open the open/close cover [1]. (The picture
shows the condition after the cover is opened.)
[5]
8. Raise up the conveyance guide open/close lever
[1] [2]. (The picture shows the condition after the
lever is raised up.)
9. Use a blower brush to clean the original skew
sensor /Rr (PS311) [3], the original conveyance
[4]
sensor (PS308) [4] and the original skew sensor /
Fr (PS312) [5].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
df603fs2016c
2 -9
B. Cleaning of the centering sensor

• Cleaning sensors /Fr (PS320), /Rr (PS321): Every 750,000 prints
• Cleaning LED sensors /Fr (PS319), /Rr (PS322): Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sen-
[4] [3] [1] [2]
sor cover [2].
2. Remove the screw (stepped screw) [3] and the
screw [4]. Pull out the lower section of the DF
II Maintenance
cover /Lt [5] and remove it while pulling it down.
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the upper section of the DF
cover /Lt [5] when reinstalling it.
[5] df603fs2037c

[2] sor mounting plate [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to install the sen-
sor mounting plate [2] to the dowels [3] and
[4] when setting it to the A4 position and the
dowels [4] and [5] when setting it to the LT
(8.5 x 11) position. (See "III 1.5 Centering sen-
sor switchover adjustment.")
[5] [4] [1] [3]
df603fs2038c
2 -10
4. Clean the centering sensor /Fr (PS320) [1] and

[2] [1]
the centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319) [2] with a
blower brush.
II Maintenance
df603fs2039c
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the cen-

tering LED sensor /Rr [2].
[1] [2]
df603fs2040c
2 -11
6. Clean the centering sensor /Rr (PS321) [1] and

[1] [2]
the centering LED sensor /Rr (PS322) [2] with a
blower brush.
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
df603fs2041c
2 -12
1.1.4 Paper exit section

A. Cleaning the mirror on the driven roller assembly/paper exit section sensor/mirror for the sensor
• Mirror on the driven roller assembly: Every 750,000 prints
• Original reverse sensor (PS309): Every 750,000 prints
• Reverse jam sensor (PS304): Every 750,000 prints
• Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313): Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the driven roller assembly. (See "1.1.3 A.
[2]
II Maintenance
Cleaning the read section sensor/mirror for the
sensor.")
2. Use a blower brush to clean the mirror [2] on the
driven roller assembly [1].
[1] df603fs2017c
3. Open the platen guide [1].

[2] [3]
4. Use a blower brush to clean the original reverse
sensor (PS309) [2], the reverse jam sensor
(PS304) [3] and the original reverse/exit sensor
(PS313) [4].
[4] [1] df603fs2018c
5. Use a blower brush to clean 2 mirrors [2] pro-

vided on the back side of the platen guide [1].
steps in reverse.
[2] [1] df603fs2019c
2 -13
OTHER PARTS bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
2. OTHER PARTS
2.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and/or adjusted
A. DF skew adjustment screw
NOTE
• The adjustment of skew by means of the DF skew adjustment screw [1] is not allowed as a rule.
II Maintenance
[1] df603fs2020c
2.2 List of parts to be disassembled and assembled

No. Section Part name Page referred to
1 ADF DF main body 2-15
2 -14
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 OTHER PARTS
2.3 Removal procedure of parts to be disassembled and assembled
Caution:
2.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the DF

A. Removal procedure
1. Remove the main body rear cover.
II Maintenance
cover /Rr 1 [2] of the main body.
[2]
[1] df603fs2022c
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 2 angle

adjustment plates [2].
[2]
[1]
df603fs2023c
2 -15
4. Open the DF until it is vertical.

[1] [2]
II Maintenance
[3] df603fs2024c
7. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the cable

conduit [2].
[2]
[1] df603fs2025c
2 -16
8. Pull out the cable [1] to the upper side of the

main body.
[1]
II Maintenance
df603fs2026c
9. Close the DF, remove 2 screws [1] each, and

then remove 2 fixing plates /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
df603fs2027c
2 -17
10. Open the DF until it is vertical.

11. Remove one screw [1] on each plate while sup-
porting the DF, and remove 2 fixing plates /Fr [2].
12. Remove the DF from the main body.
NOTE
• The DF may fall to the back side when the fix-
ing plate /Fr [2] is removed. Be sure to con-
duct operations while supporting it.
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
df603fs2028c
B. Installation procedure
1. With the DF set to the main body, temporarily
hold 2 fixing plates /Fr [2] with a screw [1].
NOTE
• For the fixing plate /Fr [2], be sure to insert
the potbellied hole section [3] between the
guide screws [4].

[5] nal stopper plate /Lt [6].
3. Reinstall the cable conduit following the removal
steps in reverse, connect 2 connectors, reinstall
the ground terminal, and finally reinstall the main
[6]
body upper cover /Rr1.
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
df603fs2029c
2 -18
4. Install 2 positioning jigs [2] of the DF in 2 holes [1]

provided in the place to which the original stop-
per plate /Lt is attached.
[2]
[1]
II Maintenance
df603fs2030c
5. Close the DF slowly and set the reference hole

(oval) [1] and the reference hole (round) [2] to the
DF positioning jig [3].
[2]
[1]
[3] df603fs2031c
2 -19
6. With the positions put together, reinstall 2 fixing

plates /Rr [2] with 2 screws [1] each.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
df603fs2032c
7. Open the DF and tighten the screw [2], one for

each plate, of the fixing plates /Fr [1].
[1]
[2] df603fs2033c
2 -20
8. Remove the DF positioning jig and reinstall the

original stopper plate /Lt [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
df603fs2034c
9. Close the DF and check to see if each of 2 stop-

[1]
per pieces [1] on the DF side comes in touch with
the dent [2] in the original stopper plate /Lt on the
main body side.
[2] df603fs2035c
2 -21
10. When the stopper pieces do not get in touch

[2] [1]
with the dent in the original stopper plate /Lt at
the same time, make adjustments by turning the
adjusting screw A [1].
NOTE
• When a satisfactory adjustment cannot be
obtained with the adjusting screw A [1], make
adjustments turning the adjusting screws A
[1] and B [2] alternately.
df603fs2036c
II Maintenance
11. Repeat the steps 9 and 10 until each of the stop-

per pieces comes into contact with the dent in
the original stopper plate /Lt at the same time.
12. Reinstall the main body rear cover.
2 -22
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
1.1 DF paper skew adjustment
A. Procedure
1. Make a copy in the single sided original - single
sided copy mode, and check the original skew
[3] pattern (pattern A [4] or pattern B [5]) of the
image [3] on the copy paper [2] to the copy
paper feed direction [1].
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] df603fs3001c
3 -1
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0

[1]
3. Loosen the screw [2] and release the fixing of the
registration roller bracket [3].
4. According to the original skew pattern, move the
registration roller bracket [3] by 1 division [4] in
the following direction.
In the case of the pattern A: Move the registra-
tion roller bracket [3] to the lower side (direction
down towards original feed flow).
In the case of the pattern B: Move the registra-
[2]
tion roller bracket [3] to the upper side (direction
[4]
up towards original feed flow).
5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 until the original skew is
[3] within the specification (0.5% or less).
Specification: Paper skew ±0.5% or less (paper
skew against the side parallel to the paper feed
direction)
df603fs3002c
1.2 DF hinge pressure adjustment

In this adjustment, the spring pressure when the DF is opened and closed is adjusted.
A. Procedure
1. Close the DF.
2. Loosen the nuts [1], one each provided on both
sides.
3. Open the DF.
4. Rotate the adjusting screw [2] to adjust the
spring pressure of the hinge.
Tighten (clockwise): Spring pressure decreased.
Loosen (counterclockwise): Spring pressure
increased.
5. Close the DF.
6. Tighten securely the nuts [1], one each provided
[1] on both sides.
[2]
df603fs3003c
3 -2
1.3 DF height adjustment

A. Procedure
1. Close the DF.
[1]
2. Close the DF, and check to see if each of 2 stop-
per pieces [1] on the DF side gets in touch with
the dent [2] in the original stopper plate /Lt on the
main body side.
[2] df603fs3004c
3. When each of the stopper pieces does not get in

[2] [1] touch with the dent in the original stopper plate /
Lt at the same time, make adjustments by turn-
ing the adjusting screw A [1].
NOTE
• For the adjustment of the DF height, be sure
to make adjustments by turning the adjusting
screw A [1] as a rule. When a satisfactory
df603fs3005c
adjustment cannot be made with the adjust-
ing screw A [1], make adjustments turning the
adjusting screws A [1] and B [2] alternately.
3 -3
1.4 Adjustment to prevent false detection by the original detection

sensor
When false detection is made by the original count sensor (PS310) and the original size sensors /Lt (PS303 and
/Rt (PS302) above the original feed tray due to the angle of incident of external light such as a fluorescent light,
change the installation angle of the sensor.
A. Procedure
1. Raise the original feed tray [1].
[2] [3]
nal feed tray cover /Lw [3].
[1] df603fs3006c
3. Expand the claw [1] a little wider and remove the

[6] [1] [2] [3] [4]
original size sensors /Rt (PS302) [2] and /Lt
(PS303) [3] and the original count sensor (PS310)
[4].
NOTE
• Be careful not to spread the claw [1] too wide.
Otherwise, it may break off.

sor holder [6].
[5] [2]
[3] [4] df603fs3007c
3 -4
5. Rotate the sensor holder [1] up to 180º from side

[6] [1] [7]
to side and fasten it with 2 screws [2].
Reference
• When tilting the sensor from directly above up
to 10º forward or backward:
Install the sensor holder to the attaching hole
[2] with the projection [3] placed on the side
opposite to the triangular mark (U) [6]. In this
way, the sensor can be tilted to 10º forward.
And installing the sensor holder to the attach-
ing hole [7] with the projection [3] placed on
[4] [2] the triangular mark (U) [6] side allows the
sensor to be tilted 10º backwards. In either
case, install the sensor on the side with no
projection [3].
• When installing the sensor turned directly
upward:
With the projection [3] put on the triangular
mark (U) [6] side, install the sensor holder [1]
to the attaching hole [2]. Install the sensor on
the side [4] provided with the projection [3].
[3] [5] df603fs3008c
6. Install the sensor [3] to the sensor holder [4] so

[3] [5]
that the sensor face [1] gets into the sensor win-
dow [2] as seen from above the original feed tray.
NOTE
• Be sure to check to see if the sensor [3] is
securely held by the claw [5].
• Be careful that the sensor face [1] does not
get damaged, and also be careful not soil it
with grimy hands.

steps in reverse.
[2] [1] df603fs3009c
3 -5
1.5 Centering sensor switchover adjustment

Adjust the installation position of the centering sensor /Fr according to the original sizes (A4, A3/8.5 x 11, 11 x
17) mainly used by the user.
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct in advance "ADF centering sensor sensitivity adjustment." (See "III 4.3.7 E.
ADF centering sensor adjustment.")
A. Procedure
[1] [2]
sor cover [2].
df603fs3010c
3 -6
2. Remove the screw [1] and install the sensor

[2] [3] mounting plate [2] with the projection [5] set to
the side stamped with "A4" [3] or to the "LT (8.5 x
11)" side [4].
steps in reverse.
Reference
• Turning OFF/ON the power switch (SW2)
automatically recognizes the A4 position or
the LT position.
[4] [5] [1] [5] [2]
[5] [1]
df603fs3011c
3 -7
Blank page
3 -8
PF-701
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
I OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1 Tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Conveyance section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.1 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.2.2 Control board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.3 Tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
3. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
3.1 List of PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
1.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Adjusting the pick-up roller height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
1.4 Adjusting the separation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
1.5 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.5.1 Centering adjustment (for each tray) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.5.2 Centering adjustment (PF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1.6 Tilt adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
1.7 Horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Name: Large capacity paper feed unit
Type: Front loading type 3-tray paper feeder
1.2 Functions
Number of trays: 3 trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity: 6,000 sheets (64 g/m2 standard paper) = 2,000 sheets x 3 trays
1.3 Type of paper

Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13,
8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Applicable paper: PPC paper, high quality paper, coated paper, label paper, trace paper
Paper weight:
Tray /3, /5: 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
Tray /4: 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
1.4 Maintenance
1.5 Machine data

Power source: 24V/5V DC, 14.5V AC (supplied both from the main body)
Dimensions: 807 mm (W) x 1020 mm (H) x 675 mm (D)
Weight: 142 kg

1 -1
I Outline
Blank page
1 -2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
Caution:
II Maintenance
1.1.1 Tray section
A. Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller unit/separation roller unit
NOTE
• The pick-up roller unit and the separation roller unit are CMS corresponding parts.
(1) Procedure
NOTE
• The removing/reinstalling methods of the pick-up roller unit and the separation roller unit are the
same for all of the trays /3, /4 and /5. The explanation here is made using the example of tray /3.
• After completion of installation, be sure to rotate the pick-up roller in the paper feed direction
(clockwise as seen from the front side) to check to see if the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly. The rotation is restricted only to the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the
front side) and be careful not to rotate it counterclockwise.
• Be careful that the pick-up roller unit and the separation roller unit are different in the direction for
the main body and the PF.
2 -1
1. Open the front door [1].

2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the
[3] tray [4] while lifting up the tray lock lever [3] a lit-
[2]
tle.
II Maintenance
[4]
[1]
pf701fs2001c
3. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the arrow-marked

[2]
direction (clockwise as seen from the front side)
and bring the coupling [2] to the lengthwise
[3] direction.
[1] NOTE
• The rotation of the pick-up roller [1] is
restricted only to the arrow-marked direction
(clockwise). It will not rotate in the reverse
direction (counterclockwise) and be careful
pf701fs2002c
not to rotate it in the reverse direction forc-
ibly.
2 -2
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].

6. Move the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
[2]
NOTE
• When installing the bearing, press down a lit-
tle the metal frame [3] of the pick-up roller
[1] unit and insert the flat section [4] of the bear-
ing /Rr [2] into the notched section [5] of the
metal frame while the flat section [4] of the
bearing being held in a horizontal position.
II Maintenance
And then insert the bearing /Fr [1] in the same
[4] manner.
[2]
[5]
[3]
pf701fs2003c
2 -3
7. Hold the pick-up roller unit [1] by hand and lift

[4] [5]
and tilt the paper feed roller [3] so that it rotates
on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller to remove it
[3] from the notch of the bearing [4] and the cou-
[1]
pling [5].
NOTE
• When removing the pick-up roller unit [1], be
careful not to damage the sensor [7] with the
metal frame [6].
[2]
II Maintenance
[6]
[7]
pf701fs2004c
2 -4
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm

[1] of the paper feed guide plate and then remove
[3]
the pick-up roller unit [3].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
[3]
pf701fs2005c

[1]
entrance guide plate [2].
[2] pf701fs2006c
2 -5

[1]
[2]
II Maintenance
pf701fs2007c
11. Pull out the front side of the separation roller unit
[2] [3]
[1] in the arrow-marked direction, and then
remove the coupling pin [2] in the rear from the
joint [3].
NOTE
coupling pin [2] to the joint [3].
• When reinstalling the separation roller unit [1],
fasten it with the screws while pressing it
down gently.
• There are two types of separation roller units
[1] and they vary depending on the tray. One
shown in the picture [4] is used by trays /3
and /5, and the other shown in the picture [5]
is used by tray /4 with many gears.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of installation, be sure to
raise the pick-up roller a little and rotate it
clockwise as seen from the front side to
check to see if the paper feed roller and the
belt rotate smoothly. (The direction of rotation
is available only in the paper feed direction
[4] [5] (clockwise as seen from the front side) and be
pf701fs2008c
careful not to rotate it counterclockwise.)
2 -6
B. Replacing the pick-up roller unit/paper feed roller unit

• Pick-up roller unit: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
• Paper feed roller unit: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The external view of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, there is a one-way mechanism provided on the inside of the collar for the paper feed
II Maintenance
roller while no one-way mechanism is provided for the separation roller collar, be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller unit.

[3]
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller unit
and then remove the coupling bearing [2] from
[1] the mounting metal fitting [3].
[2]
pf701fs2009c
3. Pull out the pick-up roller [1] from the shaft [2].
[1] [2]
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and pull out the paper feed
roller [4] from the collar [5].
5. Replace the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed
roller [4] with a new one.
NOTE
• The external view of the collar is the same for
the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, there is a one-way mechanism pro-
[3] [4] [5]
vided on the inside of the collar [6] for the
[7] [6]
paper feed roller while no one-way mecha-
nism is provided for the separation roller col-
lar [7], be careful not to confuse one with the
other.

steps in reverse.
pf701fs2010c
2 -7
C. Replacing the separation roller unit

• Separation roller unit: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 500,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The external view of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, there is a one-way mechanism provided on the inside of the collar for the paper feed
roller while no one-way mechanism is provided for the separation roller collar, be careful not to
II Maintenance
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the separation roller unit.

[3] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the separation roller unit
and then remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[1]
[2] pf701fs2011c
3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separa-
[1] [4] [3] [2]
tion roller [4] from the shaft [1] to the arrow-
marked direction, and remove them.
4. Replace the pick-up roller.
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The external view of the collar is the same for
the paper feed roller and the separation roller.
However, there is a one-way mechanism pro-
vided on the inside of the collar [4] for the
paper feed roller while no one-way mecha-
[5] [4]
nism is provided for the separation roller col-
lar [5], be careful not to confuse one with the
other.
pf701fs2012c
2 -8
D. Replacing the paper feed clutch/separation clutch

• Paper feed clutch /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9), /3 (CL12): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for
actual replacement cycle)
• Separation clutch /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10), /3 (CL13): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for
actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screw of the tray and pull
[4]
out the tray. (See "2.2.3 Tray section.")
II Maintenance
2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove 2 wire
binding bands [2].
[3]
[5] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the paper feed
clutch [4] and the separation clutch [5].
[2]
[6]
NOTE
[1] • When reinstalling it, be sure to engage the
stopper of the clutch to the pin [6].
pf701fs2013c
steps in reverse.
E. Replacing the forced separation clutch (only for tray /4)

• Forced separation clutch (CL11): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual replace-
ment cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screw of tray /4 and pull out
[4] [5]
tray /4. (See "2.2.3 Tray section.")
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 wire
binding bands [2].
3. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the
forced separation clutch [4].
NOTE
stopper of the clutch to the projection of the
metal frame [5].

steps in reverse.
[3]
[1] [2] pf701fs2014c
2 -9

A. Replacing the pre-registration clutch/intermediate clutch
• Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3), /3 (CL4): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints
for actual replacement cycle)
• Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2), /Lw (CL5): Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 3,000,000 prints for actual
replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (See "2.2.1 Cover.")
[4]
II Maintenance
2. Remove the connectors [1], 1 each, and then

remove the wiring harness from the wire binding
[2] band [2].
[3] 3. Remove each of the screws [3], two each, and
the mounting metal fitting [4], one each.
[1]
pf701fs2015c
2 -10
4. Remove the bearings [1], one each, and the

[9]
washers [2], one each, and then remove the pre-
[3] registration clutch /1 [3], the intermediate clutch /
[8]
[4] Up [4], the pre-registration clutch /2 [5], the inter-
[5] mediate clutch /Lw [6] and the pre-registration
[6]
clutch /3 [7].
[7]
NOTE
• When removing the bearing [1], the washer [2]
[2]
is also removed. Be careful that the washer
[10]
II Maintenance
[1] does not get lost.
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align the stop-
per [8] of the clutch with the notch [9].
[3] • Do not press in the bearing [1] forcibly. When
[4] the bearing is perpendicular to the shaft [10],
it can be installed smoothly. When it is slant-
ing, it will not be inserted smoothly.

[5]
steps in reverse.
[6]
[7]
pf701fs2016c
2 -11
B. Replacing the pre-registration roller/registration bearing

• Pre-registration roller: Every 45,000,000 prints (once for every 10,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
• Pre-registration bearing: Every 45,000,000 prints (once for every 10,000,000 prints for actual replacement
cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the following units. (See "2.2.4 Convey-
[4] [3]
ance section.")
• Conveyance exit unit
II Maintenance
• Vertical conveyance unit /Up

[1] • Vertical conveyance unit /Lw
2. Remove the connector [1], and remove the wir-
ing harness from 2 wire binding bands [2].
[2] Remove the screw [3] of the vertical conveyance
unit /Lw, and then remove the pre-registration
sensor /3 mounting plate [4].
pf701fs2017c
3. Remove the E-rings [4], one each, of the pre-reg-

[3] istration rollers /4 [2] and /5 [3] of the conveyance
unit /Lw and the pre-registration roller /3 [1] of
the conveyance unit /Up respectively, and then
remove the gears [5], one each, and the pin [6],
[2] one each.
[1]
[4] [5] [6]

pf701fs2018c
2 -12
4. Remove the E-rings [1], two each, provided on

both sides of each pre-registration rollers and
[2]
then remove the pre-registration bearings [2],
two each.
5. Remove the pre-registration roller [3].
NOTE
[3]
• When reinstalling it, be careful not to damage
II Maintenance
the pre-registration roller with the corner of
the guide plate.
[2]
[1]
pf701fs2019c
2 -13
C. Replacing the conveyance roller

• Conveyance roller: Every 45,000,000 prints (once for every 10,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the following units. (See "2.2.4 Convey-
[2] ance section.")
• Conveyance exit unit
• Conveyance unit /Up
• Conveyance unit /Lw
II Maintenance
2. Remove the E-rings [3], one each, of the convey-

ance units /Up [1] and /Lw [2] and then remove
the gears [4], one each, and the pin [5], one
each.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3] pf701fs2020c

[2] [1]
5. Remove the E-ring [3], one each, of each of the
conveyance rollers /1, /2, /3 and /4, and then
remove the collar [4].
NOTE
• The collar [4] is distinguished between the
front and the rear. Be sure to install it with the
stepped side outside.
[3] [4] pf701fs2021c
2 -14
6. Remove the pulley [2], the pin [3] and the belt [4]
while lifting up the tension roller [1].
[2]
[3] NOTE
[4] • When installing it, be sure to tighten it

depending on the tension of the spring and
rotate the conveyance roller to check that the
[1]
belt rotates smoothly.
II Maintenance
pf701fs2022c
7. Remove the E-rings [1], two each, provided on

[1] [2]
both sides of each of the conveyance rollers, and
then remove the bearings [2], two each, and the
conveyance roller [3].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
pf701fs2023c
2 -15
D. Replacing the PF paper exit roller

• PF paper exit roller: Every 45,000,000 prints (once for every 10,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the conveyance exit roller. (See "2.2.4
[4] Conveyance section.")
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the collar
[3]
[2], the pulley [3], the pin [4] and the belt [5].
II Maintenance
[5]
[1] [2] pf701fs2024c
3. Remove the E-rings [2], one each, provided on

[1]
both sides of the PF paper exit roller [1], and then
remove the bearings [3], one each.
4. Remove the PF paper exit roller [1].
steps in reverse.
[2] [3]
pf701fs2025c
2 -16
2. OTHERS
1 Cover Right cover 2-18
2 Rear cover 2-19
3 Front cover 2-20
4 Control board 2-20
5 Tray section Tray 2-21
II Maintenance
6 Lift wire 2-24
7 Paper feed assist fans /Fr and /Rr 2-28
8 Lift motor 2-32
9 Paper feed sensor 2-35
10 Conveyance section Conveyance exit unit 2-36
11 Conveyance units /Up and /Lw 2-37
2 -17
Caution:
2.2.1 Cover
A. Removing/reinstalling the right cover
[2]
cover [2].
II Maintenance

steps in reverse.
[1]
pf701fs2026c
2 -18
B. Removing/reinstalling the rear cover

1. Remove the screws [1], two each, and then
remove 2 stays [2].
cover [4].
steps in reverse.
[2]
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
pf701fs2027c
2 -19
C. Removing/reinstalling the front cover

2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front
door [1] after removing the mounting plate [3].
[1]
II Maintenance
[3]
[2] pf701fs2028c
2.2.2 Control board

A. Removing/reinstalling the control board
1. Remove the rear cover.
[2] 2. Disconnect 16 connectors [1]. (marked with "{"
[3] in the drawing)
3. Remove 8 clamps [2] and then remove the PFU
drive board (PFUDB).
[1]
pf701fs2029c
2 -20
2.2.3 Tray section

A. Removing/reinstalling the tray
Caution:
• The tray is heavy so be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
• Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Avoid pulling out more than the 2 trays at once. This
may cause the PF to turn over.
NOTE
II Maintenance
• The removal and reinstallation steps of the trays are the same for all of the trays /3 to /5. The
explanation here is of tray /3.
• When lifting up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding the tray at positions
other than the specified ones may cause damage to the tray or result in a paper feed jam.

2. Insert a driver into the hole [2], lift up a little the
[3] tray lock lever [3] and pull out the tray [4].
[2]
3. When there remains paper in the tray, take it all
away.
[4]
[1]
pf701fs2030c
2 -21

vided on the right and left rails [1] and further pull
out the tray.
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
pf701fs2031c
2 -22
5. Remove the screws [1], two each, provided on

[1]
the right and left rails and lift up the tray [2] at the
specified positions to remove it.
[2]
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check the
knobs [3] provided on 4 rails to ensure they
get into the notches [4] of the tray securely.
• When lifting up the tray, be sure to lift it up
[1] with 2 people while holding it at the specified
II Maintenance
positions [5].
• Be sure to avoid holding it at any position [6]
that is easy to deform. This may affect paper
through, thus causing a jam.
[4]
[3]
steps in reverse.
[6]
[5]
pf701fs2032c
2 -23
B. Removing/reinstalling the lift wire
NOTE
• The removing/reinstalling procedure of the lift wire is the same for trays /3 to /5.
1. Remove the tray.

washer and 4 screws [2].
[3]
front cover [4] of the tray.
II Maintenance
[4]
[1]
[2]
pf701fs2033c
2 -24

[1]
II Maintenance
pf701fs2034c
5. With the pulley [1] slid, pull out the wire end [2]
[1] [2] [3]
from the hole of the shaft [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the pulley, be sure to raise
the lift plate a little to give slack to the wire to
be inserted. And then insert the wire ends [2],
one at a time, into the shaft hole and fasten it
with the pulley [1]. In this way, the wires can
be inserted easily.
pf701fs2035c
2 -25

[2]
remove the wire cover [2].
7. Remove the wires /Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from the
[1] [4] pulley [3].
NOTE
• When installing the wires, be sure to check to
[5]
see if they are contained in the wire cover [2]
and do not cross each other.
[3]
II Maintenance
pf701fs2036c
8. Pull out the wire /Fr [2] from the lift plate arm [1].
NOTE
• When pulling out the wire, pull it out gently
and be careful not to damage it with the cor-
ner of the metal frame.
[2]
[1]
pf701fs2037c
2 -26

[3] [2] [1] 10. Slide the pulley [2] and remove the wire end [3].
II Maintenance
pf701fs2038c

[2] [1] [4]
12. Remove the pulley cover [2] and then remove the
wire /Rr [3] from the pulley [4].
13. Pull out the wire /Rr [3] from the lift plate arm [5].
[3]
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• The wire /Fr is grey in color and the wire /Rr is
black.
[5] • Be sure to insert each wire into the corre-
pf701fs2039c
sponding shaft hole. The shaft hole on the
center side of the tray is used for the shorter
wire.
• Check the wires to see if they cross each
other.
• After completion of installation, check the lift
plate to see if it is horizontal.
2 -27
C. Removing/reinstalling the paper feed assist fans /Fr and /Rr

• The removal and reinstallation procedures of the paper feed assist fans are the same for the trays /3 to /5.
1. Remove the tray. (See "2.2.3 A. Removing/rein-

[2] into the hole [3] to fasten the release lever [1]
with it contained.
3. Remove the tray front cover. (See "2.2.3 B.
Removing/reinstalling the lift wire.")
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
[3]
pf701fs2063c
4. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and move the metal fit-

[1] [2] [3] [4] [2] [3] [1]
ting [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
5. Press down the paper stopper [3] and pull out
the lift plate cover [4] upward to remove it.
NOTE
• When removing it, lift up the pick-up roller for
evacuation.
• When reinstalling the metal fitting [2], fasten it
with a screw while pushing it lightly in the
opposite direction to when removing it.
[2]
[1] [2] [1] pf701fs2040c
2 -28
6. Rotate the gear of the drive section by hand to

raise up the lift plate [1] upward and move the
coupling gear [2] in the arrow-marked direction to
fix the lift plate.
[1]
II Maintenance
[2] pf701fs2041c
7. Disconnect the connectors [1], one each, and

[1]
remove the wire binding bands [2], one each.
NOTE
• For ease of explanation, the picture shows
the condition in which the lift plate has been
removed.
[2] pf701fs2044c
2 -29
8. Remove the screws (including the washers) [1],

[1] [3]
the screws [2], the screws [3] and the screws
(including the washers) [4], 3 each.
9. Remove the paper guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6].
NOTE
•When reinstalling it, be sure to fasten the paper
guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] with the screws [2] and
the screws [3], 3 each. Then tentatively tighten
the screws [1] and the screws [4], 3 each and
II Maintenance
tighten them up tightly after placing the paper

[5] [6] guides /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] in a horizontal position.
To check the verticality of the paper guides,
move the guide plate up and down with copy
paper placed on the lift plate and check the
clearance of the paper guide.
[4]
[2] pf701fs2064c
10. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and the remove

[1]
the paper guide cover [2].
[2]
pf701fs2046c
2 -30
11. Remove 2 screws [1] of the paper guide /Fr and

[2] [1] then remove the paper guide mounting plate [2].
12. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the lever
cover [4].
13. Remove 6 screws [5], and then remove the fan
[5] [3] motor mounting plate [6].
[4]
II Maintenance
[6]
[5]
pf701fs2047c
14. Remove 2 screws [1] of the paper guide /Rr and

[1] then remove the paper stopper mounting plate
[2].
[3] 15. Remove 6 screws [3] and then remove the fan
[2] motor mounting plate [4].
[3]
[4]
pf701fs2048c
16. Remove the wire binding bands [1], two each,

and disconnect the connectors [2], one each.
[3] [4]
17. Remove the screws (nuts) [3], two each, and
then remove the paper feed assist fans /Fr [4]
[1] and /Rr [5].
steps in reverse.
[2]
NOTE
• After completion of installation, be sure to
[5] conduct the paper size detection adjust-
[3] ments. (See chapter III "4.3.1 Tray adjust-
ment" in Field Service for the main body.)
[1]
[2]
pf701fs2049c
2 -31
D. Removing/reinstalling the lift motor

• The removal and reinstallation procedures of the lift motor are the same for the trays /3 to /5.
1. Remove the tray. (See "2.2.3 A. Removing/rein-
[2]
2. Remove the tray front cover. (See "2.2.3 B.
Removing/reinstalling the lift wire.")
3. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the motor
cover [2].
II Maintenance
[1] [3] pf701fs2050c
2 -32

[2] [3] [4] [1]
ing [4].
8. Remove the E-ring on the inside of the bearing
[4] position.
9. Remove the gear mounting plate [5].
NOTE
• When the gear mounting plate [5] is removed,
II Maintenance
the shaft gear of the bearing [4] on the inside
of the gear mounting plate drops off. Be sure
to remove it while holding the gear by hand.
[5]
[1] pf701fs2051c
10. Remove the 2 screws [1].
[1] pf701fs2053c
2 -33
11. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the lift

[1] [2]
motor [2].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
pf701fs2054c
2 -34
E. Cleaning the paper feed sensor (PS72/78/84)

2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the
[3] tray [4] while lifting up a little the tray lock lever
[2]
[3].
II Maintenance
[4]
[1]
pf701fs2055c
3. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].

[4]
4. Remove 2 screws [2] to remove the sensor
mounting plate [3], and then turn over the paper
feed sensor [4] for cleaning.
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2] pf701fs2056c
2 -35

A. Removing/reinstalling the conveyance exit unit
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid holding the conveyance exit unit at the paper-through section. This may deform
the paper-through section and affect the paper through, thus resulting in a jam.

veyance exit unit [3].
II Maintenance
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid holding the conveyance exit
unit at the paper-through section. This may
deform the paper-through section and affect
[2] the paper through, thus resulting in a jam.

steps in reverse.
[1]
NOTE
• Be sure to reinstall it so that the lever placed
at marked with "{" [4] of the vertical convey-
[3] ance unit /Lw comes to the upper side.
[2]
[4]
pf701fs2057c
2 -36
B. Removing/reinstalling the vertical conveyance units /Up and /Lw
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid holding the vertical conveyance unit at the paper-through section. This may
deform the paper-through section and affect the paper through, thus resulting in a jam.
1. Remove the exit conveyance unit.

[4] [3] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
veyance unit /Up [3].
II Maintenance
[2] [2] NOTE
• When reinstalling the conveyance unit, be
sure to align it with the positioning pin [4].
[1]
pf701fs2058c

[4] [2] [4]
veyance unit /Lw [3].
[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the conveyance unit, be
sure to align it with the positioning pin [4].

steps in reverse.
[3] pf701fs2059c
2 -37
PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
3. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS

3.1 List of PCS corresponding parts
PCS corresponding parts for PF-701 are shown below.
For particulars, refer to the Service Manual of the main body.
No. Name Description

1 Cleaning brush Brush used to remove paper dust of the pick-up roller and the paper
(Part packaged together feed roller.
with the main body)
II Maintenance
pf701fs2060c
2 Paper feed assist plate Weight used to adjust the pick-up pressure of the pick-up roller
(Part packaged together
with the main body)
pf701fs2061c
2 -38
1.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment
When a no feed condition occurs repeatedly while feeding paper, conduct the paper feed pick-up amount
adjustment.

[2] into the hole [3] to fasten the release lever [1].
4. Set the tray and check to see if the lift plate has
been fully brought up by listening to the operat-
ing sound of the paper lift motor. And then pull
out the tray again.
5. Remove the stopper screws, one each, attached
on the right and left rails and pull the tray further
out.
[1] [2]
[3]
pf701fs3001c

[2]
feed cover [2].
[1] pf701fs3002c
3 -1
7. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1]

[6] [1] [5]
and measure the clearance between the pick-up
roller [3] and the lift plate [4] with a feeler gauge.
Specified value A = 0.1 to 1.5 mm
When the clearance is not up to the specified
value, conduct the step 8 and the succeeding
steps.
NOTE
• Before loosening the screw [5], be sure to
mark off the position of the pick-up solenoid
[1] by drawing a line [6].
[2]
9. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of

the pick-up solenoid [1] so that the clearance
between the pick-up roller [3] and the lift plate [4]
gets to the specified value.
10. Tighten the screw [5] and fasten the pick-up

solenoid [1].
11. Put paper in the tray and set the tray.
NOTE
• When setting the tray, be sure to bring down
[3] the pick-up solenoid (in normal condition).
Setting the tray with the paper feed cover
removed and the pick-up roller brought up
may cause damage to the pick-up roller.
12. Make a copy/print and check to see if there

A
occurs a no feed condition.

[4]
steps in reverse.
pf701fs3003c
NOTE
• After completion of adjustment, be absolutely
sure to remove the screw of the release lever.
3 -2
1.2 Adjusting the pick-up roller height

When a no feed condition occurs or the paper edge is folded or when jams occur repeatedly while paper feed-
ing, and also when feeding paper with a large amount of curl, conduct the pick-up roller height adjustment.
According to the pick-up roller height adjustment, the height of the upper most paper and the paper through
height of the paper feed roller are decided.
NOTE
• Adjusting the height of the pick-up roller changes the paper feed pick-up amount. So, after com-
pletion of adjustments, be sure to check the paper feed pick-up amount through the paper feed
pick-up amount adjustment.

[2] into the hole [3] to fasten the release lever [1].
4. Set the tray and check to see if the paper lift
plate has been fully brought up by listening to the
operating sound of the paper lift motor. And then
pull out the tray again.
Remove the stopper screw of the tray rail and
further pull out the tray.
[1] [2]
[3]
pf701fs3010c
3 -3

[2]
feed cover [2].
[1] pf701fs3011c
6. Check to see if the actuator [1] of the pick-up

[2] [1]
roller assembly is aligned with the center [3] of
the upper limit sensors /1 (PS71), /2 (PS77) and /

3 (PS83) [2].
7. Remove the pick-up roller assembly [4]. (See
chapter II "1.1.1 A. Removing/reinstalling the
pick-up roller unit/separation roller unit.")
[3]
[4] pf701fs3012c
3 -4
8. Make a mark [2] of the height of the upper limit

[2] [3] [1]
sensor mounting plate [1].
9. Remove 2 screws [3], attach and fasten it tem-
porarily on the slotted hole side [4] of the upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1].
10. Make vertical adjustments of the upper limit sen-
sor mounting plate [1] and fasten it with the
screws [3].
NOTE
[4] [1] • Be sure to install the upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] so that it becomes level.
Reference
• Raising the position of the upper limit sensor
brings down the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the
increased difference [7] of elevation between the
paper feed roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5].)
• Lowering the position of the upper limit sensor
brings up the pick-up roller [5] (resulting in the
[6] [5] [3] reduced difference [7] of elevation between the
paper feed roller [6] and the pick-up roller [5].)
• When the paper edge is folded or jams occur
repeatedly, or when concavely curled paper is
being fed, raise the upper limit sensor mount-
[7] ing plate.
• When convexly curled paper is being fed,
lower the upper limit sensor mounting plate.
pf701fs3013c
11. Reinstall the pick-up roller assembly.
NOTE
• When setting the tray with the pick-up roller
not installed, the paper lift plate does not stop
at the upper limit, thus causing damage to the
tray. Be sure to install the pick-up roller.

13. Make a copy/print and check to see if a no feed
condition occurs or a jam. When a no feed con-
dition or a jam recurs, repeat the steps 7 to 14.
14. Check the paper feed pick-up amount. (See "1.1
Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.")
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• After completion of adjustment, be absolutely
sure to remove the screw of the release lever.
3 -5
1.3 Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure

When a no feed condition occurs repeatedly while feeding paper, conduct the pick-up roller pressure adjust-
ment.
NOTE
• Adjusting the pick-up roller pressure changes the paper feed pick-up amount. So, after comple-
tion of adjustment, be sure to check the paper feed pick-up amount through the paper feed pick-
up amount adjustment.

2. Place the paper feed assist plate [3] on the paper
feed assist plate holder [2] of the pick-up roller
unit [1] and fasten it with the screws (M3 x 8 mm)
[4] provided.
NOTE
• Up to 8 paper feed assist plates can be
attached.
For the number of the paper feed assist plates
to be attached, see chapter III "6.5 Adjust-
[1] [3] [2] ments for overlay printing," and chapter V "5.
Paper setting" in Field Service for the main
body.
• A paper feed assist plate weights about 10 g.
3. Set the tray.

4. Make a copy/print and check to see if there
[4] occurs a no feed condition.
pf701fs3004c
NOTE
• When a no feed condition recurs, increase the
number of the paper feed assist plates. When
a double feed condition occurs, decrease the
number of the paper feed assist plates.
5. When a no feed or double feed condition occurs

repeatedly, repeat the steps 2 to 4.
6. Check the paper feed pick-up amount. (See "1.1
Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.")
3 -6
1.4 Adjusting the separation pressure

When a no feed or double feed condition occurs repeatedly, conduct the separation pressure adjustments.
NOTE
• The separation pressure is subject to the influence of the type of paper to be used and the envi-
ronment of use. (In the low temperature environment, a no feed condition is apt to occur and in the
high temperature environment, a double feed condition is liable to occur.)
• An excessive adjustment may reverse the respective symptoms. Be careful not make an excessive
adjustment.

2. Change the position of the spring adjustment
lever [1].
Slide the lever in the direction of [2] to increase
the separation pressure. And slide it in the direc-
tion of [3] to reduce the separation pressure.
Reduced: Double feed jam condition improved.
Increased: No feed jam condition improved.
Reference
• The spring pressure changes about 10% each
[1] time the position is changed one place.
3. Make a copy/print with the tray set, and check to

see if a no feed or double feed condition occurs.
4. When a no feed or double feed condition recurs,
repeat the steps 2 and 3 above.
[2] [3] pf701fs3005c
3 -7
1.5 Centering adjustment

1.5.1 Centering adjustment (for each tray)
Conduct this adjustment when the centering of paper is different for each of the paper feed from the trays /3, /4
and /5. A mis-centering is automatically adjusted at the image processing unit. Therefore, conduct this adjust-
ment only when a mis-centering occurs beyond the range of automatic adjustment (±5 mm).
NOTE
• When a mis-centering of the same kind occurs in all of the fed paper from the trays /3 to /5, be
sure to conduct "1.5.2 Centering adjustment (PF)."
1. Make the software DIPSW12-3 "Printer centering

[1]
adjustment" disable (data = 1). (See chapter III
"4.9.1 Software DIPSW setting" in Field Service
for the main body.)
2. Make a copy/print to check the mis-centering of
the image with no automatic adjustment made.
4. When any paper remains in the tray, take it all

out.
5. When the paper guide [1] is set at the small size
position, extend it.
7. Move the paper guide [1] and adjust the center
[3]
position based on the amount of discrepancy
found in the step 2, referring to the marking-off
line [3].
8. Tighten up 2 screws [2].
10. Make a copy/print to check the mis-centering to
see if it is within the standard value (±2 mm).
11. When it is not up to standard, repeat the steps 3
to 10.
adjustment" enable (data = 0).
[2] pf701fs3006c
3 -8
1.5.2 Centering adjustment (PF)

Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering of the same kind occurs in all of the fed paper from the PF trays
/3, /4 and /5. A mis-centering is automatically adjusted at the image processing unit. Therefore, conduct this
adjustment only when a mis-centering occurs beyond the range of automatic adjustment (more than ±5 mm).
NOTE
• When mis-centering of paper is different for each of the trays /3 to /5, be sure to conduct "1.5.1
Centering adjustment (for each tray)."

adjustment" disable (data = 1). (See chapter III
"4.9.1 Software DIPSW setting" in Field Service
for the main body.)
2. Make a copy/print for each of the trays /3 to /5,
and make sure of the mis-centering of image
with no automatic adjustment made.
3. Turn off the power switch (SW2) and the main
power switch (SW1) of the main body and unplug
the power cord of the main body from the power
outlet.
4. Disconnect the PF from the main body. (See
[1] "Installation manual.")
5. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the PF positioning
bracket /Fr [1] on the main body side.
6. Move the PF positioning bracket /Fr [1] back and
forth, and adjust the center position referring to
the amount of discrepancy found in the step 2.
8. Connect the PF to the main body.
9. Connect the power plug of the main body to the
power outlet and turn on the main power switch
[2]
(SW1) and the power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
10. Make a copy/print for each tray /3 to tray /5 to
check the mis-centering to see if it is within the
standard value (±2 mm).
pf701fs3007c
11. When it is not up to standard, repeat the steps 3
to 10.
adjustment" enable (data = 0).
3 -9
1.6 Tilt adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the copy/print image tilt is found in all of the fed paper from the PF trays /3, /4
and /5.

outlet.
2. Detach the front side of the PF from the main
body. (See "Installation manual.")
3. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the positioning mounting
metal fitting /Fr [1] on the PF side.
4. Move the positioning mounting metal fitting /Fr
[1] back and forth, and adjust the tilt referring to
the marking-off line [3].
[1]
6. Connect the power plug of the main body to the
power outlet and turn on the main power switch

(SW1) and the power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
7. Make a copy/print for each of the trays /3 to /5
and check to see if the tilt of the image has been
adjusted.
[2] [3]
8. When it has not been adjusted, repeat the steps
1 to 7.
pf701fs3008c
3 -10
1.7 Horizontal adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the device cannot be placed in a horizontal position or when any discrepancy in
height and/or tilt is found between the device and the main body.
NOTE
• Conducting horizontal adjustments may cause slipping-off of the position relative to the main
body. So, after completion of adjustments, be sure to make a test copy/print to check to see if the
paper feed is properly made from the PF.

outlet.
2. Detach the PF from the main body. (See "Installa-
tion manual.")
3. Loosen the caster nuts [1] provided at the 2
places.
4. Use a wrench to rotate the caster nuts [2] pro-
vided at the 2 places and make horizontal adjust-
ments of the device.
NOTE
• Be sure to take into account the height
against the main body when making adjust-
ments.
[2] 5. Rotate lightly by hand the caster nuts [2] at the 2

places to check to see if there is any caster being
raised.
NOTE
• When any caster is found raised, use a
[1] wrench to rotate the nut [2] to extend the
caster until you get a feel for secure contact.
6. Fasten the nut [2] with a wrench and tighten up

pf701fs3009c
the nut [1].
NOTE
• Be careful that when the nut [1] is tightened
up with the nut [2] being not fastened, the nut
[2] also rotates together with the nut [1], thus
resulting in an incorrect position adjustment.
3 -11
Blank page
3 -12
FD-501
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
I OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.1 Punching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3.2 Folding functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.3 PI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Punch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.1.3 Main tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1.1.4 PI section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and/or adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.1 Upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.2 Folding conveyance section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.3 Main tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.3.4 Replacing the multi feed detection board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.3.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
1.1 Conveyance section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1.1 Roller solenoids /1 to /4 position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Punch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.2.1 Punch centering adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3 Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.4 PI section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Name: Punch·multi folding finisher
Type: Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
1.2 Functions
A. Functions
Normal paper exit function: Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Punching function: Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for
each sheet of paper and exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Folding function: Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for
folding (either one of the following: Z-fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double
parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each sheet of paper, and exited into the
sub tray/main tray (The Z-fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is
limited only to B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function: PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode: PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/
main tray. (The stapling function is available only when the staple unit is con-
nected to the downstream of the FD.)
B. Maximum tray capacity

Main tray (weighing 50 to 244 g/m2):
2,500 sheets: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
1,500 sheets: A3, B4, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
1,500 sheets: 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 12 x 18, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 8K
500 sheets A5, A5R, B6R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R
Sub tray (weighing 50 to 300 g/m2):
200 sheets: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, wide paper, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25,
8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5
x 8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
C. Processing capacity:
105PPM
1.3 Type of paper

1.3.1 Punching function
A. Paper size:
2 holes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14, 8K, 16K, 5.5 x 8.5
3 holes/4 holes: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K
1 -1
B. Applicable paper:
Plain paper, index paper
I Outline
C. Paper weight:
50 g/m2 to 209 g/m2
1.3.2 Folding functions

A. Paper size:
A3, B4, A4R, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R, 8K
Plain paper
C. Paper weight:
• Folding, Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Z-fold 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2
• Double parallel fold, Gate fold: 50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2
1.3.3 PI functions
A. Paper size:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x
13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KR
Plain paper, high-quality paper, trace paper, coated paper
C. Paper weight:
50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
D. Maximum tray capacity:

500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 trays
1.4 Maintenance
1.5 Machine data

Power source (for metric area): 230 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.)
Power source (for inch area): 200 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.)
Maximum power consumption: 180 VA or less
Dimensions: W 400 mm x D 656 mm x H 1231 mm
(The main tray is not included in the width)
Weight: 130 kg

1 -2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
Caution:
• When replacing periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
II Maintenance
A. Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
• Roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8): Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 punches for actual
replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord
[1]
support board /A [2].
2. Unhook the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft
[4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove
the roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) [3].
steps in reverse.
[1]
6. Make adjustments of the installation position.
[2]
(See chapter III "1.1 Conveyance section.")
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2002c
2 -1
1.1.2 Punch section

A. Replacing the punch motor (M10)
• Punch motor (M10): Every 10,000,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 punches for actual replacement
cycle)
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 4 screws [2].
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
II Maintenance
[2]
fd501fs2003c

[3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the punch
motor (M10) [1].
steps in reverse.
[2] fd501fs2004c
2 -2
1.1.3 Main tray section

A. Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
• Tray up down motor (M11): Every 5,250,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 prints for actual replacement
cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while supporting the up/down stay with your
II Maintenance
hands.
1. Remove the rear cover and the left cover /Rr.

[2]
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray
up down motor (M11) [3].
steps in reverse.
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2005c
1.1.4 PI section
A. Replacing the pick-up rubber (upper stage)
• Pick-up roller rubber: Every 5,250,000 prints (once for every 200,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the pro-
tective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c
2 -3

[4] [1] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-
up unit /Up [3].
NOTE
[3]
• The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the
coupling [4]. Be sure to remove the pick-up
[5] [2] unit /Up [3] from the front side.
• Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of
the pick-up unit /Up.
II Maintenance
fd501fs2007c
5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the

[1] [2] [4]
mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft
[4].
[3] fd501fs2008c

[4] [3] [2]
8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then
remove the shaft [3] from the mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
2 -4
[1] fd501fs2010c
II Maintenance
10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction
[1] [2]
plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
11. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [2], [4] and
[1] [2] [3]
then remove the gear [2], [4] and the pin [1], [5]
from the pick-up roller shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front
side, and remove the pick-up roller assembly [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
2 -5
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the

pick-up rubber [2].
NOTE
• Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the
one-way clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
II Maintenance
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
14. Remove the C-clip [1].

[4] [7]
16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then
remove the gear [5] and the pin [6] from the pick-
up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-
up rubber.
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
NOTE
fd501fs2015c
2 -6

[3] [4] [7]
21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then
[2] remove the gear [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-
[6] up roller shaft [6].
23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-
up rubber.
II Maintenance
NOTE
[1] [5] [8] [1] • Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the

steps in reverse.
fd501fs2016c
B. Replacing the paper feed rubber (upper stage)

• Paper feed rubber: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 100,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 8 in the “1.1.4 A. Replac-
ing the pick-up rubber (upper stage)” and
[8]
remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7] 2. Remove the C-clip [1].
[3] 3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
[4] 5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[1] 7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
2 -7
8. Remove the 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the

[2] [3]
entire paper feed arm [2] from the paper feed
shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
II Maintenance

[4] [3] [2] [1]
10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].

[3] [2] [1]
15. Remove the paper feed roller assembly [3].
fd501fs2020c
16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the
[1]
[2] paper feed rubber[2].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
fd501fs2021c
2 -8
C. Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

• Separation rubber: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 100,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 4 in "1.1.4 A. Replacing
[1] [2]
the pick-up rubber (upper stage)" and remove
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [1].
[1] 3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
II Maintenance
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire
roller shaft from the mounting plate while press-
ing the separation roller assembly [4] against the
front gear [5].
NOTE
• Pins are employed on the inside of the sepa-
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c
ration roller assembly [4] and the gear [5]
respectively. When removing them, be careful
that these pins do not get lost. With the C-clip
[6] on the front side of the gear left as it is,
pressing the roller onto the gear prevents the
pins from dropping off.
5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the

[1] [2]
separation roller [2] and replace it.
steps in reverse.
fd501fs2023c
2 -9
D. Replacing the pick-up rubber (lower stage)

• Pick-up rubber: Every 5,250,000 prints (once for every 200,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
NOTE
• A shaft fixing screw is inserted when removing the PI tray /Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing
screw from the PI tray /Up after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller /Lw. Operating
the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the PI tray /Up may cause damage to the PI
II Maintenance
section.
1. Make sure that the PI lift plate /Up [1] has come
[2] [3]
down fully. If it has not come down completely,
conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up: 70 -11,
PI/Lw: 70 - 13) in the service mode.
2. Conduct the steps 1 to 4 in "1.1.4 A. Replacing
the pick-up rubber (upper stage)" and remove
3. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the
[2]
paper feed stopper plate /Up [3].
[1] fd501fs2024c
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in

[1] the shaft fixing hole [2].
NOTE
• Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until
its stem section disappears completely.
• After completion of the replacement of the
pick-up rubber (lower stage) be sure to
remove the shaft fixing screw [1] from the
position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing
screw inserted to the position [2] may cause
damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
2 -10
5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the sep-

[5] [3] [1] [2]
aration roller unit [1] and the PI tray /Up [3].
7. Remove the 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI
tray /Up [3].
NOTE
• When removing the PI tray /Up [2], be sure to
pull it diagonally up to the left.
II Maintenance
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c

[3]
9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-
up unit /Lw [3].
[1] 10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the
pick-up rubber (upper stage) (steps 4 to 25). (See
"1.1.4 A. Replacing the pick-up rubber (upper
[2] stage).")
[2]
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
steps in reverse.
fd501fs2027c
NOTE
• When installing the PI tray /Up, be sure to
remove the shaft fixing screw and get it back
to the original position.
2 -11
E. Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

• Paper feed rubber: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 100,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 9 in "1.1.4 D. Replacing the pick-up rubber (lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as those for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (See "1.1.4 B.
Replacing the paper feed rubber (upper stage).")
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
F. Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

• Separation rubber: Every 2,250,000 prints (once for every 100,000 feed for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the steps 1 to 9 in "1.1.4 D. Replacing
[1]
the pick-up rubber (lower stage)."
feed stopper plate /Lw [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the sep-
aration rubber (upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (See
"1.1.4 C. Replacing the separation rubber (upper
stage).")
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
fd501fs2028c
2 -12
2. OTHERS
2.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and/or adjusted
Caution:
• Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
A. Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section
II Maintenance
NOTE
• Be sure to avoid removing or loosening the screws [1], [2], [3] of the folding/conveyance switching
position adjustment section provided on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment
scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are intended to be used in the factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c
2 -13

1 Cover section Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr 2-15
2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr 2-16
3 Upper door 2-16
4 Rear cover 2-17
5 Left cover /Fr 2-17
6 Left cover /Rr 2-18
7 Paper exit stopper cover 2-18
II Maintenance
8 Right cover 2-19

9 Left cover /Up 2-19
10 Stand cover 2-20
11 Front door 2-21
12 Folding conveyance 2nd folding conveyance sensor 2-22
13 section 3rd folding conveyance sensor 2-22
14 3rd folding roller 2-23
15 Folding conveyance section 2-25
16 Main tray section Main tray up/down wire 2-30
17 PI section Multi feed detection board /1, /2 2-39
2 -14

2.3.1 Upper cover
A. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover /Fr [5]
to the front side while raising it together with the
[5] upper cover /Fr [4].
[4]
II Maintenance
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI

[1]
cover /Fr [3] together with the upper cover /Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
2 -15
B. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr

1. Open the upper door [1].
[1] 2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover /
Rr [4] to the rear side while raising it together with
the upper cover /Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
II Maintenance
[2]
fd501fs2031c
C. Removing/reinstalling the upper door

1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the
[1]
upper cover /Rr and the PI cover /Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
ing [4] of the upper door open/close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] shifted to the front side,
remove the upper door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
2 -16
D. Removing/reinstalling the rear cover

cover /Lw [2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
E. Removing/reinstalling the left cover /Fr

cover /Fr [2].
NOTE
• These 7 screws include the 4 fixing screws of
[1] the mounting plate for the equipment connec-
tion.
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
2 -17
F. Removing/reinstalling the left cover /Rr

cover /Rr [2].
NOTE
• These 9 screws include 4 fixing screws of the
mounting plate for the equipment connection.
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
G. Removing/reinstalling the paper exit stopper cover

1. Remove the connecting metal fitting [1] of equip-
[3] ment.
exit stopper cover [3].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2036c
2 -18
H. Removing/reinstalling the right cover

[2] cover [2].
[1]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2037c
I. Removing/reinstalling the left cover /Up

1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the
[1]
upper cover /Rr and the PI cover /Rr.
cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
2 -19
J. Removing/reinstalling the stand cover

2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then
remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the stand
cover [4].
II Maintenance
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
2 -20
K. Removing/reinstalling the front door
NOTE
• When removing the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.

3. Remove 3 screws [3] while pushing up the front
[2] door so that it does not fall down, and then
remove the support plate [4].
II Maintenance
4. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
fd501fs2040c
2 -21
2.3.2 Folding conveyance section

A. Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
[3].
[1]
II Maintenance
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
B. Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

[1] 2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor
mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
2 -22
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

[1].
[1]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2043c
C. Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

[2] [1] 2. Remove the auxiliary cover.
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1].
Remove them from the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the 2
springs [2], the support plate [4] and the guide
[5] plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
2 -23
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide

[1]
plate [2].
[2]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
2 -24
D. Removing/reinstalling the folding conveyance section
Caution:
• The folding conveyance section is very heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.

2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove
the wiring harnesses from the 7 wiring harness
guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c

[1]
4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling
[3] arm /Fr [3] and the coupling arm /Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
2 -25
5. Remove the stopper screws [1], one each, from

[1]
the left and right rails and pull further out the fold-
ing conveyance section.
II Maintenance
[1] fd501fs2049c
2 -26
6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left and

[1]
right rails.
II Maintenance
[1]
fd501fs2050c
2 -27
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the

specified places [1] and [2] and remove it while
[3] lifting it up.
Caution:
• Be careful of your posture when removing it.
Be sure to carry out this operation with 2 peo-
[1]
ple so that you don't throw out your back.
II Maintenance
NOTE
• When lifting up the folding conveyance sec-
tion, be sure to hold the shaft at the places [1]
and [2]. Holding it at other places such as the
roller shaft or the guide plate may cause
deformation to these places.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Stand the folding conveyance section [1] upright

[1] when it has been removed, or lay it down on the
right side [2].
[2] NOTE
• Be careful not to lay it with the right side [3]
down. The guide plate may get deformed.

steps in reverse.
fd501fs2052c
2 -28
NOTE
[2]
• When installing the folding conveyance sec-
tion, make sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails
have engaged the attaching holes [2] of the
folding conveyance section.
• The top should be attached by pushing it to
[1] the right to engage the upper rail and the bot-
tom pushed to the left to engage the lower
rail.
[1]
II Maintenance
[2] fd501fs2053c
NOTE
• When installing the folding conveyance sec-
tion, pull out the rail further than the length of
the stopper [1]. Use the stopper screw [2] to
[2]
fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-out posi-
tion and fix the rail on the opposite side with
[1]
tape [3]. Doing this prevents the rail from
moving inwards for an easy and smooth oper-
ation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
2 -29

A. Removing/reinstalling the main tray up/down wire
NOTE
• The following procedure for replacing the up/
[1] down wire shows the examples on the rear
side. The configuration and winding of the
wires on the front side are symmetrical to the
rear side.
• There are two types of up/down wires pro-
vided, one [1] on the front side and the other
II Maintenance
[2] [3] on the rear side. These two wires are dif-
ferent in the direction of the wire mounting
plates. Be sure to use the wire with the cor-
rect wire mounting plate direction when
installing it. The distinction of these two wires
can be made by the direction of the wire
mounting plate when the shorter wire [2] is
placed under the longer wire.
1. Remove the following parts.

Rear cover
Left cover /Fr
Left cover /Rr
Front door
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
2 -30
2. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and

then remove the gear box [4] together with the
[3] up down motor [3].
[1] Caution:
• When the gear box is removed, the up/down
stay may fall down. So, when removing the
gear box, be sure to support the stay with
your hands.
[4]
II Maintenance
[2]
fd501fs2057c
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire

[2] mounting plate [3] of the up/down wire /Rr [2]
from the up/down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
2 -31

[5]
[5] [3] together with the 2 bearings [2].
[4] [6] together with the 2 bearings [5].
[6]
NOTE
• When removing the gear [8], be careful not to
drop the pin [9].
II Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
2 -32
7. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[1]
[2]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2060c
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up/

down pulley /RrLw [2] and the pin [3].
NOTE
• When removing the up/down pulley /RrLw [2],
be careful not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
2 -33
9. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of

a new up/down wire /Rr [1] to the up/down stay
[3] with 2 screws [4].
NOTE
• Install the up/down wires placing the shorter
[1] wire below the longer one with the wire sup-
[4] porting part of the mounting plate outside.
[2] • There are two types of up/down wires, one for
the front side and the other for the rear side,
[3]
II Maintenance
but these two wires are different in the direc-

tion of the wire mounting plates. Be sure to
use a wire that fits in with the direction of a
wire mounting plate.
fd501fs2062c
2 -34
10. Fasten the new up/down wire /Rr [1] with the
wire end [3] provided on the inside of the up/
down pulley /RrLw [2] and insert it into the shaft
[6]. Rotate the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and
wind it 5.5 turns clockwise from inside to outside
[2] [1] around the up/down pulley with no slack, and
then insert the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] fully
onto the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4]
and fasten it with the E-ring [5]. If the angle does
[3] not coincide with the pin [4], move up and down
II Maintenance
the front side of the up/down tray to change the
angle of the shaft [6].
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
2 -35
11. Hook up the up/down wire /Rr [1] onto the up/
down pulley /RrUp [3] through the relay pulley /Rr
[2].
[3] [1]
[2]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2064c
12. Wind the up/down wire /Rr [1] 2 turns counter-

clockwise from inside to outside around the up/
down pulley /RrLw [2] with no slack and fasten it
[1] with the wire end [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
2 -36
The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes

is, on the whole, as shown in the drawing left.
II Maintenance
fd501fs2066c
13. Use a tension gauge or spring balance to pull up

the wire tensioner [1] upward with a designated
force "A," and fasten it with the 3 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5 kg ± 0.25 kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
2 -37
14. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal

steps in reverse.
[1]
II Maintenance
fd501fs2068c
15. With the up/down stay [1] held in a horizontal

[4] position, tighten the 2 screws [3] of the wire
[1] mounting plate [2].
NOTE
[5]
• Move the up/down stay up and down and
check to see if it moves smoothly. If it does
not move smoothly, adjust it again so that it
[3] [2] becomes horizontal.
• Check the up/down wire [4] if it gets behind
the actuator plate [5]. If it gets behind the
douser, an unnecessary load is applied to the
up/down wire [4] when the up/down stay [1]
fd501fs2069c
goes up.

steps in reverse.
2 -38
2.3.4 Replacing the multi feed detection board
NOTE
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /1, be sure to replace the multi feed detection
board /2 at the same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the multi feed detection sen-
sor adjustments. (See chapter III "4.6.1 H. Adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI)" in Field Service for the main body.)
A. Removing/reinstalling the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2
II Maintenance
feed detection board /1 cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

feed detection board /1 [3].
[1]
[3] [2] fd501fs2071c
2 -39
5. Open the front door and then open the convey-

ance guide plate /2 [1] in the upper right direc-
tion.
II Maintenance
[1] fd501fs2072c

[1]
7. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed
detection board /1 from the wiring harness guide
[2].
[2] fd501fs2073c
8. Turn around the conveyance guide plate /2

[2]
assembly [1] inside the machine and pull it to the
outside.
feed detection board /2 cover [3].
NOTE
• When turning it around, or when disassem-
bling or reassembling it, be careful not to
damage the wiring harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c
2 -40

feed detection board /2 [3].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[3] [2] [1] fd501fs2075c
B. Notes to keep in mind when installing the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2
• The multi feed detection boards /1 and /2 are
[2]
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other when installing them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when
installing it.
Multi feed detection board /1 [1]: 15AG
Multi feed detection board /2 [2]: 56UA
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed
detection boards /1 and /2. So, even if installed,
the connector cannot be connected.
[1] fd501fs2076c
2 -41
2.3.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board

When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be
sure to remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old con-
trol board [1] and install it into the new control board
[2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2077c
NOTE
A • Be sure to set the "A" sections of the
EEPROM (IC68) in the same direction for
installation.
A
fd501fs2078c
2 -42
1.1 Conveyance section
1.1.1 Roller solenoids /1 to /4 position adjustment
When the roller solenoids /1 to /4 are changed, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
NOTE
• The adjustment steps given below show the steps for the roller solenoid /2. For the roller sole-
noids /1, /3 and /4, the same steps as those for the roller solenoid /2 are employed.
1. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the roller solenoid /2 [1].

2. Measure the distance A [5] between the end face
of the driven roller [3] and the right side (the
opposite of the paper through side) of the guide
[1] plate [4] when the roller solenoid /2 [1] is turned
on, and then tighten the screw [2] after adjusting
[4] the distance so that it becomes the standard
value.
[2]
Standard value: A = 0 to 1.5 mm
[3]
[1]
[3]
A
[5]
[4] fd501fs3001c
3 -1
1.2 Punch section

1.2.1 Punch centering adjustment
When the front to rear position of the punch holes cannot be adjusted up to the specification in the paper width
adjustment in the service mode, be sure to conduct this adjustment. (See chapter III "4.13.2 A. Paper width
adjustment," in Field Service for the main body.)
1. Remove the connector [1] and the 4 screws [2],

[3]
and then remove the cord support board /A [3].
[1]
[2] fd501fs3002c
2. With the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment

A [1] [2] B
plate /Rr [2] moved to the center, loosen the 2
screws [3].
3. Measure the distances A and B using a ruler and
adjust the positions of the alignment plate /Fr [1]
and the alignment plate /Rr [2] so that the dis-
tances A and B become equal, and then tighten
the 2 screws [3].
steps in reverse.
[3] fd501fs3003c
3 -2
1.3 Height adjustment
1. Loosen the nuts [1] provided at 4 places.

2. Rotate the screws [2] at 4 places for the horizon-
tal adjustment of the device.
NOTE
• Adjustment should be made while taking into
account the height of the main body and other
options.
3. Rotate the screws [2] by hand at 4 places to

check to see if there is any caster being raised.
NOTE
• When any caster is found raised, use a
wrench to rotate the screw [2] to extend the
caster until you feel secure contact.
4. Use a wrench to fix the screw [2] and tighten up
[1]
the nut [1].
NOTE
[2]
with the screw [2] not held, the screw [2] also
rotates together with the nut [1] thus resulting
in an incorrect position adjustment.
fd501fs3004c
3 -3
1.4 PI section
A. Gear position adjustment of the paper feed regulation plate
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct the gear position adjustment when disassembling the paper feed regulation
plate of the PI trays /Up and /Lw, the rack and the paper size VR section.
1. Install the regulation plate rack A [1] and the reg-

[1]
ulation rack B [2] so that they are aligned with the
reference hole of the detection gear [3].
[3] [2] fd501fs3008c
2. Check the paper size VR [2] to ensure it is held

[3] [1]
by the 2 bosses on the paper size VR mounting
plate [1].
3. Install the paper size VR [2] so that the notch of
its center hole is set to the notch of the detection
gear [3].
[2] fd501fs3009c
3 -4
4. Check to see if the regulation plate rack A [1], the

[1] [2]
regulation plate rack B [2], the hole position of
the detection gear [3] and the notch position of
the paper size VR [4] are in the correct position
respectively.
[3]
[4] fd501fs3010c
3 -5
Blank page
3 -6
LS-501/LS-502
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
II OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.1 List of parts to be disassembled and assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.1 Cover section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
1.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.5 Horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Name: Large capacity stacker
Type: Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method:
Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance (LS-501 only)
Alignment method: Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking: Horizontal stacking Mixing of original sizes not allowed (stacker tray only)
Shifting method: Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only)
Paper exit: Exited by the hand cart (stacker tray only)
1.2 Functions
Mode
Stacker tray non-sort mode: Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
Sub tray mode: Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.
Stacker tray sort mode: Exited into the stacker tray after being shifted.
Coupling mode: Exited into the post-processing unit with no processing made (LS-
501 only).
Maximum number of sheets loadable
Stacker tray: 5,000 sheets (standard paper)
Sub tray: 200 sheets (standard paper)
1.3 Type of paper

Paper size
Stacker tray: When 5,000 sheets loaded A3, B4, A4, A4R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x
13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, wide paper (up to 324 mm x
460 mm)
When 2,000 sheets loaded B5, A5
Sub tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25,
8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, index paper, wide size paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
Paper weight
Stacker tray: 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
Sub tray: 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
1 -1
1.4 Maintenance
I Outline
1.5 Machine data

Power source:
LS-501 24V DC (built-in power source)
LS-502 24V DC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions: 785 mm (W) x 723 mm (D) x 1,020 mm (H)
Weight: Approx. 110 kg

Humidity: 10% RH to 80% RH
1 -2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
Caution:
II Maintenance
A. Replacing the stacker tray up down motor
• Stacker tray up down motor: Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 prints for actual replacement
cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (See "2.2.1 Cover
[3] [1] [4]
section.")
sor mounting plate [3].
stacker tray up down motor [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
2 -1
NOTE
[5] • When reinstalling the stacker tray up down
motor, be sure to check that the belt [2] has
been engaged with the gear [1], and then
engage it with the gear [3] before fastening
[4] the stacker tray up down motor [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached
between the gear [1] and the gear [3], make
adjustments by rotating the encoder [5] coun-
terclockwise.
II Maintenance
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor

[2] mounting plate [3] from the stacker tray up down
motor [2].
[1]
ls502fs2003c
2 -2
B. Replacing the paper press solenoid /3

• Paper press solenoid /3: Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 prints for actual replacement
cycle)
NOTE
• When conducting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(2) Procedure
II Maintenance
2. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direc-
[2] tion to release the fixing.
2
NOTE
1
• In this step, be careful not to release the fixing
[3] on the rear guide rail [3].
[1]
ls502fs2004c
3. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you
can see the upper surface of it.
NOTE
[1] • Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10 cm to
the right in advance.
• Be careful that the belt [2] does not get
pushed down by the bottom of the shift unit.
[2]
4. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the
ribbon cable [5] from the connector [4].
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
2 -3
NOTE
• Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the
ribbon cable in the arrow-marked direction
[1] and remove the ribbon cable [3].
When reinstalling the ribbon cable, slide the
[3]
lock in the reverse direction after inserting the
cable.
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c

6. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direc-
tion and release the fixing.
7. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4]
of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
2 -4
NOTE
• When attaching the belt [2] to the stopper
[2] section [1], slide the shift unit [3] in the arrow-
marked direction and engage the stopper
[1] section with the belt.
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
8. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance

[1] [4]
between the belts [1].
NOTE
• When removing the shift unit [2], be careful
that the front edge of the stoppers [3] and the
[2] paper pressure arms /3 [4] do not come into
contact with the belt [1].
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
2 -5
9. Disconnect the connect [1].

11. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked
direction and remove it.
12. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove paper
press solenoid /3 assembly [4].
II Maintenance
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /3
assembly, be sure to insert the pin [2] of the
[1] shaft into the slit section [1] at the tip of the
solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
2 -6
13. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the sole-

[3]
noid mounting bracket [3] from the paper press
solenoid /3 [2].
II Maintenance
[2] ls502fs2012c
C. Replacing the paper press solenoid /1

cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover /Up, /Lw. (See "2.2.1
[2] [3]
Cover section.")
[6] 3. Remove the spring [2].
[4] 4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the
paper press solenoid /1 assembly [4].
NOTE
[5] • When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /1

assembly, be sure to insert the actuator [6]
provided at the tip of the shaft into the slit
[1] ls502fs2013c
section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the sole-

[3]
noid mounting bracket [3] from the paper press
solenoid /1 [2].
steps in reverse.
[2] [1] ls502fs2014c
2 -7
D. Replacing the paper press solenoid /2

cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover /Up, /Lw. (See "2.2.1
[2] [6]
[5] Cover section.")
II Maintenance

press solenoid /2 [4].
[3]
NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /2,
be sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at
the tip of the shaft into the slit section [5] at
the tip of the solenoid.
[1] [4] ls502fs2033c

steps in reverse.
E. Replacing the rear stopper solenoid

• Rear stopper solenoid: Every 15,000,000 prints (once for every 5,000,000 prints for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (See "2.2.1 Cover
[5] [6] [2]
section.")
[3] 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the rear
stopper solenoid [4].
NOTE
[4]
• When reinstalling the rear stopper solenoid,
be sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at
the tip of the shaft into the slit section [5] at
the tip of the solenoid.
[1] ls502fs2016c

steps in reverse.
2 -8
2. OTHERS
No Section Part name Page referred to
1 Front cover /Up 2-11
2 Front cover /Lw 2-11
3 Cover Rear cover /Up 2-10
4 Rear cover /Lw 2-10
5 Upper cover 2-12
II Maintenance
6 Wire Stacker tray up/down wire 2-13
2 -9
Caution:
• When replacing the periodically replaced parts, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body
2.2.1 Cover section

A. Removing/reinstalling the cover
II Maintenance

[1] [1]
cover /Up [2].
cover /Lw [4].
cover [6].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[5]
ls502fs2034c
2 -10
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and slide the front cover /

[1] [1]
Up [2] to the upper side.
front cover /Up [2].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1] [1]
[3]
ls502fs2035c

[3]
remove 3 knobs [2].
[5] cover /Lw [5].
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
2 -11

[2]
cover [2].
[1]
[1]
II Maintenance
ls502fs2037c

door [1].
steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
2 -12

A. Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire
NOTE
• When conducting this operation, be sure to set the stacker tray at the home position (the upper
most position) in advance.
1. Remove the rear cover /Up, /Lw. (See "2.2.1

[1] Cover section.")
2. Remove the stacker tray up down motor. (See
II Maintenance
"1.1.1 A. Replacing the stacker tray up down
motor.")
3. Stretch the spring [1] in the arrow-marked direc-
tion and remove the tip [3] of the wire /1 [2].
[2]
4. Remove the wire /1 [2] from the wire stopper [5]
[6] of the shaft [4].
5. Remove the wire /2, /3 following the steps 4 and
5 above.
[2] [6]
[3] [5] [4] ls502fs2023c
2 -13

[2] [1] [1] [2]
remove 2 pulley covers [2].
II Maintenance
ls502fs2024c

remove 2 pulley covers [2].
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls502fs2025c
2 -14
8. Remove 4 screws [1] and the pulley assembly [2].

[2] [1]
9. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the tip [5]
of the wire /1 [3].
NOTE
• On the paper exit side, loosen the 4 screws
[1], bring down the pulley assembly [2] and
release the tension of the wire /2 [3] before
starting the operation.
• When reinstalling it, the positions of the pulley
[3]
II Maintenance
assemblies on the paper feed side and the
paper exit side become important. Be sure to
check the marked position in advance of the
pulley assembly on the paper exit side.
[5]
[4]
ls502fs2026c
10. Release the winding of the wire /1 [2] from the

[1] [2] [4]
pulley [1].
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pul-
ley [1] from the shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
12. Remove the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].

[1] [2]
13. Reinstall a new wire /1 following the steps 8 to 12
above in reverse.
ls502fs2028c
2 -15
NOTE
[2]
• When the 2 wires at both sides are removed at
the same time, the stacker tray will come
down. So, be sure to replace the wires one at
a time (so that the remaining wire holds the
stacker tray in place.)
• When attaching the pulley to the shaft, be
sure to align the groove [1] of the pulley with
the pin [2] that has been inserted into the
shaft.
II Maintenance
• Be sure to set it with the bead set portion [3]

up.
[1] ls502fs2029c
• When winding the wire around the pulley, be

[1] [2]
sure to wind it 8 turns [3] so that the direction
of drawing-out [1] comes to the rear panel
side [2].
• The direction of drawing-out of the wire /1 is
symmetrical to that of the wire /2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
• When fixing the pulley assembly [1] on the

paper exit side, be sure to fix it at the same
position as it was removed from.
[1] ls502fs2031c
2 -16
14. Replace the wire /2 with a new one following the

steps 8 to 13 above.
15. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 7 in
reverse.
NOTE
[2]
• When reinstalling the wire /3, be sure to insert
the rear end [3] of the wire /3 into the pin [2] of
the shaft [1] and then wind it 3 turns [5]
[4]
around the shaft [1] so that the direction of
II Maintenance
drawing-out [4] comes outside.
• The direction of winding of the wire /1 is sym-
metrical to that of the wire /2.
[5]
[1] [3] ls502fs2032c
2 -17
II Maintenance
Blank page
2 -18
• Make these adjustments after parts are exchanged.
1.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)

• Before starting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(1) Procedure
1. With SD6 turned on by hand, check to see if the
A section in the drawing left is 3.5 ± 1 mm.
A
ls502to3002c
2. When not in the range of adjustment, loosen the

fixing screw of SD6 and make adjustments by
sliding it from side to side.
ls502to3003c
3 -1

(1) Procedure
A section in the drawing left is 66 ± 2 mm.
ls502to3004c


sliding it up and down.
ls502to3005c

(1) Procedure
A section in the drawing left is 50.1 ± 1 mm.
ls502fs3006c
3 -2

ls502fs3007c
1.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
NG OK job partition blade [1] in the drawing left does not
protrude from the metal frame [2].
[1]
[2]
ls502to3009c

ls502fs3008c
3 -3

Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and
other optional devices.
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen the nuts [1] at the 4 places.
2. Rotate the screws [2] at the 4 places and make
horizontal adjustments of the device.
NOTE
• Be sure to make adjustments while taking
into consideration the height between the
main body and other optional devices.
3. Rotate the screws [2] by hand provided at the 4

places to check to see if there is any caster that
is raised.
NOTE
[1]
• When any caster is found raised, rotate the
screw [2] with a wrench to extend the length
of the caster until it feels secure.
[2]
4. Fasten the screw [2] with a wrench and tighten

up the nut [1].
NOTE
ls502fs3001c
up with the screw [2] not fastened, the screw
[2] also rotates together with the nut [1], thus
resulting in an incorrect positioning.
3 -4
FS-503
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
I OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1 Stacker section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Stapler section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2.1 Cover section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.2.2 Stacker section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.4 Stapler section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
1.1 Stacker section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank page
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Name: Flat-stapling finisher
Type: Staple-cut type multi staple device
Stapling method: Incline clinch (staple cut) method
Shifting method: Alignment plate shifting method
1.2 Functions
A. Functions
Straight mode: Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Shift mode: Exited into the main tray after being shifted.
Sub tray mode: Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.
Staple mode: Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.
Subset staple mode: Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being
exited at random into the main tray.
B. Staple
Maximum number of sheets to be flat-stapled
(Plain paper): 100 sheets: 50 to 91 g/m2
(50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer)
50 sheets: 92 to 130 g/m2
40 sheets: 131 to 161 g/m2
25 sheets: 162 to 244 g/m2
Stapling position: 1 staple at the rear (45°), 1 staple at the front, and 2 staples at the center
C. Maximum number of sheets loadable
Main tray (Weighing 50 to 244 g/m2):
Straight/Shift
3,000 sheets : A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
1,500 sheets : A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8K
500 sheets : A5, A5R, B6R (straight only), 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R
Staple:
150 copies (2 to 9 sheets stapled)
Sub tray (Weighing 50 to 300 g/m2):
200 sheets : A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13,
8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x
8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x
460 mm)
1 -1
1.3 Type of paper

1.3.1 Staple
I Outline
A. Paper size
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)
B. Applicable paper
Plain paper, high-quality paper, book paper
C. Paper weight
Main tray: 50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2
1.4 Maintenance
Maintenance: Same as the main body
Machine service life: Same as the main body
1.5 Machine data

Power source: 24V/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption: 110 VA
Dimensions: When the main tray is pulled out: W 915 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm
When the main tray is set in: W 798 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm
When the main tray is removed: W 544 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm
Weight: 80 kg

1 -2
II MAINTENANCE
1. PERIODIC CHECK
Caution:
• Be sure to unplug the power cord.
II Maintenance
1.1.1 Stacker section
A. Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid
• Intermediate roller release solenoid: Every 5,250,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
[2]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] of the intermediate roller
release solenoid and then remove the cover 1 [2].
[1] fs503fs2057c

[2] [1]
wiring harness from the wire binding band [2].
fs503fs2058c
2 -1

[2]
2 [2].
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2059c
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the inter-

[2]
mediate roller solenoid [2].
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• Be sure to stop the intermediate roller sole-
noid at the center of the oblong hole. (See
Chapter III "1.1 A. Intermediate roller position
adjustment.")
[1] fs503fs2060c
2 -2
1.1.2 Stapler section

A. Replacing the stapler unit /Fr, /Rr
• Stapler unit /Fr: Every 3,000,000 prints (once for every 500,000 staples for actual replacement cycle)
• Stapler unit /Rr: Every 3,000,000 prints (once for every 500,000 staples for actual replacement cycle)
(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler unit
Caution:
• After moving the stapler, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
II Maintenance
• Be careful not to get your hand caught in the
[3] [4]
opening [1] of the stapler unit.
• Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch
side [3] may cause the opening [1] to close
[1] unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the
opening by hand once it has closed. So, take
care that the opening does not close.
• When holding the stapler unit, be sure to hold
[2]
it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
fs503fs2030c
1. Select 2 sheets A4 originals with 1-staple at the

[1] [2]
upper right corner, make a print and then move
the stapler to the stapling position.
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main
the power cord from the power outlet.
4. Remove the screw [2] of the wire [1].
fs503fs2029c
2 -3
5. Remove the stapler cartridges /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].

[3]
6. Remove the screws [3], one each, of the stop-
pers provided in front and rear and pull further
out the stacker unit.
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
[3] fs503fs2005c
2 -4
(3) Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit /Fr

1. Conduct "(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the
[2] [1]
stapler unit."
stacker entrance roller mounting plate /Fr [2].
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2031c

[2] [3]
ground [2] and the metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2032c
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the wire

[7] [6]
binding band [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and raise the lower section
of the stapler unit mounting plate [4] a little to
remove it from the notch [5]. And slide the upper
notch [6] to the lower side to release it from the
pin [7] and then remove the stapler unit /Fr [8]
together with the mounting plate [4].
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] fs503fs2033c
2 -5
(4) Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit /Rr

1. Conduct "(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the
[1] [2]
stapler unit."
NOTE
• The steps given below are the removal steps
using a short driver. When using a driver of a
regular length, removal of the stapler unit /Rr
is available only when the stapler unit /Fr has
been already removed. When using a regular
II Maintenance
length driver, be sure to remove the stapler

unit /Fr in advance by following the steps
given in "(3) Removing/reinstalling the stapler
unit /Fr."
[1] fs503fs2034c

stacker entrance roller mounting plate /Rr [2].

[2] [3]
ground [2] and the metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2035c
2 -6
4. Disconnect 2 connector [1] and remove the 2

[6] wire binding bands [2].
5. In the same procedure as the step 5 of the sta-
pler /Fr, remove the screw [3] and raise the lower
[2] portion of the stapler mounting plate [4] a little to
[1]
remove it from the notch [5]. And then, slide it to
the lower side and remove the stapler /Rr [6]
together with the mounting plate [4].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[4]
[3]
[5] 1050fs2036c
2 -7
(5) Replacing the stapler unit

1. Conduct the following operations:
[1]
• (2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler unit
• (3) Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit /Fr
• (4) Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit /Rr
2. Remove 3 screws [1] together with the stapler
units /Fr and Rr, and then remove the cut staple
duct [2].
II Maintenance
[2]
fs503fs2012c
3. Remove 4 screws [1] together with the stapler

[1] [3]
units /Fr and Rr, and then remove the bracket [3]
from the stapler [2].
NOTE
• Take note that the brackets for the stapler
units /Fr and /Rr are different in the position
[2]
where the wire binding band is attached.
fs503fs2013c
2 -8
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the sta-

[2]
pler guide block [2].

steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2063c
(6) Checking of the stapler guide seal
NOTE
• The pasting of the stapler guide seal is limited only to the stapler unit /Rr.
1. Conduct the following operations:

[1]
• (2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler unit
• (4) Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit /Rr
• (5) Replacing the stapler unit
2. The stapler guide seal [2] must be pasted on the
clincher side [1] of the new stapler unit /Rr.
NOTE
• Be sure to align the end line [3] on the
clincher side [1] with the bend line of the sta-
pler guide seal [2] and paste it with no slip-
page (tolerance: 0.5 mm).
• Be sure to check the guide seal to ensure it is
not damaged or soiled.
[3] [2] fs503fs2064c
2 -9
B. Replacing the staples

• Staple cartridge: Every 5,000 staples
(2) Procedure
2. Pull the stapler cartridge knob [1] in the arrow-
marked direction to remove it.
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2001c
3. Hold the knob [2] of the cover [1] and open it.
[2] [1]
4. Rotate and wind up carefully the remaining refill
staples [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and
take it out.
[3]
NOTE
• The refill staples are apt to break away. Be
[4] careful when handling them.
fs503fs2043c
2 -10
5. With the refill staples [1] set as shown in the

[2]
drawing, place them gently in the pocket [2] of
the stapler cartridge.
[1]
II Maintenance
fs503fs2044c
6. Feed the refill staples [1] by hand to the arrow-

[4]
marked direction [2] and get the tip of the refill
staples near to the stapling position [3].
NOTE
• New refill staples are attached with a lead
[2] sheet. The tip of the refill staples can be
pulled up to the stapling position by this lead
[1] sheet.
7. Close the cover [4].

steps in reverse.
[3] fs503fs2045c
C. Cleaning the cut staple box

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the cut staple
box [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
fs503fs2037c
2 -11

A. Replacing the paper exit roller
• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every 750,000 prints
Caution:
• After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
NOTE
II Maintenance
• When replacing the paper exit rollers /A (sponge roller), be sure to replace all 4 pairs of rollers (8
rollers in all).
(2) Procedure
1. Push up with your fingers the actuator [1] of the
[1] tray upper limit sensor (PS2) to lower the main
tray [2].
[2] fs503fs2002c
2 -12
3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller

[1] [1] and remove the sponge roller [1] by prizing it
open.
II Maintenance
fs503fs2003c
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new

sponge roller and the shaft brought together,
press the sponge roller until it clicks to fit it in
securely.
[1]
[1]
fs503fs2004c
2 -13

A. Removing paper dust
(1) Periodically cleaning cycle
• Paper dust removing brush: Every 750,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door.
[1]
2. Remove 2 paper dust removing brushes [1].
3. Clean the brush face.
II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
fs503fs2065c
2 -14
2. OTHERS
1 Cover Front cover 2-16
2 Sub tray 2-17
3 Upper cover /1 2-17
4 Upper cover /2 2-18
5 Left cover /Fr 2-18
II Maintenance
6 Rear cover 2-19
7 Stacker section Stacker unit 2-20
8 Main tray section Main tray 2-24
9 Up/down wire 2-26
10 Tray up down motor 2-31
11 Stapler section Handling of the clogged stapler 1 2-32
12 Handling of the clogged stapler 2 2-32
2 -15
Caution:
• Be sure to unplug the power cord.
2.2.1 Cover section

A. Removing/reinstalling the front door
1. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and
[2] [1]
then remove the wire [2] from the door.
II Maintenance
fs503fs2062c
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the door

support mounting plate [2] and the front door [3].
NOTE
• The front door is heavy. Support it securely
[1] when removing it.

steps in reverse.
[3] [2] fs503fs2046c
2 -16
B. Removing/reinstalling the sub tray

1. Rotate the sub tray [1] in the arrow-marked
[7]
direction [2] and remove the ball catch [3] from
the ball [4].
2. Press the front and rear sections of the sub tray
[1] in the arrow-marked direction [5] to make it
curve a little, and detach the attaching hole [6]
from the pin [7] to remove the sub tray [1].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs2047c
C. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /1

1. Remove the sub tray.
[1] [2]
cover /1 [2].
NOTE
• When the front door support section [3] is dif-
[3] [1] ficult to remove, slide the upper cover [2] a lit-
tle to the front side and remove it while lifting
it up.

fs503fs2048c
steps in reverse.
2 -17
D. Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /2

[1]
cover /2 [2].
steps in reverse.
[2]
II Maintenance
fs503fs2049c
E. Removing/reinstalling the left cover /Fr

2. Remove the screw [2], slant the upper section of
the left cover /Fr [3] and remove it while lifting it
up.
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2050c
2 -18
F. Removing/reinstalling the rear cover

1. Remove 5 screws [1] and the remove the rear
cover [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to hook the rear
cover to the 2 catches [3] provided at the
lower section.
II Maintenance
[2]
[3] [1]
fs503fs2051c
2 -19
2.2.2 Stacker section

A. Removing/reinstalling the stacker unit
Caution:
• Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.

[2] 2. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and
then remove the wire [2] of the door.
II Maintenance
[1]
fs503fs2039c

4. Remove each of the cables from the 4 wiring har-
ness guides [2].
5. Remove the E-ring [3] and the shaft [4] and cut
off the coupling arm [5].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2] [5]
fs503fs2040c
2 -20

[1]
vided on the rails in front and rear, pull the
stacker unit further out.
II Maintenance
[1] fs503fs2061c
2 -21
7. Remove the screws [1], one each, provided on

the rails in front and rear.
8. Lift up the stacker section [2] at the specified
positions [3], release the hook of the rail [4] from
the hole [6] and remove the stacker section [2].
[3]
Caution:
• Be careful of your posture when removing it.
And be sure to conduct this operation with 2
[1] people so that you do not suffer backache.
II Maintenance
NOTE
• When lifting up the stacker section, be sure to
hold it at the specified positions [3]. Holding
[6] other positions such as the roller shaft may
cause damage to these positions.
[5]
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the stacker section to the
[3] rail [4], be sure to check that the hooks [5]
provided at the 2 locations in front and rear, 4
locations in all, get into the attaching holes [6]
securely.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs2041c
2 -22
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, be sure to fully pull out
[3] the rail [1] and fasten it with the stopper
screw [2] tentatively. And then fix the rail in
the rear with tape [3] so that the rail does not
move and contract. Doing it like this allows
you to conduct the operation smoothly.
II Maintenance
[1] [2] fs503fs2042c
2 -23

A. Removing/reinstalling the main tray
Caution:
• After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body from the
power outlet.
1. Push the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit sen-

[1] sor (PS2) up with your fingers to lower the main
II Maintenance
tray [2].
outlet.
[2] fs503fs2016c
2 -24

[2]
4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up/down
stay [3], and remove the main tray [2].
steps in reverse.
II Maintenance
[3] [1] fs503fs2017c
2 -25
B. Removing/reinstalling the up/down wire
NOTE
• The following replacement procedure of the up/down wire shows the steps taken on the rear side.
The figuration and the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
• The brackets of the up/down wire are stamped with "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side.
Be careful not to confuse one with the other.
1. Push the actuator of the tray upper limit sensor

(PS2) up with your fingers to lower the main tray.
II Maintenance
[1] 2. Remove the following parts.

Main tray
Rear cover
[1] Left cover /Fr
Front door
3. Remove the screws [1], two each, and then
remove the tray stay covers /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[3] [2] fs503fs2038c
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 6 screws

[1] [2] and then remove the gear box [4] together
with the tray up down motor [3].
[3]
Caution:
• When the gear box is removed, the main tray
will fall down. So, be sure to support the tray
by hand when removing the gear box.
[4]
[2] fs503fs2018c
2 -26
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire

mounting plate [3] of the up/down wire /Rr [2]
from the up/down stay [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
II Maintenance
[3]
fs503fs2019c
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2020c
2 -27

[5] [2] and the up/down pulley /Lw [3] to remove the
up/down wire /Rr [4].
NOTE
[3] • When removing the gear [2] and the up/down
pulley [3], be careful that the pin [5] does not
come off and get lost.
[1] [2] [5]

II Maintenance
[4]
fs503fs2021c
8. Tentatively fasten the wire mounting plate [2] of

[3]
the new up/down wire /Rr [1] to the up/down
stay [3] with the 2 screws [4].
[4]
NOTE
• Be sure to install the up/down wires placing
[2] the shorter one below the longer one.
9. Fasten the new up/down wire /Rr [1] with the

wire end [6] of the up/down pulley /Lw [5] and
insert it into the shaft. And rotate the up/down
pulley /Lw [5] and wind it 6 turns clockwise from
[1] inside to outside around the up/down pulley /Lw
[5]
[5] with no slack, and then insert the up/down
pulley /Lw [5] fully deep into the shaft so that it
coincides with the pin [7].
[7]
[6] fs503fs2022c
2 -28
10. With the up/down wire /Rr [1] hooked to the up/
down pulley /Up [2], wind it 2 turns counterclock-
wise from inside to outside around the up/down
pulley /Lw [3] with no slack and then fasten it
with the wire end [4].
[2]
II Maintenance
[1]
[4]
[3]
fs503fs2023c
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft,
and fasten them with the E-ring [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2024c
2 -29
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull

the belt tensioner [1] with a specified force A and
[1] tighten it up 2 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5 ± 0.1 kg
[2]
II Maintenance
fs503fs2025c
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire mounting plate

[4] [5] [3] [2] [1]
[1] on the front side, press down the up/down
stay [3] to bring it to a horizontal position, and
tighten up 2 screws [5] of the wire mounting plate
[4] on the rear side and 2 screws [2] on the front
side, that is, 4 screws in all.
NOTE
• Check to see if the up/down stay [3] is kept in
a horizontal position. If it is on the slant, an
unnecessary load may be applied onto the
gear, thus causing damage to it.
[2]
[5] fs503fs2026c
steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the covers, be sure to rotate
the tray up/down motor counterclockwise as
seen from above to raise the up/down stay
about 12 cm before installing each cover.
Since the up/down stay comes down lower
than the normal operating range due to the
up/down gear box being removed, it is inevi-
tably necessary to raise the up/down stay to
install it without the left cover /Fr and the rear
cover hitting against the up/down stay.
2 -30
C. Removing/reinstalling the tray up down motor

[1] [3]
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws
[2] and then remove the tray up down motor [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the belt
[4] is set correctly to the gears [5] and [6].
II Maintenance
steps in reverse.
[2]
[4]
[6] [5]
fs503fs2027c
2 -31
2.2.4 Stapler section

A. Handling of clogged stapler 1
1. Remove the stapler cartridge.
NOTE
[1] • When the stapler cartridge cannot be
removed, conduct the initial operation by
turning ON and OFF the power switch (SW2)
[3]
of the main body.
[2] • When removal of the stapler cartridge is not
II Maintenance
possible even after the initial operation, con-

duct "B. Handling of clogged stapler 2."
fs503fs2052c
2. Press the release button [1] and open the staple

cover [2].
3. Remove the unnecessary staples [3].
4. Close the staple cover [2].
steps in reverse.
B. Handling of the clogged stapler 2
[3] [4] Caution:

• Be careful not to get your hand caught in the
opening [1] of the stapler unit. Pressing the
staple side [2] and/or the clinch side [3] may
[1] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly.
It is very difficult to open the opening by hand
once it has closed. So, be careful not to close
[2] it. When holding the stapler unit, be sure to
hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
• When conducting the operation, be sure to
wear protective gloves.
• When conducting the operation, be careful
fs503fs2053c not to get the glove and/or your hand caught
in the gear.
2 -32
1. Remove the stapler unit. (See "1.1.2 A. Replac-

[3] [2]
ing the stapler unit /Fr, /Rr.")
2. Remove 2 nuts [1] and then remove the clinch
protective plates /1 [2] and /2 [3].
[1]
II Maintenance
fs503fs2054c
3. Remove the clogged staples.

[3]
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, place the holes [2] of the
2 clinch metal fittings [1] one upon the other
[2] so that the tip [3] of the clinch presser is
[4] engaged to the depression [4] of the clinch
metal fitting.
[1]
fs503fs2055c
4. When the clogged staples cannot be removed,

rotate the gear [1] of the stapler motor shaft and
the gear [2] that comes into contact the motor
gear to open the opening [5] until the pin [3] at
the tip of the stapling arm comes to the bottom
[5]
[6] of the slit [4].
[4]
Caution:
[3] • Considerable force is required to rotate the gear.
Be sure to wear gloves not to get injured.
[2] [1] fs503fs2056c
NOTE
• The gear can be rotated in whichever direc-
tion is easiest.
5. Remove the stapler cartridge [6] and then remove the

unnecessary staples from the stapler cartridge. (See
"2.2.4 A. Handling of the clogged stapler 1.")
steps in reverse.
2 -33
2.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board

When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be
sure to remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old con-
trol board [1] and install it into the new control board
[2].
II Maintenance
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2077c
NOTE
A • Be sure to set the "A" sections of the
EEPROM (IC68) in the same direction for
installation.
A
fd501fs2078c
2 -34
1.1 Stacker section
A. Intermediate roller position adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when paper gets jammed in the intermediate roller in the stacker during paper convey-
ance.
[2] [1]
2. Remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1 each pro-
vided in front and rear, and pull further out the
stacker unit.
3. Check to see if the clearance between the
A
mounting plate [2] of the intermediate roller /Up
[1] and the intermediate roller /Lw [3] is at a stan-
dard value.
Standard value: A = 4.5 ± 0.5 mm
When the clearance is not at a standard value,
conduct step 4 and the succeeding steps for
adjustment.
4. Raise up the intermediate roller and insert a
[3] fs503fs3020c
thickness gauge of 4.5 mm between the mount-
ing plate [2] of the intermediate roller /Up [1] and
the intermediate roller /Lw [3].
NOTE
• Be careful not to let the thickness gauge drop
into the stacker. (Be sure to fix it with tape.)
• Make sure that there is no raised section
found in the thickness gauge so that the
clearance is to be accurate.
3 -1
5. Loosen the screw [1], slide the positioning plate

[2] to the lower side until it hits against the rotat-
ing lever [3], and tighten up the screw [1].
6. Remove the thickness gauge inserted in Step 4.
7. Conduct the measurement in the step 3. When
the value obtained is not the stipulated one,
repeat the steps 4 to 6.
[3] 8. After completion of adjustment, make a print and
check to see if a jam occurs.
steps in reverse.
[1] [2] fs503fs3021c
B. Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position

In the flat-stapling mode, adjustments are made when the distance from the edge of paper to the stapling posi-
tion is not within the standard value, or when it is on a slant.
NOTE
• When making adjustments, be sure not move the stapler by hand. (This may cause the teeth of the
belt and the gear to jump.)
1. Conduct the following in the output check of the

[1] [2]
I/O check mode in the service mode.
• 72-31 (Stapler movement motor home position
search)
• 72-78 (Alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home posi-
tion search)
• 72-42 (End stopper motor stopper release)
3. Open the front door and remove the screw [2] of
the wire [1].
fs503fs3008c
3 -2
4. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper

[1]
screws [1], one each, in front and rear and pull
the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3002c
3 -3
5. Loosen the screws [2], one each, of the 4 flat-

stapling stopper [1] and make adjustments of the
positions of the 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
NOTE
• With the paper [3] inserted, be sure to check
[4] to see if the paper is on a slant and that all of
the 4 flat-stapling stoppers are in contact with
the edge [4] of paper.
• When the stopper is not seen clearly, be sure
[3]
to adjust it after removing the guide plate
[1] assembly [5].
[5] [1] [3]
[2] fs503fs3009c
3 -4
6. Conduct flat-stapling to check to see if it is within

the standard value.
• Standard value: A = 9.5 ± 2mm
• The line [1] connecting the 2 staples is parallel to
the edge of paper.
7. When the value is not within the standard value
[1] or the line is not parallel to the edge of paper,
A
repeat the steps 1 to 6 above.
fs503fs3004c
steps in reverse.
3 -5
C. Adjusting the alignment plate position

Conduct this adjustment operation when the slippage in the bundle of paper while in stapling and the uneven
paper exit while in non-stapling cannot be adjusted by conducting "Stapling center position adjustment" and
"Paper width adjustment" in the service mode.
NOTE
• After completion of this adjustment, be sure to conduct "Stapling center position adjustment" and
"Paper width adjustment" in the service mode.
1. Conduct the alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home

[1] [2]
position movement in the output check 72-78 of
the I/O check mode in the service mode.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) of the
main body, and unplug the power cord of the
main body from the power outlet.
3. Open the front door and remove the screw [2] of
the wire [1].
fs503fs3010c
3 -6
4. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper

[1]
screws [1], one each, in front and rear and pull
the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3005c
3 -7
5. Loosen 2 screws [1] and check to see if the dis-

B A [2]
tance from the front side of the side plate [2] in
the rear to the paper side of the alignment plate /
Rr [3] is within the standard value A, and then
tighten the screws [1].
Standard value: A = 17.9 +1.0/ -0.0 mm
NOTE
• Check the alignment plate /Rr to see if it is on
a slant.
6. Loosen the 2 screws [4] and check to see if the

[3]
distance between the alignment plate /Rr [3] and
[5] [4] [1] fs503fs3006c
the inner face on the paper side of the alignment
plate /Fr [5] is within the standard value B, and
then tighten the screws [4].
Standard value: B = 376 0 mm
-0.5
NOTE
• Check the alignment plate /Fr to see if it is on
a slant.

steps in reverse.
3 -8

Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and
other optional devices.
1. Loosen the nuts [1] provided at the 4 places.

2. Rotate the screws [2] provided at the 4 places to
make horizontal adjustments of the device.
NOTE
• Be sure to make adjustments while taking
into consideration the heights of the main
body and other optional devices.
3. Rotate the screws [2] by hand provided at the 4

places to check to see if there is any caster that
is raised.
NOTE
• When there is any caster found raised, rotate
the screw [2] with a wrench to extend the
length of the caster until you can get a feeling
of secure contact.
4. Fasten the screw [2] with a wrench and tighten

[1]
up the nut [1].
NOTE
[2]
up with the screw [2] not fastened, the screw
[2] may also rotate together with the nut [1],
thus resulting in an incorrect positioning.
fs503fs3007c
3 -9
Blank page
3 -10
IC Unit
2004.10
Ver. 1.0
CONTENTS
I Outline
I OUTLINE
1.1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
II Maintenance
1.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Maintenance and Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.6 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II MAINTENANCE
1. SERVICE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 Overview of the Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1 Operating Environment of the Service Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2 Installing / Booting Up Hyper Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2 How to Use the Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1.2.1 Booting Up Service DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1.2.2 Memory Test Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2. FIRMWARE VERSION UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3.1 Overall Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
IV Troubleshooting
3.1.1 IC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3.1.2 HDD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3.1.3 Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3.2 Disassembly / Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3.2.1 Removal / Installation of IC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3.2.3 Removal / Installation of PostScript Protection Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3.2.4 Removal / Installation of System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3.2.5 Removal / Installation of IC Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
3.2.6 Removal / Installation of HDD Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
III ADJUSTMENT / SETTING

1. SERVICE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
IV TROUBLESHOOTING
1. TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 Troubleshooting of the print controller and copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
i
I Outline
II Maintenance
Blank Page
IV Troubleshooting
ii
I OUTLINE
I Outline
1.1 Type
Type: Built-in box type for the KONICA MINOLTA Printer/Copier
1.2 Functions
Resolution: Printing System: 600 x 600 dpi
Scanning Resolution: 200 dpi / 300 dpi/ 400 dpi / 600 dpi
Gradation: binary
Printable Area: PCLXL: 2.54mm (left, right, top and bottom without varia-
tion)
PCL5e: 4.23mm (left, right, top and bottom without varia-
tion)
PS: 2.84mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation)
314 x 460mm (The maximum paper size: 324 x 460mm)
No. of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: 105 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)
Printer Description Language: PCL (TIFF/PDF)
PostScript3 (TIFF/PDF) (Option)
Built-in fonts: Agfa Microtype fonts
Adobe PostScript Font (optional PS3 kit required)
Compliant OS: Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 (NT Service Pack 3 or more)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS 8.x - 9.x (optional PS3 kit required)
Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3 (optional PS3 kit required)
Printer Driver: Printer driver for Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
PS printer driver for Windows (optional PS3 kit required)
PS printer driver for Windows/Macintosh (optional PS3 kit
required)
Network Functions
Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPP, EtherTalk
Compliant OS (NOS): Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x-6), Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS 8.x - 9.x,
Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3
Multiple Protocols: Automatic selection
Printing Method: Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP for Windows 95/98/Me), Pserver
(IPX/SPX), lpd/lpr (TCP/IP for Windows NT 4.0/2000), lpd/
lpr (TCP/IP for UNIX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), NPrinter/
RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Port9100(TCP/IP)
Dedicated Utilities: Peer to Peer Printing Tool
Compliant Web Browser: Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer
1- 1
1.3 Paper
Paper Size: Same as copier
I Outline
Paper Type: Same as copier

Paper Weight: Same as copier
1.4 Maintenance and Life
Maintenance: Same as copier

Machine Service Life: Same as copier
1.5 Machine Data
CPU: Low Voltage Pentium III Tualatin 933 MHz

System Memory: 256 MB (Standard), Expandable up to 512 MB (Option:
EM-701)
Host Interface: Parallel port Centronics (IEEE 1284 / amphenol 36 pin male
connector)
Hard Disk Drive: EIDE drive 40 GB or more
Option: PS3 kit
Memory: (EM-701: 256 MB)
Power: Obtain from main body printer
Network Functions
Network Interface: Ethernet (100Base-TX / 10Base-T)
Frame Type: IEEE 802.3
Ethernet Connection: 100Base-TX / 10Base-T
Network Connector: RJ-45
LED: Green 2
1.6 Operating Environment

Temperature: Same as copier
Humidity: Same as copier
1-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 SERVICE TOOL
II MAINTENANCE
1. SERVICE TOOL
1.1 Overview of the Service Tool
The service tool enables the print controller to operate with a terminal communications program for a personal
computer (PC).
This print controller supports for input/output operations of a serial port of the print controller from when the
printer system BIOS boots up, thus making it possible to control the progress in initialization and system test (or
II Maintenance
POST: Power On Self Test) by BIOS, which assisting to determine where error conditions may exist when an
error develops at the system start time.
Also, memory check and boot up a service DOS by BIOS are available with the terminal commnication program.
1.1.1 Operating Environment of the Service Tool

The following is required to use the service tool.
• Computers running on Windows
• Hyper Terminal (terminal communications program)
Setting requirements
Bits/sec.: 9600 bits/sec.(fixed)

Data bit: 8 bits
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1
Flow control: None
• RS-232C serial cable (terminated in a female 9-pin D-Sub connector on both ends)
Pin assignment
PC Print Controller
1 DCD 1 DCD
2 TxD 2 TxD
3 RxD 3 RxD
4 DTR 4 DTR
5 4 3 2 1
5 GND 5 GND
6 DSR 6 DSR 9 8 7 6
7 RTS 7 RTS
8 CTS 8 CTS 9-Pin D-SUB Connector
9 RI 9 RI (female)
prn_1050_D_SUB_9
For information on installation and usage of Hyper Terminal, see the Windows manual and descriptions on the
following pages.
2- 1
SERVICE TOOL bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
1.1.2 Installing / Booting Up Hyper Terminal

Hyper Terminal is a terminal communications program which comes with Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP
as standard. If it is not installed in your Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0, it is necessary to install it.
Caution
• For Windows 2000/XP, it is installed by default. There is no need to install it.
• To install Hyper Terminal, the system program CD for the Windows PC in use is required.
• The procedure of setting up and booting up Hyper Terminal depends on the Windows version.
II Maintenance
A. To install Hyper Terminal

In the following, Windows 98 is used as an example.
1. Insert the CD containing OS of the Windows PC
in use into the CD drive.
2. Select [Start]-[Settings]-[Control Panel].
• A [Control Panel] window will appear.
3. Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].
• An [Add/Remove Programs Properties] window will
appear.
4. Click the [Windows Setup] tab, and check the
[Connection] check box under [Components].
5. Click the [Details] button.
• A [Communication] window will appear.
6. Check the [Hyper Terminal] check box, and click

the [OK] button.
7. When the [Add/Remove Programs] window
reopens, click the [OK] button.
• The necessary files are copied and the installation is
completed.
2-2
B. To Boot Up Hyper Terminal

In the following, Windows XP is used as an example.
1. Select [Start]-[All Programs]-[Accessories]-[Com-
munications]-[Hyper Terminal].
• A [Connection Description] window will appear.
NOTE
• Once a connection is made, an icon with the
name entered in the step 2 will be created. If
an icon has already been created (i.e., if the
II Maintenance
printer connection settings have already been
done), there is no need to complete the fol-
lowing steps because the connection with
Hyper Terminal is established by double-
clicking that icon.
2. Enter a name, and click the [OK] button.
3. Select [COM (1-3)] under [Connect using], then

click the [OK] button.
• A [Port Settings] window will appear.
4. Configure the port settings as shown on the left,

and click the [OK] button.
NOTE
• The serial port settings on the copier can not
be changed.
• Leaving all the settings at their defaults
except [Bits per second] and [Flow control] is
required.
2- 3
SERVICE TOOL bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
1.2 How to Use the Service Tool

The print controller carries DOS (Embedded DOS) along with the BIOS program on a flash ROM. This DOS
allows the print controller system to be recovered.
1.2.1 Booting Up Service DOS

1. Turn the copier’s main power switch (SW1) OFF.
2. Connect an RS-232C serial cable between the
PC and the print controller.
3. Boot Hyper Terminal. (See “1.1.2 Installing /
Booting Up Hyper Terminal”.)
II Maintenance
4. While pressing the [k] key, turn the copier’s main

power switch (SW1) ON (i.e., boot up the print
controller).
5. The message “Press [a] or [s]” appears (7 sec-
onds or less). Enter the [a] key.
• The DOS is boot up.
NOTE
• Do not press the [s] key because it is entry for
production purpose.
• If you do not press any key for 7 seconds, it
boots normally.
6. When the message “Enter new data (mm-dd-

yy):” appears, enter the current date (ex: 10-01-
2004) and press the Enter key.
7. When the message “Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):”
appears, enter the current time (ex: 18:14:20)
and press the Enter key.
• Now DOS commands are available for use.
NOTE
• Although the printer system (VxWorks)
acquires time information from the copier, the
service DOS has no way of communicating
with the copier: it is necessary to enter the
current date and time.
2-4
1.2.2 Memory Test Methods

The memory test needs to be conducted if, after in the cases such as an unstable operation is observed after
the memory was expanded or a faulty memory size is detected.
The memory test includes a normal memory test and a detailed memory test.
The normal memory test is a test conducted upon normal powering up.
The normal memory test includes the following:
In memory area of lower than 64 KB: Data read/write test, address test, and data test over the
entire memory area.
II Maintenance
Caution
• The detailed memory test is a test conducted over the entire memory area with a operation from
the service port.
The detailed memory test includes the following:
In memory area of lower than 64 KB: Data read/write test, address test, and data test over the
entire memory area.
In memory area of higher than 64 KB: Data read/write test in 64 KB units.
A. Memory Test Procedure

1. Boot Service DOS. (See “1.2.1 Booting Up Ser-
vice DOS”.)
2. While pressing the [m] key, turn the copier’s main
power switch (SW1) ON.
• The detailed memory test is conducted.
3. Make certain that all memory tests found no

problems (“Memory Passed” is displayed).
NOTE
• When all memory is OK, the copier is able to
normally start up.
4. Turn the copier’s main power switch (SW1) OFF.

5. Unplug the serial cable.
6. Turn the copier back ON to check if it behaves
normally.
7. If any test results are faulty (The message “Criti-
cal Error is displayed”. Or, the value after the indi-
cation of “Ext. Memory Passed” is less than the
expanded memory capacity.), remove the added
memory, and run the memory test from the
beginning.
2- 5
2. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
Rewriting firmware (system software) enables the system to be upgraded the version without replacing the
board. Also, even in case the print controller’s firmware is damaged in its software and becomes inoperative,
rewriting firmware may restore it.
Firmware’s version is upgraded by ISW.

See “3. FIRMWARE VERSION UP” in the Field Service for the main body chapter II.
II Maintenance
2-6
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY
3.1 Overall Construction
3.1.1 IC Unit
II Maintenance
Board Cover
Parallel Cable IC Cooling

Fan (FM24)
Memory
PostScript
Protection Kit
IC Board (ICB)
IDE Cable
prn_1050fig18
Caution
• The CPU cannot be removed from the system board. To replace the CPU, the IC board (ICB) needs
to be replaced.
2- 7
DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
3.1.2 HDD Unit
Rubber Insert
II Maintenance
Earth Plate
Earth Plate
Hard Disk Mounting Bracket
Hard Disk/2 (HDD2)
prn_1050fig26
2-8
3.1.3 Tools Required

• Standard screwdriver
• Spanner or needle-nose pliers
• PLCC pull-out tool
Caution
• Be sure to unplug the power cable, not only to turn the copier off, before attempting to make ser-
vicing.
• Do not make service for the IC Unit and the HDD with the conditon that they are installed to the
copier.
II Maintenance
Caution
• Before engaging in Disassembly/Reassembly, check to make sure that all the cables are
unplugged from the IC unit.
• DO NOT use magnetized tools in Disassembly/Reassembly to prevent the hard disk from being
affected.
• There may be occasions when boards are damaged if no appropriate grounding measures are
taken. Wear a wrist strap or others during servicing.
• Disassembly/Reassembly should be made on cushioning materials.
2- 9
3.2 Disassembly / Reassembly
Caution
• Assembly should be made in reverse order of disassembly unless otherwise noted.
3.2.1 Removal / Installation of IC Unit
1. Turn the copier’s main power switch (SW1) OFF,

and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
II Maintenance
[1] 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the back

board.
[1]
[1] [1]
prn_1050fig01
3. Remove the network cable [2] and parallel cable

[3] from the IC Unit.
[3]
[2]
prn_1050fig25
2-10
4. Unplug the cable [4] from the HDD Unit.
NOTE
• Lift a transparent film when unplugging the
cable.
[4]
II Maintenance
prn_1050fig02
5. Remove six screws (large) [5].
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5] [5]
prn_1050fig03
2-11
6. Remove the IC Unit from the copier.

7. Assembly should be made in reverse order from
disassembly.
[6] [7]
NOTE
• When assembling, fit the copier’s pin [6] to
the IC Unit’s pinhole [7], and insert the PCI
connector securely.
II Maintenance
prn_1050fig04
2-12
3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory

About combinations of memory expansion, see “1.2.1 Memory” of Theory of Operation section.
1. Remove the IC Unit. (See “3.2.1 Removal / Instal-

lation of IC Unit”.)
[1] 2. Remove twenty screws [1].
[1]
II Maintenance
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
[1] [1]
prn_1050fig06
3. Remove the board cover [2].
[2]
prn_1050fig07
4. Press the memory slot’s tab [3] outward to

remove the memory.
[3]
disassembly.
NOTE
• When assembling, fit the memory to the notch
of the memory slot.
[3]
prn_1050fig10
2-13
3.2.3 Removal / Installation of PostScript Protection Kit

The PostScript protection kit is mounted only in a print controller equipped with PostScript option, a PostScript
option.
Normally, there is no need to remove/reinstall the PostScript protection kit. However, it should be removed and
reinstalled when replacing the system board.
Caution
• The PostScript protection kit is sensitive to static electricity. Handle it with care.

II Maintenance
2. Remove thirteen screws and board cover. (See
“3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory”.)
3. Remove the PostScript protection kit [1] using a
[3] [1] PLCC pull-out tool such as shown below.
disassembly.
NOTE
• Make sure that the circle [3] on the PostScript
protection kit faces the triangle [2] on the sys-
tem board.
PLCC pull-out Tool
[2]
prn_1050fig09
2-14
3.2.4 Removal / Installation of System Board

2. Remove twenty screws and board cover. (See
3. Unplug the parallel cable [2] and the IDE cable [3]
from the system board [1].
II Maintenance
[1] [2]
prn_1050fig13
NOTE
• Lift a transparent film when unplugging the
IDE cable [3].
[3]
prn_1050fig12
2-15
4. Remove two setscrews [4] for the connector.

II Maintenance
[4]
prn_1050fig15
5. Remove two screws [5] for the compact flash

cover and remove the compact flash [6].
[5]
prn_1050fig16
[6]
prn_1050fig17
2-16
[7] 6. Remove ten screws [7] from the system board,

then remove the system board.
NOTE
• When disassembling, be careful not to dam-
[7] age the board and the connector.
[7]

disassembly.
II Maintenance
[7] prn_1050fig19
2-17
3.2.5 Removal / Installation of IC Cooling Fan
Caution
• The CPU cannot be removed from the system board. To replace the CPU, the system board needs
to be replaced.

2. Remove twenty screws and board cover. (See
II Maintenance
3. Remove the system board. (See “3.2.4 Removal

/ Installation of System Board”)
4. Remove the DC connector [2] of the IC cooling
fan (FM24) [1] from the system board.
[1] [2]
prn_1050fig11
5. Romove two screws [3] on the backside of the

[3]
system board and remove the IC cooling fan
(FM24).
disassembly.
prn_1050fig27
2-18
3.2.6 Removal / Installation of HDD Unit

When replacing the hard disk, be sure to use one that is designated as spark parts for the print controller.
Caution
• The use of any other hard disks is not allowed.
• Do not change settings for the jumper.
1. Unplug the power cable [1] of the HDD Unit.

2. Remove the IC Unit.
II Maintenance
(See “3.2.1 Removal / Installation of IC Unit”.)
[1]
prn_1050fig21
3. Remove the four screws (TP screws) [2].
[2]
[2]
prn_1050fig22
2-19
4. Slide the HDD Unit [3] upward and remove the

HDD Unit from the copier.
[3]
II Maintenance
prn_1050fig23
5. Remove four setscrews [4] for the hard disk and

remove the hard disk/2 (HDD2) [5] from the hard
[4]
[7] disk holder [6].
Earth Plate
NOTE
• Do not remove the supporting rubber [7] of
the hard disk holder [6].
Earth Plate
[6]
disassembly.
[4]
NOTE
• When fixing the hard disk on the hard disk
holder, be cautious that the screw tightening
torque T=0.4-0.5(Nm) and the supporting rub-
ber [7] neither ride up nor run on.
[5]
prn_1050fig24
2-20
III ADJUSTMENT / SETTING
1. SERVICE MODE
In the service mode, various adjustments / settings are available.
See chapter III “4. SERVICE MODE” in Field Service for the main body.
3- 1
Blank Page
3-2
bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0 TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM
IV TROUBLESHOOTING
1. TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM

This table lists information about the symptoms, possible causes, and remedies for problems that may occur
with the printing system (combination of the print controller and copier). It is intended to help engineers find
information as quickly as possible, and provide basic solutions.
Caution
• See the “Copier Service Manual” for information about Error Cord List.
1.1 Troubleshooting of the print controller and copier
Symptoms Causes Actions

[Printer basic mode] screen does not No power supply to the Check if the print controller is con-
appear on the copier’s display after main print controller. nected with the copier properly.
power-on.
“Warming up” does not disappear. Copier is in trouble. Locate the cause of trouble of the
copier.
“Initialization” does not disappear on the The print controller has not See the column of “Print controller
copier screen. started properly. does not start”.
Printout is defective, or nothing can be The system board or some Put the copier in service mode and per-
printed. boards of the copier are form test. If it operates properly, system
defective. board may be failure.
Print controller does not start. The system board is inac- Check the connector of the controller
tive. board. Replace the system board as
IV Troubleshooting
necessary.
Software of the print con- Reinstall the software of the print con-
troller is defective. troller.
Test print can be produced but not from The parallel port has Check the cables (internal/external).
the parallel port. something wrong or the Perform test using a data generator or
cable is wrong or, the a well-proven PC/I/O cable. Replace
problem is on the com- the system board as necessary.
puter side.
With the standard printer language PCL, PostScript3 Protection Kit Reinsert PostScript3 Protection Kit. If
correct outputs are produced, but with is not correctly installed. the problem still occurs, replace
PostScript3 even PS Demo Page cannot PostScript3 Protection Kit with a new
be printed out at all. one.
Test print can be produced and all ports Some software error has Print controller’s software or application
are good, but user jobs cannot be printed. happened. program has something wrong. Save
the file, which failed to be printed, in the
disk and analyze the problem by suit-
able means.
4- 1
TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Field Service Ver.1.0
Blank Page
IV Troubleshooting
4-2

Bizhub Pro 1050 Field Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub Pro 1050 Field Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub Pro 1050 Field Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL Field Service

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.

:Direction when using the copier.

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

2. POWER PLUG SELECTION

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

3. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

Power Plug and Cord

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Prohibited Installation Place

When not using product for a long time

Inspection before Servicing

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

Work Performed with the product Powered

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

Handling of Service Materials

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

For metric area:

This product employs a Class

This area generates high votage. Be

For inch area:

This product employs a Class

This area generates high votage. Be

This product employs a Class

1.5.6 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

1.5.9 Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138

2.4.2 Operating environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183

3.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190

3.2.3 Major functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211

4.1.3 Writing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227

4.4 Commercially available parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280

4.5 Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

4.9.1 Software DIPSW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97

4.9.4 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115

4.11.6 Mail address setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128

4.11.13 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133

4.13.5 Stacker adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145

5.1 Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150

6.2.2 The front and back registration (scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165

2004/10 1.0 — Issue of the first edition

Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:

<Theory of Operation section>